Enterasys SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide 9034313 07 Sflow

User Manual: SECURESTACK 9034313-07

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 872

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Enterasys® SecureStack™ C3
Stackable Switches

Configuration Guide
Firmware Version 6.03.xx.xxxx

P/N 9034313-07

Notice
Enterasys Networks reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document and
its web site without prior notice. The reader should in all cases consult Enterasys Networks to determine whether any such
changes have been made.
The hardware, firmware, or software described in this document is subject to change without notice.
IN NO EVENT SHALL ENTERASYS NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS) ARISING OUT OF
OR RELATED TO THIS DOCUMENT, WEB SITE, OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THEM, EVEN IF ENTERASYS
NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF, THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
Enterasys Networks, Inc.
50 Minuteman Road
Andover, MA 01810
© 2009 Enterasys Networks, Inc. All rights reserved.
Part Number: 9034313‐07 June 2009
ENTERASYS, ENTERASYS NETWORKS, ENTERASYS SECURE NETWORKS, SECURESTACK, ENTERASYS
SECURESTACK, ENTERASYS NETSIGHT, WEBVIEW, and any logos associated therewith, are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Enterasys Networks, Inc. in the United States and other countries. For a complete list of Enterasys trademarks,
see http://www.enterasys.com/company/trademarks.aspx.
All other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Documentation URL: http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals
Documentacion URL: http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals
Dokumentation im Internet: http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals

Version:

Information in this guide refers to SecureStack C3 firmware version 6.03.xx.xxxx
or higher.

i

Enterasys Networks, Inc. Firmware License Agreement
BEFORE OPENING OR UTILIZING THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT,
CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
This document is an agreement (“Agreement”) between the end user (“You”) and Enterasys Networks, Inc., on behalf
of itself and its Affiliates (as hereinafter defined) (“Enterasys”) that sets forth Your rights and obligations with respect
to the Enterasys software program/firmware (including any accompanying documentation, hardware or media)
(“Program”) in the package and prevails over any additional, conflicting or inconsistent terms and conditions
appearing on any purchase order or other document submitted by You. “Affiliate” means any person, partnership,
corporation, limited liability company, other form of enterprise that directly or indirectly through one or more
intermediaries, controls, or is controlled by, or is under common control with the party specified. This Agreement
constitutes the entire understanding between the parties, with respect to the subject matter of this Agreement. The
Program may be contained in firmware, chips or other media.
BY INSTALLING OR OTHERWISE USING THE PROGRAM, YOU REPRESENT THAT YOU ARE AUTHORIZED TO
ACCEPT THESE TERMS ON BEHALF OF THE END USER (IF THE END USER IS AN ENTITY ON WHOSE BEHALF
YOU ARE AUTHORIZED TO ACT, “YOU” AND “YOUR” SHALL BE DEEMED TO REFER TO SUCH ENTITY) AND
THAT YOU AGREE THAT YOU ARE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, WHICH INCLUDES,
AMONG OTHER PROVISIONS, THE LICENSE, THE DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY AND THE LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT OR ARE NOT AUTHORIZED TO
ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT, ENTERASYS IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE PROGRAM TO YOU AND YOU
AGREE TO RETURN THE UNOPENED PRODUCT TO ENTERASYS OR YOUR DEALER, IF ANY, WITHIN TEN
(10) DAYS FOLLOWING THE DATE OF RECEIPT FOR A FULL REFUND.
IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS ABOUT THIS AGREEMENT, CONTACT ENTERASYS NETWORKS, LEGAL
DEPARTMENT AT (978) 684‐1000.
You and Enterasys agree as follows:
1. LICENSE. You have the non‐exclusive and non‐transferable right to use only the one (1) copy of the Program
provided in this package subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
2. RESTRICTIONS. Except as otherwise authorized in writing by Enterasys, You may not, nor may You permit any
third party to:
(a) Reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or modify the Program, in whole or in part, including for reasons
of error correction or interoperability, except to the extent expressly permitted by applicable law and to the
extent the parties shall not be permitted by that applicable law, such rights are expressly excluded.
Information necessary to achieve interoperability or correct errors is available from Enterasys upon request
and upon payment of Enterasys’ applicable fee.
(b) Incorporate the Program in whole or in part, in any other product or create derivative works based on the
Program, in whole or in part.
(c) Publish, disclose, copy reproduce or transmit the Program, in whole or in part.
(d) Assign, sell, license, sublicense, rent, lease, encumber by way of security interest, pledge or otherwise transfer
the Program, in whole or in part.
(e) Remove any copyright, trademark, proprietary rights, disclaimer or warning notice included on or embedded
in any part of the Program.
3. APPLICABLE LAW. This Agreement shall be interpreted and governed under the laws and in the state and
federal courts of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts without regard to its conflicts of laws provisions. You accept the
personal jurisdiction and venue of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts courts. None of the 1980 United Nations
Convention on the Limitation Period in the International Sale of Goods, and the Uniform Computer Information
Transactions Act shall apply to this Agreement.
4. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You understand that Enterasys and its Affiliates are subject to regulation by agencies
of the U.S. Government, including the U.S. Department of Commerce, which prohibit export or diversion of certain
technical products to certain countries, unless a license to export the product is obtained from the U.S. Government or
an exception from obtaining such license may be relied upon by the exporting party.
If the Program is exported from the United States pursuant to the License Exception CIV under the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, You agree that You are a civil end user of the Program and agree that You will use the
Program for civil end uses only and not for military purposes.

ii

If the Program is exported from the United States pursuant to the License Exception TSR under the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, in addition to the restriction on transfer set forth in Section 1 or 2 of this Agreement, You
agree not to (i) reexport or release the Program, the source code for the Program or technology to a national of a
country in Country Groups D:1 or E:2 (Albania, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Cambodia, Cuba, Georgia, Iraq,
Kazakhstan, Laos, Libya, Macau, Moldova, Mongolia, North Korea, the People’s Republic of China, Russia, Tajikistan,
Turkmenistan, Ukraine, Uzbekistan, Vietnam, or such other countries as may be designated by the United States
Government), (ii) export to Country Groups D:1 or E:2 (as defined herein) the direct product of the Program or the
technology, if such foreign produced direct product is subject to national security controls as identified on the U.S.
Commerce Control List, or (iii) if the direct product of the technology is a complete plant or any major component of a
plant, export to Country Groups D:1 or E:2 the direct product of the plant or a major component thereof, if such
foreign produced direct product is subject to national security controls as identified on the U.S. Commerce Control
List or is subject to State Department controls under the U.S. Munitions List.
5. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The enclosed Program (i) was developed solely at
private expense; (ii) contains “restricted computer software” submitted with restricted rights in accordance with section
52.227‐19 (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software‐Restricted Rights Clause and its successors, and (iii) in
all respects is proprietary data belonging to Enterasys and/or its suppliers. For Department of Defense units, the
Program is considered commercial computer software in accordance with DFARS section 227.7202‐3 and its successors,
and use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions set forth herein.
6. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. EXCEPT FOR THOSE WARRANTIES EXPRESSLY PROVIDED TO YOU IN
WRITING BY ENTERASYS, ENTERASYS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON‐INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE
PROGRAM. IF IMPLIED WARRANTIES MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THEN ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THIRTY (30) DAYS AFTER DELIVERY OF THE PROGRAM TO
YOU.
7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT SHALL ENTERASYS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS,
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, OR RELIANCE DAMAGES, OR OTHER LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM, EVEN IF ENTERASYS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THIS FOREGOING LIMITATION SHALL APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE CAUSE OF ACTION UNDER WHICH
DAMAGES ARE SOUGHT.
THE CUMULATIVE LIABILITY OF ENTERASYS TO YOU FOR ALL CLAIMS RELATING TO THE PROGRAM,
IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE TOTAL AMOUNT OF FEES PAID TO
ENTERASYS BY YOU FOR THE RIGHTS GRANTED HEREIN.
8. AUDIT RIGHTS. You hereby acknowledge that the intellectual property rights associated with the Program are
of critical value to Enterasys, and, accordingly, You hereby agree to maintain complete books, records and accounts
showing (i) license fees due and paid, and (ii) the use, copying and deployment of the Program. You also grant to
Enterasys and its authorized representatives, upon reasonable notice, the right to audit and examine during Your
normal business hours, Your books, records, accounts and hardware devices upon which the Program may be deployed
to verify compliance with this Agreement, including the verification of the license fees due and paid Enterasys and the
use, copying and deployment of the Program. Enterasys’ right of examination shall be exercised reasonably, in good
faith and in a manner calculated to not unreasonably interfere with Your business. In the event such audit discovers
non‐compliance with this Agreement, including copies of the Program made, used or deployed in breach of this
Agreement, You shall promptly pay to Enterasys the appropriate license fees. Enterasys reserves the right, to be
exercised in its sole discretion and without prior notice, to terminate this license, effective immediately, for failure to
comply with this Agreement. Upon any such termination, You shall immediately cease all use of the Program and shall
return to Enterasys the Program and all copies of the Program.
9. OWNERSHIP. This is a license agreement and not an agreement for sale. You acknowledge and agree that the
Program constitutes trade secrets and/or copyrighted material of Enterasys and/or its suppliers. You agree to
implement reasonable security measures to protect such trade secrets and copyrighted material. All right, title and
interest in and to the Program shall remain with Enterasys and/or its suppliers. All rights not specifically granted to
You shall be reserved to Enterasys.

iii

10. ENFORCEMENT. You acknowledge and agree that any breach of Sections 2, 4, or 9 of this Agreement by You may
cause Enterasys irreparable damage for which recovery of money damages would be inadequate, and that Enterasys
may be entitled to seek timely injunctive relief to protect Enterasys’ rights under this Agreement in addition to any and
all remedies available at law.
11. ASSIGNMENT. You may not assign, transfer or sublicense this Agreement or any of Your rights or obligations
under this Agreement, except that You may assign this Agreement to any person or entity which acquires substantially
all of Your stock assets. Enterasys may assign this Agreement in its sole discretion. This Agreement shall be binding
upon and inure to the benefit of the parties, their legal representatives, permitted transferees, successors and assigns as
permitted by this Agreement. Any attempted assignment, transfer or sublicense in violation of the terms of this
Agreement shall be void and a breach of this Agreement.
12. WAIVER. A waiver by Enterasys of a breach of any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement must be in
writing and will not be construed as a waiver of any subsequent breach of such term or condition. Enterasys’ failure to
enforce a term upon Your breach of such term shall not be construed as a waiver of Your breach or prevent enforcement
on any other occasion.
13. SEVERABILITY. In the event any provision of this Agreement is found to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the
validity, legality and enforceability of any of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or impaired
thereby, and that provision shall be reformed, construed and enforced to the maximum extent permissible. Any such
invalidity, illegality, or unenforceability in any jurisdiction shall not invalidate or render illegal or unenforceable such
provision in any other jurisdiction.
14. TERMINATION. Enterasys may terminate this Agreement immediately upon Your breach of any of the terms
and conditions of this Agreement. Upon any such termination, You shall immediately cease all use of the Program and
shall return to Enterasys the Program and all copies of the Program.

iv

Contents
About This Guide
Using This Guide ..........................................................................................................................................xxxiii
Structure of This Guide .................................................................................................................................xxxiii
Related Documents ...................................................................................................................................... xxxv
Conventions Used in This Guide ................................................................................................................. xxxvi
Getting Help .................................................................................................................................................xxxvii

Chapter 1: Introduction
SecureStack C3 CLI Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1-1
Switch Management Methods ........................................................................................................................ 1-1
Factory Default Settings ................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Using the Command Line Interface ................................................................................................................ 1-6
Starting a CLI Session ............................................................................................................................. 1-6
Logging In ................................................................................................................................................ 1-7
Navigating the Command Line Interface .................................................................................................. 1-8

Chapter 2: Configuring Switches in a Stack
About SecureStack C3 Switch Operation in a Stack ...................................................................................... 2-1
Installing a New Stackable System of Up to Eight Units ................................................................................ 2-2
Installing Previously-Configured Systems in a Stack ..................................................................................... 2-3
Adding a New Unit to an Existing Stack ......................................................................................................... 2-3
Creating a Virtual Switch Configuration .......................................................................................................... 2-3
Considerations About Using Clear Config in a Stack ..................................................................................... 2-5
Issues Related to Mixed Type Stacks ............................................................................................................ 2-5
Feature Support ....................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Configuration ............................................................................................................................................ 2-5
Stacking Configuration and Management Commands ................................................................................... 2-6
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 2-6
show switch ........................................................................................................................................ 2-6
show switch switchtype ...................................................................................................................... 2-7
show switch stack-ports...................................................................................................................... 2-8
set switch ............................................................................................................................................ 2-9
set switch copy-fw ............................................................................................................................ 2-10
set switch description ....................................................................................................................... 2-10
set switch movemanagement ........................................................................................................... 2-11
set switch member............................................................................................................................ 2-11
clear switch member......................................................................................................................... 2-12

Chapter 3: Basic Configuration
Quick Start Setup Commands ........................................................................................................................ 3-1
Setting User Accounts and Passwords .......................................................................................................... 3-2
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 3-2
show system login .............................................................................................................................. 3-3
set system login .................................................................................................................................. 3-4
clear system login ............................................................................................................................... 3-4
set password ...................................................................................................................................... 3-5
set system password length ............................................................................................................... 3-6
set system password aging ................................................................................................................3-6

v

set system password history .............................................................................................................. 3-7
show system lockout .......................................................................................................................... 3-7
set system lockout .............................................................................................................................. 3-8
Setting Basic Switch Properties ...................................................................................................................... 3-9
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 3-9
show ip address................................................................................................................................ 3-10
set ip address ................................................................................................................................... 3-11
clear ip address ................................................................................................................................ 3-11
show ip protocol................................................................................................................................ 3-12
set ip protocol ................................................................................................................................... 3-12
show system..................................................................................................................................... 3-13
show system hardware..................................................................................................................... 3-14
show system utilization..................................................................................................................... 3-15
set system utilization ........................................................................................................................ 3-16
clear system utilization ..................................................................................................................... 3-17
show system enhancedbuffermode .................................................................................................. 3-17
set system enhancedbuffermode ..................................................................................................... 3-18
set system temperature .................................................................................................................... 3-18
clear system temperature ................................................................................................................. 3-19
show time ......................................................................................................................................... 3-20
set time ............................................................................................................................................. 3-20
show summertime ............................................................................................................................ 3-21
set summertime ................................................................................................................................ 3-22
set summertime date ........................................................................................................................ 3-22
set summertime recurring ................................................................................................................. 3-23
clear summertime ............................................................................................................................. 3-24
set prompt......................................................................................................................................... 3-24
show banner motd ............................................................................................................................ 3-25
set banner motd................................................................................................................................ 3-25
clear banner motd............................................................................................................................. 3-26
show version..................................................................................................................................... 3-26
set system name .............................................................................................................................. 3-27
set system location ........................................................................................................................... 3-28
set system contact............................................................................................................................ 3-28
set width ........................................................................................................................................... 3-29
set length .......................................................................................................................................... 3-29
show logout ...................................................................................................................................... 3-30
set logout ......................................................................................................................................... 3-30
show console .................................................................................................................................... 3-31
set console baud .............................................................................................................................. 3-31
Downloading a Firmware Image ................................................................................................................... 3-32
Downloading from a TFTP Server .......................................................................................................... 3-32
Downloading via the Serial Port ............................................................................................................. 3-32
Reverting to a Previous Image ............................................................................................................... 3-34
Reviewing and Selecting a Boot Firmware Image ........................................................................................ 3-35
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-35
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-35
show boot system ............................................................................................................................. 3-35
set boot system ................................................................................................................................ 3-36
Starting and Configuring Telnet .................................................................................................................... 3-37
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-37
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-37
show telnet ....................................................................................................................................... 3-37
set telnet ........................................................................................................................................... 3-37
telnet................................................................................................................................................. 3-38
vi

Managing Switch Configuration and Files .................................................................................................... 3-39
Configuration Persistence Mode ............................................................................................................ 3-39
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-39
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-39
show snmp persistmode ................................................................................................................... 3-40
set snmp persistmode ...................................................................................................................... 3-40
save config ....................................................................................................................................... 3-41
dir...................................................................................................................................................... 3-41
show file............................................................................................................................................ 3-42
show config....................................................................................................................................... 3-43
configure ........................................................................................................................................... 3-44
copy .................................................................................................................................................. 3-45
delete................................................................................................................................................ 3-46
show tftp settings.............................................................................................................................. 3-46
set tftp timeout .................................................................................................................................. 3-47
clear tftp timeout ............................................................................................................................... 3-47
set tftp retry....................................................................................................................................... 3-48
clear tftp retry.................................................................................................................................... 3-48
Clearing and Closing the CLI ........................................................................................................................ 3-49
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-49
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-49
cls (clear screen) .............................................................................................................................. 3-49
exit .................................................................................................................................................... 3-50
Resetting the Switch ..................................................................................................................................... 3-50
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-50
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-50
reset.................................................................................................................................................. 3-50
clear config ....................................................................................................................................... 3-51
Using and Configuring WebView .................................................................................................................. 3-52
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-52
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-52
show webview .................................................................................................................................. 3-52
set webview ...................................................................................................................................... 3-53
show ssl............................................................................................................................................ 3-53
set ssl ............................................................................................................................................... 3-54
Gathering Technical Support Information ..................................................................................................... 3-55
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-55
Command ............................................................................................................................................... 3-55
show support .................................................................................................................................... 3-55
Configuring Hostprotect ................................................................................................................................ 3-56
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 3-56
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 3-56
show system hostprotect .................................................................................................................. 3-56
set system hostprotect...................................................................................................................... 3-56
clear system hostprotect................................................................................................................... 3-57

Chapter 4: Activating Licensed Features
License Key Field Descriptions ...................................................................................................................... 4-1
Licensing Procedure in a Stack Environment ................................................................................................. 4-1
Adding a New Member to a Licensed Stack ............................................................................................ 4-2
Clearing, Showing, and Applying Licenses .................................................................................................... 4-2
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 4-2
set license........................................................................................................................................... 4-3
show license ....................................................................................................................................... 4-4
clear license........................................................................................................................................ 4-4

vii

Chapter 5: Configuring System Power and PoE
Commands ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
show inlinepower ................................................................................................................................ 5-1
set inlinepower threshold.................................................................................................................... 5-2
set inlinepower trap ............................................................................................................................ 5-3
set inlinepower detectionmode ........................................................................................................... 5-3
show port inlinepower ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
set port inlinepower ............................................................................................................................ 5-5

Chapter 6: Discovery Protocol Configuration
Configuring CDP ............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 6-1
show cdp ............................................................................................................................................ 6-2
set cdp state ....................................................................................................................................... 6-3
set cdp auth ........................................................................................................................................ 6-4
set cdp interval ................................................................................................................................... 6-4
set cdp hold-time ................................................................................................................................ 6-5
clear cdp ............................................................................................................................................. 6-5
show neighbors .................................................................................................................................. 6-6
Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol ............................................................................................................ 6-7
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 6-7
show ciscodp ...................................................................................................................................... 6-7
show ciscodp port info ........................................................................................................................ 6-8
set ciscodp status ............................................................................................................................... 6-9
set ciscodp timer................................................................................................................................. 6-9
set ciscodp holdtime ......................................................................................................................... 6-10
set ciscodp port ................................................................................................................................ 6-10
clear ciscodp..................................................................................................................................... 6-12
Configuring Link Layer Discovery Protocol and LLDP-MED ........................................................................ 6-13
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 6-13
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 6-13
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 6-14
Configuration Tasks ............................................................................................................................... 6-14
show lldp........................................................................................................................................... 6-15
show lldp port status......................................................................................................................... 6-16
show lldp port trap ............................................................................................................................ 6-16
show lldp port tx-tlv........................................................................................................................... 6-17
show lldp port location-info ............................................................................................................... 6-17
show lldp port local-info .................................................................................................................... 6-18
show lldp port remote-info ................................................................................................................ 6-21
show lldp port network-policy ........................................................................................................... 6-22
set lldp tx-interval.............................................................................................................................. 6-23
set lldp hold-multiplier ....................................................................................................................... 6-24
set lldp trap-interval .......................................................................................................................... 6-24
set lldp med-fast-repeat .................................................................................................................... 6-25
set lldp port status ............................................................................................................................ 6-26
set lldp port trap................................................................................................................................ 6-26
set lldp port med-trap........................................................................................................................ 6-27
set lldp port location-info................................................................................................................... 6-27
set lldp port tx-tlv .............................................................................................................................. 6-28
set lldp port network-policy ............................................................................................................... 6-30
clear lldp ........................................................................................................................................... 6-31
clear lldp port status ......................................................................................................................... 6-32

viii

clear lldp port trap ............................................................................................................................. 6-32
clear lldp port med-trap..................................................................................................................... 6-33
clear lldp port location-info................................................................................................................ 6-33
clear lldp port network-policy ............................................................................................................ 6-34
clear lldp port tx-tlv ........................................................................................................................... 6-35

Chapter 7: Port Configuration
Port Configuration Summary .......................................................................................................................... 7-1
Port String Syntax Used in the CLI .......................................................................................................... 7-1
Reviewing Port Status .................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 7-2
show port ............................................................................................................................................ 7-3
show port status ................................................................................................................................. 7-3
show port counters ............................................................................................................................. 7-4
clear port counters.............................................................................................................................. 7-6
show port cablestatus......................................................................................................................... 7-6
Disabling / Enabling and Naming Ports .......................................................................................................... 7-7
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 7-7
set port disable ................................................................................................................................... 7-8
set port enable.................................................................................................................................... 7-8
show port alias.................................................................................................................................... 7-9
set port alias ....................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Setting Speed and Duplex Mode .................................................................................................................. 7-11
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 7-11
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-11
show port speed ............................................................................................................................... 7-11
set port speed................................................................................................................................... 7-12
show port duplex .............................................................................................................................. 7-12
set port duplex .................................................................................................................................. 7-13
Enabling / Disabling Jumbo Frame Support ................................................................................................. 7-14
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 7-14
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-14
show port jumbo ............................................................................................................................... 7-14
set port jumbo................................................................................................................................... 7-15
clear port jumbo ................................................................................................................................ 7-15
Setting Auto-Negotiation and Advertised Ability ........................................................................................... 7-16
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 7-16
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-16
show port negotiation ....................................................................................................................... 7-16
set port negotiation ........................................................................................................................... 7-17
show port advertise .......................................................................................................................... 7-17
set port advertise .............................................................................................................................. 7-18
clear port advertise ........................................................................................................................... 7-19
show port mdix ................................................................................................................................. 7-20
set port mdix ..................................................................................................................................... 7-20
Setting Flow Control ..................................................................................................................................... 7-22
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 7-22
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-22
show flowcontrol ............................................................................................................................... 7-22
set flowcontrol................................................................................................................................... 7-22
Setting Port Link Traps and Link Flap Detection .......................................................................................... 7-24
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 7-24
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-24

ix

show port trap................................................................................................................................... 7-24
set port trap ...................................................................................................................................... 7-25
show linkflap ..................................................................................................................................... 7-25
set linkflap globalstate ...................................................................................................................... 7-28
set linkflap portstate.......................................................................................................................... 7-28
set linkflap interval ............................................................................................................................ 7-29
set linkflap action .............................................................................................................................. 7-29
clear linkflap action ........................................................................................................................... 7-30
set linkflap threshold......................................................................................................................... 7-30
set linkflap downtime ........................................................................................................................ 7-31
clear linkflap down ............................................................................................................................ 7-31
clear linkflap...................................................................................................................................... 7-32
Configuring Broadcast Suppression ............................................................................................................. 7-33
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 7-33
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-33
show port broadcast ......................................................................................................................... 7-33
set port broadcast............................................................................................................................. 7-34
clear port broadcast.......................................................................................................................... 7-34
Port Mirroring ................................................................................................................................................ 7-36
Mirroring Features .................................................................................................................................. 7-36
Remote Port Mirroring ............................................................................................................................ 7-36
Configuring SMON MIB Port Mirroring ................................................................................................... 7-37
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 7-38
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-38
show port mirroring........................................................................................................................... 7-38
set port mirroring .............................................................................................................................. 7-39
clear port mirroring ........................................................................................................................... 7-40
set mirror vlan ................................................................................................................................... 7-40
clear mirror vlan ................................................................................................................................ 7-41
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) ................................................................................................... 7-42
LACP Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 7-42
LACP Terminology ................................................................................................................................. 7-43
SecureStack C3 Usage Considerations ................................................................................................. 7-43
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-44
show lacp.......................................................................................................................................... 7-45
set lacp ............................................................................................................................................. 7-46
set lacp asyspri................................................................................................................................. 7-47
set lacp aadminkey........................................................................................................................... 7-47
clear lacp .......................................................................................................................................... 7-48
set lacp static.................................................................................................................................... 7-48
clear lacp static ................................................................................................................................. 7-49
set lacp singleportlag........................................................................................................................ 7-50
clear lacp singleportlag..................................................................................................................... 7-50
show port lacp .................................................................................................................................. 7-51
set port lacp ...................................................................................................................................... 7-52
clear port lacp ................................................................................................................................... 7-54
Configuring Protected Ports ......................................................................................................................... 7-56
Protected Port Operation ....................................................................................................................... 7-56
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 7-56
set port protected.............................................................................................................................. 7-56
show port protected .......................................................................................................................... 7-57
clear port protected........................................................................................................................... 7-57
set port protected name.................................................................................................................... 7-58
show port protected name ................................................................................................................ 7-58
clear port protected name................................................................................................................. 7-59

x

Chapter 8: SNMP Configuration
SNMP Configuration Summary ...................................................................................................................... 8-1
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c ........................................................................................................................... 8-2
SNMPv3 ................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
About SNMP Security Models and Levels ............................................................................................... 8-2
Using SNMP Contexts to Access Specific MIBs ...................................................................................... 8-3
Configuration Considerations ................................................................................................................... 8-3
Reviewing SNMP Statistics ............................................................................................................................ 8-3
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 8-4
show snmp engineid........................................................................................................................... 8-4
show snmp counters........................................................................................................................... 8-5
Configuring SNMP Users, Groups, and Communities .................................................................................... 8-8
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 8-8
show snmp user ................................................................................................................................. 8-8
set snmp user ..................................................................................................................................... 8-9
clear snmp user ................................................................................................................................ 8-11
show snmp group ............................................................................................................................. 8-11
set snmp group ................................................................................................................................. 8-12
clear snmp group .............................................................................................................................. 8-13
show snmp community ..................................................................................................................... 8-13
set snmp community......................................................................................................................... 8-14
clear snmp community...................................................................................................................... 8-15
Configuring SNMP Access Rights ................................................................................................................ 8-15
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 8-15
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 8-16
show snmp access ........................................................................................................................... 8-16
set snmp access............................................................................................................................... 8-18
clear snmp access............................................................................................................................ 8-19
Configuring SNMP MIB Views ...................................................................................................................... 8-19
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 8-19
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 8-19
show snmp view ............................................................................................................................... 8-20
show snmp context........................................................................................................................... 8-21
set snmp view................................................................................................................................... 8-21
clear snmp view................................................................................................................................ 8-22
Configuring SNMP Target Parameters ......................................................................................................... 8-23
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 8-23
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 8-23
show snmp targetparams ................................................................................................................. 8-23
set snmp targetparams..................................................................................................................... 8-24
clear snmp targetparams.................................................................................................................. 8-25
Configuring SNMP Target Addresses .......................................................................................................... 8-26
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 8-26
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 8-26
show snmp targetaddr ...................................................................................................................... 8-26
set snmp targetaddr.......................................................................................................................... 8-27
clear snmp targetaddr....................................................................................................................... 8-28
Configuring SNMP Notification Parameters ................................................................................................. 8-29
About SNMP Notify Filters ..................................................................................................................... 8-29
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 8-29
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 8-29
show newaddrtrap ............................................................................................................................ 8-30
set newaddrtrap................................................................................................................................ 8-30

xi

show snmp notify .............................................................................................................................. 8-31
set snmp notify ................................................................................................................................. 8-32
clear snmp notify .............................................................................................................................. 8-33
show snmp notifyfilter ....................................................................................................................... 8-33
set snmp notifyfilter........................................................................................................................... 8-34
clear snmp notifyfilter........................................................................................................................ 8-35
show snmp notifyprofile .................................................................................................................... 8-36
set snmp notifyprofile........................................................................................................................ 8-36
clear snmp notifyprofile..................................................................................................................... 8-37
Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration ................................................................................................. 8-37
Example ................................................................................................................................................. 8-38
Configuring the SNMP Management Interface ............................................................................................. 8-39
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 8-39
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 8-39
show snmp interface......................................................................................................................... 8-39
set snmp interface ............................................................................................................................ 8-40
clear snmp interface ......................................................................................................................... 8-41

Chapter 9: Spanning Tree Configuration
Spanning Tree Configuration Summary ......................................................................................................... 9-1
Overview: Single, Rapid, and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocols ............................................................. 9-1
Spanning Tree Features .......................................................................................................................... 9-2
Loop Protect ............................................................................................................................................. 9-2
Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Parameters .............................................................................................. 9-3
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 9-4
show spantree stats............................................................................................................................ 9-5
set spantree........................................................................................................................................ 9-7
show spantree version........................................................................................................................ 9-7
set spantree version ........................................................................................................................... 9-8
clear spantree version ........................................................................................................................ 9-9
show spantree bpdu-forwarding ......................................................................................................... 9-9
set spantree bpdu-forwarding........................................................................................................... 9-10
show spantree bridgeprioritymode ................................................................................................... 9-10
set spantree bridgeprioritymode ....................................................................................................... 9-11
clear spantree bridgeprioritymode .................................................................................................... 9-11
show spantree mstilist ...................................................................................................................... 9-12
set spantree msti .............................................................................................................................. 9-12
clear spantree msti ........................................................................................................................... 9-13
show spantree mstmap .................................................................................................................... 9-13
set spantree mstmap ........................................................................................................................ 9-14
clear spantree mstmap ..................................................................................................................... 9-14
show spantree vlanlist ...................................................................................................................... 9-15
show spantree mstcfgid .................................................................................................................... 9-15
set spantree mstcfgid ....................................................................................................................... 9-16
clear spantree mstcfgid .................................................................................................................... 9-16
set spantree priority .......................................................................................................................... 9-17
clear spantree priority ....................................................................................................................... 9-17
set spantree hello ............................................................................................................................. 9-18
clear spantree hello .......................................................................................................................... 9-18
set spantree maxage ........................................................................................................................ 9-19
clear spantree maxage ..................................................................................................................... 9-20
set spantree fwddelay....................................................................................................................... 9-20
clear spantree fwddelay.................................................................................................................... 9-21
show spantree backuproot ............................................................................................................... 9-21

xii

set spantree backuproot ................................................................................................................... 9-22
clear spantree backuproot ................................................................................................................ 9-22
show spantree tctrapsuppress.......................................................................................................... 9-23
set spantree tctrapsuppress ............................................................................................................. 9-23
clear spantree tctrapsuppress .......................................................................................................... 9-24
set spantree protomigration .............................................................................................................. 9-24
show spantree spanguard ................................................................................................................ 9-25
set spantree spanguard .................................................................................................................... 9-25
clear spantree spanguard ................................................................................................................. 9-26
show spantree spanguardtimeout .................................................................................................... 9-27
set spantree spanguardtimeout ........................................................................................................ 9-27
clear spantree spanguardtimeout ..................................................................................................... 9-28
show spantree spanguardlock .......................................................................................................... 9-28
clear / set spantree spanguardlock................................................................................................... 9-29
show spantree spanguardtrapenable ............................................................................................... 9-29
set spantree spanguardtrapenable ................................................................................................... 9-30
clear spantree spanguardtrapenable ................................................................................................ 9-30
show spantree legacypathcost ......................................................................................................... 9-31
set spantree legacypathcost............................................................................................................. 9-31
clear spantree legacypathcost .......................................................................................................... 9-32
show spantree autoedge .................................................................................................................. 9-32
set spantree autoedge...................................................................................................................... 9-32
clear spantree autoedge................................................................................................................... 9-33
Configuring Spanning Tree Port Parameters ............................................................................................... 9-34
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 9-34
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 9-34
set spantree portadmin..................................................................................................................... 9-34
clear spantree portadmin.................................................................................................................. 9-35
show spantree portadmin ................................................................................................................. 9-35
show spantree portpri ....................................................................................................................... 9-36
set spantree portpri........................................................................................................................... 9-36
clear spantree portpri........................................................................................................................ 9-37
show spantree adminpathcost .......................................................................................................... 9-38
set spantree adminpathcost ............................................................................................................. 9-38
clear spantree adminpathcost .......................................................................................................... 9-39
show spantree adminedge ............................................................................................................... 9-39
set spantree adminedge ................................................................................................................... 9-40
clear spantree adminedge ................................................................................................................ 9-40
show spantree operedge .................................................................................................................. 9-41
Configuring Spanning Tree Loop Protect Parameters .................................................................................. 9-42
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 9-42
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 9-42
set spantree lp .................................................................................................................................. 9-43
show spantree lp .............................................................................................................................. 9-43
clear spantree lp ............................................................................................................................... 9-44
show spantree lplock ........................................................................................................................ 9-44
clear spantree lplock......................................................................................................................... 9-45
set spantree lpcapablepartner .......................................................................................................... 9-46
show spantree lpcapablepartner ...................................................................................................... 9-46
clear spantree lpcapablepartner ....................................................................................................... 9-47
set spantree lpthreshold ................................................................................................................... 9-47
show spantree lpthreshold................................................................................................................ 9-48
clear spantree lpthreshold ................................................................................................................ 9-48
set spantree lpwindow ...................................................................................................................... 9-49
show spantree lpwindow .................................................................................................................. 9-49
clear spantree lpwindow ................................................................................................................... 9-50
xiii

set spantree lptrapenable ................................................................................................................. 9-50
show spantree lptrapenable ............................................................................................................. 9-51
clear spantree lptrapenable .............................................................................................................. 9-51
set spantree disputedbpduthreshold ................................................................................................ 9-52
show spantree disputedbpduthreshold ............................................................................................. 9-53
clear spantree disputedbpduthreshold ............................................................................................. 9-53
show spantree nonforwardingreason ............................................................................................... 9-54

Chapter 10: 802.1Q VLAN Configuration
VLAN Configuration Summary ..................................................................................................................... 10-1
Port String Syntax Used in the CLI ........................................................................................................ 10-1
Creating a Secure Management VLAN .................................................................................................. 10-2
Viewing VLANs ............................................................................................................................................. 10-3
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 10-3
Command ............................................................................................................................................... 10-3
show vlan.......................................................................................................................................... 10-3
Creating and Naming Static VLANs ............................................................................................................. 10-5
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 10-5
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 10-5
set vlan ............................................................................................................................................. 10-5
set vlan name ................................................................................................................................... 10-6
clear vlan .......................................................................................................................................... 10-6
clear vlan name ................................................................................................................................ 10-7
Assigning Port VLAN IDs (PVIDs) and Ingress Filtering .............................................................................. 10-8
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 10-8
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 10-8
show port vlan .................................................................................................................................. 10-8
set port vlan ...................................................................................................................................... 10-9
clear port vlan ................................................................................................................................... 10-9
show port ingress filter.................................................................................................................... 10-10
set port ingress filter ....................................................................................................................... 10-11
show port discard ........................................................................................................................... 10-11
set port discard ............................................................................................................................... 10-12
Configuring the VLAN Egress List .............................................................................................................. 10-13
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 10-13
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 10-13
show port egress ............................................................................................................................ 10-13
set vlan forbidden ........................................................................................................................... 10-14
set vlan egress ............................................................................................................................... 10-15
clear vlan egress ............................................................................................................................ 10-15
show vlan dynamicegress .............................................................................................................. 10-16
set vlan dynamicegress .................................................................................................................. 10-17
Setting the Host VLAN ................................................................................................................................ 10-18
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 10-18
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 10-18
show host vlan................................................................................................................................ 10-18
set host vlan ................................................................................................................................... 10-18
clear host vlan ................................................................................................................................ 10-19
Enabling/Disabling GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) ................................................................ 10-20
About GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) .............................................................................. 10-20
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 10-21
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 10-21
show gvrp ....................................................................................................................................... 10-22
show garp timer .............................................................................................................................. 10-22
set gvrp........................................................................................................................................... 10-23

xiv

clear gvrp ........................................................................................................................................ 10-24
set garp timer.................................................................................................................................. 10-24
clear garp timer............................................................................................................................... 10-25

Chapter 11: Policy Classification Configuration
Policy Classification Configuration Summary ............................................................................................... 11-1
Configuring Policy Profiles ............................................................................................................................ 11-2
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 11-2
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 11-2
show policy profile ............................................................................................................................ 11-2
set policy profile ................................................................................................................................ 11-4
clear policy profile ............................................................................................................................. 11-5
Configuring Classification Rules ................................................................................................................... 11-6
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 11-6
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 11-6
show policy rule ................................................................................................................................ 11-6
show policy capability ....................................................................................................................... 11-8
set policy rule.................................................................................................................................. 11-10
clear policy rule............................................................................................................................... 11-13
clear policy all-rules ........................................................................................................................ 11-14
Assigning Ports to Policy Profiles ............................................................................................................... 11-15
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 11-15
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 11-15
set policy port ................................................................................................................................. 11-15
clear policy port .............................................................................................................................. 11-16
Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS) ................................................................................................. 11-17
About Policy-Based CoS Configurations .............................................................................................. 11-17
About CoS-Based Flood Control .......................................................................................................... 11-19
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 11-20
set cos state ................................................................................................................................... 11-20
show cos state................................................................................................................................ 11-21
clear cos state ................................................................................................................................ 11-21
set cos settings............................................................................................................................... 11-22
clear cos settings ............................................................................................................................ 11-23
show cos settings ........................................................................................................................... 11-23
set cos port-config .......................................................................................................................... 11-24
show cos port-config....................................................................................................................... 11-25
clear cos port-config ....................................................................................................................... 11-26
set cos port-resource irl .................................................................................................................. 11-27
set cos port-resource flood-ctrl ....................................................................................................... 11-28
show cos port-resource .................................................................................................................. 11-29
clear cos port-resource irl ............................................................................................................... 11-30
clear cos port-resource flood-ctrl .................................................................................................... 11-31
set cos reference ............................................................................................................................ 11-31
show cos reference ........................................................................................................................ 11-32
clear cos reference ......................................................................................................................... 11-33
show cos unit.................................................................................................................................. 11-34
clear cos all-entries......................................................................................................................... 11-35
show cos port-type ......................................................................................................................... 11-35

Chapter 12: Port Priority Configuration
Port Priority Configuration Summary ............................................................................................................ 12-1
Configuring Port Priority ............................................................................................................................... 12-2
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 12-2
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 12-2

xv

show port priority .............................................................................................................................. 12-2
set port priority.................................................................................................................................. 12-3
clear port priority............................................................................................................................... 12-3
Configuring Priority to Transmit Queue Mapping ......................................................................................... 12-4
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 12-4
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 12-4
show port priority-queue ................................................................................................................... 12-4
set port priority-queue....................................................................................................................... 12-5
clear port priority-queue.................................................................................................................... 12-6
Configuring Quality of Service (QoS) ........................................................................................................... 12-7
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 12-7
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 12-7
show port txq .................................................................................................................................... 12-7
set port txq........................................................................................................................................ 12-8
clear port txq..................................................................................................................................... 12-9

Chapter 13: IGMP Configuration
IGMP Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 13-1
About IP Multicast Group Management ................................................................................................. 13-1
About Multicasting .................................................................................................................................. 13-2
Configuring IGMP at Layer 2 ........................................................................................................................ 13-2
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 13-2
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 13-2
show igmpsnooping .......................................................................................................................... 13-3
set igmpsnooping adminmode.......................................................................................................... 13-3
set igmpsnooping interfacemode...................................................................................................... 13-4
set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval .................................................................................... 13-4
set igmpsnooping maxresponse ....................................................................................................... 13-5
set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpiretime.................................................................................................... 13-6
set igmpsnooping add-static ............................................................................................................. 13-6
set igmpsnooping remove-static ....................................................................................................... 13-7
show igmpsnooping static ................................................................................................................ 13-8
show igmpsnooping mfdb ................................................................................................................. 13-8
clear igmpsnooping .......................................................................................................................... 13-9
Configuring IGMP on Routing Interfaces .................................................................................................... 13-10
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 13-10
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 13-10
ip igmp ............................................................................................................................................ 13-10
ip igmp enable ................................................................................................................................ 13-11
ip igmp version ............................................................................................................................... 13-11
show ip igmp interface .................................................................................................................... 13-12
show ip igmp groups....................................................................................................................... 13-13
ip igmp query-interval ..................................................................................................................... 13-13
ip igmp query-max-response-time .................................................................................................. 13-14
ip igmp startup-query-interval ......................................................................................................... 13-14
ip igmp startup-query-count ............................................................................................................13-15
ip igmp last-member-query-interval ................................................................................................ 13-15
ip igmp last-member-query-count ................................................................................................... 13-16
ip igmp robustness ......................................................................................................................... 13-16

Chapter 14: Logging and Network Management
Configuring System Logging ........................................................................................................................ 14-1
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 14-1
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 14-1
show logging server.......................................................................................................................... 14-2

xvi

set logging server ............................................................................................................................. 14-3
clear logging server .......................................................................................................................... 14-4
show logging default......................................................................................................................... 14-4
set logging default ............................................................................................................................ 14-5
clear logging default ......................................................................................................................... 14-6
show logging application .................................................................................................................. 14-6
set logging application ...................................................................................................................... 14-7
clear logging application ................................................................................................................... 14-9
show logging local ............................................................................................................................ 14-9
set logging local.............................................................................................................................. 14-10
clear logging local........................................................................................................................... 14-10
show logging buffer ........................................................................................................................ 14-11
show logging interface.................................................................................................................... 14-11
set logging interface ....................................................................................................................... 14-12
clear logging interface .................................................................................................................... 14-13
Monitoring Network Events and Status ...................................................................................................... 14-14
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 14-14
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 14-14
history ............................................................................................................................................. 14-14
show history.................................................................................................................................... 14-15
set history ....................................................................................................................................... 14-15
ping................................................................................................................................................. 14-16
show users ..................................................................................................................................... 14-16
disconnect ...................................................................................................................................... 14-17
show netstat ................................................................................................................................... 14-17
Managing Switch Network Addresses and Routes ..................................................................................... 14-19
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 14-19
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 14-19
show arp ......................................................................................................................................... 14-19
set arp............................................................................................................................................. 14-20
clear arp.......................................................................................................................................... 14-21
traceroute ....................................................................................................................................... 14-21
show mac ....................................................................................................................................... 14-22
show mac agetime.......................................................................................................................... 14-23
set mac agetime ............................................................................................................................. 14-24
clear mac agetime .......................................................................................................................... 14-24
set mac algorithm ........................................................................................................................... 14-25
show mac algorithm........................................................................................................................ 14-25
clear mac algorithm ........................................................................................................................ 14-26
set mac multicast ............................................................................................................................ 14-26
clear mac address .......................................................................................................................... 14-27
show mac unreserved-flood ........................................................................................................... 14-28
set mac unreserved-flood ............................................................................................................... 14-28
Configuring Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) ................................................................................... 14-29
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 14-29
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 14-29
show sntp ....................................................................................................................................... 14-29
set sntp client.................................................................................................................................. 14-31
clear sntp client............................................................................................................................... 14-31
set sntp server ................................................................................................................................ 14-32
clear sntp server ............................................................................................................................. 14-32
set sntp poll-interval........................................................................................................................ 14-33
clear sntp poll-interval..................................................................................................................... 14-33
set sntp poll-retry ............................................................................................................................ 14-34
clear sntp poll-retry ......................................................................................................................... 14-34
set sntp poll-timeout ....................................................................................................................... 14-35
xvii

clear sntp poll-timeout .................................................................................................................... 14-35
set timezone ................................................................................................................................... 14-36
show sntp interface......................................................................................................................... 14-37
set sntp interface ............................................................................................................................ 14-37
clear sntp interface ......................................................................................................................... 14-38
Configuring Node Aliases ........................................................................................................................... 14-40
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 14-40
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 14-40
show nodealias config .................................................................................................................... 14-40
set nodealias .................................................................................................................................. 14-41
clear nodealias config ..................................................................................................................... 14-42

Chapter 15: RMON Configuration
RMON Monitoring Group Functions ............................................................................................................. 15-1
Design Considerations ................................................................................................................................. 15-2
Statistics Group Commands ......................................................................................................................... 15-3
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 15-3
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 15-3
show rmon stats ............................................................................................................................... 15-4
set rmon stats ................................................................................................................................... 15-4
clear rmon stats ................................................................................................................................ 15-5
History Group Commands ............................................................................................................................ 15-6
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 15-6
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 15-6
show rmon history ............................................................................................................................ 15-6
set rmon history ................................................................................................................................ 15-7
clear rmon history ............................................................................................................................. 15-7
Alarm Group Commands .............................................................................................................................. 15-9
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 15-9
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 15-9
show rmon alarm .............................................................................................................................. 15-9
set rmon alarm properties............................................................................................................... 15-10
set rmon alarm status ..................................................................................................................... 15-11
clear rmon alarm............................................................................................................................. 15-12
Event Group Commands ............................................................................................................................ 15-13
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 15-13
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 15-13
show rmon event ............................................................................................................................ 15-13
set rmon event properties ............................................................................................................... 15-14
set rmon event status ..................................................................................................................... 15-15
clear rmon event............................................................................................................................. 15-15
Filter Group Commands ............................................................................................................................. 15-17
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 15-17
show rmon channel ........................................................................................................................ 15-17
set rmon channel ............................................................................................................................ 15-18
clear rmon channel ......................................................................................................................... 15-19
show rmon filter .............................................................................................................................. 15-19
set rmon filter .................................................................................................................................. 15-20
clear rmon filter ............................................................................................................................... 15-21
Packet Capture Commands ....................................................................................................................... 15-22
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 15-22
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 15-22
show rmon capture ......................................................................................................................... 15-22
set rmon capture............................................................................................................................. 15-23
clear rmon capture.......................................................................................................................... 15-24

xviii

Chapter 16: DHCP Server Configuration
DHCP Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 16-1
DHCP Relay Agent ................................................................................................................................ 16-1
DHCP Server ......................................................................................................................................... 16-1
Configuring a DHCP Server ................................................................................................................... 16-2
Configuring General DHCP Server Parameters ........................................................................................... 16-3
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 16-3
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 16-3
set dhcp ............................................................................................................................................ 16-4
set dhcp bootp .................................................................................................................................. 16-4
set dhcp conflict logging ................................................................................................................... 16-5
show dhcp conflict ............................................................................................................................ 16-5
clear dhcp conflict............................................................................................................................. 16-6
set dhcp exclude............................................................................................................................... 16-7
clear dhcp exclude............................................................................................................................ 16-7
set dhcp ping .................................................................................................................................... 16-8
clear dhcp ping ................................................................................................................................. 16-8
show dhcp binding............................................................................................................................ 16-9
clear dhcp binding ............................................................................................................................ 16-9
show dhcp server statistics............................................................................................................. 16-10
clear dhcp server statistics ............................................................................................................. 16-10
Configuring IP Address Pools ..................................................................................................................... 16-12
Manual Pool Configuration Considerations .......................................................................................... 16-12
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 16-12
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 16-12
set dhcp pool .................................................................................................................................. 16-13
clear dhcp pool ............................................................................................................................... 16-14
set dhcp pool network..................................................................................................................... 16-14
clear dhcp pool network.................................................................................................................. 16-15
set dhcp pool hardware-address .................................................................................................... 16-15
clear dhcp pool hardware-address ................................................................................................. 16-16
set dhcp pool host .......................................................................................................................... 16-16
clear dhcp pool host ....................................................................................................................... 16-17
set dhcp pool client-identifier .......................................................................................................... 16-17
clear dhcp pool client-identifier ....................................................................................................... 16-18
set dhcp pool client-name............................................................................................................... 16-19
clear dhcp pool client-name............................................................................................................16-19
set dhcp pool bootfile...................................................................................................................... 16-20
clear dhcp pool bootfile................................................................................................................... 16-20
set dhcp pool next-server ............................................................................................................... 16-21
clear dhcp pool next-server ............................................................................................................16-21
set dhcp pool lease......................................................................................................................... 16-22
clear dhcp pool lease...................................................................................................................... 16-22
set dhcp pool default-router ............................................................................................................16-23
clear dhcp pool default-router......................................................................................................... 16-23
set dhcp pool dns-server ................................................................................................................ 16-24
clear dhcp pool dns-server ............................................................................................................. 16-24
set dhcp pool domain-name ........................................................................................................... 16-25
clear dhcp pool domain-name ........................................................................................................ 16-25
set dhcp pool netbios-name-server ................................................................................................ 16-26
clear dhcp pool netbios-name-server ............................................................................................. 16-26
set dhcp pool netbios-node-type .................................................................................................... 16-27
clear dhcp pool netbios-node-type ................................................................................................. 16-27
set dhcp pool option ....................................................................................................................... 16-28
clear dhcp pool option .................................................................................................................... 16-29

xix

show dhcp pool configuration ......................................................................................................... 16-29

Chapter 17: DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection
DHCP Snooping Overview ........................................................................................................................... 17-1
DHCP Message Processing ................................................................................................................... 17-1
Building and Maintaining the Database .................................................................................................. 17-2
Rate Limiting .......................................................................................................................................... 17-3
Basic Configuration ................................................................................................................................ 17-3
DHCP Snooping Commands ........................................................................................................................ 17-4
set dhcpsnooping ............................................................................................................................. 17-4
set dhcpsnooping vlan...................................................................................................................... 17-5
set dhcpsnooping database write-delay ........................................................................................... 17-5
set dhcpsnooping trust ..................................................................................................................... 17-6
set dhcpsnooping binding ................................................................................................................. 17-7
set dhcpsnooping verify .................................................................................................................... 17-7
set dhcpsnooping log-invalid ............................................................................................................ 17-8
set dhcpsnooping limit ...................................................................................................................... 17-9
show dhcpsnooping ........................................................................................................................ 17-10
show dhcpsnooping database ........................................................................................................ 17-11
show dhcpsnooping port................................................................................................................. 17-11
show dhcpsnooping binding ........................................................................................................... 17-12
show dhcpsnooping statistics ......................................................................................................... 17-13
clear dhcpsnooping binding ............................................................................................................17-14
clear dhcpsnooping statistics.......................................................................................................... 17-14
clear dhcpsnooping database......................................................................................................... 17-14
clear dhcpsnooping limit ................................................................................................................. 17-15
Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview ............................................................................................................ 17-15
Functional Description .......................................................................................................................... 17-16
Basic Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 17-18
Example Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 17-19
Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands ........................................................................................................ 17-20
set arpinspection vlan ..................................................................................................................... 17-20
set arpinspection trust .................................................................................................................... 17-21
set arpinspection validate ............................................................................................................... 17-22
set arpinspection limit ..................................................................................................................... 17-23
set arpinspection filter..................................................................................................................... 17-24
show arpinspection access-list ....................................................................................................... 17-24
show arpinspection ports................................................................................................................ 17-25
show arpinspection vlan ................................................................................................................. 17-26
show arpinspection statistics .......................................................................................................... 17-26
clear arpinspection validate ............................................................................................................17-27
clear arpinspection vlan .................................................................................................................. 17-28
clear arpinspection filter.................................................................................................................. 17-29
clear arpinspection limit .................................................................................................................. 17-30
clear arpinspection statistics........................................................................................................... 17-31

Chapter 18: Preparing for Router Mode
Pre-Routing Configuration Tasks ................................................................................................................. 18-1
Example ................................................................................................................................................. 18-2
Enabling Router Configuration Modes .......................................................................................................... 18-2

Chapter 19: IP Configuration
Configuring Routing Interface Settings ......................................................................................................... 19-1
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 19-1
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 19-1
xx

show interface .................................................................................................................................. 19-2
interface............................................................................................................................................ 19-3
show ip interface............................................................................................................................... 19-4
ip address ......................................................................................................................................... 19-5
show running-config ......................................................................................................................... 19-6
no shutdown ..................................................................................................................................... 19-6
no ip routing...................................................................................................................................... 19-7
Configuring Tunnel Interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 19-8
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 19-8
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 19-8
interface tunnel ................................................................................................................................. 19-8
tunnel source .................................................................................................................................... 19-9
tunnel destination ........................................................................................................................... 19-10
tunnel mode.................................................................................................................................... 19-10
show interface tunnel...................................................................................................................... 19-11
Reviewing and Configuring the ARP Table ................................................................................................ 19-12
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 19-12
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 19-12
show ip arp ..................................................................................................................................... 19-12
arp .................................................................................................................................................. 19-13
ip proxy-arp..................................................................................................................................... 19-14
arp timeout...................................................................................................................................... 19-15
clear arp-cache ............................................................................................................................... 19-15
Configuring Broadcast Settings .................................................................................................................. 19-16
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 19-16
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 19-16
ip directed-broadcast ...................................................................................................................... 19-16
ip forward-protocol.......................................................................................................................... 19-17
ip helper-address ............................................................................................................................ 19-18
Reviewing IP Traffic and Configuring Routes ............................................................................................. 19-19
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 19-19
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 19-19
show ip route .................................................................................................................................. 19-19
ip route............................................................................................................................................ 19-21
ping................................................................................................................................................. 19-21
traceroute ....................................................................................................................................... 19-22
Configuring ICMP Redirects ....................................................................................................................... 19-23
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 19-23
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 19-23
ip icmp redirect enable ................................................................................................................... 19-23
show ip icmp redirect...................................................................................................................... 19-24

Chapter 20: IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration
Activating Advanced Routing Features ........................................................................................................ 20-1
Configuring RIP ............................................................................................................................................ 20-2
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 20-2
RIP Configuration Task List and Commands ......................................................................................... 20-2
router rip ........................................................................................................................................... 20-2
ip rip enable ...................................................................................................................................... 20-3
distance ............................................................................................................................................ 20-3
ip rip send version ............................................................................................................................ 20-4
ip rip receive version......................................................................................................................... 20-5
ip rip authentication-key.................................................................................................................... 20-5
ip rip message-digest-key................................................................................................................. 20-6
no auto-summary.............................................................................................................................. 20-7

xxi

split-horizon poison........................................................................................................................... 20-7
passive-interface .............................................................................................................................. 20-8
receive-interface ............................................................................................................................... 20-9
redistribute........................................................................................................................................ 20-9
Configuring OSPF ...................................................................................................................................... 20-11
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 20-11
OSPF Configuration Task List and Commands ................................................................................... 20-11
router id .......................................................................................................................................... 20-12
router ospf ...................................................................................................................................... 20-13
1583compatibility ............................................................................................................................ 20-13
ip ospf enable ................................................................................................................................. 20-14
ip ospf areaid .................................................................................................................................. 20-14
ip ospf cost ..................................................................................................................................... 20-15
ip ospf priority ................................................................................................................................. 20-15
timers spf ........................................................................................................................................ 20-16
ip ospf retransmit-interval ............................................................................................................... 20-17
ip ospf transmit-delay ..................................................................................................................... 20-17
ip ospf hello-interval........................................................................................................................ 20-18
ip ospf dead-interval ....................................................................................................................... 20-18
ip ospf authentication-key ............................................................................................................... 20-19
ip ospf message digest key md5 .................................................................................................... 20-20
distance ospf .................................................................................................................................. 20-20
area range ...................................................................................................................................... 20-21
area stub......................................................................................................................................... 20-22
area default cost ............................................................................................................................. 20-23
area nssa........................................................................................................................................ 20-23
area virtual-link ............................................................................................................................... 20-24
redistribute...................................................................................................................................... 20-25
show ip ospf.................................................................................................................................... 20-26
show ip ospf database.................................................................................................................... 20-27
show ip ospf interface ..................................................................................................................... 20-28
show ip ospf neighbor..................................................................................................................... 20-30
show ip ospf virtual-links................................................................................................................. 20-31
clear ip ospf process....................................................................................................................... 20-31
Configuring DVMRP ................................................................................................................................... 20-33
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 20-33
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 20-33
Enabling DVMRP on an Interface ........................................................................................................ 20-33
ip dvmrp.......................................................................................................................................... 20-34
ip dvmrp enable .............................................................................................................................. 20-34
ip dvmrp metric ............................................................................................................................... 20-35
show ip dvmrp ................................................................................................................................ 20-35
Configuring IRDP ........................................................................................................................................ 20-37
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 20-37
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 20-37
ip irdp enable .................................................................................................................................. 20-37
ip irdp maxadvertinterval ................................................................................................................ 20-38
ip irdp minadvertinterval ................................................................................................................. 20-38
ip irdp holdtime ............................................................................................................................... 20-39
ip irdp preference............................................................................................................................ 20-39
ip irdp broadcast ............................................................................................................................. 20-40
show ip irdp .................................................................................................................................... 20-40
Configuring VRRP ...................................................................................................................................... 20-42
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 20-42
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 20-42
router vrrp ....................................................................................................................................... 20-42
xxii

create.............................................................................................................................................. 20-43
address........................................................................................................................................... 20-44
priority............................................................................................................................................. 20-45
advertise-interval ............................................................................................................................ 20-45
preempt .......................................................................................................................................... 20-46
enable............................................................................................................................................. 20-47
ip vrrp authentication-key ............................................................................................................... 20-48
show ip vrrp .................................................................................................................................... 20-48
Configuring PIM-SM ................................................................................................................................... 20-49
Design Considerations ......................................................................................................................... 20-49
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 20-49
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 20-49
ip pimsm ......................................................................................................................................... 20-50
ip pimsm staticrp............................................................................................................................. 20-50
ip pimsm enable ............................................................................................................................. 20-51
ip pimsm query-interval .................................................................................................................. 20-52
show ip pimsm................................................................................................................................ 20-52
show ip pimsm componenttable ..................................................................................................... 20-53
show ip pimsm interface ................................................................................................................. 20-54
show ip pimsm neighbor ................................................................................................................. 20-55
show ip pimsm rp............................................................................................................................ 20-56
show ip pimsm rphash .................................................................................................................... 20-57
show ip pimsm staticrp ................................................................................................................... 20-58
show ip mroute ............................................................................................................................... 20-59

Chapter 21: IPv6 Management
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 21-1
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 21-1
show ipv6 status ............................................................................................................................... 21-1
set ipv6 ............................................................................................................................................. 21-2
set ipv6 address ............................................................................................................................... 21-3
show ipv6 address............................................................................................................................ 21-4
clear ipv6 address ............................................................................................................................ 21-4
set ipv6 gateway............................................................................................................................... 21-5
clear ipv6 gateway............................................................................................................................ 21-6
show ipv6 neighbors......................................................................................................................... 21-6
show ipv6 netstat.............................................................................................................................. 21-7
ping ipv6 ........................................................................................................................................... 21-8
traceroute ipv6.................................................................................................................................. 21-9

Chapter 22: IPv6 Configuration
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 22-1
Default Conditions .................................................................................................................................. 22-2
General Configuration Commands ............................................................................................................... 22-3
ipv6 forwarding ................................................................................................................................. 22-3
ipv6 hop-limit .................................................................................................................................... 22-3
ipv6 route.......................................................................................................................................... 22-4
ipv6 route distance ........................................................................................................................... 22-5
ipv6 unicast-routing .......................................................................................................................... 22-6
ping ipv6 ........................................................................................................................................... 22-6
ping ipv6 interface ............................................................................................................................ 22-7
traceroute ipv6.................................................................................................................................. 22-8
Interface Configuration Commands ............................................................................................................ 22-10
ipv6 address ................................................................................................................................... 22-10
ipv6 enable ..................................................................................................................................... 22-11

xxiii

ipv6 mtu .......................................................................................................................................... 22-12
Neighbor Cache and Neighbor Discovery Commands ............................................................................... 22-14
clear ipv6 neighbors ....................................................................................................................... 22-14
ipv6 nd dad attempts ...................................................................................................................... 22-15
ipv6 nd ns-interval .......................................................................................................................... 22-15
ipv6 nd reachable-time ................................................................................................................... 22-16
ipv6 nd other-config-flag ................................................................................................................. 22-17
ipv6 nd ra-interval ........................................................................................................................... 22-18
ipv6 nd ra-lifetime ........................................................................................................................... 22-18
ipv6 nd suppress-ra ........................................................................................................................ 22-19
ipv6 nd prefix .................................................................................................................................. 22-19
Query Commands ...................................................................................................................................... 22-22
show ipv6........................................................................................................................................ 22-22
show ipv6 interface......................................................................................................................... 22-22
show ipv6 neighbors....................................................................................................................... 22-24
show ipv6 route .............................................................................................................................. 22-25
show ipv6 route preferences .......................................................................................................... 22-27
show ipv6 route summary............................................................................................................... 22-28
show ipv6 traffic.............................................................................................................................. 22-29
clear ipv6 statistics ......................................................................................................................... 22-34

Chapter 23: IPv6 Proxy Routing
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 23-1
Limitations .............................................................................................................................................. 23-2
Preparing a Mixed Stack for IPv6 Proxy Routing ......................................................................................... 23-2
Commands ................................................................................................................................................... 23-3
ipv6 proxy-routing ............................................................................................................................. 23-3
show ipv6 proxy-routing.................................................................................................................... 23-3

Chapter 24: DHCPv6 Configuration
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 24-1
Default Conditions .................................................................................................................................. 24-2
Global Configuration Commands ................................................................................................................. 24-2
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 24-2
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 24-2
ipv6 dhcp enable .............................................................................................................................. 24-2
ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-opt .......................................................................................................... 24-3
ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-remote-id-subopt ....................................................................................24-4
ipv6 dhcp pool .................................................................................................................................. 24-4
Address Pool Configuration Commands ...................................................................................................... 24-6
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 24-6
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 24-6
domain-name.................................................................................................................................... 24-6
dns-server......................................................................................................................................... 24-7
prefix-delegation ............................................................................................................................... 24-7
exit .................................................................................................................................................... 24-8
Interface Configuration Commands ............................................................................................................ 24-10
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 24-10
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 24-10
ipv6 dhcp server ............................................................................................................................. 24-10
ipv6 dhcp relay ............................................................................................................................... 24-11
DHCPv6 Show Commands ........................................................................................................................ 24-13
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 24-13
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 24-13
show ipv6 dhcp ............................................................................................................................... 24-13

xxiv

show ipv6 dhcp interface ................................................................................................................ 24-14
show ipv6 dhcp statistics ................................................................................................................ 24-16
clear ipv6 dhcp statistics................................................................................................................. 24-17
show ipv6 dhcp pool ....................................................................................................................... 24-18
show ipv6 dhcp binding .................................................................................................................. 24-18

Chapter 25: OSPFv3 Configuration
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 25-1
Default Conditions .................................................................................................................................. 25-2
Global OSPFv3 Configuration Commands ................................................................................................... 25-3
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 25-3
Command ............................................................................................................................................... 25-3
ipv6 router id..................................................................................................................................... 25-3
ipv6 router ospf................................................................................................................................. 25-4
default-information originate ............................................................................................................. 25-4
default-metric.................................................................................................................................... 25-5
distance ospf .................................................................................................................................... 25-5
exit-overflow-interval......................................................................................................................... 25-6
external-lsdb-limit ............................................................................................................................. 25-7
maximum-paths ................................................................................................................................ 25-8
redistribute........................................................................................................................................ 25-8
Area Configuration Commands .................................................................................................................. 25-10
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 25-10
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 25-10
area default-cost............................................................................................................................. 25-10
area nssa........................................................................................................................................ 25-11
area nssa default-info-originate ...................................................................................................... 25-12
area nssa no-redistribute................................................................................................................ 25-12
area nssa no-summary................................................................................................................... 25-13
area nssa translator role ................................................................................................................. 25-14
area nssa translator-stab-intv ......................................................................................................... 25-14
area range ...................................................................................................................................... 25-15
area stub......................................................................................................................................... 25-16
area stub no-summary.................................................................................................................... 25-17
area virtual-link ............................................................................................................................... 25-17
area virtual-link dead-interval ......................................................................................................... 25-18
area virtual-link hello-interval.......................................................................................................... 25-19
area virtual-link retransmit-interval ................................................................................................. 25-19
area virtual-link transmit-delay........................................................................................................ 25-20
Interface Configuration Commands ............................................................................................................ 25-21
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 25-21
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 25-21
ipv6 ospf enable ............................................................................................................................. 25-21
ipv6 ospf areaid .............................................................................................................................. 25-22
ipv6 ospf cost.................................................................................................................................. 25-22
ipv6 ospf dead-interval ................................................................................................................... 25-23
ipv6 ospf hello-interval.................................................................................................................... 25-24
ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore ....................................................................................................................... 25-24
ipv6 ospf network............................................................................................................................ 25-25
ipv6 ospf priority ............................................................................................................................. 25-26
ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval ........................................................................................................... 25-26
ipv6 ospf transmit-delay.................................................................................................................. 25-27
OSPFv3 Show Commands ......................................................................................................................... 25-29
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 25-29
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 25-29

xxv

show ipv6 ospf................................................................................................................................ 25-29
show ipv6 ospf area........................................................................................................................ 25-31
show ipv6 ospf abr.......................................................................................................................... 25-32
show ipv6 ospf asbr ........................................................................................................................ 25-33
show ipv6 ospf database ................................................................................................................ 25-34
show ipv6 ospf interface ................................................................................................................. 25-38
show ipv6 ospf interface stats ........................................................................................................ 25-40
show ipv6 ospf neighbor................................................................................................................. 25-42
show ipv6 ospf range...................................................................................................................... 25-44
show ipv6 ospf stub table ............................................................................................................... 25-45
show ipv6 ospf virtual-link............................................................................................................... 25-46

Chapter 26: Authentication and Authorization Configuration
Overview of Authentication and Authorization Methods ............................................................................... 26-1
RADIUS Filter-ID Attribute and Dynamic Policy Profile Assignment ...................................................... 26-3
Setting the Authentication Login Method ...................................................................................................... 26-4
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 26-4
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 26-4
show authentication login ................................................................................................................. 26-4
set authentication login..................................................................................................................... 26-4
clear authentication login.................................................................................................................. 26-5
Configuring RADIUS ..................................................................................................................................... 26-6
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................. 26-6
Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 26-6
show radius ...................................................................................................................................... 26-6
set radius .......................................................................................................................................... 26-7
clear radius ....................................................................................................................................... 26-9
show radius accounting .................................................................................................................. 26-10
set radius accounting...................................................................................................................... 26-10
clear radius accounting................................................................................................................... 26-11
show radius interface...................................................................................................................... 26-12
set radius interface ......................................................................................................................... 26-12
clear radius interface ...................................................................................................................... 26-13
Configuring 802.1X Authentication ............................................................................................................. 26-15
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 26-15
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 26-15
show dot1x ..................................................................................................................................... 26-15
show dot1x auth-config................................................................................................................... 26-17
set dot1x ......................................................................................................................................... 26-18
set dot1x auth-config ...................................................................................................................... 26-19
clear dot1x auth-config ................................................................................................................... 26-20
show eapol ..................................................................................................................................... 26-21
set eapol ......................................................................................................................................... 26-23
clear eapol ...................................................................................................................................... 26-23
Configuring MAC Authentication ................................................................................................................ 26-25
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 26-25
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 26-25
show macauthentication ................................................................................................................. 26-25
show macauthentication session .................................................................................................... 26-27
set macauthentication..................................................................................................................... 26-28
set macauthentication password .................................................................................................... 26-28
clear macauthentication password ................................................................................................. 26-29
set macauthentication port ............................................................................................................. 26-29
set macauthentication portinitialize................................................................................................. 26-30
set macauthentication portquietperiod............................................................................................ 26-30

xxvi

clear macauthentication portquietperiod......................................................................................... 26-31
set macauthentication macinitialize ................................................................................................ 26-31
set macauthentication reauthentication .......................................................................................... 26-32
set macauthentication portreauthenticate.......................................................................................26-32
set macauthentication macreauthenticate ...................................................................................... 26-33
set macauthentication reauthperiod ...............................................................................................26-33
clear macauthentication reauthperiod ............................................................................................ 26-34
set macauthentication significant-bits ............................................................................................. 26-35
clear macauthentication significant-bits .......................................................................................... 26-35
Configuring Multiple Authentication Methods ............................................................................................. 26-37
About Multiple Authentication Types .................................................................................................... 26-37
About Multi-User Authentication ........................................................................................................... 26-37
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 26-37
show multiauth................................................................................................................................ 26-38
set multiauth mode ......................................................................................................................... 26-39
clear multiauth mode ...................................................................................................................... 26-39
set multiauth precedence ............................................................................................................... 26-40
clear multiauth precedence ............................................................................................................26-40
show multiauth port ........................................................................................................................ 26-41
set multiauth port ............................................................................................................................ 26-41
clear multiauth port ......................................................................................................................... 26-42
show multiauth station .................................................................................................................... 26-43
show multiauth session .................................................................................................................. 26-43
show multiauth idle-timeout ............................................................................................................26-44
set multiauth idle-timeout................................................................................................................ 26-45
clear multiauth idle-timeout............................................................................................................. 26-46
show multiauth session-timeout ..................................................................................................... 26-46
set multiauth session-timeout ......................................................................................................... 26-47
clear multiauth session-timeout ...................................................................................................... 26-48
Configuring User + IP Phone Authentication .............................................................................................. 26-48
Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580) ............................................................................................. 26-49
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 26-49
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 26-49
set vlanauthorization....................................................................................................................... 26-50
set vlanauthorization egress ........................................................................................................... 26-50
clear vlanauthorization.................................................................................................................... 26-51
show vlanauthorization ................................................................................................................... 26-51
Configuring Policy Maptable Response ...................................................................................................... 26-52
Operational Description ........................................................................................................................ 26-53
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 26-54
show policy maptable ..................................................................................................................... 26-54
set policy maptable......................................................................................................................... 26-55
clear policy maptable...................................................................................................................... 26-56
Configuring MAC Locking ........................................................................................................................... 26-57
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 26-57
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 26-58
show maclock ................................................................................................................................. 26-58
show maclock stations.................................................................................................................... 26-59
set maclock enable......................................................................................................................... 26-60
set maclock disable ........................................................................................................................ 26-61
set maclock..................................................................................................................................... 26-61
clear maclock.................................................................................................................................. 26-62
set maclock static ........................................................................................................................... 26-63
clear maclock static ........................................................................................................................ 26-63
set maclock firstarrival .................................................................................................................... 26-64
clear maclock firstarrival ................................................................................................................. 26-65
xxvii

set maclock agefirstarrival .............................................................................................................. 26-65
clear maclock agefirstarrival ........................................................................................................... 26-66
set maclock move ........................................................................................................................... 26-66
set maclock trap ............................................................................................................................. 26-67
Configuring Port Web Authentication (PWA) .............................................................................................. 26-68
About PWA ........................................................................................................................................... 26-68
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 26-68
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 26-68
show pwa........................................................................................................................................ 26-69
set pwa ........................................................................................................................................... 26-70
show pwa banner ........................................................................................................................... 26-71
set pwa banner ............................................................................................................................... 26-71
clear pwa banner ............................................................................................................................ 26-72
set pwa displaylogo ........................................................................................................................ 26-72
set pwa ipaddress........................................................................................................................... 26-73
set pwa protocol ............................................................................................................................. 26-73
set pwa guestname ........................................................................................................................ 26-74
clear pwa guestname ..................................................................................................................... 26-74
set pwa guestpassword .................................................................................................................. 26-75
set pwa gueststatus........................................................................................................................ 26-75
set pwa initialize ............................................................................................................................. 26-76
set pwa quietperiod ........................................................................................................................ 26-76
set pwa maxrequest ....................................................................................................................... 26-77
set pwa portcontrol ......................................................................................................................... 26-77
show pwa session .......................................................................................................................... 26-78
set pwa enhancedmode ................................................................................................................. 26-79
Configuring Secure Shell (SSH) ................................................................................................................. 26-80
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 26-80
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 26-80
show ssh status .............................................................................................................................. 26-80
set ssh ............................................................................................................................................ 26-80
set ssh hostkey............................................................................................................................... 26-81
Configuring Access Lists ............................................................................................................................ 26-82
Purpose ................................................................................................................................................ 26-82
Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 26-82
show access-lists............................................................................................................................ 26-82
access-list (standard) ..................................................................................................................... 26-83
access-list (extended)..................................................................................................................... 26-84
ip access-group .............................................................................................................................. 26-86

Chapter 27: TACACS+ Configuration
show tacacs...................................................................................................................................... 27-2
set tacacs ......................................................................................................................................... 27-3
show tacacs server........................................................................................................................... 27-3
set tacacs server .............................................................................................................................. 27-4
clear tacacs server ........................................................................................................................... 27-5
show tacacs session......................................................................................................................... 27-6
set tacacs session ............................................................................................................................ 27-7
clear tacacs session ......................................................................................................................... 27-8
show tacacs command ..................................................................................................................... 27-9
set tacacs command......................................................................................................................... 27-9
show tacacs singleconnect............................................................................................................. 27-10
set tacacs singleconnect ................................................................................................................ 27-10
show tacacs interface ..................................................................................................................... 27-11
set tacacs interface......................................................................................................................... 27-11

xxviii

clear tacacs interface...................................................................................................................... 27-12

Chapter 28: sFlow Configuration
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 28-1
Using sFlow in Your Network ................................................................................................................. 28-1
Definitions .............................................................................................................................................. 28-2
sFlow Agent Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 28-2
Sampling Mechanisms ........................................................................................................................... 28-2
Example Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 28-4
Commands ................................................................................................................................................... 28-4
show sflow receivers ........................................................................................................................ 28-5
set sflow receiver owner ................................................................................................................... 28-7
set sflow receiver ip .......................................................................................................................... 28-7
set sflow receiver maxdatagram ....................................................................................................... 28-8
set sflow receiver port....................................................................................................................... 28-9
clear sflow receiver........................................................................................................................... 28-9
set sflow port poller......................................................................................................................... 28-10
show sflow pollers .......................................................................................................................... 28-11
clear sflow port poller...................................................................................................................... 28-12
set sflow port sampler..................................................................................................................... 28-12
show sflow samplers ...................................................................................................................... 28-13
clear sflow port sampler.................................................................................................................. 28-14
set sflow interface ........................................................................................................................... 28-14
show sflow interface ....................................................................................................................... 28-15
clear sflow interface ........................................................................................................................ 28-16
show sflow agent ............................................................................................................................ 28-17

Appendix A: Policy and Authentication Capacities
Policy Capacities ............................................................................................................................................A-1
Authentication Capacities ...............................................................................................................................A-2

Index
Figures
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
10-1

SecureStack C3 Startup Screen......................................................................................................... 1-6
Sample CLI Defaults Description........................................................................................................ 1-8
Performing a Keyword Lookup ........................................................................................................... 1-8
Performing a Partial Keyword Lookup ................................................................................................ 1-9
Scrolling Screen Output...................................................................................................................... 1-9
Abbreviating a Command ................................................................................................................. 1-10
Example of VLAN Propagation via GVRP ...................................................................................... 10-21

Tables
1-1
1-2
1-3
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
5-1
6-1
6-2

Default Settings for Basic Switch Operation ....................................................................................... 1-2
Default Settings for Router Operation ................................................................................................ 1-4
Basic Line Editing Commands.......................................................................................................... 1-10
Required CLI Setup Commands......................................................................................................... 3-1
Optional CLI Setup Commands.......................................................................................................... 3-2
show system lockout Output Details................................................................................................... 3-8
show system Output Details ............................................................................................................. 3-14
show version Output Details ............................................................................................................. 3-27
show inlinepower Output Details ........................................................................................................ 5-2
show cdp Output Details..................................................................................................................... 6-2
show ciscodp Output Details .............................................................................................................. 6-8

xxix

6-3
6-4
6-5
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
9-1
10-1
10-2
10-3
11-1
11-2
11-3
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-7
14-8
15-1
15-2
15-3
18-1
18-2
19-1
19-2
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-6
20-7
20-8
20-9
20-10
20-11
20-12
20-13
xxx

show ciscodp port info Output Details ................................................................................................ 6-9
show lldp port local-info Output Details ............................................................................................ 6-19
show lldp port remote-info Output Display........................................................................................ 6-22
show port status Output Details.......................................................................................................... 7-4
show port counters Output Details ..................................................................................................... 7-5
show port cablestatus Output Details ................................................................................................. 7-7
show linkflap parameters Output Details .......................................................................................... 7-27
show linkflap metrics Output Details................................................................................................. 7-27
LACP Terms and Definitions ............................................................................................................ 7-43
show lacp Output Details.................................................................................................................. 7-46
SNMP Security Levels........................................................................................................................ 8-3
show snmp engineid Output Details ................................................................................................... 8-4
show snmp counters Output Details ................................................................................................... 8-6
show snmp user Output Details.......................................................................................................... 8-9
show snmp group Output Details ..................................................................................................... 8-12
show snmp access Output Details ................................................................................................... 8-17
show snmp view Output Details ....................................................................................................... 8-21
show snmp targetparams Output Details ......................................................................................... 8-24
show snmp targetaddr Output Details .............................................................................................. 8-27
show snmp notify Output Details ...................................................................................................... 8-32
Basic SNMP Trap Configuration....................................................................................................... 8-38
show spantree Output Details ............................................................................................................ 9-6
Command Set for Creating a Secure Management VLAN ............................................................... 10-2
show vlan Output Details.................................................................................................................. 10-4
show gvrp configuration Output Details .......................................................................................... 10-23
show policy profile Output Details .................................................................................................... 11-3
show policy rule Output Details ........................................................................................................ 11-8
Valid Values for Policy Classification Rules ................................................................................... 11-12
show logging server Output Details.................................................................................................. 14-3
show logging application Output Details........................................................................................... 14-7
Mnemonic Values for Logging Applications...................................................................................... 14-8
show netstat Output Details............................................................................................................ 14-18
show arp Output Details ................................................................................................................. 14-20
show mac Output Details................................................................................................................ 14-23
show sntp Output Details................................................................................................................ 14-30
show nodealias config Output Details ............................................................................................ 14-41
RMON Monitoring Group Functions and Commands ....................................................................... 15-1
show rmon alarm Output Details .................................................................................................... 15-10
show rmon event Output Details .................................................................................................... 15-14
Enabling the Switch for Routing ....................................................................................................... 18-2
Router CLI Configuration Modes ...................................................................................................... 18-2
show ip interface Output Details ....................................................................................................... 19-5
show ip arp Output Details ............................................................................................................. 19-13
RIP Configuration Task List and Commands ................................................................................... 20-2
OSPF Configuration Task List and Commands.............................................................................. 20-11
show ip ospf database Output Details ............................................................................................ 20-28
show ip ospf interface Output Details ............................................................................................. 20-29
show ip ospf neighbor Output Details............................................................................................. 20-30
show ip ospf virtual links Output Details ......................................................................................... 20-31
show ip pimsm Output Details ........................................................................................................ 20-53
show ip pimsm componenettable Output Details ........................................................................... 20-54
show ip pimsm interface vlan Output Details.................................................................................. 20-55
show ip pimsm interface stats Output Details................................................................................. 20-55
show ip pimsm neighbor Output Details ......................................................................................... 20-56
show ip pimsm rp Output Details .................................................................................................... 20-57
show ip pimsm staticrp Output Details ........................................................................................... 20-59

22-1
22-2
22-3
22-4
22-5
24-1
24-2
25-1
25-2
25-3
25-4
25-5
25-6
25-7
25-8
25-9
25-10
25-11
25-12
25-13
26-1
26-2
26-3
26-4
26-5
26-6
26-7
26-8
27-1
28-1
28-2
A-1
A-2

show ipv6 neighbor Output Details ................................................................................................. 22-25
show ipv6 route Output Details....................................................................................................... 22-26
show ipv6 route preferences Output Details................................................................................... 22-27
show ipv6 summary Output Details ................................................................................................ 22-29
show ipv6 traffic Output Details ..................................................................................................... 22-30
Output of show ipv6 dhcp interface Command............................................................................... 24-15
Output of show ipv6 dhcp statistics Command............................................................................... 24-16
show ipv6 ospf Output Details ........................................................................................................ 25-30
show ipv6 ospf area Output Details................................................................................................ 25-31
show ipv6 ospf abr Output Details .................................................................................................. 25-32
show ipv6 ospf asbr Output Details ................................................................................................ 25-33
show ipv6 ospf database Output Details ....................................................................................... 25-36
show ipv6 ospf database database-summary Output Details ........................................................ 25-37
show ipv6 ospf interface Command Output Details........................................................................ 25-39
show ipv6 ospf interface stats Output Details................................................................................. 25-41
show ipv6 ospf neighbor Output Details ........................................................................................ 25-43
show ipv6 ospf neighbor routerid Output Details............................................................................ 25-44
show ipv6 ospf range Output Details .............................................................................................. 25-45
show ipv6 ospf stub table Output Details ....................................................................................... 25-45
show ipv6 ospf virtual-link Output Details ....................................................................................... 25-46
show radius Output Details............................................................................................................... 26-7
show eapol Output Details.............................................................................................................. 26-22
show macauthentication Output Details ......................................................................................... 26-26
show macauthentication session Output Details ............................................................................ 26-27
show vlanauthorization Output Details ........................................................................................... 26-52
show maclock Output Details ......................................................................................................... 26-59
show maclock stations Output Details............................................................................................ 26-60
show pwa Output Details................................................................................................................ 26-69
show tacacs Output Details .............................................................................................................. 27-2
sFlow Definitions .............................................................................................................................. 28-2
show sflow receivers Output Descriptions ........................................................................................ 28-6
Policy Capacities ................................................................................................................................A-1
Authentication Capacities ...................................................................................................................A-2

xxxi

xxxii

About This Guide
Welcome to the Enterasys® SecureStack™ C3 Configuration Guide. This manual explains how to
access the device’s Command Line Interface (CLI) and how to use it to configure SecureStack C3
switch devices.

Important Notice
Depending on the firmware version used in your C3 device, some features described in this
document may not be supported. Refer to the Release Notes shipped with your device to
determine which features are supported.

Using This Guide
A general working knowledge of basic network operations and an understanding of CLI
management applications is helpful before configuring the SecureStack device.
This manual describes how to do the following:
•

Access the SecureStack CLI.

•

Use CLI commands to perform network management and device configuration operations

•

Establish and manage Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs).

•

Establish and manage static and dynamically‐assigned policy classifications.

•

Establish and manage priority classification.

•

Configure IP routing and routing protocols, including RIP versions 1 and 2, OSPF, DVMRP,
IRDP, and VRRP.

•

Configure IPv6 routing, including OSPFv3.

•

Configure security protocols, including 802.1X and RADIUS, SSHv2, PWA, MAC locking, and
MAC authentication.

•

Configure access control lists (ACLs).

Structure of This Guide
The guide is organized as follows:
Chapter 1, Introduction, provides an overview of the tasks that can be accomplished using the
CLI interface, an overview of local management requirements, an overview of the device’s factory
default settings, and information about using the Command Line Interface (CLI).
Chapter 2, Configuring Switches in a Stack, provides information about how to configure and
manage stacked switches.
Chapter 3, Basic Configuration, provides how to set basic system properties, how to download a
firmware image, how to configure WebView and Telnet, how to manage configuration files, how
to set the login password, and how to exit the CLI.
Chapter 4, Activating Licensed Features describes the commands used to enable advanced
routing and IPv6 routing licensed features.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

xxxiii

Structure of This Guide

Chapter 5, Configuring System Power and PoE, describes the commands used to review and set
system power and PoE parameters on devices that offer Power over Ethernet.
Chapter 6, Discovery Protocol Configuration provides how to configure discovery protocols
supported by the device.
Chapter 7, Port Configuration, describes how to review and configure console port settings, and
how to enable or disable switch ports and configure switch port settings, including port speed,
duplex mode, auto‐negotiation, flow control, port mirroring, link aggegation and broadcast
suppression.
Chapter 8, SNMP Configuration, describes how to configure SNMP users and user groups, access
rights, target addresses, and notification parameters.
Chapter 9, Spanning Tree Configuration, describes how to review and set Spanning Tree bridge
parameters for the device, including bridge priority, hello time, maximum aging time and forward
delay; and how to review and set Spanning Tree port parameters, including port priority and path
costs. Configuring the SpanGuard and Loop Protect functions is also described.
Chapter 10, 802.1Q VLAN Configuration, describes how to create static VLANs, select the mode
of operation for each port, establish VLAN forwarding (egress) lists, route frames according to
VLAN ID, display the current ports and port types associated with a VLAN and protocol, create a
secure management VLAN, and configure ports on the device as GVRP‐aware ports.
Chapter 11, Policy Classification Configuration, describes how to create, change or remove user
roles or profiles based on business‐specific use of network services; how to permit or deny access
to specific services by creating and assigning classification rules which map user profiles to frame
filtering policies; how to classify frames to a VLAN or Class of Service (CoS); and how to assign or
unassign ports to policy profiles so that only ports activated for a profile will be allowed to
transmit frames accordingly.
Chapter 12, Port Priority Configuration, describes how to set the transmit priority of each port
and configure a rate limit for a given port and list of priorities.
Chapter 13, IGMP Configuration, describes how to configure Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) settings for multicast filtering.
Chapter 14, Logging and Network Management, describes how to configure Syslog, how to
manage general switch settings, how to monitor network events and status,and how to configure
SNTP and node aliases.
Chapter 15, RMON Configuration, describes how to use RMON (Remote Network Monitoring),
which provides comprehensive network fault diagnosis, planning, and performance tuning
information and allows for interoperability between SNMP management stations and monitoring
agents.
Chapter 16, DHCP Server Configuration, describes how to review and configure DHCP server
parameters, how to review and configure DHCP address pools, and how to display DHCP server
information.
Chapter 17, DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection, describes two security features:
DHCP snooping, which monitors DHCP messages between a DHCP client and DHCP server to
filter harmful DHCP messages and to build a database of authorized address bindings, and
Dynamic ARP inspection, which uses the bindings database created by the DHCP snooping
feature to reject invalid and malicious ARP packets.
Chapter 18, Preparing for Router Mode, provides information about router modes.
Chapter 19, IP Configuration, describes how to enable IP routing for router mode operation, how
to configure IP interface settings, how to review and configure the routing ARP table, how to
review and configure routing broadcasts, how to configure PIM, and how to configure IP routes.

xxxiv

About This Guide

Related Documents

Chapter 20, IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration, describes how to configure IPv4 routing and
routing protocols, including RIP, OSPF, DVMRP, IRDP, and VRRP.
Chapter 21, IPv6 Management, describes the commands used to configure IPv6 at the switch
level.
Chapter 22, IPv6 Configuration, describes the commands used to configure IPv6 at the routing
level.
Chapter 23, IPv6 Proxy Routing, describes how to enable IPv6 proxy routing and how to
configure a mixed C2/C3 stack for IPv6 proxy routing.
Chapter 24, DHCPv6 Configuration, describes the commands used to configure the Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6.
Chapter 25, OSPFv3 Configuration, describes the commands used to configure the Open Shortest
Path First routing protocol for IPv6.
Chapter 26, Authentication and Authorization Configuration, describes how to configure 802.1X
authentication using EAPOL, how to configure RADIUS server, Secure Shell server, MAC
authentication, MAC locking, Port Web Authentication, and IP access control lists (ACLs).
Chapter 27, TACACS+ Configuration, provides information about the commands used to
configure and monitor TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access‐Control System Plus).

Chapter 28, sFlow Configuration, provides information about the commands used to configure
and monitor the sFlow system.
Appendix A, Policy and Authentication Capacities, lists the policy and authentication capacities
of the SecureStack C3 as of the date this document was published.

Related Documents
The following Enterasys Networks documents may help you to set up, control, and manage the
SecureStack device:
•

Enterasys Firmware Feature Guides

•

SecureStack C3 Installation Guide(s)

•

SecureStack Redundant Power System Installation Guide

Documents listed above, can be obtained from the World Wide Web in Adobe Acrobat Portable
Document Format (PDF) at the following web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

xxxv

Conventions Used in This Guide

Conventions Used in This Guide
The following conventions are used in the text of this document:
Convention

Description

Bold font

Indicates mandatory keywords, parameters or keyboard keys.

italic font

Indicates complete document titles.

Courier font

Used for examples of information displayed on the screen.

Courier font in italics

Indicates a user-supplied value, either required or optional.

[]

Square brackets indicate an optional value.

{}

Braces indicate required values. One or more values may be required.

|

A vertical bar indicates a choice in values.

[x | y | z]

Square brackets with a vertical bar indicate a choice of a value.

{x | y | z}

Braces with a vertical bar indicate a choice of a required value.

[x {y | z} ]

A combination of square brackets with braces and vertical bars indicates a
required choice of an optional value.

The following icons are used in this guide:

Note: Calls the reader’s attention to any item of information that may be of special importance.

Router: Calls the reader’s attention to router-specific commands and information.

Caution: Contains information essential to avoid damage to the equipment.

xxxvi

About This Guide

Getting Help

Getting Help
For additional support related to this switch or document, contact Enterasys Networks using one
of the following methods:
World Wide Web

http://www.enterasys.com/support
1-800-872-8440 (toll-free in U.S. and Canada)
or 1-978-684-1000

Phone

For the Enterasys Networks Support toll-free number in your country:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/contact/
support@enterasys.com

Internet mail

To expedite your message, type [C-SERIES] in the subject line.

To send comments or suggestions concerning this document to the Technical Publications Department:
techpubs@enterasys.com
Make sure to include the document Part Number in the email message.

Before calling Enterasys Networks, have the following information ready:
•

Your Enterasys Networks service contract number

•

A description of the failure

•

A description of any action(s) already taken to resolve the problem (for example, changing
mode switches or rebooting the unit)

•

The serial and revision numbers of all involved Enterasys Networks products in the network

•

A description of your network environment (for example, layout, cable type)

•

Network load and frame size at the time of trouble (if known)

•

The switch history (for example, have you returned the switch before, is this a recurring
problem?)

•

Any previous Return Material Authorization (RMA) numbers

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

xxxvii

Getting Help

xxxviii

About This Guide

1
Introduction
This chapter provides an overview of the SecureStack C3’s unique features and functionality, an
overview of the tasks that may be accomplished using the CLI interface, an overview of ways to
manage the switch, factory default settings, and information about how to use the Command Line
Interface to configure the switch.
For information about...

Refer to page...

SecureStack C3 CLI Overview

1-1

Switch Management Methods

1-1

Factory Default Settings

1-2

Using the Command Line Interface

1-6

SecureStack C3 CLI Overview
The Enterasys Networks SecureStack C3 CLI interface allows you to perform a variety of network
management tasks, including the following:
•

Use CLI commands to perform network management and switch configuration operations.

•

Download a new firmware image.

•

Assign IP address and subnet mask.

•

Select a default gateway.

•

Establish and manage Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs).

•

Establish and manage policy profiles and classifications.

•

Establish and manage priority classification.

•

Configure IPv4 routing and routing protocols.

•

Configure IPv6 routing and routing protocols, including OSPFv3.

•

Configure security protocols, including 802.1X and RADIUS, SSHv2, PWA, MAC locking, and
MAC authentication.

•

Configure access control lists (ACLs).

Switch Management Methods
The SecureStack C3 switch can be managed using the following methods:
•

Locally using a VT type terminal connected to the console port.

•

Remotely using a VT type terminal connected through a modem.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

1-1

Factory Default Settings

•

Remotely using an SNMP management station.

•

In‐band through a Telnet connection.

•

In‐band using the Enterasys NetSight® management application.

•

Remotely using WebView™, Enterasys Networks’ embedded web server application.

The Installation Guide for your SecureStack C3 device provides setup instructions for connecting a
terminal or modem to the switch.

Factory Default Settings
The following tables list factory default settings available on the SecureStack C3 switch.
Table 1-1

Default Settings for Basic Switch Operation

Feature

Default Setting

Switch Mode Defaults
CDP discovery protocol

Auto enabled on all ports.

CDP authentication code

Set to 00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00

CDP hold time

Set to 180 seconds.

CDP interval

Transmit frequency of CDP messages set to 60 seconds.

Cisco discovery protocol

Auto enabled on all ports.

Cisco DP hold time

Set to 180 seconds.

Cisco DP interval timer

Set to 60 seconds.

Community name

Public.

Console (serial) port
required settings

Baud rate: 9600
Data bits: 8
Flow control: disabled
Stop bits: 1
Parity: none

1-2

Introduction

DHCP server

Disabled.

EAPOL

Disabled.

EAPOL authentication
mode

When enabled, set to auto for all ports.

GARP timer

Join timer set to 20 centiseconds; leave timer set to 60 centiseconds; leaveall
timer set to 1000 centiseconds.

GVRP

Globally enabled.

History buffer size

20 lines.

IEEE 802.1 authentication

Disabled.

IGMP snooping

Disabled. When enabled, query interval is set to 260 seconds and response
time is set to 10 seconds.

IP mask and gateway

Subnet mask set to 0.0.0.0; default gateway set to 0.0.0.0.

IP routes

No static routes configured.

Jumbo frame support

Enabled on all ports.

Factory Default Settings

Table 1-1

Default Settings for Basic Switch Operation (Continued)

Feature

Default Setting

Link aggregation control
protocol (LACP)

Enabled.

Link aggregation admin
key

Set to 32768 for all ports.

Link aggregation flow
regeneration

Disabled.

Link aggregation system
priority

Set to 32768 for all ports.

Link aggregation outport
algorithm

Set to DIP-SIP.

Lockout

Set to disable Read-Write and Read-Only users, and to lockout the default
admin (Super User) account for 15 minutes, after 3 failed login attempts.

Logging

Syslog port set to UDP port number 514. Logging severity level set to 6
(significant conditions) for all applications.

MAC aging time

Set to 300 seconds.

MAC locking

Disabled (globally and on all ports).

Passwords

Set to an empty string for all default user accounts. User must press ENTER
at the password prompt to access CLI.

Password aging

Disabled.

Password history

No passwords are checked for duplication.

Policy classification

Classification rules are automatically enabled when created.

Port auto-negotiation

Enabled on all ports.

Port advertised ability

Maximum ability advertised on all ports.

Port broadcast suppression Enabled and set to limit broadcast packets to 14,881 per second on all switch
ports.
Port duplex mode

Set to half duplex, except for 100BASE-FX and 1000BASE-X, which is set to
full duplex.

Port enable/disable

Enabled.

Port priority

Set to 0.

Port speed

Set to 10 Mbps, except for 1000BASE-X, which is set to 1000 Mbps, and
100BASE-FX, which is set to 100 Mbps.

Port trap

All ports are enabled to send link traps.

Power over Ethernet port
admin state

Administrative state is on (auto).

Priority classification

Classification rules are automatically enabled when created.

RADIUS client

Disabled.

RADIUS last resort action

When the client is enabled, set to Challenge.

RADIUS retries

When the client is enabled, set to 3.

RADIUS timeout

When the client is enabled, set to 20 seconds.

Rate limiting

Disabled (globally and on all ports).

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

1-3

Factory Default Settings

Table 1-1

Default Settings for Basic Switch Operation (Continued)

Feature

Default Setting

SNMP

Enabled.

SNTP

Disabled.

Spanning Tree

Globally enabled and enabled on all ports.

Spanning Tree edge port
administrative status

Edge port administrative status begins with the value set to false initially after
the device is powered up. If a Spanning Tree BDPU is not received on the
port within a few seconds, the status setting changes to true.

Spanning Tree edge port
delay

Enabled.

Spanning Tree forward
delay

Set to 15 seconds.

Spanning Tree hello
interval

Set to 2 seconds.

Spanning Tree ID (SID)

Set to 0.

Spanning Tree maximum
aging time

Set to 20 seconds.

Spanning Tree port priority

All ports with bridge priority are set to 128 (medium priority).

Spanning Tree priority

Bridge priority is set to 32768.

Spanning Tree topology
change trap suppression

Enabled.

Spanning Tree version

Set to mstp (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol).

SSH

Disabled.

System baud rate

Set to 9600 baud.

System contact

Set to empty string.

System location

Set to empty string.

System name

Set to empty string.

Terminal

CLI display set to 80 columns and 24 rows.

Timeout

Set to 5 minutes.

User names

Login accounts set to ro for Read-Only access; rw for Read-Write access;
and admin for Super User access.

VLAN dynamic egress

Disabled on all VLANs.

VLAN ID

All ports use a VLAN identifier of 1.

Host VLAN

Default host VLAN is 1.

Not all of the following routing features are available on all platforms. Check the Release Notes for
your specific platforms for details.
Table 1-2

1-4

Introduction

Default Settings for Router Operation

Output...

What it displays...

Access groups (IP security)

None configured.

Access lists (IP security)

None configured.

Factory Default Settings

Table 1-2

Default Settings for Router Operation (Continued)

Output...

What it displays...

Area authentication (OSPF)

Disabled.

Area default cost (OSPF)

Set to 1.

Area NSSA (OSPF)

None configured.

Area range (OSPF)

None configured.

ARP table

No permanent entries configured.

ARP timeout

Set to 14,400 seconds.

Authentication key (RIP and OSPF)

None configured.

Authentication mode (RIP and OSPF)

None configured.

Dead interval (OSPF)

Set to 40 seconds.

Disable triggered updates (RIP)

Triggered updates allowed.

Distribute list (RIP)

No filters applied.

DVMRP

Disabled. Metric set to 1.

Hello interval (OSPF)

Set to 10 seconds for broadcast and point-to-point networks. Set
to 30 seconds for non-broadcast and point-to-multipoint networks.

ICMP

Enabled for echo-reply and mask-reply modes.

IP-directed broadcasts

Disabled.

IP forward-protocol

Enabled with no port specified.

IP interfaces

Disabled with no IP addresses specified.

IRDP

Disabled on all interfaces. When enabled, maximum
advertisement interval is set to 600 seconds, minimum
advertisement interval is set to 450 seconds, holdtime is set to
1800 seconds, and address preference is set to 0.

MD5 authentication (OSPF)

Disabled with no password set.

MTU size

Set to 1500 bytes on all interfaces.

OSPF

Disabled.

OSPF cost

Set to 10 for all interfaces.

OSPF network

None configured.

OSPF priority

Set to 1.

Passive interfaces (RIP)

None configured.

Proxy ARP

Enabled on all interfaces.

Receive interfaces (RIP)

Enabled on all interfaces.

Retransmit delay (OSPF)

Set to 1 second.

Retransmit interval (OSPF)

Set to 5 seconds.

RIP receive version

Set to accept both version 1 and version 2.

RIP send version

Set to version 1.

RIP offset

No value applied.

SNMP

Enabled.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

1-5

Using the Command Line Interface

Table 1-2

Default Settings for Router Operation (Continued)

Output...

What it displays...

Split horizon

Enabled for RIP packets without poison reverse.

Stub area (OSPF)

None configured.

Telnet

Enabled.

Telnet port (IP)

Set to port number 23.

Timers (OSPF)

SPF delay set to 5 seconds. SPF holdtime set to 10 seconds.

Transmit delay (OSPF)

Set to 1 second.

VRRP

Disabled.

Using the Command Line Interface
Starting a CLI Session
Connecting Using the Console Port
Connect a terminal to the local console port as described in your SecureStack C3 Installation Guide.
The startup screen, Figure 1‐1, will display on the terminal. You can now start the Command Line
Interface (CLI) by
•

using a default user account, as described in “Using a Default User Account” on page 1‐7, or

•

using an administratively‐assigned user account as described in “Using an Administratively
Configured User Account” on page 1‐7.

Figure 1-1

SecureStack C3 Startup Screen

Username:admin
Password:
Enterasys SecureStack C3
Command Line Interface
Enterasys Networks, Inc.
50 Minuteman Rd.
Andover, MA 01810-1008 U.S.A.
Phone: +1 978 684 1000
E-mail: support@enterasys.com
WWW: http://www.enterasys.com
(c) Copyright Enterasys Networks, Inc. 2008
Chassis Serial Number:
Chassis Firmware Revision:

C3(su)->

1-6

Introduction

041800249041
6.03.xx.xxxx

Using the Command Line Interface

Connecting Using Telnet
Once the SecureStack C3 device has a valid IP address, you can establish a Telnet session from any
TCP/IP based node on the network. For information about setting the switch’s IP address, refer to
“set ip address” on page 3‐11.
To establish a Telnet session:
1.

Telnet to the switch’s IP address.

2.

Enter login (user name) and password information in one of the following ways:
–

If the switch’s default login and password settings have not been changed, follow the
steps listed in “Using a Default User Account” on page 1‐7, or

–

Enter an administratively‐configured user name and password.

The notice of authorization and the prompt displays as shown in Figure 1‐1.
For information about configuring Telnet settings, refer to “Starting and Configuring Telnet” on
page 3‐37.
Refer to the instructions included with the Telnet application for information about establishing a
Telnet session.

Logging In
By default, the SecureStack C3 switch is configured with three user login accounts—ro for
Read‐Only access, rw for Read‐Write access, and admin for super‐user access to all modifiable
parameters. The default password is set to a blank string. For information on changing these
default settings, refer to “Setting User Accounts and Passwords” on page 3‐2.

Using a Default User Account
If this is the first time you are logging in to the SecureStack C3 switch, or if the default user
accounts have not been administratively changed, proceed as follows:
1.

At the login prompt, enter one of the following default user names:
–

ro for Read‐Only access.

–

rw for Read‐Write access.

–

admin for Super User access.

2.

Press ENTER. The Password prompt displays.

3.

Leave this string blank and press ENTER. The switch information and prompt displays as
shown in Figure 1‐1.

Using an Administratively Configured User Account
If the switch’s default user account settings have been changed, proceed as follows:
1.

At the login prompt, enter your administratively‐assigned user name and press ENTER.

2.

At the Password prompt, enter your password and press ENTER.

The notice of authorization and the prompt displays as shown in Figure 1‐1.
Note: Users with Read-Write (rw) and Read-Only access can use the set password command
(page 3-5) to change their own passwords. Administrators with Super User (su) access can use
the set system login command (page 3-4) to create and change user accounts, and the set
password command to change any local account password.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

1-7

Using the Command Line Interface

Navigating the Command Line Interface
Getting Help with CLI Syntax
The SecureStack C3 switch allows you to display usage and syntax information for individual
commands by typing help or ? after the command.

CLI Command Defaults Descriptions
Each command description in this guide includes a section entitled “Defaults” which contains
different information from the factory default settings on the switch described in Table 1‐1. The
section defines CLI behavior if the user enters a command without typing optional parameters
(indicated by square brackets [ ]). For commands without optional parameters, the defaults
section lists “None”. For commands with optional parameters, this section describes how the CLI
responds if the user opts to enter only the keywords of the command syntax. Figure 1‐2 provides
an example.
Figure 1-2

Sample CLI Defaults Description

Syntax
show port status [port-string]

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, status information for all ports will be displayed.

CLI Command Modes
Each command description in this guide includes a section entitled “Mode” which states whether
the command is executable in Admin (Super User), Read‐Write, or Read‐Only mode. Users with
Read‐Only access will only be permitted to view Read‐Only (show) commands. Users with Read‐
Write access will be able to modify all modifiable parameters in set and show commands, as well
as view Read‐Only commands. Administrators or Super Users will be allowed all Read‐Write and
Read‐Only privileges, and will be able to modify local user accounts. The SecureStack C3 switch
indicates which mode a user is logged in as by displaying one of the following prompts:
•

Admin: C3(su)‐>

•

Read‐Write: C3(rw)‐>

•

Read‐Only: C3(ro)‐>

Performing Keyword Lookups
Entering a space and a question mark (?) after a keyword will display all commands beginning
with the keyword. Figure 1‐3 shows how to perform a keyword lookup for the show snmp
command. In this case, four additional keywords are used by the show snmp command. Entering
a space and a question mark (?) after any of these parameters (such as show snmp community)
will display additional parameters nested within the syntax.
Figure 1-3

Performing a Keyword Lookup

C3(su)->show snmp ?
community
notify
targetaddr
targetparams

1-8

Introduction

SNMP
SNMP
SNMP
SNMP

v1/v2c
notify
target
target

community name configuration
configuration
address configuration
parameters configuration

Using the Command Line Interface

Entering a question mark (?) without a space after a partial keyword will display a list of
commands that begin with the partial keyword. Figure 1‐4 shows how to use this function for all
commands beginning with co:
Figure 1-4

Performing a Partial Keyword Lookup

C3(rw)->co?
configure
C3(su)->co

copy

Note: At the end of the lookup display, the system will repeat the command you entered without the
?.

Displaying Scrolling Screens
If the CLI screen length has been set using the set length command as described on page 3‐29, CLI
output requiring more than one screen will display --More-- to indicate continuing screens. To
display additional screen output:
•

Press any key other than ENTER to advance the output one screen at a time.

•

Press ENTER to advance the output one line at a time.

The example in Figure 1‐5 shows how the show mac command indicates that output continues on
more than one screen.
Figure 1-5

Scrolling Screen Output

C3(su)->show mac
MAC Address
FID
Port
Type
---------------------------------------------------------00-00-1d-67-68-69
1
host
Management
00-00-02-00-00-00
1
ge.1.2
Learned
00-00-02-00-00-01
1
ge.1.3
Learned
00-00-02-00-00-02
1
ge.1.4
Learned
00-00-02-00-00-03
1
ge.1.5
Learned
00-00-02-00-00-04
1
ge.1.6
Learned
00-00-02-00-00-05
1
ge.1.7
Learned
00-00-02-00-00-06
1
ge.1.8
Learned
00-00-02-00-00-07
1
ge.1.9
Learned
00-00-02-00-00-08
1
ge.1.10
Learned
--More--

Abbreviating and Completing Commands
The SecureStack C3 switch allows you to abbreviate CLI commands and keywords down to the
number of characters that will allow for a unique abbreviation. Figure 1‐6 shows how to
abbreviate the show netstat command to sh net.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

1-9

Using the Command Line Interface

Figure 1-6

Abbreviating a Command

C3(su)->sh net
Active Internet connections (including servers)
Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address
Foreign Address
----- ------ ------ --------------------- --------------------TCP
0
0 10.21.73.13.23
134.141.190.94.51246
TCP
0
275 10.21.73.13.23
134.141.192.119.4724
TCP
0
0 *.80
*.*
TCP
0
0 *.23
*.*
UDP
0
0 10.21.73.13.1030
134.141.89.113.514
UDP
0
0 *.161
*.*
UDP
0
0 *.1025
*.*
UDP
0
0 *.123
*.*

State
------ESTABLISHED
ESTABLISHED
LISTEN
LISTEN

Basic Line Editing Commands
The CLI supports EMACs‐like line editing commands. Table 1‐3 lists some commonly used
commands.
Table 1-3

1-10

Introduction

Basic Line Editing Commands

Key Sequence

Command

Ctrl+A

Move cursor to beginning of line.

Ctrl+B

Move cursor back one character.

Ctrl+D

Delete a character.

Ctrl+E

Move cursor to end of line.

Ctrl+F

Move cursor forward one character.

Ctrl+H

Delete character to left of cursor.

Ctrl+I or TAB

Complete word.

Ctrl+K

Delete all characters after cursor.

Ctrl+N

Scroll to next command in command history (use the CLI history command to
display the history).

Ctrl+P

Scroll to previous command in command history.

Ctr1+Q

Resume the CLI process.

Ctr1+S

Pause the CLI process (for scrolling).

Ctrl+T

Transpose characters.

Ctrl+U or Ctrl+X

Delete all characters before cursor.

Ctrl+W

Delete word to the left of cursor.

Ctrl+Y

Restore the most recently deleted item.

2
Configuring Switches in a Stack
This chapter provides information about configuring SecureStack C3 switches in a stack.
For information about ...

Refer to page ...

About SecureStack C3 Switch Operation in a Stack

2-1

Installing a New Stackable System of Up to Eight Units

2-2

Installing Previously-Configured Systems in a Stack

2-3

Adding a New Unit to an Existing Stack

2-3

Creating a Virtual Switch Configuration

2-3

Considerations About Using Clear Config in a Stack

2-5

Issues Related to Mixed Type Stacks

2-5

Stacking Configuration and Management Commands

2-6

About SecureStack C3 Switch Operation in a Stack
The SecureStack C3 products are stackable switches that can be adapted and scaled to help meet
your network needs. These switches provide a management platform and uplink to a network
backbone for a stacked group of up to eight SecureStack C3 switches.
Note: You can mix SecureStack C2 and C3 switches in a single stack, although only the lowest
common denominator of functionality will be supported in a mixed stack. Refer to “Issues Related to
Mixed Type Stacks” on page 2-5 for information about configuring a mixed stack.

Once installed in a stack, the switches behave and perform as a single switch product. As such,
you can start with a single unit and add more units as your network expands. You can also mix
different products in the family in a single stack to provide a desired combination of port types
and functions to match the requirements of individual applications. In all cases, a stack of units
performs as one large product, and is managed as a single network entity.
When switches are installed and connected as described in the SecureStack C3 Installation Guides,
the following occurs during initialization:
•

The switch that will manage the stack is automatically established. This is known as the
manager switch.

•

All other switches are established as members in the stack.

•

The hierarchy of the switches that will assume the function of backup manager is also
determined in case the current manager malfunctions, is powered down, or is disconnected
from the stack.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

2-1

Installing a New Stackable System of Up to Eight Units

•

The console port on the manager switch remains active for out‐of‐band (local) switch
management, but the console port on each member switch is deactivated. This enables you to
set the IP address and system password using a single console port. Now each switch can be
configured locally using only the manager’s console port, or inband using a remote device and
the CLI set of commands described in this section.

Once a stack is created (more than one switch is interconnected), the following procedure occurs:
1.

By default, unit IDs are arbitrarily assigned on a first‐come, first‐served basis.

2.

Unit IDs are saved against each module. Then, every time a board is power‐cycled, it will
initialize with the same unit ID. This is important for port‐specific information (for example:
ge.4.12 is the 12th Gigabit Ethernet port on Unit # 4).

3.

The management election process uses the following precedence to assign a management
switch:
a.

Previously assigned / elected management unit

b.

Management assigned priority (values 1‐15)

c.

Hardware preference level

d. Highest MAC Address
Use the following recommended procedures when installing a new stackable system or adding a
new unit to an existing stack.

Important
The following procedures assume that all units have a clean configuration from manufacturing. When adding
a new unit to an already running stack, it is also assumed that the new unit is using the same firmware image
version as other units in the stack.

Installing a New Stackable System of Up to Eight Units
Use the following procedure for installing a new stack of up to eight units out of the box.
1.

Before applying power, make all physical connections with the stack cables as described in the
SecureStack C3 Installation Guides.

2.

Once all of the stack cables have been connected, individually power on each unit from top to
bottom.
Notes: Ensure that each switch is fully operational before applying power to the next switch.
Since unit IDs are assigned on a first-come, first-served basis, this will ensure that unit IDs are
ordered sequentially.
Once unit IDs are assigned, they are persistent and will be retained during a power cycle to any or
all of the units.

2-2

3.

(Optional) If desired, change the management unit using the set switch movemanagement
command as described in “set switch movemanagement” on page 2‐11.

4.

Once the desired master unit has been selected, reset the system using the reset command
(page 3‐50).

5.

After the stack has been configured, you can use the show switch unit command (page 2‐6) to
physically identify each unit. When you enter the command with a unit number, the MGR
LED of the specified switch will blink for 10 seconds. The normal state of this LED is off for
member units and steady green for the manager unit.

Configuring Switches in a Stack

Installing Previously-Configured Systems in a Stack

Installing Previously-Configured Systems in a Stack
If member units in a stack have been previous members of a different stack, you may need to
configure the renumbering of the stack as follows:
1.

Stack the units in the method desired, and connect the stack cables.

2.

Power up only the unit you wish to be manager.

3.

Once the management unit is powered up, log into the CLI, and use the show switch
command as described in “show switch” on page 2‐6 to display stacking information.

4.

Clear any switches which are listed as “unassigned” using the clear switch member
command as described in “clear switch member” on page 2‐12.

5.

Power up the member of the stack you wish to become unit 2. Once the second unit is fully
powered, the COM session of the CLI will state that a new CPU was added.

6.

Use the show switch command to redisplay stacking information.
a.

If the new member displays as unit 2, you can proceed to repeat this step with the next
unit.

b.

If the new member displays a different unit number, you must:
(1) Renumber the stack using the set switch renumber command as described in “set
switch” on page 2‐9, then
(2) Clear the original unit number using the clear switch member command.

7.

Repeat Step 6 until all members have been renumbered in the order you desire.

8.

After the stack has been reconfigured, you can use the show switch unit command (“show
switch” on page 2‐6) to physically confirm the identity of each unit. When you enter the
command with a unit number, the MGR LED of the specified switch will blink for 10 seconds.
The normal state of this LED is off for member units and steady green for the manager unit.

Adding a New Unit to an Existing Stack
Use the following procedure for installing a new unit to an existing stack configuration. This
procedure assumes that the new unit being added has a clean configuration from manufacturing
and is running the same firmware image version as other units in the stack.
1.

Ensure that power is off on the new unit being installed.

2.

Use one of the following methods to complete stack cable connections:

3.

–

If the running stack uses a daisy chain topology, make the stack cable connections from
the bottom of the stack to the new unit (that is, STACK DOWN port from the bottom unit
of the running stack to the STACK UP port on the new unit).

–

If the running stack uses a ring stack topology, break the ring and make the stack cable
connections to the new unit to close the ring.

Apply power to the new unit.

Creating a Virtual Switch Configuration
You can create a configuration for a SecureStack C3 switch before adding the actual physical
device to a stack. This preconfiguration feature includes configuring protocols on the ports of the
“virtual switch.”

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

2-3

Creating a Virtual Switch Configuration

To create a virtual switch configuration in a stack environment:
1.

Display the types of switches supported in the stack, using the show switch switchtype
command (page 2‐7).

2.

Using the output of the show switch switchtype command, determine the switch index (SID)
of the model of switch being configured.

3.

Add the virtual switch to the stack using the set switch member command (page 2‐11). Use
the SID of the switch model, determined in the previous step, and the unit ID that you want to
assign to this switch member.

4.

Proceed to configure the ports of the virtual switch as you would do for physically present
devices.

The following example adds a C3G124‐24 mode to a stack as unit 2 of the stack. The first port on
that virtual switch is then associated with VLAN 555.
C3(su)->show switch switchtype
SID
--1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
17

Switch Model ID
-------------------------------C2G124-24
C2K122-24
C2G124-48
C2G124-48P
C2H124-48
C2H124-48P
C2G134-24P
C2G170-24
C3G124-24P
C3G124-48P
C3G124-48
C3G124-24
C3K172-24
C3K122-24
C3K122-24P

Mgmt
Pref
---1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Code
Version
--------0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245

C3(su)->set switch member 2 12
C3(su)->show switch
Management
Preconfig
Plugged-in
Switch
Code
Switch
Status
Model ID
Model ID
Status
Version
------ ------------ ------------- ------------- --------------------- -------1
Mgmt Switch C3G124-48
C3G124-48
OK
6.03.xx.xxxx
2
Unassigned
C3G124-24
Not Present
00.00.00
C3(su)->set vlan create 555
C3(su)->clear vlan egress 1 ge.2.1
C3(su)->set port vlan ge.2.1 555 untagged
C3(su)->show port vlan ge.2.1
ge.2.1 is set to 555
Note: If you preconfigure a virtual switch and then add a physical switch of a different type to the
stack as that unit number, any configured functionality that cannot be supported on the physical
switch will cause a configuration mismatch status for that device and the ports of the new device will
join detached. You must clear the mismatch before the new device will properly join the stack.

2-4

Configuring Switches in a Stack

Considerations About Using Clear Config in a Stack

Considerations About Using Clear Config in a Stack
When using the clear config command (page 3‐51) to clear configuration parameters in a stack, it
is important to remember the following:
•

Use clear config to clear config parameters without clearing stack unit IDs. This command
WILL NOT clear stack parameters or the IP address and avoids the process of renumbering
the stack.

•

Use clear config all when it is necessary to clear all config parameters, including stack unit
IDs and switch priority values. This command will not clear the IP address nor will it remove
an applied advanced feature license.

•

Use clear ip address to remove the IP address of the stack.

•

Use clear license to remove an applied license from a switch.

Configuration parameters and stacking information can also be cleared on the master unit only
by selecting the “restore configuration to factory defaults” option from the boot menu on switch
startup. This selection will leave stacking priorities on all other units.

Issues Related to Mixed Type Stacks
Feature Support
Because the SecureStack C2 and C3 switches have different hardware architectures, the
functionality supported by the two switch types is different. When the two types of switches are
mixed in a stack, the functionality supported will be the lowest common denominator of features
supported on all platforms. Refer to the firmware Release Notes for information about supported
features.

Configuration
Common Firmware Version
Mixed stacking is supported by SecureStack C2 firmware version 5.02.xx.xxxx only. You can install
the C2 firmware first, with the C3 switch in stand‐alone mode, or you can add the C3 switch to the
stack and then copy the C2 firmware to the C3 switch using the set switch copy‐fw command
(page 2‐10). After copying the C2 firmware to the C3 switch, you must reset the stack.

Switch Manager
It is recommended that a SecureStack C3 switch be made the manager of a mixed stack. Use the set
switch movemanagement command (page 2‐11) to change the manager unit.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

2-5

Stacking Configuration and Management Commands

Stacking Configuration and Management Commands
Purpose
To review, individually configure and manage switches in a SecureStack C3 stack.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show switch

2-6

show switch switchtype

2-7

show switch stack-ports

2-8

set switch

2-9

set switch copy-fw

2-10

set switch description

2-10

set switch movemanagement

2-11

set switch member

2-11

clear switch member

2-12

show switch
Use this command to display information about one or more units in the stack.

Syntax
show switch [status] [unit]

Parameters
status

(Optional) Displays power and administrative status information for one
or more units in the stack.

unit

(Optional) Specifies the unit(s) for which information will display.

Defaults
If not specified, status and other configuration information about all units will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
After a stack has been configured, you can use this command to physically confirm the identity of
each unit. When you enter the command with a unit number, the MGR LED of the specified
switch will blink for 10 seconds. The normal state of this LED is off for member units and steady
green for the manager unit.

2-6

Configuring Switches in a Stack

show switch switchtype

Examples
This example shows how to display information about all switch units in the stack:
C3(rw)->show switch
Management
Preconfig
Plugged-in
Switch
Code
Switch
Status
Model ID
Model ID
Status
Version
------ ------------ ------------- ------------- --------------------- -------1
Mgmt Switch C3G124-24
C3G124-24
OK
06.03.xx.xxxx
2
Stack Member C3G124-24
C3G124-24
OK
06.03.xx.xxxx
3
Stack Member C3G124-24
C3G124-24
OK
06.03.xx.xxxx
4
Stack Member C3G124-24
C3G124-24
OK
06.03.xx.xxxx
5
Stack Member C3G124-24
C3G124-24
OK
06.03.xx.xxxx
6
Stack Member C3G124-24
C3G124-24
OK
06.03.xx.xxxx
7
Stack Member C3G124-24
C3G124-24
OK
06.03.xx.xxxx
8
Stack Member C3G124-24
C3G124-24
OK
06.03.xx.xxxx

This example shows how to display information about switch unit 1 in the stack:
C3(ro)->show switch 1
Switch
Management Status
Hardware Management Preference
Admin Management Preference
Switch Type
Preconfigured Model Identifier
Plugged-in Model Identifier
Switch Status
Switch Description
Detected Code Version
Detected Code in Flash
Detected Code in Back Image
Up Time

1
Management Switch
Unassigned
Unassigned
C3G124-24
C3G124-24
C3G124-24
OK
Enterasys Networks, Inc. C3 -- Model
C3G124-24
06.03.xx.xxxx
03.01.20
02.01.37
0 days 6 hrs 37 mins 54 secs

This example shows how to display status information for switch unit 1 in the stack:
C3(ro)->show switch status 1
Switch
Switch Status
Admin State
Power State
Inserted Switch:
Model Identifier
Description
Configured Switch:
Model Identifier
Description

1
Full

C3G124-24
Enterasys Networks, Inc. C3 -- Model
C3G124-24
C3G124-24
Enterasys Networks, Inc. C3 -- Model
C3G124-24

show switch switchtype
Use this command to display information about supported switch types in the stack.

Syntax
show switch switchtype [switchindex]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

2-7

show switch stack-ports

Parameters
switchindex

(Optional) Specifies the switch index (SID) of the switch type to display.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Examples
This example shows how to display switch type information about all switches in the stack:
C3(ro)->show switch switchtype
SID
--1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
17

Switch Model ID
-------------------------------C2G124-24
C2K122-24
C2G124-48
C2G124-48P
C2H124-48
C2H124-48P
C2G134-24P
C2G170-24
C3G124-24P
C3G124-48P
C3G124-48
C3G124-24
C3K172-24
C3K122-24
C3K122-24P

Mgmt
Pref
---1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Code
Version
--------0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245
0xa08245

This example shows how to display switch type information about SID1:
C3(ro)->show switch switchtype 1
Switch Type
Model Identifier
Switch Description
Management Preference
Expected Code Version

0x56950200
C2G124-24
Enterasys Networks, Inc. C2 -Model C2G124-24
1
0xa08245

Supported Cards:
Slot
Card Index (CID)
Model Identifier

0
1
C2G124-24

show switch stack-ports
Use this command to display various data flow and error counters on stack ports.

Syntax
show switch stack-ports [unit]

2-8

Configuring Switches in a Stack

set switch

Parameters
unit

(Optional) Specifies the switch unit ID, an integer ranging from 1 to 8.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display data and error information on stack ports:
C3(ro)->show switch stack-ports
------------TX-------------- ------------RX----------Data
Error
Data
Error
Stacking
Rate
Rate
Total
Rate
Rate
Total
Switch
Port
(Mb/s) (Errors/s) Errors
(Mb/s) (Errors/s) Errors
------ ---------- ------ ---------- ---------- ------ ---------- -------1
Up
0
0
0
0
0
0
Down
0
0
0
0
0
0

set switch
Use this command to assign a switch ID, to set a switch’s priority for becoming the management
switch if the previous management switch fails, or to change the switch unit ID for a switch in the
stack.

Syntax
set switch {unit [priority value | renumber newunit]}

Parameters
unit

Specifies a unit number for the switch. Value can range from 1 to 8.

priority value

Specifies a priority value for the unit. Valid values are 1 to 15 with higher
values assigning higher priority.

renumber newunit

Specifies a new number for the unit.
Note: This number must be a previously unassigned unit ID number.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

2-9

set switch copy-fw

Examples
This example shows how to assign priority 3 to switch 5:
C3(su)->set switch 5 priority 3

This example shows how to renumber switch 5 to switch 7:
C3(su)->set switch 5 renumber 7

set switch copy-fw
Use this command to replicate the code image file from the management switch to other
switch(es) in the stack.

Syntax
set switch copy-fw [destination-system unit]

Parameters
destination‐system
unit

(Optional) Specifies the unit number of unit on which to copy the
management image file.

Defaults
If destination‐system is not specified, the management image file will be replicated to all switches
in the stack.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to replicate the management image file to all switches in the stack:
C3(su)->set switch copy-fw
Are you sure you want to copy firmware? (y/n) y
Code transfer completed successfully.

set switch description
Use this command to assign a name to a switch in the stack.

Syntax
set switch description unit description

Parameters
unit

Specifies a unit number for the switch.

description

Specifies a text description for the unit.

Defaults
None.

2-10

Configuring Switches in a Stack

set switch movemanagement

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to assign the name “FirstUnit” to switch unit 1 in the stack:
C3(su)->set switch description 1 FirstUnit

set switch movemanagement
Use this command to move management switch functionality from one switch to another.

Syntax
set switch movemanagement fromunit tounit

Parameters
fromunit

Specifies the unit number of the current management switch.

tounit

Specifies the unit number of the newly‐designated management switch.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to move management functionality from switch 1 to switch 2:
C3(su)->set switch movemenagement 1 2
Moving stack management will unconfigure entire stack including all interfaces.
Are you sure you want to move stack management? (y/n) y

set switch member
Use this command to add a virtual member to a stack. This allows you to preconfigure a switch
before the physical device is actually added to the stack.

Syntax
set switch member unit switch-id

Parameters
unit

Specifies a unit number for the switch.

switch‐id

Specifies a switch ID (SID) for the switch. SIDs can be displayed with the
show switch switchtype command.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

2-11

clear switch member

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Refer to “Creating a Virtual Switch Configuration” on page 2‐3 for more information about how to
add a virtual switch to a stack.

Example
This example shows how to specify a switch as unit 1 with a switch ID of 1:
C3(su)->set switch member 1 1

clear switch member
Use this command to remove a member entry from the stack.

Syntax
clear switch member unit

Parameters
unit

Specifies the unit number of the switch.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to remove the switch 5 entry from the stack:
C3(su)->clear switch member 5

2-12

Configuring Switches in a Stack

3
Basic Configuration
At startup, the SecureStack C3 switch is configured with many defaults and standard features.
This chapter describes how to customize basic system settings to adapt to your work environment.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Quick Start Setup Commands

3-1

Setting User Accounts and Passwords

3-2

Setting Basic Switch Properties

3-9

Downloading a Firmware Image

3-32

Reviewing and Selecting a Boot Firmware Image

3-35

Starting and Configuring Telnet

3-37

Managing Switch Configuration and Files

3-39

Clearing and Closing the CLI

3-49

Resetting the Switch

3-50

Using and Configuring WebView

3-52

Gathering Technical Support Information

3-55

Configuring Hostprotect

3-56

Quick Start Setup Commands
The tables in this section provide a quick reference for the CLI commands needed to begin basic
C3 switch operation. Table 3‐1 lists tasks and their associated CLI commands required for setting
up the switch with the latest firmware. Table 3‐2 lists optional CLI commands that will help you
perform additional basic configuration on the switch. Refer to the pages listed for more
information about each command.
Table 3-1

Required CLI Setup Commands
Refer to
page...

Step Task

CLI commands

1

Set a new password.

set password [username]

3-5

2

Set the switch IP address.

set ip address ip-address [mask
ip-mask] [gateway ip-gateway]

3-11

3

Download, activate, and verify new
firmware on the switch using TFTP
copy.

copy tftp://tftp_server_ip_address/
filename system:image

3-45

set boot system filename

3-36

show version

3-26

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-1

Setting User Accounts and Passwords

Table 3-2

Optional CLI Setup Commands
Refer to
page...

Task

CLI commands

Save the active configuration.

save config

3-41

Enable or disable SSH.

set ssh enable | disable

26-77

Enable or disable Telnet.

set telnet {enable | disable} [inbound |
outbound | all]

3-37

Enable or disable HTTP
management (WebView).

set webview {enable | disable}

3-53

Enable or disable SNMP port link
traps.

set port trap port-string {enable | disable}

7-25

Set the per port broadcast limit

set port broadcast port-string threshold-value

7-34

Configure a VLAN.

set vlan create vlan-id

10-5

set port vlan port-string vlan-id modify-egress

10-9

Set a Syslog server IP and
severity

set logging server index ip-addr ip-addr
severity severity state enable

10-9

Configure and enable a RADIUS
server.

set radius server index ip-addr
port [secret-value]{realm {management-access |
any | network-access}

26-7

set radius enable

26-7

Setting User Accounts and Passwords
Purpose
To change the switch’s default user login and password settings, and to add new user accounts
and passwords.

Commands
For information about...

3-2

Refer to page...

show system login

3-3

set system login

3-4

clear system login

3-4

set password

3-5

set system password length

3-6

set system password aging

3-6

set system password history

3-7

show system lockout

3-7

set system lockout

3-8

Basic Configuration

show system login

show system login
Use this command to display user login account information.

Syntax
show system login

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, super user.

Example
This example shows how to display login account information. In this case, switch defaults have
not been changed:
C3(su)->show system login
Password history size: 0
Password aging
: disabled
Username

Access

State

admin
ro
rw

super-user
read-only
read-write

enabled
enabled
enabled

Table 3‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 3-1

show system login Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Password history size

Number of previously used user login passwords that will be checked for
duplication when the set password command is executed. Configured with set
system password history (page 3-7).

Password aging

Number of days user passwords will remain valid before aging out. Configured
with set system password aging (page 3-6).

Username

Login user names.

Access

Access assigned to this user account: super-user, read-write or read-only.

State

Whether this user account is enabled or disabled.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-3

set system login

set system login
Use this command to create a new user login account, or to disable or enable an existing account.
The SecureStack C3 switch supports up to 16 user accounts, including the admin account, which
cannot be deleted.

Syntax
set system login username {super-user | read-write | read-only} {enable | disable}

Parameters
username

Specifies a login name for a new or existing user. This string can be a
maximum of 80 characters, although a maximum of 16 characters is
recommended for proper viewing in the show system login display.

super‐user |
read‐write |
read‐only

Specifies the access privileges for this user.

enable | disable

Enables or disables the user account.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, super user.

Usage
Login accounts, including the admin user account, can be locked out after multiple failed attempts
to log in to the system. Refer to “show system lockout” on page 3‐7 and “set system lockout” on
page 3‐8 for more information about lockout parameters.
If the admin user account has been locked out, you must wait until the configured lockout time
period has expired or you can power cycle the switch to reboot it, which will re‐enable the admin
user account.

Example
This example shows how to enable a new user account with the login name “netops” with super
user access privileges:
C3(su)->set system login netops super-user enable

clear system login
Use this command to remove a local login user account.

Syntax
clear system login username

3-4

Basic Configuration

set password

Parameters
username

Specifies the login name of the account to be cleared.
Note: The default admin (su) account cannot be deleted.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, super user.

Example
This example shows how to remove the “netops” user account:
C3(su)->clear system login netops

set password
Use this command to change system default passwords or to set a new login password on the CLI.

Syntax
set password [username]

Parameters
username

(Only available to users with super‐user access.) Specifies a system default
or a user‐configured login account name. By default, the SecureStack C3
switch provides the following account names:
ro for Read‐Only access.
rw for Read‐Write access.
admin for Super User access. (This access level allows Read‐Write access
to all modifiable parameters, including user accounts.)

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.
Switch command, super‐user.

Usage
Read‐Write users can change their own passwords.
Super Users (Admin) can change any password on the system.
If you forget the password for the admin user account, you can reset the password to the default
password value by pressing the password reset button on the switch.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-5

set system password length

Examples
This example shows how a super‐user would change the Read‐Write password from the system
default (blank string):
C3(su)->set password rw
Please enter new password: ********
Please re-enter new password: ********
Password changed.
C3(su)->

This example shows how a user with Read‐Write access would change his password:
C3(su)->set password
Please enter old password: ********
Please enter new password: ********
Please re-enter new password: ********
Password changed.
C3(su)->

set system password length
Use this command to set the minimum user login password length.

Syntax
set system password length characters

Parameters
characters

Specifies the minimum number of characters for a user account password.
Valid values are 0 to 40.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, super user.

Example
This example shows how to set the minimum system password length to 8 characters:
C3(su)->set system password length 8

set system password aging
Use this command to set the number of days user passwords will remain valid before aging out, or
to disable user account password aging.

Syntax
set system password aging {days | disable}

3-6

Basic Configuration

set system password history

Parameters
days

Specifies the number of days user passwords will remain valid before
aging out. Valid values are 1 to 365.

disable

Disables password aging.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, super user.

Example
This example shows how to set the system password age time to 45 days:
C3(su)->set system password aging 45

set system password history
Use this command to set the number of previously used user login passwords that will be checked
for password duplication. This prevents duplicate passwords from being entered into the system
with the set password command.

Syntax
set system password history size

Parameters
size

Specifies the number of passwords checked for duplication. Valid values
are 0 to 10.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, super user.

Example
This example shows how to configure the system to check the last 10 passwords for duplication
C3(su)->set system password history 10

show system lockout
Use this command to display settings for locking out users after failed attempts to log in to the
system.

Syntax
show system lockout

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-7

set system lockout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, super user.

Example
This example shows how to display user lockout settings. In this case, switch defaults have not
been changed:
C3(su)->show system lockout
Lockout attempts: 3
Lockout time:
15 minutes.

Table 3‐3 provides an explanation of the command output. These settings are configured with the
set system lockout command (“set system lockout” on page 3‐8).
Table 3-3

show system lockout Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Lockout attempts

Number of failed login attempts allowed before a read-write or read-only user’s
account will be disabled.

Lockout time

Number of minutes the default admin user account will be locked out after the
maximum login attempts.

set system lockout
Use this command to set the number of failed login attempts before locking out (disabling) a read‐
write or read‐only user account, and the number of minutes to lockout the default admin super
user account after maximum login attempts.

Syntax
set system lockout {[attempts attempts] [time time]}

Parameters
attempts attempts

Specifies the number of failed login attempts allowed before a read‐write
or read‐only user’s account will be disabled. Valid values are 1 to 10.

time time

Specifies the number of minutes the default admin user account will be
locked out after the maximum login attempts. Valid values are 0 to 60.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, super user.

3-8

Basic Configuration

Setting Basic Switch Properties

Usage
Once a user account is locked out, it can only be re‐enabled by a super user with the set system
login command (page 3‐4).
If the default admin super user account has been locked out, you can wait until the lock out time
has expired or you can reset the switch in order to re‐enable the admin account.

Example
This example shows how to set login attempts to 5 and lockout time to 30 minutes:
C3(su)->set system lockout attempts 5 time 30

Setting Basic Switch Properties
Purpose
To display and set the system IP address and other basic system (switch) properties.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show ip address

3-10

set ip address

3-11

clear ip address

3-11

show ip protocol

3-12

set ip protocol

3-12

show system

3-13

show system hardware

3-14

show system utilization

3-15

set system utilization

3-16

clear system utilization

3-17

show system enhancedbuffermode

3-17

set system enhancedbuffermode

3-18

set system temperature

3-18

clear system temperature

3-19

show time

3-20

set time

3-20

show summertime

3-21

set summertime

3-22

set summertime date

3-22

set summertime recurring

3-23

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-9

show ip address

For information about...

Refer to page...

clear summertime

3-24

set prompt

3-24

show banner motd

3-25

set banner motd

3-25

clear banner motd

3-26

show version

3-26

set system name

3-27

set system location

3-28

set system contact

3-28

set width

3-29

set length

3-29

show logout

3-30

set logout

3-30

show console

3-31

set console baud

3-31

show ip address
Use this command to display the system IP address and subnet mask.

Syntax
show ip address

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the system IP address and subnet mask:
C3(su)->show ip address
Name
---------------host

3-10

Basic Configuration

Address
---------------10.42.13.20

Mask
---------------255.255.0.0

set ip address

set ip address
Use this command to set the system IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.
Note: The C3 does not support the ability for a user to configure the host's gateway to be a local
routed interface IP. The host's gateway must exist on a different device in the network if one is
configured.

Syntax
set ip address ip-address [mask ip-mask] [gateway ip-gateway]

Parameters
ip‐address

Sets the IP address for the system. For SecureStack C3 systems, this is the
IP address of the management switch as described in “About SecureStack
C3 Switch Operation in a Stack” on page 2‐1.

mask ip‐mask

(Optional) Sets the system’s subnet mask.

gateway ip‐gateway

(Optional) Sets the system’s default gateway (next‐hop device).

Defaults
If not specified, ip‐mask will be set to the natural mask of the ip‐address and ip‐gateway will be set to
the ip‐address.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Parameters must be entered in the order shown (host IP, then mask, then gateway) for the
command to be accepted.

Example
This example shows how to set the system IP address to 10.1.10.1 with a mask of 255.255.128.0:
C3(su)->set ip address 10.1.10.1 mask 255.255.128.0

clear ip address
Use this command to clear the system IP address.

Syntax
clear ip address

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-11

show ip protocol

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the system IP address:
C3(rw)->clear ip address

show ip protocol
Use this command to display the method used to acquire a network IP address for switch
management.

Syntax
show ip protocol

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the method used to acquire a network IP address:
C3(su)->show ip protocol
System IP address acquisition method: dhcp

set ip protocol
Use this command to specify the protocol used to acquire a network IP address for switch
management.

Syntax
set ip protocol {bootp | dhcp | none}

Parameters
bootp

Selects BOOTP as the protocol to use to acquire the system IP address.

dhcp

Selects DHCP as the protocol to use to acquire the system IP address.

none

No protocol will be used to acquire the system IP address.

Defaults
None.

3-12

Basic Configuration

show system

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the method used to acquire a network IP address to DHCP.
C3(su)->set ip protocol dhcp

show system
Use this command to display system information, including contact information, power and fan
tray status and uptime.

Syntax
show system

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display system information:
C3(su)->show system
System contact:
System location:
System name:
Switch 1
-------PS1-Status
---------Ok

PS2-Status
---------Not Installed and/or Not Operating

Fan1-Status
----------Ok

Fan2-Status
----------Ok

Temp-Alarm
----------off
Thermal Threshold: 58%
Temp alarm max threshold: 100%
Temp alarm trap: disabled
Temp alarm syslog: disabled
Uptime d,h:m:s
-------------0,20:36:49

Logout
------0 min
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-13

show system hardware

The following table provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 3-4

show system Output Details

Output

What It Displays...

System contact

Contact person for the system. Default of a blank string can be changed with the
set system contact command (“set system contact” on page 3-28).

System location

Where the system is located. Default of a blank string can be changed with the
set system location command (“set system location” on page 3-28).

System name

Name identifying the system. Default of a blank string can be changed with the
set system name command (“set system name” on page 3-27).

Switch x

Indicates the switch position in the stack. When multiple switches are in a stack,
information for each switch is displayed.

PS1-Status

Operational status for the primary power supply.

PS2-Status

Operational status for the secondary power supply, if installed.

Fanx-Status

Operational status of the fan(s).

Temp-Alarm

Indicates status of temperature alarm — on, off. The status will show NA (not
available) on switches that do not support this functionality.

Thermal Threshold

Percentage of thermal threshold reached. The status will show NA (not available)
on switches that do not support this functionality.

Temp alarm max
threshold

The temperature alarm threshold expressed as a percentage of the maximum
rated. The default value is 100%.

Temp alarm trap

Indicates whether the sending of temperature alarm traps is enabled or disabled.
The default is disabled.

Temp alarm syslog

Indicates whether temperature alarm syslog messages are enabled or disabled.
The default is disabled.

Uptime d,h:m:s

System uptime.

Logout

Time an idle console or Telnet CLI session will remain connected before timing
out. Default of 5 minutes can be changed with the set logout command (“set
logout” on page 3-30).

show system hardware
Use this command to display the system’s hardware configuration.

Syntax
show system hardware

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

3-14

Basic Configuration

show system utilization

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the system’s hardware configuration. Please note that the
information you see displayed may differ from this example.
C3(su)->show system hardware
SLOT 1 HARDWARE INFORMATION
--------------------------Model:
Serial Number:
Vendor ID:
Base MAC Address:
Hardware Version:
FirmWare Version:
Boot Code Version:

777777777777
0xbc00
00:11:88:B1:76:C0
BCM56514 REV 1
01.00.00.0052
01.00.42

show system utilization
Use this command to display detailed information about the processor running on the switch, or
the overall memory usage of the Flash and SDRAM storage devices on the unit, or the processes
running on the switch. Only the memory usage in the master unit of a stack is shown.

Syntax
show system utilization {cpu | storage | process}

Parameters
cpu

Display information about the processor running on the switch.

storage

Display information about the overall memory usage on the switch.

process

Display information about the processes running on the switch.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Examples
This example shows how to display the system’s CPU utilization:
C3(ro)->show system utilization cpu
CPU Utilization Threshold Traps enable: Threshold = 80.0%
Total CPU Utilization:
Switch
CPU
5 sec
1 min
5 min
----------------------------------------------1
1
50%
49%
49%

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-15

set system utilization

This example shows how to display the system’s overall memory usage:
C3(ro)->show system utilization storage
Storage Utilization:
Type
Description
Size(Kb)
Available (Kb)
--------------------------------------------------------------RAM
RAM device
262144
97173
Flash
Images, Config, Other
31095
8094

This example shows how to display information about the processes running on the system. Only
partial output is shown.
C3(ro)->show system utilization process
Switch:1
CPU:1
TID
Name
5Sec
1Min
5Min
---------------------------------------------------------c157930 ipMapForwardingTask
3.60%
3.02%
3.48%
cc70000 RMONTask
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
ccb0b60 SNMPTask
34.80%
34.06%
31.78%
d4847a0 tEmWeb
0.00%
0.03%
0.01%
d4ca360 hapiRxTask
3.20%
4.80%
5.00%
dec8600 lvl7TaskUtilMonitorTas
0.40%
0.40%
0.40%
eb74120 bcmRX
2.00%
2.91%
4.48%
eb7fbc8 bcmLINK.0
0.40%
0.22%
0.32%
f00c9a0 bcmTX
0.00%
0.33%
0.53%
f027648 bcmCNTR.0
0.00%
0.00%
0.03%
f034858 bcmL2X.0
0.00%
0.02%
0.04%

set system utilization
Use this command to set the threshold for sending CPU utilization notification messages.

Syntax
set system utilization threshold threshold

Parameters
threshold threshold

Specifies a threshold value in 1/10 of a percent. Valid range is 1 to 1000.
A value of 0 disables utilization notification messages.

Defaults
The default threshold value is 80%.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command sets the percentage of system CPU utilitization that will cause a trap notification to
be sent. After the threshold has been exceeded, additional notifications will be sent once a minute
until the utilization has dropped back below the threshold.

Example
This example sets the CPU utilization threshold to 75%.
3-16

Basic Configuration

clear system utilization

C3(rw)->set system utilization threshold 750

clear system utilization
Use this command to reset the CPU utilization threshold to the default of 80%.

Syntax
clear system utilization

Parameters
None.

Defaults
The default threshold value is 80%.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example resets the CPU utilization threshold to the default.
C3(rw)->show system utilization cpu
CPU Utilization Threshold Traps enable: Threshold = 75.0%
Total CPU Utilization:
Switch
CPU
5 sec
1 min
5 min
------------------------------------------------1
1
10%
10%
10%
C3(rw)->clear system utilization
C3(rw)->show system utilization cpu
CPU Utilization Threshold Traps enable: Threshold = 80.0%
Total CPU Utilization:
Switch
CPU
5 sec
1 min
5 min
------------------------------------------------1
1
14%
11%
10%

show system enhancedbuffermode
Use this command to display the status of enhanced buffer mode, which optimizes buffer
distribution into a single CoS queue operation for standalone switches or non‐stacked switches.

Syntax
show system enhancedbuffermode

Parameters
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-17

set system enhancedbuffermode

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to display enhanced buffer mode status:
C3(su)->show system enhancedbuffermode enable
Optimized system buffer distribution

Disable

set system enhancedbuffermode
Use this command to enable or disable enhanced buffer mode, which optimizes buffer
distribution into a single CoS queue operation for standalone switches or non‐stacked switches.
Executing this command will reset the switch, so the system prompts you to confirm whether you
want to proceed.

Syntax
set system enhancedbuffermode {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables enhanced buffer mode.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable enhanced buffer mode:
C3(su)->set system enhancedbuffermode enable
Changes in the enhanced buffer mode will require resetting this unit.
Are you sure you want to continue? (y/n)

set system temperature
Use this command to set the system high temperature threshold limit and the high temperature
alert parameters, on the platforms that support this feature.

Syntax
set system temperature {[syslog enable | disable] [trap enable | disable]
[overtemp-threshold value]}

3-18

Basic Configuration

clear system temperature

Parameters
syslog enable |
disable

Enables or disables logging high temperature alerts to the system log
when the system transitions into an alarm state.

trap enable | disable

Enables or disables sending high temperature alerts by means of SNMP
traps when the system transitions into an alarm state.

overtemp‐threshold
value

Sets the thermal threshold as a percentage of the maximum rated for the
specific platform. Value can range from 0 to 100%.

Defaults
Syslog alerts are disabled by default.
Trap alerts are disabled by default.
Overtemp threshold is 100% by default.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
On the platforms that support this feature, temperature sensors are located in several different
locations within the device. Threshold calibrations have been calculated separately for each
platform. The thermal overtemp threshold is the high‐water mark that, when reached, triggers an
alert to warn the system administrator that the device is operating at high temperatures.
When a high temperature alert condition occurs, the CPU LED on the front panel of the switch
will flash red. In addition, if enabled, a syslog message will be logged and/or an SNMP trap will
be sent.
The values set with this command can be viewed with the show system command.

Example
The following example enables sending SNMP traps and sets the overtemp threshold to 60%.
C3(su)->set system temperature trap enable overtemp-threshold 60

clear system temperature
Use this command to reset system high temperature parameters to their default values, on the
platforms that support this feature.

Syntax
clear system temperature

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-19

show time

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command resets all the high temperature parameters to their default values:
•

Syslog alerts are disabled by default.

•

Trap alerts are disabled by default.

•

Overtemp threshold is 100% by default.

Example
This example resets all high temperature parameters to their defaults.
C3(su)->clear system temperature

show time
Use this command to display the current time of day in the system clock.

Syntax
show time

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the current time. The output shows the day of the week,
month, day, and the time of day in hours, minutes, and seconds and the year:
C3(su)->show time
THU SEP 05 09:21:57 2002

set time
Use this command to change the time of day on the system clock.

Syntax
set time [mm/dd/yyyy] [hh:mm:ss]

3-20

Basic Configuration

show summertime

Parameters
[mm/dd/yyyy]
[hh:mm:ss]

Sets the time in:
month, day, year and/or
24‐hour format
At least one set of time parameters must be entered.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the system clock to 7:50 a.m:
C3(su)->set time 7:50:00

show summertime
Use this command to display daylight savings time settings.

Syntax
show summertime

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display daylight savings time settings:
C3(su)->show summertime
Summertime is disabled and set to ''
Start : SUN APR 04 02:00:00 2004
End
: SUN OCT 31 02:00:00 2004
Offset: 60 minutes (1 hours 0 minutes)
Recurring: yes, starting at 2:00 of the first Sunday of April and ending at 2:00
of the last Sunday of October

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-21

set summertime

set summertime
Use this command to enable or disable the daylight savings time function.

Syntax
set summertime {enable | disable} [zone]

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables the daylight savings time function.

zone

(Optional) Applies a name to the daylight savings time settings.

Defaults
If a zone name is not specified, none will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to enable daylight savings time function:
C3(su)->set summertime enable

set summertime date
Use this command to configure specific dates to start and stop daylight savings time. These
settings will be non‐recurring and will have to be reset annually.

Syntax
set summertime date start_month start_date start_year start_hr_min end_month
end_date end_year end_hr_min [offset_minutes]

Parameters
start_month

Specifies the month of the year to start daylight savings time.

start_date

Specifies the day of the month to start daylight savings time.

start_year

Specifies the year to start daylight savings time.

start_hr_min

Specifies the time of day to start daylight savings time. Format is hh:mm.

end_month

Specifies the month of the year to end daylight savings time.

end_date

Specifies the day of the month to end daylight savings time.

end_year

Specifies the year to end daylight savings time.

end_hr_min

Specifies the time of day to end daylight savings time. Format is hh:mm.

offset_minutes

(Optional) Specifies the amount of time in minutes to offset daylight
savings time from the non‐daylight savings time system setting. Valid
values are 1 ‐ 1440.

Defaults
If an offset is not specified, none will be applied.
3-22

Basic Configuration

set summertime recurring

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set a daylight savings time start date of April 4, 2004 at 2 a.m. and an
ending date of October 31, 2004 at 2 a.m. with an offset time of one hour:
C3(su)->set summertime date April 4 2004 02:00 October 31 2004 02:00 60

set summertime recurring
Use this command to configure recurring daylight savings time settings. These settings will start
and stop daylight savings time at the specified day of the month and hour each year and will not
have to be reset annually.

Syntax
set summertime recurring start_week start_day start_month start_hr_min end_week
end_day end_month end_hr_min [offset_minutes]

Parameters
start_week

Specifies the week of the month to restart daylight savings time. Valid
values are: first, second, third, fourth, and last.

start_day

Specifies the day of the week to restart daylight savings time.

start_hr_min

Specifies the time of day to restart daylight savings time. Format is
hh:mm.

end_week

Specifies the week of the month to end daylight savings time.

end_day

Specifies the day of the week to end daylight savings time.

end_hr_min

Specifies the time of day to end daylight savings time. Format is hh:mm.

offset_minutes

(Optional) Specifies the amount of time in minutes to offset daylight
savings time from the non‐daylight savings time system setting. Valid
values are 1 ‐ 1440.

Defaults
If an offset is not specified, none will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how set daylight savings time to recur starting on the first Sunday of April at
2 a.m. and ending the last Sunday of October at 2 a.m. with an offset time of one hour:
C3(su)->set summertime recurring first Sunday April 02:00 last Sunday October
02:00 60

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-23

clear summertime

clear summertime
Use this command to clear the daylight savings time configuration.

Syntax
clear summertime

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the daylight savings time configuration:
C3(su)->clear summertime

set prompt
Use this command to modify the command prompt.

Syntax
set prompt prompt_string

Parameters
prompt_string

Specifies a text string for the command prompt.
Note: A prompt string containing a space in the text must be enclosed
in quotes as shown in the example below.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the command prompt to Switch 1:
C3(su)->set prompt “Switch 1”
Switch 1(su)->

3-24

Basic Configuration

show banner motd

show banner motd
Use this command to show the banner message of the day that will display at session login.

Syntax
show banner motd

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the banner message of the day:
C3(rw)->show banner motd
This system belongs to XYZ Corporation.
Use of this system is strictly limited to authorized personnel.

set banner motd
Use this command to set the banner message of the day displayed at session login.
Note: Banner message text must be enclosed in beginning and ending double quotation marks.
The message itself cannot contain any additional double quotation marks.

Syntax
set banner motd message

Parameters
message

Specifies a message of the day. This is a text string that needs to be in
double quotes if any spaces are used. Use a \n for a new line and \t for a
tab (eight spaces).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the message of the day banner to read: “This system belongs to
XYZ Corporation. Use of this system is strictly limited to authorized personnel.”

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-25

clear banner motd

C3(rw)->set banner motd "\tThis system belongs to XYZ Corporation.\nUse of this
system is strictly limited to authorized personnel."

clear banner motd
Use this command to clear the banner message of the day displayed at session login to a blank
string.

Syntax
clear banner motd

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the message of the day banner to a blank string:
C3(rw)->clear banner motd

show version
Use this command to display hardware and firmware information. Refer to “Downloading a
Firmware Image” on page 3‐32 for instructions on how to download a firmware image.

Syntax
show version

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display version information. Please note that you may see different
information displayed, depending on the type of hardware.
C3(su)->show version
Copyright (c) 2007 by Enterasys Networks, Inc.

3-26

Basic Configuration

set system name

Model
-------------C3G124-48P

Serial #
----------------001188021035

Versions
------------------Hw:BCM5665 REV 17
Bp:01.00.29
Fw:6.03.xx.xxxx
BuFw:03.01.13
PoE:500_3

Table 3‐5 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 3-5

show version Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Model

Switch’s model number.

Serial #

Serial number of the switch.

Versions

• Hw: Hardware version number.
• Bp: BootPROM version.
• Fw: Current firmware version number.
• BuFw: Backup firmware version number.
• PoE: Power over Ethernet driver version. (Displays only for PoE switches.)

set system name
Use this command to configure a name for the system.

Syntax
set system name [string]

Parameters
string

(Optional) Specifies a text string that identifies the system.
Note: A name string containing a space in the text must be enclosed in
quotes as shown in the example below.

Defaults
If string is not specified, the system name will be cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the system name to Information Systems:
C3(su)->set system name “Information Systems”

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-27

set system location

set system location
Use this command to identify the location of the system.

Syntax
set system location [string]

Parameters
string

(Optional) Specifies a text string that indicates where the system is
located.
Note: A location string containing a space in the text must be
enclosed in quotes as shown in the example below.

Defaults
If string is not specified, the location name will be cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the system location string:
C3(su)->set system location “Bldg N32-04 Closet 9”

set system contact
Use this command to identify a contact person for the system.

Syntax
set system contact [string]

Parameters
string

(Optional) Specifies a text string that contains the name of the person to
contact for system administration.
Note: A contact string containing a space in the text must be enclosed
in quotes as shown in the example below.

Defaults
If string is not specified, the contact name will be cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

3-28

Basic Configuration

set width

Example
This example shows how to set the system contact string:
C3(su)->set system contact “Joe Smith”

set width
Use this command to set the number of columns for the terminal connected to the switch’s console
port.

Syntax
set width screenwidth [default]

Parameters
screenwidth

Sets the number of terminal columns. Valid values are 50 to 150.

default

(Optional) Makes this setting persistent for all future sessions (written to
NV‐RAM).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The number of rows of CLI output displayed is set using the set length command as described in
“set length” on page 3‐29.

Example
This example shows how to set the terminal columns to 50:
C3(su)->set width 50

set length
Use this command to set the number of lines the CLI will display. This command is persistent
(written to NV‐RAM).

Syntax
set length screenlength

Parameters
screenlength

Sets the number of lines in the CLI display. Valid values are 0, which
disables the scrolling screen feature described in “Displaying Scrolling
Screens” on page 1‐9, and from 5 to 512.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-29

show logout

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the terminal length to 50:
C3(su)->set length 50

show logout
Use this command to display the time (in seconds) an idle console or Telnet CLI session will
remain connected before timing out.

Syntax
show logout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the CLI logout setting:
C3(su)->show logout
Logout currently set to: 10 minutes.

set logout
Use this command to set the time (in minutes) an idle console or Telnet CLI session will remain
connected before timing out.

Syntax
set logout timeout

Parameters
timeout

Defaults
None.

3-30

Basic Configuration

Sets the number of minutes the system will remain idle before timing out.

show console

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the system timeout to 10 minutes:
C3(su)->set logout 10

show console
Use this command to display console settings.

Syntax
show console [baud] [bits] [flowcontrol] [parity] [stopbits]

Parameters
baud

(Optional) Displays the input/output baud rate.

bits

(Optional) Displays the number of bits per character.

flowcontrol

(Optional) Displays the type of flow control.

parity

(Optional) Displays the type of parity.

stopbits

(Optional) Displays the number of stop bits.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all settings will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display all console settings:
C3(su)->show console
Baud
Flow
Bits
------ ------- ---9600
Disable 8

StopBits
---------1

Parity
-----none

set console baud
Use this command to set the console port baud rate.

Syntax
set console baud rate

Parameters
rate

Sets the console baud rate. Valid values are: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 5760,
9600, 14400, 19200, 38400, and 115200.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-31

Downloading a Firmware Image

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the console port baud rate to 19200:
C3(su)->set console baud 19200

Downloading a Firmware Image
You can upgrade the operational firmware in the SecureStack C3 switch without physically
opening the switch or being in the same location. There are two ways to download firmware to the
switch:
•

Via TFTP download. This procedure uses a TFTP server connected to the network and
downloads the firmware using the TFTP protocol. For details on how to perform a TFTP
download using the copy command, refer to “copy” on page 3‐45. For information on setting
TFTP timeout and retry parameters, refer to “set tftp timeout” on page 3‐47 and “set tftp
retry” on page 3‐48.

•

Via the serial (console) port. This procedure is an out‐of‐band operation that copies the
firmware through the serial port to the switch. It should be used in cases when you cannot
connect the switch to perform the in‐band copy download procedure via TFTP. Serial console
download has been successfully tested with the following applications:
–

HyperTerminal Copyright 1999

–

Tera Term Pro Version 2.3

Any other terminal applications may work but are not explicitly supported.
The C3 switch allows you to download and store dual images. The backup image can be
downloaded and selected as the startup image by using the commands described in this section.

Downloading from a TFTP Server
To perform a TFTP download, proceed as follows:
1.

If you have not already done so, set the switch’s IP address using the set ip address command
as detailed in “set ip address” on page 3‐11.

2.

Download a new image file using the copy command as detailed in “copy” on page 3‐45.

Downloading via the Serial Port
To download switch firmware via the serial (console) port, proceed as follows:
1.

With the console port connected, power up the switch. The following message displays:
Version 01.00.29 05-09-2005
Computing MD5 Checksum of operational code...
Select an option. If no selection in 2 seconds then
operational code will start.

3-32

Basic Configuration

Downloading a Firmware Image

1 - Start operational code.
2 - Start Boot Menu.
Select (1, 2):2
Password: *************

2.

Before the boot up completes, type 2 to select “Start Boot Menu”. Use “administrator” for
the Password.

Note: The “Boot Menu” password “administrator” can be changed using boot menu option 11.

Boot Menu Version 01.00.29 05-09-2005

Options available
1 - Start operational code
2 - Change baud rate
3 - Retrieve event log using XMODEM (64KB).
4 - Load new operational code using XMODEM
5 - Display operational code vital product data
6 - Run Flash Diagnostics
7 - Update Boot Code
8 - Delete operational code
9 - Reset the system
10 - Restore Configuration to factory defaults (delete config files)
11 - Set new Boot Code password
[Boot Menu] 2

3.

Type 2. The following baud rate selection screen displays:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0

4.

-

1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
no change

Type 8 to set the switch baud rate to 115200. The following message displays:
Setting baud rate to 115200, you must change your terminal baud rate.

5.

Set the terminal baud rate to 115200 and press ENTER.

6.

From the boot menu options screen, type 4 to load new operational code using XMODEM.
When the XMODEM transfer is complete, the following message and header information will
display:
[Boot Menu] 4
Ready to receive the file with XMODEM/CRC....
Ready to RECEIVE File xcode.bin in binary mode
Send several Control-X characters to cCKCKCKCKCKCKCK
XMODEM transfer complete, checking CRC....
Verified operational code CRC.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-33

Downloading a Firmware Image

The following Enterasys Header is in the image:
MD5 Checksum....................fe967970996c4c8c43a10cd1cd7be99a
Boot File Identifier............0x0517
Header Version..................0x0100
Image Type......................0x82
Image Offset....................0x004d
Image length....................0x006053b3
Ident Strings Length............0x0028
Ident Strings...................
C2G124-24
C2G124-48
C2H124-48
C2K124_24
Image Version Length............0x7
Image Version Bytes.............0x30 0x2e 0x35 0x2e 0x30 0x2e 0x34 (0.5.0.4)

7.

From the boot menu options screen, type 2 to display the baud rate selection screen again.

8.

Type 4 set the switch baud rate to 9600. The following message displays:
Setting baud rate to 9600, you must change your terminal baud rate.

9.

Set the terminal baud rate to 9600 and press ENTER.

10. From the boot menu options screen, type 1 to start the new operational code. The following
message displays:
Operational Code Date: Tue Jun 29 08:34:05 2004
Uncompressing.....

Reverting to a Previous Image
In the event that you need to downgrade to a previous version of code, you can do so by
completing the following steps as described in this chapter.
Caution: Before reverting to a previous image, always back up your configuration by saving it to a
file (show config outfile on page 3-43). You can then copy the file to a remote location (copy on
page 3-45).

Note: You will not be able to peform these steps remotely unless you have remote console support.

1.

Save your running configuration with the save config command.

2.

Make a copy of the current configuration with the show config outfile configs/filename
command. Use the dir command to confirm that the file was created.

3.

If desired, copy the file to a remote TFTP server with the copy command:
copy tftp://configs/filename server_ipaddr/path and filename

3-34

4.

Load your previous version of code on the device, as described in “Downloading a Firmware
Image” (page 3‐32).

5.

Set this older version of code to be the boot code with the set boot system command (page 3‐
36). When the system asks if you want to reset the device, specify no (n).

6.

Reload the saved configuration onto the device with the configure command, described on
page 3‐44.

Basic Configuration

Reviewing and Selecting a Boot Firmware Image

7.

Reboot the system using the reset command (page 3‐50).
Caution: If you do not follow the steps above, you may lose remote connectivity to the switch.

Reviewing and Selecting a Boot Firmware Image
Purpose
To display and set the image file the switch loads at startup. The C3 switch allows you to
download and store a backup image, which can be selected as the startup image by using the
commands described in this section.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show boot system

3-35

set boot system

3-36

show boot system
Use this command to display the firmware image the switch loads at startup.

Syntax
show boot system

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the switch’s boot firmware image:
C3(su)->show boot system
Current system image to boot: bootfile

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-35

set boot system

set boot system
Use this command to set the firmware image the switch loads at startup.

Syntax
set boot system filename

Parameters
filename

Specifies the name of the firmware image file.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command allows you to set the firmware image to be loaded at startup. You can choose to
reset the system to use the new firmware image immediately, or you can choose to only specify the
new image to be loaded the next time the switch is rebooted.
You can use the dir command to display the “Active” image and the “Boot” image, which will be
the image loaded at the next system reboot.
Note: If you are changing the firmware image to a version earlier than the current version, refer to
“Reverting to a Previous Image” on page 3-34 for the correct steps to follow.

Example
This example shows how to set the boot firmware image file to be used at the next reboot of the
system, by answering “n” to the prompt. The dir command is then executed to display the Active
and Boot images.
C3(su)->set boot system c3_06.03.03.0007
This command can optionally reset the system to boot the new image.
Do you want to reset now (y/n) [n]?n
C3(su)->dir
Images:
==================================================================
Filename:
c3_06.03.00.0026 (Active)
Version:
06.03.00.0026
Size:
9405440 (bytes)
Date:
Fri Jul 18 12:48:35 2008
CheckSum:
f1626ccf10d8f48cd6c3e79ab602342a
Compatibility: 
Filename:
c3_06.03.03.0007 (Boot)
Version:
06.03.03.0007
Size:
8290304 (bytes)
Date:
Fri May 9 11:35:27 2008
CheckSum:
9f820d79239f10890442f8ff1f2bc914
Compatibility: 

3-36

Basic Configuration

Starting and Configuring Telnet

Starting and Configuring Telnet
Purpose
To enable or disable Telnet, and to start a Telnet session to a remote host. The SecureStack C3
switch allows a total of four inbound and / or outbound Telnet session to run simultaneously.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show telnet

3-37

set telnet

3-37

telnet

3-38

show telnet
Use this command to display the status of Telnet on the switch.

Syntax
show telnet

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display Telnet status:
C3(su)->show telnet
Telnet inbound is currently: ENABLED
Telnet outbound is currently: ENABLED

set telnet
Use this command to enable or disable Telnet on the switch.

Syntax
set telnet {enable | disable} [inbound | outbound | all]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-37

telnet

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables Telnet services.

inbound |
outbound | all

(Optional) Specifies inbound service (the ability to Telnet to this switch),
outbound service (the ability to Telnet to other devices), or all (both
inbound and outbound).

Defaults
If not specified, both inbound and outbound Telnet service will be enabled.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to disable inbound and outbound Telnet services:
C3(su)->set telnet disable all
Disconnect all telnet sessions and disable now (y/n)? [n]: y
All telnet sessions have been terminated, telnet is now disabled.

telnet
Use this command to start a Telnet connection to a remote host. The SecureStack C3 switch allows
a total of four inbound and / or outbound Telnet session to run simultaneously.

Syntax
telnet host [port]

Parameters
host

Specifies the name or IP address of the remote host.

port

(Optional) Specifies the server port number.

Defaults
If not specified, the default port number 23 will be used.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to start a Telnet session to a host at 10.21.42.13:
C3(su)->telnet 10.21.42.13

3-38

Basic Configuration

Managing Switch Configuration and Files

Managing Switch Configuration and Files
Configuration Persistence Mode
The default state of configuration persistence mode is “auto,” which means that when CLI
configuration commands are entered, or when a configuration file stored on the switch is
executed, the configuration is saved to NVRAM automatically at the following intervals:
•

On a standalone unit, the configuration is checked every two minutes and saved if there has
been a change.

•

On a stack, the configuration is saved across the stack every 30 minutes if there has been a
change.

If you want to save a running configuration to NVRAM more often than the automatic intervals,
execute the save config command and wait for the system prompt to return. After the prompt
returns, the configuration will be persistent.
You can change the persistence mode from “auto” to “manual” with the set snmp persistmode
command. If the persistence mode is set to “manual,” configuration commands will not be
automatically written to NVRAM. Although the configuration commands will actively modify the
running configuration, they will not persist across a reset unless the save config command has
been executed.
Note: When your device is configured for manual SNMP persistence mode, and you attempt to
change the boot system image, the device will not prompt you to save changes or warn you that
changes will be lost.

Purpose
To set and view the persistence mode for CLI configuration commands, manually save the
running configuration, view, manage, and execute configuration files and image files, and set and
view TFTP parameters.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show snmp persistmode

3-40

set snmp persistmode

3-40

save config

3-41

dir

3-41

show file

3-42

show config

3-43

configure

3-44

copy

3-45

delete

3-46

show tftp settings

3-46

set tftp timeout

3-47

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-39

show snmp persistmode

For information about...

Refer to page...

clear tftp timeout

3-47

set tftp retry

3-48

clear tftp retry

3-48

show snmp persistmode
Use this command to display the configuration persistence mode setting.

Syntax
show snmp persistmode

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
By default, the mode is set to “auto save,” which automatically saves configuration changes at
specific intervals. If the mode is set to “manual,” configuration commands are never automatically
saved. In order to make configuration changes persistent when the mode is manual, the save
config command must be issued as described in “Configuration Persistence Mode” on page 3‐39.

Example
This example shows how to display the configuration persistence mode setting. In this case,
persistence mode is set to “manual”, which means configuration changes are not being
automatically saved.
C3(su)->show snmp persistmode
persistmode is manual

set snmp persistmode
Use this command to set the configuration persistence mode, which determines whether user‐
defined configuration changes are saved automatically, or require issuing the save config
command. See “Configuration Persistence Mode” on page 3‐39 for more information.

Syntax
set snmp persistmode {auto | manual}

3-40

Basic Configuration

save config

Parameters
auto

Sets the configuration persistence mode to automatic. This is the default
state.

manual

Sets the configuration persistence mode to manual. In order to make
configuration changes persistent, the save config command must be
issued as described in “save config” on page 3‐41. This mode is useful for
reverting back to old configurations.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the configuration persistence mode to manual:
C3(su)->set snmp persistmode manual

save config
Use this command to save the running configuration. If applicable, this command will save the
configuration to all switch members in a stack.

Syntax
save config

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to save the running configuration:
C3(su)->save config

dir
Use this command to list configuration and image files stored in the file system.

Syntax
dir [filename]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-41

show file

Parameters
filename

(Optional) Specifies the file name or directory to list.

Defaults
If filename is not specified, all files in the system will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to list all the configuration and image files in the system. The display
indicates which image file is the Active file and which image file is the Boot file that will be used
the next time the system reboots.
C3(su)->dir
Images:
==================================================================
Filename:
c3-series_06.03.00.0029 (Active)
Version:
06.03.00.0029
Size:
9411584 (bytes)
Date:
Fri Aug 1 06:55:23 2008
CheckSum:
6126a7aadfdf05150afb6eca51982302
Compatibility: 
Filename:
Version:
Size:
Date:
CheckSum:
Compatibility:

c3-series_06.03.00.0030 (Boot)
06.03.00.0030
9411584 (bytes)
Fri Aug 8 08:44:04 2008
627938b785fa7fdb8eed74672af1edcc


Files:
================================
configs:
base_may
base_apr
base_july
base_june
logs:
current.log

Size
========
22629
22629
20581
20581
2065

show file
Use this command to display the contents of a file.

Syntax
show file filename

Parameters
filename

3-42

Basic Configuration

Specifies the name of the file to display.

show config

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display a text file named “myconfig” in the configs/ directory. Note
that only a portion of the file is shown in this example.
C3(rw)->show file configs/myconfig
...
17 : #snmp
18 :
19 : set snmp access ro security-model v1 exact read All notify All nonvolatile
20 :
21 : set snmp access ro security-model v2c exact read All notify All nonvolatile
22 :
23 : set snmp access public security-model v1 exact read All write All notify All
nonvolatile
24 :
25 : set snmp access public security-model v2c exact read All write All notify All
nonvolatile
26 :
27 : set snmp access public security-model usm exact read All write All notify All
nonvolatile
28 :
29 : set snmp community :xxxxxxxxxxx:
30 :
31 : set snmp group ro user ro security-model v1
32 :
33 : set snmp group public user public security-model v1
34 :
35 : set snmp group ro user ro security-model v2c
36 :
37 : set snmp group public user public security-model v2c
38 :
39 : set snmp group public user public security-model usm
40 :
41 : set snmp user public authentication md5 :xxxxxxxxx: encryption des privacy
:xxxxxxxxxx:
42 :
43 : set snmp view viewname All subtree 1
44 :
45 : !

show config
Use this command to display the system configuration or write the configuration to a file.

Syntax
show config [all | facility] [outfile {configs/filename}]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-43

configure

Parameters
all

(Optional) Displays default and non‐default configuration settings.

facility

(Optional) Specifies the exact name of one facility for which to show
configuration. For example, enter “router” to show only router
configuration.

outfile

(Optional) Specifies that the current configuration will be written to a text
file in the configs/ directory.

configs/filename

Specifies a filename in the configs/ directory to display.

Defaults
By default, show config will display all non‐default configuration information for all facilities.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
The separate facilities that can be displayed by this command are identified in the display of the
current configuration by a # preceding the facility name. For example, “#port” indicates the facility
name “port.”

Examples
This example shows how to write the current configuration to a file named save_config2:
C3(rw)->show config all outfile configs/save_config2

This example shows how to display configuration for the facility “port”.
C3(rw)->show config port
This command shows non-default configurations only.
Use 'show config all' to show both default and non-default configurations.
begin
!
#***** NON-DEFAULT CONFIGURATION *****
!
!
#port
set port jumbo disable ge.1.1
!
end

configure
Use this command to execute a previously downloaded configuration file stored on the switch.

Syntax
configure filename [append]

3-44

Basic Configuration

copy

Parameters
filename

Specifies the path and file name of the configuration file to execute.

append

(Optional) Appends the configuration file contents to the current
configuration. This is equivalent to typing the contents of the config file
directly into the CLI and can be used, for example, to make incremental
adjustments to the current configuration.

Defaults
If append is not specified, the current running configuration will be replaced with the contents of
the configuration file, which will require an automated reset of the chassis.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to execute the “Jan1_2004.cfg” configuration file:
C3(su)->configure configs/Jan1_2004.cfg

copy
Use this command to upload or download an image or a CLI configuration file.

Syntax
copy source {destination | system:image}

Parameters
source

Specifies location and name of the source file to copy. Options are a local file
path in the configs or logs directory, or the URL of a TFTP, Secure FTP (SFTP),
or Secure Copy (SCP) server.

destination

Specifies location and name of the destination where the file will be copied.
Options are a local file path in the configs directory, or the URL of a TFTP,
SFTP, or SCP server.

system:image

The required destination of an image file.
Note: Only TFTP can be used to download an image file.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
SFTP and SCP can only be used to transfer configuration files or the logs/current.log file. You
cannot use SFTP or SCP to download images (system:image).

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-45

delete

Examples
This example shows how to download an image via TFTP:
C3(su)->copy tftp://10.1.192.34/version01000 system:image

This example shows how to download a configuration file to the configs directory:
C3(su)->copy tftp://10.1.192.1/Jan1_2004.cfg configs/Jan1_2004.cfg

This example shows how to upload a configuration file from the configs directory using SFTP.
C3(su)->copy configs/Jan1_2009.cfg sftp://user:passwd@10.1.192.1/Jan1_2009.cfg

delete
Use this command to remove an image or a CLI configuration file from the switch.

Syntax
delete filename

Parameters
filename

Specifies the local path name to the file. Valid directories are /images and
/configs.44.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Use the dir command (page 3‐41) to display current image and configuration file names.

Example
This example shows how to delete the “Jan1_2004.cfg” configuration file:
C3(su)->delete configs/Jan1_2004.cfg

show tftp settings
Use this command to display TFTP settings used by the switch during data transfers using TFTP.

Syntax
show tftp settings

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

3-46

Basic Configuration

set tftp timeout

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
The TFTP timeout value can be set with the set tftp timeout command. The TFTP retry value can
be set with the set tftp retry command.

Example
This example shows the output of this command.
C3(ro)->show tftp settings
TFTP packet timeout (seconds): 2
TFTP max retry: 5

set tftp timeout
Use this command to configure how long TFTP will wait for a reply of either an acknowledgement
packet or a data packet during a data transfer.

Syntax
set tftp timeout seconds

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the number of seconds to wait for a reply. The valid range is
from 1 to 30 seconds. Default value is 2 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example sets the timeout period to 4 seconds.
C3(rw)->set tftp timeout 4

clear tftp timeout
Use this command to reset the TFTP timeout value to the default value of 2 seconds.

Syntax
clear tftp timeout

Parameters
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-47

set tftp retry

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the timeout value to the default of 2 seconds.
C3(rw)-> clear tftp timeout

set tftp retry
Use this command to configure how many times TFTP will resend a packet, either an
acknowledgement packet or a data packet.

Syntax
set tftp retry retry

Parameters
retry

Specifies the number of times a packet will be resent. The valid range is
from 1 to 1000. Default value is 5 retries.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example sets the retry count to 3.
C3(rw)->set tftp retry 3

clear tftp retry
Use this command to reset the TFTP retry value to the default value of 5 retries.

Syntax
clear tftp retry

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

3-48

Basic Configuration

Clearing and Closing the CLI

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the retry value to the default of 5 retries.
C3(rw)-> clear tftp retry

Clearing and Closing the CLI
Purpose
To clear the CLI screen or to close your CLI session.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

cls

3-49

exit

3-50

cls (clear screen)
Use this command to clear the screen for the current CLI session.

Syntax
cls

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to clear the CLI screen:
C3(su)->cls

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-49

exit

exit
Use either of these commands to leave a CLI session.

Syntax
exit

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
By default, switch timeout occurs after 15 minutes of user inactivity, automatically closing your
CLI session. Use the set logout command (page 3‐30) to change this default.

Example
This example shows how to exit a CLI session:
C3(su)->exit

Resetting the Switch
Purpose
To reset one or more switches, and to clear the user‐defined configuration parameters.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

reset

3-50

clear config

3-51

reset
Use this command to reset the switch without losing any user‐defined configuration settings.

Syntax
reset [unit]

Parameters
unit
3-50

Basic Configuration

(Optional) Specifies a unit to be reset.

clear config

Defaults
If no unit ID is specified, the entire system will be reset.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
A SecureStack C3 switch can also be reset with the RESET button located on its front panel. For
information on how to do this, refer to the SecureStack C3 Installation Guide shipped with your
switch.

Examples
This example shows how to reset the system:
C3(su)->reset
Are you sure you want to reload the stack? (y/n) y
Saving Configuration to stacking members
Reloading all switches.

This example shows how to reset unit 1:
C3(su)->reset 1
Are you sure you want to reload the switch? (y/n) y
Reloading switch 1.
This switch is manager of the stack.
STACK: detach 3 units

clear config
Use this command to clear the user‐defined configuration parameters.

Syntax
clear config [all]

Parameters
all

(Optional) Clears user‐defined configuration parameters (and stack unit
numbers and priorities, if applicable).

Defaults
If all is not specified, stacking configuration parameters will not be cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
When using the clear config command to clear configuration parameters in a stack, it is important
to remember the following:

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-51

Using and Configuring WebView

•

Use clear config to clear configuration parameters without clearing stack unit IDs. This
command WILL NOT clear stack parameters and avoids the process of re‐numbering the
stack.

•

Use clear config all when it is necessary to clear all configuration parameters, including stack
unit IDs (if applicable) and switch priority values.

•

Use the clear ip address command to clear the IP address.

Configuration parameters and stacking information can also be cleared on the master unit only by
selecting option 10 (restore configuration to factory defaults) from the boot menu on switch
startup. This selection will leave stacking priorities on all other units, if applicable.

Example
This example shows how to clear configuration parameters (including stacking parameters, if
applicable):
C3(su)->clear config all

Using and Configuring WebView
Purpose
By default, WebView (The Enterasys Networks embedded web server for switch configuration
and management tasks) is enabled on TCP port number 80 on the SecureStack C3 switch. You can
verify WebView status, and enable or disable WebView using the commands described in this
section. WebView can also be securely used over SSL port 443, if SSL is enabled on the switch. By
default, SSL is disabled.
To use WebView, type the IP address of the switch in your browser. To use WebView over SSL,
type in https:// then the IP address of the switch. For example, https://172.16.2.10.

Commands
For information about...
show webview

3-52

set webview

3-53

show ssl

3-53

set ssl

3-54

show webview
Use this command to display WebView status.

Syntax
show webview

Parameters
None.

3-52

Refer to page...

Basic Configuration

set webview

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display WebView status:
C3(rw)->show webview
WebView is Enabled.

set webview
Use this command to enable or disable WebView on the switch.

Syntax
set webview {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enable or disable WebView on the switch.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
It is good practice for security reasons to disable HTTP access on the switch when finished
configuring with WebView, and then to only enable WebView on the switch when changes need to
be made.

Example
This example shows how to disable WebView on the switch:
C3(rw)->set webview disable

show ssl
Use this command to display SSL status.

Syntax
show ssl

Parameters
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-53

set ssl

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SSL status:
C3(rw)->show ssl
SSL status: Enabled

set ssl
Use this command to enable or disable the use of WebView over SSL port 443. By default, SSL is
disabled on the switch. This command can also be used to reinitialize the hostkey that is used for
encryption.

Syntax
set ssl {enabled | disabled | reinitialize | hostkey reinitialize}

Parameters
enabled | disabled

Enables or disables the ability to use WebView over SSL.

reinitialize

Stops and then restarts the SSL process.

hostkey reinitialize

Stops SSL, regenerates new keys, and then restarts SSL.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable SSL:
C3(rw)->set ssl enabled

3-54

Basic Configuration

Gathering Technical Support Information

Gathering Technical Support Information
Purpose
To gather common technical support information.

Command
For information about...

Refer to page...

show support

3-55

show support
Use this command to display switch information for troubleshooting.

Syntax
show support

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
This command initiates a number of show commands to easily gather basic information from an
installed device. To use this command, set your console to capture the output to a file first, before
executing the command, since the output is extensive.
Output from the following commands is gathered by this command:
•

show version

•

show logging buffer

•

show port status

•

show system utilization process

•

show system utilization storage

•

show config

Example
There is no display example because the output of this command is quite lengthy.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-55

Configuring Hostprotect

Configuring Hostprotect
Purpose
This feature enables rate limiting of host bound traffic on SecureStack C3 switches, to assist in the
prevention of Denial of Service issues. When enabled, the hostprotect functionality applies a 64
kbps meter to control plane traffic, such as BPDUs or LACP packets, destined for the host
processor.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show system hostprotect

3-56

set system hostprotect

3-56

clear system hostprotect

3-57

show system hostprotect
Use this command to display the status of the hostprotect feature.

Syntax
show system hostprotect

Parameters
None.

Defaults
Hostprotect is enabled by default.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows the output of this command.
C3(rw)->show system hostprotect
hostprotect Enable

set system hostprotect
Use this command to enable or disable hostprotect on the switch.

Syntax
set system hostprotect {enable | disable}

3-56

Basic Configuration

clear system hostprotect

Parameters
enable

Enables hostprotect mode.

disable

Disables hostprotect mode.

Defaults
This feature is disabled by default.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Hostprotect uses hardware resources that are also used for priority queues (see “Configuring
Priority to Transmit Queue Mapping” on page 12‐4), so if hostprotect is enabled, priority queues
are limited.
At boot time, if more than two priority queue mappings are defined, in addition to the default
mapping, hostprotect will be disabled.
At run time, if hostprotect if enabled, and you attempt to define more than two priority queue
mappings (with the set port priority‐queue command), the set will fail and a warning message
will be displayed.
At run time, if more than two priority queue mappings exist, and you attempt to enable
hostprotect with this command, the set will fail and a warning message will be displayed.
Changing the hostprotect status requires a reset of the switch or stack of switches.

Example
This example disables hostprotect.
C3(rw)->set system hostprotect disable
Changes in the host protect mode will require resetting this stack.
Are you sure you want to continue? (y/n)y

clear system hostprotect
Use this command to return the hostprotect status to the default of enabled.

Syntax
clear system hostprotect

Parameters
None.

Defaults
The default state is enabled.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

3-57

clear system hostprotect

Usage
Changing the hostprotect status requires a reset of the switch or stack of switches. If more than
two priority queue mappings exist and you execute this command to reset the hostprotect status
to enabled, the command will not complete and you will get a warning message.

Example
This example attempts to return the hostprotect status to the default, but the command cannot
complete because more than two priority queue mappings exist.
C3(rw)->clear system hostprotect
Changes in the host protect mode will require resetting this stack.
Are you sure you want to continue? (y/n)y
Error: Could not set system host protect to default

3-58

Basic Configuration

4
Activating Licensed Features
In order to enable the C3 advanced features, such as Advanced Routing, you must purchase and
activate a license key. If you have purchased a license, you can proceed to activate your license as
described in this section. If you wish to obtain a permanent or evaluation license, use the
Enterasys Customer Portal or contact the Enterasys Networks Sales Department.
Note: All members of a stack must be licensed in order to support licensed features in a stack
environment. If the master unit in a stack has an activated license, all member units also must have
an activated license in order to operate. If the master unit in a stack does not have an activated
license, then the licensed functionality will not be available to member units, even if they have
licenses installed.

License Key Field Descriptions
When Enterasys supplies a license, it will be sent to you as a character string similar to the
following:
INCREMENT advrouter 2006.0127 27-jan-2011 0123456789AB 0123456789AB

The contents of the six fields, from the left, indicate:
•

Type—the type of license. For the SecureStack C3, the value in this field is always
“INCREMENT.”

•

Feature—description of the feature being licensed. For example, ”advrouter” as shown in the
character string above.

•

Date‐based version (DBV)—a date‐related string. For the SecureStack C3, the value in this
field is not significant.

•

Expiration type—indicates whether the license is a permanent or an evaluation license. If the
license is an evaluation license, this field will contain the expiration date of the license. If the
license is a permanent license, this field will contain the word “permanent.”

•

Key—the license key.

•

Host ID—the serial number of the switch to which this license applies.

When activating licenses on SecureStack devices, we recommend that you copy and paste the
license character string, rather than entering the text manually.

Licensing Procedure in a Stack Environment
The licenses for all members of an operating stack can be activated during a single CLI session, by
following these steps:
1.

Obtain valid licenses for all members of the stack from the Enterasys Customer Portal.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

4-1

Clearing, Showing, and Applying Licenses

2.

Optionally, note the serial numbers of the switches in the stack. You can use the show system
hardware command (page 3‐14) to display the switch serial numbers.
Note: Since license keys are applied to the correct stack member switch automatically, based on
the switch serial number that is part of the license string, you should know the serial numbers of the
switches in order to enable the licenses of the member switches first, before the master unit.

3.

Enable the licenses on the stack members first, before enabling the master unit, using the set
license command (page 4‐3). For example:
C3(rw)->set license INCREMENT advrouter 2006.0127 27-jan-2011 0123456789AB
0123456789AB

4.

Enable the license on the switch master unit last, using the set license command.

Adding a New Member to a Licensed Stack
When a SecureStack C3 switch without a license is added to a stack that has licensing enabled, the
ports on the new switch will not pass traffic until a license has been applied to the new switch. To
add a new member to a licensed stack:
1.

Obtain a license for the new switch from the Enterasys Customer Portal.

2.

Add the new unit to the stack, following the procedure in “Adding a New Unit to an Existing
Stack” on page 2‐3.

3.

Use the set license command to install and activate the new switch’s license. The new switch
will then join the stack and its ports will be attached.

Alternatively, you can install and activate the new switch’s license first, before adding the switch
to the stack.

Clearing, Showing, and Applying Licenses
Licenses can be displayed, applied, and cleared only with the license commands described in this
chapter. General configuration commands such as show config or clear config do not apply to
licenses.
Every license is associated with a specific hardware platform, based on the serial number of the
hardware platform. If you need to move a license from one hardware platform to another, you
must contact Enterasys Customer Support to arrange for re‐hosting of the license.

Commands
For information about...

4-2

Refer to page...

set license

4-3

show license

4-4

clear license

4-4

Activating Licensed Features

set license

set license
Use this command to activate the SecureStack C3 licensed features.

Syntax
set license type feature DBV expiration key hostid

Parameters
type

Specifies the type of license. For the SecureStack C3, the value in this field
is always INCREMENT.

feature

The name of the feature being licensed.

DBV

A date‐related string generated as part of the license.

expiration

Indicates whether the license is a permanent or an evaluation license. If
the license is an evaluation license, this field will contain the expiration
date of the license. If the license is a permanent license, this field will
contain the word “permanent.”

key

The license key.

hostid

The serial number of the switch to which this license applies.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
If multiple switches are used in a stack, an individual license is required for each stack member.
Refer to “Licensing Procedure in a Stack Environment” on page 4‐1 for more information.
When activating licenses with this command, Enterasys Networks recommends that you copy and
paste the entire license character string, rather than enter the text manually. If you enter the
character string manually, ensure that you exactly match the capitalization of the character string
sent to you.
Every license is associated with a specific hardware platform, based on the serial number of the
hardware platform. If you need to move a license from one hardware platform to another, you
must contact Enterasys Customer Support to arrange for re‐hosting of the license.

Example
This example shows how to activate a permanent license key on the switch with serial number
075103099041. In this example, the switch is a stand‐alone unit so its unit number is 1.
C3(rw)->set license INCREMENT advrouter 2008.0212 permanent DF6A8558E5AB
075103099041
Validating license on unit 1
License successfully validated and set on unit 1
C3(rw)->

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

4-3

show license

show license
Use this command to display license key information for switches with activated licenses.

Syntax
show license [unit number]

Parameters
unit number

(Optional) Specifies the switch for which to display license information.
Refer to Chapter 2, Configuring Switches in a Stack, for more
information about stack unit IDs, or numbers.

Defaults
If no unit number is specified, license key information for all switches in the stack is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
Licenses can be displayed, applied, and cleared only with the license commands described in this
chapter. General configuration commands such as show config or clear config do not affect
licenses.

Example
This example shows how to display license key information for switch unit 1 in the stack.
C3(ro)->show license unit 1
unit 1
key: INCREMENT advrouter 2006.0728 permanent 31173CAC6495 045100039001
status: Active

clear license
Use this command to clear the license key settings..

Syntax
clear license featureId feature

Parameters
featureID feature

The name of the feature being cleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

4-4

Activating Licensed Features

clear license

Example
This example shows how to clear the advrouter licensed feature :
C3(rw)->clear license featureId advrouter

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

4-5

clear license

4-6

Activating Licensed Features

5
Configuring System Power and PoE
Important Notice
The commands in this section apply only to PoE-equipped devices. Consult the Installation Guide for your
product to determine if it is PoE-equipped.

The commands in this chapter allow you to review and set system power and PoE (Power over
Ethernet) parameters, including the power available to the system, the usage threshold for each
module, whether or not SNMP trap messages will be sent when power status changes, and per‐
port PoE settings.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show inlinepower

5-1

set inlinepower threshold

5-2

set inlinepower trap

5-3

set inlinepower detectionmode

5-3

show port inlinepower

5-4

set port inlinepower

5-5

show inlinepower
Use this command to display system power properties.

Syntax
show inlinepower

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

5-1

set inlinepower threshold

Example
This example shows how to display system power properties:
C3(su)->show inlinepower
Detection Mode
: auto
Unit
---1

Status
-----auto

Power(W)
-------375

Consumption(W)
-------------0.00

Usage(%)
-------0.00

Threshold(%)
-----------80

Trap
---enable

Table 5‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 5-1

show inlinepower Output Details

Output

What It Displays...

Detection Mode

Displays the PD detection mode used by the switch. The detection mode can be
configured with the command “set inlinepower detectionmode” (page 5-3).

Unit

Number of PoE-capable module.

Status

Whether the PoE administrative state is off (disabled) or auto (on). This state is not
configurable.

Power (W)

Unit’s available power wattage.

Consumption (W)

Unit’s power wattage consumed.

Usage (%)

Unit’s percentage of total system PoE power usage.

Threshold (%)

Unit’s alloted percentage of total PoE power available in the system. The threshold
can be configured with the command “set inlinepower threshold” (page 5-2).

Trap

Whether PoE trap messaging is enabled or disabled on this unit. Trap messaging
can be configured with the command “set inlinepower trap” (page 5-3).

set inlinepower threshold
Use this command to set the power usage threshold on a specified unit or module.

Syntax
set inlinepower threshold usage-threshold module-number

Parameters
usage‐threshold

Specifies a power threshold as a percentage of available system power.
Valid values are 11 to 100.

module‐number

Specifies the module or unit on which to set the power threshold.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

5-2

Configuring System Power and PoE

set inlinepower trap

Usage
The threshold is expressed as a percentage of the available PoE power. When this threshold is
reached, a trap will be sent if traps are enabled with the set inlinepower trap command.

Example
This example shows how to set the power threshold to 90 on module/unit 1:
C3(su)->set inlinepower threshold 90 1

set inlinepower trap
Use this command to enable or disable the sending of an SNMP trap message for a unit or module
whenever the status of its ports changes, or whenever the unit’s power usage threshold is crossed.

Syntax
set inlinepower trap {disable | enable} module-number

Parameters
disable | enable

Disables or enables inline power trap messaging.

module‐number

Specifies the module or unit on which to disable or enable trap messaging.

Defaults
Sending of traps is disabled by default.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The module’s or unit’s power usage threshold must be set using the set inlinepower threshold
command as described on page 5‐2.

Example
This example shows how to enable inline power trap messaging on module 1:
C3(su)->set inlinepower trap enable 1

set inlinepower detectionmode
Use this command to specify the method the switch will use to detect PDs (powered devices)
connected to its ports.

Syntax
set inlinepower detectionmode {auto | ieee)

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

5-3

show port inlinepower

Parameters
auto

Specifies that the switch will use the standard 802.3af detection method
first. If that fails, then the switch will use the legacy (pre 802.3af
standard) capacitance method of detection.

ieee

Specifies that the switch will only use the standard 802.3af detection
method.

Defaults
Default detection mode is auto.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command is used to specify how the switch should detect PDs connected to its ports. The PoE
hardware in the switches can use the IEEE standard 802.3af (resistor‐based) method or a
proprietary method using capacitor detection.
If auto is configured, the switch will first use the IEEE resistor‐based detection method, and if that
fails, the switch will use the capacitor‐based detection method. If ieee is configured, only the IEEE
resistor‐based detection method will be used.

Example
This example sets the switch’s PD detection mode to IEEE standard 802.3af only.
C3(su)->set inlinepower detectionmode ieee

show port inlinepower
Use this command to display all ports supporting PoE.

Syntax
show port inlinepower [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays information for specific PoE port(s).

Defaults
If not specified, information for all PoE ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display PoE information for port ge.2.1. In this case, the port’s
administrative state, PoE priority and class have not been changed from default values:

5-4

Configuring System Power and PoE

set port inlinepower

C3(su)->show port inlinepower ge.2.1
Port
---ge.2.1

Type
---wireless

Admin
----auto

Oper
---searching

Priority
-------low

Class
----0

Power(W)
-------15.4

set port inlinepower
Use this command to configure PoE parameters on one or more ports.

Syntax
set port inlinepower port-string {[admin {off | auto}] [priority {critical | high
| low}] [type type]}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to configure PoE.

admin off | auto

Sets the PoE administrative state to off (disabled) or auto (on).

priority critical |
high | low

Sets the port(s) priority for the PoE allocation algorithm to critical
(highest), high or low.

type type

Specifies a string describing the type of device connected to a port.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable PoE on port ge.3.1 with critical priority:
C3(su)->set port inlinepower ge.3.1 admin auto priority critical

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

5-5

set port inlinepower

5-6

Configuring System Power and PoE

6
Discovery Protocol Configuration
This chapter describes how to configure discovery protocols. For more extensive configuration
information, refer to the “Configuring Neighbor Discovery” feature guide on the Enterasys
Networks web site: http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals
For information about...

Refer to page...

Configuring CDP

6-1

Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol

6-7

Configuring Link Layer Discovery Protocol and LLDP-MED

6-13

Configuring CDP
Purpose
To review and configure the Enterasys CDP discovery protocol. This protocol is used to discover
network topology. When enabled, this protocol allows Enterasys devices to send periodic PDUs
about themselves to neighboring devices.

Commands
The commands used to review and configure the CDP discovery protocol are listed below.
For information about...

Refer to page...

show cdp

6-2

set cdp state

6-3

set cdp auth

6-4

set cdp interval

6-4

set cdp hold-time

6-5

clear cdp

6-5

show neighbors

6-6

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-1

show cdp

show cdp
Use this command to display the status of the CDP discovery protocol and message interval on
one or more ports.

Syntax
show cdp [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays CDP status for a specific port. For a detailed description
of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on
page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, all CDP information will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display CDP information for ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.9:
C3(su)->show cdp ge.1.1-9
CDP Global Status
CDP Version Supported
CDP Hold Time
CDP Authentication Code
CDP Transmit Frequency

:auto-enable
:30 hex
:180
:00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 hex
:60

Port
Status
----------------ge.1.1
auto-enable
ge.1.2
auto-enable
ge.1.3
auto-enable
ge.1.4
auto-enable
ge.1.5
auto-enable
ge.1.6
auto-enable
ge.1.7
auto-enable
ge.1.8
auto-enable
ge.1.9
auto-enable

Table 6‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 6-1

6-2

show cdp Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

CDP Global Status

Whether CDP is globally auto-enabled, enabled or disabled. The default state of
auto-enabled can be reset with the set cdp state command. For details, refer to “set
cdp state” on page 6-3.

CDP Versions
Supported

CDP version number(s) supported by the switch.

CDP Hold Time

Minimum time interval (in seconds) at which CDP configuration messages can be
set. The default of 180 seconds can be reset with the set cdp hold-time command.
For details, refer to “set cdp hold-time” on page 6-5.

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set cdp state

Table 6-1

show cdp Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

CDP Authentication
Code

Authentication code for CDP discovery protocol. The default of 00-00-00-00-00-0000-00 can be reset using the set cdp auth command. For details, refer to “set cdp
auth” on page 6-4.

CDP Transmit
Frequency

Frequency (in seconds) at which CDP messages can be transmitted. The default of
60 seconds can be reset with the set cdp interval command. For details, refer to “set
cdp interval” on page 6-4.

Port

Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7-1.

Status

Whether CDP is enabled, disabled or auto-enabled on the port.

set cdp state
Use this command to enable or disable the CDP discovery protocol on one or more ports.

Syntax
set cdp state {auto | disable | enable} [port-string]

Parameters
auto | disable |
enable

Auto‐enables, disables or enables the CDP protocol on the specified port(s).
In auto‐enable mode, which is the default mode for all ports, a port
automatically becomes CDP‐enabled upon receiving its first CDP message.

port‐string

(Optional) Enables or disables CDP on specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, the CDP state will be globally set.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to globally enable CDP:
C3(su)->set cdp state enable

This example shows how to enable the CDP for port ge.1.2:
C3(su)->set cdp state enable ge.1.2

This example shows how to disable the CDP for port ge.1.2:
C3(su)->set cdp state disable ge.1.2

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-3

set cdp auth

set cdp auth
Use this command to set a global CDP authentication code.

Syntax
set cdp auth auth-code

Parameters
auth‐code

Specifies an authentication code for the CDP protocol. This can be up to 16
hexadecimal values separated by commas.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The authentication code value determines a switch’s CDP domain. If two or more switches have
the same CDP authentication code, they will be entered into each other’s CDP neighbor tables. If
they have different authentication codes, they are in different domains and will not be entered
into each other’s CDP neighbor tables.
A switch with the default authentication code (16 null characters) will recognize all switches, no
matter what their authentication code, and enter them into its CDP neighbor table.

Example
This example shows how to set the CDP authentication code to 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8:
C3(su)->set cdp auth 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8:

set cdp interval
Use this command to set the message interval frequency (in seconds) of the CDP discovery
protocol.

Syntax
set cdp interval frequency

Parameters
frequency

Specifies the transmit frequency of CDP messages in seconds.Valid values
are from 5 to 900 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

6-4

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set cdp hold-time

Example
This example shows how to set the CDP interval frequency to 15 seconds:
C3(su)->set cdp interval 15

set cdp hold-time
Use this command to set the hold time value for CDP discovery protocol configuration messages.

Syntax
set cdp hold-time hold-time

Parameters
hold‐time

Specifies the hold time value for CDP messages in seconds.Valid values are
from 15 to 600.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set CDP hold time to 60 seconds:
C3(su)->set cdp hold-time 60

clear cdp
Use this command to reset CDP discovery protocol settings to defaults.

Syntax
clear cdp {[state] [port-state port-string] [interval] [hold-time] [auth-code]}

Parameters
state

(Optional) Resets the global CDP state to auto‐enabled.

port‐state port‐string

(Optional) Resets the port state on specific port(s) to auto‐enabled.

interval

(Optional) Resets the message frequency interval to 60 seconds.

hold‐time

(Optional) Resets the hold time value to 180 seconds.

auth‐code

(Optional) Resets the authentication code to 16 bytes of 00 (00‐00‐00‐
00‐00‐00‐00‐00).

Defaults
At least one optional parameter must be entered.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-5

show neighbors

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the CDP state to auto‐enabled:
C3(su)->clear cdp state

show neighbors
This command displays Neighbor Discovery information for either the CDP or Cisco DP
protocols.

Syntax
show neighbors [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port or ports for which to display Neighbor
Discovery information.

Defaults
If no port is specified, all Neighbor Discovery information is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
This command displays information discovered by both the CDP and the Cisco DP protocols.

Example
This example displays Neighbor Discovery information for all ports.
C3(su)->show neighbors
Port
Device ID
Port ID
Type
Network Address
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ge.1.1
00036b8b1587
12.227.1.176
ciscodp
12.227.1.176
ge.1.6
0001f496126f
140.2.3.1
ciscodp
140.2.3.1
ge.1.6
00-01-f4-00-72-fe
140.2.4.102
cdp
140.2.4.102
ge.1.6
00-01-f4-00-70-8a
140.2.4.104
cdp
140.2.4.104
ge.1.6
00-01-f4-c5-f7-20
140.2.4.101
cdp
140.2.4.101
ge.1.6
00-01-f4-89-4f-ae
140.2.4.105
cdp
140.2.4.105
ge.1.6
00-01-f4-5f-1f-c0
140.2.1.11
cdp
140.2.1.11
ge.1.19
0001f400732e
165.32.100.10
ciscodp
165.32.100.10

6-6

Discovery Protocol Configuration

Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol

Configuring Cisco Discovery Protocol
Purpose
To review and configure the Cisco discovery protocol. Discovery protocols are used to discover
network topology. When enabled, they allow Cisco devices to send periodic PDUs about
themselves to neighboring devices. Specifically, this feature enables recognizing PDUs from Cisco
phones. A table of information about detected phones is kept by the switch and can be queried by
the network administrator.

Commands
The commands used to review and configure the Cisco discovery protocol are listed below. Refer
also to “show neighbors” on page 6‐6.
For information about...

Refer to page...

show ciscodp

6-7

show ciscodp port info

6-8

set ciscodp status

6-9

set ciscodp timer

6-9

set ciscodp holdtime

6-10

set ciscodp port

6-10

clear ciscodp

6-12

show ciscodp
Use this command to display global Cisco discovery protocol information.

Syntax
show ciscodp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display global Cisco DP information.
C3(su)->show ciscodp
CiscoDP :Enabled
Timer :5
Holdtime (TTl): 180
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-7

show ciscodp port info

Device ID : 001188554A60
Last Change : WED NOV 08 13:19:56 2006

Table 6‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 6-2

show ciscodp Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

CiscoDP

Whether Cisco DP is globally enabled or disabled. Auto indicates that Cisco DP will
be globally enabled only if Cisco DP PDUs are received.
Default setting of auto-enabled can be reset with the set ciscodp status command.

Timer

The number of seconds between Cisco discovery protocol PDU transmissions. The
default of 60 seconds can be reset with the set ciscodp timer command.

Holdtime

Number of seconds neighboring devices will hold PDU transmissions from the
sending device. Default value of 180 can be changed with the set ciscodp holdtime
command.

Device ID

The MAC address of the switch.

Last Change

The time that the last Cisco DP neighbor was discovered.

show ciscodp port info
Use this command to display summary information about the Cisco discovery protocol on one or
more ports.

Syntax
show ciscodp port info [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays Cisco DP information for a specific port. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, Cisco DP information for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display Cisco DP information for Gigabit Ethernet port 1 in slot 1.
C3(su)->show ciscodp port info ge.1.1
port
state
vvid
trusted
cos
---------------------------------------------ge.1.1
enable
none
yes
0

Table 6‐3 provides an explanation of the command output.

6-8

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set ciscodp status

Table 6-3

show ciscodp port info Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Port

Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7-1.

State

Whether Cisco DP is enabled, disabled or auto-enabled on the port. Default state of
enabled can be changed using the set ciscodp port command.

vvid

Whether a voice VLAN ID has been set on this port. Default of none can be changed
using the set ciscodp port command.

trusted

The trust mode of the port. Default of trusted can be changed using the set ciscodp
port command.

cos

The Class of Service priority value for untrusted traffic. The default of 0 can be
changed using the set ciscodp port command.

set ciscodp status
Use this command to enable or disable the Cisco discovery protocol globally on the switch.

Syntax
set ciscodp state {auto | disable | enable}

Parameters
auto

Globally enable only if Cisco DP PDUs are received.

disable

Globally disable Cisco discovery protocol.

enable

Globally enable Cisco discovery protocol.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to globally enable CiscoDP:
C3(su)->set ciscodp state enable

set ciscodp timer
Use this command to set the number of seconds between Cisco discovery protocol PDU
transmissions.

Syntax
set ciscodp timer seconds

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-9

set ciscodp holdtime

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the number of seconds between Cisco DP PDU transmissions.
Valid values are from 5 to 254 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the Cisco DP timer to 120 seconds.
C3(su)->set ciscodp timer 120

set ciscodp holdtime
Use this command to set the time to live (TTL) for Cisco discovery protocol PDUs. This is the
amount of time, in seconds, neighboring devices will hold PDU transmissions from the sending
device.

Syntax
set ciscodp holdtime hold-time

Parameters
hold‐time

Specifies the time to live for Cisco DP PDUs. Valid values are from 10 to 255
seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set Cisco DP hold time to 180 seconds:
C3(su)->set ciscodp hold-time 180

set ciscodp port
Use this command to set the status, voice VLAN, extended trust mode, and CoS priority for
untrusted traffic for the Cisco Discovery Protocol on one or more ports.

Syntax
set ciscodp port {[status {disable | enable}] [vvid {vlan-id | none | dot1p |
untagged}] [trusted {yes | no}] [cos value]} port-string

6-10

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set ciscodp port

Parameters
status

Sets the CiscoDP port operational status.

disable

Does not transmit or process CiscoDP PDUs.

enable

Transmits and processes CiscoDP PDUs.

vvid

Sets the port voice VLAN for CiscoDP PDU transmission.

vlan‐id

Specifies the VLAN ID, range 1‐4093.

none

No voice VLAN will be used in CiscoDP PDUs. This is the default.

dot1p

Instructs attached phone to send 802.1p tagged frames.

untagged

Instructs attached phone to send untagged frames.

trusted

Sets the extended trust mode on the port.

yes

Instructs attached phone to allow the device connected to it to transmit
traffic containing any CoS or Layer 2 802.1p marking. This is the default
value.

no

Instructs attached phone to overwrite the 802.1p tag of traffic
transmitted by the device connected to it to 0, by default, or to the value
configured with the cos parameter.

cos value

Instructs attached phone to overwrite the 802.1p tag of traffic
transmitted by the device connected to it with the specified value, when
the trust mode of the port is set to untrusted. Value can range from 0 to
7, with 0 indicating the lowest priority.

port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which status will be set.

Defaults
•

Status: enabled

•

Voice VLAN: none

•

Trust mode: trusted

•

CoS value: 0

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
The following points describe how the Cisco DP extended trust settings work on the switch.
•

A Cisco DP port trust status of trusted or untrusted is only meaningful when a Cisco IP phone
is connected to a switch port and a PC or other device is connected to the back of the Cisco IP
phone.

•

A Cisco DP port state of trusted or untrusted only affects tagged traffic transmitted by the
device connected to the Cisco IP phone. Untagged traffic transmitted by the device connected
to the Cisco IP phone is unaffected by this setting.

•

If the switch port is configured to a Cisco DP trust state of trusted (with the trusted yes
parameter of this command), this setting is communicated to the Cisco IP phone instructing it
to allow the device connected to it to transmit traffic containing any CoS or Layer 2 802.1p
marking.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-11

clear ciscodp

•

If the switch port is configured to a Cisco DP trust state of untrusted (trusted no), this setting
is communicated to the Cisco IP phone instructing it to overwrite the 802.1p tag of traffic
transmitted by the device connected to it to 0, by default, or to the value specified by the cos
parameter of this command.

•

There is a one‐to‐one correlation between the value set with the cos parameter and the 802.1p
value assigned to ingressed traffic by the Cisco IP phone. A value of 0 equates to an 802.1p
priority of 0. Therefore, a value of 7 is given the highest priority.
Note: The Cisco Discovery Protocol must be globally enabled using the set ciscodp status
command before operational status can be set on individual ports.

Examples
This example shows how to set the Cisco DP port voice VLAN ID to 3 on port ge.1.6 and enable
the port operational state.
C3(rw)->set ciscodp port status enable vvid 3 ge.1.6

This example shows how to set the Cisco DP extended trust mode to untrusted on port ge.1.5 and
set the CoS priority to 1.
C3(rw)->set ciscodp port trusted no cos 1 ge.1.5

clear ciscodp
Use this command to clear the Cisco discovery protocol back to the default values.

Syntax
clear ciscodp [status | timer | holdtime | {port {status | vvid | trust | cos}
[port-string]}]

Parameters
status

Clears global CiscoDP enable status to default of auto.

timer

Clears the time between CiscoDP PDU transmissions to default of 60
seconds.

holdtime

Clears the time‐to‐live for CiscoDP PDU data to default of 180 seconds.

port

Clears the CiscoDP port configuration.

status

Clears the individual port operational status to the default of enabled.

vvid

Clears the individual port voice VLAN for CiscoDP PDU transmission
to 0.

trust

Clears the trust mode configuration of the port to trusted.

cos

Clears the CoS priority for untrusted traffic of the port to 0.

port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port(s) on which status will be set.

Defaults
If no parameters are entered, all Cisco DP parameters are reset to the defaults globally and for all
ports.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.
6-12

Discovery Protocol Configuration

Configuring Link Layer Discovery Protocol and LLDP-MED

Examples
This example shows how to clear all the Cisco DP parameters back to the default settings.
C3(rw)->clear ciscodp

This example shows how to clear the Cisco DP status on port ge.1.5.
C3(rw)->clear ciscodp port status ge.1.5

Configuring Link Layer Discovery Protocol and LLDP-MED
Overview
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLPD) provides an industry standard, vendor‐neutral way to
allow network devices to advertise their identities and capabilities on a local area network, and to
discover that information about their neighbors.
LLDP‐MED is an enhancement to LLDP that provides the following benefits:
•

Auto‐discovery of LAN policies, such as VLAN id, 802.1p priority, and DiffServ codepoint
settings, leading to “plug‐and‐play” networking

•

Device location and topology discovery, allowing creation of location databases and, in the
case of VoIP, provision of E911 services

•

Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints

•

Inventory management, allowing network administrators to track their network devices and
to determine their characteristics, such as manufacturer, software and hardware versions, and
serial or asset numbers

The information sent by an LLDP‐enabled device is extracted and tabulated by its peers. The
communication can be done when information changes or on a periodic basis. The information
tabulated is aged to ensure that it is kept up to date. Ports can be configured to send this
information, receive this information, or both send and receive.
Either LLDP or LLDP‐MED, but not both, can be used on an interface between two devices. A
switch port uses LLDP‐MED when it detects that an LLDP‐MED‐capable device is connected to it.
LLDP information is contained within a Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Unit (LLDPDU) sent
in a single 802.3 Ethernet frame. The information fields in LLDPDU are a sequence of short,
variable‐length, information elements known as TLVs — type, length, and value fields where:
•

Type identifies what kind of information is being sent

•

Length indicates the length of the information string in octets

•

Value is the actual information that needs to be sent

The LLDP standard specifies that certain TLVs are mandatory in transmitted LLDPDUs, while
others are optional. You can configure on a port‐specific basis which optional LLDP and LLDP‐
MED TLVs should be sent in LLDPDUs.

Purpose
To review and configure LLPD and LLPD‐MED.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-13

Configuring Link Layer Discovery Protocol and LLDP-MED

Commands
The commands used to review and configure the CDP discovery protocol are listed below.
For information about...

Refer to page...

show lldp

6-15

show lldp port status

6-16

show lldp port trap

6-16

show lldp port tx-tlv

6-17

show lldp port location-info

6-17

show lldp port local-info

6-18

show lldp port remote-info

6-21

show lldp port network-policy

6-22

set lldp tx-interval

6-23

set lldp hold-multiplier

6-24

set lldp trap-interval

6-24

set lldp med-fast-repeat

6-25

set lldp port status

6-26

set lldp port trap

6-26

set lldp port med-trap

6-27

set lldp port location-info

6-27

set lldp port tx-tlv

6-28

set lldp port network-policy

6-30

clear lldp

6-31

clear lldp port status

6-32

clear lldp port trap

6-32

clear lldp port med-trap

6-33

clear lldp port location-info

6-33

clear lldp port network-policy

6-34

clear lldp port tx-tlv

6-35

Configuration Tasks
The commands included in this implementation allow you to perform the following configuration
tasks:

6-14

Discovery Protocol Configuration

show lldp

Step

Task

Command(s)

1.

Configure global system LLDP parameters

set lldp tx-interval
set lldp hold-multiplier
set lldp trap-interval
set lldp med-fast-repeat
clear lldp

2.

Enable/disable specific ports to:
•
•
•

Transmit and process received LLDPDUs
Send LLDP traps
Send LLDP-MED traps

set/clear lldp port status
set/clear lldp port trap
set/clear lldp port med-trap

3.

Configure an ECS ELIN value for specific ports

set/clear lldp port location-info

4.

Configure Network Policy TLVs for specific ports

set/clear lldp port network-policy

5.

Configure which optional TLVs should be sent by
specific ports. For example, if you configured an
ECS ELIN and/or Network Policy TLVs, you must
enable those optional TLVs to be transmitted on
the specific ports.

set/clear lldp tx-tlv

show lldp
Use this command to display LLDP configuration information.

Syntax
show lldp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display LLDP configuration information.
C3(ro)->show lldp
Message Tx Interval
Message Tx Hold Multiplier
Notification Tx Interval
MED Fast Start Count

:
:
:
:

Tx-Enabled Ports
Rx-Enabled Ports

: ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12;
: ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12;

Trap-Enabled Ports
MED Trap-Enabled Ports

: ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12;
: ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12;

30
4
5
3

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-15

show lldp port status

show lldp port status
Use this command to display the LLDP status of one or more ports. The command lists the ports
that are enabled to send and receive LLDP PDUs. Ports are enabled or disabled with the set lldp
port status command.

Syntax
show lldp port status [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays LLDP status for one or a range of ports.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, LLDP status information will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display LLDP port status information for all ports.
C3(ro)->show lldp port status
Tx-Enabled Ports

: ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12

Rx-Enabled Ports

: ge.1.1-60; ge.2.1-24; ge.3.1-30; ge.4.1-12

show lldp port trap
Use this command to display the ports that are enabled to send an LLDP notification when a
remote system change has been detected or an LLDP‐MED notification when a change in the
topology has been sensed. Ports are enabled to send LLDP notifications with the set lldp port trap
command and to send LLDP‐MED notifications with the set lldp port med‐trap command.

Syntax
show lldp port trap [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays the port or range of ports that have been enabled
to send LLDP and/or LLDP‐MED notifications.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, LLDP port trap information will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

6-16

Discovery Protocol Configuration

show lldp port tx-tlv

Example
This example shows how to display LLDP port trap information for all ports.
C3(ro)->show lldp port trap
Trap-Enabled Ports
:
MED Trap-Enabled Ports:

show lldp port tx-tlv
Use this command to display information about which optional TLVs have been configured to be
transmitted on ports. Ports are configured to send optional TLVs with the set lldp port tx‐tlv
command.

Syntax
show lldp port tx‐tlv [port‐string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays information about TLV configuration for one or a
range of ports.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, TLV configuration information will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display transmit TLV information for three ports.
C3(ro)->show lldp port tx-tlv ge.1.1-3
* Means TLV is supported and enabled on this port
o Means TLV is supported on this port
Means TLV is not supported on this port
Column Pro Id uses letter notation for enable: s-stp, l-lacp, g-gvrp
Ports
------ge.1.1
ge.1.2
ge.1.3

Port
Desc
---*
*
*

Sys
Name
---*
*
*

Sys
Desc
---*
*
*

Sys
Cap
--*
*
*

Mgmt
Addr
---*
*
*

Vlan
Id
---*
*
*

Pro
Id
---slg
slg
slg

MAC PoE Link Max
PHY
Aggr Frame
--- --- ---- ---*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

MED MED MED MED
Cap Pol Loc PoE
--- --- --- --*
*
*

*

show lldp port location-info
Use this command to display configured location information for one or more ports. Ports are
configured with a location value using the set lldp port location‐info command.

Syntax
show lldp port location-info [port-string]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-17

show lldp port local-info

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays port location information for one or a range of
ports.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, port location configuration information will be displayed for all
ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display port location information for three ports.
C3(ro)->show lldp port location-info ge.1.1-3
Ports
-------ge.1.1
ge.1.2
ge.1.3

Type
------------ELIN
ELIN
ELIN

Location
------------------------1234567890
1234567890
1234567890

show lldp port local-info
Use this command to display the local system information stored for one or more ports. You can
use this information to detect misconfigurations or incompatibilities between the local port and
the attached endpoint device (remote port).

Syntax
show lldp port local-info [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays local system information for one or a range of
ports.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, local system information will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the local system information stored for port ge.4.1. Table 6‐4
describes the output fields of this command.
C3(rw)->show lldp port local-info ge.4.1
Local Port : ge.4.1
Local Port Id: ge.4.1
-------------------Port Desc
: ... 1000BASE-TX RJ45 Gigabit Ethernet Frontpanel Port

6-18

Discovery Protocol Configuration

show lldp port local-info

Mgmt Addr
: 10.21.64.100
Chassis ID : 00-E0-63-93-74-A5
Sys Name
: LLDP PoE test Chassis
Sys Desc
: Enterasys Networks, Inc.
Sys Cap Supported/Enabled
: bridge,router/bridge
Auto-Neg Supported/Enabled
Auto-Neg Advertised

: yes/yes
: 10BASE-T, 10BASE-TFD,
100BASE-TX, 100BASE-TXFD,
1000BASE-TFD,
Bpause
Operational Speed/Duplex/Type : 100 full tx
Max Frame Size (bytes)
: 1522
Vlan Id
: 1
LAG Supported/Enabled/Id
: no/no/0
Protocol Id : Spanning Tree v-3 (IEEE802.1s)
LACP v-1
GVRP
Network Policy
(app/tag/vlanId/cos/dscp)

: voice/tagged/10/3/5
voice signaling/tagged/10/3/5
guest voice/tagged/10/3/5
guest voice signaling/tagged/10/3/5
softphone voice/tagged/10/3/5
video conferencing/tagged/10/3/5
streaming video/tagged/10/3/5
video signaling/tagged/10/3/5
: 1234567890123456789012345

ECS ELIN
PoE
PoE
PoE
PoE
PoE
PoE
PoE

Device
Power Source
MDI Supported/Enabled
Pair Controllable/Used
Power Class
Power Limit (mW)
Power Priority

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

PSE device
primary
yes/yes
false/spare
2
15400
high

Table 6‐4 describes the information displayed by the show lldp port local‐info command.
Table 6-4

show lldp port local-info Output Details

Output Field

What it Displays...

Local Port

Identifies the port for which local system information is displayed.

Local Port Id

Mandatory basic LLDP TLV that identifies the port transmitting the
LLDPDU. Value is ifName object defined in RFC 2863.

Port Desc

Optional basic LLDP TLV. Value is ifDescr object defined in RFC 2863.

Mgmt Addr

Optional basic LLDP TLV. IPv4 address of host interface.

Chassis ID

Mandatory basic LLDP TLV that identifies the chassis transmitting the
LLDPDU. Value is MAC address of chassis.

Sys Name

Optional basic LLDP TLV. Value is the administratively assigned name for
the system.

Sys Desc

Optional basic LLDP TLV. Value is sysDescr object defined in RFC 3418.

Sys Cap Supported/Enabled

Optional basic LLDP TLV. System capabilities, value can be bridge and/or
router.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-19

show lldp port local-info

Table 6-4

6-20

show lldp port local-info Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What it Displays...

Auto-Neg Supported/Enabled

IEEE 802.3 Extensions MAC-PHY Configuration/Status TLV. Autonegotiation supported and enabled settings should be the same on the
two systems attached to the same link.

Auto-Neg Advertised

IEEE 802.3 Extensions MAC-PHY Configuration/Status TLV. Lists the
configured advertised values on the port.

Operational Speed/Duplex/
Type

IEEE 802.3 Extensions MAC-PHY Configuration/Status TLV. Lists the
operational MAU type, duplex, and speed of the port. If the received TLV
indicates that auto-negotiation is supported but not enabled, these values
will be used by the port.

Max Frame Size (bytes)

IEEE 802.3 Extensions Maximum Frame Size TLV. Value indicates
maximum frame size capability of the device’s MAC and PHY. In normal
mode, max frame size is 1522 bytes. In jumbo mode, max frame size is
10239 bytes.

Vlan Id

IEEE 802.1 Extensions Port VLAN ID TLV. Value is port VLAN ID (pvid).

LAG Supported/Enabled/Id

IEEE 802.3 Extensions Link Aggregation TLV. Values indicate whether the
link associated with this port can be aggregated, whether it is currently
aggregated, and if aggregated, the aggregated port identifier.

Protocol Id

IEEE 802.1 Extensions Protocol Identity TLV. Values can include
Spanning tree, LACP, and GARP protocols and versions. Only those
protocols enabled on the port are displayed.

Network Policy
(app/tag/vlanId/cos/dscp)

LLDP-MED Extensions Network Policy TLV. For all applications enabled
on the port to be transmitted in a TLV, displays the application name,
VLAN type (tagged or untagged), VLAN Id, and both the Layer 2 and
Layer 3 priorities associated with the application.

ECS ELIN

LLDP-MED Extensions Location Identification TLV. Emergency Call
Services (ECS) Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) is
currently the only type supported. Value is the ELIN configured on this
port.

PoE Device

LLDP-MED Extensions Extended Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only
when a port has PoE capabilities. Value is the Power Type of the device.
On a switch port, the value is Power Sourcing Entity (PSE).

PoE Power Source

LLDP-MED Extensions Extended Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only
when a port has PoE capabilities. Value can be primary or backup,
indicating whether the PSE is using its primary or backup power source.

PoE MDI Supported/Enabled

IEEE 802.3 Extensions Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only when a port
has PoE capabilities. Indicates whether sending the Power via MDI TLV is
supported/enabled. Value can be yes or no.

PoE Pair Controllable/Used

IEEE 802.3 Extensions Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only when a port
has PoE capabilities. Indicates whether pair selection can be controlled on
the given port (refer to RFC 3621). Value for Controllable can be true or
false. Value of Used can be signal (signal pairs only are in use) or spare
(spare pairs only are in use).

PoE Power Class

IEEE 802.3 Extensions Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only when a port
has PoE capabilities. Indicates the power class supplied by the port. Value
can range from 0 to 4.

Discovery Protocol Configuration

show lldp port remote-info

Table 6-4

show lldp port local-info Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What it Displays...

PoE Power Limit (mW)

LLDP-MED Extensions Extended Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only
when a port has PoE capabilities. Indicates the total power the port is
capable of sourcing over a maximum length cable, based on its current
configuration, in milli-Watts.

PoE Power Priority

LLDP-MED Extensions Extended Power via MDI TLV. Displayed only
when a port has PoE capabilities. Indicates the power priority configured
on the port. Value can be critical, high, or low.

show lldp port remote-info
Use this command to display the remote system information stored for a remote device connected
to a local port. You can use this information to detect misconfigurations or incompatibilities
between the local port and the attached endpoint device (remote port).

Syntax
show lldp port remote-info [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays remote system information for one or a range of
ports.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, remote system information will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the remote system information stored for port ge.3.1. The
remote system information was received from an IP phone, which is an LLDP‐MED‐enabled
device. Table 6‐5 describes the output fields that are unique to the remote system information
displayed for a MED‐enabled device.
C3(ro)->show lldp port remote-info ge.3.1
Local Port : ge.3.1
Remote Port Id : 00-09-6e-0e-14-3d
--------------------Mgmt Addr
: 0.0.0.0
Chassis ID : 0.0.0.0
Device Type : Communication Device Endpoint (class III)
Sys Name
: AVE0E143D
Sys Cap Supported/Enabled
: bridge,telephone/bridge
Auto-Neg Supported/Enabled
Auto-Neg Advertised

:
:
:
:

yes/yes
10BASE-T, 10BASE-TFD
100BASE-TX, 100BASE-TXFD
pause, Spause

Operational Speed/Duplex/Type : 100/full/TX
Network Policy
(app/tag/vlanId/cos/dscp)

: voice/untagged/0/6/46

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-21

show lldp port network-policy

Hardware Revision
Firmware Revision
Software Revision
Serial Number
Manufacturer
Model Number

:
:
:
:
:
:

4610D01A
b10d01b2_7.bin
a10d01b2_7.bin
05GM42004348
Avaya
4610

Note that the information fields displayed by the show lldp port remote‐info command will vary,
depending on the type of remote device that is connected to the port.
Table 6‐5 describes the output fields that are unique to the remote system information database.
Refer to Table 6‐4 on page 19 for descriptions of the information fields that are common to both the
local and the remote system information databases.
Table 6-5

show lldp port remote-info Output Display

Output Field

What it Displays...

Remote Port Id

Displays whatever port Id information received in the LLDPDU from the remote
device. In this case, the port Id is MAC address of remote device.

Device Type

Mandatory LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV. Displayed only when the port is
connected to an LLDP-MED-capable endpoint device.

Hardware Revision

LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component.

Firmware Revision

LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component.

Software Revision

LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component.

Serial Number

LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component.

Manufacturer

LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component.

Model Number

LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component.

Asset ID

LLDP-MED Extensions Inventory Management TLV component. In the above
example, no asset ID was received from the remote device so the field is not
displayed.

show lldp port network-policy
Use this command to display LLDP port network policy configuration information. Network
policy information is configured using the set lldp port network‐policy command.

Syntax
show lldp port network-policy {all | voice | voice-signaling | guest-voice | guestvoice-signaling | softphone-voice | video-conferencing | streaming-video | videosignaling} [port-string]

Parameters

6-22

all

Displays information about all network policy applications.

voice

Displays information about only the voice application type.

voice‐signaling

Displays information about only the voice signaling application
type.

guest‐voice

Displays information about only the guest voice application type.

guest‐voice‐signaling

Displays information about only the guest voice signaling
application type.

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set lldp tx-interval

softphone‐voice

Displays information about only the softphone voice application
type.

video‐conferencing

Displays information about only the video conferencing
application type.

streaming‐video

Displays information about only the streaming video application
type.

video‐signaling

Displays information about only the video signaling application
type.

port‐string

(Optional) Displays information about LLDP network policy for
one or a range of ports.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, only non‐default values will be displayed for all ports that have non‐
default values configured.
If a port‐string is specified, then all values, default and non‐default, are displayed for the specified
ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display all LLDP network policy information for ge.1.1.
C3(ro)->show lldp port network-policy all ge.1.1
Ports
------ge.1.1

Application
--------------------voice
voice signaling
guest voice
guest voice signaling
softphone voice
video conferencing
streaming video
video signaling

State
-------enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled

Tag
-------untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged
untagged

Vlan-Id
------1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Cos
--0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Dscp
--0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

set lldp tx-interval
Use this command to set the time, in seconds, between successive LLDP frame transmissions
initiated by changes in the LLDP local system information.

Syntax
set lldp tx-interval frequency

Parameters
frequency

Specifies the number of seconds between transmissions of LLDP
frames. Value can range from 5 to 32,768 seconds. The default is 30
seconds.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-23

set lldp hold-multiplier

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example sets the transmit interval to 20 seconds.
C3(rw)->set lldp tx-interval 20

set lldp hold-multiplier
Use this command to set the time‐to‐live value used in LLDP frames sent by this device. The time‐
to‐live for LLDPDU data is calculated by multiplying the transmit interval by the hold multiplier
value.

Syntax
set lldp hold-multiplier multiplier-val

Parameters
multiplier‐val

Specifies the multiplier to apply to the transmit interval to determine
the time‐to‐live value. Value can range from 2 to 10. Default value is 4.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example sets the transmit interval to 20 seconds and the hold multiplier to 5, which will
configure a time‐to‐live of 100 to be used in the TTL field in the LLDPDU header.
C3(rw)->set lldp tx-interval 20
C3(rw)->set lldp hold-multiplier 5

set lldp trap-interval
Use this command to set the minimum interval between LLDP notifications sent by this device.
LLDP notifications are sent when a remote system change has been detected.

Syntax
set lldp trap-interval frequency

6-24

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set lldp med-fast-repeat

Parameters
frequency

Specifies the minimum time between LLDP trap transmissions, in
seconds. The value can range from 5 to 3600 seconds. The default
value is 5 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example sets the minimum interval between LLDP traps to 10 seconds.
C3(rw)->set lldp trap-interval 10

set lldp med-fast-repeat
Network connectivity devices transmit only LLDP TLVs in LLDPDUs until they detect that an
LLDP‐MED endpoint device has connected to a port. At that point, the network connectivity
device starts sending LLDP‐MED TLVs at a fast start rate on that port. Use this command to set the
number of successive LLDPDUs (with LLDP‐MED TLVs) to be sent for one complete fast start
interval.

Syntax
set lldp med-fast-repeat count

Parameters
count

Specifies the number of fast start LLDPDUs to be sent when an
LLDP‐MED endpoint device is detected. Value can range from 1 to
10. Default is 3.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example sets the number of fast start LLDPDUs to be sent to 4.
C3(rw)->set lldp med-fast-repeat 4

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-25

set lldp port status

set lldp port status
Use this command to enable or disable transmitting and processing received LLDPDUs on a port
or range of ports.

Syntax
set lldp port status {tx-enable | rx-enable | both | disable} port-string

Parameters
tx‐enable

Enables transmitting LLDPDUs on the specified ports.

rx‐enable

Enables receiving and processing LLDPDUs from remote systems on
the specified ports.

both

Enables both transmitting and processing received LLDPDUs on the
specified ports.

disable

Disables both transmitting and processing received LLDPDUs on the
specified ports.

port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example enables both transmitting LLDPDUs and receiving and processing LLDPDUs from
remote systems on ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.6.
C3(rw)->set lldp port status both ge.1.1-6

set lldp port trap
Use this command to enable or disable sending LLDP notifications (traps) when a remote system
change is detected.

Syntax
set lldp port trap {enable | disable} port-string

Parameters
enable

Enable transmitting LLDP traps on the specified ports.

disable

Disable transmitting LLDP traps on the specified ports.

port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

Defaults
None.

6-26

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set lldp port med-trap

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example enables transmitting LLDP traps on ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.6.
C3(rw)->set lldp port trap enable ge.1.1-6

set lldp port med-trap
Use this command to enable or disable sending an LLDP‐MED notification when a change in the
topology has been sensed on the port (that is, a remote endpoint device has been attached or
removed from the port).

Syntax
set lldp port med-trap {enable | disable} port-string

Parameters
enable

Enables transmitting LLDP‐MED traps on the specified ports.

disable

Disables transmitting LLDP‐MED traps on the specified ports.

port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example enables transmitting LLDP‐MED traps on ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.6.
C3(rw)->set lldp port med-trap enable ge.1.1-6

set lldp port location-info
Use this command to configure LLDP‐MED location information on a port or range of ports.
Currently, only Emergency Call Services (ECS) Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
is supported.

Syntax
set lldp port location-info elin elin-string port-string

Parameters
elin

Specifies that the ECS ELIN data format is to be used.

elin‐string

Specifies the location identifier. Value can be from 10 to 25 numerical
characters.

port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-27

set lldp port tx-tlv

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
After you configure a location information value, you must also configure the port to send the
Location Information TLV with the set lldp port tx‐tlv command. This example configures the
ELIN identifier 5551234567 on ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.6 and then configures the ports to send
the Location Information TLV.
C3(rw)->set lldp port location-info 5551234567 ge.1.1-6
C3(rw)->set lldp port tx-tlv med-loc ge.1.1-6

set lldp port tx-tlv
Use this command to select the optional LLDP and LLDP‐MED TLVs to be transmitted in
LLDPDUs by the specified port or ports. Use the show lldp port local‐info command to display
the values of these TLVs for the port.

Syntax
set lldp port tx-tlv {[all] | [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap] [mgmtaddr] [vlan-id] [stp] [lacp] [gvrp] [mac-phy] [poe] [link-aggr] [max-frame] [medcap] [med-pol] [med-loc] [med-poe]} port-string

Parameters

6-28

all

Adds all optional TLVs to transmitted LLDPDUs.

port‐desc

Port Description optional basic LLDP TLV. Value sent is ifDescr object
defined in RFC 2863.

sys‐name

System Name optional basic LLDP TLV. Value sent is the
administratively assigned name for the system.

sys‐desc

System Description optional basic LLDP TLV. Value sent is sysDescr
object defined in RFC 3418.

sys‐cap

System Capabilities optional basic LLDP TLV. For a network
connectivity device, value sent can be bridge and/or router.

mgmt‐addr

Management Address optional basic LLDP TLV. Value sent is IPv4
address of host interface.

vlan‐id

Port VLAN ID IEEE 802.1 Extensions TLV. Value sent is port VLAN
ID (PVID).

stp

Spanning Tree information defined by Protocol Identity IEEE 802.1
Extensions TLV. If STP is enabled on the port, value sent includes
version of protocol being used.

lacp

LACP information defined by Protocol Identity IEEE 802.1
Extensions TLV. If LACP is enabled on the port, value sent includes
version of protocol being used.

Discovery Protocol Configuration

set lldp port tx-tlv

gvrp

GVRP information defined by Protocol Identity IEEE 802.1
Extensions TLV. If LACP is enabled on the port, value sent includes
version of protocol being used.

mac‐phy

MAC‐PHY Configuration/Status IEEE 802.3 Extensions TLV. Value
sent includes the operational MAU type, duplex, and speed of the
port.

poe

Power via MDI IEEE 802.3 Extensions TLV. Values sent include
whether pair selection can be controlled on port, and the power class
supplied by the port. Only valid for PoE‐enabled ports.

link‐aggr

Link Aggregation IEEE 802.3 Extensions TLV. Values sent indicate
whether the link associated with this port can be aggregated,
whether it is currently aggregated, and if aggregated, the aggregated
port identifier.

max‐frame

Maximum Frame Size IEEE 802.3 Extensions TLV. Value sent
indicates maximum frame size of the port’s MAC and PHY.

med‐cap

LLDP‐MED Capabilities TLV.Value sent indicates the capabilities
(whether the device supports location information, network policy,
extended power via MDI) and Device Type (network connectivity
device) of the sending device.

med‐pol

LLDP‐MED Network Policy TLV. Values sent include application
name, VLAN type (tagged or untagged), VLAN ID, and both Layer 2
and Layer 3 priorities associated with application, for all applications
enabled on the port. See the set lldp port network‐policy command
for more information.

med‐loc

LLDP‐MED Location Identification TLV. Value sent is the ECS ELIN
value configured on the port. See the set lldp port location‐info
command for more information.

med‐poe

LLDP‐MED Extended Power via MDI TLV. Values sent include the
Power Limit (total power the port is capable of sourcing over a
maximum length cable) and the power priority configured on the
port. Only valid for PoE‐enabled ports.

port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example configures the management address, MED capability, MED network policy, and
MED location identification TLVs to be sent in LLDPDUs by port ge.1.1.
C3(rw)->set lldp port tx-tlv mgmt-addr med-cap med-pol med-loc ge.1.1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-29

set lldp port network-policy

set lldp port network-policy
Use this command to configure LLDP network policies for a set of applications on a port or range
of ports. The policies configured with this command are sent in LLDPDUs as LLDP‐MED
Network Policy TLVs. Multiple Network Policy TLVs can be sent in a single LLDPDU.

Syntax
set lldp port network-policy {all | voice | voice-signaling | guest-voice |
guest-voice-signaling | softphone-voice | video-conferencing | streaming-video |
video-signaling} [state {enable | disable}] [tag {tagged | untagged}]
[vid {vlan-id | dot1p}] [cos cos-value] [dscp dscp-value] port-string

Parameters
all

Configures all applications.

voice

Configures the voice application.

voice‐signaling

Configures the voice signaling application.
This application will not be advertised if the voice application is
configured with the same parameters.

guest‐voice

Configures the guest voice application.

guest‐voice‐signaling

Configures the guest voice signaling application.
This application will not be advertised if the guest‐voice
application is configured with the same parameters.

softphone‐voice

Configures the softphone voice application.

video‐conferencing

Configures the video conferencing application.

streaming‐video

Configures the streaming video application.

video‐signaling

Configures the video signaling application.
This application will not be advertised if the video‐conferencing
application is configured with the same parameters.

state enable | disable

(Optional) Enables or disables advertising the application
information being configured.

tag tagged | untagged

(Optional) Indicates whether the application being configured is
using a tagged or untagged VLAN. If untagged, both the VLAN ID
and the CoS priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value
has relevance.

vid vlan‐id | dot1p

(Optional) VLAN identifier for the port. The value of vlan‐id can
range from 1 to 4093.
Use dot1p if the device is using priority tagged frames, meaning
that only the IEEE 802.1D priority level is significant and the
default PVID of the ingress port is used.

6-30

cos cos‐value

(Optional) Specifies the Layer 2 priority to be used for the
application being configured. The value can range from 0 to 7. A
value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE
802.1D.

dscp dscp‐value

(Optional) Specifies the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv
node behavior for the application being configured. The value can
range from 0 to 63. A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP
value as defined in RFC 2475.

Discovery Protocol Configuration

clear lldp

port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This feature allows administrators to quickly provision LLDP end‐points via the switch. LLDP
clients will use these LLDP network policy parameters for traffic originating from the end‐point.
As described in the ANSI/TIA Standards document 1057, the Network Policy TLV is “intended for
use with applications that have specific real‐time network policy requirements, such as interactive
voice and/or video services” and should be implemented only on direct links between network
connectivity devices and endpoint devices. Refer to the ANSI/TIA Standards document 1057 for
descriptions of the application types.
After you configure Network Policy TLVs, you must also configure the port to send the Network
Policy TLV with the set lldp port tx‐tlv command.

Example
This example configures the voice application TLV on port ge.2.1 and then configures the port to
send the Network Policy TLV.
C3(rw)->set lldp port network-policy voice state enable tag tagged vlan dot1p
ge.2.1
C3(rw)->set lldp port tx-tlv med-pol ge.2.1

clear lldp
Use this command to return LLDP parameters to their default values.

Syntax
clear lldp {all | tx-interval | hold-multiplier | trap-interval | med-fast-repeat}

Parameters
all

Returns all LLDP configuration parameters to their default values,
including port LLDP configuration parameters.

tx‐interval

Returns the number of seconds between transmissions of LLDP
frames.to the default of 30 seconds.

hold‐multiplier

Returns the multiplier to apply to the transmit interval to determine
the time‐to‐live value to the default value of 4.

trap‐interval

Returns the minimum time between LLSP trap transmissions to the
default value of 5 seconds.

med‐fast‐repeat

Returns the number of fast start LLDPDUs to be sent when an LLDP‐
MED endpoint device is detected to the default of 3.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-31

clear lldp port status

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example returns the transmit interval to the default value of 30 seconds.
C3(rw)->clear lldp tx-interval

clear lldp port status
Use this command to return the port status to the default value of both (both transmitting and
processing received LLDPDUs are enabled).

Syntax
clear lldp port status port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example returns port ge.1.1 to the default state of enabled for both transmitting and
processing received LLDPDUs.
C3(rw)->clear lldp port status ge.1.1

clear lldp port trap
Use this command to return the port LLDP trap setting to the default value of disabled.

Syntax
clear lldp port trap port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Defaults
None.

6-32

Discovery Protocol Configuration

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

clear lldp port med-trap

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example returns port ge.1.1 to the default LLDP trap state of disabled.
C3(rw)->clear lldp port trap ge.1.1

clear lldp port med-trap
Use this command to return the port LLDP‐MED trap setting to the default value of disabled.

Syntax
clear lldp port med-trap port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example returns port ge.1.1 to the default LLDP‐MED trap state of disabled.
C3(rw)->clear lldp port med-trap ge.1.1

clear lldp port location-info
Use this command to return the port ECS ELIN location setting to the default value of null.

Syntax
clear lldp port location-info elin port-string

Parameters
elin

Specifies that the ECS ELIN location information value should be
cleared.

port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-33

clear lldp port network-policy

Example
This example returns the location information ELIN value on port ge.1.1 to the default value of
null.
C3(rw)->clear lldp port location-info elin ge.1.1

clear lldp port network-policy
Use this command to return LLDP network policy for a set of applications on a port or range of
ports to default values.

Syntax
clear lldp port network-policy {all | voice | voice-signaling | guest-voice |
guest-voice-signaling | softphone-voice | video-conferencing | streaming-video |
video-signaling} {[state] [tag] [vid] [cos] [dscp]} port-string

Parameters
all

Applies command to all applications.

voice

Applies command to the voice application.

voice‐signaling

Applies command to the voice signaling application.

guest‐voice

Applies command to the guest voice application.

guest‐voice‐signaling

Applies command to the guest voice signaling application.

softphone‐voice

Applies command to the softphone voice application.

video‐conferencing

Applies command to the video conferencing application.

streaming‐video

Applies command to the streaming video application.

video‐signaling

Applies command to the video signaling application.

state

(Optional) Clears the state of advertising the application
information being configured to disabled.

tag

(Optional) Clears the tag value of the application being configured
to untagged.

vid

(Optional) Clears the VLAN identifier for the port to the default
value of 1.

cos

(Optional) Clears the Layer 2 priority to be used for the application
being configured to the default value of 0. (A value of 0 represents
use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802.1D.)

dscp

(Optional) Clears the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv
node behavior for the application being configured to the default
value of 0. (A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value
as defined in RFC 2475.)

port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

Defaults
At least one application (or all) and one policy parameter must be specified.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

6-34

Discovery Protocol Configuration

clear lldp port tx-tlv

Example
This example returns all network policy values for all applications on port ge.1.1 to their default
values.
C3(rw)->clear lldp port network-policy all state tag vid cos dscp ge.1.1

clear lldp port tx-tlv
Use this command to clear the optional LLDP and LLDP‐MED TLVs to be transmitted in
LLDPDUs by the specified port or ports to the default value of disabled.

Syntax
clear lldp port tx-tlv {[all] | [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap] [mgmtaddr] [vlan-id] [stp] [lacp] [gvrp] [mac-phy] [poe] [link-aggr] [max-frame] [medcap] [med-pol] [med-loc] [med-poe]} port-string

Parameters
all

Disables all optional TLVs from being transmitted in LLDPDUs.

port‐desc

Disables the Port Description optional basic LLDP TLV from being
transmitted in LLDPDUs.

sys‐name

Disables the System Name optional basic LLDP TLV from being
transmitted in LLDPDUs.

sys‐desc

Disables the System Description optional basic LLDP TLV from being
transmitted in LLDPDUs.

sys‐cap

Disables the System Capabilities optional basic LLDP TLV from
being transmitted in LLDPDUs.

mgmt‐addr

Disables the Management Address optional basic LLDP TLV from
being transmitted in LLDPDUs.

vlan‐id

Disables the Port VLAN ID IEEE 802.1 Extensions TLV from being
transmitted in LLDPDUs.

stp

Disables the Spanning Tree information defined by Protocol Identity
IEEE 802.1 Extensions TLV from being transmitted in LLDPDUs.

lacp

Disables the LACP information defined by Protocol Identity IEEE
802.1 Extensions TLV from being transmitted in LLDPDUs.

gvrp

Disables the GVRP information defined by Protocol Identity IEEE
802.1 Extensions TLV from being transmitted in LLDPDUs.

mac‐phy

Disables the MAC‐PHY Configuration/Status IEEE 802.3 Extensions
TLV from being transmitted in LLDPDUs.

poe

Disables the Power via MDI IEEE 802.3 Extensions TLV from being
transmitted in LLDPDUs. Only valid for PoE‐enabled ports.

link‐aggr

Disables the Link Aggregation IEEE 802.3 Extensions TLV from being
transmitted in LLDPDUs.

max‐frame

Disables the Maximum Frame Size IEEE 802.3 Extensions TLV from
being transmitted in LLDPDUs.

med‐cap

Disables the LLDP‐MED Capabilities TLV from being transmitted in
LLDPDUs.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

6-35

clear lldp port tx-tlv

med‐pol

Disables the LLDP‐MED Network Policy TLV from being transmitted
in LLDPDUs.

med‐loc

Disables the LLDP‐MED Location Identification TLV from being
transmitted in LLDPDUs.

med‐poe

Disables the LLDP‐MED Extended Power via MDI TLV from being
transmitted in LLDPDUs. Only valid for PoE‐enabled ports.

port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports to be affected.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example disables the management address, MED capability, MED network policy, and MED
location identification TLVs from being sent in LLDPDUs by port ge.1.1.
C3(rw)->clear lldp port tx-tlv mgmt-addr med-cap med-pol med-loc ge.1.1

6-36

Discovery Protocol Configuration

7
Port Configuration
This chapter describes the Port Configuration set of commands and how to use them.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Port Configuration Summary

7-1

Reviewing Port Status

7-2

Disabling / Enabling and Naming Ports

7-7

Setting Speed and Duplex Mode

7-11

Enabling / Disabling Jumbo Frame Support

7-14

Setting Auto-Negotiation and Advertised Ability

7-16

Setting Flow Control

7-22

Setting Port Link Traps and Link Flap Detection

7-24

Configuring Broadcast Suppression

7-33

Port Mirroring

7-36

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

7-42

Configuring Protected Ports

7-56

Port Configuration Summary
Port String Syntax Used in the CLI
Commands requiring a port‐string parameter use the following syntax to designate port type, slot
location, and port number:
port type.unit_or_slot number.port number
Where port type can be:
fe for 100‐Mbps Ethernet
ge for 1‐Gbps Ethernet
tg for 10‐Gbps Ethernet
host for the host port
vlan for vlan interfaces
lag for IEEE802.3 link aggregation ports
Where unit_or_slotnumber can be:
1 ‐ 8 for switch units in a stack

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-1

Reviewing Port Status

Where port number depends on the device. The highest valid port number is dependent on the
number of ports in the device and the port type.

Port Slot/Unit Parameters Used in the CLI
The “unit” parameter is often used interchangeably with “module” in the standalone switch CLI
to indicate a module slot location.

Examples
Note: You can use a wildcard (*) to indicate all of an item. For example, fe.3.* would represent all
100Mbps Ethernet (fe) ports in slot 3, and ge.3 * would represent all 1-Gigabit Ethernet (ge) ports
in slot 3.

This example shows the port‐string syntax for specifying the 1‐Gigabit Ethernet port 14 in slot unit
3.
ge.3.14

This example shows the port‐string syntax for specifying all 1‐Gigabit Ethernet ports in slot unit 3
in the system.
ge.3.*

This example shows the port‐string syntax for specifying all ports (of any interface type) in the
system.
*.*.*

Reviewing Port Status
Purpose
To display operating status, duplex mode, speed, port type, and statistical information about
traffic received and transmitted through one or all switch ports on the device.

Commands
For information about...

7-2

Refer to page...

show port

7-3

show port status

7-3

show port counters

7-4

clear port counters

7-6

show port cablestatus

7-6

Port Configuration

show port

show port
Use this command to display whether or not one or more ports are enabled for switching.

Syntax
show port [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays operational status for specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, operational status information for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display operational status information for ge.3.14:
C3(su)->show port ge.3.14
Port ge.3.14 enabled

show port status
Use this command to display operating and admin status, speed, duplex mode and port type for
one or more ports on the device.

Syntax
show port status [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays status for specific port(s). For a detailed description of
possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on
page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, status information for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display status information for ge.3.14:
C3(su)->show port status ge.3.14
Port

Alias

Oper

Admin

Speed

Duplex

Type

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-3

show port counters

-----------ge.3.14

(truncated)
--------------

Status
------up

Status
------up

-------- ------- ------------N/A
N/A
BaseT RJ45

Table 7‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 7-1

show port status Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Port

Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7-1.

Alias (truncated)

Alias configured for the port. For details on using the set port alias command, refer
to “set port alias” on page 7-9.

Oper Status

Operating status (up or down).

Admin Status

Whether the specified port is enabled (up) or disabled (down). For details on using
the set port disable command to change the default port status of enabled, refer to
“set port disable” on page 7-8. For details on using the set port enable command to
re-enable ports, refer to “set port enable” on page 7-8.

Speed

Operational speed in Mbps or Kbps of the specified port. For details on using the set
port speed command to change defaults, refer to “set port speed” on page 7-12.

Duplex

Duplex mode (half or full) of the specified port. For details on using the set port
duplex command to change defaults, refer to “Setting Auto-Negotiation and
Advertised Ability” on page 7-16.

Type

Physical port and interface type.

show port counters
Use this command to display port counter statistics detailing traffic through the device and
through all MIB2 network devices.

Syntax
show port counters [port-string] [switch | mib2]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays counter statistics for specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

switch | mib2

(Optional) Displays switch or MIB2 statistics. Switch statistics detail
performance of the SecureStack C3 device. MIB2 interface statistics detail
performance of all network devices.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, counter statistics will be displayed for all ports.
If mib2 or switch are not specified, all counter statistics will be displayed for the specified port(s).

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

7-4

Port Configuration

show port counters

Examples
This example shows how to display all counter statistics, including MIB2 network traffic and
traffic through the device for ge.3.1:
C3(su)->show port counters ge.3.1
MIB2 Interface: 1
Port: ge.3.1
No counter discontinuity time
----------------------------------------------------------------MIB2 Interface Counters
----------------------In Octets
In Unicast Pkts
In Multicast Pkts
In Broadcast Pkts
In Discards
In Errors
Out Octets
Out Unicasts Pkts
Out Multicast Pkts
Out Broadcast Pkts
Out Errors

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

802.1Q Switch Counters
---------------------Frames Received
Frames Transmitted

0
0

This example shows how to display all ge.3.1 port counter statistics related to traffic through the
device.
C3(su)->show port counters ge.3.1 switch
Port: ge.3.1

Bridge Port: 2

802.1Q Switch Counters
----------------------Frames Received

0

Frames Transmitted

0

Table 7‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 7-2

show port counters Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Port

Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7-1.

MIB2 Interface

MIB2 interface designation.

Bridge Port

IEEE 802.1D bridge port designation.

MIB2 Interface
Counters

MIB2 network traffic counts

802.1Q Switch
Counters

Counts of frames received, transmitted, and filtered.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-5

clear port counters

clear port counters
Use this command to clear port counter statistics for a port or range of ports.

Syntax
clear port counters [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port or range of ports to clear port counter
statistics.

Defaults
If no port‐string is specified, port counters are cleared for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write

Example
This example clears the port counters for ge.3.1.
C3(rw)->clear port counters ge3.1

show port cablestatus
Use this command to troubleshoot and locate faults in copper cable connections on a per port
basis. This command is only available on switch platforms that provide 1 Gigabit Ethernet RJ45
ports.

Syntax
show port cablestatus [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port or ports to show status for.

Defaults
If no port is specified, information about all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
For 1 Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 ports only, this command will display the status of the port’s cable
connection (described in Table 7‐3 below), and the approximate length of the cable attached to the
port. If your switch platform does not support 1 GE RJ45 ports, this command will not be
available.
If no cable is attached to the port, the status will be “Open” and no length will be shown. If the
port is not a 1GE RJ45 port, the command will return a status of “Not Supported.”

7-6

Port Configuration

Disabling / Enabling and Naming Ports

Since running the cable diagnostics may momentarily interrupt packet flow, a warning message is
displayed and you are prompted to continue.

Example
This example shows the cable status for 1 GE port ge.1.31.
C3(su)->show port cablestatus ge.1.31
Warning: port(s) will be offline momentarily.
Do you want to continue (y/n) [n]?y
Port
Status
--------- --------ge.1.31
Normal

Length
------3(m)-5(m)

Table 7‐3 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 7-3

show port cablestatus Output Details

Output Field

What it displays...

Port

Lists the port designation.

Status

Indicates the status of the port. The value is one of the following:
Normal = normal
Open = no cable attached to port
Short = detection of an inter-pair short
Fail = unknown error or crosstalk
Detach = indicates ports on stack units that are no longer present,
but were previously connected
Not Supported = ports other than 1GE RJ45 ports

Length

Indicates the approximate length of the cable attached to the port.

Disabling / Enabling and Naming Ports
Purpose
To disable and re‐enable one or more ports, and to assign an alias to a port. By default, all ports are
enabled at device startup. You may want to disable ports for security or to troubleshoot network
issues. Ports may also be assigned an alias for convenience.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

set port disable

7-8

set port enable

7-8

show port alias

7-9

set port alias

7-9

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-7

set port disable

set port disable
Use this command to administratively disable one or more ports. When this command is
executed, in addition to disabling the physical Ethernet link, the port will no longer learn entries
in the forwarding database.

Syntax
set port disable port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) to disable. For a detailed description of possible port‐
string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to disable ge.1.1:
C3(su)->set port disable ge.1.1

set port enable
Use this command to administratively enable one or more ports.

Syntax
set port enable port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) to enable. For a detailed description of possible port‐
string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable ge.1.3:
C3(su)->set port enable ge.1.3

7-8

Port Configuration

show port alias

show port alias
Use this command to display the alias name for one or more ports.

Syntax
show port alias [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays alias name(s) for specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax
Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, aliases for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display alias information for ports 1‐3 on slot 3:
C3(rw)->show
Port ge.3.1
Port ge.3.2
Port ge.3.3

port alias ge.3.1-3
user
user
Admin

set port alias
Use this command to assign an alias name to a port.

Syntax
set port alias port-string [name]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port to which an alias will be assigned. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax
Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

name

(Optional) Assigns an alias name to the port. If the alias name contains
spaces, the text string must be surrounded by double quotes. Maximum
length is 60 characters.

Defaults
If name is not specified, the alias assigned to the port will be cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-9

set port alias

Examples
This example shows how to assign the alias “Admin” to ge.3.3:
C3(rw)->set port alias ge.3.3 Admin

This example shows how to clear the alias for ge.3.3:
C3(rw)->set port alias ge.3.3

7-10

Port Configuration

Setting Speed and Duplex Mode

Setting Speed and Duplex Mode
Purpose
To review and set the operational speed in Mbps and the default duplex mode: Half, for half
duplex, or Full, for full duplex for one or more ports.

Note: These settings only take effect on ports that have auto-negotiation disabled.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port speed

7-11

set port speed

7-12

show port duplex

7-12

set port duplex

7-16

show port speed
Use this command to display the default speed setting on one or more ports.

Syntax
show port speed [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays default speed setting(s) for specific port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, default speed settings for all ports will display.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the default speed setting for 1‐Gigabit Ethernet port 14 in
slot 3:
C3(su)->show port speed ge.3.14
default speed is 10 on port ge.3.14.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-11

set port speed

set port speed
Use this command to set the default speed of one or more ports. This setting only takes effect on
ports that have auto‐negotiation disabled.

Syntax
set port speed port-string {10 | 100 | 1000}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which to a speed value will be set. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port
String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

10 | 100 | 1000

Specifies the port speed. Valid values are: 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or
1000 Mbps.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set ge.3.3 to a port speed of 10 Mbps:
C3(su)->set port speed ge.3.3 10

show port duplex
Use this command to display the default duplex setting (half or full) for one or more ports.

Syntax
show port duplex [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays default duplex setting(s) for specific port(s).
For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, default duplex settings for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

7-12

Port Configuration

set port duplex

Example
This example shows how to display the default duplex setting for Ethernet port 14 in slot 3:
C3(su)->show port duplex ge.3.14
default duplex mode is full on port ge.3.14.

set port duplex
Use this command to set the default duplex type for one or more ports. This command will only
take effect on ports that have auto‐negotiation disabled.

Syntax
set port duplex port-string {full | half}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which duplex type will be set. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax
Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

full | half

Sets the port(s) to full‐duplex or half‐duplex operation.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set ge.1.17 to full duplex:
C3(su)->set port duplex ge.1.17 full

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-13

Enabling / Disabling Jumbo Frame Support

Enabling / Disabling Jumbo Frame Support
Purpose
To review, enable, and disable jumbo frame support on one or more ports. This allows Gigabit
Ethernet ports to transmit frames up to 10 KB in size.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port jumbo

7-14

set port jumbo

7-15

clear port jumbo

7-15

show port jumbo
Use this command to display the status of jumbo frame support and maximum transmission units
(MTU) on one or more ports.

Syntax
show port jumbo [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays the status of jumbo frame support for specific
port(s). For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, jumbo frame support status for all ports will display.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the status of jumbo frame support for ge.1.1:
C3(su)->show port jumbo ge.1.1
Port Number
Jumbo Status
Max Frame Size
------------- --------------- -----------------ge.1.1
Enable
9216

7-14

Port Configuration

set port jumbo

set port jumbo
Use this command to enable or disable jumbo frame support on one or more ports.

Syntax
set port jumbo {enable | disable}[port-string]

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables jumbo frame support.

port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port(s) on which to disable or enable jumbo
frame support. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values,
refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, jumbo frame support will be enabled or disabled on all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable jumbo frame support for Gigabit Ethernet port 14 in unit/slot
3:
C3(su)->set port jumbo enable ge.3.14

clear port jumbo
Use this command to reset jumbo frame support status to enabled on one or more ports.

Syntax
clear port jumbo [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port(s) on which to reset jumbo frame
support status to enabled. For a detailed description of possible
port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on
page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, jumbo frame support status will be reset on all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset jumbo frame support status for Gigabit Ethernet port 14 in slot 3:
C3(su)->clear port jumbo ge.3.14

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-15

Setting Auto-Negotiation and Advertised Ability

Setting Auto-Negotiation and Advertised Ability
Purpose
To review, disable or enable auto‐negotiation, and to configure port advertisement for speed and
duplex.
During auto‐negotiation, the port “tells” the device at the other end of the segment what its
capabilities and mode of operation are. If auto‐negotiation is disabled, the port reverts to the
values specified by default speed, default duplex, and the port flow control commands.
In normal operation, with all capabilities enabled, advertised ability enables a port to “advertise”
that it has the ability to operate in any mode. The user may choose to configure a port so that only
a portion of its capabilities are advertised and the others are disabled.

Note: Advertised ability can be activated only on ports that have auto-negotiation enabled.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port negotiation

7-16

set port negotiation

7-17

show port advertise

7-17

set port advertise

7-18

clear port advertise

7-19

show port mdix

7-20

set port mdix

7-20

show port negotiation
Use this command to display the status of auto‐negotiation for one or more ports.

Syntax
show port negotiation [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays auto‐negotiation status for specific port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, auto‐negotiation status for all ports will be displayed.

7-16

Port Configuration

set port negotiation

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display auto‐negotiation status for 1‐Gigabit Ethernet port 14 in slot 3:
C3(su)->show port negotiation ge.3.14
auto-negotiation is enabled on port ge.3.14.

set port negotiation
Use this command to enable or disable auto‐negotiation on one or more ports.

Syntax
set port negotiation port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which to enable or disable auto‐negotiation. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

enable | disable

Enables or disables auto‐negotiation.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to disable auto‐negotiation on 1‐Gigabit Ethernet port 3 in slot 14:
C3(su)->set port negotiation ge.3.14 disable

show port advertise
Use this command to display port capability and advertisement as far as speed and duplex for
auto‐negotiation.

Syntax
show port advertise [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays advertised ability for specific port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, advertisement for all ports will be displayed.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-17

set port advertise

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display advertisement status for Gigabit ports 13 and 14:
C3(su)->show port advertise ge.1.13-14
ge.1.13
capability
advertised
remote
------------------------------------------------10BASE-T
yes
yes
yes
10BASE-TFD
yes
yes
yes
100BASE-TX
yes
yes
yes
100BASE-TXFD
yes
yes
yes
1000BASE-T
no
no
no
1000BASE-TFD
yes
yes
yes
pause
yes
yes
no
ge.1.14
capability
advertised
remote
------------------------------------------------10BASE-T
yes
yes
yes
10BASE-TFD
yes
yes
yes
100BASE-TX
yes
yes
yes
100BASE-TXFD
yes
yes
yes
1000BASE-T
no
no
no
1000BASE-TFD
yes
yes
yes
pause
yes
yes
no

set port advertise
Use this command to configure what a port will advertise for speed/duplex capabilities in auto‐
negotiation.

Syntax
set port advertise {port-string}{10t | 10tfd | 100tx | 100txfd | 1000t | 1000tfd
| pause}

Parameters
port‐string

Select the ports for which to configure advertisements. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

10t

Advertise 10BASE‐T half duplex mode.

10tfd

Advertise 10BASE‐T full duplex mode.

100tx

Advertise 100BASE‐TX half duplex mode.

100txfd

Advertise 100BASE‐TX full duplex mode.

1000t

Advertise 1000BASE‐T half duplex mode.

1000tfd

Advertise 1000BASE‐T full duplex mode.

pause

Advertise PAUSE for full‐duplex links.

Defaults
None.

7-18

Port Configuration

clear port advertise

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to configure port 1 to advertise 1000BASE‐T full duplex:
C3(su)->set port advertise ge.1.1 1000tfd

clear port advertise
Use this command to configure a port to not advertise a specific speed/duplex capability when
auto‐negotiating with another port.

Syntax
clear port advertise {port-string}{10t | 10tfd | 100tx | 100txfd | 1000t | 1000tfd
| pause}

Parameters
port‐string

Clear advertisements for specific port(s). For a detailed description of
possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the
CLI” on page 7‐1.

10t

Do not advertise 10BASE‐T half duplex mode.

10tfd

Do not advertise 10BASE‐T full duplex mode.

100tx

Do not advertise 100BASE‐TX half duplex mode.

100txfd

Do not advertise 100BASE‐TX full duplex mode.

1000t

Do not advertise 1000BASE‐T half duplex mode.

1000tfd

Do not advertise 1000BASE‐T full duplex mode.

pause

Do not advertise PAUSE for full‐duplex links.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to configure port 1 to not advertise 10 MB capability for auto‐
negotiation:
C3(su)->clear port advertise ge.1.1 10t 10tfd

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-19

show port mdix

show port mdix
Use this command to display the status of cable connection type configuration mode for one or
more ports. Switch ports can automatically detect and configure the required cable type, either
straight through (MDI) or cross‐over (MDIX), or the ports can be configured to only allow one
type of cable type, either MDI or MDIX.

Syntax
show port mdix {all|auto|forced-auto|mdi|mdix} [port-string]

Parameters
all

Display information about all ports.

auto

Display information about the ports configured to automatically
determine the required MDI/MDIX mode.

forced‐auto

Display information about the ports forced automatically to determine
the required MDI/MDIX mode.

mdi

Display information about the ports configured with MDI only mode.

mdix

Display information about the ports configured with MDIX only mode.

port‐string

(Optional) Display the selected MDI/MDIX mode only for the port or
ports specified.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, information is displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example displays information about ports configured for MDIX only mode.
C3(su)->show port mdix mdix
Port Number
MDIX Mode
------------- -----------------ge.1.27
MDIX
ge.1.28
MDIX

set port mdix
Use this command to configure cable connection type configuration mode for one or more ports.

Syntax
set port mdix {auto|forced-auto|mdi|mdix} [port-string]

Parameters

7-20

auto

Configure ports to automatically determine the required MDI/MDIX
mode. This is the default condition.

forced‐auto

Force ports to automatically determine the required MDI/MDIX mode.

Port Configuration

set port mdix

mdi

Configure ports to use MDI mode only.

mdix

Configure ports to use MDIX mode only.

port‐string

(Optional) Specify the port or ports to configure.

Defaults
If port‐string is not entered, all ports on the switch are configured.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
By default, Enterasys Networks switch devices are configured to automatically detect the cable
type connection, straight through (MDI) or cross‐over (MDIX), required by the cable connected to
the port. You can configure ports to only use MDI or MDIX connections with this command.
This command only configures Ethernet ports, and cannot be used to configure combo ports on
the switch.

Example
This example configures ports ge.1.1 and ge.1.2 to use MDIX mode.
C3(su)->set port mdix mdix ge.1.1-2

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-21

Setting Flow Control

Setting Flow Control
Purpose
To review, enable or disable port flow control. Flow control is used to manage the transmission
between two devices as specified by IEEE 802.3x to prevent receiving ports from being
overwhelmed by frames from transmitting devices.

Commands
For information about...
show flowcontrol

7-22

set flowcontrol

7-22

show flowcontrol
Use this command to display the flow control state.

Syntax
show flowcontrol

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the port flow control state:
C3(su)->show flowcontrol
Flow control status: enabled

set flowcontrol
Use this command to enable or disable flow control.

Syntax
set flowcontrol {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

7-22

Refer to page...

Port Configuration

Enables or disables flow control settings.

set flowcontrol

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable flow control:
C3(su)->set flowcontrol enable

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-23

Setting Port Link Traps and Link Flap Detection

Setting Port Link Traps and Link Flap Detection
Purpose
To disable or re‐enable link traps, display link trap status, and to configure the link flapping
detection function. By default, all ports are enabled to send SNMP trap messages indicating
changes to their link status (up or down).
The link flap function detects when a link is going up and down rapidly (also called “link
flapping”) on a physical port, and takes the required actions (disable port, and eventually send
notification trap) to stop such a condition. If left unresolved, the “link flapping” condition can be
detrimental to network stability because it can trigger Spanning Tree and routing table
recalculation.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port trap

7-24

set port trap

7-25

show linkflap

7-25

set linkflap globalstate

7-28

set linkflap portstate

7-28

set linkflap interval

7-29

set linkflap action

7-29

clear linkflap action

7-30

set linkflap threshold

7-30

set linkflap downtime

7-31

clear linkflap down

7-31

clear linkflap

7-32

show port trap
Use this command to display whether the port is enabled for generating an SNMP trap message if
its link state changes.

Syntax
show port trap [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

7-24

Port Configuration

(Optional) Displays link trap status for specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

set port trap

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, the trap status for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to display link trap status for ge.3.1 through 4:
C3(su)->show port trap ge.3.1-4
Link traps enabled on port ge.3.1.
Link traps enabled on port ge.3.2.
Link traps enabled on port ge.3.3.
Link traps enabled on port ge.3.4.

set port trap
Use this command to enable of disable ports for sending SNMP trap messages when their link
status changes.

Syntax
set port trap port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which to enable or disable port traps. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

enable | disable

Enables or disables sending trap messages when link status changes.

Defaults
Sending traps when link status changes is enabled by default.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
The following example disables sending trap on ge.3.1.
C3(su)->set port trap ge.3.1 disable

show linkflap
Use this command to display link flap detection state and configuration information.

Syntax
show linkflap {globalstate | portstate | parameters | metrics | portsupported |
actsupported | maximum | downports | action | operstatus | threshold | interval]
| downtime | currentcount | totalcount | timelapsed | violations [port-string]}

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-25

show linkflap

Parameters
globalstate

Displays the global enable state of link flap detection.

portstate

Displays the port enable state of link flap detection.

parameters

Displays the current value of settable link flap detection parameters.

metrics

Displays linkflap detection metrics.

portsupported

Displays ports which can support the link flap detection function.

actsupported

Displays link flap detection actions supported by system hardware.

maximum

Displays the maximum allowed linkdowns per 10 seconds supported
by system hardware.

downports

Displays ports disabled by link flap detection due to a violation.

action

Displays linkflap actions taken on violating port(s).

operstatus

Displays whether linkflap has deactivated port(s).

threshold

Displays the number of allowed link down transitions before action is
taken.

interval

Displays the time period for counting link down transitions.

downtime

Displays how long violating port(s) are deactivated.

currentcount

Displays how many linkdown transitions are in the current interval.

totalcount

Displays how many linkdown transitions have occurred since the last
reset.

timelapsed

Displays the time period since the last link down event or reset.

violations

Displays the number of link flap violations since the last reset.

port‐string

(Optional) Displays information for specific port(s).

Defaults
•

If not specified, information about all link flap detection settings will be displayed.

•

If port‐string is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐only.

Usage
The linkflap default conditions are shown in the following table.

7-26

Linkflap Parameter

Default Condition

Linkflap global state

Disabled

Linkflap port state

Disabled

Linkflap action

None

Linkflap interval

5

Linkflap maximum allowed link downs per 10 seconds

20

Linkflap threshold
(number of allowed link down transitions before action is taken)

10

Port Configuration

show linkflap

Examples
This example shows how to display the global status of the link trap detection function:
C3(rw)->show linkflap globalstate
Linkflap feature globally disabled

This example shows how to display ports disabled by link flap detection due to a violation:
C3(rw)->show linkflap downports
Ports currently held DOWN for Linkflap violations:
None.

This example shows how to display the link flap parameters table:
C3(rw)->show linkflap parameters
Linkflap Port Settable Parameter Table (X
Port
LF Status Actions Threshold
-------- --------- ------- ---------ge.1.1
disabled
....... 10
ge.1.2
enabled
D..S..T 3
ge.1.3
disabled
...S..T 10

means error
Interval
---------5
5
5

occurred)
Downtime
---------300
300
300

Table 7‐4 provides an explanation of the show linkflap parameters command output.
Table 7-4

show linkflap parameters Output Details

Output Field

What it displays...

Port

Port designation.

LF Status

Link flap enabled state.

Actions

Actions to be taken if the port violates allowed link flap behavior.
D = disabled, S = Syslog entry will be generated, T= SNMP trap
will be generated.

Threshold

Number of link down transitions necessary to trigger the link flap
action.

Interval

Time interval (in seconds) for accumulating link down transitions.

Downtime

Interval (in seconds) port(s) will be held down after a link flap
violation.

This example shows how to display the link flap metrics table:
C3(rw)->show linkflap metrics
Port
LinkStatus
CurrentCount
-------- ----------- -----------ge.1.1
operational 0
ge.1.2
disabled
4
ge.1.3
operational 3

TotalCount
---------0
15
3

TimeElapsed Violations
----------- ------------241437
0
147
5
241402
0

Table 7‐5 provides an explanation of the show linkflap metrics command output.
Table 7-5

show linkflap metrics Output Details

Output Field

What it displays...

Port

Port designation.

LinkStatus

Link status according to the link flap function.

CurrentCount

Link down count accruing toward the link flap threshold.

TotalCount

Number of link downs since system start,

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-27

set linkflap globalstate

Table 7-5

show linkflap metrics Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What it displays...

TimeElapsed

Time (in seconds) since the last link down event.

Violations

Number of link flap violations on listed ports since system start.

set linkflap globalstate
Use this command to globally enable or disable the link flap detection function.

Syntax
set linkflap globalstate {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable | enable

Globally disables or enables the link flap detection function.

Defaults
By default, the function is disabled globally and on all ports.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
By default, the function is disabled globally and on all ports. If disabled globally after per‐port
settings have been configured using the linkflap commands, per‐port settings will be retained.

Example
This example shows how to globally enable the link trap detection function.
C3(rw)->set linkflap globalstate enable

set linkflap portstate
Use this command to enable or disable link flap monitoring on one or more ports.

Syntax
set linkflap portstate {disable | enable} [port-string]

Parameters
disable | enable

Disables or enables the link flap detection function.

port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port or ports on which to disable or enable
monitoring.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, all ports are enabled or disabled.

7-28

Port Configuration

set linkflap interval

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable the link trap monitoring on all ports.
C3(rw)->set linkflap portstate enable

set linkflap interval
Use this command to set the time interval (in seconds) for accumulating link down transitions.

Syntax
set linkflap interval port-string interval-value

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to set the link flap interval.

interval‐value

Specifies an interval in seconds. A value of 0 will set the interval to
forever.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the link flap interval on port ge.1.4 to 1000 seconds.
C3(rw)->set linkflap interval ge.1.4 1000

set linkflap action
Use this command to set reactions to a link flap violation.

Syntax
set linkflap action port-string {disableInterface | gensyslogentry | gentrap |
all}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to set the link flap action.

disableInterface

Sets the reaction as disabling the interface.

gensyslogentry

Sets the reaction as generating a syslog entry.

gentrap

Sets the reaction as generating an SNMP trap.

all

Sets the reaction as all of the above.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-29

clear linkflap action

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the link flap violation action on port ge.1.4 to generating a Syslog
entry.
C3(rw)->set linkflap action ge.1.4 gensyslogentry

clear linkflap action
Use this command to clear reactions to a link flap violation.

Syntax
clear linkflap action [port-string] {disableInterface | gensyslogentry | gentrap
| all}

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port(s) on which to clear the link flap action.

disableInterface

Clears the reaction as disabling the interface.

gensyslogentry

Clears the reaction as generating a syslog entry.

gentrap

Clears the reaction as generating an SNMP trap.

all

Clears the reaction as all of the above.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, actions will be cleared on all ports.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the link flap violation action on port ge.1.4 to generating a
Syslog entry.
C3(rw)->clear linkflap action ge.1.4 gensyslogentry

set linkflap threshold
Use this command to set the link flap action trigger count.

Syntax
set linkflap threshold port-string threshold-value

7-30

Port Configuration

set linkflap downtime

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to set the link flap action trigger count.

threshold‐value

Specifies the number of link down transitions necessary to trigger the
link flap action. A minimum of 1 must be configured.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the link flap threshold on port ge.1.4 to 5.
C3(rw)->set linkflap threshold ge.1.4 5

set linkflap downtime
Use this command to set the time interval (in seconds) one or more ports will be held down after a
link flap violation.

Syntax
set linkflap downtime port-string downtime-value

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to set the link flap downtime.

downtime‐value

Specifies a downtime in seconds. A value of 0 will set the downtime to
forever.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the link flap downtime on port ge.1.4 to 5000 seconds.
C3(rw)->set linkflap downtime ge.1.4 5000

clear linkflap down
Use this command to toggle link flap disabled ports to operational.

Syntax
clear linkflap down [port-string]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-31

clear linkflap

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the ports to make operational.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, all ports disabled by a link flap violation will be made operational.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to make disabled port ge.1.4 operational.
C3(rw)->clear linkflap down ge.1.4

clear linkflap
Use this command to clear all link flap options and / or statistics on one or more ports.

Syntax
clear linkflap {all | stats [port-string] | parameter port-string {threshold |
interval | downtime | all}

Parameters
all | stats

Clears all options and statistics, or clears only statistics.

parameter

Clears link flap parameters.

threshold | interval |
downtime | all

Clears link flap threshold, interval, downtime or all parameters.

port‐string

(Optional unless parameter is specified) Specifies the port(s) on which
to clear settings.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, settings and/or statistics will be cleared on all ports.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear all link flap options on port ge.1.4.
C3(rw)->clear linkflap all ge.1.4

7-32

Port Configuration

Configuring Broadcast Suppression

Configuring Broadcast Suppression
Purpose
To review and set the broadcast suppression threshold for one or more ports. This feature limits
the number of received broadcast frames the switch will accept per port. Broadcast suppression
thresholds apply only to broadcast traffic—multicast traffic is not affected. By default, a broadcast
suppression threshold of 14881 packets per second (pps) will be used, regardless of actual port
speed. Broadcast suppression protects against broadcast storms and ARP sweeps.
Note: Class of Service functionality can also be used to control broadcast, unknown unicast, and/or
multicast flooding. This feature prevents configured ports from being disrupted by a traffic storm by
rate-limiting specific types of packets through those ports. Refer to “About CoS-Based Flood
Control” on page 10-20 for more information.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port broadcast

7-33

set port broadcast

7-34

clear port broadcast

7-34

show port broadcast
Use this command to display port broadcast suppression thresholds.

Syntax
show port broadcast [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Select the ports for which to show broadcast suppression
thresholds. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer
to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, broadcast status of all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the broadcast suppression thresholds for ports 1 through 4:
C3(su)->show port broadcast ge.1.1-4
Port
Total BC
Threshold
Packets
(pkts/s)
---------------------------------------ge.1.1
0
50

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-33

set port broadcast

ge.1.2
ge.1.3
ge.1.4

0
0
0

50
40
14881

set port broadcast
Use this command to set the broadcast suppression threshold, in packets per second, on one or
more ports. This sets a threshold on the broadcast traffic that is received and switched out to other
ports.

Syntax
set port broadcast port-string threshold-val

Parameters
port‐string

Select the ports for which to configure broadcast suppression thresholds.
For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port
String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

threshold‐val

Sets the packets per second threshold on broadcast traffic. Maximum
value is
• 148810 for Fast Ethernet ports
• 1488100 for 1‐Gigabit ports.
• 14881000 for 10‐ Gigabit ports

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Per port broadcast suppression is hardset to be globally enabled on the C3. If you would like to
disable broadcast suppression, you can get the same result by setting the threshold limit for each
port to the maximum number of packets which can be received per second as listed in the
parameters section, above. The default broadcast suppression threshold for all ports is set to
14881.

Example
This example configures ports 1 through 5 with a broadcast limit of 50 pps:
C3(su)->set port broadcast ge.1.1-5 50

clear port broadcast
Use this command to clear the broadcast threshold limit to the default value of 14881 for the
selected port.

Syntax
clear port broadcast port-string threshold

7-34

Port Configuration

clear port broadcast

Parameters
port‐string

Select the ports for which to clear broadcast suppression thresholds. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example clears the broadcast threshold limit to 14881 pps for ports 1 through 5:
C3(su)->clear port broadcast ge.1.1-5 threshold

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-35

Port Mirroring

Port Mirroring
Caution: Port mirroring configuration should be performed only by personnel who are
knowledgeable about the effects of port mirroring and its impact on network operation.

The SecureStack C3 device allows you to mirror (or redirect) the traffic being switched on a port
for the purposes of network traffic analysis and connection assurance. When port mirroring is
enabled, one port becomes a monitor port for another port within the device.
Note: An Enterasys Networks Feature Guide document containing an in-depth discussion of port
mirroring configuration is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

Mirroring Features
The SecureStack C3 device supports the following mirroring features:
•

Mirroring can be configured in a many‐to‐one configuration so that one target (destination)
port can monitor traffic on up to 8 source ports. Only one mirror destination port can be
configured per stack, if applicable.

•

Both transmit and receive traffic will be mirrored.

•

A destination port will only act as a mirroring port when the session is operationally active.

•

When a port mirror is created, the mirror destination port is removed from the egress list of
VLAN 1 after a reboot.

•

MAC addresses will be learned for packets tagged with the mirror VLAN ID. This will
prevent the ability to snoop traffic across multiple hops.
Caution: Traffic mirrored to a VLAN may contain control traffic. This may be interpreted by the
downstream neighbor as legal control frames. It is recommended that you disable any protocols
(such as Spanning Tree) on inter-switch connections that might be affected .

Remote Port Mirroring
Remote port mirroring is an extension to port mirroring which facilitates simultaneous mirroring
of multiple source ports on multiple switches across a network to one or more remote destination
ports.
Remote port mirroring involves configuration of the following port mirroring related parameters:
1.

Configuration of normal port mirroring source ports and one destination port on all switches,
as described above.

2.

Configuration of a mirror VLAN, which is a unique VLAN on which mirrored packets
traverse across the network. The mirror VLAN has to be configured on ALL switches across
the network along which mirrored traffic traverses, from the switch where the source ports
reside to the switch where the mirrored packets are sniffed and/or captured.

You must ensure that switches involved are properly configured to facilitate correct remote port
mirroring operation. The following points in particular need to be observed:

7-36

•

On the source switch, the correct destination port must be chosen to ensure that there is an
egress path from that port to the desired remote destination(s).

•

All ports on the path from the source port to the remote destination must be members of the
mirror VLAN.

Port Configuration

Port Mirroring

•

On switches on the path from the source port to the remote destination, egress tagging has to
be enabled on potential egress ports for the mirror VLAN.

With the introduction of remote port mirroring:
•

Configured mirror destination ports will NOT lose their switching or routing properties as
they do on SecureStack A2, B2, or C2 products.

•

On switches where the mirror VLAN has been configured, any traffic on that VLAN will be
flooded on the VLAN. It will never be unicast, even if the source address of the traffic as been
learned on the switch.

Configuring SMON MIB Port Mirroring
Overview
SMON port mirroring support allows you to redirect traffic on ports remotely using SMON MIBs.
This is useful for troubleshooting or problem solving when network management through the
console port, telnet, or SSH is not feasible.

Procedures
Perform the following steps to configure and monitor port mirroring using SMON MIB objects.
To c reate and enable a port mirroring instance:
1.

Open a MIB browser, such as Netsight MIB Tools

2.

In the MIB directory tree, navigate to the portCopyEntry folder and expand it.

3.

Select the portCopyStatus MIB.

4.

Enter a desired source and target port in the Instance field using the format source.target.
For example, 3.2 would create a relationship where source port ge.1.3 would be mirrored to
target port ge.1.2.
Note: In order to configure a port mirroring relationship, both source and destination interfaces must
be enabled and operational (up).

5.

Enter MIB option 4 (createAndGo) and perform an SNMP Set operation.

6.

(Optional) Use the CLI to verify the port mirroring instance has been created and enabled as
shown in the following example:
C3(su)->show port mirroring
Port Mirroring
==============
Source Port
= ge.1.3
Target Port
= ge.1.2
Frames Mirrored = Rx and Tx
Port Mirroring status enabled

To create a port mirroring instance without automatically enabling it:
1.

Complete steps 1‐4 above.

2.

Enter MIB option 5 (createAndWait) and perform an SNMP Set operation.

3.

(Optional) Use the CLI to verify the port mirroring instance has been created set to disabled
mode as shown in the following example:
C3(su)->show port mirroring

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-37

show port mirroring

Port Mirroring
==============
Source Port
= ge.1.3
Target Port
= ge.1.2
Frames Mirrored = Rx and Tx
Port Mirroring status disabled

4.

When you are ready to enable this instance, enter MIB option 1 (active) and perform an SNMP
Set operation.

5.

(Optional) Use the CLI to verify the port mirroring instance has been enabled.

To delete a port mirroring instance:
1.

Select a previously created port mirroring instance in your MIB browser.

2.

Enter MIB option 6 (destroy) and perform an SNMP Set operation.

3.

(Optional) Use the CLI to verify the port mirroring instance has been deleted as shown in the
following example:
C3(su)->show port mirroring
No Port Mirrors configured.

Purpose
To review and configure port mirroring on the device.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port mirroring

7-38

set port mirroring

7-39

clear port mirroring

7-40

set mirror vlan

7-40

clear mirror vlan

7-41

show port mirroring
Use this command to display the source and target ports for mirroring, and whether mirroring is
currently enabled or disabled for those ports.

Syntax
show port mirroring

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

7-38

Port Configuration

set port mirroring

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display port mirroring information. In this case, ge.1.4 is configured
as a source port and ge.1.11 is a target and mirroring has been enabled between these ports:
C3(su)->show port mirroring
Port Mirroring
==============
Source Port = ge.1.4
Target Port = ge.1.11
Frames Mirrored = Rx and Tx
Port Mirroring status enabled.

set port mirroring
Use this command to create a new mirroring relationship or to enable or disable an existing
mirroring relationship between two ports.
Notes: When a port mirror is created, the mirror destination port is removed from VLAN 1’s egress
list after a reboot.
"MAC addresses will be learned for packets tagged with the mirror VLAN ID. This will prevent the
ability to snoop traffic across multiple hops.

Syntax
set port mirroring {create | disable | enable} source destination}

Parameters
create | disable |
enable

Creates, disables or enables mirroring settings on the specified ports. By
default, port mirrors are enabled automatically when created.

source

Specifies the source port designation. This is the port on which the traffic
will be monitored. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values,
refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

destination

Specifies the target port designation. This is the port that will duplicate or
“mirror” all the traffic on the monitored port. Only one destination port
can be configured per stack, if applicable.
For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port
String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
Port mirrors are automatically enabled when created on this platform.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Note that LAG ports and their underlying physical ports, as described in “Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP)” on page 7‐42, cannot be mirrored.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-39

clear port mirroring

Example
This example shows how to create and enable port mirroring with ge.1.4 as the source port, and
ge.1.11 as the target port:
C3(su)->set port mirroring create ge.1.4 ge.1.11

clear port mirroring
Use this command to clear a port mirroring relationship.

Syntax
clear port mirroring source destination

Parameters
source

Specifies the source port of the mirroring configuration to be cleared. For
a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

destination

Specifies the target port of the mirroring configuration to be cleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear a port mirroring relationship between source port ge.1.4 and
target port ge.1.11:
C3(su)->clear port mirroring ge.1.4 ge.1.11

set mirror vlan
Assigns a VLAN to be reserved for mirroring traffic. If a mirrored VLAN is created, all mirrored
traffic will egress VLAN tagged. All traffic on the mirror VLAN will be flooded.

Syntax
set mirror vlan vlan-id

Parameters
vlan‐id

Defaults
None.

7-40

Port Configuration

Specifies the VLAN to be used for remote port mirroring. The ID can
range from 2 to 4093.

clear mirror vlan

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Refer to “Remote Port Mirroring” on page 7‐36 for information about configuring mirror VLANs.
Use the show port mirroring command to display the VLANs configured for remote port
mirroring.

Example
The following example assigns a VLAN for mirroring traffic and then shows the configured port
mirroring with the show port mirror command.
C3(su)->set mirror vlan 2
C3(su)->show port mirroring
Port Mirroring
==============
Source Port
= ge.1.1
Target Port
= ge.1.10
Frames Mirrored = Rx and Tx
Port Mirroring status enabled
Mirror Vlan

= 2

clear mirror vlan
Use this command to clear the VLAN to be reserved for mirroring traffic.

Syntax
clear mirror vlan vlan-id

Parameters
vlan‐id

Specifies the VLAN to be cleared. The ID can range from 2 to 4093.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
The following example clears VLAN 2 from being used for remote port mirroring.
C3(su)->clear mirror vlan 2

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-41

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
Caution: Link aggregation configuration should only be performed by personnel who are
knowledgeable about Spanning Tree and Link Aggregation, and fully understand the ramifications
of modifications beyond device defaults. Otherwise, the proper operation of the network could be
at risk.

Using multiple links simultaneously to increase bandwidth is a desirable switch feature, which
can be accomplished if both sides agree on a set of ports that are being used as a Link Aggregation
Group (LAG). Once a LAG is formed from selected ports, problems with looping can be avoided
since the Spanning Tree can treat this LAG as a single port.
Enabled by default, the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) logically groups interfaces
together to create a greater bandwidth uplink, or link aggregation, according to the IEEE 802.3ad
standard. This standard allows the switch to determine which ports are in LAGs and configure
them dynamically. Since the protocol is based on the IEEE 802.3ad specification, any switch from
any vendor that supports this standard can aggregate links automatically.
802.3ad LACP aggregations can also be run to end‐users (that is, a server) or to a router.
Note: Earlier (proprietary) implementations of port aggregation referred to groups of aggregated
ports as “trunks”.

LACP Operation
For each aggregatable port in the device, LACP:
•

Maintains configuration information (reflecting the inherent properties of the individual links
as well as those established by management) to control aggregation.

•

Exchanges configuration information with other devices to allocate the link to a Link
Aggregation Group (LAG).
Note: A given link is allocated to, at most, one Link Aggregation Group (LAG) at a time. The
allocation mechanism attempts to maximize aggregation, subject to management controls.

•

Attaches the port to the aggregator used by the LAG, and detaches the port from the
aggregator when it is no longer used by the LAG.

•

Uses information from the partner device’s link aggregation control entity to decide whether
to aggregate ports.

The operation of LACP involves the following activities:
•

Checking that candidate links can actually be aggregated.

•

Controlling the addition of a link to a LAG, and the creation of the group if necessary.

•

Monitoring the status of aggregated links to ensure that the aggregation is still valid.

•

Removing a link from a LAG if its membership is no longer valid, and removing the group if it
no longer has any member links.

In order to allow LACP to determine whether a set of links connect to the same device, and to
determine whether those links are compatible from the point of view of aggregation, it is
necessary to be able to establish
•

7-42

Port Configuration

A globally unique identifier for each device that participates in link aggregation.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

•

A means of identifying the set of capabilities associated with each port and with each
aggregator, as understood by a given device.

•

A means of identifying a LAG and its associated aggregator.

Note: The path cost of a LAG port will be displayed as zero when it is not an active link.

LACP Terminology
Table 7‐6 defines key terminology used in LACP configuration.
Table 7-6

LACP Terms and Definitions

Term

Definition

Aggregator

Virtual port that controls link aggregation for underlying physical ports. Each
SecureStack C3 module provides 6 aggregator ports, which are designated in
the CLI as lag.0.1 through lag.0.6.

LAG

Link Aggregation Group. Once underlying physical ports (for example, fe.x.x)
are associated with an aggregator port, the resulting aggregation will be
represented as one LAG with a lag.x.x port designation.
SecureStack C3 LAGs can have up to 8 associated physical ports.

LACPDU

Link Aggregation Control Protocol Data Unit. The protocol exchanges
aggregation state/mode information by way of a port’s actor and partner
operational states. LACPDUs sent by the first party (the actor) convey to the
second party (the actor’s protocol partner) what the actor knows, both about
its own state and that of its partner.

Actor and Partner

An actor is the local device sending LACPDUs. Its protocol partner is the
device on the other end of the link aggregation. Each maintains current status
of the other via LACPDUs containing information about their ports’ LACP
status and operational state.

Admin Key

Value assigned to aggregator ports and physical ports that are candidates for
joining a LAG. The LACP implementation on SecureStack C3 devices will use
this value to form an oper key and will determine which underlying physical
ports are capable of aggregating by comparing oper keys. Aggregator ports
allow only underlying ports with oper keys matching theirs to join their LAG.
On SecureStack C3 devices, the default admin key value is 32768.

System Priority

Value used to build a LAG ID, which determines aggregation precedence. If
there are two partner devices competing for the same aggregator, LACP
compares the LAG IDs for each grouping of ports. The LAG with the lower
LAG ID is given precedence and will be allowed to use the aggregator.
Note: Only one LACP system priority can be set on a
SecureStack C3 device, using either the set lacp asyspri
command (page 7-47), or the set port lacp command
(page 7-52).

SecureStack C3 Usage Considerations
In normal usage (and typical implementations) there is no need to modify any of the default
LACP parameters on the switch. The default values will result in the maximum number of
aggregations possible. If the switch is placed in a configuration with its peers not running the
protocol, no dynamic link aggregations will be formed and the switch will function normally (that

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-43

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

is, will block redundant paths). For information about building static aggregations, refer to set
lacp static (page 7‐48).
Each SecureStack C3 module provides six virtual link aggregator ports, which are designated in
the CLI as lag.0.1 through lag.0.6. Each LAG can have up to eight associated physical ports. Once
underlying physical ports (for example, fe.x.x, or ge.x.x) are associated with an aggregator port,
the resulting aggregation will be represented as one LAG with a lag.0.x port designation. LACP
determines which underlying physical ports are capable of aggregating by comparing operational
keys. Aggregator ports allow only underlying ports with keys matching theirs to join their LAG.
LACP uses a system priority value to build a LAG ID, which determines aggregation precedence.
If there are two partner devices competing for the same aggregator, LACP compares the LAG IDs
for each grouping of ports. The LAG with the lower LAG ID is given precedence and will be
allowed to use the aggregator.
There are a few cases in which ports will not aggregate:
•

An underlying physical port is attached to another port on this same switch (loopback).

•

There is no available aggregator for two or more ports with the same LAG ID. This can
happen if there are simply no available aggregators, or if none of the aggregators have a
matching admin key and system priority.

•

802.1x authentication is enabled using the set eapol command (page 16‐18) and ports that
would otherwise aggregate are not 802.1X authorized.

The LACP implementation on the SecureStack C3 device will allow up to eight physical ports into
a LAG. The device with the lowest LAG ID determines which underlying physical ports are
allowed into a LAG based on the ports’ LAG port priority. Ports with the lowest LAG port priority
values are allowed into the LAG and all other speed groupings go into a standby state.
Multi‐port LAGs will continue to operate as long as there is at least one active port in the LAG.
Therefore, there is no need to create backup single port LAGs or to specifically assign the LAG and
all its physical ports to the egress list of the LAG’s VLAN.
Typically, two or more ports are required to form a LAG. However, you can enable the creation of
single port LAGs as described in “set lacp singleportlag” on page 7‐50. If a single port LAG goes
down and the switch stays up, the switch will reconfigure the LAG to the same LAG number if the
port comes back up.
Note: To aggregate, underlying physical ports must be running in full duplex mode and must be of
the same operating speed.

Commands
For information about...

7-44

Refer to page...

show lacp

7-45

set lacp

7-46

set lacp asyspri

7-47

set lacp aadminkey

7-47

clear lacp

7-48

set lacp static

7-48

clear lacp static

7-49

Port Configuration

show lacp

For information about...

Refer to page...

set lacp singleportlag

7-50

clear lacp singleportlag

7-49

show port lacp

7-51

set port lacp

7-52

clear port lacp

7-54

show lacp
Use this command to display information about one or more aggregator ports.

Syntax
show lacp [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays LACP information for specific LAG port(s). Valid
port designations are lag.0.1 ‐ 6.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, link aggregation information for all LAGs will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
Each SecureStack C3 module provides 6 virtual link aggregator ports, which are designated in the
CLI as lag.0.1 through lag.0.6. Once underlying physical ports (that is, ge.x.x) are associated with
an aggregator port, the resulting aggregation will be represented as one Link Aggregation Group
(LAG) with a lag.x.x port designation.

Example
This example shows how to display lacp information for lag.0.1. The following table describes the
output fields.
C3(su)->show lacp lag.0.1
Global Link Aggregation state: enabled
Single Port LAGs:
disabled
Aggregator: lag.0.1
System Identifier:
System Priority:
Admin Key:
Oper Key:
Attached Ports:

Actor
00:01:F4:5F:1E:20
32768
32768
32768
ge.1.1
ge.1.3

Partner
00:11:88:11:74:F9
32768
0

Table 7‐7 provides an explanation of the command output.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-45

set lacp

Table 7-7

show lacp Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Global Link
Aggregation state

Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled on the switch.

Single Port LAGs

Displays if the single port LAG feature has been enabled on the switch. See “set lacp
singleportlag” on page 7-50 for more about single port LAG.

Aggregator

LAG port designation. Each SecureStack C3 module provides 6 virtual link
aggregator ports, which are designated in the CLI as lag.0.1 through lag.0.6. Once
underlying physical ports (for example, fe.x.x) are associated with an aggregator
port, the resulting Link Aggregation Group (LAG) is represented with a lag.x.x port
designation.

Actor

Local device participating in LACP negotiation.

Partner

Remote device participating in LACP negotiation.

System Identifier

MAC addresses for actor and partner.

System Priority

System priority value which determines aggregation precedence. Only one LACP
system priority can be set on a SecureStack C3 device, using either the set lacp
asyspri command (page 7-47), or the set port lacp command (page 7-52).

Admin Key

Port’s assigned key. SecureStack C3 devices provide a default admin key value of
32768 for all LAG ports (lag.0.1 though lag.0.6).

Oper Key

Port’s operational key, derived from the admin key. Only underlying physical ports
with oper keys matching the aggregator’s will be allowed to aggregate.

Attached Ports

Underlying physical ports associated with this aggregator.

set lacp
Use this command to disable or enable the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the
device.

Syntax
set lacp {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable | enable

Disables or enables LACP.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to disable LACP:
C3(su)->set lacp disable

7-46

Port Configuration

set lacp asyspri

set lacp asyspri
Use this command to set the LACP system priority.

Syntax
set lacp asyspri value

Parameters
asyspri

Sets the system priority to be used in creating a LAG (Link Aggregation
Group) ID. Valid values are 0 to 65535.

value

Specifies a system priority value. Valid values are 0 to 65535, with
precedence given to lower values.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
LACP uses this value to determine aggregation precedence. If there are two partner devices
competing for the same aggregator, LACP compares the LAG IDs for each grouping of ports. The
LAG with the lower LAG ID is given precedence and will be allowed to use the aggregator.

Example
This example shows how to set the LACP system priority to 1000:
C3(su)->set lacp asyspri 1000

set lacp aadminkey
Use this command to set the administratively assigned key for one or more aggregator ports.

Syntax
set lacp aadminkey port-string value

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the LAG port(s) on which to assign an admin key.

value

Specifies an admin key value to set. Valid values are 0 to 65535. The
default admin key value is 32768.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-47

clear lacp

Usage
LACP will use this value to form an oper key. Only underlying physical ports with oper keys
matching those of their aggregators will be allowed to aggregate. The default admin key value for
all LAG ports is 32768.

Example
This example shows how to set the LACP admin key to 2000 for LAG port 6:
C3(su)->set lacp aadminkey lag.0.6 2000

clear lacp
Use this command to clear LACP system priority or admin key settings.

Syntax
clear lacp {[asyspri] [aadminkey port-string]}

Parameters
asyspri

Clears system priority.

aadminkey port‐string

Resets admin keys for one or more ports to the default value of 32768.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the actor admin key for LAG port 6:
C3(su)->clear lacp aadminkey lag.0.6

set lacp static
Use this command to disable or enable static link aggregation, or to assign one or more underlying
physical ports to a Link Aggregation Group (LAG).

Syntax
set lacp static {disable | enable} | lagportstring [key] port-string

Parameters

7-48

disable | enable

Disables or enables static link aggregation.

lagportstring

Specifies the LAG aggregator port to which new ports will be assigned.

Port Configuration

clear lacp static

key

(Optional) Specifies the new member port and LAG port aggregator
admin key value. Only ports with matching keys are allowed to
aggregate. Valid values are 0 ‐ 65535.
Note: This key value must be unique. If ports other than the desired
underlying physical ports share the same admin key value, aggregation
will fail or undesired aggregations will form.

port‐string

Specifies the member port(s) to add to the LAG. For a detailed description
of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI”
on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If not specified, a key will be assigned according to the specified aggregator. For example a key of 4
would be assigned to lag.0.4.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to add port ge.1.6 to the LAG of aggregator port 6:
C3(su)->set lacp static lag.0.6 ge.1.6

clear lacp static
Use this command to remove specific ports from a Link Aggregation Group.

Syntax
clear lacp static lagportstring port-string

Parameters
lagportstring

Specifies the LAG aggregator port from which ports will be removed.

port‐string

Specifies the port(s) to remove from the LAG. For a detailed description of
possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI”
on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to remove ge.1.6 from the LAG of aggregator port 6:
C3(su)->clear lacp static lag.0.6 ge.1.6

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-49

set lacp singleportlag

set lacp singleportlag
Use this command to enable or disable the formation of single port LAGs.

Syntax
set lacp singleportlag {enable | disable}

Parameters
disable | enable

Enables or disables the formation of single port LAGs.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
When single port LAGs are enabled, Link Aggregration Groups can be formed when only one
port is receiving protocol transmissions from a partner. When this setting is disabled, two or more
ports are required to form a LAG.
This setting has no effect on existing LAGs created with multiple member ports. It also does not
prevent previously formed LAGs from coming up after they have gone down, as long as any
previous LAG member ports come up connected to the same switch as before the LAG went
down.

Example
This example enables the formation of single port LAGs:
C3(su)->set lacp singleportlag enable

clear lacp singleportlag
Use this command to reset the single port LAG function back to the default state of disabled.

Syntax
clear lacp singleportlag

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

7-50

Port Configuration

show port lacp

Example
This example shows how to reset the single port LAG function back to disabled:
C3(su)->clear lacp singleportlag

show port lacp
Use this command to display link aggregation information for one or more underlying physical
ports.

Syntax
show port lacp port port-string {[status {detail | summary}] | [counters]}

Parameters
port port‐string

Displays LACP information for specific port(s). For a detailed description
of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI”
on page 7‐1.

status detail |
summary

Displays LACP status in detailed or summary information.

counters

Displays LACP counter information.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
State definitions, such as ActorAdminState and Partner AdminState, are indicated with letter
abbreviations. If the show port lacp command displays one or more of the following letters, it
means the state is true for the associated actor or partner ports:
•

E = Expired

•

F = Defaulted

•

D = Distributing (tx enabled)

•

C = Collecting (rx enabled)

•

S = Synchronized (actor and partner agree)

•

G = Aggregation allowed

•

S/l = Short/Long LACP timeout

•

A/p = Active/Passive LACP

For more information about these states, refer to set port lacp (page 7‐52) and the IEEE 802.3 2002
specification.

Examples
This example shows how to display detailed LACP status information for port ge.1.12:
C3(su)-> show port lacp port ge.1.12 status detail
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-51

set port lacp

Port Instance:
ge.1.12
ActorPort:
1411
ActorSystemPriority:
32768
ActorPortPriority:
32768
ActorAdminKey:
32768
ActorOperKey:
32768
ActorAdminState:
-----GlA
ActorOperState:
-F----lA
ActorSystemID:
00-e0-63-9d-b5-87
SelectedAggID:
none
AttachedAggID:
none
MuxState:
Detached
DebugRxState:
port Disabled

PartnerAdminPort:
1411
PartnerOperPort:
1411
PartnerAdminSystemPriority:
32768
PartnerOperSystemPriority:
32768
PartnerAdminPortPriority:
32768
PartnerOperPortPriority:
32768
PartnerAdminKey:
1411
PartnerOperKey:
1411
PartnerAdminState:
--DCSGlp
PartnerOperState:
--DC-Glp
PartnerAdminSystemID: 00-00-00-00-00-00
PartnerOperSystemID:
00-00-00-00-00-00

This example shows how to display summarized LACP status information for port ge.1.12:
C3(su)->show port lacp port ge.1.12 status summary
Port
Aggr
Actor System
Partner System
Pri:
System ID: Key:
Pri: System ID:
Key:
ge.1.12
none [(32768,00e0639db587,32768),(32768,000000000000, 1411)]

This example shows how to display LACP counters for port ge.1.12:
C3(su)->show port lacp port ge.1.12 counters
Port Instance:
ge.1.12
LACPDUsRx:
11067
LACPDUsTx:
0
IllegalRx:
0
UnknownRx:
0
MarkerPDUsRx:
0
MarkerPDUsTx:
0
MarkerResponsePDUsRx:
0
MarkerResponsePDUsTx:
374

set port lacp
Use this command to set link aggregation parameters for one or more ports. These settings will
determine the specified underlying physical ports’ ability to join a LAG, and their administrative
state once aggregated.

Syntax
set port lacp port port-string {[aadminkey aadminkey] [aadminstate {lacpactive |
lacptimeout | lacpagg | lacpsync | lacpcollect | lacpdist | lacpdef | lacpexpire}]
[aportpri aportpri] [asyspri asyspri] [enable | [disable] [padminkey padminkey]
[padminport padminport] [padminportpri padminportpri] [padminstate {lacpactive |
lacptimeout | lacpagg | lacpsync | lacpcollect | lacpdist | lacpdef | lacpexpire}]
[padminsysid padminsysid] [padminsyspri padminsyspri]

Parameters

7-52

port port‐string

Specifies the physical port(s) on which to configure LACP. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

aadminkey
aadminkey

Sets the port’s actor admin key. LACP will use this value to form an oper
key and will determine which underlying physical ports are capable of
aggregating by comparing oper keys. Aggregator ports allow only
underlying ports with oper keys matching theirs to join their LAG. Valid
values are 1 ‐ 65535. The default key value is 32768.

Port Configuration

set port lacp

aadminstate
lacpactive |
lacptimeout |
lacpagg | lacpsync
| lacpcollect |
lacpdist | lacpdef |
lacpexpire

Sets the port’s actor LACP administrative state to allow for:
lacpactive ‐ Transmitting LACP PDUs.
lacptimeout ‐ Transmitting LACP PDUs every 1 sec. vs 30 sec. (default).
lacpagg ‐ Aggregation on this port.
lacpsync ‐ Transition to synchronization state.
lacpcollect ‐ Transition to collection state.
lacpdist ‐ Transition to distribution state.
lacpdef ‐ Transition to defaulted state.
lacpexpire ‐ Transition to expired state.

aportpri aportpri

Sets the port’s actor port priority. Valid values are 0 ‐ 65535, with lower
values designating higher priority.

asyspri asyspri

Sets the port’s actor system priority. The LACP implementation on the
SecureStack C3 device uses this value to determine aggregation
precedence when there are two devices competing for the same
aggregator. Valid values are 0 ‐ 65535, with higher precedence given to
lower values.
Note: Only one LACP system priority can be set on a SecureStack
C3 device, using either this command, or the set lacp asyspri
command (“set lacp asyspri” on page 7-47).

enable

(Optional) Enables LACPDU processing on this port.

disable

(Optional) Disables LACPDU processing on this port.

padminkey
padminkey

Sets a default value to use as the port’s partner admin key. Only ports with
matching admin keys are allowed to aggregate. Valid values are 1 ‐ 65535.

padminport
padminport

Sets a default value to use as the port’s partner admin value. Valid values
are 1 ‐ 65535.

padminportpri
padminportpri

Sets a default value to use as the port’s partner port priority. Valid values
are 0 ‐ 65535, with lower values given higher priority.

padminstate
lacpactive |
lacptimeout |
lacpagg | lacpsync
| lacpcollect |
lacpdist | lacpdef |
lacpexpire

Sets a port’s partner LACP administrative state. See aadminstate for valid
options.

padminsysid
padminsysid

Sets a default value to use as the port’s partner system ID. This is a MAC
address.

padminsyspri
padminsyspri

Sets a default value to use as the port’s partner priority. Valid values are 0
‐ 65535, with lower values given higher priority.

Defaults
At least one parameter must be entered per port‐string.
If enable or disable are not specified, port(s) will be enabled with the LACP parameters entered.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-53

clear port lacp

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
LACP commands and parameters beginning with an “a” (such as aadminkey) set actor values.
Corresponding commands and parameters beginning with a “p” (such as padminkey) set
corresponding partner values. Actor refers to the local device participating in LACP negotiation,
while partner refers to its remote device partner at the other end of the negotiation. Actors and
partners maintain current status of the other via LACPDUs containing information about their
ports’ LACP status and operational state.

Example
This example shows how to set the actor admin key to 3555 for port ge.3.16:
C3(su)->set port lacp port ge.3.16 aadminkey 3555

clear port lacp
Use this command to clear link aggregation settings for one or more ports.

Syntax
clear port lacp port port-string {[aadminkey] [aportpri] [asyspri] [aadminstate
{lacpactive | lacptimeout | lacpagg | lacpsync | lacpcollect | lacpdist | lacpdef
| lacpexpire | all}] [padminsyspri] [padminsysid] [padminkey] [padminportpri]
[padminport] [padminstate {lacpactive | lacptimeout | lacpagg | lacpsync |
lacpcollect | lacpdist | lacpdef | lacpexpire | all}]}

Parameters

7-54

port port‐string

Specifies the physical port(s) on which LACP settings will be cleared. For
a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

aadminkey

Clears a port’s actor admin key.

aportpri

Clears a port’s actor port priority.

asyspri

Clears the port’s actor system priority.

aadminstate
lacpactive |
lacptimeout |
lacpagg | lacpsync
| lacpcollect |
lacpdist | lacpdef |
lacpexpire | all

Clears a port’s specific actor admin state, or all actor admin state(s). For
descriptions of specific states, refer to the set port lacp command (“set
port lacp” on page 7‐52).

padminsyspri

Clears the port’s default partner priority value.

padminsysid

Clears the port’s default partner system ID.

padminkey

Clears the port’s default partner admin key.

padminportpri

Clears the port’s default partner port priority.

Port Configuration

clear port lacp

padminport

Deletes a partner port from the LACP configuration.

padminstate
lacpactive |
lacptimeout |
lacpagg | lacpsync
| lacpcollect |
lacpdist | lacpdef |
lacpexpire | all

Clears the port’s specific partner admin state, or all partner admin state(s).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
If you set a port to LACP passive using the command clear port lacp port 
aadminstate lacpactive, the command clear port lacp port  aadminstate lacptimeout
will also be added to the configuration. If you unset the first command, it will remove the second
command automatically from the configuration file.

Example
This example shows how to clear all link aggregation parameters for port ge.3.16:
C3(su)->clear port lacp port ge.3.16

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-55

Configuring Protected Ports

Configuring Protected Ports
The Protected Port feature is used to prevent ports from forwarding traffic to each other, even
when they are on the same VLAN. Ports may be designated as either protected or unprotected.
Ports are unprotected by default. Multiple groups of protected ports are supported.

Protected Port Operation
Ports that are configured to be protected cannot forward traffic to other protected ports in the
same group, regardless of having the same VLAN membership. However, protected ports can
forward traffic to ports which are unprotected (not listed in any group). Protected ports can also
forward traffic to protected ports in a different group, if they are in the same VLAN. Unprotected
ports can forward traffic to both protected and unprotected ports. A port may belong to only one
group of protected ports.
This feature only applies to ports within a switch or a stack. It does not apply across multiple
switches in a network.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

set port protected

7-56

show port protected

7-57

clear port protected

7-57

set port protected name

7-58

show port protected name

7-58

clear port protected name

7-59

set port protected
Use this command to specify a port to be protected and assign the port to a group of protected
ports. A port can be assigned to only one group.

Syntax
set port protected port-string group-id

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or ports to be protected.

group‐id

Specifies the id of the group to which the ports should be assigned. Id can
range from 0 to 2.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

7-56

Port Configuration

show port protected

Example
This example shows how to assign ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.3 to protected port group 1:
C3(rw)->set port protected ge.1.1-3 1

show port protected
Use this command to display information about the ports configured for protected mode.

Syntax
show port protected [port-string] | [group-id]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port or ports for which to display information.

group‐id

(Optional) Specifies the id of the group for which to display information.
Id can range from 0 to 2.

Defaults
If no parameters are entered, information about all protected ports is displayed.

Mode
Read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display information about all protected ports:
C3(ro)->show port protected
Group id
Port
---------------------1
ge.1.1
1
ge.1.2
1
ge.1.3

clear port protected
Use this command to remove a port or group from protected mode.

Syntax
clear port protected [port-string] | [group-id]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port or ports to remove from protected mode.

group‐id

(Optional) Specifies the id of the group to remove from protected mode.
Id can range from 0 to 2.

Defaults
If no parameters are entered, all protected ports and groups are cleared.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-57

set port protected name

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear protected ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.3:
C3(rw)->clear port protected ge.1.1-3

set port protected name
Use this command to assign a name to a protected port group id.

Syntax
set port protected name group-id name

Parameters
group‐id

Specifies the id of this group. Id can range from 0 to 2.

name

Specifies a name for the group. The name can be up to 32 characters in
length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to assign the name “group1” to protected port group 1:
C3(rw)->set port protected name 1 group1

show port protected name
Use this command to display the name for the group ids specified.

Syntax
show port protected name group-id

Parameters
group‐id

Defaults
None.

Mode
Read‐only.
7-58

Port Configuration

Specifies the id of the group to display. Id can range from 0 to 2.

clear port protected name

Example
This example shows how to show the name of protected port group 1:
C3(ro)->show port protected name 1
Group ID
Group Name
----------------------------1
group1

clear port protected name
Use this command to clear the name of a protected group.

Syntax
clear port protected name group-id

Parameters
group‐id

Specifies the id of the group for which to clear the name. Id can range
from 0 to 2.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the name of protected port group 1:
C3(rw)->clear port protected name 1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

7-59

clear port protected name

7-60

Port Configuration

8
SNMP Configuration
This chapter describes the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) set of commands and
how to use them.
For information about...

Refer to page...

SNMP Configuration Summary

8-1

Reviewing SNMP Statistics

8-3

Configuring SNMP Users, Groups, and Communities

8-8

Configuring SNMP Access Rights

8-15

Configuring SNMP MIB Views

8-19

Configuring SNMP Target Parameters

8-23

Configuring SNMP Target Addresses

8-26

Configuring SNMP Notification Parameters

8-29

Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration

8-37

Configuring the SNMP Management Interface

8-39

Note: An Enterasys Networks Feature Guide document containing an in-depth discussion of SNMP
configuration is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

SNMP Configuration Summary
SNMP is an application‐layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information
between network devices. SNMP enables network administrators to manage network
performance, find and solve network problems, and plan for network growth.
SecureStack C3 devices support three versions of SNMP:
•

Version 1 (SNMPv1) — This is the initial implementation of SNMP. Refer to RFC 1157 for a full
description of functionality.

•

Version 2 (SNMPv2c) — The second release of SNMP, described in RFC 1907, has additions
and enhancements to data types, counter size, and protocol operations.

•

Version 3 (SNMPv3) — This is the most recent version of SNMP, and includes significant
enhancements to administration and security. SNMPv3 is fully described in RFC 2571,
RFC 2572, RFC 2573, RFC 2574, and RFC 2575.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-1

SNMP Configuration Summary

SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c
The components of SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c network management fall into three categories:
•

Managed devices (such as a switch).

•

SNMP agents and MIBs, including SNMP traps, community strings, and Remote Monitoring
(RMON) MIBs, which run on managed devices.

•

SNMP network management applications, such as the Enterasys NetSight application, which
communicate with agents to get statistics and alerts from the managed devices.

SNMPv3
SNMPv3 is an interoperable standards‐based protocol that provides secure access to devices by
authenticating and encrypting frames over the network. The advanced security features provided
in SNMPv3 are as follows:
–

Message integrity — Collects data securely without being tampered with or corrupted.

–

Authentication — Determines the message is from a valid source.

–

Encryption — Scrambles the contents of a frame to prevent it from being seen by an
unauthorized source.

Unlike SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c, in SNMPv3, the concept of SNMP agents and SNMP managers no
longer apply. These concepts have been combined into an SNMP entity. An SNMP entity consists
of an SNMP engine and SNMP applications. An SNMP engine consists of the following four
components:
•

Dispatcher — This component sends and receives messages.

•

Message processing subsystem — This component accepts outgoing PDUs from the
dispatcher and prepares them for transmission by wrapping them in a message header and
returning them to the dispatcher. The message processing subsystem also accepts incoming
messages from the dispatcher, processes each message header, and returns the enclosed PDU
to the dispatcher.

•

Security subsystem — This component authenticates and encrypts messages.

•

Access control subsystem — This component determines which users and which operations
are allowed access to managed objects.

About SNMP Security Models and Levels
An SNMP security model is an authentication strategy that is set up for a user and the group in
which the user resides. A security level is the permitted level of security within a security model.
The three levels of SNMP security are: No authentication required (NoAuthNoPriv);
authentication required (AuthNoPriv); and privacy (authPriv). A combination of a security model
and a security level determines which security mechanism is employed when handling an SNMP
frame. Table 8‐1 identifies the levels of SNMP security available on SecureStack C3 devices and
authentication required within each model.

8-2

SNMP Configuration

Reviewing SNMP Statistics

Table 8-1

SNMP Security Levels

Model

Security Level

Authentication

Encryption

How It Works

v1

NoAuthNoPriv

Community string

None

Uses a community string match for
authentication.

v2c

NoAuthNoPriv

Community string

None

Uses a community string match for
authentication.

v3

NoAuthNoPriv

User name

None

Uses a user name match for
authentication.

AuthNoPriv

MD5 or SHA

None

Provides authentication based on
the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA
algorithms.

authPriv

MD5 or SHA

DES

Provides authentication based on
the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA
algorithms. Provides DES 56-bit
encryption in addition to
authentication based on the CBCDES (DES-56) standard.

Using SNMP Contexts to Access Specific MIBs
By default, when operating from the switch CLI, SecureStack C3 devices allow access to all SNMP
MIBs or contexts. A context is a collection of MIB objects, often associated with a particular
physical or logical device.
If no optional context parameters are configured for v1 and v2 “community” names and v3 “user”
groups, these groups are able to access all SNMP MIB objects when in switch mode.
Specifying a context parameter when setting up SNMP user group would permit or restrict the
group’s switch management access to the MIB(s) specified by the context (MIB object ID) value.
All SNMP contexts known to the device can be displayed using the show snmp context command
as described in “show snmp context” on page 8‐21.

Example
This example permits the “powergroup” to manage all MIBs via SNMPv3:
C3(su)->set snmp access powergroup security-model usm

Configuration Considerations
Commands for configuring SNMP on the SecureStack C3 device are independent during the
SNMP setup process. For instance, target parameters can be specified when setting up optional
notification filters — even though these parameters have not yet been created with the set snmp
targetparams command.

Reviewing SNMP Statistics
Purpose
To review SNMP statistics.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-3

show snmp engineid

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show snmp engineid

8-4

show snmp counters

8-5

show snmp engineid
Use this command to display the SNMP local engine ID. This is the SNMP v3 engine’s
administratively unique identifier.

Syntax
show snmp engineid

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SNMP engine properties:
C3(su)->show snmp engineid
EngineId: 80:00:15:f8:03:00:e0:63:9d:b5:87
Engine Boots
= 12
Engine Time
= 162181
Max Msg Size
= 2048

Table 8‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 8-2

8-4

show snmp engineid Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

EngineId

String identifying the SNMP agent on the device.

Engine Boots

Number of times the SNMP engine has been started or reinitialized.

Engine Time

Time in seconds since last reboot.

Max Msg Size

Maximum accepted length, in bytes, of SNMP frame.

SNMP Configuration

show snmp counters

show snmp counters
Use this command to display SNMP traffic counter values.

Syntax
show snmp counters

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SNMP counter values
C3(su)->show snmp counters
--- mib2 SNMP group counters:
snmpInPkts
= 396601
snmpOutPkts
= 396601
snmpInBadVersions
= 0
snmpInBadCommunityNames = 0
snmpInBadCommunityUses = 0
snmpInASNParseErrs
= 0
snmpInTooBigs
= 0
snmpInNoSuchNames
= 0
snmpInBadValues
= 0
snmpInReadOnlys
= 0
snmpInGenErrs
= 0
snmpInTotalReqVars
= 403661
snmpInTotalSetVars
= 534
snmpInGetRequests
= 290
snmpInGetNexts
= 396279
snmpInSetRequests
= 32
snmpInGetResponses
= 0
snmpInTraps
= 0
snmpOutTooBigs
= 0
snmpOutNoSuchNames
= 11
snmpOutBadValues
= 0
snmpOutGenErrs
= 0
snmpOutGetRequests
= 0
snmpOutGetNexts
= 0
snmpOutSetRequests
= 0
snmpOutGetResponses
= 396601
snmpOutTraps
= 0
snmpSilentDrops
= 0
snmpProxyDrops
= 0
--- USM Stats counters:
usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels = 0
usmStatsNotInTimeWindows
= 0
usmStatsUnknownUserNames
= 0

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-5

show snmp counters

usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs
usmStatsWrongDigests
usmStatsDecryptionErrors

= 0
= 0
= 0

Table 8‐3 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 8-3

8-6

show snmp counters Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

snmpInPkts

Number of messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport
service.

snmpOutPkts

Number of SNMP messages passed from the SNMP protocol entity to
the transport service.

snmpInBadVersions

Number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP entity for an
unsupported SNMP version.

snmpInBadCommunityNames

Number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP entity that used an
SNMP community name not known to the entity.

snmpInBadCommunityUses

Number of SNMP messages delivered to the SNMP entity that
represented an SNMP operation not allowed by the SNMP community
named in the message.

snmpInASNParseErrs

Number of ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation) or BER (Basic Encoding
Rules) errors encountered by the SNMP entity when decoding received
SNMP messages.

snmpInTooBigs

Number of SNMP PDUs delivered to the SNMP protocol entity with the
value of the error-status field as “tooBig.”

snmpInNoSuchNames

Number of SNMP PDUs delivered to the SNMP protocol entity with the
value of the error-status field as “noSuchName.”

snmpInBadValues

Number of SNMP PDUs delivered to the SNMP protocol entity with the
value of the error-status field as “badValue.”

snmpInReadOnlys

Number of valid SNMP PDUs delivered to the SNMP protocol entity with
the value of the error-status field as "readOnly."

snmpInGenErrs

Number of SNMP PDUs delivered to the SNMP protocol entity with the
value of the error-status field as "genErr."

snmpInTotalReqVars

Number of MIB objects retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol
entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP Get-Request and Get-Next
PDUs.

snmpInTotalSetVars

Number of MIB objects altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity
as the result of receiving valid SNMP Set-Request PDUs.

snmpInGetRequests

Number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.

snmpInGetNexts

Number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.

snmpInSetRequests

Number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.

snmpInGetResponses

Number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.

snmpInTraps

Number of SNMP Trap PDUs accepted and processed by the SNMP
protocol entity.

snmpOutTooBigs

Number of SNMP PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity with the
value of the error-status field as "tooBig."

snmpOutNoSuchNames

Number of SNMP PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity with the
value of the error-status as "noSuchName."

SNMP Configuration

show snmp counters

Table 8-3

show snmp counters Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

snmpOutBadValues

Number of SNMP PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity with the
value of the error-status field as "badValue."

snmpOutGenErrs

Number of SNMP PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity with the
value of the error-status field as "genErr."

snmpOutGetRequests

Number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol
entity.

snmpOutGetNexts

Number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol
entity.

snmpOutSetRequests

Number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol
entity.

snmpOutGetResponses

Number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs generated by the SNMP
protocol entity.

snmpOutTraps

Number of SNMP Trap PDUs generated by the SNMP protocol entity.

snmpSilentDrops

Number of SNMP Get, Set, or Inform request error messages that were
dropped because the reply was larger than the requestor’s maximum
message size.

snmpProxyDrops

Number of SNMP Get, Set, or Inform request error messages that were
dropped because the reply was larger than the proxy target’s maximum
message size.

usmStatsUnsupportedSec
Levels

Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped
because they requested a security level that was unknown to the SNMP
engine or otherwise unavailable.

usmStatsNotInTimeWindows

Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped
because they appeared outside of the authoritative SNMP engine's
window.

usmStatsUnknownUserNames

Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped
because they referenced a user that was not known to the SNMP
engine.

usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs

Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped
because they referenced an snmpEngineID that was not known to the
SNMP engine.

usmStatsWrongDigests

Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped
because they did not contain the expected digest value.

usmStatsDecriptionErrors

Number of packets received by the SNMP engine that were dropped
because they could not be decrypted.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-7

Configuring SNMP Users, Groups, and Communities

Configuring SNMP Users, Groups, and Communities
Purpose
To review and configure SNMP users, groups, and v1 and v2 communities. These are defined as
follows:
•

User — A person registered in SNMPv3 to access SNMP management.

•

Group — A collection of users who share the same SNMP access privileges.

•

Community — A name used to authenticate SNMPv1 and v2 users.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show snmp user

8-8

set snmp user

8-9

clear snmp user

8-11

show snmp group

8-11

set snmp group

8-12

clear snmp group

8-13

show snmp community

8-13

set snmp community

8-14

clear snmp community

8-15

show snmp user
Use this command to display information about SNMP users. These are people registered to
access SNMP management.

Syntax
show snmp user [list] | [user] | [remote remote] [volatile | nonvolatile | readonly]

Parameters
list

(Optional) Displays a list of registered SNMP user names.

user

(Optional) Displays information about a specific user.

remote remote

(Optional) Displays information about users on a specific remote SNMP
engine.

volatile | nonvolatile
| read‐only

(Optional) Displays user information for a specified storage type.

Defaults
If list is not specified, detailed SNMP information will be displayed.

8-8

SNMP Configuration

set snmp user

If user is not specified, information about all SNMP users will be displayed.
If remote is not specified, user information about the local SNMP engine will be displayed.
If not specified, user information for all storage types will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Examples
This example shows how to display an SNMP user list:
C3(su)->show snmp user list
--- SNMP user information ----- List of registered users:
Guest
admin1
admin2
netops

This example shows how to display information for the SNMP “guest” user:
(su)->show snmp user guest
--- SNMP user information --EngineId: 00:00:00:63:00:00:00:a1:00:00:00:00
Username
= Guest
Auth protocol
= usmNoAuthProtocol
Privacy protocol
= usmNoPrivProtocol
Storage type
= nonVolatile
Row status
= active

Table 8‐4 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 8-4

show snmp user Output Details
Output Field

What It Displays...

EngineId

SNMP local engine identifier.

Username

SNMPv1 or v2 community name or SNMPv3 user name.

Auth protocol

Type of authentication protocol applied to this user.

Privacy protocol

Type of encryption protocol applied to this user.

Storage type

Whether entry is stored in volatile, nonvolatile or read-only memory.

Row status

Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

set snmp user
Use this command to create a new SNMPv3 user.

Syntax
set snmp user user [remote remoteid] [encryption {des | aes}] [privacy
privpassword] [authentication {md5 | sha}] [authpassword] [volatile | nonvolatile]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-9

set snmp user

Parameters
user

Specifies a name for the SNMPv3 user.

remote remoteid

(Optional) Registers the user on a specific remote SNMP engine.

encryption des |
aes

(Optional) Specifies the encryption type for this user.
AES refers to the Advanced Encryption Standard using a 128 bit key size.

privacy privpassword (Optional) Specifies an encryption password. Minimum of 8 characters.
Required if encryption is specified.
authentication md5
| sha

(Optional) Specifies the authentication type required for this user as MD5
or SHA.

authpassword

(Optional) Specifies a password for this user when authentication is
required. Minimum of 8 characters.

volatile |
nonvolatile

(Optional) Specifies a storage type for this user entry.

Defaults
If remote is not specified, the user will be registered for the local SNMP engine.
If encryption is not specified, no encryption will be applied.
If authentication is not specified, no authentication will be applied.
If storage type is not specified, nonvolatile will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Although all the parameters except for the user name are optional, if you are entering any of the
optional parameters, it is recommended that you enter them in the order shown in the syntax
statement.

Examples
This example shows how to create a new SNMP user named “netops”. By default, this user will be
registered on the local SNMP engine without authentication and encryption. Entries related to this
user will be stored in permanent (nonvolatile) memory:
C3(su)->set snmp user netops

This example creates a new SNMP user named “admin” with DES encryption and MD5
authentication required. The encryption password is “admintest1” and the authentication
password is “admintest2.” By default, this user will be registered on the local SNMP engine and
entries related to this user will be stored in permanent (nonvolatile) memory.
C3(su)->set snmp user admin encryption des privacy admintest1 authentication md5
admintest2

8-10

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp user

clear snmp user
Use this command to remove a user from the SNMPv3 security‐model list.

Syntax
clear snmp user user [remote remote]

Parameters
user

Specifies an SNMPv3 user to remove.

remote remote

(Optional) Removes the user from a specific remote SNMP engine.

Defaults
If remote is not specified, the user will be removed from the local SNMP engine.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to remove the SNMP user named “bill”:
C3(su)->clear snmp user bill

show snmp group
Use this command to display an SNMP group configuration. An SNMP group is a collection of
SNMPv3 users who share the same access privileges.

Syntax
show snmp group [groupname groupname] [user user] [security-model {v1 | v2c | usm}]
[volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
groupname
groupname

(Optional) Displays information for a specific SNMP group.

user user

(Optional) Displays information about users within the specified group.

security‐model v1 |
v2c | usm

(Optional) Displays information about groups assigned to a specific
security SNMP model.

volatile |
nonvolatile | read‐
only

(Optional) Displays SNMP group information for a specified storage type.

Defaults
If groupname is not specified, information about all SNMP groups will be displayed.
If user is not specified, information about all SNMP users will be displayed.
If security‐model is not specified, user information about all SNMP versions will be displayed.
If not specified, information for all storage types will be displayed.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-11

set snmp group

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SNMP group information:
C3(su)->show snmp group
--- SNMP group information --Security model
= SNMPv1
Security/user name
= public
Group name
= Anyone
Storage type
= nonVolatile
Row status
= active
Security model
Security/user name
Group name
Storage type
Row status

=
=
=
=
=

SNMPv1
public.router1
Anyone
nonVolatile
active

Table 8‐5 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 8-5

show snmp group Output Details
Output Field

What It Displays...

Security model

SNMP version associated with this group.

Security/user name

User belonging to the SNMP group.

Group name

Name of SNMP group.

Storage type

Whether entry is stored in volatile, nonvolatile or read-only memory.

Row status

Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

set snmp group
Use this command to create an SNMP group. This associates SNMPv3 users to a group that shares
common access privileges.

Syntax
set snmp group groupname user user security-model {v1 | v2c | usm} [volatile |
nonvolatile]

Parameters
groupname

Specifies an SNMP group name to create.

user user

Specifies an SNMPv3 user name to assign to the group.

security‐model v1 |
v2c | usm

Specifies an SNMP security model to assign to the group.

volatile |
nonvolatile

(Optional) Specifies a storage type for SNMP entries associated with the
group.

Defaults
If storage type is not specified, nonvolatile storage will be applied.

8-12

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp group

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to create an SNMP group called “anyone”, assign a user named “public”
and assign SNMPv3 security to the group:
C3(su)->set snmp group anyone user public security-model usm

clear snmp group
Use this command to clear SNMP group settings globally or for a specific SNMP group and user.

Syntax
clear snmp group groupname user [security-model {v1 | v2c | usm}]

Parameters
groupname

Specifies the SNMP group to be cleared.

user

Specifies the SNMP user to be cleared.

security‐model v1 |
v2c | usm

(Optional) Clears the settings associated with a specific security model.

Defaults
If not specified, settings related to all security models will be cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear all settings assigned to the “public” user within the SNMP group
“anyone”:
C3(su)->clear snmp group anyone public

show snmp community
Use this command to display SNMP community names and status. In SNMPv1 and v2,
community names act as passwords to remote management.

Syntax
show snmp community [name]

Parameters
name

(Optional) Displays SNMP information for a specific community name.

Defaults
If name is not specified, information will be displayed for all SNMP communities.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-13

set snmp community

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display information about the SNMP “public” community name. For
a description of this output, refer to set snmp community (page 8‐14).
C3(su)->show snmp community public
--- Configured community strings --Name
Security name
Context
Transport tag
Storage type
Status

=
=
=
=
=
=

*********
public

nonVolatile
active

set snmp community
Use this command to configure an SNMP community group.

Syntax
set snmp community community [securityname securityname] [context context]
[transport transport] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
community

Specifies a community group name.

securityname
securityname

(Optional) Specifies an SNMP security name to associate with this
community.

context context

(Optional) Specifies a subset of management information this community
will be allowed to access. Valid values are full or partial context names. To
review all contexts configured for the device, use the show snmp context
command as described in “show snmp context” on page 8‐21.

transport transport

(Optional) Specifies the set of transport endpoints from which SNMP
request with this community name will be accepted. Makes a link to a
target address table.

volatile |
nonvolatile

(Optional) Specifies the storage type for these entries.

Defaults
If securityname is not specified, the community name will be used.
If context is not specified, the default (NULL) context is applied.
If transport tag is not specified, none will be applied.
If storage type is not specified, nonvolatile will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

8-14

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp community

Usage
When you configure a community name, if you don’t specify a context with the context parameter,
the default (NULL) context is applied. If you want to change a configured context back to the
default (NULL )context, enter a hyphen as the value of the context parameter, as shown in the
Examples below.

Examples
This example shows how to set an SNMP community name called “vip.”
C3(su)->set snmp community vip

The example shows how to set the context for SNMP community “vip” to the default NULL
context.
C3(su)->set snmp community vip context -

clear snmp community
Use this command to delete an SNMP community name.

Syntax
clear snmp community name

Parameters
name

Specifies the SNMP community name to clear.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to delete the community name “vip.”
C3(su)->clear snmp community vip

Configuring SNMP Access Rights
Purpose
To review and configure SNMP access rights, assigning viewing privileges and security levels to
SNMP user groups.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-15

show snmp access

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show snmp access

8-16

set snmp access

8-18

clear snmp access

8-19

show snmp access
Use this command to display access rights and security levels configured for SNMP one or more
groups.

Syntax
show snmp access [groupname] [security-model {v1 | v2c | usm}] [noauthentication
| authentication | privacy] [context context] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
groupname

(Optional) Displays access information for a specific SNMPv3 group.

security‐model v1 |
v2c | usm

(Optional) Displays access information for SNMP security model version
1, 2c or 3 (usm).

noauthentication |
authentication |
privacy

(Optional) Displays access information for a specific security level.

context context

(Optional) Displays access information for a specific context. For a
description of how to specify SNMP contexts, refer to “Using SNMP
Contexts to Access Specific MIBs” on page 8‐3.

volatile |
nonvolatile | read‐
only

(Optional) Displays access entries for a specific storage type.

Defaults
If groupname is not specified, access information for all SNMP groups will be displayed.
If security‐model is not specified, access information for all SNMP versions will be displayed.
If noauthentication, authentication or privacy are not specified, access information for all
security levels will be displayed.
If context is not specified, all contexts will be displayed.
If volatile, nonvolatile or read‐only are not specified, all entries of all storage types will be
displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

8-16

SNMP Configuration

show snmp access

Example
This example shows how to display SNMP access information:
C3(su)->show snmp
Group
=
Security model =
Security level =
Read View
=
Write View
=
Notify View
=
Context match
=
Storage type
=
Row status
=

access
SystemAdmin
USM
noAuthNoPriv
All

Group
Security model
Security level
Read View
Write View
Notify View
Context match
Storage type
Row status

NightOperator
USM
noAuthNoPriv
All

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

All
exact match
nonVolatile
active

All
exact match
nonVolatile
active

Table 8‐6 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 8-6

show snmp access Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Group

SNMP group name.

Security model

Security model applied to this group. Valid types are: SNMPv1,
SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3 (User based - USM).

Security level

Security level applied to this group. Valid levels are:
• noAuthNoPrivacy (no authentication required)
• AuthNoPrivacy (authentication required)
• authPriv (privacy -- most secure level)

Read View

Name of the view that allows this group to view SNMP MIB objects.

Write View

Name of the view that allows this group to configure the contents of the
SNMP agent.

Notify View

Name of the view that allows this group to send an SNMP trap message.

Context match

Whether or not SNMP context match must be exact (full context name
match) or a partial match with a given prefix.

Storage type

Whether access entries for this group are stored in volatile, nonvolatile
or read-only memory.

Row status

Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-17

set snmp access

set snmp access
Use this command to set an SNMP access configuration.

Syntax
set snmp access groupname security-model {v1 | v2c | usm} [noauthentication |
authentication | privacy] [context context] [exact | prefix] [read read] [write
write] [notify notify] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
groupname

Specifies a name for an SNMPv3 group.

security‐model v1 |
v2c | usm

Specifies SNMP version 1, 2c or 3 (usm).

noauthentication |
authentication |
privacy

(Optional) Applies SNMP security level as no authentication,
authentication (without privacy) or privacy. Privacy specifies that
messages sent on behalf of the user are protected from disclosure.

context context exact
| prefix

(Optional) Sets the context for this access configuration and specifies that
the match must be exact (matching the whole context string) or a prefix
match only. Context is a subset of management information this SNMP
group will be allowed to access. Valid values are full or partial context
names. To review all contexts configured for the device, use the show
snmp context command as described in “show snmp context” on
page 8‐21.

read read

(Optional) Specifies a read access view.

write write

(Optional) Specifies a write access view.

notify notify

(Optional) Specifies a notify access view.

volatile |
nonvolatile | read‐
only

(Optional) Stores associated SNMP entries as temporary or permanent, or
read‐only.

Defaults
If security level is not specified, no authentication will be applied.
If context is not specified, access will be enabled for the default context. If context is specified
without a context match, exact match will be applied.
If read view is not specified none will be applied.
If write view is not specified, none will be applied.
If notify view is not specified, none will be applied.
If storage type is not specified, entries will be stored as permanent and will be held through device
reboot.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example permits the “powergroup” to manage all MIBs via SNMPv3:
C3(su)->set snmp access powergroup security-model usm

8-18

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp access

clear snmp access
Use this command to clear the SNMP access entry of a specific group, including its set SNMP
security‐model, and level of security.

Syntax
clear snmp access groupname security-model {v1 | v2c | usm} [noauthentication |
authentication | privacy] [context context]

Parameters
groupname

Specifies the name of the SNMP group for which to clear access.

security‐model v1 |
v2c | usm

Specifies the security model to be cleared for the SNMP access group.

noauthentication |
authentication |
privacy

(Optional) Clears a specific security level for the SNMP access group.

context context

(Optional) Clears a specific context for the SNMP access group. Enter / ‐ /
to clear the default context.

Defaults
If security level is not specified, all levels will be cleared.
If context is not specified, none will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear SNMP version 3 access for the “mis‐group” via the
authentication protocol:
C3(su)->clear snmp access mis-group security-model usm authentication

Configuring SNMP MIB Views
Purpose
To review and configure SNMP MIB views. SNMP views map SNMP objects to access rights.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show snmp view

8-20

show snmp context

8-21

set snmp view

8-21

clear snmp view

8-22

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-19

show snmp view

show snmp view
Use this command to display the MIB configuration for SNMPv3 view‐based access (VACM).

Syntax
show snmp view [viewname] [subtree oid-or-mibobject] [volatile | nonvolatile |
read-only]

Parameters
viewname

(Optional) Displays information for a specific MIB view.

subtree oid‐or‐mibobject

(Optional) Displays information for a specific MIB subtree when
viewname is specified.

volatile | nonvolatile |
read‐only

(Optional) Displays entries for a specific storage type.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all SNMP MIB view configuration information will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SNMP MIB view configuration information:
C3(su)->show snmp view
--- SNMP MIB View information --View Name
= All
Subtree OID
= 1
Subtree mask
=
View Type
= included
Storage type
= nonVolatile
Row status
= active
View Name
Subtree OID
Subtree mask
View Type
Storage type
Row status

=
=
=
=
=
=

All
0.0

View Name
Subtree OID
Subtree mask
View Type
Storage type
Row status

=
=
=
=
=
=

Network
1.3.6.1.2.1

included
nonVolatile
active

included
nonVolatile
active

Table 8‐7 provides an explanation of the command output. For details on using the set snmp view
command to assign variables, refer to “set snmp view” on page 8‐21.

8-20

SNMP Configuration

show snmp context

Table 8-7

show snmp view Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

View Name

Name assigned to a MIB view.

Subtree OID

Name identifying a MIB subtree.

Subtree mask

Bitmask applied to a MIB subtree.

View Type

Whether or not subtree use must be included or excluded for this view.

Storage type

Whether storage is in nonVolatile or Volatile memory

Row status

Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

show snmp context
Use this command to display the context list configuration for SNMP’s view‐based access control.

Syntax
show snmp context

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
An SNMP context is a collection of management information that can be accessed by an SNMP
agent or entity. The default context allows all SNMP agents to access all management information
(MIBs). When created using the set snmp access command (“set snmp access” on page 8‐18), other
contexts can be applied to limit access to a subset of management information.

Example
This example shows how to display a list of all SNMP contexts known to the device:
C3(su)->show snmp context
--- Configured contexts:
default context (all mibs)

set snmp view
Use this command to set a MIB configuration for SNMPv3 view‐based access (VACM).

Syntax
set snmp view viewname viewname subtree subtree [mask mask] [included | excluded]
[volatile | nonvolatile]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-21

clear snmp view

Parameters
viewname viewname Specifies a name for a MIB view.
subtree subtree

Specifies a MIB subtree name.

mask mask

(Optional) Specifies a bitmask for a subtree.

included |
excluded

(Optional) Specifies subtree use (default) or no subtree use.

volatile |
nonvolatile

(Optional) Specifies the use of temporary or permanent (default) storage.

Defaults
If not specified, mask will be set to 255.255.255.255
If not specified, subtree use will be included.
If storage type is not specified, nonvolatile (permanent) will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set an SNMP MIB view to “public” with a subtree name of 1.3.6.1
included:
C3(su)->set snmp view viewname public subtree 1.3.6.1 included

clear snmp view
Use this command to delete an SNMPv3 MIB view.

Syntax
clear snmp view viewname subtree

Parameters
viewname

Specifies the MIB view name to be deleted.

subtree

Specifies the subtree name of the MIB view to be deleted.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to delete SNMP MIB view “public”:
C3(su)->clear snmp view public 1.3.6.1

8-22

SNMP Configuration

Configuring SNMP Target Parameters

Configuring SNMP Target Parameters
Purpose
To review and configure SNMP target parameters. This controls where and under what
circumstances SNMP notifications will be sent. A target parameter entry can be bound to a target
IP address allowed to receive SNMP notification messages with the set snmp targetaddr
command (“set snmp targetaddr” on page 8‐27).

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show snmp targetparams

8-23

set snmp targetparams

8-24

clear snmp targetparams

8-25

show snmp targetparams
Use this command to display SNMP parameters used to generate a message to a target.

Syntax
show snmp targetparams [targetParams] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
targetParams

(Optional) Displays entries for a specific target parameter.

volatile | nonvolatile |
read‐only

(Optional) Displays target parameter entries for a specific storage
type.

Defaults
If targetParams is not specified, entries associated with all target parameters will be displayed.
If not specified, entries of all storage types will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SNMP target parameters information:
C3(su)->show snmp targetparams
--- SNMP TargetParams information --Target Parameter Name
= v1ExampleParams
Security Name
= public
Message Proc. Model
= SNMPv1
Security Level
= noAuthNoPriv
Storage type
= nonVolatile
Row status
= active

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-23

set snmp targetparams

Target Parameter Name
Security Name
Message Proc. Model
Security Level
Storage type
Row status

=
=
=
=
=
=

v2cExampleParams
public
SNMPv2c
noAuthNoPriv
nonVolatile
active

Target Parameter Name
Security Name
Message Proc. Model
Security Level
Storage type
Row status

=
=
=
=
=
=

v3ExampleParams
CharlieDChief
USM
authNoPriv
nonVolatile
active

Table 8‐8 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 8-8

show snmp targetparams Output Details
Output Field

What It Displays...

Target Parameter Name

Unique identifier for the parameter in the SNMP target parameters table.
Maximum length is 32 bytes.

Security Name

Security string definition.

Message Proc. Model

SNMP version.

Security Level

Type of security level (auth: security level is set to use authentication
protocol, noauth: security level is not set to use authentication protocol,
or privacy).

Storage type

Whether entry is stored in volatile, nonvolatile or read-only memory.

Row status

Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

set snmp targetparams
Use this command to set SNMP target parameters, a named set of security/authorization criteria
used to generate a message to a target.

Syntax
set snmp targetparams paramsname user user security-model {v1 | v2c | usm} messageprocessing {v1 | v2c | v3} [noauthentication | authentication | privacy] [volatile
| nonvolatile]

Parameters

8-24

paramsname

Specifies a name identifying parameters used to generate SNMP messages
to a particular target.

user user

Specifies an SNMPv1 or v2 community name or an SNMPv3 user name.
Maximum length is 32 bytes.

security‐model v1 |
v2c | usm

Specifies the SNMP security model applied to this target parameter as
version 1, 2c or 3 (usm).

message‐
processing v1 | v2c
| v3

Specifies the SNMP message processing model applied to this target
parameter as version 1, 2c or 3.

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp targetparams

noauthentication |
authentication |
privacy

(Optional) Specifies the SNMP security level applied to this target
parameter as no authentication, authentication (without privacy) or
privacy. Privacy specifies that messages sent on behalf of the user are
protected from disclosure.

volatile |
nonvolatile

(Optional) Specifies the storage type applied to this target parameter.

Defaults
None.
If not specified, security level will be set to noauthentication.
If not specified, storage type will be set to nonvolatile.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set SNMP target parameters named “v1ExampleParams” for a user
named “fred” using version 3 security model and message processing, and authentication:
C3(su)->set snmp targetparams v1ExampleParams user fred security-model usm
message-processing v3 authentication

clear snmp targetparams
Use this command to clear the SNMP target parameter configuration.

Syntax
clear snmp targetparams targetParams

Parameters
targetParams

Specifies the name of the parameter in the SNMP target parameters table
to be cleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear SNMP target parameters named “v1ExampleParams”:
C3(su)->clear snmp targetparams v1ExampleParams

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-25

Configuring SNMP Target Addresses

Configuring SNMP Target Addresses
Purpose
To review and configure SNMP target addresses which will receive SNMP notification messages.
An address configuration can be linked to optional SNMP transmit, or target, parameters (such as
timeout, retry count, and UDP port) set with the set snmp targetparams command (page 8‐24).

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show snmp targetaddr

8-26

set snmp targetaddr

8-27

clear snmp targetaddr

8-28

show snmp targetaddr
Use this command to display SNMP target address information.

Syntax
show snmp targetaddr [targetAddr] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
targetAddr

(Optional) Displays information for a specific target address name.

volatile | nonvolatile
| read‐only

(Optional) When target address is specified, displays target address
information for a specific storage type.

Defaults
If targetAddr is not specified, entries for all target address names will be displayed.
If not specified, entries of all storage types will be displayed for a target address.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SNMP target address information:
C3(su)->show snmp targetaddr
Target Address Name
= labmachine
Tag List
= v2cTrap
IP Address
= 10.2.3.116
UDP Port#
= 162
Target Mask
= 255.255.255.255
Timeout
= 1500
Retry count
= 4
Parameters
= v2cParams
Storage type
= nonVolatile

8-26

SNMP Configuration

set snmp targetaddr

Row status

= active

Table 8‐9 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 8-9

show snmp targetaddr Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Target Address Name

Unique identifier in the snmpTargetAddressTable.

Tag List

Tags a location to the target address as a place to send notifications.

IP Address

Target IP address.

UDP Port#

Number of the UDP port of the target host to use.

Target Mask

Target IP address mask.

Timeout

Timeout setting for the target address.

Retry count

Retry setting for the target address.

Parameters

Entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable.

Storage type

Whether entry is stored in volatile, nonvolatile or read-only memory.

Row status

Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

set snmp targetaddr
Use this command to configure an SNMP target address. The target address is a unique identifier
and a specific IP address that will receive SNMP notification messages and determine which
community strings will be accepted. This address configuration can be linked to optional SNMP
transmit parameters (such as timeout, retry count, and UDP port).

Syntax
set snmp targetaddr targetaddr ipaddr param param [udpport udpport] [mask mask]
[timeout timeout] [retries retries] [taglist taglist] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
targetaddr

Specifies a unique identifier to index the snmpTargetAddrTable.
Maximum length is 32 bytes.

ipaddr

Specifies the IP address of the target.

param param

Specifies an entry in the SNMP target parameters table, which is used
when generating a message to the target. Maximum length is 32 bytes.

udpport udpport

(Optional) Specifies which UDP port of the target host to use.

mask mask

(Optional) Specifies the IP mask of the target.

timeout timeout

(Optional) Specifies the maximum round trip time allowed to
communicate to this target address. This value is in .01 seconds and the
default is 1500 (15 seconds.)

retries retries

(Optional) Specifies the number of message retries allowed if a response is
not received. Default is 3.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-27

clear snmp targetaddr

taglist taglist

(Optional) Specifies a list of SNMP notify tag values. This tags a location
to the target address as a place to send notifications. List must be enclosed
in quotes and tag values must be separated by a space (for example,
“tag 1 tag 2”).

volatile |
nonvolatile

(Optional) Specifies temporary (default), or permanent storage for SNMP
entries.

Defaults
If not specified, udpport will be set to 162.
If not specified, mask will be set to 255.255.255.255
If not specified, timeout will be set to 1500.
If not specified, number of retries will be set to 3.
If taglist is not specified, none will be set.
If not specified, storage type will be nonvolatile.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to configure a trap notification called “TrapSink.” This trap notification
will be sent to the workstation 192.168.190.80 (which is target address “tr”). It will use security
and authorization criteria contained in a target parameters entry called “v2cExampleParams”. For
more information on configuring a basic SNMP trap, refer to “Creating a Basic SNMP Trap
Configuration” on page 8‐37:
C3(su)->set snmp targetaddr tr 192.168.190.80 param v2cExampleParams taglist
TrapSink

clear snmp targetaddr
Use this command to delete an SNMP target address entry.

Syntax
clear snmp targetaddr targetAddr

Parameters
targetAddr

Specifies the target address entry to delete.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

8-28

SNMP Configuration

Configuring SNMP Notification Parameters

Example
This example shows how to clear SNMP target address entry “tr”:
C3(su)->clear snmp targetaddr tr

Configuring SNMP Notification Parameters
About SNMP Notify Filters
Profiles indicating which targets should not receive SNMP notification messages are kept in the
NotifyFilter table. If this table is empty, meaning that no filtering is associated with any SNMP
target, then no filtering will take place. “Traps” or “informs” notifications will be sent to all
destinations in the SNMP targetAddrTable that have tags matching those found in the
NotifyTable.
When the NotifyFilter table contains profile entries, the SNMP agent will find any filter profile
name that corresponds to the target parameter name contained in an outgoing notification
message. It will then apply the appropriate subtree‐specific filter when generating notification
messages.

Purpose
To configure SNMP notification parameters and optional filters. Notifications are entities which
handle the generation of SNMP v1 and v2 “traps” or SNMP v3 “informs” messages to select
management targets. Optional notification filters identify which targets should not receive
notifications. For a sample SNMP trap configuration showing how SNMP notification parameters
are associated with security and authorization criteria (target parameters) and mapped to a
management target address, refer to “Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration” on page 8‐37.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show newaddrtrap

8-30

set newaddrtrap

8-30

show snmp notify

8-31

set snmp notify

8-32

clear snmp notify

8-33

show snmp notifyfilter

8-33

set snmp notifyfilter

8-34

clear snmp notifyfilter

8-35

show snmp notifyprofile

8-36

set snmp notifyprofile

8-36

clear snmp notifyprofile

8-37

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-29

show newaddrtrap

show newaddrtrap
Use this command to display the global and port‐specific status of the SNMP new MAC addresses
trap function.

Syntax
show newaddrtrap [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays the status of the new MAC addresses trap function
on specific ports.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, the status of the new MAC addresses trap function will be displayed
for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
By default, this function is disabled globally and per port.

Example
This example displays the New Address Trap state for Gigabit Ethernet ports 1 through 5 in
unit/slot 1.
C3(ro)->show newaddrtrap ge.1.1-5
New Address Traps Globally disabled
Port
--------ge.1.1
ge.1.2
ge.1.3
ge.1.4
ge.1.5

Enable State
-----------disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled

set newaddrtrap
Use this command to enable or disable SNMP trap messaging, globally or on one or more ports,
when new source MAC addresses are detected.

Syntax
set newaddrtrap [port-string] {enable | disable}

8-30

SNMP Configuration

show snmp notify

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Enable or disable the new MAC addresses trap function on
specific ports.

enable | disable

Enable or disable the new MAC addresses trap function. If entered
without the port‐string parameter, enables or disables the function
globally. When entered with the port‐string parameter, enables or
disables the function on specific ports.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, the trap function is set globally.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
This command enables and disables sending SNMP trap messages when a new source MAC
address is detected by a port. If the port is a CDP port, however, traps for new source MAC
addresses will not be sent.
The default mode is disabled globally and per port.

Example
This example enables the trap function globally and then on Gigabit Ethernet ports 1 through 5 in
unit/slot 1.
C3(rw)->set newaddrtrap enable
C3(rw)->set newaddrtrap ge.1.1-5 enable

show snmp notify
Use this command to display the SNMP notify configuration, which determines the management
targets that will receive SNMP notifications.

Syntax
show snmp notify [notify] [volatile | nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
notify

(Optional) Displays notify entries for a specific notify name.

volatile |
nonvolatile | read‐
only

(Optional) Displays notify entries for a specific storage type.

Defaults
If a notify name is not specified, all entries will be displayed.
If volatile, nonvolatile, or read‐only are not specified, all storage type entries will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-31

set snmp notify

Example
This example shows how to display the SNMP notify information:
C3(su)->show snmp notify
--- SNMP notifyTable information --Notify name
= 1
Notify Tag
= Console
Notify Type
= trap
Storage type
= nonVolatile
Row status
= active
Notify name
Notify Tag
Notify Type
Storage type
Row status

=
=
=
=
=

2
TrapSink
trap
nonVolatile
active

Table 8‐10 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 8-10

show snmp notify Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Notify name

A unique identifier used to index the SNMP notify table.

Notify Tag

Name of the entry in the SNMP notify table.

Notify Type

Type of notification: SNMPv1 or v2 trap or SNMPv3 InformRequest
message.

Storage type

Whether access entry is stored in volatile, nonvolatile, or read-only
memory.

Row status

Status of this entry: active, notInService, or notReady.

set snmp notify
Use this command to set the SNMP notify configuration. This creates an entry in the SNMP notify
table, which is used to select management targets who should receive notification messages. This
command’s tag parameter can be used to bind each entry to a target address using the set snmp
targetaddr command (“set snmp targetaddr” on page 8‐27).

Syntax
set snmp notify notify tag tag [trap | inform] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters
notify

Specifies an SNMP notify name.

tag tag

Specifies an SNMP notify tag. This binds the notify name to the SNMP
target address table.

trap | inform

(Optional) Specifies SNMPv1 or v2 Trap messages (default) or SNMP v3
InformRequest messages.

volatile |
nonvolatile

(Optional) Specifies temporary (default), or permanent storage for SNMP
entries.

Defaults
If not specified, message type will be set to trap.
8-32

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp notify

If not specified, storage type will be set to nonvolatile.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set an SNMP notify configuration with a notify name of “hello” and a
notify tag of “world”. Notifications will be sent as trap messages and storage type will
automatically default to permanent:
C3(su)->set snmp notify hello tag world trap

clear snmp notify
Use this command to clear an SNMP notify configuration.

Syntax
clear snmp notify notify

Parameters
notify

Specifies an SNMP notify name to clear.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the SNMP notify configuration for “hello”:
C3(su)->clear snmp notify hello

show snmp notifyfilter
Use this command to display SNMP notify filter information, identifying which profiles will not
receive SNMP notifications.

Syntax
show snmp notifyfilter [profile] [subtree oid-or-mibobject] [volatile |
nonvolatile | read-only]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-33

set snmp notifyfilter

Parameters
profile

(Optional) Displays a specific notify filter.

subtree oid‐or‐
mibobject

(Optional) Displays a notify filter within a specific subtree.

volatile |
nonvolatile | read‐
only

(Optional) Displays notify filter entries of a specific storage type.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all notify filter information will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
See “About SNMP Notify Filters” on page 8‐29 for more information about notify filters.

Example
This example shows how to display SNMP notify filter information. In this case, the notify profile
“pilot1” in subtree 1.3.6 will not receive SNMP notification messages:
C3(su)->show snmp notifyfilter
--- SNMP notifyFilter information --Profile
= pilot1
Subtree
= 1.3.6
Filter type
= included
Storage type
= nonVolatile
Row status
= active

set snmp notifyfilter
Use this command to create an SNMP notify filter configuration. This identifies which
management targets should NOT receive notification messages, which is useful for fine‐tuning the
amount of SNMP traffic generated.

Syntax
set snmp notifyfilter profile subtree oid-or-mibobject [mask mask] [included |
excluded] [volatile | nonvolatile]

Parameters

8-34

profile

Specifies an SNMP filter notify name.

subtree oid‐or‐
mibobject

Specifies a MIB subtree ID target for the filter.

mask mask

(Optional) Applies a subtree mask.

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp notifyfilter

included |
excluded

(Optional) Specifies that subtree is included or excluded.

volatile |
nonvolatile

(Optional) Specifies a storage type.

Defaults
If not specified, mask is not set.
If not specified, subtree will be included.
If storage type is not specified, nonvolatile (permanent) will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
See “About SNMP Notify Filters” on page 8‐29 for more information about notify filters.

Example
This example shows how to create an SNMP notify filter called “pilot1” with a MIB subtree ID of
1.3.6:
C3(su)->set snmp notifyfilter pilot1 subtree 1.3.6

clear snmp notifyfilter
Use this command to delete an SNMP notify filter configuration.

Syntax
clear snmp notifyfilter profile subtree oid-or-mibobject

Parameters
profile

Specifies an SNMP filter notify name to delete.

subtree oid‐or‐
mibobject

Specifies a MIB subtree ID containing the filter to be deleted.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to delete the SNMP notify filter “pilot1”:
C3(su)->clear snmp notifyfilter pilot1 subtree 1.3.6

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-35

show snmp notifyprofile

show snmp notifyprofile
Use this command to display SNMP notify profile information. This associates target parameters
to an SNMP notify filter to determine who should not receive SNMP notifications.

Syntax
show snmp notifyprofile [profile] [targetparam targetparam] [volatile |
nonvolatile | read-only]

Parameters
profile

(Optional) Displays a specific notify profile.

targetparam
targetparam

(Optional) Displays entries for a specific target parameter.

volatile |
nonvolatile | read‐
only

(Optional) Displays notify filter entries of a specific storage type.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all notify profile information will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SNMP notify information for the profile named “area51”:
C3(su)->show snmp notifyprofile area51
--- SNMP notifyProfile information --Notify Profile = area51
TargetParam
= v3ExampleParams
Storage type
= nonVolatile
Row status
= active

set snmp notifyprofile
Use this command to create an SNMP notify filter profile configuration. This associates a
notification filter, created with the set snmp notifyfilter command (“set snmp notifyfilter” on
page 8‐34), to a set of SNMP target parameters to determine which management targets should
not receive SNMP notifications.

Syntax
set snmp notifyprofile profile targetparam targetparam [volatile | nonvolatile]

8-36

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp notifyprofile

Parameters
profile

Specifies an SNMP filter notify name.

targetparam
targetparam

Specifies an associated entry in the SNMP Target Params Table.

volatile |
nonvolatile

(Optional) Specifies a storage type.

Defaults
If storage type is not specified, nonvolatile (permanent) will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to create an SNMP notify profile named area51 and associate a target
parameters entry.
C3(su)->set snmp notifyprofile area51 targetparam v3ExampleParams

clear snmp notifyprofile
Use this command to delete an SNMP notify profile configuration.

Syntax
clear snmp notifyprofile profile targetparam targetparam

Parameters
profile

Specifies an SNMP filter notify name to delete.

targetparam
targetparam

Specifies an associated entry in the snmpTargetParamsTable.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to delete SNMP notify profile “area51”:
C3(su)->clear snmp notifyprofile area51 targetparam v3ExampleParams

Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration
Traps are notification messages sent by an SNMPv1 or v2 agent to a network management station,
a console, or a terminal to indicate the occurrence of a significant event, such as when a port or
device goes up or down, when there are authentication failures, and when power supply errors

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-37

Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration

occur. The following configuration example shows how to use CLI commands to associate SNMP
notification parameters with security and authorization criteria (target parameters), and map the
parameters to a management target address.
Note: This example illustrates how to configure an SNMPv2 trap notification. Creating an
SNMPv1 or v3 Trap, or an SNMPv3 Inform notification would require using the same commands
with different parameters, where appropriate. Always ensure that v1/v2 communities or v3 users
used for generating traps or informs are pre-configured with enough privileges to access
corresponding MIBs.

Complete an SNMPv2 trap configuration on a SecureStack C3 device as follows:
1.

Create a community name that will act as an SNMP user password.

2.

Create an SNMP target parameters entry to associate security and authorization criteria to the
users in the community created in Step 1.

3.

Verify if any applicable SNMP notification entries exist, or create a new one. You will use this
entry to send SNMP notification messages to the appropriate management targets created in
Step 2.

4.

Create a target address entry to bind a management IP address to:
–

The notification entry and tag name created in Step 3 and

–

The target parameters entry created in Step 2.

Table 8‐11 shows the commands used to complete an SNMPv2 trap configuration on a
SecureStack C3 device.
Table 8-11

Basic SNMP Trap Configuration

To do this...

Use these commands...

Create a community name.

set snmp community

Create an SNMP target parameters entry.

set snmp targetparams

Verify if any applicable SNMP notification
entries exist.

show snmp notify

Create a new notification entry.

set snmp notify

Create a target address entry.

set snmp targetaddr

Example
This example shows how to:
•

Create an SNMP community called mgmt.

•

Configure a trap notification called TrapSink.

This trap notification will be sent with the community name mgmt to the workstation
192.168.190.80 (which is target address tr). It will use security and authorization criteria contained
in a target parameters entry called v2cExampleParams.
C3(su)->set snmp community mgmt
C3(su)->set snmp targetparams v2cExampleParams user mgmt
security-model v2c message-processing v2c
C3(su)->set snmp notify entry1 tag TrapSink
C3(su)->set snmp targetaddr tr 192.168.190.80 param v2cExampleParams taglist
TrapSink

8-38

SNMP Configuration

Configuring the SNMP Management Interface

How SNMP Will Use This Configuration
In order to send a trap/notification requested by a MIB code, the SNMP agent requires the
equivalent of a trap “door”, a “key” to unlock the door, and a “procedure” for crossing the
doorstep. To determine if all these elements are in place, the SNMP agent proceeds as follows:
1.

Determines if the “keys” for trap “doors” do exist. In the example configuration above, the
key that SNMP is looking for is the notification entry created with the set snmp notify
command which, in this case, is a key labeled entry1.

2.

Searches for the doors matching such a key. For example, the parameters set for the entry1 key
shows that it opens only the door TrapSink.

3.

Verifies that the specified door TrapSink is, in fact, available. In this case it was built using the
set snmp targetaddr command. This command also specifies that this door leads to the
management station 192.168.190.80, and the “procedure” (targetparams) to cross the doorstep
is called v2ExampleParams.

4.

Verifies that the v2ExampleParams description of how to step through the door is, in fact,
there. The agent checks targetparams entries and determines this description was made with
the set snmp targetparams command, which tells exactly which SNMP protocol to use and
what community name to provide. In this case, the community name is mgmt.

5.

Verifies that the mgmt community name is available. In this case, it has been configured using
the set snmp community command.

6.

Sends the trap notification message.

Configuring the SNMP Management Interface
Purpose
To configure the source IP address used by the SNMP agent when generating SNMP traps.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show snmp interface

8-39

set snmp interface

8-40

clear snmp interface

8-41

show snmp interface
Use this command to display the interface used for the source IP address of the SNMP agent when
generating SNMP traps.

Syntax
show snmp interface

Parameters
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-39

set snmp interface

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐only.

Example
This example displays the output of this command. In this case, the IP address assigned to
loopback interface 1 will be used as the source IP address of the SNMP agent.
C3(rw)->show snmp interface
loopback 1

192.168.10.1

set snmp interface
Use this command to specify the interface used for the source IP address of the SNMP agent when
generating SNMP traps.

Syntax
set snmp interface {loopback loop-ID | vlan vlan-ID}

Parameters
loopback loop‐ID

Specifies the loopback interface to be used. The value of loop‐ID can
range from 0 to 7.

vlan vlan‐ID

Specifies the VLAN interface to be used. The value of vlan‐ID can range
from 1 to 4093.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command allows you to configure the source IP address used by the SNMP agent when
generating SNMP traps. Any of the management interfaces, including VLAN routing interfaces,
can be configured as the source IP address used in packets generated by the SNMP agent.
An interface must have an IP address assigned to it before it can be set by this command.
If no interface is specified, then the IP address of the Host interface will be used.
If a non‐loopback interface is configured with this command, application packet egress is
restricted to that interface if the server can be reached from that interface. Otherwise, the packets
are transmitted over the first available route. Packets from the application server are received on
the configured interface.
If a loopback interface is configured, and there are multiple paths to the application server, the
outgoing interface (gateway) is determined based on the best route lookup. Packets from the
application server are then received on the sending interface. If route redundancy is required,
therefore, a loopback interface should be configured.

8-40

SNMP Configuration

clear snmp interface

Example
This example configures an IP address on VLAN interface 100 and then sets that interface as the
SNMP agent source IP address.
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#exit
C3(rw)->router(Config)#exit
C3(rw)->router#exit
C3(rw)->router>exit
C3(rw)->set snmp interface vlan 100

C3(rw)->show snmp interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

clear snmp interface
Use this command to clear the interface used for the source IP address of the SNMP agent back to
the default of the Host interface.

Syntax
clear snmp interface

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This command returns the interface used for the source IP address of the SNMP agent back to the
default of the Host interface.
C3(rw)->show snmp interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

C3(rw)->clear snmp interface
C3(rw)->

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

8-41

clear snmp interface

8-42

SNMP Configuration

9
Spanning Tree Configuration
This chapter describes the Spanning Tree Configuration set of commands and how to use them.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Spanning Tree Configuration Summary

9-1

Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Parameters

9-3

Configuring Spanning Tree Port Parameters

9-34

Configuring Spanning Tree Loop Protect Parameters

9-42

Caution: Spanning Tree configuration should be performed only by personnel who are very
knowledgeable about Spanning Trees and the configuration of the Spanning Tree Algorithm.
Otherwise, the proper operation of the network could be at risk.

Spanning Tree Configuration Summary
Note: An Enterasys Networks Feature Guide document containing an in-depth discussion of
Spanning Tree configuration is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

Overview: Single, Rapid, and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocols
The IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) resolves the problems of physical loops in a
network by establishing one primary path between any two devices in a network. Any duplicate
paths are barred from use and become standby or blocked paths until the original path fails, at
which point they can be brought into service.

RSTP
The IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Protocol (RSTP), an evolution of 802.1D, can achieve much
faster convergence than legacy STP in a properly configured network. RSTP significantly reduces
the time to reconfigure the network’s active topology when physical topology or configuration
parameter changes occur. It selects one switch as the root of a Spanning Tree‐connected active
topology and assigns port roles to individual ports on the switch, depending on whether that port
is part of the active topology.
RSTP provides rapid connectivity following the failure of a switch, switch port, or a LAN. A new
root port and the designated port on the other side of the bridge transition to forwarding through
an explicit handshake between them. By default, user ports are configured to rapidly transition to
forwarding in RSTP.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-1

Spanning Tree Configuration Summary

MSTP
The IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) builds upon 802.1D and RSTP by
optimizing utilization of redundant links between switches in a network. When redundant links
exist between a pair of switches running single STP, one link is forwarding while the others are
blocking for all traffic flowing between the two switches. The blocking links are effectively used
only if the forwarding link goes down. MSTP assigns each VLAN present on the network to a
particular Spanning Tree instance, allowing each switch port to be in a distinct state for each such
instance: blocking for one Spanning Tree while forwarding for another. Thus, traffic associated
with one set of VLANs can traverse a particular inter‐switch link, while traffic associated with
another set of VLANs can be blocked on that link. If VLANs are assigned to Spanning Trees
wisely, no inter‐switch link will be completely idle, maximizing network utilization.
For details on creating Spanning Tree instances, refer to “set spantree msti” on page 9‐12.
For details on mapping Spanning Tree instances to VLANs, refer to “set spantree mstmap” on
page 9‐14.
Note: MSTP and RSTP are fully compatible and interoperable with each other and with legacy
STP 802.1D.

Spanning Tree Features
The SecureStack C3 device meets the requirements of the Spanning Tree Protocols by performing
the following functions:
•

Creating a single Spanning Tree from any arrangement of switching or bridging elements.

•

Compensating automatically for the failure, removal, or addition of any device in an active
data path.

•

Achieving port changes in short time intervals, which establishes a stable active topology
quickly with minimal network disturbance.

•

Using a minimum amount of communications bandwidth to accomplish the operation of the
Spanning Tree Protocol.

•

Reconfiguring the active topology in a manner that is transparent to stations transmitting and
receiving data packets.

•

Managing the topology in a consistent and reproducible manner through the use of Spanning
Tree Protocol parameters.

Note: The term “bridge” is used as an equivalent to the term “switch” or “device” in this document.

Loop Protect
The Loop Protect feature prevents or short circuits loop formation in a network with redundant
paths by requiring ports to receive type 2 BPDUs (RSTP/MSTP) on point‐to‐point inter‐switch
links (ISLs) before their states are allowed to become forwarding. Further, if a BPDU timeout
occurs on a port, its state becomes listening until a BPDU is received.
Both upstream and downstream facing ports are protected. When a root or alternate port loses its
path to the root bridge due to a message age expiration it takes on the role of designated port. It
will not forward traffic until a BPDU is received. When a port is intended to be the designated port
in an ISL it constantly proposes and will not forward until a BPDU is received, and will revert to

9-2

Spanning Tree Configuration

Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Parameters

listening if it fails to get a response. This protects against misconfiguration and protocol failure by
the connected bridge.
The Disputed BPDU mechanism protects against looping in situations where there is one way
communication. A disputed BPDU is one in which the flags field indicates a designated role and
learning and the priority vector is worse than that already held by the port. If a disputed BPDU is
received, the port is forced to the listening state. When an inferior designated BPDU with the
learning bit set is received on a designated port, its state is set to discarding to prevent loop
formation. Note that the Dispute mechanism is always active regardless of the configuration
setting of Loop Protection.
Loop Protect operates as a per port, per MST instance feature. It should be set on inter‐switch
links. It is comprised of several related functions:
•

Control of port forwarding state based on reception of agreement BPDUs

•

Control of port forwarding state based on reception of disputed BPDUs

•

Communicating port non‐forwarding status through traps and syslog messages

•

Disabling a port based on frequency of failure events

Port forwarding state in the designated port is gated by a timer that is set upon BPDU reception. It
is analogous to the rcvdInfoWhile timer the port uses when receiving root information in the root/
alternate/backup role.
There are two operational modes for Loop Protect on a port. If the port is connected to a device
known to implement Loop Protect, it uses full functional mode. Otherwise the port operates in
limited functional mode.
Connection to a Loop Protect switch guarantees that the alternate agreement mechanism is
implemented. This means the designated port can rely on receiving a response to its proposal
regardless of the role of the connected port, which has two important implications. First, the
designated port connected to a non‐root port may transition to forwarding. Second, there is no
ambiguity when a timeout happens; a Loop Protect event has occurred.
In full functional mode, when a type 2 BPDU is received and the port is designated and point‐to‐
point, the timer is set to 3 times helloTime. In limited functional mode there is the additional
requirement that the flags field indicate a root role. If the port is a boundary port the MSTIs for
that port follow the CIST, that is, the MSTI port timers are set according to the CIST port timer. If
the port is internal to the region then the MSTI port timers are set independently using the
particular MSTI message.
Message age expiration and the expiration of the Loop Protect timer are both Loop Protect events.
A notice level syslog message is produced for each such event. Traps may be configured to report
these events as well. A syslog message and trap may be configured for disputed BPDUs.
It is also configurable to force the locking of a SID/port for the occurrence of one or more events.
When the configured number of events happen within a given window of time, the port is forced
into blocking and held there until it is manually unlocked via management.

Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Parameters
Purpose
To display and set Spanning Tree bridge parameters, including device priorities, hello time,
maximum wait time, forward delay, path cost, and topology change trap suppression.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-3

Configuring Spanning Tree Bridge Parameters

Commands
For information about...

9-4

Refer to page...

show spantree stats

9-5

set spantree

9-7

show spantree version

9-7

set spantree version

9-8

clear spantree version

9-9

show spantree bpdu-forwarding

9-9

set spantree bpdu-forwarding

9-10

show spantree bridgeprioritymode

9-10

set spantree bridgeprioritymode

9-11

clear spantree bridgeprioritymode

9-11

show spantree mstilist

9-12

set spantree msti

9-12

clear spantree msti

9-13

show spantree mstmap

9-13

set spantree mstmap

9-14

clear spantree mstmap

9-14

show spantree vlanlist

9-15

show spantree mstcfgid

9-15

set spantree mstcfgid

9-16

clear spantree mstcfgid

9-16

set spantree priority

9-17

clear spantree priority

9-17

set spantree hello

9-18

clear spantree hello

9-18

set spantree maxage

9-19

clear spantree maxage

9-20

set spantree fwddelay

9-20

clear spantree fwddelay

9-21

show spantree backuproot

9-21

set spantree backuproot

9-22

clear spantree backuproot

9-22

show spantree tctrapsuppress

9-23

set spantree tctrapsuppress

9-23

clear spantree tctrapsuppress

9-24

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree stats

For information about...

Refer to page...

set spantree protomigration

9-24

show spantree spanguard

9-25

set spantree spanguard

9-25

clear spantree spanguard

9-26

show spantree spanguardtimeout

9-27

set spantree spanguardtimeout

9-27

clear spantree spanguardtimeout

9-28

show spantree spanguardlock

9-28

clear/set spantree spanguardlock

9-29

show spantree spanguardtrapenable

9-29

set spanstree spanguardtrapenable

9-30

clear spanstree spanguardtrapenable

9-30

show spantree legacypathcost

9-31

set spantree legacypathcost

9-31

clear spantree legacypathcost

9-32

show spantree autoedge

9-32

set spantree autoedge

9-32

clear spantree autoedge

9-33

show spantree stats
Use this command to display Spanning Tree information for one or more ports.

Syntax
show spantree stats [port port-string] [sid sid] [active]

Parameters
port port‐string

(Optional) Displays information for the specified port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

sid sid

(Optional) Displays information for a specific Spanning Tree identifier. If
not specified, SID 0 is assumed.

active

(Optional) Displays information for ports that have received STP BPDUs
since boot.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, Spanning Tree information for all ports will be displayed.
If sid is not specified, information for Spanning Tree 0 will be displayed.
If active is not specified information for all ports will be displayed regardless of whether or not
they have received BPDUs.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-5

show spantree stats

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the device’s Spanning Tree configuration:
C3(su)->show spantree stats
Spanning tree status
Spanning tree instance
Designated Root MacAddr
Designated Root Priority
Designated Root Cost
Designated Root Port
Root Max Age
Root Hello Time
Root Forward Delay
Bridge ID MAC Address
Bridge ID Priority
Bridge Max Age
Bridge Hello Time
Bridge Forward Delay
Topology Change Count
Time Since Top Change
Max Hops

-

enabled
0
00-e0-63-9d-c1-c8
0
10000
lag.0.1
20 sec
2 sec
15 sec
00-01-f4-da-5e-3d
32768
20 sec
2 sec
15 sec
7
00 days 03:19:15
20

Table 9‐1 shows a detailed explanation of command output.
Table 9-1

9-6

show spantree Output Details

Output

What It Displays...

Spanning tree instance

Spanning Tree ID.

Spanning tree status

Whether Spanning Tree is enabled or disabled.

Designated Root MacAddr

MAC address of the designated Spanning Tree root bridge.

Designated Root Port

Port through which the root bridge can be reached.

Designated Root Priority

Priority of the designated root bridge.

Designated Root Cost

Total path cost to reach the root.

Root Max Age

Amount of time (in seconds) a BPDU packet should be considered valid.

Root Hello Time

Interval (in seconds) at which the root device sends BPDU (Bridge Protocol
Data Unit) packets.

Root Forward Delay

Amount of time (in seconds) the root device spends in listening or learning
mode.

Bridge ID MAC Address

Unique bridge MAC address, recognized by all bridges in the network.

Bridge ID Priority

Bridge priority, which is a default value, or is assigned using the set
spantree priority command. For details, refer to “set spantree priority” on
page 9-17.

Bridge Max Age

Maximum time (in seconds) the bridge can wait without receiving a
configuration message (bridge “hello”) before attempting to reconfigure.
This is a default value, or is assigned using the set spantree maxage
command. For details, refer to “set spantree maxage” on page 9-19.

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree

Table 9-1

show spantree Output Details (Continued)

Output

What It Displays...

Bridge Hello Time

Amount of time (in seconds) the bridge sends BPDUs. This is a default
value, or is assigned using the set spantree hello command. For details,
refer to “set spantree hello” on page 9-18.

Bridge Forward Delay

Amount of time (in seconds) the bridge spends in listening or learning
mode. This is a default value, or is assigned using the set spantree
fwddelay command. For details, refer to “set spantree fwddelay” on
page 9-20.

Topology Change Count

Number of times topology has changed on the bridge.

Time Since Top Change

Amount of time (in days, hours, minutes and seconds) since the last
topology change.

Max Hops

Maximum number of hops information for a particular Spanning Tree
instance may traverse (via relay of BPDUs within the applicable MST
region) before being discarded.

set spantree
Use this command to globally enable or disable the Spanning Tree protocol on the switch.

Syntax
set spantree {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable | enable

Globally disables or enables Spanning Tree.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to disable Spanning Tree on the device:
C3(su)->set spantree disable

show spantree version
Use this command to display the current version of the Spanning Tree protocol running on the
device.

Syntax
show spantree version

Parameters
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-7

set spantree version

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display Spanning Tree version information for the device:
C3(su)->show spantree version
Force Version is mstp

set spantree version
Use this command to set the version of the Spanning Tree protocol to MSTP (Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol), RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) or to STP 802.1D‐compatible.

Syntax
set spantree version {mstp | stpcompatible | rstp}

Parameters
mstp

Sets the version to STP 802.1s‐compatible.

stpcompatible

Sets the version to STP 802.1D‐compatible.

rstp

Sets the version to 802.1w‐compatible.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
In most networks, Spanning Tree version should not be changed from its default setting of mstp
(Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol) mode. MSTP mode is fully compatible and interoperable with
legacy STP 802.1D and Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) bridges. Setting the version to stpcompatible
mode will cause the bridge to transmit only 802.1D BPDUs, and will prevent non‐edge ports from
rapidly transitioning to forwarding state.

Example
This example shows how to globally change the Spanning Tree version from the default of MSTP
to RSTP:
C3(su)->set spantree version rstp

9-8

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree version

clear spantree version
Use this command to reset the Spanning Tree version to MSTP mode.

Syntax
clear spantree version

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the Spanning Tree version:
C3(su)->clear spantree version

show spantree bpdu-forwarding
Use this command to display the Spanning Tree BPDU forwarding mode.

Syntax
show spantree bpdu-forwarding

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the Spanning Tree BPDU forwarding mode:
C3(su)->show spantree bpdu-forwarding
BPDU forwarding is disabled.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-9

set spantree bpdu-forwarding

set spantree bpdu-forwarding
Use this command to enable or disable Spanning Tree BPDU forwarding. By default BPDU
forwarding is disabled.

Syntax
set spantree bpdu-forwarding {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable | enable

Disables or enables BPDU forwarding;.

Defaults
By default BPDU forwarding is disabled.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The Spanning Tree protocol must be disabled (set spantree disable) for this feature to take effect.

Example
This example shows how to enable BPDU forwarding:
C3(rw)-> set spantree bpdu-forwarding enable

show spantree bridgeprioritymode
Use this command to display the Spanning Tree bridge priority mode setting.

Syntax
show spantree bridgeprioritymode

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the Spanning Tree bridge priority mode setting:
C3(rw)->show spantree bridgeprioritymode
Bridge Priority Mode is set to IEEE802.1t mode.

9-10

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree bridgeprioritymode

set spantree bridgeprioritymode
Use this command to set the Spanning Tree bridge priority mode to 802.1D (legacy) or 802.1t.

Syntax
set spantree bridgeprioritymode {8021d | 8021t}

Parameters
8021d

Sets the bridge priority mode to use 802.1D (legacy) values, which are 0 ‐
65535.

8021t

Sets the bridge priority mode to use 802.1t values, which are 0 to 61440, in
increments of 4096. Values will automatically be rounded up or down,
depending on the 802.1t value to which the entered value is closest.
This is the default bridge priority mode.

Defaults
None

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The mode affects the range of priority values used to determine which device is selected as the
Spanning Tree root as described in set spantree priority (“set spantree priority” on page 9‐17). The
default for the switch is to use 802.1t bridge priority mode.

Example
This example shows how to set the bridge priority mode to 802.1D:
C3(rw)->set spantree bridgeprioritymode 8021d

clear spantree bridgeprioritymode
Use this command to reset the Spanning Tree bridge priority mode to the default setting of 802.1t.

Syntax
clear spantree bridgeprioritymode

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-11

show spantree mstilist

Example
This example shows how to reset the bridge priority mode to 802.1t:
C3(rw)->clear spantree bridgeprioritymode

show spantree mstilist
Use this command to display a list of Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) instances configured on the
device.

Syntax
show spantree mstilist

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display a list of MST instances. In this case, SID 2 has been configured:
C3(su)->show spantree mstilist
Configured Multiple Spanning Tree instances:
2

set spantree msti
Use this command to create or delete a Multiple Spanning Tree instance.

Syntax
set spantree msti sid sid {create | delete}

Parameters
sid sid

Sets the Multiple Spanning Tree ID. Valid values are 1 ‐ 4094.
SecureStack C3 devices will support up to 4 MST instances.

create | delete

Creates or deletes an MST instance.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

9-12

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree msti

Example
This example shows how to create an MST instance 2:
C3(su)->set spantree msti sid 2 create

clear spantree msti
Use this command to delete one or more Multiple Spanning Tree instances.

Syntax
clear spantree msti [sid sid]

Parameters
sid sid

(Optional) Deletes a specific multiple Spanning Tree ID.

Defaults
If sid is not specified, all MST instances will be cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to delete all MST instances:
C3(su)->clear spantree msti

show spantree mstmap
Use this command to display the mapping of a filtering database ID (FID) to a Spanning Trees.
Since VLANs are mapped to FIDs, this shows to which SID a VLAN is mapped.

Syntax
show spantree mstmap [fid fid]

Parameters
fid fid

(Optional) Displays information for specific FIDs.

Defaults
If fid is not specified, information for all assigned FIDs will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SID to FID mapping information for FID 1. In this case, no
new mappings have been configured:
C3(su)->show spantree mstmap fid 1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-13

set spantree mstmap

FID:
1

SID:
0

set spantree mstmap
Use this command to map one or more filtering database IDs (FIDs) to a SID. Since VLANs are
mapped to FIDs, this essentially maps one or more VLAN IDs to a Spanning Tree (SID).
Note: Since any MST maps that are associated with GVRP-generated VLANs will be removed from
the configuration if GVRP communication is lost, it is recommended that you only create MST maps
on statically-created VLANs.

Syntax
set spantree mstmap fid [sid sid]

Parameters
fid

Specifies one or more FIDs to assign to the MST. Valid values are 1 ‐ 4093,
and must correspond to a VLAN ID created using the set vlan command.

sid sid

(Optional) Specifies a Multiple Spanning Tree ID. Valid values are 1 ‐ 4094,
and must correspond to a SID created using the set msti command.

Defaults
If sid is not specified, FID(s) will be mapped to Spanning Tree 0.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to map FID 3 to SID 2:
C3(su)->set spantree mstmap 3 sid 2

clear spantree mstmap
Use this command to map a FID back to SID 0.

Syntax
clear spantree mstmap fid

Parameters
fid

Specifies one or more FIDs to reset to 0.

Defaults
If fid is not specified, all SID to FID mappings will be reset.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

9-14

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree vlanlist

Example
This example shows how to map FID 2 back to SID 0:
C3(su)->clear spantree mstmap 2

show spantree vlanlist
Use this command to display the Spanning Tree ID(s) assigned to one or more VLANs.

Syntax
show spantree vlanlist [vlan-list]

Parameters
vlan‐list

(Optional) Displays SIDs assigned to specific VLAN(s).

Defaults
If not specified, SID assignment will be displayed for all VLANs.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the SIDs mapped to VLAN 1. In this case, SIDs 2, 16 and 42
are mapped to VLAN 1. For this information to display, the SID instance must be created using the
set spantree msti command as described in “set spantree msti” on page 9‐12, and the FIDs must
be mapped to SID 1 using the set spantree mstmap command as described in “set spantree
mstmap” on page 9‐14:
C3(su)->show spantree vlanlist 1
The following SIDS are assigned to VLAN 1: 2 16 42

show spantree mstcfgid
Use this command to display the MST configuration identifier elements, including format selector,
configuration name, revision level, and configuration digest.

Syntax
show spantree mstcfgid

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-15

set spantree mstcfgid

Example
This example shows how to display the MST configuration identifier elements. In this case, the
default revision level of 0, and the default configuration name (a string representing the bridge
MAC address) have not been changed. For information on using the set spantree mstcfgid
command to change these settings, refer to “set spantree mstcfgid” on page 9‐16:
C3(su)->show spantree mstcfgid
MST Configuration Identifier:
Format Selector: 0
Configuration Name: 00:01:f4:89:51:94
Revision Level: 0
Configuration Digest: ac:36:17:7f:50:28:3c:d4:b8:38:21:d8:ab:26:de:62

set spantree mstcfgid
Use this command to set the MST configuration name and/or revision level.

Syntax
set spantree mstcfgid {cfgname name | rev level}

Parameters
cfgname name

Specifies an MST configuration name.

rev level

Specifies an MST revision level. Valid values are 0 ‐ 65535.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the MST configuration name to “mstconfig”:
C3(su)->set spantree mstconfigid cfgname mstconfig

clear spantree mstcfgid
Use this command to reset the MST revision level to a default value of 0, and the configuration
name to a default string representing the bridge MAC address.

Syntax
clear spantree mstcfgid

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

9-16

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree priority

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the MST configuration identifier elements to default values:
C3(su)->clear spantree mstcfgid

set spantree priority
Use this command to set the device’s Spanning Tree priority.

Syntax
set spantree priority priority [sid]

Parameters
priority

Specifies the priority of the bridge. Valid values are from 0 to 61440 (in
increments of 4096), with 0 indicating highest priority and 61440
lowest priority.

sid

(Optional) Sets the priority on a specific Spanning Tree. Valid values
are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Defaults
If sid is not specified, priority will be set on Spanning Tree 0.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The device with the highest priority (lowest numerical value) becomes the Spanning Tree root
device. If all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then
become the root device. Depending on the bridge priority mode (set with the set spantree
bridgeprioritymode command described in “set spantree bridgeprioritymode” on page 9‐11,
some priority values may be rounded up or down.

Example
This example shows how to set the bridge priority to 4096 on SID 1:
C3(su)->set spantree priority 4096 1

clear spantree priority
Use this command to reset the Spanning Tree priority to the default value of 32768.

Syntax
clear spantree priority [sid]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-17

set spantree hello

Parameters
sid

(Optional) Resets the priority on a specific Spanning Tree. Valid values
are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Defaults
If sid is not specified, priority will be reset on Spanning Tree 0.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the bridge priority on SID 1:
C3(su)->clear spantree priority 1

set spantree hello
Use this command to set the device’s Spanning Tree hello time, This is the time interval (in
seconds) the device will transmit BPDUs indicating it is active.

Syntax
set spantree hello interval

Parameters
interval

Specifies the number of seconds the system waits before broadcasting a
bridge hello message (a multicast message indicating that the system is
active). Valid values are 1 ‐ 10.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to globally set the Spanning Tree hello time to 10 seconds:
C3(su)->set spantree hello 10

clear spantree hello
Use this command to reset the Spanning Tree hello time to the default value of 2 seconds.

Syntax
clear spantree hello

9-18

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree maxage

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to globally reset the Spanning Tree hello time:
C3(su)->clear spantree hello

set spantree maxage
Use this command to set the bridge maximum aging time.

Syntax
set spantree maxage agingtime

Parameters
agingtime

Specifies the maximum number of seconds that the system retains the
information received from other bridges through STP. Valid values are 6 ‐
40.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The bridge maximum aging time is the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without
receiving a configuration message (bridge “hello”) before attempting to reconfigure. All device
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals.
Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last configuration message becomes the
designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among
the device ports attached to the network.

Example
This example shows how to set the maximum aging time to 25 seconds:
C3(su)->set spantree maxage 25

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-19

clear spantree maxage

clear spantree maxage
Use this command to reset the maximum aging time for a Spanning Tree to the default value of 20
seconds.

Syntax
clear spantree maxage

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to globally reset the maximum aging time:
C3(su)->clear spantree maxage

set spantree fwddelay
Use this command to set the Spanning Tree forward delay.

Syntax
set spantree fwddelay delay

Parameters
delay

Specifies the number of seconds for the bridge forward delay. Valid values
are 4 ‐ 30.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The forward delay is the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before changing
states (i.e., listening to learning to forwarding). This delay is required because every device must
receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each
port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state;
otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

Example
This example shows how to globally set the bridge forward delay to 16 seconds:
9-20

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree fwddelay

C3(su)->set spantree fwddelay 16

clear spantree fwddelay
Use this command to reset the Spanning Tree forward delay to the default setting of 15 seconds.

Syntax
clear spantree fwddelay

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to globally reset the bridge forward delay:
C3(su)->clear spantree fwddelay

show spantree backuproot
Use this command to display the backup root status for an MST instance.

Syntax
show spantree backuproot [sid]

Parameters
sid

(Optional) Display backup root status for a specific Spanning Tree
identifier. Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Defaults
If a SID is not specified, then status will be shown for Spanning Tree instance 0.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the status of the backup root function on SID 0:
C3(rw)->show spantree backuproot
Backup root is set to disable on sid 0

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-21

set spantree backuproot

set spantree backuproot
Use this command to enable or disable the Spanning Tree backup root function on the switch.

Syntax
set spantree backuproot sid {disable | enable}

Parameters
sid

Specifies the Spanning Tree instance on which to enable or disable the
backup root function.Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094.

disable | enable

Enables or disables the backup root function.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The Spanning Tree backup root function is disabled by default on the SecureStack C3. When this
feature is enabled and the switch is directly connected to the root bridge, stale Spanning Tree
information is prevented from circulating if the root bridge is lost. If the root bridge is lost, the
backup root will dynamically lower its bridge priority so that it will be selected as the new root
over the lost root bridge.

Example
This example shows how to enable the backup root function on SID 2:
C3(rw)->set spantree backuproot 2 enable

clear spantree backuproot
Use this command to reset the Spanning Tree backup root function to the default state of disabled.

Syntax
clear spantree backuproot sid

Parameters
sid

Specifies the Spanning Tree on which to clear the backup root
function.Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

9-22

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree tctrapsuppress

Example
This example shows how to reset the backup root function to disabled on SID 2:
C3(rw)->clear spantree backuproot 2

show spantree tctrapsuppress
Use this command to display the status of topology change trap suppression on Rapid Spanning
Tree edge ports.

Syntax
show spantree tctrapsuppress

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the status of topology change trap suppression:
C3(rw)->show spantree tctrapsuppress
Topology change Trap Suppression is set to enabled

set spantree tctrapsuppress
Use this command to disable or enable topology change trap suppression on Rapid Spanning Tree
edge ports.

Syntax
set spantree tctrapsuppress {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable | enable

Disables or enables topology change trap suppression.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-23

clear spantree tctrapsuppress

Usage
By default, RSTP non‐edge (bridge) ports that transition to forwarding or blocking cause the
switch to issue a topology change trap. When topology change trap suppression is enabled, which
is the device default, edge ports (such as end station PCs) are prevented from sending topology
change traps. This is because there is usually no need for network management to monitor edge
port STP transition states, such as when PCs are powered on. When topology change trap
suppression is disabled, all ports, including edge and bridge ports, will transmit topology change
traps.

Example
This example shows how to allow Rapid Spanning Tree edge ports to transmit topology change
traps:
C3(rw)->set spantree tctrapsuppress disable

clear spantree tctrapsuppress
Use this command to clear the status of topology change trap suppression on Rapid Spanning Tree
edge ports to the default state of enabled (edge port topology changes do not generate traps).

Syntax
clear spantree tctrapsuppress

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear topology change trap suppression setting:
C3(rw)->clear spantree tctrapsuppress

set spantree protomigration
Use this command to reset the protocol state migration machine for one or more Spanning Tree
ports. When operating in RSTP mode, this forces a port to transmit MSTP BPDUs.

Syntax
set spantree protomigration 

Parameters
port‐string

9-24

Spanning Tree Configuration

Reset the protocol state migration machine for specific port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

show spantree spanguard

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the protocol state migration machine on port 20:
C3(su)->set spantree protomigration ge.1.20

show spantree spanguard
Use this command to display the status of the Spanning Tree SpanGuard function.

Syntax
show spantree spanguard

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the SpanGuard function status:
C3(su)->show spantree spanguard
Spanguard is disabled

set spantree spanguard
Use this command to enable or disable the Spanning Tree SpanGuard function.

Syntax
set spantree spanguard {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables the SpanGuard function.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-25

clear spantree spanguard

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
SpanGuard is designed to disable, or lock out an “edge” port when an unexpected BPDU is
received. The port can be configured to be re‐enabled after a set time period, or only after manual
intervention.
A port can be defined as an edge (user) port using the set spantree adminedge command,
described in “set spantree adminedge” on page 9‐40. A port designated as an edge port is
expected to be connected to a workstation or other end‐user type of device, and not to another
switch in the network. When SpanGuard is enabled, if a non‐loopback BPDU is received on an
edge port, the Spanning Tree state of that port will be changed to “blocking” and will no longer
forward traffic. The port will remain disabled until the amount of time defined by set spantree
spanguardtimeout (“set spantree spanguardtimeout” on page 9‐27) has passed since the last seen
BPDU, the port is manually unlocked (set or clear spantree spanguardlock, “clear / set spantree
spanguardlock” on page 9‐29), the configuration of the port is changed so it is not longer an edge
port, or the SpanGuard function is disabled.
SpanGuard is enabled and disabled only on a global basis (across the stack, if applicable). By
default, SpanGuard is disabled and SpanGuard traps are enabled.

Example
This example shows how to enable the SpanGuard function:
C3(rw)->set spantree spanguard enable

clear spantree spanguard
Use this command to reset the status of the Spanning Tree SpanGuard function to disabled.

Syntax
clear spantree spanguard

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the status of the SpanGuard function to disabled:
C3(rw)->clear spantree spanguard

9-26

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree spanguardtimeout

show spantree spanguardtimeout
Use this command to display the Spanning Tree SpanGuard timeout setting.

Syntax
show spantree spanguardtimeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the SpanGuard timeout setting:
C3(su)->show spantree spanguardtimeout
Spanguard timeout: 300

set spantree spanguardtimeout
Use this command to set the amount of time (in seconds) an edge port will remain locked by the
SpanGuard function.

Syntax
set spantree spanguardtimeout timeout

Parameters
timeout

Specifies a timeout value in seconds. Valid values are 0 to 65535.
A value of 0 will keep the port locked until manually unlocked. The default
value is 300 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the SpanGuard timeout to 600 seconds:
C3(su)->set spantree spanguardtimeout 600

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-27

clear spantree spanguardtimeout

clear spantree spanguardtimeout
Use this command to reset the Spanning Tree SpanGuard timeout to the default value of 300
seconds.

Syntax
clear spantree spanguardtimeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the SpanGuard timeout to 300 seconds:
C3(rw)->clear spantree spanguardtimeout

show spantree spanguardlock
Use this command to display the SpanGuard lock status of one or more ports.

Syntax
show spantree spanguardlock [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port(s) for which to show SpanGuard lock status.
For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If no port string is specified, the SpanGuard lock status for all ports is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the SpanGuard lock status for ge.1.1:
C3(su)->show spantree spanguardlock ge.1.1
Port ge.1.1 is Unlocked

9-28

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear / set spantree spanguardlock

clear / set spantree spanguardlock
Use either of these commands to unlock one or more ports locked by the Spanning Tree
SpanGuard function. When SpanGuard is enabled, it locks ports that receive BPDUs when those
ports have been defined as edge (user) ports (as described in “set spantree adminedge” on
page 9‐40).

Syntax
clear spantree spanguardlock port-string
set spantree spanguardlock port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies port(s) to unlock. For a detailed description of possible port‐string
values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to unlock port ge.1.16:
C3(rw)->clear spantree spanguardlock ge.1.16

show spantree spanguardtrapenable
Use this command to display the state of the Spanning Tree SpanGuard trap function.

Syntax
show spantree spanguardtrapenable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the state of the SpanGuard trap function:
C3(ro)->show spantree spanguardtrapenable
Spanguard SNMP traps are enabled

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-29

set spantree spanguardtrapenable

set spantree spanguardtrapenable
Use this command to enable or disable the sending of an SNMP trap message when SpanGuard
has locked a port.

Syntax
set spantree spanguardtrapenable {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable | enable

Disables or enables sending SpanGuard traps. By default, sending traps
is enabled.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to disable the SpanGuard trap function:
C3(su)->set spantree spanguardtrapenable disable

clear spantree spanguardtrapenable
Use this command to reset the Spanning Tree SpanGuard trap function back to the default state of
enabled.

Syntax
clear spantree spanguardtrapenable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the SpanGuard trap function to enabled:
C3(rw)->clear spantree spanguardtrapenable

9-30

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree legacypathcost

show spantree legacypathcost
Use this command to display the default Spanning Tree path cost setting.

Syntax
show spantree legacypathcost

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the default Spanning Tree path cost setting.
C3(su)->show spantree legacypathcost
Legacy Path Cost is disabled.

set spantree legacypathcost
Use this command to enable or disable legacy (802.1D) path cost values.

Syntax
set spantree legacypathcost {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable

Use 802.1t2001 values to calculate path cost.

enable

Use 802.1d1998 values to calculate path cost.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
By default, legacy path cost is disabled. Enabling the device to calculate legacy path costs affects
the range of valid values that can be entered in the set spantree adminpathcost command.

Example
This example shows how to set the default path cost values to 802.1D.
C3(rw)->set spantree legacypathcost enable

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-31

clear spantree legacypathcost

clear spantree legacypathcost
Use this command to set the Spanning Tree default value for legacy path cost to 802.1t values.

Syntax
clear spantree legacypathcost

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example clears the legacy path cost to 802.1t values.
C3(rw)->clear spantree legacypathcost

show spantree autoedge
Use this command to display the status of automatic edge port detection.

Syntax
show spantree autoedge

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the status of the automatic edge port detection function:
C3(rw)->show spantree autoedge
autoEdge is currently enabled.

set spantree autoedge
Use this command to enable or disable the automatic edge port detection function.

Syntax
set spantree autoedge {disable | enable}

9-32

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree autoedge

Parameters
disable | enable

Disables or enables automatic edge port detection.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to disable automatic edge port detection:
C3(rw)->set spantree autoedge disable

clear spantree autoedge
Use this command to reset automatic edge port detection to the default state of enabled.

Syntax
clear spantree autoedge

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Example
This example shows how to reset automatic edge port detection to enabled:
C3(rw)->clear spantree autoedge

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-33

Configuring Spanning Tree Port Parameters

Configuring Spanning Tree Port Parameters
Purpose
To display and set Spanning Tree port parameters.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

set spantree portadmin

9-34

clear spantree portadmin

9-35

show spantree portadmin

9-35

show spantree portpri

9-36

set spantree portpri

9-36

clear spantree portpri

9-37

show spantree adminpathcost

9-38

set spantree adminpathcost

9-38

clear spantree adminpathcost

9-39

show spantree adminedge

9-39

set spantree adminedge

9-39

clear spantree adminedge

9-40

show spantree operedge

9-41

set spantree portadmin
Use this command to disable or enable the Spanning Tree algorithm on one or more ports.

Syntax
set spantree portadmin port-string {disable | enable}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which to enable or disable Spanning Tree. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

disable | enable

Disables or enables Spanning Tree.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

9-34

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree portadmin

Example
This example shows how to disable Spanning Tree on ge.1.5:
C3(rw)->set spantree portadmin ge.1.5 disable

clear spantree portadmin
Use this command to reset the default Spanning Tree admin status to enable on one or more ports.

Syntax
clear spantree portadmin port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Resets the default admin status on specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the default Spanning Tree admin state to enable on ge.1.12:
C3(rw)->clear spantree portadmin ge.1.12

show spantree portadmin
Use this command to display the status of the Spanning Tree algorithm on one or more ports.

Syntax
show spantree portadmin [port port-string]

Parameters
port port‐string

(Optional) Displays status for specific port(s). For a detailed description of
possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI”
on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, status will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-35

show spantree portpri

Example
This example shows how to display port admin status for ge.1.1:
C3(ro)->show spantree portadmin port ge.1.1
Port ge.1.1 has portadmin set to enabled

show spantree portpri
Use this command to show the Spanning Tree priority for one or more ports. Port priority is a
component of the port ID, which is one element used in determining Spanning Tree port roles.

Syntax
show spantree portpri [port port-string] [sid sid]

Parameters
port port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port(s) for which to display Spanning Tree priority.
For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

sid sid

(Optional) Displays port priority for a specific Spanning Tree identifier.
Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, port priority will be displayed for all Spanning Tree ports.
If sid is not specified, port priority will be displayed for Spanning Tree 0.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the port priority for ge.2.7:
C3(su)->show spantree portpri port ge.2.7
Port ge.2.7 has a Port Priority of 128 on SID 0

set spantree portpri
Use this command to set a port’s Spanning Tree priority.

Syntax
set spantree portpri port-string priority [sid sid]

9-36

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree portpri

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which to set Spanning Tree port priority. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

priority

Specifies a number that represents the priority of a link in a Spanning Tree
bridge. Valid values are from 0 to 240 (in increments of 16) with 0
indicating high priority.

sid sid

(Optional) Sets port priority for a specific Spanning Tree identifier. Valid
values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Defaults
If sid is not specified, port priority will be set for Spanning Tree 0.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the priority of ge.1.3 to 240 on SID 1
C3(su)->set spantree portpri ge.1.3 240 sid 1

clear spantree portpri
Use this command to reset the bridge priority of a Spanning Tree port to a default value of 128.

Syntax
clear spantree portpri port-string [sid sid]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which to set Spanning Tree port priority. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

sid sid

(Optional) Resets the port priority for a specific Spanning Tree identifier.
Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 will be assumed.

Defaults
If sid is not specified, port priority will be set for Spanning Tree 0.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the priority of ge.1.3 to 128 on SID 1
C3(su)->clear spantree portpri ge.1.3 sid 1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-37

show spantree adminpathcost

show spantree adminpathcost
Use this command to display the admin path cost for a port on one or more Spanning Trees.

Syntax
show spantree adminpathcost [port port-string] [sid sid]

Parameters
port port‐string

(Optional) Displays the admin path cost value for specific port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

sid sid

(Optional) Displays the admin path cost for a specific Spanning Tree
identifier. Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 will be assumed.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, admin path cost for all Spanning Tree ports will be displayed.
If sid is not specified, admin path cost for Spanning Tree 0 will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the admin path cost for ge.3.4 on SID 1:
C3(su)->show spantree adminpathcost port ge.3.4 sid 1
Port ge.3.4 has a Port Admin Path Cost of 0 on SID 1

set spantree adminpathcost
Use this command to set the administrative path cost on a port and one or more Spanning Trees.

Syntax
set spantree adminpathcost port-string cost [sid sid]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to set an admin path cost. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

cost

Specifies the port path cost. Va1id values are 0 ‐ 200000000.

sid sid

(Optional) Sets the admin path cost for a specific Spanning Tree identifier.
Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 will be assumed.

Defaults
If sid is not specified, admin path cost will be set for Spanning Tree 0.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.
9-38

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree adminpathcost

Example
This example shows how to set the admin path cost to 200 for ge.3.2 on SID 1:
C3(su)->set spantree adminpathcost ge.3.2 200 sid 1

clear spantree adminpathcost
Use this command to reset the Spanning Tree default value for port admin path cost to 0.

Syntax
clear spantree adminpathcost port-string [sid sid]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which to reset admin path cost. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax
Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

sid sid

(Optional) Resets the admin path cost for specific Spanning Tree(s).
Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Defaults
If sid is not specified, admin path cost will be reset for Spanning Tree 0.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the admin path cost to 0 for ge.3.2 on SID 1:
C3(su)->clear spantree adminpathcost ge.3.2 sid 1

show spantree adminedge
Use this command to display the edge port administrative status for a port.

Syntax
show spantree adminedge [port port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays edge port administrative status for specific
port(s). For a detailed description of possible port‐string values,
refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified edge port administrative status will be displayed for all Spanning Tree
ports.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-39

set spantree adminedge

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the edge port status for ge.3.2:
C3(su)->show spantree adminedge port ge.3.2
Port ge.3.2 has a Port Admin Edge of Edge-Port

set spantree adminedge
Use this command to set the edge port administrative status on a Spanning Tree port.

Syntax
set spantree adminedge port-string {true | false}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the edge port. For a detailed description of possible port‐string
values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

true | false

Enables (true) or disables (false) the specified port as a Spanning Tree edge
port.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The default behavior of the edge port administrative status begins with the value set to false
initially after the device is powered up. If a Spanning Tree BDPU is not received on the port within
a few seconds, the status setting changes to true.

Example
This example shows how to set ge.1.11 as an edge port:
C3(su)->set spantree adminedge ge.1.11 true

clear spantree adminedge
Use this command to reset a Spanning Tree port to non‐edge status.

Syntax
clear spantree adminedge port-string

9-40

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree operedge

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies port(s) on which to reset edge port status. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset ge.1.11 as a non‐edge port:
C3(su)->clear spantree adminedge ge.1.11

show spantree operedge
Use this command to display the Spanning Tree edge port operating status for a port.

Syntax
show spantree operedge [port port-string]

Parameters
port port‐string

Displays edge port operating status for specific port(s).

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, edge port operating status will be displayed for all Spanning Tree
ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the edge port status for ge.2.7:
C3(rw)->show spantree operedge port ge.2.7
Port ge.2.7 has a Port Oper Edge of Edge-Port

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-41

Configuring Spanning Tree Loop Protect Parameters

Configuring Spanning Tree Loop Protect Parameters
Purpose
To display and set Spanning Tree Loop Protect parameters, including the global parameters of
Loop Protect threshold, window, enabling traps, and disputed BPDU threshold, as well as per port
and port/SID parameters. See “Loop Protect” on page 9‐2 for more information about the Loop
Protect feature.

Commands
For information about...

9-42

Refer to page...

set spantree lp

9-43

show spantree lp

9-43

clear spantree lp

9-44

show spantree lplock

9-44

clear spantree lplock

9-45

set spantree lpcapablepartner

9-46

show spantree lpcapablepartner

9-46

clear spantree lpcapablepartner

9-47

set spantree lpthreshold

9-47

show spantree lpthreshold

9-48

clear spantree lpthreshold

9-48

set spantree lpwindow

9-49

show spantree lpwindow

9-49

clear spantree lpwindow

9-50

set spantree lptrapenable

9-50

show spantree lptrapenable

9-51

clear spantree lptrapenable

9-51

set spantree disputedbpduthreshold

9-52

show spantree disputedbpduthreshold

9-53

clear spantree disputedbpduthreshold

9-53

show spantree nonforwardingreason

9-54

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree lp

set spantree lp
Use this command to enable or disable the Loop Protect feature per port and optionally, per SID.
The Loop Protect feature is disabled by default. See “Loop Protect” on page 2. for more
information.

Syntax
set spantree lp port-string {enable | disable} [sid sid]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies port(s) on which to enable or disable the Loop Protect feature.

enable | disable

Enables or disables the feature on the specified port.

sid sid

(Optional) Enables or disables the feature for specific Spanning Tree(s).
Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Defaults
If no SID is specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Loop Protect takes precedence over per port STP enable/disable (portAdmin). Normally
portAdmin disabled would cause a port to go immediately to forwarding. If Loop Protect is
enabled, that port should go to listening and remain there.
Note: The Loop Protect enable/disable settings for an MSTI port should match those for the CIST
port.

Example
This example shows how to enable Loop Protect on ge.2.3:
C3(su)->set spantree lp ge.1.11 enable

show spantree lp
Use this command to display the Loop Protect status per port and/or per SID.

Syntax
show spantree lp [port port-string] [sid sid]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies port(s) for which to display the Loop Protect
feature status.

sid sid

(Optional) Specifies the specific Spanning Tree(s) for which to display
the Loop Protect feature status. Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not
specified, SID 0 is assumed.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-43

clear spantree lp

Defaults
If no port‐string is specified, status is displayed for all ports.
If no SID is specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display Loop Protect status on ge.2.3:
C3(su)->show spantree lp port ge.2.3
LoopProtect is disabled on port ge.2.3

, SI

clear spantree lp
Use this command to return the Loop Protect status per port and optionally, per SID, to its default
state of disabled.

Syntax
clear spantree lp port-string [sid sid]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies port(s) for which to clear the Loop Protect feature status.

sid sid

(Optional) Specifies the specific Spanning Tree(s) for which to clear the
Loop Protect feature status. Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified,
SID 0 is assumed.

Defaults
If no SID is specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to return the Loop Protect state on ge.2.3 to disabled:
C3(rw)->clear spantree lp port ge.2.3

show spantree lplock
Use this command to display the Loop Protect lock status per port and/or per SID. A port can
become locked if a configured number of Loop Protect events occur during the configured
window of time. See the set spantree lpthreshold and set spantree lpwindow commands. Once a
port is forced into blocking (locked), it remains locked until manually unlocked with the clear
spantree lplock command.

Syntax
show spantree lplock [port port-string] [sid sid]

9-44

Spanning Tree Configuration

clear spantree lplock

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies port(s) for which to display the Loop Protect lock
status.

sid sid

(Optional) Specifies the specific Spanning Tree(s) for which to display
the Loop Protect lock status. Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified,
SID 0 is assumed.

Defaults
If no port‐string is specified, status is displayed for all ports.
If no SID is specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display Loop Protect lock status on ge.1.1:
C3(rw)->show spantree lplock port ge.1.1
The LoopProtect lock status for port ge.1.1

, SID 0 is UNLOCKED

clear spantree lplock
Use this command to manually unlock a blocked port and optionally, per SID. The default state is
unlocked.

Syntax
clear spantree lplock port-string [sid sid]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies port(s) for which to clear the Loop Protect lock.

sid sid

(Optional) Specifies the specific Spanning Tree(s) for which to clear the
Loop Protect lock. Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified, SID 0 is
assumed.

Defaults
If no SID is specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to clear Loop Protect lock from ge.1.1:
C3(rw)->show spantree lplock port ge.1.1
The LoopProtect lock status for port ge.1.1
C3(rw)->clear spantree lplock ge.1.1
C3(rw)->show spantree lplock port ge.1.1
The LoopProtect lock status for port ge.1.1

, SID 0 is LOCKED

, SID 0 is UNLOCKED

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-45

set spantree lpcapablepartner

set spantree lpcapablepartner
Use this command to specify per port whether the link partner is Loop Protect capable. See “Loop
Protect” on page 2. for more information.

Syntax
set spantree lpcapablepartner port-string {true | false}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies port(s) for which to configure a Loop Protect capable link
partner.

true | false

Specifies whether the link partner is capable (true) or not (false).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The default value for Loop Protect capable partner is false. If the port is configured with a Loop
Protect capable partner (true), then the full functionality of the Loop Protect feature is used. If the
value is false, then there is some ambiguity as to whether an Active Partner timeout is due to a
loop protection event or is a normal situation due to the fact that the partner port does not
transmit Alternate Agreement BPDUs. Therefore, a conservative approach is taken in that
designated ports will not be allowed to forward unless receiving agreements from a port with root
role.
This type of timeout will not be considered a loop protection event. Loop protection is maintained
by keeping the port from forwarding but since this is not considered a loop event it will not be
factored into locking the port.

Example
This example shows how to set the Loop Protect capable partner to true for ge.1.1:
C3(rw)->set spantree lpcapablepartner ge.1.1 true

show spantree lpcapablepartner
Use this command to the Loop Protect capability of a link partner for one or more ports.

Syntax
show spantree lpcapablepartner [port port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

9-46

Spanning Tree Configuration

(Optional) Specifies port(s) for which to display Loop Protect capability
for its link partner.

clear spantree lpcapablepartner

Defaults
If no port‐string is specified, Loop Protect capability for link partners is displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the Loop Protect partner capability for ge.1.1:
C3(rw)->show spantree lpcapablepartner port ge.1.1
Link partner of port ge.1.1 is not LoopProtect-capable

clear spantree lpcapablepartner
Use this command to reset the Loop Protect capability of port link partners to the default state of
false.

Syntax
clear spantree lpcapablepartner port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies port(s) for which to clear their link partners’ Loop Protect
capability (reset to false).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the Loop Protect partner capability for ge.1.1:
C3(rw)->clear spantree lpcapablepartner ge.1.1

set spantree lpthreshold
Use this command to set the Loop Protect event threshold.

Syntax
set spantree lpthreshold value

Parameters
value

Specifies the number of events that must occur during the event
window in order to lock a port/SID. The default value is 3 events. A
threshold of 0 specifies that ports will never be locked.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-47

show spantree lpthreshold

Defaults
None. The default event threshold is 3.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The LoopProtect event threshold is a global integer variable that provides protection in the case of
intermittent failures. The default value is 3. If the event counter reaches the threshold within a
given period (the event window), then the port, for the given SID, becomes locked (that is, held
indefinitely in the blocking state). If the threshold is 0, the ports are never locked.

Example
This example shows how to set the Loop Protect threshold value to 4:
C3(rw)->set spantree lpthreshold 4

show spantree lpthreshold
Use this command to display the current value of the Loop Protect event threshold.

Syntax
show spantree lpthreshold

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the current Loop Protect threshold value:
C3(rw)->show spantree lpthreshold
The Loop Protect event threshold value is 4

clear spantree lpthreshold
Use this command to return the Loop Protect event threshold to its default value of 3.

Syntax
clear spantree lpthreshold

Parameters
None.

9-48

Spanning Tree Configuration

set spantree lpwindow

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the Loop Protect event threshold to the default of 3:
C3(rw)->clear spantree lpthreshold

set spantree lpwindow
Use this command to set the Loop Protect event window value in seconds.

Syntax
set spantree lpwindow value

Parameters
value

Specifies the number of seconds that comprise the period during which
Loop Protect events are counted. The default event window is 180
seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The Loop Protect Window is a timer value, in seconds, that defines a period during which Loop
Protect events are counted. The default value is 180 seconds. If the timer is set to 0, the event
counter is not reset until the Loop Protect event threshold is reached. If the threshold is reached,
that constitutes a loop protection event.

Example
This example shows how to set the Loop Protect event window to 120 seconds:
C3(rw)->set spantree lpwindow 120

show spantree lpwindow
Use this command to display the current Loop Protect event window value.

Syntax
show spantree lpwindow

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-49

clear spantree lpwindow

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the current Loop Protect window value:
C3(rw)->show spantree lpwindow
The Loop Protect event window is set to 120 seconds

clear spantree lpwindow
Use this command to reset the Loop Protect event window to the default value of 180 seconds.

Syntax
clear spantree lpwindow

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the Loop Protect event window to the default of 180 seconds:
C3(rw)->clear spantree lpwindow

set spantree lptrapenable
Use this command to enable or disable Loop Protect event notification.

Syntax
set spantree lptrapenable {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

9-50

Spanning Tree Configuration

Enables or disables the sending of Loop Protect traps. Default is
disabled.

show spantree lptrapenable

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Loop Protect traps are sent when a Loop Protect event occurs, that is, when a port goes to listening
due to not receiving BPDUs. The trap indicates port, SID and loop protection status.

Example
This example shows how to enable sending of Loop Protect traps:
C3(rw)->set spantree lptrapenable enable

show spantree lptrapenable
Use this command to display the current status of Loop Protect event notification.

Syntax
show spantree lptrapenable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the current Loop Protect event notification status:
C3(rw)->show spantree lptrapenable
The Loop Protect event notification status is enable

clear spantree lptrapenable
Use this command to return the Loop Protect event notification state to its default state of
disabled.

Syntax
clear spantree lptrapenable

Parameters
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-51

set spantree disputedbpduthreshold

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the Loop Protect event notification state to the default of
disabled.
C3(rw)->clear spantree lptrapenable

set spantree disputedbpduthreshold
Use this command to set the disputed BPDU threshold, which is the number of disputed BPDUs
that must be received on a given port/SID until a disputed BPDU trap is sent.

Syntax
set spantree disputedbpduthreshold value

Parameters
value

Specifies the number of disputed BPDUs that must be received on a
given port/SID to cause a disputed BPDU trap to be sent.
A threshold of 0 indicates that traps should not be sent. The default
value is 0.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
A disputed BPDU is one in which the flags field indicates a designated role and learning, and the
priority vector is worse than that already held by the port. If a disputed BPDU is received the port
is forced to the listening state. Refer to the 802.1Q‐2005 standard, IEEE Standard for Local and
Metropolitan Area Networks – Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks, for a full description of the dispute
mechanism, which prevents looping in cases of one‐way communication.
The disputed BPDU threshold is an integer variable that represents the number of disputed
BPDUs that must be received on a given port/SID until a disputed BPDU trap is sent and a syslog
message is issued. For example, if the threshold is 10, then a trap is issued when 10, 20, 30, and so
on, disputed BPDUs have been received.
If the value is 0, traps are not sent. The trap indicates port, SID and total Disputed BPDU count.
The default is 0.

9-52

Spanning Tree Configuration

show spantree disputedbpduthreshold

Example
This example shows how to set the disputed BPDU threshold value to 5:
C3(rw)->set spantree disputedbpduthreshold 5

show spantree disputedbpduthreshold
Use this command to display the current value of the disputed BPDU threshold.

Syntax
show spantree disputedbpduthreshold

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the current disputed BPDU threshold:
C3(rw)->show spantree disputedbpduthreshold
The disputed BPDU threshold value is 0

clear spantree disputedbpduthreshold
Use this command to return the disputed BPDU threshold to its default value of 0, meaning that
disputed BPDU traps should not be sent.

Syntax
clear spantree disputedbpduthreshold

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the disputed BPDU threshold to the default of 0:
C3(rw)->clear spantree disputedbpduthreshold

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

9-53

show spantree nonforwardingreason

show spantree nonforwardingreason
Use this command to display the reason for placing a port in a non‐forwarding state due to an
exceptional condition.

Syntax
show spantree nonforwardingreason port-string [sid sid]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies port(s) for which to display the non‐forwarding reason.

sid sid

(Optional) Specifies the specific Spanning Tree(s) for which to display
the non‐forwarding reason. Valid values are 0 ‐ 4094. If not specified,
SID 0 is assumed.

Defaults
If no port‐string is specified, non‐forwarding reason is displayed for all ports.
If no SID is specified, SID 0 is assumed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
Exceptional conditions causing a port to be placed in listening or blocking state include a Loop
Protect event, receipt of disputed BPDUs, and loopback detection.

Example
This example shows how to display the non‐forwarding reason on ge.1.1:
C3(rw)->show spantree nonforwardingreason port ge.1.1
on SID 0 is None
The non-forwarding reason for port ge.1.1

9-54

Spanning Tree Configuration

10
802.1Q VLAN Configuration
This chapter describes the SecureStack C3 system’s capabilities to implement 802.1Q virtual LANs
(VLANs).
For information about...

Refer to page...

VLAN Configuration Summary

10-1

Viewing VLANs

10-3

Creating and Naming Static VLANs

10-5

Assigning Port VLAN IDs (PVIDs) and Ingress Filtering

10-8

Configuring the VLAN Egress List

10-13

Setting the Host VLAN

10-18

Enabling/Disabling GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)

10-20

Note: An Enterasys Networks Feature Guide document containing an in-depth discussion of VLAN
configuration is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

VLAN Configuration Summary
Virtual LANs allow the network administrator to partition network traffic into logical groups and
control the flow of that traffic through the network. Once the traffic and, in effect, the users
creating the traffic, are assigned to a VLAN, then broadcast and multicast traffic is contained
within the VLAN and users can be allowed or denied access to any of the network’s resources.
Also, some or all of the ports on the device can be configured as GVRP ports, which enable frames
received with a particular VLAN ID and protocol to be transmitted on a limited number of ports.
This keeps the traffic associated with a particular VLAN and protocol isolated from the other parts
of the network.
Note: The device can support up to 1024 802.1Q VLANs. The allowable range for VLAN IDs is 1
to 4093. As a default, all ports on the device are assigned to VLAN ID 1, untagged.

Port String Syntax Used in the CLI
For information on how to designate VLANs and port numbers in the CLI syntax, refer to “Port
String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-1

VLAN Configuration Summary

Creating a Secure Management VLAN
By default at startup, there is one VLAN configured on the SecureStack C3 device. It is VLAN ID
1, the DEFAULT VLAN. The default community name, which determines remote access for SNMP
management, is set to “public” with read‐write access.
If the SecureStack C3 device is to be configured for multiple VLANs, it may be desirable to
configure a management‐only VLAN. This allows a station connected to the management VLAN
to manage the device. It also makes management secure by preventing configuration via ports
assigned to other VLANs.
To create a secure management VLAN, you must:
Step

Task

Refer to page...

1.

Create a new VLAN.

10-5

2.

Set the PVID for the desired switch port to the VLAN created in Step 1.

10-9

3.

Add the desired switch port to the egress list for the VLAN created in
Step 1.

10-15

4.

Assign host status to the VLAN.

10-18

5.

Set a private community name and access policy.

8-14

The commands used to create a secure management VLAN are listed in Table 10‐1. This example
assumes the management station is attached to ge.1.1 and wants untagged frames.
The process described here would be repeated on every device that is connected in the network to
ensure that each device has a secure management VLAN.
Table 10-1

Command Set for Creating a Secure Management VLAN

To do this...

Use these commands...

Create a new VLAN and confirm settings.

set vlan create 2 (“set vlan” on page 10-5)
(Optional) show vlan 2 (“show vlan” on page 10-3)

Set the PVID to the new VLAN.

set port vlan ge.1.1 2 (“set port vlan” on page 10-9)

Add the port to the new VLAN’s egress list.

set vlan egress 2 ge.1.1 untagged (“set vlan egress” on
page 10-15)

Remove the port from the default VLAN’s
egress list.

clear vlan egress 1 ge.1.1 (“clear vlan egress” on
page 10-15)

Assign host status to the VLAN.

set host vlan 2 (“set host vlan” on page 10-18)

Set a private community name and access
policy and confirm settings.

set snmp community private (“set snmp community” on
page 8-14)
(Optional) show snmp community (“show snmp
community” on page 8-13)

10-2

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

Viewing VLANs

Viewing VLANs
Purpose
To display a list of VLANs currently configured on the device, to determine how one or more
VLANs were created, the ports allowed and disallowed to transmit traffic belonging to VLAN(s),
and if those ports will transmit the traffic with a VLAN tag included.

Command
For information about...

Refer to page...

show vlan

10-3

show vlan
Use this command to display all information related to one or more VLANs.

Syntax
show vlan [static] [vlan-list] [portinfo [vlan vlan-list | vlan-name] [port portstring]]

Parameters
static

(Optional) Displays information related to static VLANs. Static VLANs are
manually created using the set vlan command (“set vlan” on page 10‐5),
SNMP MIBs, or the WebView management application. The default VLAN,
VLAN 1, is always statically configured and can’t be deleted. Only ports
that use a specified VLAN as their default VLAN (PVID) will be displayed.

vlan‐list

(Optional) Displays information for a specific VLAN or range of VLANs.

portinfo

(Optional) Displays VLAN attributes related to one or more ports.

vlan vlan‐list |
vlan‐name

(Optional) Displays port information for one or more VLANs.

port port‐string

(Optional) Displays port information for one or more ports.

Defaults
If no options are specified, all information related to static and dynamic VLANs will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display information for VLAN 1. In this case, VLAN 1 is named
“DEFAULT VLAN”. Ports allowed to transmit frames belonging to VLAN 1 are listed as egress
ports. Ports that won’t include a VLAN tag in their transmitted frames are listed as untagged
ports. There are no forbidden ports (prevented from transmitted frames) on VLAN 1:
C3(su)->show vlan 1
VLAN: 1
NAME: DEFAULT VLAN

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-3

show vlan

VLAN Type: Default
Egress Ports
ge.1.1-10, ge.2.1-4, ge.3.1-7,
Forbidden Egress Ports
None.
Untagged Ports
ge.1.1-10, ge.2.1-4, ge.3.1-7,

Table 10‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 10-2

10-4

show vlan Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

VLAN

VLAN ID.

NAME

Name assigned to the VLAN.

Status

Whether it is enabled or disabled.

VLAN Type

Whether it is permanent (static) or dynamic.

Egress Ports

Ports configured to transmit frames for this VLAN.

Forbidden Egress
Ports

Ports prevented from transmitting frames for this VLAN.

Untagged Ports

Ports configured to transmit untagged frames for this VLAN.

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

Creating and Naming Static VLANs

Creating and Naming Static VLANs
Purpose
To create a new static VLAN, or to enable or disable existing VLAN(s).

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

set vlan

10-5

set vlan name

10-6

clear vlan

10-6

clear vlan name

10-7

set vlan
Use this command to create a new static IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, or to enable or disable an existing
VLAN.

Syntax
set vlan {create | enable | disable} vlan-list

Parameters
create | enable |
disable

Creates, enables or disables VLAN(s).

vlan‐list

Specifies one or more VLAN IDs to be created, enabled or disabled.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Once a VLAN is created, you can assign it a name using the set vlan name command described in
“set vlan name” on page 10‐6.
Each VLAN ID must be unique. If a duplicate VLAN ID is entered, the device assumes that the
Administrator intends to modify the existing VLAN.
Enter the VLAN ID using a unique number between 1 and 4093. The VLAN IDs of 0 and 4094 and
higher may not be used for user‐defined VLANs.

Examples
This example shows how to create VLAN 3:
C3(su)->set vlan create 3
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-5

set vlan name

set vlan name
Use this command to set or change the ASCII name for a new or existing VLAN.

Syntax
set vlan name vlan-list vlan-name

Parameters
vlan‐list

Specifies the VLAN ID of the VLAN(s) to be named.

vlan‐name

Specifies the string used as the name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the name for VLAN 7 to green:
C3(su)->set vlan name 7 green

clear vlan
Use this command to remove a static VLAN from the list of VLANs recognized by the device.

Syntax
clear vlan vlan-list

Parameters
vlan‐list

Specifies the VLAN ID of the VLAN(s) to be removed.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to remove a static VLAN 9 from the device’s VLAN list:
C3(su)->clear vlan 9

10-6

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

clear vlan name

clear vlan name
Use this command to remove the name of a VLAN from the VLAN list.

Syntax
clear vlan name vlan-list

Parameters
vlan‐list

Specifies the VLAN ID of the VLAN(s) for which the name will be cleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the name for VLAN 9:
C3(su)->clear vlan name 9

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-7

Assigning Port VLAN IDs (PVIDs) and Ingress Filtering

Assigning Port VLAN IDs (PVIDs) and Ingress Filtering
Purpose
To assign default VLAN IDs to untagged frames on one or more ports, to configure VLAN ingress
filtering and constraints, and to set the frame discard mode.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port vlan

10-8

set port vlan

10-9

clear port vlan

10-9

show port ingress filter

10-10

set port ingress filter

10-11

show port discard

10-11

set port discard

10-12

show port vlan
Use this command to display port VLAN identifier (PVID) information. PVID determines the
VLAN to which all untagged frames received on one or more ports will be classified.

Syntax
show port vlan [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays PVID information for specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port ‐string is not specified, port VLAN information for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display PVIDs assigned to ge.2.1 through 6. In this case, untagged
frames received on these ports will be classified to VLAN 1:
C3(su)->show port vlan ge.2.1-6
ge.2.1 is set to 1
ge.2.2 is set to 1
ge.2.3 is set to 1
ge.2.4 is set to 1
10-8

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

set port vlan

ge.2.5 is set to 1
ge.2.6 is set to 1

set port vlan
Use this command to configure the PVID (port VLAN identifier) for one or more ports.

Syntax
set port vlan port-string pvid [modify-egress | no-modify-egress]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which to configure a VLAN identifier. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

pvid

Specifies the VLAN ID of the VLAN to which port(s) will be added.

modify‐egress

(Optional) Adds port(s) to VLANʹs untagged egress list and removes them
from other untagged egress lists.

no‐modify‐egress

(Optional) Does not prompt for or make egress list changes.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The PVID is used to classify untagged frames as they ingress into a given port.

Example
This example shows how to add ge.1.10 to the port VLAN list of VLAN 4 (PVID 4).
C3(su)->set vlan create 4
C3(su)->set port vlan ge.1.10 4 modify-egress

clear port vlan
Use this command to reset a port’s 802.1Q port VLAN ID (PVID) to the host VLAN ID 1.
Note: The following command will reset the specified port’s egress status to tagged. To set the
specified ports back to the default egress status of untagged, you must issue the set port vlan
command as described on page 10-9.

Syntax
clear port vlan port-string

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-9

show port ingress filter

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) to be reset to the host VLAN ID 1. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset ports ge.1.3 through 11 to a VLAN ID of 1 (Host VLAN):
C3(su)->clear port vlan ge.1.3-11

show port ingress filter
Use this command to show all ports that are enabled for port ingress filtering, which limits
incoming VLAN ID frames according to a port VLAN egress list. If the VLAN ID specified in the
received frame is not on the port’s VLAN egress list, then that frame is dropped and not
forwarded.

Syntax
show port ingress-filter [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port(s) for which to display ingress filtering status.
For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, ingress filtering status for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the port ingress filter status for ports 10 through 15 in slot 1.
In this case, the ports are disabled for ingress filtering:
C3(su)->show port ingress-filter ge.1.10-15
Port
State
-------- --------ge.1.10 disabled
ge.1.11 disabled
ge.1.12 disabled
ge.1.13 disabled
ge.1.14 disabled
ge.1.15 disabled

10-10

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

set port ingress filter

set port ingress filter
Use this command to discard all frames received with a VLAN ID that don’t match the port’s
VLAN egress list.

Syntax
set port ingress-filter port-string {disable | enable}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to enable of disable ingress filtering. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

disable | enable

Disables or enables ingress filtering.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
When ingress filtering is enabled on a port, the VLAN IDs of incoming frames are compared to the
port’s egress list. If the received VLAN ID does not match a VLAN ID on the port’s egress list, then
the frame is dropped.
Ingress filtering is implemented according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

Example
This example shows how to enable port ingress filtering on ge.1.3:
C3(su)->set port ingress-filter ge.1.3 enable

show port discard
Use this command to display the frame discard mode for one or more ports. Ports can be set to
discard frames based on whether or not the frame contains a VLAN tag. They can also be set to
discard both tagged and untagged frames, or neither.

Syntax
show port discard [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays the frame discard mode for specific port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port-string is not specified, frame discard mode will be displayed for all
ports.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-11

set port discard

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the frame discard mode for ge.2.7. In this case, the port has
been set to discard all tagged frames:
C3(su)->show port discard ge.2.7
Port
Discard Mode
------------ ------------ge.2.7
tagged

set port discard
Use this command to set the frame discard mode on one or more ports.

Syntax
set port discard port-string {tagged | untagged | both | none}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which to set frame discard mode. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

tagged |
untagged | both |
none

•

Tagged ‐ Discard all incoming (received) tagged packets on the defined
port(s).

•

Untagged ‐ Discard all incoming untagged packets.

•

Both ‐ All traffic will be discarded (tagged and untagged).

•

None ‐ No packets will be discarded.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The options are to discard all incoming tagged frames, all incoming untagged frames, neither
(essentially allow all traffic), or both (essentially discarding all traffic).
A common practice is to discard all tagged packet on user ports. Typically an Administrator does
not want the end users defining what VLAN they use for communication.

Example
This example shows how to discard all tagged frames received on port ge.3.3:
C3(su)->set port discard ge.3.3 tagged

10-12

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

Configuring the VLAN Egress List

Configuring the VLAN Egress List
Purpose
To assign or remove ports on the egress list of a particular VLAN. This determines which ports on
the switch will be eligible to transmit frames for a particular VLAN. For example, ports 1, 5, 7, 8
could be allowed to transmit frames belonging to VLAN 20 and ports 7,8, 9, 10 could be allowed to
transmit frames tagged with VLAN 30 (a port can belong to multiple VLAN Egress lists). Note
that the Port Egress list for ports 7 and 8 would contain both VLAN 20 and 30.
The port egress type for all ports can be set to tagged, forbidden, or untagged. In general, VLANs
have no egress (except for VLAN 1) until they are configured by static administration, or through
dynamic mechanisms such as GVRP.
Setting a port to forbidden prevents it from participating in the specified VLAN and ensures that
any dynamic requests (either through GVRP or dynamic egress) for the port to join the VLAN will
be ignored. Setting a port to untagged allows it to transmit frames without a tag header. This
setting is usually used to configure a port connected to an end user device. Frames sent between
VLAN aware switches are typically tagged.
The default VLAN defaults its egress to untagged for all ports.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port egress

10-13

set vlan forbidden

10-14

set vlan egress

10-15

clear vlan egress

10-15

show vlan dynamicegress

10-16

set vlan dynamicegress

10-17

show port egress
Use this command to display the VLAN membership for one or more ports.

Syntax
show port egress [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays VLAN membership for specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, VLAN membership will be displayed for all ports.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-13

set vlan forbidden

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows you how to show VLAN egress information for ge.1.1 through 3. In this case,
all three ports are allowed to transmit VLAN 1 frames as tagged and VLAN 10 frames as
untagged. Both are static VLANs:
C3(su)->show port egress ge.1.1-3
Port
Vlan
Egress
Registration
Number
Id
Status
Status
------------------------------------------------------ge.1.1
1
tagged
static
ge.1.1
10
untagged
static
ge.1.2
1
tagged
static
ge.1.2
10
untagged
static
ge.1.3
1
tagged
static
ge.1.3
10
untagged
static

set vlan forbidden
Use this command to prevent one or more ports from participating in a VLAN. This setting
instructs the device to ignore dynamic requests (either through GVRP or dynamic egress) for the
port to join the VLAN.

Syntax
set vlan forbidden vlan-id port-string

Parameters
vlan‐id

Specifies the VLAN for which to set forbidden port(s).

port‐string

Specifies the port(s) to set as forbidden for the specified vlan‐id.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows you how to set ge.1.3 to forbidden for VLAN 6:
C3(su)->set vlan forbidden 6 ge.1.3

10-14

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

set vlan egress

set vlan egress
Use this command to add ports to the VLAN egress list for the device, or to prevent one or more
ports from participating in a VLAN. This determines which ports will transmit frames for a
particular VLAN.

Syntax
set vlan egress vlan-list port-string [untagged | forbidden | tagged]

Parameters
vlan‐list

Specifies the VLAN where a port(s) will be added to the egress list.

port‐string

Specifies one or more ports to add to the VLAN egress list of the specified
vlan‐list. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

untagged |
forbidden |
tagged

(Optional) Adds the specified ports as:
•

untagged — Causes the port(s) to transmit frames without an IEEE
802.1Q header tag.

•

forbidden — Instructs the device to ignore dynamic requests (either
through GVRP or dynamic egress) from the port(s) to join the VLAN
and disallows egress on that port.

•

tagged — Causes the port(s) to transmit 802.1Q tagged frames.

Defaults
If untagged, forbidden or tagged is not specified, the port will be added to the VLAN egress list
as tagged.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to add ge.1.5 through 10 to the egress list of VLAN 7. This means that
these ports will transmit VLAN 7 frames as tagged:
C3(su)->set vlan egress 7 ge.1.5-10 untagged

This example shows how to forbid ports 13 through 15 in slot 1 from joining VLAN 7 and disallow
egress on those ports:
C3(su)->set vlan egress 7 ge.1.13-15 forbidden

This example shows how to allow port 2 in slot 1 to transmit VLAN 7 frames as untagged:
C3(su)->set vlan egress 7 ge.1.2 untagged

clear vlan egress
Use this command to remove ports from a VLAN’s egress list.
Note: The following command will reset the specified port’s egress status to tagged. To set the
specified ports back to the default egress status of untagged, you must issue the set vlan egress
command as described on page 10-15.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-15

show vlan dynamicegress

Syntax
clear vlan egress vlan-list port-string [forbidden]

Parameters
vlan‐list

Specifies the number of the VLAN from which a port(s) will be removed
from the egress list.

port‐string

Specifies one or more ports to be removed from the VLAN egress list of the
specified vlan‐list. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values,
refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

forbidden

(Optional) Clears the forbidden setting from the specified port(s) and resets
the port(s) as able to egress frames if so configured by either static or
dynamic means.

Defaults
If forbidden is not specified, tagged and untagged settings will be cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to remove ge.3.14 from the egress list of VLAN 9:
C3(su)->clear vlan egress 9 ge.3.14

This example shows how to remove all Ethernet ports in slot 2 from the egress list of VLAN 4:
C3(su)->clear vlan egress 4 ge.2.*

show vlan dynamicegress
Use this command to display the status of dynamic egress (enabled or disabled) for one or more
VLANs.

Syntax
show vlan dynamicegress [vlan-list]

Parameters
vlan‐list

(Optional) Displays dynamic egress status for specific VLAN(s).

Defaults
If vlan‐list is not specified, the dynamic egress status for all VLANs will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

10-16

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

set vlan dynamicegress

Example
This example shows how to display the dynamic egress status for VLANs 50‐55:
C3(rw)->show vlan dynamicegress 50-55
VLAN 50 is disabled
VLAN 51 is disabled
VLAN 52 is disabled
VLAN 53 is enabled
VLAN 54 is enabled
VLAN 55 is enabled

set vlan dynamicegress
Use this command to administratively set the dynamic egress status for one or more VLANs.

Syntax
set vlan dynamicegress vlan-list {enable | disable}

Parameters
vlan‐list

Specifies the VLANs by ID to enable or disable dynamic egress.

enable | disable

Enables or disables dynamic egress.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
If dynamic egress is enabled for a particular VLAN, when a port receives a frame tagged with that
VLAN’s ID, the switch will add the receiving port to that VLAN’s egress list. Dynamic egress is
disabled on the SecureStack C3 by default.
For example, assume you have 20 AppleTalk users on your network who are mobile users (that is,
use different ports every day), but you want to keep the AppleTalk traffic isolated in its own
VLAN. You can create an AppleTalk VLAN with a VLAN ID of 55 with a classification rule that all
AppleTalk traffic gets tagged with VLAN ID 55. Then, you enable dynamic egress for VLAN 55.
Now, when an AppleTalk user plugs into port ge.3.5 and sends an AppleTalk packet, the switch
will tag the packet to VLAN 55 and also add port ge.3.5 to VLAN 55’s egress list, which allows the
AppleTalk user to receive AppleTalk traffic.

Example
This example shows how to enable dynamic egress on VLAN 55:
C3(rw)->set vlan dynamicegress 55 enable

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-17

Setting the Host VLAN

Setting the Host VLAN
Purpose
To configure a host VLAN that only select devices are allowed to access. This secures the host port
for management‐only tasks.
Note: The host port is the management entity of the device. Refer to “Creating a Secure
Management VLAN” on page 10-2 for more information.

Commands
For information about...
show host vlan

10-18

set host vlan

10-18

clear host vlan

10-19

show host vlan
Use this command to display the current host VLAN.

Syntax
show host vlan

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the host VLAN:
C3(su)->show host vlan
Host vlan is 7.

set host vlan
Use this command to assign host status to a VLAN.

Syntax
set host vlan vlan-id

10-18

Refer to page...

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

clear host vlan

Parameters
vlan‐id

Specifies the number of the VLAN to set as the host VLAN.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The host VLAN should be a secure VLAN where only designated users are allowed access. For
example, a host VLAN could be specifically created for device management. This would allow a
management station connected to the management VLAN to manage all ports on the device and
make management secure by preventing management via ports assigned to other VLANs.
Note: Before you can designate a VLAN as the host VLAN, you must create a VLAN using the set
of commands described in “Creating and Naming Static VLANs” on page 10-5.

Example
This example shows how to set VLAN 7 as the host VLAN:
C3(su)->set host vlan 7

clear host vlan
Use this command to reset the host VLAN to the default setting of 1.

Syntax
clear host vlan

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the host VLAN to the default setting:
C3(su)->clear host vlan

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-19

Enabling/Disabling GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)

Enabling/Disabling GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)
About GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)
The following sections describe the device operation when its ports are operating under the
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) application – GARP VLAN Registration Protocol
(GVRP).

Overview
The purpose of GVRP is to dynamically create VLANs across a switched network. When a VLAN
is declared, the information is transmitted out GVRP configured ports on the device in a GARP
formatted frame using the GVRP multicast MAC address. A switch that receives this frame,
examines the frame, and extracts the VLAN IDs. GVRP then creates the VLANs and adds the
receiving port to its tagged member list for the extracted VLAN ID (s). The information is then
transmitted out the other GVRP configured ports of the device. Figure 10‐1 shows an example of
how VLAN blue from end station A would be propagated across a switch network.

How It Works
In Figure 10‐1 on page 10‐21, Switch 4, port 1 is registered as being a member of VLAN Blue and
then declares this fact out all its ports (2 and 3) to Switch 1 and Switch 2. These two devices
register this in the port egress lists of the ports (Switch 1, port 1 and Switch 2, port 1) that received
the frames with the information. Switch 2, which is connected to Switch 3 and Switch 5 declares
the same information to those two devices and the port egress list of each port is updated with the
new information, accordingly.
Configuring a VLAN on an 802.1Q switch creates a static VLAN entry. The entry will always
remain registered and will not time out. However, dynamic entries will time‐out and their
registrations will be removed from the member list if the end station A is removed. This ensures
that, if switches are disconnected or if end stations are removed, the registered information
remains accurate.
The end result is that the port egress list of a port is updated with information about VLANs that
reside on that port, even if the actual station on the VLAN is several hops away.

10-20

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

Enabling/Disabling GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)

Figure 10-1

Example of VLAN Propagation via GVRP
Switch 3

Switch 2

R 2D

1

3

1

D

R

Switch 1

1

R

2
End
Station A

D 3 D

1

R
D

Switch 4

1

R Switch 5

R

= Port registered as a member of VLAN Blue
= Port declaring VLAN Blue

Purpose
To dynamically create VLANs across a switched network. The GVRP command set is used to
display GVRP configuration information, the current global GVRP state setting, individual port
settings (enable or disable) and timer settings. By default, GVRP is enabled globally on the device,
but disabled on all ports.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show gvrp

10-22

show garp timer

10-22

set gvrp

10-23

clear gvrp

10-24

set garp timer

10-24

clear garp timer

10-25

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-21

show gvrp

show gvrp
Use this command to display GVRP configuration information.

Syntax
show gvrp [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays GVRP configuration information for specific port(s). For
a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, GVRP configuration information will be displayed for all ports and
the device.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display GVRP status for the device and for fw.2.1:
C3(su)->show gvrp ge.2.1
Global GVRP status is enabled.
Port Number
----------ge.2.1

GVRP status
----------disabled

show garp timer
Use this command to display GARP timer values for one or more ports.

Syntax
show garp timer [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays GARP timer information for specific port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, GARP timer information will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

10-22

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

set gvrp

Example
This example shows how to display GARP timer information on ports 1 through 10 in slot 1:
Note: For a functional description of the terms join, leave, and leaveall timers, refer to the
standard IEEE 802.1Q documentation, which is not supplied with this device.
C3(su)->show garp timer ge.1.1-10
Port based GARP Configuration: (Timer units are centiseconds)
Port Number
Join
Leave
Leaveall
----------- ---------- ---------- ---------ge.1.1
20
60
1000
ge.1.2
20
60
1000
ge.1.3
20
60
1000
ge.1.4
20
60
1000
ge.1.5
20
60
1000
ge.1.6
20
60
1000
ge.1.7
20
60
1000
ge.1.8
20
60
1000
ge.1.9
20
60
1000
ge.1.10
20
60
1000

Table 10‐3 provides an explanation of the command output. For details on using the set gvrp
command to enable or disable GVRP, refer to “set gvrp” on page 10‐23. For details on using the set
garp timer command to change default timer values, refer to “set garp timer” on page 10‐24.
Table 10-3

show gvrp configuration Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Port Number

Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7-1.

Join

Join timer setting.

Leave

Leave timer setting.

Leaveall

Leavall timer setting.

set gvrp
Use this command to enable or disable GVRP globally on the device or on one or more ports.

Syntax
set gvrp {enable | disable} [port-string]

Parameters
disable |
enable

Disables or enables GVRP on the device.

port‐string

(Optional) Disables or enables GVRP on specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in
the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, GVRP will be disabled or enabled for all ports.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-23

clear gvrp

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to enable GVRP globally on the device:
C3(su)->set gvrp enable

This example shows how to disable GVRP globally on the device:
C3(su)->set gvrp disable

This example shows how to enable GVRP on ge.1.3:
C3(su)->set gvrp enable ge.1.3

clear gvrp
Use this command to clear GVRP status or on one or more ports.

Syntax
clear gvrp [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Clears GVRP status on specific port(s). For a detailed description of
possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on
page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, GVRP status will be cleared for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear GVRP status globally on the device:
C3(su)->clear gvrp

set garp timer
Use this command to adjust the values of the join, leave, and leaveall timers.

Syntax
set garp timer {[join timer-value] [leave timer-value] [leaveall timer-value]}
port-string

Parameters

10-24

join timer‐value

Sets the GARP join timer in centiseconds (Refer to 802.1Q standard.)

leave timer‐value

Sets the GARP leave timer in centiseconds (Refer to 802.1Q standard.)

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

clear garp timer

leaveall timer‐
value

Sets the GARP leaveall timer in centiseconds (Refer to 802.1Q standard.)

port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to configure GARP timer settings. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The setting of these timers is critical and should only be changed by personnel familiar with the
802.1Q standards documentation, which is not supplied with this device.

Examples
This example shows how to set the GARP join timer value to 100 centiseconds for all ports:
C3(su)->set garp timer join 100 *.*.*

This example shows how to set the leave timer value to 300 centiseconds for all ports:
C3(su)->set garp timer leave 300 *.*.*

This example shows how to set the leaveall timer value to 20000 centiseconds for all ports:
C3(su)->set garp timer leaveall 20000 *.*.*

clear garp timer
Use this command to reset GARP timers back to default values.

Syntax
clear garp timer {[join] [leave] [leaveall]} port-string

Parameters
join

(Optional) Resets the join timer to 20 centiseconds.

leave

(Optional) Resets the leave timer to 60 centiseconds.

leaveall

(Optional) Resets the leaveall time to 1000 centiseconds.

port‐string

Specifies the port or ports on which to reset the GARP timer(s).

Defaults
At least one optional parameter must be entered.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

10-25

clear garp timer

Example
The example shows how to reset the GARP leave timer to 60 centiseconds.
C3(su)->clear garp timer leave ge.1.1

10-26

802.1Q VLAN Configuration

11
Policy Classification Configuration
This chapter describes the Policy Classification set of commands and how to use them.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Policy Classification Configuration Summary

11-1

Configuring Policy Profiles

11-2

Configuring Classification Rules

11-6

Assigning Ports to Policy Profiles

11-15

Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS)

11-17

Note: An Enterasys Networks Feature Guide document containing an in-depth discussion of Policy
configuration is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

Policy Classification Configuration Summary
SecureStack C3 devices support policy profile‐based provisioning of network resources by
allowing IT administrators to:
•

Create, change or remove policy profiles based on business‐specific use of network services.

•

Permit or deny access to specific services by creating and assigning classification rules which
map user profiles to protocol‐based frame filtering policies configured for a particular VLAN
or Class of Service (CoS).

•

Assign or unassign ports to policy profiles so that only ports activated for a profile will be
allowed to transmit frames accordingly.
Note: It is recommended that you use Enterasys Networks NMS Policy Manager as an alternative
to CLI for configuring policy classification on the SecureStack C3 devices.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-1

Configuring Policy Profiles

Configuring Policy Profiles
Purpose
To review, create, change and remove user profiles that relate to business‐driven policies for
managing network resources.
Note: B3, C3, and G3 devices support profile-based CoS traffic rate limiting only. Policy rules
specifying CoS will only rate limit on D2, C2 and B2 devices, including when C2 and B2 devices are
configured on mixed stacks containing B3 and C3 devices.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show policy profile

11-2

set policy profile

11-4

clear policy profile

11-5

show policy profile
Use this command to display policy profile information.

Syntax
show policy profile {all | profile-index [consecutive-pids] [-verbose]}

Parameters
all | profile‐index

Displays policy information for all profile indexes or a specific profile index.

consecutive‐pids

(Optional) Displays information for specified consecutive profile indexes.

‐verbose

(Optional) Displays detailed information.

Defaults
If optional parameters are not specified, summary information will be displayed for the specified
index or all indices.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display policy information for profile 11:
C3(su)->show policy profile 11
Profile Index
: 11
Profile Name
: MacAuth1
Row Status
: active
Port VID Status
: Enable
Port VID Override
: 11
CoS
: 0

11-2

Policy Classification Configuration

show policy profile

CoS Status
Egress Vlans
Forbidden Vlans
Untagged Vlans
Rule Precedence

Admin Profile Usage
Oper Profile Usage
Dynamic Profile Usage

: Disable
: none
: none
: none
: 1-31
:MACSource(1),MACDest(2),Unknown(3),
:Unknown(4),Unknown(5),Unknown(6),
:Unknown(7),Unknown(8),Unknown(9),
:Unknown(10),Unknown(11),IPSource(12),
:IPDest(13),IPFrag(14),UDPSrcPort(15),
:UDPDestPort(16),TCPSrcPort(17),TCPDestPort(18),
:ICMPType(19),Unknown(20),IPTOS(21),
:IPProto(22),Unknown(23),Unknown(24),
:Ether(25),Unknown(26),VLANTag(27),
:Unknown(28),Unknown(29),Unknown(30),
:port(31)
: none
: none
: none

Table 11‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 11-1

show policy profile Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Profile Index

Number of the profile.

Profile Name

User-supplied name assigned to this policy profile.

Row Status

Whether or not the policy profile is enabled (active) or disabled.

Port VID Status

Whether or not PVID override is enabled or disabled for this profile. If all
classification rules associated with this profile are missed, then this parameter, if
specified, determines default behavior.

Port VID Override

The PVID assigned to packets, if PVID override is enabled.

CoS

CoS priority value to assign to packets, if CoS override is enabled.

CoS Status

Whether or not Class of Service override is enabled or disabled for this profile. If all
classification rules associated with this profile are missed, then this parameter, if
specified, determines default behavior.

Egress VLANs

VLAN(s) that ports to which the policy profile is assigned can use for tagged egress.

Forbidden VLANs

VLAN(s) forbidden to ports to which the policy profile is assigned.

Untagged VLANs

VLAN(s) that ports to which the policy profile is assigned can use for untagged
egress.

Rule Precedence

Displays the precedence of types of rules.

Admin Profile Usage Ports administratively assigned to use this policy profile.
Oper Profile Usage

Ports currently assigned to use this policy profile.

Dynamic Profile
Usage

Port dynamically assigned to use this policy profile.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-3

set policy profile

set policy profile
Use this command to create a policy profile entry.

Syntax
set policy profile profile-index [name name] [pvid-status {enable | disable}]
[pvid pvid] [cos-status {enable | disable}] [cos cos] [egress-vlans egressvlans][forbidden-vlans forbidden-vlans] [untagged-vlans untagged-vlans]
[precedence precedence-list] [append] [clear]

Parameters
profile‐index

Specifies an index number for the policy profile. Valid values are 1 ‐ 255.

name name

(Optional) Specifies a name for the policy profile. This is a string from 1 to
64 characters.

pvid‐status
enable | disable

(Optional) Enables or disables PVID override for this profile. If all
classification rules associated with this profile are missed, then this
parameter, if specified, determines default behavior.

pvid pvid

(Optional) Specifies the PVID to packets, if PVID override is enabled and
invoked as default behavior.

cos‐status enable
| disable

(Optional) Enables or disables Class of Service override for this profile. If all
classification rules associated with this profile are missed, then this
parameter, if specified, determines default behavior.
Note: A maximum of 99 rules can be supported per policy profile for policy
profiles that have cos-status enabled.

cos cos

(Optional) Specifies a CoS value to assign to packets, if CoS override is
enabled and invoked as default behavior. Valid values are 0 to 7.

egress‐vlans
egress‐vlans

(Optional) Specifies that the port to which this policy profile is applied
should be added to the egress list of the VLANs defined by egress‐vlans.
Packets will be formatted as tagged.

forbidden‐vlans
forbidden‐vlans

(Optional) Specifies that the port to which this policy profile is applied
should be added as forbidden to the egress list of the VLANs defined by
forbidden‐vlans. Packets from this port will not be allowed to participate in
the listed VLANs.

untagged‐vlans
untagged‐vlans

(Optional) Specifies that the port to which this policy profile is applied
should be added to the egress list of the VLANs defined by untagged‐vlans.
Packets will be formatted as untagged.

append

(Optional) Appends this policy profile setting to settings previously
specified for this policy profile by the egress‐vlans,forbidden‐vlans, or
untagged‐vlans parameters.
If append is not used, previous VLAN settings are replaced.

11-4

clear

(Optional) Appends this policy profile setting from settings previously
specified for this policy profile by the egress‐vlans,forbidden‐vlans, or
untagged‐vlans parameters.

precedence
precedence‐list

(Optional) Assigns a rule precedence to this profile. Lower values will be
given higher precedence. For a list of values, refer to the show policy
profile command output.

Policy Classification Configuration

clear policy profile

Defaults
If optional parameters are not specified, none will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to create a policy profile 1 named “netadmin” with PVID override
enabled for PVID 10, and Class‐of‐Service override enabled for CoS 5. This profile can use VLAN
10 for untagged egress:
C3(su)->set policy profile 1 name netadmin pvid-status enable pvid 10 cos-status
enable cos 5 untagged-vlans 10

clear policy profile
Use this command to delete a policy profile entry.

Syntax
clear policy profile profile-index

Parameters
profile‐index

Specifies the index number of the profile entry to be deleted. Valid values
are 1 to 255.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to delete policy profile 8:
C3(su)->clear policy profile 8

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-5

Configuring Classification Rules

Configuring Classification Rules
Purpose
To review, create, assign, and unassign classification rules to policy profiles. This maps user
profiles to protocol‐based frame filtering policies.
Note: B3, C3, and G3 devices support profile-based CoS traffic rate limiting only. Policy rules
specifying CoS will only rate limit on D2, C2 and B2 devices, including when C2 and B2 devices are
configured on mixed stacks containing B3 and C3 devices.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show policy rule

11-6

show policy capability

11-8

set policy rule

11-10

clear policy rule

11-13

clear policy all-rules

11-14

show policy rule
Use this command to display policy classification rule information.

Syntax
show policy rule [all | admin-profile | profile-index] [ether |ipproto |
ipdestsocket | ipsourcesocket | iptos | macdest | macsource | tcpdestport |
tcpsourceport | udpdestport | udpsourceport] [data] [mask mask] [port-string portstring] [rule-status {active | not-in-service | not-ready}] [storage-type {nonvolatile | volatile}] [vlan vlan] | [drop | forward] [dynamic-pid dynamic-pid]
[cos cos] [admin-pid admin-pid] [-verbose] [usage-list] [display-if-used]

Parameters

11-6

all | admin‐
profile | profile‐
index

Displays policy classification rules for all profiles, the admin‐profile, or for
a specific profile index number. Valid values are 1 ‐ 1023.

ether

Displays Ethernet type II rules.

ipproto

Displays IP protocol field in IP packet rules.

ipdestsocket

Displays IP destination address rules.

ipsourcesocket

Displays IP source address rules.

iptos

Displays Type of Service rules.

macdest

Displays MAC destination address rules.

macsource

Displays MAC source address rules.

tcpdestport

Displays TCP destination port rules.

Policy Classification Configuration

show policy rule

tcpsourceport

Displays TCP source port rules.

udpdestport

Displays UDP destination port rules.

udpsourceport

Displays UDP source port rules.

data

Displays rules for a predefined classifier. This value is dependent on the
classification type entered. Refer to Table 11‐3 for valid values for each
classification type.

mask mask

(Optional) Displays rules for a specific data mask. Refer to Table 11‐3 for
valid values for each classification type and data value.

port‐string port‐
string

(Optional) Displays rules related to a specific ingress port.

rule‐status active
| not‐in‐service |
not‐ready

(Optional) Displays rules related to a specific rules status.

storage‐type non‐
volatile | volatile

(Optional) Displays rules configured for either non‐volatile or volatile
storage.

vlan vlan

(Optional) Displays rules for a specific VLAN ID.

drop | forward

Displays rules based on whether matching packets will be dropped or
forwarded.

dynamic‐pid
dynamic‐pid

Displays rules associated with a specific dynamic policy ID.

cos cos

(Optional) Displays rules for a Class‐of‐Service value. (Not supported on
B3, C3, G3 devices.)

admin‐pid
admin‐pid

Displays rules associated with a specific administrative policy ID [1..1023].

‐verbose

(Optional) Displays detailed information.

usage‐list

(Optional) If selected, each ruleʹs usage‐list shall be checked and shall
display only those ports which have applied this rule.

display‐if‐used

(Optional) Displays rule(s) only if they are applied to at least one port.

Defaults
If verbose is not specified, summary information will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display policy classification information for Ethernet type 2 rules
C3(su)->show policy rule ether
|PID |Rule Type
|Rule Data
|02
|Ether
|2048 (0x0800)
|02
|Ether
|2049 (0x0801)
|02
|Ether
|2989 (0x0bad)
|02
|Ether
|33079 (0x8137)

|Mk|PortStr
|16|All
|16|All
|16|All
|16|All

|RS|ST|VLAN|CoS
| A|NV|fwrd|
| A|NV|drop|
| A|NV|drop|
| A|NV|drop|

|U|
|?|
|?|
|?|
|?|

This example shows how to display policy classification information for administrative rule 1
C3(su)->show policy rule admin-pid 1
|Admin|Rule Type
|Rule Data

|Mk|PortStr

|RS|ST|dPID|aPID|U|

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-7

show policy capability

|admin|Port
|admin|Port
|admin|Port
|admin|Port
|admin|Port
|admin|Port
|admin|Port
|admin|Port
|admin|Port
|admin|Port
|admin|Port
|admin|Port

|ge.1.1
|ge.1.2
|ge.1.3
|ge.1.4
|ge.1.5
|ge.1.6
|ge.1.7
|ge.1.8
|ge.1.9
|ge.1.10
|ge.1.11
|ge.1.12

|16|ge.1.1
|16|ge.1.2
|16|ge.1.3
|16|ge.1.4
|16|ge.1.5
|16|ge.1.6
|16|ge.1.7
|16|ge.1.8
|16|ge.1.9
|16|ge.1.10
|16|ge.1.11
|16|ge.1.12

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

A|NV|
A|NV|
A|NV|
A|NV|
A|NV|
A|NV|
A|NV|
A|NV|
A|NV|
A|NV|
A|NV|
A|NV|

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

1|?|
1|?|
1|?|
1|?|
1|?|
1|?|
1|?|
1|?|
1|?|
1|?|
1|?|
1|?|

Table 11‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 11-2

show policy rule Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

PID

Profile index number. Assigned to this classification rule with the set policy profile
command (“set policy profile” on page 11-4).

Rule Type

Type of classification rule. Refer to Table 11-3 for valid types.

Rule Data

Rule data value. Refer to Table 11-3 for valid values for each classification type.

Mk

Rule data mask. Refer to Table 11-3 for valid values for each classification data
value.

PortStr

Ingress port(s) to which this rule applies.

RS

Whether or not the status of this rule is active (A), not in service or not ready.

ST

Whether or not this rule’s storage type is non-volatile (NV) or volatile (V).

VLAN

VLAN ID to which this rule applies and whether or not matching packets will be
dropped or forwarded.

CoS

If applicable, Class of Service value to which this rule applies.

U

Whether or not this rule has been used.

dPID

Whether or not this is a dynamic profile ID.

aPID

Whether or not this is an administrative profile ID.

show policy capability
Use this command to display detailed policy classification capabilities supported by your
SecureStack C3 device.

Syntax
show policy capability

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

11-8

Policy Classification Configuration

show policy capability

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
Use this command to display detailed policy classification capabilities supported by your
SecureStack C3 device. The output of this command shows a table listing classifiable traffic
attributes and the type of actions, by rule type, that can be executed relative to each attribute.
Above the table is a list of all the actions possible on this device.
The left‐most column of the table lists all possible classifiable traffic attributes. The next two
columns from the left indicate how policy profiles may be assigned, either administratively or
dynamically. The next four columns from the left indicate the actions that may be performed. The
last three columns indicate auditing options.
An x in an action column for a traffic attribute row indicates that your system has the capability to
perform that action for traffic classified by that attribute.

Example
This example shows how to display the device’s policy classification capabilities. Refer to “set
policy rule” on page 11‐10 for a description of the parameters displayed:
C3(su)->show policy capability
The following supports related to policy are supported in this device:
VLAN Forwarding
Priority
Permit
Deny
Precedence Reordering
Rules Table
Longest Prefix Rules
=============================================================
|
| D |
|
|
|
| F |
|
| D |
|
| Y |
|
|
|
| O | S |
| I |
|
| N | A |
|
|
| R | Y |
| S |
|
| A | D | V |
| D | W | S | T | A |
|
| M | M | L | C | R | A | L | R | B |
|
| I | I | A | O | O | R | O | A | L |
| SUPPORTED RULE TYPES
| C | N | N | S | P | D | G | P | E |
=============================================================
|MAC source address
|
|
|
| X | X | X |
|
|
|
|MAC destination address |
|
|
| X | X | X |
|
|
|
|IPX source address
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|IPX destination address |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|IPX source socket
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|IPX destination socket
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|IPX transmission control |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|IPX type field
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|IPv6 source address
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|IPv6 destination address |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|IPv6 flow label
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|IP source address
|
|
|
| X | X | X |
|
|
|
|IP destination address
|
|
|
| X | X | X |
|
|
|
|IP fragmentation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|UDP port source
|
|
|
| X | X | X |
|
|
|
|UDP port destination
|
|
|
| X | X | X |
|
|
|
|TCP port source
|
|
|
| X | X | X |
|
|
|
|TCP port destination
|
|
|
| X | X | X |
|
|
|
|ICMP packet type
|
|
|
| | | |
|
|
|
|TTL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|IP type of service
|
|
|
| X | X | X |
|
|
|
|IP proto
|
|
|
| X | X | X |
|
|
|

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-9

set policy rule

|Ether II packet type
|
|
| X | X | X | X |
|
|
|LLC DSAP/SSAP/CTRL
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|VLAN tag
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|Replace tci
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|Port string
| X | X | X | X | X | X |
|
|
=============================================================

|
|
|
|
|

set policy rule
Use this command to assign incoming untagged frames to a specific policy profile and to VLAN or
Class‐of‐Service classification rules.
Note: Refer to Appendix A, Policy and Authentication Capacities for information about limits on
certain rule types for this platform.

Syntax
This command has two forms of syntax—one to create an admin rule, and the other to create a
traffic classification rule and attach it to a policy profile.
set policy rule admin-profile {vlantag data [mask mask] admin-pid profile-index}
[port-string port-string]
set policy rule profile-index {ether | ipproto | ipdestsocket | ipsourcesocket |
iptos | macdest | macsource | tcpdestport | tcpsourceport | udpdestport |
udpsourceport} data [mask mask] {[vlan vlan] [cos cos] | [drop | forward]}

Note: Classification rules are automatically enabled when created.

Parameters
The following parameters apply to creating an admin rule. See the Usage section below for more
information about admin rules.
admin‐profile

Specifies that this is an admin rule.

vlantag data

Classifies based on VLAN tag specified by data. Value of data can range
from 1 to 4094 or 0xFFF.

mask mask

(Optional) Specifies the number of significant bits to match, dependent
on the data value entered. Value of mask can range from 1 to 12.
Refer to Table 11‐3 for valid values for each classification type and data
value.

admin‐pid
profile‐index

Associates this admin rule with a policy profile, identified by its index
number. Policy profiles are configured with the set policy profile
command as described in “set policy profile” on page 11‐4.
Valid profile‐index values are 1‐ 255.

port‐string port‐string

(Optional) Assigns this rule with the specified policy profile on specific
ingress port(s). Rule would not be used until policy is assigned to the
specified port(s) using the set policy port command as described in “set
policy port” on page 11‐15.

The following parameters apply to creating a traffic classification rule.

11-10

Policy Classification Configuration

set policy rule

profile‐index

Specifies a policy profile number to which this rule will be assigned.
Policy profiles are configured with the set policy profile command as
described in “set policy profile” on page 11‐4. Valid profile‐index values
are 1‐ 255.

ether

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified type field
in Ethernet II packet.

ipproto

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified Protocol
field in IP packet.

ipdestsocket

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified
destination IP address with optional post‐fixed port.

ipsourcesocket

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified source IP
address, with optional post‐fixed port.

iptos

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified Type of
Service field in IP packet.

macdest

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified MAC
destination address.

macsource

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified MAC
source address.

tcpdestport

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified TCP
destination port.

tcpsourceport

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified TCP
source port.

udpdestport

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified UDP
destination port.

udpsourceport

Specifies that the rule should apply to traffic with the specified UDP
source port.

data

Specifies the code for the specified traffic classifier (listed above). This
value is dependent on the classification type entered. Refer to Table 11‐3
for valid values for each classification type.

mask mask

(Optional) Specifies the number of significant bits to match, dependent on
the data value entered. Refer to Table 11‐3 for valid values for each
classification type and data value.

vlan vlan

Specifies the action of the rule is to classify to a VLAN ID.

cos cos

Specifies the action of the rule is to classify to a Class‐of‐Service ID. Valid
values are 0 ‐ 4095. A value of ‐1 indicates that no CoS forwarding
behavior modification is desired. (Not supported on B3, C3, and G3.)

drop | forward

Specifies that packets within this classification will be dropped or
forwarded.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-11

set policy rule

Usage
An admin rule can be used to map incoming tagged frames to a policy role (profile). There can be
only one admin rule configured per system (stack). Typically, this rule is used to implement the
“User + IP phone” legacy feature. Refer to “Configuring User + IP Phone Authentication” on
page 26‐48 for more information. You would configure a policy profile/role for IP phones (for
example, assigning the traffic to a “voice” VLAN), then associate that policy profile with the
admin rule, and associate the admin rule with the desired ports. Users authenticating over the
same port will typically use a dynamically assigned policy role.
A policy classification rule has two main parts: Traffic Description and Actions. The Traffic
Description identifies the type of traffic to which the rule will pertain. Actions specify whether
that traffic will be assigned class of service, assigned to a VLAN, or both.
Table 11‐3 provides the set policy rule data values that can be entered for a particular parameter,
and the mask bits that can be entered for each classifier associated with that parameter.
Table 11-3

Valid Values for Policy Classification Rules

Classification Rule Parameter

data value

mask bits

ether

Type field in Ethernet II packet:
1536 - 65535 or 0x600 - 0xFFFF

Not applicable.

ipproto

Protocol field in IP packet:
0 - 255 or 0 - 0xFF

Not applicable.

Destination or Source IP Address:
ipdestsocket
ipsourcesocket

IP Address in dotted decimal
format: 000.000.000.000 and
(Optional) post-fixed port: 0 65535

1 - 48

iptos

Type of Service field in IP packet:
0 - 252 or 0 - 0xFC

Not applicable.

Destination or Source MAC:
macdest
macsource

MAC Address: 00-00-00-00-0000

1 - 48

Destination or Source TCP port:
tcpdestport
tcpsourceport

TCP Port Number:
0 - 65535 or 0 - 0xFFFF

1 - 16

Destination or Source UDP port:
udpsourceport
udpdestport

UDP Port Number:
0 - 65535 or 0 - 0xFFFF

1 - 16

vlantag

VLAN tag: 1- 4094

Not applicable.

Examples
This example shows how to use Table 11‐3 to assign a rule to policy profile 3 that will filter
Ethernet II Type 1526 frames to VLAN 7:
C3(su)->set policy rule 3 ether 1526 vlan 7

This example shows how to use Table 11‐3 to assign a rule to policy profile 5 that will forward
UDP packets from source port 45:
C3(su)->set policy rule 5 udpportsource 45 forward

11-12

Policy Classification Configuration

clear policy rule

This example shows how to use Table 11‐3 to assign a rule to policy profile 1 that will drop IP
source traffic from IP address 1.2.3.4. If mask 32 is not specified as shown, a default mask of 48 bits
(IP address + port) would be applied:
C3(su)->set policy rule 1 ipsourcesocket 1.2.3.4 mask 32 drop

clear policy rule
Use this command to delete policy classification rule entries.

Syntax
This command has two forms of syntax—one to clear an admin rule (for policy ID 0), and the other
to clear a classification rule.
clear policy rule admin-profile {vlantag data [mask mask]
clear policy rule profile-index {all-pid-entries | {ether | ipproto | ipdestsocket
| ipsourcesocket | iptos | macdest | macsource | tcpdestport | tcpsourceport |
udpdestport | udpsourceport}}

Parameters
The following parameters apply to deleting an admin rule.
admin‐profile

Specifies that the rule to be deleted is an admin rule for policy ID 0.

vlantag data

Deletes the rule based on VLAN tag specified by data. Value of data can
range from 1 to 4094 or 0xFFF.

mask mask

(Optional) Specifies the number of significant bits to match, dependent
on the data value entered. Value of mask can range from 1 to 12.
Refer to Table 11‐3 for valid values for each classification type and data
value.

The following parameters apply to deleting a classification rule.
profile‐index

Specifies a policy profile for which to delete classification rules. Valid
profile‐index values are 1 ‐ 255.

all‐pid‐entries

Deletes all entries associated with the specified policy profile.

ether

Deletes associated Ethernet II classification rule.

ipproto

Deletes associated IP protocol classification rule.

ipdestsocket

Deletes associated IP destination classification rule.

ipsourcesocket

Deletes associated IP source classification rule.

iptos

Deletes associated IP Type of Service classification rule.

macdest

Deletes associated MAC destination address classification rule.

macsource

Deletes associated MAC source address classification rule.

tcpdestport

Deletes associated TCP destination port classification rule.

tcpsourceport

Deletes associated TCP source port classification rule.

udpdestport

Deletes associated UDP destination port classification rule.

udpsourceport

Deletes associated UDP source port classification rule.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-13

clear policy all-rules

Defaults
When applicable, data and mask must be specified for individual rules to be cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to delete Ethernet II Type 1526 classification rule entries associated with
policy profile 1 from all ports.
C3(su)->clear policy rule 1 ether 1526

This example shows how to remove a rule from policy profile 5 that will forward UDP frames
from source port 45.
C3(su)->clear policy rule 5 udpportsource 45 forward

clear policy all-rules
Use this command to remove all policy classification rules.

Syntax
clear policy all-rules

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to remove all administrative and policy index rules:
C3(su)->clear policy all-rules

11-14

Policy Classification Configuration

Assigning Ports to Policy Profiles

Assigning Ports to Policy Profiles
Note: Refer to Appendix A, Policy and Authentication Capacities for information about policy
limits for this platform.

Purpose
To assign and unassign ports to policy profiles.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

set policy port

11-15

clear policy port

11-16

set policy port
Use this command to assign ports to a policy profile.

Syntax
set policy port port-string profile-index

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) to add to the policy profile. For a detailed description
of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI”
on page 7‐1.

profile‐index

Specifies the ID of the policy profile (role) to which the port(s) will be
added. This value must match the profile‐index value assigned using the
set policy profile command (“set policy profile” on page 11‐4) in order
for a policy profile to be active on the specified port.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports 5 through 15 in slot 1 to transmit frames
according to policy profile 1:
C3(su)->set policy port ge.1.5-15 1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-15

clear policy port

clear policy port
Use this command to remove a policy profile from one or more ports.

Syntax
clear policy port port-string profile-index

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) from which to remove the policy profile. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

profile‐index

Specifies the ID of the policy profile (role) to which the port(s) will be
added. This value must match the profile‐index value assigned using the
set policy profile command (“set policy profile” on page 11‐4) in order
for a policy profile to be active on the specified port.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to remove policy profile 10 from port 21 in slot 1:
C3(rw)->clear policy port ge.1.21 10

11-16

Policy Classification Configuration

Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS)

Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS)
Note: It is recommended that you use Enterasys Networks NMS Policy Manager as an alternative
to CLI for configuring policy-based CoS on the switches.

The SecureStack C3 supports Class of Service (CoS), which allows you to assign mission‐critical
data to a higher priority through the device by delaying less critical traffic during periods of
congestion. The higher priority traffic going through the device is serviced first (before lower
priority traffic). The Class of Service capability of the device is implemented by a priority
queueing mechanism. Class of Service is based on the IEEE 802.1D (802.1p) standard specification,
and allows you to define eight priorities (0‐7, with 7 granted highest priority) and up to 8 transmit
queues (0‐7) for each port.
By default, policy‐based CoS is disabled on the device, and default or user‐assigned port‐based
802.1D (802.1p) settings are used to determine traffic prioritization. When policy‐based CoS is
enabled, the default and user‐assigned policy‐based settings will override port‐based settings
described in Chapter 12.
Class of Service functionality can also be used to control broadcast, unknown unicast, and/or
multicast flooding. This feature prevents configured ports from being disrupted by a traffic storm
by rate‐limiting specific types of packets through those ports. Refer to “About CoS‐Based Flood
Control” on page 11‐19 for more information.

About Policy-Based CoS Configurations
Once enabled using the set cos state command, you can add to the policy‐based CoS function by
defining new port groupings, and assigning inbound rate limiters. The process for user‐defined
CoS configuration involves the following steps and associated commands listed in Procedure 11‐1.
An example follows the procedure.
Procedure 11-1

User-Defined CoS Configuration

Step

Task

Command(s)

1.

Enable CoS

set cos state enable

2.

Create CoS IRL port groups

set cos port-config irl

3.

Define physical rate limiters for groups

set cos port-resource irl

4.

Create virtual reference for the IRL resource
(physical reference) for each port group

set cos reference

5.

Add IRL reference to CoS settings table

set cos settings

Example
This example creates different inbound rate limiters for two port groups and then assigns them to
traffic with a CoS setting of 0.
1.

Configure two port groups, one for user ports and one for uplink ports and assign ports to the
groups. Port group 1.0 will represent user ports, group 2.0 will represent uplink ports.
C3(su)->set cos port-config irl 1.0 name Users ports ge.1.1-46
C3(su)->set cos port-config irl 2.0 name Uplink ports ge.1.47-48
C3(su)->show cos port-config
Inbound Rate Limiting Port Configuration Entries

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-17

Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS)

---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Default
Port Group
:0
Port Type
:0
Assigned Ports
:none
---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Users
Port Group
:1
Port Type
:0
Assigned Ports
:ge.1.1-46
---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Uplink
Port Group
:2
Port Type
:0
Assigned Ports
:ge.1.47-48
----------------------------------------------------------------------

2.

Configure physical inbound rate limiters for each port group. For the user port group (1.0),
create an IRL (irl‐index of 1) for 512 kbps. For the uplink port group (2.0), create an IRL (irl‐
index of 1) for 10 megabits per second (10,000 kbps).
C3(su)->set cos port-resource irl 1.0 1 unit kbps rate 512
C3(su)->set cos port-resource irl 2.0 1 unit kbps rate 10000

3.

C3(su)->show cos port-resource irl 1.0 1
Group Index Resource Type Unit
Rate
----------- -------- ---- ---- ---------1.0
1
irl kbps 512

Rate Limit Type Action
--------------- -----drop
none

C3(su)->show cos port-resource irl 2.0 1
Group Index Resource Type Unit
Rate
----------- -------- ---- ---- ---------2.0
1
irl kbps 10000

Rate Limit Type Action
--------------- -----drop
none

In the CoS IRL reference mapping table for each port group, create a reference for each IRL
resource created in the previous step. We will use reference number 1.
C3(su)->set cos reference irl 1.0 1 rate-limit 1
C3(su)->set cos reference irl 2.0 1 rate-limit 1
C3(su)->show cos reference irl 1.0
Group Index
----------1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
...
1.0
1.0
1.0

Reference
--------0
1
2
3

Type
---irl
irl
irl
irl

Rate Limiter
-----------none
1
none
none

97
98
99

irl
irl
irl

none
none
none

C3(su)->show cos reference irl 2.0
Group Index
----------2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
...

11-18

Policy Classification Configuration

Reference
--------0
1
2
3

Type
---irl
irl
irl
irl

Rate Limiter
-----------none
1
none
none

Configuring Policy Class of Service (CoS)

2.0
2.0
2.0

4.

97
98
99

irl
irl
irl

none
none
none

In the CoS settings table, configure a CoS setting for CoS index 1, which has a priority of 0. We
enter the IRL reference, created in the previous step.
C3(su)->set cos settings 0 irl-reference 1
C3(su)->show cos settings
CoS Index Priority
ToS
IRL
--------- ---------- ------- ----0
0
*
1
1
1
*
*
2
2
*
*
3
3
*
*
4
4
*
*
5
5
*
*
6
6
*
*
7
7
*
*

About CoS-Based Flood Control
Co

Note: CoS-based flood control does not require a policy license on SecureStack B3 switches or on
standalone D2 switches.

CoS‐based flood control prevents configured ports from being disrupted by a traffic storm by rate‐
limiting specific types of packets through those ports. When flood control is enabled on a port,
incoming traffic is monitored over one second intervals. During an interval, the incoming traffic
rate for each configured traffic type (unicast, broadcast, multicast) is compared with the
configured traffic flood control rate, specified in packets per second.
If, during a one second interval, the incoming traffic of a configured type reaches the traffic flood
control rate configured on the port, CoS‐based flood control drops the traffic until the interval
ends. Packets are then allowed to flow again until the limit is again reached.
The following procedure describes the steps and commands required to configure CoS‐based
flood control.
Procedure 11-2
Step

Task

Command(s)

1.

Enable CoS.

set cos state enable

2.

Create a CoS flood control port resource, which
specifies flood control rate limiters that can be
mapped to specific ports.

set cos port-resource flood-ctrl

3.

Assign the flood control resource to specific
ports.

set cos port-config flood-ctrl

Example
This example creates a broadcast rate limiter (index 1.0) of 5 packets per second and assigns it to
ports ge.1.2 and ge.2.2.
C3(su)->set cos state enable
C3(su)->set cos port-resource flood-ctrl 1.0 broadcast rate 5
C3(su)->set cos port-config flood-ctrl 1.0 ports ge.1.2;ge.2.2 append

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-19

set cos state

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

set cos state

11-20

show cos state

11-21

clear cos state

11-21

set cos settings

11-22

clear cos settings

11-23

show cos settings

11-23

set cos port-config

11-24

show cos port-config

11-25

clear cos port-config

11-26

set cos port-resource irl

11-27

set cos port-resource flood-ctrl

11-28

show cos port-resource

11-29

clear cos port-resource irl

11-30

clear cos port-resource flood-ctrl

11-31

set cos reference

11-31

show cos reference

11-32

clear cos reference

11-33

show cos unit

11-34

clear cos all-entries

11-35

show cos port-type

11-35

set cos state
Use this command to enable or disable Class of Service.

Syntax
set cos state {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables Class of Service on the switch. Default state is
disabled.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

11-20

Policy Classification Configuration

show cos state

Example
This example shows how to enable Class of Service:
C3(rw)->set cos state enable

show cos state
Use this command to display the Class of Service enable state.

Syntax
show cos state

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to show the Class of Service enable state:
C3(rw)->show cos state
Class-of-Service application is enabled

clear cos state
Use this command to set CoS state back to its default setting of disabled.

Syntax
clear cos state

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the CoS state back to its default setting of disabled:
C3(su)->clear cos state

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-21

set cos settings

set cos settings
Use this command to configure a Class of Service entry in the CoS settings table.

Syntax
set cos settings cos-index priority priority [tos-value tos-value] [irl-reference
irl-reference]

Parameters
cos‐index

Specifies a Class of Service entry. Valid values are 0 to 255.

priority priority

Specifies an 802.1d priority value. Valid values are 0 to 7, with 0 being the
lowest priority. See Usage section below for more information.

tos‐value tos‐value

(Optional) Specifies a Type of Service value. Valid values are 0 to 255. See
Usage section below for more information.

irl‐reference
irl‐reference

(Optional) Set the inbound rate limiter associated with this entry. Valid
values are 0 to 99. See Usage section below for more information.

Defaults
If no optional parameters are specified, none will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The CoS settings table takes individual class of service features and displays them as belonging to
a CoS entry. Essentially, it is used for CoS feature assignment. Each class of service entry consists
of an index, 802.1p priority, an optional ToS value, and an IRL reference.
•

CoS Index
Indexes are unique identifiers for each CoS setting. CoS indexes 0 through 7 are created by
default and mapped directly to 802.1p priority for backwards compatibility. These entries
cannot be removed, and 802.1p priority values cannot be changed. When CoS is enabled,
indexes are assigned. Up to 256 CoS indexes or entries can be configured.

•

Priority
802.1p priority can be applied per CoS index. For each new CoS index created, the user has the
option to assign an 802.1p priority value 0 to 7 for the class of service. CoS indexes 0 through 7
map directly to 802.1p priorities and cannot be changed as they exist for backward
compatibility.

•

ToS
This value can be set per class of service, but is not required. When a frame is assigned to a
class of service for which this value is configured, the ToS field of the incoming IP packet will
be overwritten to the user‐defined value. All but the last two bits of the ToS field are
rewritable. ToS can be set for CoS indexes 0 through 7.

•

IRL Reference
The CoS IRL reference field is optional, as rate limits are not required. The IRL reference does
not assign an inbound rate limit but points to the CoS IRL Reference Mapping Table. This
reference may be thought of as the virtual rate limiter that will assign the physical rate limiter
defined by the IRL Reference Mapping Table.

11-22

Policy Classification Configuration

clear cos settings

Example
This example shows how to create CoS entry 8 with a priority value of 3:
C3(rw)->set cos settings 8 priority 3

clear cos settings
Use this command to clear Class of Service entry settings.

Syntax
clear cos settings cos-list {[all] | [priority] [tos-value] [irl-reference]}

Parameters
cos‐list

Specifies a Class of Service entry to clear.

all

Clears all settings associated with this entry.

priority

Clears the priority value associated with this entry.

tos‐value

Clears the Type of Service value associated with this entry.

irl‐reference

Clear the IRL reference associated with this entry.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the priority for CoS entry 8:
C3(rw)->clear cos settings 8 priority

show cos settings
Use this command to display Class of Service parameters.

Syntax
show cos settings [cos-list]

Parameters
cos‐list

(Optional) Specifies a Class of Service entry to display.

Defaults
If not specified, all CoS entries will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-23

set cos port-config

Example
This example shows how to show all CoS settings:
C3(su)->show cos settings
CoS Index Priority
ToS
IRL
--------- ---------- ------- ------0
0
48
*
1
1
*
*
2
2
*
*
3
3
*
*
4
4
*
*
5
5
*
*
6
6
*
*
7
7
*
*

flood-ctrl
---------enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled

set cos port-config
Use this command to create a port group for inbound rate limiting or flood control and add or
remove ports from the group.

Syntax
set cos port-config {irl|flood-ctrl} group-type-index [name name] [ports portlist] [append] | [clear]

Parameters
irl

Specifies that this is an inbound rate limiting (IRL) port group.

flood‐ctrl

Specifies that this is a flood control port group.

group‐type‐index

Specifies an inbound rate limiting port group/type index. Valid entries are
in the form of group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

name name

(Optional) User defined name for the group.

ports port‐list

(Optional) Ports assigned to the group. All ports must be of the same port
type (Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet).

append

(Optional) Append (add) the ports to the ports that are already in the
group.

clear

(Optional) Clear the given ports from those assigned to the group.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
CoS port groups are identified by group number and the type of ports in the group, in the form of
group#.port‐type. The port group 0.0 exists by default. This default port group cannot be removed
and all physical ports in the system are assigned to it. Up to seven additional port groups (1
11-24

Policy Classification Configuration

show cos port-config

through 7) can be configured. Currently, only one port type (type 0) is supported. This port type
supports 100 limiters.
Additional port groups may be created for flexibility. Ports assigned to a new port group must be
mutually exclusive from the other port group entries—ports are automatically removed from the
default port group—and must be comprised of the same port type as defined by the port group.
The creation of additional port groups could be used to combine similar ports by their function for
flexibility. For instance, ports associated to users can be added to a port group called “Users” and
ports associated to uplink ports can be added to a port group called “Uplink.” Using these port
groups, a single class of service can assign different rate limits to each port group. “User” ports
can be assigned one rate limit, while “Uplink” ports can be assigned another.
The command show cos port‐config displays each port group configured by group and type, with
the group name and associated (assigned) ports. The command show cos port‐type displays the
available inbound rate limiting resources for the port type.

Example
This example configures two port groups, one for user ports and one for uplink ports and assign
ports to the groups. Port group 1.0 will represent user ports, group 2.0 will represent uplink ports.
C3(su)->set cos port-config irl 1.0 name Users ports ge.1.1-46
C3(su)->set cos port-config irl 2.0 name Uplink ports ge.1.47-48

show cos port-config
Use this command to show CoS port groups and the assigned ports.

Syntax
show cos port-config [irl|flood-ctrl [group-type-index]]

Parameters
irl

(Optional) Specifies that inbound rate limiting configuration information
should be displayed.

flood‐ctrl

(Optional) Specifies that flood control rate configuration information
should be displayed.

group‐type‐index

(Optional) Show assigned ports for a specific port group. Valid entries are
in the form of group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

Defaults
The show cos port‐config command by itself will show all Port Groups.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-25

clear cos port-config

Example
This example shows all inbound rate limiting port groups. Note that ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.48
were removed from the default port group 0.0 when they were added to port groups 1.0 and 2.0.
C3(su)->show cos port-config irl
Inbound Rate Limiting Port Configuration Entries
---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Default
Port Group
:0
Port Type
:0
Assigned Ports
:none
---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Users
Port Group
:1
Port Type
:0
Assigned Ports
:ge.1.1-46
---------------------------------------------------------------------Port Group Name :Uplink
Port Group
:2
Port Type
:0
Assigned Ports
:ge.1.47-48
----------------------------------------------------------------------

clear cos port-config
Use this command to clear CoS port groups or assigned ports.

Syntax
clear cos port-config {irl|flood-ctrl} {all | group-type-index [entry] | [name]
[ports]}

Parameters
irl

Clear an IRL port group configuration.

flood‐ctrl

Clear a flood control port group configuration.

all

Clear all inbound rate limiting port‐config non‐default entries.

group‐type‐index

Delete a specific port group or group name, or clear the ports from that
group. Valid entries are in the form of group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

entry

Delete this non‐default inbound rate limiter entry.

name

Clear the administratively assigned textual description of this port group
entry to its default.

ports

Clear the ports assigned to this group to its default.

Defaults
None.

11-26

Policy Classification Configuration

set cos port-resource irl

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The default port group 0.0 cannot be deleted.

Example
This example deletes all IRL Port Groups except for the Default group 0.0:
C3(su)->clear cos port-config irl all

set cos port-resource irl
Use this command to set the inbound rate limit parameters for a specific IRL resource for a specific
port group.

Syntax
set cos port-resource irl group-type-index irl-index {[unit {kbps}] [rate rate]
[type {drop}]}[syslog enable | disable] [trap enable|disable]

Parameters
group‐type‐index

Specifies an inbound rate limiting port group/type index. Valid entries are
in the form of group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

irl‐index

Index number of the inbound rate limiter resource associated with this
entry. Valid values range from 0 to 99.

unit

Unit of measure for the inbound rate limiter (only option is Kbps).

kbps

Kilobits per second.

rate rate

Data rate for this inbound rate limiter. This is the actual rate limit. Valid
values range from 512 to 1,000,000 Kbps for a Gigabit port.

type drop

Action for the rate limiter. The only action option is drop the frame if all
limiters are exceeded.

syslog
enable|disable

Enable or disable reporting a syslog entry if limiters are exceeded.

trap enable|disable Enable or disable sending a trap if limiters are exceeded.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-27

set cos port-resource flood-ctrl

Usage
CoS port resources are where actual physical rate limiters are configured. Resources map directly
to the number of rate limiters supported by the port type. (Port type 0 supports 100 IRL resources.)
Resources exist for each port group and are indexed as group#.port‐type.irl‐index. Port resources
are not initially configured as rate limiting.
Inbound rate limiting, or rate policing, simply drops or clips traffic inbound if a configured rate is
exceeded. CoS inbound rate limiting allows the user to configure rate limits based on kilobits per
second.
The show cos port‐resource command displays the resources available for each port group. By
default, no IRL resources are configured. The default Rate Limiting algorithm is drop and cannot
be configured otherwise.

Example
This example sets the inbound rate limit resource index number 1 for port group 2.0 to 10000 Kbps
or 1 MB:
C3(su)->set cos port-resource irl 2.0 1 unit kbps rate 10000 type drop

set cos port-resource flood-ctrl
Use this command to create a CoS‐based flood control port resource. This resource specifies flood
control rate limiters that can be mapped to specific ports.

Syntax
set cos port-resource flood-ctrl group-type-index {unicast | multicast | broadcast
| all} rate rate

Parameters
group‐type‐index

Specifies a port group/type index. Valid entries are in the form of
group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

unicast

Specifies rate limiting will be applied to unknown unicast traffic.

multicast

Specifies rate limiting will be applied to multicast traffic.

broadcast

Specifies rate limiting will be applied to broadcast traffic.

all

Specifies rate limiting will be applied to unknown unicast, multicast,
and broadcast traffic.

rate rate

Specifies a rate limit in packets per second.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

11-28

Policy Classification Configuration

show cos port-resource

Usage
CoS port resources are where actual physical rate limiters are configured. This command can be
used to create up to three different flood control limit resources for the port‐type index of 0. The
resources are assigned to specific ports with the set cos port‐config command.

Example
This example creates a port resource broadcast rate limiter of 5 packets per second for the port
group type index of 1.0 (group # 1 of port‐type index 0).
C3(su)->set cos port-resource flood-ctrl 1.0 broadcast rate 5

show cos port-resource
Use this command to display the configured port resources.

Syntax
show cos port-resource [irl [group-type-index [irl-index]]] | [flood-ctrl [grouptype-index]]

Parameters
irl

(Optional) Specifies that inbound rate limiting port resources should be
displayed.

flood‐ctrl

(Optional) Specifies that flood control port resources should be displayed.

group‐type‐index

(Optional) Specifies a port group/type index. Valid entries are in the form
of group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

irl‐index

(Optional) Inbound rate limiter resource index configured for the
specified port group. Valid values range from 0 to 99.

Defaults
If irl or flood‐ctrl are not specified, all port resources are shown.
If a port group and IRL index are not specified, the IRL configuration for all resources (0‐99) for all
configured port groups will be shown.
If a port group is not specified with the flood‐ctrl parameter, flood control resources for all
configured port groups will be shown.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Examples
This example displays the IRL resource index number 1 configuration for group 2.0.
C3(su)->show cos port-resource irl 2.0 1
'?' after the rate value indicates an invalid rate value
Group Index Resource Type Unit

Rate

Rate Limit Type Action
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-29

clear cos port-resource irl

----------- -------- ---- ---- ---------2.0
1
irl kbps 10000

--------------- -----drop
none

This example displays the flood control resources configured for group 1.0.
C3(su)->show cos port-resource flood-ctrl 1.0
'?' after the rate value indicates an invalid rate value
Group
Index
--------1.0
1.0
1.0

Resource

Type

----------ucast
mcast
bcast

---------flood-ctrl
flood-ctrl
flood-ctrl

Unit
---pps
pps
pps

Rate

Rate Limit
type
---------- --------------20
drop
10
drop
5
drop

Action
-----none
none
none

clear cos port-resource irl
Use this command to clear inbound rate limit resources to default values.

Syntax
clear cos port-resource irl {all | group-type-index [irl-index [unit] [rate]
[type]]}

Parameters
all

Clear all IRL resources for all port groups.

group‐type‐index

Specifies an inbound rate limiting port group/type index. Valid entries are
in the form of group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

irl‐index

(Optional) Inbound rate limiter resource index associated with the
specified port group. Valid values range from 0 to 99.

unit

Clear the unit of measure for the inbound rate limiter.

rate

Clear the data rate for this inbound rate limiter.

type

Clear the action for the rate limiter.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example clears the data rate to 0 for IRL resource index 1 for group 2.0.
C3(su)->clear cos port-resource irl 2.0 1 rate

11-30

Policy Classification Configuration

clear cos port-resource flood-ctrl

clear cos port-resource flood-ctrl
Use this command to clear flood control port resources to default values.

Syntax
clear cos port-resource flood-ctrl {all | group-type-index {unicast | multicast |
broadcast | all [rate]}}

Parameters
all

Clear all flood control resources for all port groups.

group‐type‐index

Specifies a port group/type index. Valid entries are in the form of
group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

unicast

Clear unicast port resources for the specified port group.

multicast

Clear multicast port resources for the specified port group.

broadcast

Clear broadcast port resources for the specified port group.

all

Clear all flood control port resources for the specified port group.

rate

(Optional) Clear the data rate limiter of the specified type of port
resource to the default (none or disabled).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example clears the unicast port resource for port group 1.0 to default values.
C3(su)->clear cos port-resource flood-ctrl 1.0 unicast

set cos reference
Use this command to set the Class of Service inbound rate limiting reference configuration.

Syntax
set cos reference irl group-type-index reference rate-limit irl-index

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-31

show cos reference

Parameters
irl

Specifies that an IRL reference is being configured.

group‐type‐index

Specifies an inbound rate limiting port group/type index. Valid entries are
in the form of group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

reference

IRL reference number associated with this entry.

rate‐limit irl‐index

Rate limiter (IRL resource index) to bind this reference to. Valid values
range from 0 to 99.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The CoS reference table maps the user‐defined IRL references found in the CoS settings table (see
“set cos settings” on page 11‐22) to rate limiters created in the port resource table (see “set cos
port‐resource irl” on page 11‐27). The CoS reference table indexes can be thought of as virtual rate
limiters. The table accounts for the maximum number of rate limiters supported by the device.
The virtual limiters then map to the physical rate limiters. The CoS IRL Reference Table is not
configured by default.
The CoS IRL reference table uses 100 indexes or virtual rate limiters, and maps each virtual limiter
to a physical limiter or resource. An IRL reference table exists for each port group configured, and
is indexed similarly to port resources, as port group#, port‐type, reference. IRL references are not
populated with limiters (resources), but can be configured by the user. The IRL reference table can
be displayed using the show cos reference command.

Example
In the CoS IRL reference mapping table for port groups 1.0 and 2.0, create a reference for the IRL
resource number 1 created for each group. The reference number 1 is used.
C3(su)->set cos reference irl 1.0 1 rate-limit 1
C3(su)->set cos reference irl 2.0 1 rate-limit 1

show cos reference
Use this command to show the Class of Service inbound rate limiting reference configuration.

Syntax
show cos reference [irl [group-type-index]]

11-32

Policy Classification Configuration

clear cos reference

Parameters
irl

(Optional) Specifies that inbound rate limiting reference information
should be displayed.

group‐type‐index

(Optional) Specifies an inbound rate limiting port group/type index. Valid
entries are in the form of group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

Defaults
If irl is not specified, all CoS reference information is displayed.
If a specific port group is not specified, information for all port groups is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows the Class of Service IRL references for port group 1.0. Note that not all of the
100 possible references are displayed in this output example.
C3(su)->show cos reference irl 1.0
Group Index
----------1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
...
1.0
1.0
1.0

Reference
--------0
1
2
3

Type
---irl
irl
irl
irl

Rate Limiter
-----------none
1
none
none

97
98
99

irl
irl
irl

none
none
none

clear cos reference
Use this command to clear the Class of Service inbound rate limiting reference configuration.

Syntax
clear cos reference irl {all | group-type-index reference}

Parameters
irl

Specifies that IRL references are being cleared.

all

Clear all groups indexes and references.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-33

show cos unit

group‐type‐index

Specifies an inbound rate limiting port group/type index. Valid entries are
in the form of group#.port‐type.
Valid values for group# can range from 0 to 7. Valid values for port‐type
can range from 0 to 1, although only port type 0 is currently supported.
For example, port group 3 would be specified as 3.0.

reference

Clear a specific reference for the specified port group.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the CoS inbound rate limiting reference configuration for all
groups:
C3(su)->clear cos reference irl all

show cos unit
Use this command to show possible CoS unit entries.

Syntax
show cos unit [irl [port-type index] [kbps]] [flood-ctrl [port-type index] [pps]]

Parameters
irl

(Optional) Display only IRL unit information.

port‐type index

(Optional) Display information about the specified port type. (Only
port‐type index 0 is supported.)

kbps

(Optional) Display kbps information.

flood‐ctrl

(Optional) Display only flood control unit information.

pps

(Optional) Display pps information.

Defaults
If no parameters are entered, all Cos unit information is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Examples
This example shows possible unit entries for inbound rate limiting:
C3(su)->show cos unit irl
Type:
irl = inbound rate limiting

11-34

Policy Classification Configuration

Unit:
Kbps = Kilobits per second

clear cos all-entries

Port Type
--------0

Type
---irl

Unit
---Kbps

Maximum Rate
-----------1000000

Minimum Rate
-----------64

Granularity
----------1

This examples shows flood control unit information.
C3(su)->show cos unit flood-ctrl
Type:
flood-ctrl = flood control type
Port Type
----------0

Type
----------flood-ctrl

Unit
---pps

Unit:
pps = packets per second
Maximum Rate
-----------148810

Minimum Rate
-----------0

Granularity
----------1

clear cos all-entries
Use this command to clear all Class of Service entries except entries 0‐7.

Syntax
clear cos all-entries

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the CoS configuration for all entries except entries 0‐7:
C3(su)->clear cos all-entries

show cos port-type
Use this command to display Class of Service port type configurations.

Syntax
show cos port-type [irl [port-type]] [flood-ctrl [port-type]]

Parameters
irl

(Optional) Displays inbound rate limiting information.

flood‐ctrl

(Optional) Displays flood control information.

port‐type

(Optional) Displays information for a specific port type. (Only port type
0 is supported.)

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

11-35

show cos port-type

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, inbound rate limiting and flood control information for all port
types is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
The C3 implementation provides one default port type (0) for designating available inbound rate
limiting or flood control resources. Port type 0 includes all ports.
The port type 0 IRL description is “C3 100 IRL,” which indicates that this port type provides a
maximum of 100 inbound rate limiting resources per port group. The port type 0 flood control
description is “C3 3 flood‐ctrl” which indicates that this port type provides a maximum of 3 flood
control resources per port group.

Examples
This example shows inbound rate limiting information for port type 0.
C3(su)->show cos port-type irl 0
Number of resources:
irl = inbound rate limiter(s)

Index
----0

Port type
description
-----------C3 100 IRL

Number of
limiters
--------100

Supported rate types:
Kbps = kilobits per second
Supported
rate type
--------kbps

Eligible
ports
----------------ge.1.1-48

Unselected
ports
----------------ge.1.1-4

This example shows flood control information for port type 0.
C3(su)->show cos port-type flood-ctrl 0
Number of resources:
flood-ctrl = flood control type

Index
----0

11-36

Port type
Number of
description
limiters
-------------------C3 3 flood-ctrl
3

Policy Classification Configuration

Supported rate types:
Pps = Packets per second
Supported
rate type
--------pps

Eligible
ports
---------------ge.1.1-24

Unselected
ports
-----------ge.1.1-24

12
Port Priority Configuration
This chapter describes the Port Priority set of commands and how to use them. Refer to the
“Configuring QoS” Feature Guide for detailed information about configuring quality of service on
the SecureStack C3. The Enterasys Networks firmware Feature Guides are available at:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals
For information about...

Refer to page...

Port Priority Configuration Summary

12-1

Configuring Port Priority

12-2

Configuring Priority to Transmit Queue Mapping

12-4

Configuring Quality of Service (QoS)

12-7

Port Priority Configuration Summary
The SecureStack C3 device supports Class of Service (CoS), which allows you to assign mission‐
critical data to higher priority through the device by delaying less critical traffic during periods of
congestion. The higher priority traffic through the device is serviced first before lower priority
traffic. The Class of Service capability of the device is implemented by a priority queueing
mechanism. Class of Service is based on the IEEE 802.1D (802.1p) standard specification, and
allows you to define eight priorities (0 through 7) and assign them to transmit queues for each
port.
A priority 0 through 7 can be set on each port, with 0 being the lowest priority. A port receiving a
frame without priority information in its tag header is assigned a priority according to the default
priority setting on the port. For example, if the priority of a port is set to 4, the frames received
through that port without a priority indicated in their tag header are classified as a priority 4 and
transmitted according to that priority.
Note: When CoS override is enabled using the set policy profile command as described in “set
policy profile” on page 11-4, CoS-based classification rules will take precedence over priority
settings configured with the set port priority command described in this section.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

12-1

Configuring Port Priority

Configuring Port Priority
Purpose
To view or configure port priority characteristics as follows:
•

Display or change the port default Class‐of Service (CoS) transmit priority (0 through 7) of
each port for frames that are received (ingress) without priority information in their tag
header.

•

Display the current traffic class mapping‐to‐priority of each port.

•

Set each port to transmit frames according to 802.1D (802.1p) priority set in the frame header.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port priority

12-4

set port priority

12-3

clear port priority

12-3

show port priority
Use this command to display the 802.1D priority for one or more ports.

Syntax
show port priority [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays priority information for a specific port. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port-string is not specified, priority for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the port priority for the ge.2.1 through 5.
C3(su)->show
ge.2.1 is set
ge.2.2 is set
ge.2.3 is set
ge.2.4 is set
ge.2.5 is set

12-2

Port Priority Configuration

port priority ge.2.1-5
to 0
to 0
to 0
to 0
to 0

set port priority

set port priority
Use this command to set the 802.1D (802.1p) Class‐of‐Service transmit priority (0 through 7) on
each port. A port receiving a frame without priority information in its tag header is assigned a
priority according to the priority setting on the port. For example, if the priority of a port is set to
5, the frames received through that port without a priority indicated in their tag header are
classified as a priority 5.
A frame with priority information in its tag header is transmitted according to that priority.

Syntax
set port priority port-string priority

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port for which to set priority. For a detailed description of
possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on
page 7‐1.

priority

Specifies a value of 0 to 7 to set the CoS priority for the port entered in the
port‐string. Priority value of 0 is the lowest priority.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The set port priority command will not change the 802.1p priority tag on tagged traffic with a
default priority tag. The command only has an effect on how untagged traffic will be prioritized
as it passes internally through the device.

Example
This example shows how to set a default priority of 6 on ge.1.3. Frames received by this port
without priority information in their frame header are set to the default setting of 6:
C3(su)->set port priority ge.1.3 6

clear port priority
Use this command to reset the current CoS port priority setting to 0. This will cause all frames
received without a priority value in its header to be set to priority 0.

Syntax
clear port priority port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port for which to clear priority. For a detailed description of
possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on
page 7‐1.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

12-3

Configuring Priority to Transmit Queue Mapping

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset ge.1.11 to the default priority:
C3(rw)->clear port priority ge.1.11

Configuring Priority to Transmit Queue Mapping
Purpose
To perform the following:
•

View the current priority to transmit queue mapping of each physical port.

•

Configure each port to either transmit frames according to the port priority, set using the set
port priority command described in “set port priority” on page 12‐3, or according to a priority
based on a percentage of port transmission capacity, assigned to transmit queues using the set
port txq command described in “set port txq” on page 12‐8.

•

Clear current port priority queue settings for one or more ports.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port priority-queue

12-4

set port priority-queue

12-5

clear port priority-queue

12-6

show port priority-queue
Use this command to display the port priority levels (0 through 7, with 0 as the lowest level)
associated with the current transmit queues (0 being the lowest priority) for each selected port. A
frame with a certain port priority is transmitted according to the settings entered using the set
port priority‐queue command described in “set port priority‐queue” on page 12‐5.

Syntax
show port priority-queue [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

12-4

Port Priority Configuration

(Optional) Displays the mapping of priorities to transmit queues for one
or more ports.

set port priority-queue

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, priority queue information for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display priority queue information for ge.1.1. In this case, frames with
a priority of 0 are associated with transmit queue 1; frames with 1 or 2 priority, are associated with
transmit queue 0; and so forth:
C3(su)->show
Port
P0
--------- -ge.1.1
1

port priority-queue ge.1.1
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
-- -- -- -- -- -- -0 0 2 3 4 5 5

set port priority-queue
Use this command to map 802.1D (802.1p) priorities to transmit queues.

Syntax
set port priority-queue port-string priority queue

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) for which to set priority‐to‐queue mappings. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

priority

Specifies a value of 0 through 7 (0 is the lowest level) that determines
what priority frames will be transmitted on the transmit queue entered in
this command.

queue

Specifies a value of 0 through 5 (0 is the lowest level) that determines the
queue on which to transmit the frames with the port priority entered in
this command.
Note: Although there are 8 queues, only queues 0 through 5 may be configured.
Queues 6 and 7 are reserved for management traffic.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command enables you to change the transmit queue (0 to 5, with 0 being the lowest priority
queue) for each port priority of the selected port. You can apply the new settings to one or more
ports.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

12-5

clear port priority-queue

Example
This example shows how to set priority 5 frames received on ge.2.12 to transmit on queue 0.
C3(su)->set port priority-queue ge.2.12 5 0

clear port priority-queue
Use this command to reset port priority queue settings back to defaults for one or more ports.

Syntax
clear port priority-queue port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port for which to clear priority‐to‐queue mappings. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the priority queue settings on ge.2.12:
C3(su)->clear port priority-queue ge.2.12

12-6

Port Priority Configuration

Configuring Quality of Service (QoS)

Configuring Quality of Service (QoS)
Refer to the “Configuring QoS” Feature Guide for detailed information about configuring quality
of service on the SecureStack C3. The Enterasys Networks firmware Feature Guides are available
at:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals

Purpose
Eight transmit queues are implemented in the switch hardware for each port. The commands in
this section allow you to set the priority mode and weight for each of the available queues (0
through 7) for each physical port on the switch. Priority mode and weight cannot be configured on
LAGs, only on the physical ports that make up the LAG.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show port txq

12-7

set port txq

12-8

clear port txq

12-9

show port txq
Use this command to display QoS transmit queue information for one or more physical ports.

Syntax
show port txq [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies port(s) for which to display QoS settings. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.
Only physical ports will be displayed. LAG ports have no transmit queue
information.

Defaults
If the port‐string is not specified, the QoS setting of all physical ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

12-7

set port txq

Example
This example shows how to display the current algorithm and transmit queue weights configured
on port ge.1.10:
C3(su)->show port txq ge.1.10
Port
Alg Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7
------- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

ge.1.10 WRR 10

10

15

20

25

20

0

0

set port txq
Use this command to set QoS transmit queue arbitration values for physical ports.

Syntax
set port txq port-string value0 value1 value2 value3 value4 value5 value6 value7

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies port(s) on which to set queue arbitration values. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.
Only physical ports can be configured with this command. LAG ports
cannot be configured.

value0 ‐ value7

Specifies percentage to allocate to a specific transmit queue. The values
must total 100 percent.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Queues can be set for strict priority (SP) or weighted round‐robin (WRR). If set for WRR mode,
weights may be assigned to those queues with this command. Weights are specified in the range of
0 to 100 percent. Weights specified for queues 0 through 7 on any port must total 100 percent.

Examples
This example shows how to change the arbitration values for the eight transmit queues belonging
to ge.1.1:
C3(su)->set port txq ge.1.1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 30

This example shows how to change the algorithm to strict priority for the eight transmit queues
belonging to ge.1.1:
C3(su)->set port txq ge.1.1 0 0 0 0 0 O O 100
C3(su)->show port txq ge.1.1
Port
Alg Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7
------- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

ge.1.1

12-8

STR SP

Port Priority Configuration

SP

SP

SP

SP

SP

SP

SP

clear port txq

clear port txq
Use this command to clear port transmit queue values back to their default values.

Syntax
clear port txq port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Clears transmit queue values on specific port(s) back to their default
values. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.
Only physical ports can be configured with this command. LAG ports
cannot be configured.

Defaults
By default, transmit queues are defined as follows:
Queue

Mode

Weight

Queue

Mode

Weight

0

WRR

1

4

WRR

5

1

WRR

2

5

WRR

6

2

WRR

3

6

WRR

7

3

WRR

4

7

WRR

8

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear transmit queue values on ge.1.1:
C3(su)->clear port txq ge.1.1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

12-9

clear port txq

12-10

Port Priority Configuration

13
IGMP Configuration
This chapter describes the IGMP Configuration set of commands and how to use them.
For information about...

Refer to page...

IGMP Overview

13-1

Configuring IGMP at Layer 2

13-2

Configuring IGMP on Routing Interfaces

13-10

IGMP Overview
About IP Multicast Group Management
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) runs between hosts and their immediately
neighboring multicast device. The protocol’s mechanisms allow a host to inform its local device
that it wants to receive transmissions addressed to a specific multicast group.
A multicast‐enabled device can periodically ask its hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If
there is more than one device on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is
elected “querier” and assumes the responsibility of querying the LAN for group members.
Based on the group membership information learned from IGMP, a device can determine which (if
any) multicast traffic needs to be forwarded to each of its ports. At Layer‐3, multicast devices use
this information, along with a multicast routing protocol, to support IP multicasting across an IP
network.
IGMP provides the final step in an IP multicast packet delivery service, since it is only concerned
with forwarding multicast traffic from the local device to group members on a directly attached
subnetwork or LAN segment.
This device supports IP multicast group management by passively snooping on the IGMP query
and IGMP report packets transferred between IP multicast devices and IP multicast host groups to
learn IP multicast group members.
The purpose of IP multicast group management is to optimize a switched network’s performance
so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or
multicast devices instead of flooding to all ports in the subnet (VLAN).
In addition to passively monitoring IGMP query and report messages, the SecureStack C3 can also
actively send L3 IGMP query messages to learn locations of multicast devices and member hosts
in multicast groups within each VLAN.
However, note that IGMP neither alters nor routes any IP multicast packets. Since IGMP is not
concerned with the delivery of IP multicast packets across subnetworks, multicast routing is
needed if IP multicast packets have to be routed across different subnetworks.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

13-1

Configuring IGMP at Layer 2

About Multicasting
Multicasting is used to support real‐time applications such as video conferences or streaming
audio. A multicast server does not have to establish a separate connection with each client. It
merely broadcasts its service to the network, and any hosts that want to receive the multicast
register with their local multicast switch/router. Although this approach reduces the network
overhead required by a multicast server, the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at every
multicast switch/router it passes through to ensure that traffic is only passed to the hosts that
subscribed to this service.
The SecureStack C3 switch device uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query for
any attached hosts who want to receive a specific multicast service. The device looks up the IP
Multicast Group used for this service and adds it to the egress list of the Level 3 interface. It then
propagates the service request on to any neighboring multicast switch/router to ensure that it will
continue to receive the multicast service.
Note: An Enterasys Networks Feature Guide document containing an in-depth discussion of
multicast configuration is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

Configuring IGMP at Layer 2
Purpose
To configure IGMP snooping from the switch CLI.

Commands
For information about...

13-2

Refer to page...

show igmpsnooping

13-3

set igmpsnooping adminmode

13-3

set igmpsnooping interfacemode

13-4

set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval

13-4

set igmpsnooping maxresponse

13-5

set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpiretime

13-6

set igmpsnooping add-static

13-6

set igmpsnooping remove-static

13-7

show igmpsnooping static

13-8

show igmpsnooping mfdb

13-8

clear igmpsnooping

13-9

IGMP Configuration

show igmpsnooping

show igmpsnooping
Use this command to display IGMP snooping information.

Syntax
show igmpsnooping

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
Configured information is displayed whether or not IGMP snooping is enabled. Status
information is displayed only when the function is enabled. For information on enabling IGMP on
the system, refer to “set igmpsnooping adminmode” on page 13‐3. For information on enabling
IGMP on one or more ports, refer to “set igmpsnooping interfacemode” on page 13‐4.

Example
This example shows how to display IGMP snooping information:
C3(su)->show igmpsnooping
Admin Mode.....................................
Group Membership Interval......................
Max Response Time..............................
Multicast Router Present Expiration Time.......
Interfaces Enabled for IGMP Snooping...........
Multicast Control Frame Count..................
Data Frames Forwarded by the CPU...............

Enable
260
100
0
ge.1.1,ge.1.2,ge.1.3
0
0

set igmpsnooping adminmode
Use this command to enable or disable IGMP on the system.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping adminmode {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables IGMP snooping on the system.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

13-3

set igmpsnooping interfacemode

Usage
In order for IGMP snooping to be enabled on one or all ports, it must be globally enabled on the
device with this command, and then enabled on a port(s) using the set igmpsnooping interface
mode command as described in “set igmpsnooping interfacemode” on page 13‐4.

Note: IGMP snooping cannot be controlled via WebView.

Example
This example shows how to enable IGMP on the system:
C3(su)->set igmpsnooping adminmode enable

set igmpsnooping interfacemode
Use this command to enable or disable IGMP on one or all ports.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping interfacemode port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies one or more ports on which to enable or disable IGMP.

enable | disable

Enables or disables IGMP.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
In order for IGMP snooping to be enabled on one or all ports, it must be globally enabled on the
device using the set igmpsnooping adminmode command as described in “set igmpsnooping
adminmode” on page 13‐3, and then enabled on a port(s) using this command.

Example
This example shows how to enable IGMP on port ge.1.10:
C3(su)->set igmpsnooping interfacemode ge.1.10 enable

set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval
Use this command to configure the IGMP group membership interval time for the system.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval time

13-4

IGMP Configuration

set igmpsnooping maxresponse

Parameters
time

Specifies the IGMP group membership interval. Valid values are 2 ‐ 3600
seconds.
This value works together with the set igmpsnooping maxresponsetime
command to remove ports from an IGMP group and must be greater than
the max response time value.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The IGMP group membership interval time sets the frequency of host‐query frame transmissions
and must be greater than the IGMP maximum response time as described in “set igmpsnooping
maxresponse” on page 13‐5.

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP group membership interval to 250 seconds:
C3(su)->set igmpsnooping groupmembershipinterval 250

set igmpsnooping maxresponse
Use this command to configure the IGMP query maximum response time for the system.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping maxresponse time

Parameters
time

Specifies the IGMP maximum query response time. Valid values are 100 ‐
255 seconds. The default value is 100 seconds.
This value works together with the set igmpsnooping
groupmembershipinterval command to remove ports from an IGMP group
and must be lesser than the group membership interval value.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This value must be less than the IGMP maximum response time described in “set igmpsnooping
groupmembershipinterval” on page 13‐4.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

13-5

set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpiretime

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP maximum response time to 100 seconds:
C3(su)->set igmpsnooping maxresponse 100

set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpiretime
Use this command to configure the IGMP multicast router expiration time for the system.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpire time

Parameters
time

Specifies the IGMP multicast router expiration time. Valid values are 0 ‐
3600 seconds. A value of 0 will configure the system with an infinite
expiration time. The default value is 0.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This timer is for expiring the switch from the multicast database. If the timer expires, and the only
address left is the multicast switch, then the entry will be removed.

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP multicast router expiration time to infinity:
C3(su)->set igmpsnooping mcrtrexpiretime 0

set igmpsnooping add-static
This command creates a new static IGMP entry or adds one or more new ports to an existing entry.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping add-static group vlan-list [modify] [port-string]

Parameters
group

Specifies the multicast group IP address for the entry.

vlan‐list

Specifies the VLANs on which to configure the entry.

modify

(Optional) Adds the specified port or ports to an existing entry.

port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port or ports to add to the entry.

Defaults
If no ports are specified, all ports are added to the entry.
13-6

IGMP Configuration

set igmpsnooping remove-static

If modify is not specified, a new entry is created.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Use this command to create and configure static Layer 2 IGMP entries. Currently, up to 100 static
groups can be configured. A total of 256 dynamic and static IGMP groups are supported.

Example
This example creates an IGMP entry for the multicast group with IP address of 233.11.22.33
configured on VLAN 20 configured with the port ge.1.1.
C3(su)->set igmpsnooping add-static 233.11.22.33 20 ge.1.1

set igmpsnooping remove-static
This command deletes a static IGMP entry or removes one or more new ports from an existing
entry.

Syntax
set igmpsnooping remove-static group vlan-list [modify] [port-string]

Parameters
group

Specifies the multicast group IP address of the entry.

vlan‐list

Specifies the VLANs on which the entry is configured.

modify

(Optional) Removes the specified port or ports from an existing entry.

port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port or ports to remove from the entry.

Defaults
If no ports are specified, all ports are removed from the entry.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes port ge.1.1 from the entry for the multicast group with IP address of
233.11.22.33 configured on VLAN 20.
C3(su)->set igmpsnooping remove-static 233.11.22.33 20 ge.1.1

show igmpsnooping static
This command displays static IGMP ports for one or more VLANs or IGMP groups.

Syntax
show igmpsnooping static vlan-list [group group]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

13-7

show igmpsnooping mfdb

Parameters
vlan‐list

Specifies the VLAN for which to display static IGMP ports.

group group

(Optional) Specifies the IGMP group for which to display static IGMP
ports.

Defaults
If no group is specified, information for all groups is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example displays the static IGMP ports for VLAN 20.
C3(su)->show igmpsnooping static 20
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Vlan Id
= 20
Static Multicast Group Address = 233.11.22.33
Type = IGMP
IGMP Port List = ge.1.1

show igmpsnooping mfdb
Use this command to display multicast forwarding database (MFDB) information.

Syntax
show igmpsnooping mfdb [stats]

Parameters
stats

(Optional) Displays MFDB statistics.

Defaults
If stats is not specified, all MFDB table entries will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Examples
This example shows how to display multicast forwarding database entries:
C3(su)->show igmpsnooping mfdb
MAC Address
Type
Description
----------------------- ------- ---------------00:14:01:00:5E:02:CD:B0 Dynamic Network Assist
00:32:01:00:5E:37:96:D0 Dynamic Network Assist
00:32:01:00:5E:7F:FF:FA Dynamic Network Assist

Interfaces
------------------------Fwd: ge.1.1,ge.3.1,ge.4.1
Fwd: ge.4.7
Fwd: ge.4.7

This example shows how to display multicast forwarding database statistics:
C3(su)->show igmpsnooping mfdb stats
Max MFDB Table Entries......................... 256
Most MFDB Entries Since Last Reset............. 1
Current Entries................................ 0
13-8

IGMP Configuration

clear igmpsnooping

clear igmpsnooping
Use this command to clear all IGMP snooping entries.

Syntax
clear igmpsnooping

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear all IGMP snooping entries:
C3(su)->clear igmpsnooping
Are you sure you want to clear all IGMP snooping entries? (y/n) y
IGMP Snooping Entries Cleared.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

13-9

Configuring IGMP on Routing Interfaces

Configuring IGMP on Routing Interfaces
Router: The commands covered in this section can be executed only when the device is in router
mode. For details on how to enable router configuration modes, refer to “Enabling Router
Configuration Modes” on page 18-2.

Purpose
To configure IGMP on routing interfaces.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

ip igmp

13-10

ip igmp enable

13-11

ip igmp version

13-11

show ip igmp interface

13-12

show ip igmp groups

13-13

ip igmp query-interval

13-13

ip igmp query-max-response-time

13-14

ip igmp startup-query-interval

13-14

ip igmp startup-query-count

13-15

ip igmp last-member-query-interval

13-15

ip igmp last-member-query-count

13-16

ip igmp robustness

13-16

ip igmp
Use this command to enable the L3 IGMP Querier functionality on the switch. The no form of this
command disables IGMP Querier functionality.

Syntax
ip igmp
no ip igmp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

13-10

IGMP Configuration

ip igmp enable

Usage
Enabling IGMP on a routing interface requires both the ip igmp command (page 13‐10), which
enables it on the router, and the ip igmp enable command (page 13‐11), which enables it on an
interface. Once these commands are executed, the device will start sending and processing IGMP
multicast traffic. IGMP is disabled by default, both globally and on a per interface basis.

Example
This example shows how to enable IGMP on the router:
C3(su)->router(Config)#ip igmp

ip igmp enable
Use this command to enable IGMP on an interface. The no form of this command disables IGMP
on an interface.

Syntax
ip igmp enable
no ip igmp enable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Usage
Enabling IGMP on a routing interface requires both the ip igmp command (page 13‐10), which
enables it on the router, and the ip igmp enable command (page 13‐11), which enables it on an
interface. Once these commands are executed, the device will start sending and processing IGMP
multicast traffic. IGMP is disabled by default, both globally and on a per interface basis.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to enable IGMP on the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip igmp enable

ip igmp version
Use this command to set the version of IGMP running on the router. The no form of this command
resets IGMP to the default version of 2 (IGMPv2).

Syntax
ip igmp version version
no ip igmp

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

13-11

show ip igmp interface

Parameters
version

Specifies the IGMP version number to run on the router. Valid values are
1, 2, or 3.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP version to version 1 on VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip igmp version 1

show ip igmp interface
Use this command to display information about one or more IGMP routing interfaces.

Syntax
show ip igmp interface [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Displays information for one or more VLANs.

Defaults
If not specified, information will be displayed for all VLANs configured for IGMP routing.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display IGMP routing information for VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router#show ip igmp interface vlan 1
Vlan 1 is Admin UP
Vlan 1 is Oper UP
IGMP is configured via the Switch
IGMP ACL currently not supported
Multicast TTL currently defaults to 1
IGMP Version is 2
Query Interval is 125 (secs)
Query Max Response Time is 100 (1/10 of a second)
Robustness is 2
Startup Query Interval is 31 (secs)
Startup Query Count is 2
Last Member Query Interval is 10 (1/10 of a second)
Last Member Query Count is 2

13-12

IGMP Configuration

show ip igmp groups

show ip igmp groups
Use this command to display a list of IGMP streams and client connection ports.

Syntax
show ip igmp groups

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display information about IGMP groups:
C3(su)->router#show ip igmp groups
REGISTERED MULTICAST GROUP DETAILS
Multicast
IP Address
Last Reporter
Up Time Expiry Time Host Timer
--------------- --------------- ------- ------------ -----------228.1.1.1
12.12.12.2
27

Version1
----------

ip igmp query-interval
Use this command to set the IGMP query interval on a routing interface. The no form of this
command resets the IGMP query interval to the default value of 125 seconds.

Syntax
ip igmp query-interval time
no ip igmp query-interval

Parameters
time

Specifies the IGMP query interval. Valid values are from 1 to 3600
seconds. Default is 125 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP query interval to 1800 seconds on VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip igmp query-interval 1800

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

13-13

ip igmp query-max-response-time

ip igmp query-max-response-time
Use this command to set the maximum response time interval advertised in IGMPv2 queries. The

no form of this command resets the IGMP maximum response time to the default value of 100
(one tenth of a second).

Syntax
ip igmp query-max-response-time time
no ip igmp query-max-response-time

Parameters
time

Specifies the IGMP maximum response time interval. Valid values are
from 0 to 255 tenths of a second. The default value is 100 (one tenth of a

second).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP query maximum response time interval to 200 (2 tenths
of a second) on VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip igmp query-max-response-time 200

ip igmp startup-query-interval
Use this command to set the interval between general IGMP queries sent on startup. The no form
of this command resets the IGMP startup query interval to the default value of 31 seconds.

Syntax
ip igmp startup-query-interval time
no ip igmp startup-query-interval

Parameters
time

Specifies the IGMP startup query interval. Valid values are from 1 to 300
seconds. The default value is 31 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

13-14

IGMP Configuration

ip igmp startup-query-count

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP startup query interval to 100 seconds on VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip igmp startup-query-interval 100

ip igmp startup-query-count
Use this command to set the number of IGMP queries sent out on startup, separated by the
startup‐query‐interval as described in ip igmp startup‐query‐interval (page 13‐14). The no form of
this command resets the IGMP startup query count to the default value of 2.

Syntax
ip igmp startup-query-count count
no ip igmp startup-query-count

Parameters
count

Specifies the number of IGMP startup queries. Valid values are from 1 to
20. The default value is 2.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP startup query count to 10 onVLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip igmp startup-query-count 10

ip igmp last-member-query-interval
Use this command to set the maximum response time being inserted into group‐specific queries
sent in response to leave group messages. The no form of this command resets the IGMP last
member query interval to the default value of 1 second.

Syntax
ip igmp last-member-query-interval time
no ip igmp last-member-query-interval

Parameters
time

Specifies the IGMP last member query interval. Valid values are from 0 to
255 seconds. The default value is 1 second.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

13-15

ip igmp last-member-query-count

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP last member query interval to 10 seconds on VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip igmp last-member-query-interval 10

ip igmp last-member-query-count
Use this command to set the number of group‐specific queries sent before assuming there are no
local members. The no form of this command resets the IGMP last member query count to the
default value of 2.

Syntax
ip igmp last-member-query-count count
no ip igmp last-member-query-count

Parameters
count

Specifies the number of IGMP startup queries. Valid values are from 1 to
20. The default value is 2.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP last member query count to 10 on VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip igmp last-member-query-count 10

ip igmp robustness
Use this command to configure the robustness tuning for expected packet loss on an IGMP
routing interface. The no form of this command resets the IGMP robustness value to the default of
2.

Syntax
ip igmp robustness robustness
no ip igmp robustness

Parameters
robustness

13-16

IGMP Configuration

Specifies the IGMP robustness value. Valid values are from 1 to 255. The
default value is 2.

ip igmp robustness

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3 (su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
This value determines how many times IGMP messages will be sent. A higher number will mean
that end stations will be more likely to see the packet. After the robustness value is reached, IGMP
will assume there is no response to queries.

Example
This example shows how to set the IGMP robustness value to 5 on VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip igmp robustness 5

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

13-17

ip igmp robustness

13-18

IGMP Configuration

14
Logging and Network Management
This chapter describes switch‐related logging and network management commands and how to
use them.
Note: The commands in this chapter pertain to network management of the SecureStack C3
device from the switch CLI only. For information on router-related network management tasks,
including reviewing router ARP tables and IP traffic, refer to Chapter 19.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Configuring System Logging

14-1

Monitoring Network Events and Status

14-14

Managing Switch Network Addresses and Routes

14-19

Configuring Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)

14-29

Configuring Node Aliases

14-40

Configuring System Logging
Note: An Enterasys Networks Feature Guide document containing an in-depth discussion of Syslog
configuration is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

Purpose
To display and configure system logging, including Syslog server settings, Syslog default settings,
and the logging buffer.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show logging server

14-2

set logging server

14-3

clear logging server

14-4

show logging default

14-4

set logging default

14-5

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-1

show logging server

For information about...

Refer to page...

clear logging default

14-6

show logging application

14-6

set logging application

14-7

clear logging application

14-9

show logging local

14-9

set logging local

14-10

clear logging local

14-10

show logging buffer

14-11

show logging interface

14-11

set logging interface

14-12

clear logging interface

14-13

show logging server
Use this command to display the Syslog configuration for a particular server.

Syntax
show logging server [index]

Parameters
index

(Optional) Displays Syslog information pertaining to a specific server
table entry. Valid values are 1‐8.

Defaults
If index is not specified, all Syslog server information will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display Syslog server configuration information:
C3(ro)->show logging server
IP Address
Facility Severity
Description
Port Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------1 132.140.82.111 local4 warning(5)
default
514 enabled
2 132.140.90.84 local4 warning(5)
default
514 enabled

Table 14‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.

14-2

Logging and Network Management

set logging server

Table 14-1

show logging server Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

IP Address

Syslog server’s IP address. For details on setting this using the set logging server
command, refer to “set logging server” on page 14-3.

Facility

Syslog facility that will be encoded in messages sent to this server. Valid values are:
local0 to local7.

Severity

Severity level at which the server is logging messages.

Description

Text string description of this facility/server.

Port

UDP port the client uses to send to the server.

Status

Whether or not this Syslog configuration is currently enabled or disabled.

set logging server
Use this command to configure a Syslog server.

Syntax
set logging server index [ip-addr ip-addr] [facility facility] [severity severity]
[descr descr] [port port] [state {enable | disable}]

Parameters
index

Specifies the server table index number for this server. Valid values are 1 ‐
8.

ip‐addr ip‐addr

(Optional) Specifies the Syslog message server’s IP address.

facility facility

(Optional) Specifies the server’s facility name. Valid values are: local0 to
local7.

severity severity

(Optional) Specifies the severity level at which the server will log
messages. Valid values and corresponding levels are:
1 — emergencies (system is unusable)
2 — alerts (immediate action required)
3 — critical conditions
4 — error conditions
5 — warning conditions
6 — notifications (significant conditions)
7 — informational messages
8 — debugging messages

descr descr

(Optional) Specifies a textual string description of this facility/server.

port port

(Optional) Specifies the default UDP port the client uses to send to the
server.

state enable |
disable

(Optional) Enables or disables this facility/server configuration.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-3

clear logging server

Defaults
If ip‐addr is not specified, an entry in the Syslog server table will be created with the specified
index number and a message will display indicating that no IP address has been assigned.
If not specified, facility, severity and port will be set to defaults configured with the set logging
default command (“set logging default” on page 14‐5).
If state is not specified, the server will not be enabled or disabled.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This command shows how to enable a Syslog server configuration for index 1, IP address
134.141.89.113, facility local4, severity level 3 on port 514:
C3(su)->set logging server 1 ip-addr 134.141.89.113 facility local4 severity 3
port 514 state enable

clear logging server
Use this command to remove a server from the Syslog server table.

Syntax
clear logging server index

Parameters
index

Specifies the server table index number for the server to be removed.
Valid values are 1 ‐ 8.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This command shows how to remove the Syslog server with index 1 from the server table:
C3(su)->clear logging server 1

show logging default
Use this command to display the Syslog server default values.

Syntax
show logging default

Parameters
None.
14-4

Logging and Network Management

set logging default

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This command shows how to display the Syslog server default values. For an explanation of the
command output, refer back to Table 14‐1 on page 14‐3.
C3(su)->show logging default

Defaults:

Facility
Severity
Port
----------------------------------------local4
warning(5)
514

set logging default
Use this command to set logging default values.

Syntax
set logging default {[facility facility] [severity severity] port port]}

Parameters
facility facility

Specifies the default facility name. Valid values are: local0 to local7.

severity severity

Specifies the default logging severity level. Valid values and
corresponding levels are:
1 — emergencies (system is unusable)
2 — alerts (immediate action required)
3 — critical conditions
4 — error conditions
5 — warning conditions
6 — notifications (significant conditions)
7 — informational messages
8 — debugging messages

port port

Specifies the default UDP port the client uses to send to the server.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-5

clear logging default

Example
This example shows how to set the Syslog default facility name to local2 and the severity level to 4
(error logging):
C3(su)->set logging default facility local2 severity 4

clear logging default
Use this command to reset logging default values.

Syntax
clear logging default {[facility] [severity] [port]}

Parameters
facility

(Optional) Resets the default facility name to local4.

severity

(Optional) Resets the default logging severity level to 6 (notifications of
significant conditions).

port

(Optional) Resets the default UDP port the client uses to send to the server
to 514.

Defaults
At least one optional parameter must be entered.
All three optional keywords must be entered to reset all logging values to defaults.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the Syslog default severity level to 6:
C3(su)->clear logging default severity

show logging application
Use this command to display the severity level of Syslog messages for one or all applications
configured for logging on your system.

Syntax
show logging application [mnemonic | all]

14-6

Logging and Network Management

set logging application

Parameters
mnemonic

(Optional) Displays severity level for one application configured for
logging. Mnemonics will vary depending on the number and types of
applications running on your system. Sample mnemonics and their
corresponding applications are listed in Table 14‐3 on page 14‐8.
Note: Mnemonic values are case sensitive and must be typed as they appear in
Table 14-3.

all

(Optional) Displays severity level for all applications configured for
logging.

Defaults
If no parameter is specified, information for all applications will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display system logging information pertaining to the SNMP
application.
C3(ro)->show logging application SNMP
Application
Current Severity Level
--------------------------------------------90
SNMP
6
1(emergencies)
4(errors)
7(information)

2(alerts)
5(warnings)
8(debugging)

3(critical)
6(notifications)

Table 14‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 14-2

show logging application Output Details

Output Field

What it displays...

Application

A mnemonic abbreviation of the textual description for
applications being logged.

Current Severity Level

Severity level at which the server is logging messages for the
listed application. This range (from 1 to 8) and its associated
severity list is shown in the CLI output. For a description of these
entries, which are set using the set logging application
command, refer to “set logging application” on page 14-7.

set logging application
Use this command to set the severity level of log messages for one or all applications.

Syntax
set logging application {[mnemonic | all]} [level level]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-7

set logging application

Parameters
mnemonic

Specifies a case sensitive mnemonic abbreviation of an application to be
logged. This parameter will vary depending on the number and types of
applications running on your system. To display a complete list, use the
show logging application command as described in “show logging
application” on page 14‐6. Sample mnemonics and their corresponding
applications are listed in Table 14‐3 on page 14‐8.
Note: Mnemonic values are case sensitive and must be typed as they appear in
Table 14-3.

all

Sets the logging severity level for all applications.

level level

(Optional) Specifies the severity level at which the server will log
messages for applications. Valid values and corresponding levels are:
1 — emergencies (system is unusable)
2 — alerts (immediate action required)
3 — critical conditions
4 — error conditions
5 — warning conditions
6 — notifications (significant conditions)
7 — informational messages
8 — debugging messages

Table 14-3

Mnemonic Values for Logging Applications

Mnemonic

Application

CLIWEB

Command Line Interface and Webview management

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol

Driver

Hardware drivers

System

Non-application items such as general chassis management

Stacking

Stacking management (if applicable)

UPN

User Personalized Networking

Router

Router

Defaults
If level is not specified, none will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

14-8

Logging and Network Management

clear logging application

Example
This example shows how to set the severity level for SNMP to 4 so that error conditions will be
logged for that application.
C3(rw)->set logging application SNMP level 4

clear logging application
Use this command to reset the logging severity level for one or all applications to the default value
of 6 (notifications of significant conditions).

Syntax
clear logging application {mnemonic | all}

Parameters
mnemonic

Resets the severity level for a specific application to 6. Valid mnemonic
values and their corresponding applications are listed in Table 14‐3 on
page 14‐8.

all

Resets the severity level for all applications to 6.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the logging severity level to 6 for SNMP.
C3(rw)->clear logging application SNMP

show logging local
Use this command to display the state of message logging to the console and a persistent file.

Syntax
show logging local

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-9

set logging local

Example
This example shows how to display the state of message logging. In this case, logging to the
console is enabled and logging to a persistent file is disabled.
C3(su)->show logging local
Syslog Console Logging enabled
Syslog File Logging disabled

set logging local
Use this command to configure log messages to the console and a persistent file.

Syntax
set logging local console {enable | disable} file {enable | disable}

Parameters
console enable | disable

Enables or disables logging to the console.

file enable | disable

Enables or disables logging to a persistent file.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This command shows how to enable logging to the console and disable logging to a persistent file:
C3(su)->set logging local console enable file disable

clear logging local
Use this command to clear the console and persistent store logging for the local session.

Syntax
clear logging local

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

14-10

Logging and Network Management

show logging buffer

Example
This example shows how to clear local logging:
C3(su)->clear logging local

show logging buffer
Use this command to display the last 256 messages logged. By default, critical failures and user
login and logout timestamps are displayed.

Syntax
show logging buffer

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows a portion of the information displayed with the show logging buffer
command:
C3(su)->show logging buffer
<165>Sep 4 07:43:09 10.42.71.13 CLI[5]User:rw logged in from 10.2.1.122 (telnet)
<165>Sep 4 07:43:24 10.42.71.13 CLI[5]User: debug failed login from 10.4.1.100
(telnet)

show logging interface
Use this command to display the interface used for the source IP address of the system logging.

Syntax
show logging interface

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-11

set logging interface

Example
This example displays the output of this command. In this case, the IP address assigned to
loopback interface 1 will be used as the source IP address of the system logging.
C3(rw)->show logging interface
loopback 1

192.168.10.1

set logging interface
Use this command to specify the interface used for the source IP address of the system logging.

Syntax
set logging interface {loopback loop-ID | vlan vlan-ID}

Parameters
loopback loop‐ID

Specifies the loopback interface to be used. The value of loop‐ID can
range from 0 to 7.

vlan vlan‐ID

Specifies the VLAN interface to be used. The value of vlan‐ID can range
from 1 to 4093.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command allows you to configure the source IP address used by the system logging
application when generating packets for management purposes. Any of the management
interfaces, including VLAN routing interfaces, can be configured as the source IP address used in
packets generated by the system logging.
An interface must have an IP address assigned to it before it can be set by this command.
If no interface is specified, then the IP address of the Host interface will be used.
If a non‐loopback interface is configured with this command, application packet egress is
restricted to that interface if the server can be reached from that interface. Otherwise, the packets
are transmitted over the first available route. Packets from the application server are received on
the configured interface.
If a loopback interface is configured, and there are multiple paths to the application server, the
outgoing interface (gateway) is determined based on the best route lookup. Packets from the
application server are then received on the sending interface. If route redundancy is required,
therefore, a loopback interface should be configured.

Example
This example configures an IP address on VLAN interface 100 and then sets that interface as the
system logging source IP address.
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#exit

14-12

Logging and Network Management

clear logging interface

C3(rw)->router(Config)#exit
C3(rw)->router#exit
C3(rw)->router>exit
C3(rw)->set logging interface vlan 100

C3(rw)->show logging interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

clear logging interface
Use this command to clear the interface used for the source IP address of the system logging back
to the default of the Host interface.

Syntax
clear logging interface

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This command returns the interface used for the source IP address of the system logging back to
the default of the Host interface.
C3(rw)->show logging interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

C3(rw)->clear logging interface
C3(rw)->

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-13

Monitoring Network Events and Status

Monitoring Network Events and Status
Purpose
To display switch events and command history, to set the size of the history buffer, and to display
and disconnect current user sessions.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

history

14-14

show history

14-15

set history

14-15

ping

14-16

show users

14-16

disconnect

14-17

show netstat

14-17

history
Use this command to display the contents of the command history buffer. The command history
buffer includes all the switch commands entered up to a maximum of 100, as specified in the set
history command (“set history” on page 14‐15).

Syntax
history

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the contents of the command history buffer. It shows there are
five commands in the buffer:
C3(su)->history
1 hist
2 show gvrp
3 show vlan
4 show igmp
5 show ip address

14-14

Logging and Network Management

show history

show history
Use this command to display the size (in lines) of the history buffer.

Syntax
show history

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the size of the history buffer:
C3(su)->show history
History buffer size: 20

set history
Use this command to set the size of the history buffer.

Syntax
set history size [default]

Parameters
size

Specifies the size of the history buffer in lines. Valid values are 1 to 100.

default

(Optional) Makes this setting persistent for all future sessions.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the size of the command history buffer to 30 lines:
C3(su)->set history 30

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-15

ping

ping
Use this command to send ICMP echo‐request packets to another node on the network from the
switch CLI.

Syntax
ping host

Parameters
host

Specifies the IP address of the device to which the ping will be sent.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to ping IP address 134.141.89.29. In this case, this host is alive:
C3(su)->ping 134.141.89.29
134.141.89.29 is alive

In this example, the host at IP address is not responding:
C3(su)->ping 134.141.89.255
no answer from 134.141.89.255

show users
Use this command to display information about the active console port or Telnet session(s) logged
in to the switch.

Syntax
show users

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to use the show users command. In this output, there are two Telnet
users logged in with Read‐Write access privileges from IP addresses 134.141.192.119 and
134.141.192.18:

14-16

Logging and Network Management

disconnect

C3(su)->show users
Session User Location
-------- ----- -------------------------* telnet
rw
134.141.192.119
telnet
rw
134.141.192.18

disconnect
Use this command to close an active console port or Telnet session from the switch CLI.

Syntax
disconnect {ip-addr | console}

Parameters
ip‐addr

Specifies the IP address of the Telnet session to be disconnected. This
address is displayed in the output shown in “show users” on page 12‐15.

console

Closes an active console port.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to close a Telnet session to host 134.141.192.119:
C3(su)->disconnect 134.141.192.119

This example shows how to close the current console session:
C3(su)->disconnect console

show netstat
Use this command to display network layer statistics.

Syntax
show netstat

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-17

show netstat

Example
The following example shows the output of this command.
C3(su)->show netstat
Prot Local Address
---- ----------------------------TCP 127.0.0.1.2222
TCP 0.0.0.0.80
TCP 0.0.0.0.23
TCP 10.1.56.17.23
UDP 0.0.0.0.17185
UDP 127.0.0.1.49152
UDP 0.0.0.0.161
UDP 0.0.0.0.*
UDP 0.0.0.0.514

Foreign Address
----------------------------0.0.0.0.*
0.0.0.0.*
0.0.0.0.*
134.141.99.104.47718
0.0.0.0.*
127.0.0.1.17185
0.0.0.0.*
0.0.0.0.*
0.0.0.0.*

The following table describes the output of this command.
Table 14-4

14-18

show netstat Output Details

Output Field

What it displays...

Prot

Type of protocol running on the connection.

Local Address

IP address of the connection’s local host.

Foreign Address

IP address of the connection’s foreign host.

State

Communications mode of the connection.

Logging and Network Management

State
----------LISTEN
LISTEN
LISTEN
ESTABLISHED

Managing Switch Network Addresses and Routes

Managing Switch Network Addresses and Routes
Purpose
To display or delete switch ARP table entries, and to display MAC address information.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show arp

14-19

set arp

14-20

clear arp

14-21

traceroute

14-21

show mac

14-22

show mac agetime

14-23

set mac agetime

14-24

clear mac agetime

14-24

set mac algorithm

14-25

show mac algorithm

14-25

clear mac algorithm

14-26

set mac multicast

14-26

clear mac address

14-27

show mac unreserved-flood

14-28

set mac unreserved-flood

14-28

show arp
Use this command to display the switch’s ARP table.

Syntax
show arp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-19

set arp

Example
This example shows how to display the ARP table:
C3(su)->show arp
LINK LEVEL ARP TABLE
IP Address
Phys Address
Flags
Interface
----------------------------------------------------10.20.1.1
00-00-5e-00-01-1
S
host
134.142.21.194
00-00-5e-00-01-1
S
host
134.142.191.192 00-00-5e-00-01-1
S
host
134.142.192.18
00-00-5e-00-01-1
S
host
134.142.192.119 00-00-5e-00-01-1
S
host
-----------------------------------------------------

Table 14‐5 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 14-5

show arp Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

IP Address

IP address mapped to MAC address.

Phys Address

MAC address mapped to IP address.

Flags

Route status. Possible values and their definitions include:
S - manually configured entry (static)
P - respond to ARP requests for this entry

set arp
Use this command to add mapping entries to the switch’s ARP table.

Syntax
set arp ip-address mac-address

Parameters
ip‐address

Specifies the IP address to map to the MAC address and add to the ARP
table.

mac‐address

Specifies the MAC address to map to the IP address and add to the ARP
table. The MAC address can be formatted as xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx‐xx‐
xx‐xx‐xx‐xx.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to map IP address 192.168.219.232 to MAC address 00‐00‐0c‐40‐0f‐bc:
C3(su)->set arp 192.168.219.232 00-00-0c-40-0f-bc

14-20

Logging and Network Management

clear arp

clear arp
Use this command to delete a specific entry or all entries from the switch’s ARP table.

Syntax
clear arp {ip-address | all}

Parameters
ip‐address | all

Specifies the IP address in the ARP table to be cleared, or clears all ARP
entries.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to delete entry 10.1.10.10 from the ARP table:
C3(su)->clear arp 10.1.10.10

traceroute
Use this command to display a hop‐by‐hop path through an IP network from the device to a
specific destination host. Three UDP or ICMP probes will be transmitted for each hop between the
source and the traceroute destination.

Syntax
traceroute [-w waittime] [-f first-ttl] [-m max-ttl] [-p port] [-q nqueries] [-r]
[-d] [-n] [-v] host

Parameters
‐w waittime

(Optional) Specifies time in seconds to wait for a response to a probe.

‐f first‐ttl

(Optional) Specifies the time to live (TTL) of the first outgoing probe
packet.

‐m max‐ttl

(Optional) Specifies the maximum time to live (TTL) used in outgoing
probe packets.

‐p port

(Optional) Specifies the base UDP port number used in probes.

‐q nqueries

(Optional) Specifies the number of probe inquiries.

‐r

(Optional) Bypasses the normal host routing tables.

‐d

(Optional) Sets the debug socket option.

‐n

(Optional) Displays hop addresses numerically. (Supported in a future
release.)

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-21

show mac

‐v

(Optional) Displays verbose output, including the size and destination of
each response.

host

Specifies the host to which the route of an IP packet will be traced.

Defaults
If not specified, waittime will be set to 5 seconds.
If not specified, first‐ttl will be set to 1 second.
If not specified, max‐ttl will be set to 30 seconds.
If not specified, port will be set to 33434.
If not specified, nqueries will be set to 3.
If ‐r is not specified, normal host routing tables will be used.
If ‐d is not specified, the debug socket option will not be used.
If ‐v is not specified, summary output will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to use traceroute to display a round trip path to host 192.167.252.17. In
this case, hop 1 is the SecureStack C3 switch, hop 2 is 14.1.0.45, and hop 3 is back to the host IP
address. Round trip times for each of the three UDP probes are displayed next to each hop:
C3(su)->traceroute 192.167.252.17
traceroute to 192.167.252.17 (192.167.252.17), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets
1 matrix.enterasys.com (192.167.201.40) 20.000 ms 20.000 ms 20.000 ms
2 14.1.0.45 (14.1.0.45) 40.000 ms 10.000 ms 20.000 ms
3 192.167.252.17 (192.167.252.17) 50.000 ms 0.000 ms 20.000 ms

show mac
Use this command to display MAC addresses in the switch’s filtering database. These are
addresses learned on a port through the switching process.

Syntax
show mac [address mac-address] [fid fid] [port port-string] [type {other | learned
| self | mgmt}]

Parameters

14-22

address mac‐address

(Optional) Displays a specific MAC address (if it is known by the
device).

fid fid

(Optional) Displays MAC addresses for a specific filter database
identifier.

port port‐string

(Optional) Displays MAC addresses for specific port(s).

type other |learned |
self | mgmt

(Optional) Displays information related to other, learned, self or
mgmt (management) address type.

Logging and Network Management

show mac agetime

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all MAC addresses for the device will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display MAC address information for ge.3.1:
C3(su)->show mac port ge.3.1
MAC Address
FID Port
Type
----------------- ---- ------------- -------00-09-6B-0F-13-E6 15
ge.3.1
Learned
MAC Address
VLAN Port
Type
Status Egress Ports
----------------- ---- ------------- ------- ------- --------------------------01-01-23-34-45-56 20
any
mcast
perm
ge.3.1

Table 14‐6 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 14-6

show mac Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

MAC Address

MAC addresses mapped to the port(s) shown.

FID

Filter database identifier.

Port

Port designation.

Type

Address type. Valid types are:
• Learned
• Self
• Management
• Other (this will include any static MAC locked addresses as described in
“Configuring MAC Locking” on page 26-54).
• mcast (multicast)

VLAN

The VLAN ID configured for the multicast MAC address.

Status

The status of the multicast address.

Egress Ports

The ports which have been added to the egress ports list.

show mac agetime
Use this command to display the timeout period for aging learned MAC entries.

Syntax
show mac agetime

Parameters
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-23

set mac agetime

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the MAC timeout period:
C3(su)->show mac agetime
Aging time: 300 seconds

set mac agetime
Use This command to set the timeout period for aging learned MAC entries.

Syntax
set mac agetime time

Parameters
time

Specifies the timeout period in seconds for aging learned MAC
addresses. Valid values are 10 to 1,000,000 seconds. Default value is 300
seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to set the MAC timeout period:
C3(su)->set mac agetime 250

clear mac agetime
Use this command to reset the timeout period for aging learned MAC entries to the default value
of 300 seconds.

Syntax
clear mac agetime

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.
14-24

Logging and Network Management

set mac algorithm

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to reset the MAC timeout period to the default value of 300 seconds.
C3(su)->clear mac agetime

set mac algorithm
Use this command to set the MAC algorithm mode, which determines the hash mechanism used
by the device when performing Layer 2 lookups on received frames.

Syntax
set mac algorithm {mac-crc16-lowerbits | mac-crc16-upperbits |
mac-crc32-lowerbits | mac-crc32-upperbits}

Parameters
mac‐crc16‐lowerbits

Select the MAC CRC 16 lower bits algorithm for hashing.

mac‐crc16‐upperbits

Select the MAC CRC 16 upper bits algorithm for hashing.

mac‐crc32‐lowerbits

Select the MAC CRC 32 lower bits algorithm for hashing.

mac‐crc32‐upperbits

Select the MAC CRC 32 upper bits algorithm for hashing.

Defaults
The default MAC algorithm is mac‐crc16‐upperbits.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Each algorithm is optimized for a different spread of MAC addresses. When changing this mode,
the switch will display a warning message and prompt you to restart the device.
The default MAC algorithm is mac‐crc16‐upperbits.

Example
This example sets the hashing algorithm to mac‐crc32‐upperbits.
C3(rw)->set mac algorithm mac-crc32-upperbits

show mac algorithm
This command displays the currently selected MAC algorithm mode.

Syntax
show mac algorithm

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-25

clear mac algorithm

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows the output of this command.
C3(su)->show mac algorithm
Mac hashing algorithm is mac-crc16-upperbits.

clear mac algorithm
Use this command to return the MAC hashing algorithm to the default value of mac‐crc16‐
upperbits.

Syntax
clear mac algorithm

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example resets the MAC hashing algorithm to the default value.
C3(su)->clear mac algorithm

set mac multicast
Use this command to define on what ports within a VLAN a multicast address can be dynamically
learned on, or on what ports a frame with the specified MAC address can be flooded. Also, use
this command to append ports to or clear ports from the egress ports list.

Syntax
set mac multicast mac-address vlan-id [port-string] [{append | clear} port-string]

14-26

Logging and Network Management

clear mac address

Parameters
mac‐address

Specifies the multicast MAC address. The MAC address can be
formatted as xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx‐xx‐xx‐xx‐xx‐xx.

vlan‐id

Specifies the VLAN ID containing the ports.

port‐string

Specifies the port or range of ports the multicast MAC address can be
learned on or flooded to.

append | clear

Appends or clears the port or range of ports from the egress port list.

Defaults
If no port‐string is defined, the command will apply to all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example configures multicast MAC address 01‐01‐22‐33‐44‐55 for VLAN 24.
C3(su)->set mac multicast 01-01-22-33-44-55 24

clear mac address
Use this command to remove a multicast MAC address.

Syntax
clear mac address mac-address [vlan-id]

Parameters
mac‐address

Specifies the multicast MAC address to be cleared. The MAC address
can be formatted as xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx‐xx‐xx‐xx‐xx‐xx.

vlan‐id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN ID from which to clear the static
multicast MAC address.

Defaults
If no vlan‐id is specified, the multicast MAC address is cleared from all VLANs.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example clears multicast MAC address 01‐01‐22‐33‐44‐55 from VLAN 24.
C3(su)->clear mac multicast 01-01-22-33-44-55 24

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-27

show mac unreserved-flood

show mac unreserved-flood
Use this command to display the state of multicast flood protection.

Syntax
show mac unreserved-flood

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example displays the status of multicast flood protection.
C3(su)->show mac unreserved-flood
mac unreserved flood is disabled.

set mac unreserved-flood
Use this command to enable or disable multicast flood protection. When enabled, this prevents
policy profiles requiring a full 10 masks from being loaded.

Syntax
set mac unreserved-flood {disable | enable}

Parameters
disable | enable

Disables or enables multicast flood protection.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The following addresses will be forwarded when this function is enabled:
01:80:C2:00:00:11
01:80:C2:00:00:14
01:80:C2:00:00:15
The default state is disabled, and these addresses will not be forwarded.

14-28

Logging and Network Management

Configuring Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)

Example
This example enables multicast flood protection.
C3(su)->set mac unreserved-flood enable

Configuring Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
Purpose
To configure the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP), which synchronizes device clocks in a
network.
Note: A management IP (host, routing interface, or loopback) address must be configured for SNTP
to work..

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show sntp

14-29

set sntp client

14-31

clear sntp client

14-31

set sntp server

14-32

clear sntp server

14-32

set sntp poll-interval

14-33

clear sntp poll-interval

14-33

set sntp poll-retry

14-34

clear sntp poll-retry

14-34

set sntp poll-timeout

14-35

clear sntp poll-timeout

14-35

set timezone

14-36

show sntp interface

14-37

set sntp interface

14-37

clear sntp interface

14-38

show sntp
Use this command to display SNTP client settings.

Syntax
show sntp

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-29

show sntp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SNTP client settings:
C3(su)->show sntp
SNTP Version: 3
Current Time: TUE SEP 09 16:13:33 2003
Timezone: 'EST', offset from UTC is -4 hours and 0 minutes
Client Mode: unicast
Broadcast Count: 0
Poll Interval: 512 seconds
Poll Retry: 1
Poll Timeout: 5 seconds
SNTP Poll Requests: 1175
Last SNTP Update: TUE SEP 09 16:05:24 2003
Last SNTP Request: TUE SEP 09 16:05:24 2003
Last SNTP Status: Success
SNTP-Server
Precedence
Status
------------------------------------------10.2.8.6
2
Active
144.111.29.19
1
Active

Table 14‐7 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 14-7

show sntp Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

SNTP Version

SNTP version number.

Current Time

Current time on the system clock.

Timezone

Time zone name and amount it is offset from UTC (Universal Time). Set using the
set timezone command (“set timezone” on page 14-36).

Client Mode

Whether SNTP client is operating in unicast or broadcast mode. Set using set sntp
client command (“set sntp client” on page 14-31).

Broadcast Count

Number of SNTP broadcast frames received.

Poll Interval

Interval between SNTP unicast requests. Default of 512 seconds can be reset using
the set sntp poll-interval command (“set sntp poll-interval” on page 14-33).

Poll Retry

Number of poll retries to a unicast SNTP server. Default of 1 can be reset using the
set sntp poll-retry command (“set sntp poll-retry” on page 14-34).

Poll Timeout

Timeout for a response to a unicast SNTP request. Default of 5 seconds can be
reset using set sntp poll-timeout command (“set sntp poll-timeout” on page 14-35).

SNTP Poll Requests Total number of SNTP poll requests.

14-30

Logging and Network Management

set sntp client

Table 14-7

show sntp Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

Last SNTP Update

Date and time of most recent SNTP update.

Last SNTP Request

Date and time of most recent SNTP request.

Last SNTP Status

Whether or not broadcast reception or unicast transmission and reception was
successful.

SNTP-Server

IP address(es) of SNTP server(s).

Precedence

Precedence level of SNTP server in relation to its peers. Highest precedence is 1
and lowest is 10. Default of 1 can be reset using the set sntp server command (“set
sntp server” on page 14-32).

Status

Whether or not the SNTP server is active.

set sntp client
Use this command to set the SNTP operation mode.

Syntax
set sntp client {broadcast | unicast | disable}

Parameters
broadcast

Enables SNTP in broadcast client mode.

unicast

Enables SNTP in unicast (point‐to‐point) client mode. In this mode, the
client must supply the IP address from which to retrieve the current time.

disable

Disables SNTP.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable SNTP in broadcast mode:
C3(su)->set sntp client broadcast

clear sntp client
Use this command to clear the SNTP client’s operational mode.

Syntax
clear sntp client

Parameters
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-31

set sntp server

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the SNTP client’s operational mode:
C3(su)->clear sntp client

set sntp server
Use this command to add a server from which the SNTP client will retrieve the current time when
operating in unicast mode. Up to 10 servers can be set as SNTP servers.

Syntax
set sntp server ip-address [precedence]

Parameters
ip‐address

Specifies the SNTP server’s IP address.

precedence

(Optional) Specifies this SNTP server’s precedence in relation to its peers.
Valid values are 1 (highest) to 10 (lowest).

Defaults
If precedence is not specified, 1 will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the server at IP address 10.21.1.100 as an SNTP server:
C3(su)->set sntp server 10.21.1.100

clear sntp server
Use this command to remove one or all servers from the SNTP server list.

Syntax
clear sntp server {ip-address | all}

Parameters

14-32

ip‐address

Specifies the IP address of a server to remove from the SNTP server list.

all

Removes all servers from the SNTP server list.

Logging and Network Management

set sntp poll-interval

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to remove the server at IP address 10.21.1.100 from the SNTP server list:
C3(su)->clear sntp server 10.21.1.100

set sntp poll-interval
Use this command to set the poll interval between SNTP unicast requests.

Syntax
set sntp poll-interval value

Parameters
value

The poll interval is 2 to the power of value in seconds, where value can range
from 6 to 10.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the SNTP poll interval to 64 seconds:
C3(su)->set sntp poll-interval 6

clear sntp poll-interval
Use this command to clear the poll interval between unicast SNTP requests.

Syntax
clear sntp poll-interval

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-33

set sntp poll-retry

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the SNTP poll interval:
C3(su)->clear sntp poll-interval

set sntp poll-retry
Use this command to set the number of poll retries to a unicast SNTP server.

Syntax
set sntp poll-retry retry

Parameters
retry

Specifies the number of retries. Valid values are 0 to 10.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the number of SNTP poll retries to 5:
C3(su)->set sntp poll-retry 5

clear sntp poll-retry
Use this command to clear the number of poll retries to a unicast SNTP server.

Syntax
clear sntp poll-retry

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

14-34

Logging and Network Management

set sntp poll-timeout

Example
This example shows how to clear the number of SNTP poll retries:
C3(su)->clear sntp poll-retry

set sntp poll-timeout
Use this command to set the poll timeout (in seconds) for a response to a unicast SNTP request.

Syntax
set sntp poll-timeout timeout

Parameters
timeout

Specifies the poll timeout in seconds. Valid values are 1 to 30.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the SNTP poll timeout to 10 seconds:
C3(su)->set sntp poll-timeout 10

clear sntp poll-timeout
Use this command to clear the SNTP poll timeout.

Syntax
clear sntp poll-timeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the SNTP poll timeout:
C3(su)->clear sntp poll-timeout

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-35

set timezone

set timezone
Use this command to configure the current timezone as an offset from UTC.

Syntax
set timezone name [hours] [minutes]

Parameters
name

The name of the timezone. Typically, this name is a standard
abbreviation such as EST (Eastern Standard Time) or EDT (Eastern
Daylight Time).

hours

(Optional) Specifies the offset in hours from UTC. The value can range
from ‐13 to 13. The default is 0 hours.

minutes

(Optional) Specifies additional offset in minutes from UTC. The value
can range from 0 to 59. The default is 0 minutes.

Defaults
If you enter a timezone name without specifying an offset in hours and minutes, the default is an
offset from UTC of 0 hours and 0 minutes.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Typically, this command is used to configure the local timezone offset from UTC (Univeral Time)
when SNTP is used to synchronize the time used by devices on the network.
To display the current timezone setting used by SNTP, use the show sntp command. To clear an
existing offset to zero, enter the command without specifying any hours or minutes.
Standard timezone names and offsets can be found at the following URL, among others:
http://www.timeanddate.com/library/abbreviations/timezones/

Example
The following example sets the timezone name to EST and the offset to North American Eastern
Standard Time offset of ‐5 hours from UTC, then displays the timezone used with SNTP.
C3(su)->set timezone EST -5
C3(su)->show sntp
SNTP Version: 3
Current Time: WED JUL 16 11:35:52 2008
Timezone: 'EST' offset from UTC is -5 hours and 0 minutes
Client Mode: unicast
Broadcast Count: 0
Poll Interval: 6 (64 seconds)
Poll Retry: 1
Poll Timeout: 5 seconds
SNTP Poll Requests: 2681
Last SNTP Update: WED JUL 16 16:35:23 2008
Last SNTP Request: WED JUL 16 16:35:23 2008
Last SNTP Status: Success

14-36

Logging and Network Management

show sntp interface

SNTP-Server
Precedence
Status
------------------------------------------192.255.255.254
2
Active

show sntp interface
Use this command to display the interface used for the source IP address of the SNTP client.

Syntax
show sntp interface

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐only.

Example
This example displays the output of this command. In this case, the IP address assigned to
loopback interface 1 will be used as the source IP address of the SNTP client.
C3(rw)->show sntp interface
loopback 1

192.168.10.1

set sntp interface
Use this command to specify the interface used for the source IP address of the SNTP client.

Syntax
set sntp interface {loopback loop-ID | vlan vlan-ID}

Parameters
loopback loop‐ID

Specifies the loopback interface to be used. The value of loop‐ID can
range from 0 to 7.

vlan vlan‐ID

Specifies the VLAN interface to be used. The value of vlan‐ID can range
from 1 to 4093.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-37

clear sntp interface

Usage
This command allows you to configure the source IP address used by the SNTP application when
generating packets for management purposes. Any of the management interfaces, including
VLAN routing interfaces, can be configured as the source IP address used in packets generated by
the SNTP client.
An interface must have an IP address assigned to it before it can be set by this command.
If no interface is specified, then the IP address of the Host interface will be used.
If a non‐loopback interface is configured with this command, application packet egress is
restricted to that interface if the server can be reached from that interface. Otherwise, the packets
are transmitted over the first available route. Packets from the application server are received on
the configured interface.
If a loopback interface is configured, and there are multiple paths to the application server, the
outgoing interface (gateway) is determined based on the best route lookup. Packets from the
application server are then received on the sending interface. If route redundancy is required,
therefore, a loopback interface should be configured.

Example
This example configures an IP address on VLAN interface 100 and then sets that interface as the
SNTP client source IP address.
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#exit
C3(rw)->router(Config)#exit
C3(rw)->router#exit
C3(rw)->router>exit
C3(rw)->set sntp interface vlan 100

C3(rw)->show sntp interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

clear sntp interface
Use this command to clear the interface used for the source IP address of the SNTP client back to
the default of the Host interface.

Syntax
clear sntp interface

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

14-38

Logging and Network Management

clear sntp interface

Example
This command returns the interface used for the source IP address of the SNTP client back to the
default of the Host interface.
C3(rw)->show sntp interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

C3(rw)->clear sntp interface
C3(rw)->

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-39

Configuring Node Aliases

Configuring Node Aliases
The node alias feature enables administrators to determine the MAC address and location of a
given end‐station (or node) using the node’s Layer 3 alias information (IP address) as a key. With
this method, it is possible to determine that, for instance, IP address 123.145.2.23 is located on
switch 5 port 3.
The passive accumulation of a networkʹs node/alias information is accomplished by “snooping”
on the contents of network traffic as it passes through the switch fabric.
In the C3, node data is automatically accumulated into the ct‐alias mib, and by default this feature
is enabled. The NetSight Console Compass utility and Automated Security Manager (ASM) use
the information in the node/alias MIB table.
Itʹs important to make sure that inter‐switch links are not learning node/alias information, as it
would slow down searches by the NetSight Compass and ASM tools and give inaccurate results.

Purpose
To review, disable, and re‐enable node (port) alias functionality on the switch.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show nodealias config

14-40

set nodealias

14-41

clear nodealias config

14-42

show nodealias config
Use this command to display node alias configuration settings on one or more ports.

Syntax
show nodealias config [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays node alias configuration settings for specific port(s).

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, node alias configurations will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display node alias configuration settings for ports ge.2.1 through 9:
C3(rw)->show nodealias config ge.2.1-9
Port Number
Max Entries
Used Entries

14-40

Logging and Network Management

Status

set nodealias

----------ge.2.1
ge.2.2
ge.2.3
ge.2.4
ge.2.5
ge.2.6
ge.2.7
ge.2.8
ge.2.9

----------16
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
4000

-----------0
0
2
0
0
2
0
0
1

-----Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable

Table 14‐8 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 14-8

show nodealias config Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Port Number

Port designation.

Max Entries

Maximum number of alias entries configured for this port.

Used Entries

Number of alias entries (out of the maximum amount configured) already used by
this port.

Status

Whether or not a node alias agent is enabled (default) or disabled on this port.

set nodealias
Use this command to enable or disable a node alias agent on one or more ports, or set the
maximum number of alias entries stored per port.

Syntax
set nodealias {enable | disable | maxentries maxentries} port-string

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables a node alias agent.

maxentries maxentries

Set the maximum number of alias entries stored per port. Valid range
is 0 to 4096. The default value is 32.

port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to enable/disable node alias agent or set
a maximum number of stored entries.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Upon packet reception, node aliases are dynamically assigned to ports enabled with an alias
agent, which is the default setting on SecureStack C3 devices. Node aliases cannot be statically
created, but can be deleted using the command “clear nodealias config” (page 14‐42).

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

14-41

clear nodealias config

Itʹs important to make sure that inter‐switch links are not learning node/alias information, as it
would slow down searches by the NetSight Compass and ASM tools and give inaccurate results.

Example
This example shows how to disable the node alias agent on ge.1.3:
C3(su)->set nodealias disable ge.1.3

clear nodealias config
Use this command to reset node alias state to enabled and clear the maximum entries value.

Syntax
clear nodealias config port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to reset the node alias configuration.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the node alias configuration on ge.1.3:
C3(su)->clear nodealias config ge.1.3

14-42

Logging and Network Management

15
RMON Configuration
This chapter describes the commands used to configure RMON on a SecureStack C3 switch.
For information about...

Refer to page...

RMON Monitoring Group Functions

15-1

Design Considerations

15-2

Statistics Group Commands

15-3

History Group Commands

15-6

Alarm Group Commands

15-9

Event Group Commands

15-13

Filter Group Commands

15-17

Packet Capture Commands

15-22

RMON Monitoring Group Functions
RMON (Remote Network Monitoring) provides comprehensive network fault diagnosis,
planning, and performance tuning information and allows for interoperability between SNMP
management stations and monitoring agents. RMON extends the SNMP MIB capability by
defining additional MIBs that generate a much richer set of data about network usage. These MIB
“groups” each gather specific sets of data to meet common network monitoring requirements.
Table 15‐1 lists the RMON monitoring groups supported on SecureStack C3 devices, each group’s
function and the elements it monitors, and the associated configuration commands needed.
Table 15-1
RMON
Group
Statistics

RMON Monitoring Group Functions and Commands
What It Does...

What It Monitors...

CLI Command(s)

Records statistics
measured by the RMON
probe for each monitored
interface on the device.

Packets dropped, packets
sent, bytes sent (octets),
broadcast and multicast
packets, CRC errors,
oversized and undersized
packets, fragments, jabbers,
and counters for packets.

“show rmon stats” on
page 15-4
“set rmon stats” on
page 15-4
“clear rmon stats” on
page 15-5

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-1

Design Considerations

Table 15-1
RMON
Group
History

RMON Monitoring Group Functions and Commands (Continued)
What It Does...

What It Monitors...

CLI Command(s)

Records periodic statistical
samples from a network.

Sample period, number of
samples and item(s) sampled.

“show rmon history” on
page 15-6
“set rmon history” on
page 15-7
“clear rmon history” on
page 15-7

Alarm

Event

Periodically gathers
statistical samples from
variables in the probe and
compares them with
previously configured
thresholds. If the monitored
variable crosses a
threshold, an event is
generated.

Alarm type, interval, starting
threshold, stop threshold.

Controls the generation and
notification of events from
the device.

Event type, description, last
time event was sent.

“show rmon alarm” on
page 15-9
“set rmon alarm properties”
on page 15-10
“set rmon alarm status” on
page 15-11
“clear rmon alarm” on
page 15-12
“show rmon event” on
page 15-13
“set rmon event properties”
on page 15-14
“set rmon event status” on
page 15-15
“clear rmon event” on
page 15-15

Filter

Allows packets to be
matched by a filter
equation. These matched
packets form a data stream
or “channel” that may be
captured.

Packets matching the filter
configuration.

“show rmon channel” on
page 15-17
“set rmon channel” on
page 15-18
“clear rmon channel” on
page 15-19
“show rmon filter” on
page 15-19
“set rmon filter” on
page 15-20
“clear rmon filter” on
page 15-21

Packet
Capture

Allows packets to be
captured upon a filter
match.

Packets matching the filter
configuration.

“show rmon capture” on
page 15-22
“set rmon capture” on
page 15-23
“clear rmon capture” on
page 15-24

Design Considerations
The C3 supports RMON Packet Capture/Filter Sampling through both the CLI and MIBs, but with
the following constraints:

15-2

RMON Configuration

Statistics Group Commands

•

RMON Packet Capture/Filter Sampling and Port Mirroring cannot be enabled on the same
interface concurrently.

•

You can capture a total of 100 packets on an interface, no more and no less.
–

The captured frames will be as close to sequential as the hardware will allow.

–

Only one interface can be configured for capturing at a time.

–

Once 100 frames have been captured by the hardware, the application will stop without
manual intervention.

•

As described in the MIB, the filter is only applied after the frame is captured, thus only a
subset of the frames captured will be available for display.

•

There is only one Buffer Control Entry supported.

•

Due to the limitations of the hardware, the Buffer Control Entry table will have limits on a few
of its elements:
–

MaxOctetsRequested can only be set to the value ‐1 which indicates the application will
capture as many packets as possible given its restrictions.

–

CaptureSliceSize can only be set to 1518.

–

The Full Action element can only be set to “lock” since the device does not support
wrapping the capture buffer.

•

Due to hardware limitations, the only frame error counted is oversized frames.

•

The application does not support Events. Therefore, the following elements of the Channel
Entry Table are not supported: TurnOnEventIndex, TurnOffEventIndex, EventIndex, and
EventStatus.

•

There is only one Channel Entry available at a time.
–

•

There are only three Filter Entries available, and a user can associate all three Filter Entries
with the Channel Entry.

Configured channel, filter, and buffer information will be saved across resets, but not frames
within the capture buffer.

Statistics Group Commands
Purpose
To display, configure, and clear RMON statistics.

Note: Due to hardware limitations, the only frame error counted is oversized frames.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show rmon stats

15-4

set rmon stats

15-4

clear rmon stats

15-5

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-3

show rmon stats

show rmon stats
Use this command to display RMON statistics measured for one or more ports.

Syntax
show rmon stats [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays RMON statistics for specific port(s).

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, RMON stats will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display RMON statistics for Gigabit Ethernet port 1 in switch 1.
:

C3(su)->show rmon stats ge.1.1
Port: ge.1.1
------------------------------------Index
= 1
Owner
= monitor
Data Source
= ifIndex.1
Drop Events
Collisions
Jabbers
Broadcast Pkts
Multicast Pkts
CRC Errors
Undersize Pkts
Oversize Pkts
Fragments

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Packets
Octets
0
64
65
- 127
128 - 255
256 - 511
512 - 1023
1024 - 1518

Octets
Octets
Octets
Octets
Octets
Octets

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Table 15‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.

set rmon stats
Use this command to configure an RMON statistics entry.

Syntax
set rmon stats index port-string [owner]

Parameters

15-4

index

Specifies an index for this statistics entry.

port‐string

Specifies port(s) to which this entry will be assigned.

owner

(Optional) Assigns an owner for this entry.

RMON Configuration

clear rmon stats

Defaults
If owner is not specified, monitor will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to configure RMON statistics entry 2 for ge.1.20:
C3(rw)->set rmon stats 2 ge.1.20

clear rmon stats
Use this command to delete one or more RMON statistics entries.

Syntax
clear rmon stats {index-list | to-defaults}

Parameters
index‐list

Specifies one or more stats entries to be deleted, causing them to disappear
from any future RMON queries.

to‐defaults

Resets all history entries to default values. This will cause entries to
reappear in RMON queries.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to delete RMON statistics entry 2:
C3(rw)->clear rmon stats 2

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-5

History Group Commands

History Group Commands
Purpose
To display, configure, and clear RMON history properties and statistics.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show rmon history

15-6

set rmon history

15-7

clear rmon history

15-7

show rmon history
Use this command to display RMON history properties and statistics. The RMON history group
records periodic statistical samples from a network.

Syntax
show rmon history [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays RMON history entries for specific port(s).

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, information about all RMON history entries will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display RMON history entries for Gigabit Ethernet port 1 in switch 1.
A control entry displays first, followed by actual entries corresponding to the control entry. In this
case, the default settings for entry owner, sampling interval, and maximum number of entries.
(buckets) have not been changed from their default values. For a description of the types of
statistics shown, refer to Table 15‐2.
:

C3(su)->show rmon history ge.1.1
Port: ge.1.1
------------------------------------Index 1
Owner
= monitor
Status
= valid
Data Source
= ifIndex.1
Interval
= 30
Buckets Requested = 50
Buckets Granted
= 10

15-6

RMON Configuration

set rmon history

Sample 2779
Drop Events
Octets
Packets
Broadcast Pkts
Multicast Pkts
CRC Align Errors

=
=
=
=
=
=

Interval Start: 1 days 0 hours 2 minutes 22 seconds
0
Undersize Pkts
= 0
0
Oversize Pkts
= 0
0
Fragments
= 0
0
Jabbers
= 0
0
Collisions
= 0
0
Utilization(%)
= 0

set rmon history
Use this command to configure an RMON history entry.

Syntax
set rmon history index [port-string] [buckets buckets] [interval interval] [owner
owner]

Parameters
index‐list

Specifies an index number for this entry.

port‐string

(Optional) Assigns this entry to a specific port.

buckets buckets

(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of entries to maintain.

interval interval

(Optional) Specifies the sampling interval in seconds.

owner owner

(Optional) Specifies an owner for this entry.

Defaults
If buckets is not specified, the maximum number of entries maintained will be 50.
If not specified, interval will be set to 30 seconds.
If owner is not specified, monitor will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how configure RMON history entry 1 on port ge.2.1 to sample every 20
seconds:
C3(rw)->set rmon history 1 ge.2.1 interval 20

clear rmon history
Use this command to delete one or more RMON history entries or reset one or more entries to
default values. For specific values, refer to “set rmon history” on page 15‐7.

Syntax
clear rmon history {index-list | to-defaults}

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-7

clear rmon history

Parameters
index‐list

Specifies one or more history entries to be deleted, causing them to
disappear from any future RMON queries.

to‐defaults

Resets all history entries to default values. This will cause entries to
reappear in RMON queries.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to delete RMON history entry 1:
C3(rw)->clear rmon history 1

15-8

RMON Configuration

Alarm Group Commands

Alarm Group Commands
Purpose
To display, configure, and clear RMON alarm entries and properties.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show rmon alarm

15-9

set rmon alarm properties

15-10

set rmon alarm status

15-11

clear rmon alarm

15-12

show rmon alarm
Use this command to display RMON alarm entries. The RMON alarm group periodically takes
statistical samples from RMON variables and compares them with previously configured
thresholds. If the monitored variable crosses a threshold an RMON event is generated.

Syntax
show rmon alarm [index]

Parameters
index

(Optional) Displays RMON alarm entries for a specific entry index ID.

Defaults
If index is not specified, information about all RMON alarm entries will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display RMON alarm entry 3:
C3(rw)->show rmon alarm 3
Index 3
--------------------Owner
=
Status
=
Variable
=
Sample Type
=
Interval
=
Rising Threshold
=
Rising Event Index =

Manager
valid
1.3.6.1.4.1.5624.1.2.29.1.2.1.0
delta
Startup Alarm
30
Value
1
Falling Threshold
2
Falling Event Index

=
=
=
=

rising
0
0
0

Table 15‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-9

set rmon alarm properties

Table 15-2

show rmon alarm Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Index

Index number for this alarm entry.

Owner

Text string identifying who configured this entry.

Status

Whether this event entry is enabled (valid) or disabled.

Variable

MIB object to be monitored.

Sample Type

Whether the monitoring method is an absolute or a delta sampling.

Startup Alarm

Whether alarm generated when this entry is first enabled is rising, falling, or either.

Interval

Interval in seconds at which RMON will conduct sample monitoring.

Rising Threshold

Minimum threshold for causing a rising alarm.

Falling Threshold

Maximum threshold for causing a falling alarm.

Rising Event Index

Index number of the RMON event to be triggered when the rising threshold is
crossed.

Falling Event Index

Index number of the RMON event to be triggered when the falling threshold is
crossed.

set rmon alarm properties
Use this command to configure an RMON alarm entry, or to create a new alarm entry with an
unused alarm index number.

Syntax
set rmon alarm properties index [interval interval] [object object] [type
{absolute | delta}] [startup {rising | falling | either}] [rthresh rthresh]
[fthresh fthresh] [revent revent] [fevent fevent] [owner owner]

Parameters
index

Specifies an index number for this entry. Maximum number or entries is
50. Maximum value is 65535.

interval interval

(Optional) Specifies an interval (in seconds) for RMON to conduct sample
monitoring.

object object

(Optional) Specifies a MIB object to be monitored.
Note: This parameter is not mandatory for executing the command, but
must be specified in order to enable the alarm entry configuration.

type absolute |
delta

15-10

RMON Configuration

(Optional) Specifies the monitoring method as: sampling the absolute
value of the object, or the difference (delta) between object samples.

set rmon alarm status

startup rising |
falling | either

(Optional) Specifies the type of alarm generated when this event is first
enabled as:
•

Rising ‐ Sends alarm when an RMON event reaches a maximum
threshold condition is reached, for example, more than 30 collisions
per second.

•

Falling ‐ Sends alarm when RMON event falls below a minimum
threshold condition, for example when the network is behaving
normally again.

•

Either ‐ Sends alarm when either a rising or falling threshold is
reached.

rthresh rthresh

(Optional) Specifies a minimum threshold for causing a rising alarm.

fthresh fthresh

Specifies a maximum threshold for causing a falling alarm.

revent revent

Specifies the index number of the RMON event to be triggered when the
rising threshold is crossed.

fevent fevent

Specifies the index number of the RMON event to be triggered when the
falling threshold is crossed.

owner owner

(Optional) Specifies the name of the entity that configured this alarm
entry.

Defaults
interval ‐ 3600 seconds
type ‐ absolute
startup ‐ rising
rthresh ‐ 0
fthresh ‐ 0
revent ‐ 0
fevent ‐ 0
owner ‐ monitor

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to configure a rising RMON alarm. This entry will conduct monitoring
of the delta between samples every 30 seconds:
C3(rw)->set rmon alarm properties 3 interval 30 object
1.3.6.1.4.1.5624.1.2.29.1.2.1.0 type delta rthresh 1 revent 2 owner Manager

set rmon alarm status
Use this command to enable an RMON alarm entry. An alarm is a notification that a statistical
sample of a monitored variable has crossed a configured threshold.

Syntax
set rmon alarm status index enable
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-11

clear rmon alarm

Parameters
index

Specifies an index number for this entry. Maximum number or entries is
50. Maximum value is 65535.

enable

Enables this alarm entry.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
An RMON alarm entry can be created using this command, configured using the set rmon alarm
properties command (“set rmon alarm properties” on page 15‐10), then enabled using this
command. An RMON alarm entry can be created and configured at the same time by specifying
an unused index with the set rmon alarm properties command.

Example
This example shows how to enable RMON alarm entry 3:
C3(rw)->set rmon alarm status 3 enable

clear rmon alarm
Use this command to delete an RMON alarm entry.

Syntax
clear rmon alarm index

Parameters
index

Specifies the index number of entry to be cleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear RMON alarm entry 1:
C3(rw)->clear rmon alarm 1

15-12

RMON Configuration

Event Group Commands

Event Group Commands
Purpose
To display and clear RMON events, and to configure RMON event properties.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show rmon event

15-13

set rmon event properties

15-14

set rmon event status

15-15

clear rmon event

15-15

show rmon event
Use this command to display RMON event entry properties.

Syntax
show rmon event [index]

Parameters
index

(Optional) Displays RMON properties and log entries for a specific entry
index ID.

Defaults
If index is not specified, information about all RMON entries will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display RMON event entry 3:
C3(rw)->show rmon event 3
Index 3
---------------Owner
=
Status
=
Description
=
Type
=
Community
=
Last Time Sent =

Manager
valid
STP Topology change
log-and-trap
public
0 days 0 hours 0 minutes 37 seconds

Table 15‐3 provides an explanation of the command output.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-13

set rmon event properties

Table 15-3

show rmon event Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Index

Index number for this event entry.

Owner

Text string identifying who configured this entry.

Status

Whether this event entry is enabled (valid) or disabled.

Description

Text string description of this event.

Type

Whether the event notification will be a log entry, and SNMP trap, both, or none.

Community

SNMP community name if message type is set to trap.

Last Time Sent

When an event notification matching this entry was sent.

set rmon event properties
Use this command to configure an RMON event entry, or to create a new event entry with an
unused event index number.

Syntax
set rmon event properties index [description description] [type {none | log | trap
| both}] [community community] [owner owner]

Parameters
index

Specifies an index number for this entry. Maximum number of entries is
100. Maximum value is 65535.

description
description

(Optional) Specifies a text string description of this event.

type none | log |
trap | both

(Optional) Specifies the type of RMON event notification as: none, a log
table entry, an SNMP trap, or both a log entry and a trap message.

community
community

(Optional) Specifies an SNMP community name to use if the message
type is set to trap. For details on setting SNMP traps and community
names, refer to “Creating a Basic SNMP Trap Configuration” on
page 8‐37.

owner owner

(Optional) Specifies the name of the entity that configured this entry.

Defaults
If description is not specified, none will be applied.
If not specified, type none will be applied.
If owner is not specified, monitor will be applied.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

15-14

RMON Configuration

set rmon event status

Example
This example shows how to create and enable an RMON event entry called “STP topology
change” that will send both a log entry and an SNMP trap message to the “public” community:
C3(rw)->set rmon event properties 2 description "STP topology change" type both
community public owner Manager

set rmon event status
Use this command to enable an RMON event entry. An event entry describes the parameters of an
RMON event that can be triggered. Events can be fired by RMON alarms and can be configured to
create a log entry, generate a trap, or both.

Syntax
set rmon event status index enable

Parameters
index

Specifies an index number for this entry. Maximum number of entries is
100. Maximum value is 65535.

enable

Enables this event entry.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
An RMON event entry can be created using this command, configured using the set rmon event
properties command (“set rmon event properties” on page 15‐14), then enabled using this
command. An RMON event entry can be created and configured at the same time by specifying an
unused index with the set rmon event properties command.

Example
This example shows how to enable RMON event entry 1:
C3(rw)->set rmon event status 1 enable

clear rmon event
Use this command to delete an RMON event entry and any associated log entries.

Syntax
clear rmon event index

Parameters
index

Specifies the index number of the entry to be cleared.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-15

clear rmon event

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear RMON event 1:
C3(rw)->clear rmon event 1

15-16

RMON Configuration

Filter Group Commands

Filter Group Commands
The packet capture and filter function is disabled by default. Only one interface can be configured
for capturing and filtering at a time.
When packet capture is enabled on an interface, the SecureStack C3 switch will capture 100 frames
as close to sequentially as possible. These 100 frames will be placed into a buffer for inspection. If
there is data in the buffer when the function is started, the buffer will be overwritten. Once 100
frames have been captured, the capture will stop. Filtering will be performed on the frames
captured in the buffer. Therefore, only a subset of the frames captured will be available for display.

Note: Packet capture is sampling only and does not guarantee receipt of back to back packets.

One channel at a time can be supported, with up to three filters. Configured channel, filter, and
buffer control information will be saved across resets, but captured frames within the buffer will
not be saved.
This function cannot be used concurrently with port mirroring. The system will check to prevent
concurrently enabling both functions, and a warning will be generated in the CLI if attempted.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show rmon channel

15-17

set rmon channel

15-18

clear rmon channel

15-19

show rmon filter

15-19

set rmon filter

15-20

clear rmon filter

15-21

show rmon channel
Use this command to display RMON channel entries for one or more ports.

Syntax
show rmon channel [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays RMON channel entries for a specific port(s).

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, information about all channels will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-17

set rmon channel

Example
This example shows how to display RMON channel information for ge.2.12:
C3(rw)->show rmon channel ge.2.12
Port ge.2.12
Channel index= 628
EntryStatus= valid
---------------------------------------------------------Control
off
AcceptType
matched
OnEventIndex
0
OffEventIndex
0
EventIndex
0
Status
ready
Matches
4498
Description
Thu Dec 16 12:57:32 EST 2004
Owner
NetSight smith

set rmon channel
Use this command to configure an RMON channel entry.

Syntax
set rmon channel index port-string [accept {matched | failed}] [control {on | off}]
[description description] [owner owner]

Parameters
index

Specifies an index number for this entry. An entry will automatically be
created if an unused index number is chosen. Maximum number of
entries is 2. Maximum value is 65535.

port‐string

Specifies the port on which traffic will be monitored.

accept matched |
failed

(Optional) Specifies the action of the filters on this channel as:
•

matched ‐ Packets will be accepted on filter matches

•

failed ‐ Packets will be accepted if they fail a match

control on | off

(Optional) Enables or disables control of the flow of data through the
channel.

description
description

(Optional) Specifies a description for this channel.

owner owner

(Optional) Specifies the name of the entity that configured this entry.

Defaults
If an action is not specified, packets will be accepted on filter matches.
If not specified, control will be set to off.
If a description is not specified, none will be applied.
If owner is not specified, it will be set to monitor.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

15-18

RMON Configuration

clear rmon channel

Example
This example shows how to create an RMON channel entry:
C3(rw)->set rmon channel 54313 ge.2.12 accept failed control on description
"capture all"

clear rmon channel
Use this command to clear an RMON channel entry.

Syntax
clear rmon channel index

Parameters
index

Specifies the channel entry to be cleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear RMON channel entry 2:
C3(rw)->clear rmon channel 2

show rmon filter
Use this command to display one or more RMON filter entries.

Syntax
show rmon filter [index index | channel channel]

Parameters
index index |
channel channel

(Optional) Displays information about a specific filter entry, or about all
filters which belong to a specific channel.

Defaults
If no options are specified, information for all filter entries will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display all RMON filter entries and channel information:

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-19

set rmon filter

C3(rw)->show rmon filter
Index= 55508
Channel Index= 628
EntryStatus= valid
---------------------------------------------------------Data Offset
0
PktStatus
0
PktStatusMask
0
PktStatusNotMask
0
Owner
ETS,NAC-D
----------------------------Data
ff ff ff ff ff ff
----------------------------DataMask
ff ff ff ff ff ff
----------------------------DataNotMask
00 00 00 00 00 00

set rmon filter
Use this command to configure an RMON filter entry.

Syntax
set rmon filter index channel-index [offset offset] [status status] [smask smask]
[snotmask snotmask] [data data] [dmask dmask] [dnotmask dnotmask] [owner owner]

Parameters
index

Specifies an index number for this entry. An entry will automatically be
created if an unused index number is chosen. Maximum number of
entries is 10. Maximum value is 65535.

channel‐index

Specifies the channel to which this filter will be applied.

offset offset

(Optional) Specifies an offset from the beginning of the packet to look for
matches.

status status

(Optional) Specifies packet status bits that are to be matched.

smask smask

(Optional) Specifies the mask applied to status to indicate which bits are
significant.

snotmask snotmask

(Optional) Specifies the inversion mask that indicates which bits should
be set or not set

data data

(Optional) Specifies the data to be matched.

dmask dmask

(Optional) Specifies the mask applied to data to indicate which bits are
significant.

dnotmask dnotmask

(Optional) Specifies the inversion mask that indicates which bits should
be set or not set.

owner

(Optional) Specifies the name of the entity that configured this entry.

Defaults
If owner is not specified, it will be set to monitor.
If no other options are specified, none (0) will be applied.

15-20

RMON Configuration

clear rmon filter

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to create RMON filter 1 and apply it to channel 9:
C3(rw)->set rmon filter 1 9 offset 30 data 0a154305 dmask ffffffff

clear rmon filter
Use this command to clear an RMON filter entry.

Syntax
clear rmon filter {index index | channel channel}

Parameters
index index |
channel channel

Clears a specific filter entry, or all entries belonging to a specific channel.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear RMON filter entry 1:
C3(rw)->clear rmon filter index 1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-21

Packet Capture Commands

Packet Capture Commands
Note that packet capture filter is sampling only and does not guarantee receipt of back‐to‐back
packets.

Purpose
To display RMON capture entries, configure, enable, or disable capture entries, and clear capture
entries.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show rmon capture

15-22

set rmon capture

15-23

clear rmon capture

15-24

show rmon capture
Use this command to display RMON capture entries and associated buffer control entries.

Syntax
show rmon capture [index [nodata]]

Parameters
index

(Optional) Displays the specified buffer control entry and all captured
packets associated with that entry.

nodata

(Optional) Displays only the buffer control entry specified by index.

Defaults
If no options are specified, all buffer control entries and associated captured packets will be
displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display RMON capture entries and associated buffer entries:
C3(rw)->show rmon capture
Buf.control= 28062 Channel= 38283
EntryStatus= valid
---------------------------------------------------------FullStatus
avail
FullAction
lock
Captured packets
251
Capture slice
1518
Download size
100
Download offset
0
Max Octet Requested 50000
Max Octet Granted
50000
Start time
1 days 0 hours 51 minutes 15 seconds

15-22

RMON Configuration

set rmon capture

Owner

monitor

captureEntry= 1
Buff.control= 28062
-------------------------------------------Pkt ID
9
Pkt time
1 days 0 hours 51 minutes 15 seconds
Pkt Length 93
Pkt status 0
Data:
00 00 5e 00 01 01 00 01 f4 00 7d ce 08 00 45 00
00 4b b4 b9 00 00 40 11 32 5c 0a 15 43 05 86 8d
bf e5 00 a1 0e 2b 00 37 cf ca 30 2d 02 01 00 04
06 70 75 62 6c 69 63 a2 20 02 02 0c 92 02 01 00
02 01 00 30 14 30 12 06 0d 2b 06 01 02 01 10 07
01 01 0b 81 fd 1c 02 01 01 00 11 0b 00

set rmon capture
Use this command to configure an RMON capture entry.

Syntax
set rmon capture index {channel [action {lock}] [slice slice] [loadsize loadsize]
[offset offset] [asksize asksize] [owner owner]}

Parameters
index

Specifies a buffer control entry.

channel

Specifies the channel to which this capture entry will be applied.

action lock

(Optional) Specifies the action of the buffer when it is full as:
•

lock ‐ Packets will cease to be accepted

slice slice

(Optional) Specifies the maximum octets from each packet to be saved in
a buffer. Currently, the only value allowed is 1518.

loadsize loadsize

(Optional) Specifies the maximum octets from each packet to be
downloaded from the buffer. The default is 100.

offset offset

(Optional) Specifies the first octet from each packet that will be retrieved.

asksize asksize

(Optional) Specifies the requested maximum octets to be saved in this
buffer. Currently, the only value accepted is ‐1, which requests as many
octets as possible.

owner

(Optional) Specifies the name of the entity that configured this entry.

Defaults
If not specified, action defaults to lock.
If not specified, offset defaults to 0.
If not specified, asksize defaults to ‐1 (which will request as many octets as possible).
If slice is not specified, 1518 will be applied.
If loadsize is not specified, 100 will be applied.
If owner is not specified, it will be set to monitor.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

15-23

clear rmon capture

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to create RMON capture entry 1 to “listen” on channel 628:
C3(rw)->set rmon capture 1 628

clear rmon capture
Use this command to clears an RMON capture entry.

Syntax
clear rmon capture index

Parameters
index

Specifies the capture entry to be cleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear RMON capture entry 1:
C3(rw)->clear rmon capture 1

15-24

RMON Configuration

16
DHCP Server Configuration
This chapter describes the commands to configure the IPv4 DHCP server functionality on a
SecureStack C3 switch.
For information about...

Refer to page...

DHCP Overview

16-1

Configuring General DHCP Server Parameters

16-3

Configuring IP Address Pools

16-12

DHCP Overview
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) for IPv4 is a network layer protocol that
implements automatic or manual assignment of IP addresses and other configuration information
to client devices by servers. A DHCP server manages a user‐configured pool of IP addresses from
which it can make assignments upon client requests. A relay agent passes DHCP messages
between clients and servers which are on different physical subnets.

DHCP Relay Agent
The DHCP/BOOTP relay agent function can be configured on all of the SecureStack C3’s routing
interfaces. The relay agent can forward a DHCP client’s request to a DHCP server located on a
different network if the address of the server is configured as a helper address on the receiving
interface. The relay agent interface must be a VLAN which is configured with an IP address. Refer
to the ip helper‐address command (“ip helper‐address” on page 19‐18) for more information.

DHCP Server
DHCP server functionality allows the SecureStack C3 switch to provide basic IP configuration
information to a client on the network who requests such information using the DHCP protocol.
DHCP provides the following mechanisms for IP address allocation by a DHCP server:
•

Automatic—DHCP server assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or
until the client explicitly relinquishes the address) from a defined pool of IP addresses
configured on the server.

•

Manual—A client’s IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used
simply to convey the assigned address to the client. This is managed by means of “static”
address pools configured on the server.

The amount of time that a particular IP address is valid for a system is called a lease. The
SecureStack C3 maintains a lease database which contains information about each assigned IP

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-1

DHCP Overview

address, the MAC address to which it is assigned, the lease expiration, and whether the address
assignment is dynamic (automatic) or static (manual). The DHCP lease database is stored in flash
memory.
In addition to assigning IP addresses, the DHCP server can also be configured to assign the
following to requesting clients:
•

Default router(s)

•

DNS server(s) and domain name

•

NetBIOS WINS server(s) and node name

•

Boot file

•

DHCP options as defined by RFC 2132
Note: A total of 16 address pools, dynamic and/or static, and a maximum of 256 addresses for the
entire switch, can be configured on the SecureStack C3.

Configuring a DHCP Server
For DHCP to function on SecureStack C3 systems, the system has to “know about” the IP network
for which the DHCP pool is to be created.
On the C3, there are two ways to configure a DHCP server: one is to associate the DHCP address
pool with the switch’s host port IP address, and the other is to associate the DHCP address pool
with a routed interface.
Since on a C3 system, the host port IP address cannot fall within a configured routed interface on
the system, a typical C3 system configured with routing interfaces will not have a host port IP
address. Therefore, all DHCP pools would be associated with routed interfaces.
The following tasks provide basic DHCP server functionality when the DHCP pool is associated
with the system’s host IP address. This procedure would typically be used when the C3 system is
NOT configured for routing.
1.

Configure the system (stack) host port IP address with the set ip address command. Once the
system’s IP address is configured, the system then “knows” about the configured subnet. For
example:
set ip address 192.0.0.50 mask 255.255.255.0

2.

Enable DHCP server functionality on the system with the set dhcp enable command.

3.

Configure an IP address pool for dynamic IP address assignment. The only required steps are
to name the pool and define the network number and mask for the pool. Note that the pool
has to be in the same subnet and use the same mask as the system host port IP address. For
example:
set dhcp pool auto-pool network 192.0.0.0 255.255.255.0

All DHCP clients served by this switch must be in the same VLAN as the system’s host port.
The following tasks provide basic DHCP server functionality when the DHCP pool is associated
with a routed interface.
1.

Create a VLAN and add ports to the VLAN. Only DHCP clients associated with this VLAN
will be served IP addresses from the DHCP address pool associated with this routed interface
(VLAN). In this example, VLAN 6 is created and ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.10 are added to
VLAN 6:
set vlan create 6

16-2

DHCP Server Configuration

Configuring General DHCP Server Parameters

set port vlan ge.1.1-10 6

2.

Create a routed interface for the VLAN in router configuration mode. In the following
example, an IP address is associated with routed interface VLAN 6:
In router configuration mode:
interface vlan 6
no shutdown
ip address 6.6.1.1 255.255.0.0

3.

Enable DHCP server functionality on the system with the set dhcp enable command.

4.

Create the DHCP address pool. The only required steps are to name the pool and define the
network number and mask for the pool. Note that the pool has to be in the same subnet as the
routed interface and use the same mask configured on the routed interface. For example:
set dhcp pool auto-pool network 6.6.0.0 255.255.0.0

DHCP clients in VLAN 6 will be served IP addresses from this DHCP address pool.
Optional DHCP server tasks include:
•

You can limit the scope of addresses assigned to a pool for dynamic address assignment with
the set dhcp exclude command. Up to 128 non‐overlapping address ranges can be excluded
on the SecureStack C3. For example:
set dhcp exclude 192.0.0.1 192.0.0.10
Note: The IP address of the system’s host port or the routed interface is automatically
excluded.

•

Configure static address pools for manual address assignment. The only required steps are to
name the pool, configure either the hardware address of the client or the client identifier, and
configure the IP address and mask for the manual binding. For example:
set dhcp pool static-pool hardware-address 0011.2233.4455
set dhcp pool static-pool host 192.0.0.200 255.255.255.0

•

Set other DHCP server parameters such as the number of ping packets to be sent before
assigning an IP address, or enabling conflict logging.

Configuring General DHCP Server Parameters
Purpose
To configure DHCP server parameters, and to display and clear address binding information,
server statistics, and conflict information.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

set dhcp

16-4

set dhcp bootp

16-4

set dhcp conflict logging

16-5

show dhcp conflict

16-5

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-3

set dhcp

For information about...

Refer to page...

clear dhcp conflict

16-6

set dhcp exclude

16-7

clear dhcp exclude

16-7

set dhcp ping

16-8

clear dhcp ping

16-8

show dhcp binding

16-9

clear dhcp binding

16-9

show dhcp server statistics

16-10

clear dhcp server statistics

16-10

set dhcp
Use this command to enable or disable the DHCP server functionality on the SecureStack C3.

Syntax
set dhcp {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables DHCP server functionality. By default, DHCP server is
disabled.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example enables DHCP server functionality.
C3(rw)->set dhcp enable

set dhcp bootp
Use this command to enable or disable automatic address allocation for BOOTP clients. By
default, address allocation for BOOTP clients is disabled. Refer to RFC 1534, “Interoperation
Between DHCP and BOOTP,” for more information.

Syntax
set dhcp bootp {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

16-4

DHCP Server Configuration

Enables or disables address allocation for BOOTP clients.

set dhcp conflict logging

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example enables address allocation for BOOTP clients.
C3(rw)->set dhcp bootp enable

set dhcp conflict logging
Use this command to enable conflict logging. By default, conflict logging is enabled. Use the clear
dhcp conflict logging command to disable conflict logging.

Syntax
set dhcp conflict logging

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example enables DHCP conflict logging.
C3(rw)->set dhcp conflict logging

show dhcp conflict
Use this command to display conflict information, for one address or all addresses.

Syntax
show dhcp conflict [address]

Parameters
address

[Optional] Specifies the address for which to display conflict information.

Defaults
If no address is specified, conflict information for all addresses is displayed.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-5

clear dhcp conflict

Mode
Read‐only.

Example
This example displays conflict information for all addresses. Note that ping is the only detection
method used.
C3(ro)->show dhcp conflict
IP address
----------192.0.0.2
192.0.0.3
192.0.0.4
192.0.0.12

Detection Method
----------------Ping
Ping
Ping
Ping

Detection Time
--------------0 days 19h:01m:23s
0 days 19h:00m:46s
0 days 19h:01m:25s
0 days 19h:01m:26s

clear dhcp conflict
Use this command to clear conflict information for one or all addresses, or to disable conflict
logging.

Syntax
clear dhcp conflict {logging | ip-address| *}

Parameters
logging

Disables conflict logging.

ip‐address

Clears the conflict information for the specified IP address.

*

Clears the conflict information for all IP addresses.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example disables DHCP conflict logging.
C3(rw)->clear dhcp conflict logging

This example clears the conflict information for the IP address 192.0.0.2.
C3(rw)->clear dhcp conflict 192.0.0.2

16-6

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp exclude

set dhcp exclude
Use this command to configure the IP addresses that the DHCP server should not assign to DHCP
clients. Multiple address ranges can be configured but the ranges cannot overlap. Up to 128 non‐
overlapping address ranges can be excluded.

Syntax
set dhcp exclude low-ipaddr [high-ipaddr]

Parameters
low‐ipaddr

Specifies the first IP address in the address range to be excluded from
assignment.

high‐ipaddr

(Optional) Specifies the last IP address in the address range to be
excluded.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example first configures the address pool named “auto1” with 255 addresses for the Class C
network 172,20.28.0, with the set dhcp pool network command. Then, the example limits the
scope of the addresses that can be assigned by a DHCP server by excluding addresses 172.20.28.80
– 100, with the set dhcp exclude command.
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 network 172.20.28.0 24
C3(rw)->set dhcp exclude 172.20.28.80 172.20.28.100

clear dhcp exclude
Use this command to clear the configured IP addresses that the DHCP server should not assign to
DHCP clients.

Syntax
clear dhcp exclude low-ipaddr [high-ipaddr]

Parameters
low‐ipaddr

Specifies the first IP address in the address range to be cleared.

high‐ipaddr

(Optional) Specifies the last IP address in the address range to be cleared.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-7

set dhcp ping

Example
This example clears the previously excluded range of IP addresses between 192.168.1.88 through
192.168.1.100.
C3(rw)->clear dhcp exclude 192.168.1.88 192.168.1.100

set dhcp ping
Use this command to configure the number of ping packets the DHCP server sends to an IP
address before assigning the address to a requesting client.

Syntax
set dhcp ping packets number

Parameters
packets number

Specifies the number of ping packets to be sent. The value of number can
be 0, or range from 2 to 10. Entering 0 disables this function. The default
value is 2 packets.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example sets the number of ping packets sent to 3.
C3(rw)->set dhcp ping packets 3

clear dhcp ping
Use this command to reset the number of ping packets sent by the DHCP server back to the
default value of 2.

Syntax
clear dhcp ping packets

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

16-8

DHCP Server Configuration

show dhcp binding

Example
This example resets the number of ping packets sent back to the default value.
C3(rw)->clear dhcp ping packets

show dhcp binding
Use this command to display binding information for one or all IP addresses.

Syntax
show dhcp binding [ip-address]

Parameters
ip‐address

(Optional) Specifies the IP address for which to display binding
information.

Defaults
If no IP address is specified, binding information for all addresses is displayed.

Mode
Read‐only.

Example
This example displays binding information about all addresses.
C3(rw)->show dhcp binding
IP address
Hardware Address
--------------------------192.0.0.6
00:33:44:56:22:39
192.0.0.8
00:33:44:56:22:33
192.0.0.10
00:33:44:56:22:34
192.0.0.11
00:33:44:56:22:35
192.0.0.12
00:33:44:56:22:36
192.0.0.13
00:33:44:56:22:37
00:33:44:56:22:38
192.0.0.14

Lease Expiration
----------------00:11:02
00:10:22
00:09:11
00:10:05
00:10:30
infinite
infinite

Type
----Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual

clear dhcp binding
Use this command to clear (delete) one or all DHCP address bindings.

Syntax
clear dhcp binding {ip-addr | *}

Parameters
ip‐addr

Specifies the IP address for which to clear/delete the DHCP binding.

*

Deletes all address bindings.

Defaults
None.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-9

show dhcp server statistics

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example deletes the DHCP address binding for IP address 192.168.1.1.
C3(rw)->clear dhcp binding 192.168.1.1

show dhcp server statistics
Use this command to display DHCP server statistics.

Syntax
show dhcp server statistics

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Read‐only.

Example
This example displays server statistics.
C3(ro)->show dhcp server statistics
Automatic Bindings
Expired Bindings
Malformed Bindings
Messages
---------DHCP DISCOVER
DHCP REQUEST
DHCP DECLINE
DHCP RELEASE
DHCP INFORM

36
6
0
Received
---------382
3855
0
67
1

Messages
---------DHCP OFFER
DHCP ACK
DHCP NACK

clear dhcp server statistics
Use this command to clear all DHCP server counters.

Syntax
clear dhcp server statistics

16-10

DHCP Server Configuration

Sent
-----381
727
2

clear dhcp server statistics

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example clears all DHCP server counters.
C3(rw)->clear dhcp server statistics

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-11

Configuring IP Address Pools

Configuring IP Address Pools
Manual Pool Configuration Considerations
•

The subnet of the IP address being issued should be on the same subnet as the ingress
interface (that is, the subnet of the host IP address of the switch, or if routing interfaces are
configured, the subnet of the routing interface).

•

A manual pool can be configured using either the client’s hardware address (set dhcp pool
hardware‐address) or the client’s client‐identifier (set dhcp pool client‐identifier), but using
both is not recommended.

•

If the incoming DHCP request packet contains a client‐identifier, then a manual pool
configured with that client‐identifier must exist on the switch in order for the request to be
processed. The hardware address is not checked.

•

A hardware address and type (Ethernet or IEEE 802) configured in a manual pool is checked
only when a client‐identifier is not also configured for the pool and the incoming DHCP
request packet does not include a client‐identifier option.

Purpose
To configure and clear DHCP address pool parameters, and to display address pool configuration
information.

Note: A total of 16 address pools, dynamic and/or static, can be configured on the SecureStack C3.

Commands
For information about...

16-12

Refer to page...

set dhcp pool

16-13

clear dhcp pool

16-14

set dhcp pool network

16-14

clear dhcp pool network

16-15

set dhcp pool hardware-address

16-15

clear dhcp pool hardware-address

16-16

set dhcp pool host

16-16

clear dhcp pool host

16-17

set dhcp pool client-identifier

16-17

clear dhcp pool client-identifier

16-18

set dhcp pool client-name

16-19

clear dhcp pool client-name

16-19

set dhcp pool bootfile

16-20

clear dhcp pool bootfile

16-20

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp pool

For information about...

Refer to page...

set dhcp pool next-server

16-21

clear dhcp pool next-server

16-21

set dhcp pool lease

16-22

clear dhcp pool lease

16-22

set dhcp pool default-router

16-23

clear dhcp pool default-router

16-23

set dhcp pool dns-server

16-24

clear dhcp pool dns-server

16-24

set dhcp pool domain-name

16-25

clear dhcp pool domain-name

16-25

set dhcp pool netbios-name-server

16-26

clear dhcp pool netbios-name-server

16-26

set dhcp pool netbios-node-type

16-27

clear dhcp pool netbios-node-type

16-27

set dhcp pool option

16-28

clear dhcp pool option

16-29

show dhcp pool configuration

16-29

set dhcp pool
Use this command to create and assign a name to a DHCP server pool of addresses. Up to 16
address pools may be configured on a SecureStack C3. Note that entering this command is not
required to create an address pool before configuring other address pool parameters.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example creates an address pool named “auto1.”
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-13

clear dhcp pool

clear dhcp pool
Use this command to delete a DHCP server pool of addresses.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example deletes the address pool named “auto1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1

set dhcp pool network
Use this command to configure the subnet number and mask for an automatic DHCP address
pool.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname network number {mask | prefix-length}

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

number

Specifies an IP subnet for the address pool.

mask

Specifies the subnet mask in dotted quad notation.

prefix‐length

Specifies the subnet mask as an integer.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Use this command to configure a set of IP addresses to be assigned by the DHCP server using the
specified address pool. In order to limit the scope of the addresses configured with this command,
use the set dhcp exclude command on page 16‐7.
16-14

DHCP Server Configuration

clear dhcp pool network

Examples
This example configures the IP subnet 172.20.28.0 with a prefix length of 24 for the automatic
DHCP pool named “auto1.” Alternatively, the mask could have been specified as 255.255.255.0.
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 network 172.20.28.0 24

This example limits the scope of 255 addresses created for the Class C network 172,20.28.0 by the
previous example, by excluding addresses 172.20.28.80 – 100.
C3(rw)->set dhcp exclude 172.20.28.80 172.20.28.100

clear dhcp pool network
Use this command to remove the network number and mask of a DHCP server pool of addresses.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname network

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example deletes the network and mask from the address pool named “auto1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 network

set dhcp pool hardware-address
Use this command to configure the MAC address of the DHCP client and create an address pool
for manual binding. You can use either this command or the set dhcp pool client‐identifier
command to create a manual binding pool, but using both is not recommended.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname hardware-address hw-addr [type]

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

hw‐addr

Specifies the MAC address of the client’s hardware platform. This value
can be entered using dotted hexadecimal notation or colons.

type

(Optional) Specifies the protocol of the hardware platform. Valid values
are 1 for Ethernet or 6 for IEEE 802. Default value is 1, Ethernet.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-15

clear dhcp pool hardware-address

Defaults
If no type is specified, Ethernet is assumed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example specifies 0001.f401.2710 as the Ethernet MAC address for the manual address pool
named “manual1.” Alternatively, the MAC address could have be entered as 00:01:f4:01:27:10.
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool manual1 hardware-address 0001.f401.2710

clear dhcp pool hardware-address
Use this command to remove the hardware address of a DHCP client from a manual binding
address pool.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname hardware-address

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example deletes the client hardware address from the address pool named “manual1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool manual1 hardware-address

set dhcp pool host
Use this command to configure an IP address and network mask for a manual DHCP binding.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname host ip-address [mask | prefix-length]

Parameters

16-16

poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

ip‐address

Specifies the IP address for manual binding.

DHCP Server Configuration

clear dhcp pool host

mask

(Optional) Specifies the subnet mask in dotted quad notation.

prefix‐length

(Optional) Specifies the subnet mask as an integer.

Defaults
If a mask or prefix is not specified, the class A, B, or C natural mask will be used.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to configure the minimum requirements for a manual binding address
pool. First, the hardware address of the client’s hardware platform is configured, followed by
configuration of the address to be assigned to that client manually.
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool manual1 hardware-address 0001.f401.2710
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool manual1 host 15.12.1.99 255.255.248.0

clear dhcp pool host
Use this command to remove the host IP address from a manual binding address pool.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname host

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example deletes the host IP address from the address pool named “manual1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool manual1 host

set dhcp pool client-identifier
Use this command to configure the client identifier of the DHCP client and create an address pool
for manual binding. You can use either this command or the set dhcp pool hardware‐address
command to create a manual binding pool, but using both is not recommended.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname client-identifier id

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-17

clear dhcp pool client-identifier

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

id

Specifies the unique client identifier for this client. The value must be
entered in xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The client identifier is formed by concatenating the media type and the MAC address. For
example, if the client hardware type is Ethernet and the client MAC address is 00:01:22:33:44:55,
then the client identifier configured with this command must be 01:00:01:22:33:44:55.

Example
This example shows how to configure the minimum requirements for a manual binding address
pool, using a client identifier rather than the hardware address of the client’s hardware platform.
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool manual2 client-identifier 01:00:01:22:33:44:55
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool manual2 host 10.12.1.10 255.255.255.0

clear dhcp pool client-identifier
Use this command to remove the unique identifier of a DHCP client from a manual binding
address pool.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname client-identifier

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example deletes the client identifier from the address pool named “manual1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool manual1 client-identifier

16-18

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp pool client-name

set dhcp pool client-name
Use this command to assign a name to a DHCP client when creating an address pool for manual
binding.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname client-name name

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

name

Specifies the name to be assigned to this client. Client names may be up to
31 characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example configures the client name “appsvr1” to the manual binding pool “manual2.”
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool manual2 client-identifier 01:22:33:44:55:66
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool manual2 host 10.12.1.10 255.255.255.0
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool manual2 client-name appsvr1

clear dhcp pool client-name
Use this command to delete a DHCP client name from an address pool for manual binding.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname client-name

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example deletes the client name from the manual binding pool “manual2.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool manual2 client-name

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-19

set dhcp pool bootfile

set dhcp pool bootfile
Use this command to specify a default boot image for the DHCP clients who will be served by the
address pool being configured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname bootfile filename

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

filename

Specifies the boot image file name.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example sets the boot image filename for address pool named “auto1.”
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 bootfile image1.img

clear dhcp pool bootfile
Use this command to remove a default boot image from the address pool being configured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname bootfile

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes the boot image filename from address pool named “auto1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 bootfile

16-20

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp pool next-server

set dhcp pool next-server
Use this command to specify the file server from which the default boot image is to be loaded by
the client.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname next-server ip-address

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

ip‐address

Specifies the IP address of the file server the DHCP client should contact
to load the default boot image.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example specifies the file server from which clients being served by address pool “auto1”
should download the boot image file “image1.img.”
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 bootfile image1.img
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 next-server 10.1.1.10

clear dhcp pool next-server
Use this command to remove the boot image file server from the address pool being configured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname next-server

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes the file server from address pool “auto1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 next-server

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-21

set dhcp pool lease

set dhcp pool lease
Use this command to specify the duration of the lease for an IP address assigned by the DHCP
server from the address pool being configured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname lease {days [hours [minutes]] | infinite}

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

days

Specifies the number of days an address lease will remain valid. Value can
range from 0 to 59.

hours

(Optional) When a days value has been assigned, specifies the number of
hours an address lease will remain valid. Value can range from 0 to 1439.

minutes

(Optional) When a days value and an hours value have been assigned,
specifies the number of minute an address lease will remain valid. Value
can range from 0 to 86399.

infinite

Specifies that the duration of the lease will be unlimited.

Defaults
If no lease time is specified, a lease duration of 1 day is configured.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example configures a lease duration of 12 hours for the address pool being configured. Note
that to configure a lease time less than one day, enter 0 for days, then the number of hours and
minutes.
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 lease 0 12

clear dhcp pool lease
Use this command to restore the default lease time value of one day for the address pool being
configured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname lease

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
Clears the lease time for this address pool to the default value of one day.

16-22

DHCP Server Configuration

set dhcp pool default-router

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example restores the default lease duration of one day for address pool “auto1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 lease

set dhcp pool default-router
Use this command to specify a default router list for the DHCP clients served by the address pool
being configured. Up to 8 default routers can be configured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname default-router address [address2 ... address8]

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

address

Specifies the IP address of a default router.

address2 ... address8

(Optional) Specifies, in order of preference, up to 7 additional default
router addresses.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example assigns a default router at 10.10.10.1 to the address pool named “auto1.”
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 default-router 10.10.10.1

clear dhcp pool default-router
Use this command to delete the default routers configured for this address pool.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname default-router

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-23

set dhcp pool dns-server

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes the default router from the address pool “auto1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 default-router

set dhcp pool dns-server
Use this command to specify one or more DNS servers for the DHCP clients served by the address
pool being configured. Up to 8 DNS servers can be configured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname dns-server address [address2 ... address8]

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

address

Specifies the IP address of a DNS server.

address2 ... address8

(Optional) Specifies, in order of preference, up to 7 additional DNS
server addresses.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example assigns a DNS server at 10.14.10.1 to the address pool “‘auto1.”
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 dns-server 10.14.10.1

clear dhcp pool dns-server
Use this command to remove the DNS server list from the address pool being configured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname dns-server

Parameters
poolname

Defaults
None.

16-24

DHCP Server Configuration

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

set dhcp pool domain-name

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes the DNS server list from the address pool “auto1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 dns-server

set dhcp pool domain-name
Use this command to specify a domain name to be assigned to DHCP clients served by the address
pool being configured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname domain-name domain

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

domain

Specifies the domain name string. The domain name can be up to 255
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example assigns the “mycompany.com” domain name to the address pool “auto1.”
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 domain-name mycompany.com

clear dhcp pool domain-name
Use this command to remove the domain name from the address pool being configured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname domain-name

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-25

set dhcp pool netbios-name-server

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes the domain name from the address pool “auto1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 domain-name

set dhcp pool netbios-name-server
Use this command to assign one or more NetBIOS name servers for the DHCP clients served by
the address pool being configured. Up to 8 NetBIOS name servers can be configured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname netbios-name-server address [address2 ... address8]

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

address

Specifies the IP address of a NetBIOS name server.

address2 ... address8

(Optional) Specifies, in order of preference, up to 7 additional NetBIOS
name server addresses.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example assigns a NetBIOS name server at 10.15.10.1 to the address pool being configured.
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 netbios-name-server 10.15.10.1

clear dhcp pool netbios-name-server
Use this command to remove the NetBIOS namer server list from the address pool being
configured.
clear dhcp pool poolname netbios-name-server

Parameters
poolname

Defaults
None.

16-26

DHCP Server Configuration

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

set dhcp pool netbios-node-type

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes the NetBIOS name server list from the address pool auto1.
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 netbios-name-server

set dhcp pool netbios-node-type
Use this command to specify a NetBIOS node (server) type for the DHCP clients served by the
address pool being configured.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname netbios-node-type {b-node | h-node | p-node | m-node}

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

b‐node

Specifies the NetBIOs node type to be broadcast (no WINS).

h‐node

Specifies the NetBIOs node type to be hybrid (WINS, then broadcast).

p‐node

Specifies the NetBIOs node type to be peer (WINS only).

m‐node

Specifies the NetBIOs node type to be mixed (broadcast, then WINS).

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example specifies hybrid as the NetBIOS node type for the address pool “auto1.”
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 netbios-node-type h-node

clear dhcp pool netbios-node-type
Use this command to remove the NetBIOS node type from the address pool being configured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname netbios-node-type

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-27

set dhcp pool option

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes the NetBIOS node type from the address pool “auto1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 netbios-node-type

set dhcp pool option
Use this command to configure DHCP options, described in RFC 2132.

Syntax
set dhcp pool poolname option code {ascii string | hex string-list | ip addresslist}

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

code

Specifies the DHCP option code, as defined in RFC 2132. Value can range
from 1 to 254.

ascii string

Specifies the data in ASCII format. An ASCII character string containing a
space must be enclosed in quotations.

hex string‐list

Specifies the data in HEX format. Up to 8 HEX strings can be entered.

ip address‐list

Specifies the data in IP address format. Up to 8 IP addresses can be entered.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example configures DHCP option 19, which specifies whether the client should configure its
IP layer for packet forwarding. In this case, IP forwarding is enabled with the 01 value.
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 option 19 hex 01

This example configures DHCP option 72, which assigns one or more Web servers for DHCP
clients. In this case, two Web server addresses are configured.
C3(rw)->set dhcp pool auto1 option 72 ip 168.24.3.252 168.24.3.253

16-28

DHCP Server Configuration

clear dhcp pool option

clear dhcp pool option
Use this command to remove a DHCP option from the address pool being configured.

Syntax
clear dhcp pool poolname option code

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

code

Specifies the DHCP option code, as defined in RFC 2132. Value can range
from 1 to 254.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes option 19 from address pool “auto1.”
C3(rw)->clear dhcp pool auto1 option 19

show dhcp pool configuration
Use this command to display configuration information for one or all address pools.

Syntax
show dhcp pool configuration {poolname | all}

Parameters
poolname

Specifies the name of the address pool. Pool names may be up to 31
characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Read‐only.

Example
This example displays configuration information for all address pools.
C3(rw)->show dhcp pool configuration all
Pool: Atg_Pool
Pool Type

Dynamic

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

16-29

show dhcp pool configuration

16-30

Network
Lease Time
Default Routers

192.0.0.0 255.255.255.0
1 days 0 hrs 0 mins
192.0.0.1

Pool: static1
Pool Type
Client Name
Client Identifier
Host
Lease Time
Option

Manual
appsvr1
01:00:01:f4:01:27:10
10.1.1.1 255.0.0.0
infinite
19 hex 01

Pool: static2
Pool Type
Hardware Address
Hardware Address Type
Host
Lease Time

Manual
00:01:f4:01:27:10
ieee802
192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
infinite

DHCP Server Configuration

17
DHCP Snooping and
Dynamic ARP Inspection
This chapter describes two security features:
•

DHCP snooping, which monitors DHCP messages between a DHCP client and DHCP server
to filter harmful DHCP messages and to build a database of authorized address bindings

•

Dynamic ARP inspection, which uses the bindings database created by the DHCP snooping
feature to reject invalid and malicious ARP packets

For information about...

Refer to page...

DHCP Snooping Overview

17-1

DHCP Snooping Commands

17-4

Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview

17-15

Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands

17-20

DHCP Snooping Overview
DHCP snooping monitors DHCP messages between DHCP clients and DHCP servers to filter
harmful DHCP messages and to build a bindings database of {MAC address, IP address, VLAN
ID, port} tuples that are considered authorized.
DHCP snooping is disabled globally and on all VLANs by default. Ports are untrusted by default.
DHCP snooping must be enabled globally and on specific VLANs. Ports within the VLANs must
be configured as trusted or untrusted. DHCP servers must be reached through trusted ports.
DHCP snooping enforces the following security rules:
•

DHCP packets from a DHCP server (DHCP OFFER, DHCP ACK, DHCP NAK) are dropped if
received on an untrusted port.

•

DHCP RELEASE and DHCP DECLINE messages are dropped if they are for a MAC address
in the snooping database but the bindingʹs interface in the database is different from the
interface where the message was received.

•

On untrusted interfaces, the switch drops DHCP packets whose source MAC address does not
match the client hardware address. This feature is a configurable option.

DHCP Message Processing
The hardware identifies all incoming DHCP packets on ports where DHCP snooping is enabled.
On untrusted ports, the hardware traps all incoming DHCP packets to the CPU. On trusted ports,

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-1

DHCP Snooping Overview

the hardware forwards client messages and copies server messages to the CPU so DHCP snooping
can learn the binding.
The DHCP snooping application processes incoming DHCP messages. For DHCP RELEASE and
DHCP DECLINE messages, the application compares the receive interface and VLAN with the
clientʹs interface and VLAN in the bindings database. If the interfaces do not match, the
application logs the event and drops the message. For valid client messages, DHCP snooping
compares the source MAC address to the DHCP client hardware address. Where there is a
mismatch, DHCP snooping logs and drops the packet. You can disable this feature using the set
dhcpsnooping verify mac‐address disable command.
Note: If the switch has been configured as a DHCP relay agent, to forward client requests to a
DHCP server that does not reside on the same broadcast domain as the client, MAC address
verification should be disabled in order to allow DHCP RELEASE packets to be processed by the
DHCP snooping functionality and client bindings removed from the bindings database.

DHCP snooping can be configured on switching VLANs and routing VLANs. When a DHCP
packet is received on a routing VLAN, the DHCP snooping application applies its filtering rules
and updates the bindings database. If a client message passes filtering rules, the message is placed
into the software forwarding path, where it may be processed by the DHCP relay agent, the local
DHCP server, or forwarded as an IP packet.
DHCP snooping forwards valid DHCP client messages received on non‐routing VLANs. The
message is forwarded on all trusted interfaces in the VLAN. If a DHCP relay agent or local DHCP
server co‐exist with the DHCP snooping feature, DHCP client messages will be sent to the DHCP
relay agent or local DHCP server to process further.
The DHCP snooping application does not forward server messages since they are forwarded in
hardware.

Building and Maintaining the Database
The DHCP snooping application uses DHCP messages to build and maintain the bindings
database. The bindings database includes only data for clients on untrusted ports. The bindings
database includes the following information for each entry:
•

Client MAC address

•

Client IP address

•

Time when clientʹs lease expires

•

Client VLAN ID

•

Client port

DHCP snooping creates a tentative binding from DHCP DISCOVER and REQUEST messages.
Tentative bindings tie a client to a port (the port where the DHCP client message was received).
Tentative bindings are completed when DHCP snooping learns the clientʹs IP address from a
DHCP ACK message on a trusted port. DHCP snooping removes bindings in response to
DECLINE, RELEASE, and NACK messages. The DHCP snooping application ignores the ACK
messages sent in reply to the DHCP Inform messages received on trusted ports. You can also
enter static bindings into the bindings database.
When a switch learns of new bindings or when it loses bindings, the switch immediately updates
the entries in the database.
If the absolute lease time of a snooping database entry expires, then that entry will be removed.
Care should be taken to ensure that system time is consistent across the reboots. Otherwise,
snooping entries will not expire properly. If a host sends a DHCP RELEASE message while the

17-2

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

DHCP Snooping Overview

switch is rebooting, when the switch receives a DHCP DISCOVERY or REQUEST message, the
clientʹs binding will go to a tentative binding state.

Rate Limiting
To protect the switch against DHCP attacks when DHCP snooping is enabled, the snooping
application enforces a rate limit for DHCP packets received on untrusted interfaces. DHCP
snooping monitors the receive rate on each interface separately. If the receive rate exceeds a
configurable limit, DHCP snooping brings down the interface. Use the set port enable command
to re‐enable the interface. Both the rate and the burst interval can be configured.

Basic Configuration
The following configuration procedure does not change the write delay to the snooping database
or any of the default rate limiting values. Additional configuration notes follow this procedure.
Procedure 17-1

Basic Configuration for DHCP Snooping

Step

Task

Command(s)

1.

Enable DHCP snooping globally on the switch.

set dhcpsnooping enable

2.

Determine where DHCP clients will be
connected and enable DHCP snooping on their
VLANs.

set dhcpsnooping vlan vlan-list
enable

3.

Determine which ports will be connected to the
DHCP server and configure them as trusted
ports.

set dhcpsnooping trust port
port-string enable

4.

If desired, enable logging of invalid DHCP
messages on specfic ports.

set dhcpsnooping log-invalid port
port-string enable

5.

If desired, add static bindings to the database.

set dhcpsnooping binding mac-address
vlan vlan-id ipaddr port port-string

Configuration Notes
DHCP Server
•

When the switch is operating in switch mode, then the DHCP server and DHCP clients must
be in the same VLAN.

•

If the switch is in routing mode (on those platforms that support routing), then the DCHP
server can be remotely connected to a routing interface, or running locally.

•

If the DHCP server is remotely connected, then the use of an IP helper address is required and
MAC address verification should be disabled (set dhcpsnooping verify mac‐address
disable).

•

The DHCP server must use Scopes in order to provide the IP addresses per VLAN.

•

DHCP snooping must be enabled on the interfaces where the DHCP clients are connected,
and the interfaces must be untrusted DHCP snooping ports.

•

The routing interface that is connected to the DHCP server must be enabled for DHCP
snooping and must be a trusted DHCP snooping port.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-3

DHCP Snooping Commands

DHCP Snooping Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

set dhcpsnooping

17-4

set dhcpsnooping vlan

17-5

set dhcpsnooping database write-delay

17-5

set dhcpsnooping trust

17-6

set dhcpsnooping binding

17-7

set dhcpsnooping verify

17-7

set dhcpsnooping log-invalid

17-8

set dhcpsnooping limit

17-9

show dhcpsnooping

17-10

show dhcpsnooping database

17-11

show dhcpsnooping port

17-11

show dhcpsnooping binding

17-12

show dhcpsnooping statistics

17-13

clear dhcpsnooping binding

17-14

clear dhcpsnooping statistics

17-14

clear dhcpsnooping database

17-14

clear dhcpsnooping limit

17-15

set dhcpsnooping
Use this command to enable or disable DHCP snooping globally.

Syntax
set dhcpsnooping {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable

Enable DHCP snooping globally on the switch.

disable

Disable DHCP snooping globally on the switch.

Defaults
Disabled globally.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
By default, DHCP snooping is disabled globally and on all VLANs. You must enable it globally
with this command, and then enable it on specific VLANs.
17-4

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

set dhcpsnooping vlan

Example
The following example enables DHCP snooping globally.
C3(rw)->set dhcpsnooping enable

set dhcpsnooping vlan
Use this command to enable or disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN or range of VLANs.

Syntax
set dhcpsnooping vlan vlan-range {enable | disable}

Parameters
vlan‐range

Specifies the VLAN or range of VLANs on which DHCP snooping is to
be enabled or disabled.

enable | disable

Enables or disables DHCP snooping for the specified VLANs.

Defaults
DHCP snooping is disabled by default on all VLANs.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
By default, DHCP snooping is disabled globally and on all VLANs. You must enable it globally
with the set dhcpsnooping command, and then enable it on specific VLANs with this command.

Example
This example enables DHCP snooping on VLANS 10 through 20.
C3(rw)->set dhcpsnooping vlan 10-20 enable

set dhcpsnooping database write-delay
Use this command to specify the interval between updates to the stored bindings database.

Syntax
set dhcpsnooping database write-delay seconds

Parameters
second

Specify the interval in seconds between updates to the stored bindings
database. The value can range from 15 to 86400 seconds.

Defaults
Every 5 minutes (300 seconds).

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-5

set dhcpsnooping trust

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
When a switch learns of new bindings or when it loses bindings, the switch updates the entries in
the bindings database according to the write delay timer. The switch also updates the entries in
the binding file. The frequency at which the file is updated is based on the delay configured with
this command, and the updates are batched.

Example
The following example specifies that the stored database should be updated once an hour.
C3(rw)->set dhcpsnooping database write-delay 3600

set dhcpsnooping trust
Use this command to enable or disable a port as a DHCP snooping trusted port.

Syntax
set dhcpsnooping trust port port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
port port‐string

Specifies the port or ports to be enabled or disabled as trusted ports. The
ports can be physical ports or LAGs that are members of a VLAN.

enable | disable

Enables or disables the specified ports as trusted ports.

Defaults
By default, ports are untrusted.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
In order for DHCP snooping to operate, snooping has to be enabled globally and on specific
VLANs, and the ports within the VLANs have to be configured as trusted or untrusted. On
trusted ports, DHCP client messages are forwarded directly by the hardware. On untrusted ports,
client messages are given to the DHCP snooping application.
The DHCP snooping application builds the bindings database from client messages received on
untrusted ports. DHCP snooping creates a “tentative binding” from DHCP DISCOVER and
REQUEST messages. Tentative bindings tie a client to the port on which the message packet was
received. Tentative bindings are completed when DHCP snooping learns the client’s IP address
from a DHCP ACK message on a trusted port.
The ports on the switch through which DHCP servers are reached must be configured as trusted
ports so that packets received from those ports will be forwarded to clients. DCHP packets from a
DHCP server (DHCP OFFER, DHCP ACK, DHCP NAK) are dropped if received on an untrusted
port.

17-6

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

set dhcpsnooping binding

Example
This example configures port ge.1.1 as a trusted port.
C3(rw)->set dhcpsnooping trust port ge.1.1 enable

set dhcpsnooping binding
Use this command to add a static DHCP binding to the DHCP snooping database.

Syntax
set dhcpsnooping binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ipaddr port port-string

Parameters
mac‐address

Specifies the MAC address of the binding entry.

vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the VLAN of the binding entry.

ipaddr

Specifies the IP address of the binding entry.

port port‐string

Specifies the port of the binding entry.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
When enabled globally and on VLANs, DHCP snooping builds its bindings database from DHCP
client messages received on untrusted ports. Such entries in the database are dynamic entries
which will be removed in response to valid DECLINE, RELEASE, and NACK messages or when
the absolute lease time of the entry expires.
You can add static entries to the bindings database with this command.

Example
This example creates a static entry, associating MAC address 00:01:02:33:44:55 with IP address
192.168.10.10 and VLAN 10, port ge.1.1.
C3(rw)->set dhcpsnooping binding 00:01:02:33:44:55 vlan 10 192.168.10.10 port
ge.1.1

set dhcpsnooping verify
Use this command to enable or disable DHCP snooping to filter on source MAC address.

Syntax
set dhcpsnooping verify mac-address {enable | disable}

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-7

set dhcpsnooping log-invalid

Parameters
enable

Enables verification of the source MAC address in client messages
against the client hardware address.

disable

Disables verification of the source MAC address in client messages
against the client hardware address.

Defaults
Source MAC address verification is enabled by default.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
When this verification is enabled, the DHCP snooping application compares the source MAC
address contained in valid client messages with the client’s hardware address. If there is a
mismatch, DHCP snooping logs the event and drops the packet.
Use the show dhcpsnooping command to display the status (enabled or disabled) of source MAC
address verification for each interface in an enabled VLAN. The show dhcpsnooping statistics
command shows the actual number of MAC verification errors that occurred on untrusted ports.

Example
This example disables source MAC address verification and logging.
C3(rw)->set dhcpsnooping verify mac-address disable

set dhcpsnooping log-invalid
Use this command to enable or disable logging of invalid DHCP messages on ports.

Syntax
set dhcpsnooping log-invalid port port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
port port‐string

Specifies the port or ports on which to enable or disable logging of
invalid packets.

enable | disable

Enables or disables logging on the specified ports.

Defaults
Disabled.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The DHCP snooping application processes incoming DHCP messages. For DHCPRELEASE and
DHCPDECLINE messages, the application compares the receive interface and VLAN with the

17-8

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

set dhcpsnooping limit

clientʹs interface and VLAN in the bindings database. If the interfaces do not match, the
application logs the event if logging has been enabled.
Use the show dhcpsnooping command to display the status (enabled or disabled) of logging
invalid packets for each interface in an enabled VLAN. The show dhcpsnooping statistics
command shows the actual number of server messages received on untrusted ports.

Example
This example enables logging of invalid DHCP messages on port ge.1.1 and then displays the
DHCP configuration settings.
C3(rw)->set dhcpsnooping log invalid port ge.1.1 enable
C3(su)->show dhcpsnooping
DHCP snooping is Disabled
DHCP snooping source MAC verification is enabled
DHCP snooping is enabled on the following VLANs:
3

Interface

Trusted

Log Invalid Pkts

-----------

----------

----------------

ge.1.1

No

Yes

ge.1.2

No

No

ge.1.3

Yes

No

set dhcpsnooping limit
Use this command to configure rate limiting parameters for incoming DHCP packets on a port or
ports.

Syntax
set dhcpsnooping limit port-string {none | rate pps {burst interval secs]}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or ports to which to apply these rate limiting
parameters.

none

Configures no limit on incoming DHCP packets.

rate pps

Specifies a rate limit in packets per second. The value of pps can range
from 0 to 100 packets per second.

burst interval secs

Specifies a burst interval in seconds. The value of secs can range from 1
to 15 seconds.

Defaults
Rate = 15 packets per second
Burst Interval = 1 second

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-9

show dhcpsnooping

Usage
To protect the switch from DHCP attacks when DHCP snooping is enabled, the snooping
application enforces a rate limit for DHCP packets received on untrusted interfaces. DHCP
snooping monitors the receive rate on each interface separately. If the receive rate exceeds the
configured limit, DHCP snooping brings down the interface. You can re‐enable the interface with
the set port enable command. Both the rate and the burst interval can be configured.
You can display the currently configured rate limit parameters with the show dhcpsnooping port
command.

Example
This example configures rate limit parameters on port ge.1.1.
C3(rw)->set dhcpsnooping limit ge.1.1 rate 20 burst interval 2
C3(rw)->show dhcpsnooping port ge.1.1
Interface

Trust State

Rate Limit

Burst Interval

(pps)

(seconds)

----------

-------------

-------------

---------------

ge.1.1

No

20

2

show dhcpsnooping
Use this command to display DHCP snooping configuration parameters.

Syntax
show dhcpsnooping

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command displays the status (enabled or disabled) of DHCP snooping globally, lists the
VLANs on which DHCP snooping is enabled, displays whether source MAC address verification
is enabled or disabled, and for ports that are enabled for snooping, displays whether they are
trusted or untrusted and whether logging of invalid packets has been enabled.

Example
This example shows the output of the show dhcpsnooping command.
C3(su)->show dhcpsnooping
DHCP snooping is Enabled
DHCP snooping source MAC verification is enabled
DHCP snooping is enabled on the following VLANs:

17-10

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

show dhcpsnooping database

3

Interface

Trusted

Log Invalid Pkts

-----------

----------

----------------

ge.1.47

Yes

No

ge.1.48

No

No

lag.0.1

No

No

show dhcpsnooping database
Use this command to display DHCP snooping database configuration parameters.

Syntax
show dhcpsnooping database

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command displays where the database file is stored (locally) and what the write delay value
is.

Example
This example shows the output of the show dhcpsnooping database command.
C3(su)->show dhcpsnooping database
agent url:

local

write-delay:

300

show dhcpsnooping port
Use this command to display DHCP snooping configuration parameters for specific ports.

Syntax
show dhcpsnooping port port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or ports for which to display configuration
information.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-11

show dhcpsnooping binding

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command displays the trust state and rate limiting parameters configured on the specified
ports.

Example
This example shows the output of the show dhcpsnooping port command.
C3(su)->show dhcpsnooping port ge.1.1
Interface

Trust State

Rate Limit

----------

-------------

-------------

---------------

ge.1.1

No

20

2

(pps)

Burst Interval
(seconds)

show dhcpsnooping binding
Use this command to display the contents of the DHCP snooping bindings database.

Syntax
show dhcpsnooping binding [dynamic | static] [port port-string] [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
dynamic | static

(Optional) Limits the display of bindings in the database by type of
entry, either dynamic or static.

port port‐string

(Optional) Limits the display of bindings in the database by port.

vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Limits the display of bindings in the database by VLAN id.

Defaults
If no parameters are entered, all bindings in the database are displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command displays information about the DHCP bindings in the DHCP snooping database.

Example
This example shows the output of the show dhcpsnooping binding command when no
parameters are entered.
C3(su)->show dhcpsnooping binding
Total number of bindings:

17-12

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

2

show dhcpsnooping statistics

MAC Address

IP Address

VLAN

Interface

Type

Lease (min)
-----------

-----------------

---------------

----

-----------

-------

00:02:B3:06:60:80

192.168.10.10

3

ge.1.1

STATIC

00:0F:FE:00:13:04

192.168.20.1

5

ge.1.30

DYNAMIC

1440

show dhcpsnooping statistics
Use this command to display DHCP snooping statistics for untrusted ports.

Syntax
show dhcpsnooping statistics

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The DHCP snooping application processes incoming DHCP messages on enabled untrusted
interfaces. For DHCP RELEASE and DHCP DECLINE messages, the application compares the
receive interface and VLAN with the clientʹs interface and VLAN in the bindings database. If the
interfaces do not match, the application logs the event (if logging of invalid messages is enabled)
and drops the message. If source MAC verification is enabled, for valid client messages, DHCP
snooping compares the source MAC address to the DHCP client hardware address. Where there is
a mismatch, DHCP snooping logs and drops the packet.
This command displays, for each enabled untrusted interface, the number of source MAC
verification failures and client interface mismatches that occurred since the last time these
statistics were cleared.
Since DHCP servers should not be connected through an untrusted port, the DHCP snooping
application will drop incoming DHCP server messages on untrusted interfaces and increment a
counter that is displayed with this command.

Example
This example shows the output of the show dhcpsnooping statistics command.
C3(su)->show dhcpsnooping statistics
Interface

-----------

MAC Verify

Client Ifc

DHCP Server

Failures

Mismatch

Msgs Rec'd

----------

----------

-----------

ge.1.48

0

0

0

lag.0.1

0

0

0

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-13

clear dhcpsnooping binding

clear dhcpsnooping binding
Use this command to remove bindings from the DHCP snooping bindings database.

Syntax
clear dhcpsnooping binding [port port-string | mac mac-addr]

Parameters
port port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the entry or entries to remove by port identifier.

mac mac‐addr

(Optional) Specifies the entry to remove by MAC address.

Defaults
If no parameters are entered, all bindings (static and dynamic) are removed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example clears the static binding entry that includes port ge.1.2.
C3(su)->clear dhcpsnooping binding port ge.1.2

clear dhcpsnooping statistics
Use this command to clear the DHCP snooping statistics counters.

Syntax
clear dhcpsnooping statistics

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example clears the DHCP snooping statistics counters for all enabled untrusted ports.
C3(su)->clear dhcpsnooping statistics

clear dhcpsnooping database
Use this command to return the write delay value to its default value of 300 seconds.

17-14

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

clear dhcpsnooping limit

Syntax
clear dhcpsnooping database [write-delay]

Parameters
write‐delay

(Optional) Specifies that the write delay value should be returned to the
default value of 300 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command will set the database write delay value to the default of 300 seconds.

Example
This example sets the database storage location to the default of local.
C3(su)->clear dhcpsnooping database

clear dhcpsnooping limit
Use this command to reset the rate limit values to the defaults of 15 packets per second with a
burst interval of 1 second.

Syntax
clear dhcpsnooping limit port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or ports to which this command applies.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example resets the rate limit values to their defaults on port ge.1.1.
C3(su)->clear dhcpsnooping limit ge.1.1

Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview
Dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) is a security feature that rejects invalid and malicious ARP
packets. The feature prevents a class of man‐in‐the‐middle attacks where an unfriendly station

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-15

Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview

intercepts traffic for other stations by poisoning the ARP caches of its unsuspecting neighbors.
ARP poisoning is a tactic where an attacker injects false ARP packets into the subnet, normally by
broadcasting ARP responses in which the attacker claims to be someone else. By poisoning the
ARP cache, a malicious user can intercept the traffic intended for other hosts on the network.
The Dynamic ARP Inspection application performs ARP packet validation. When DAI is enabled,
it verifies that the sender MAC address and the source IP address are a valid pair in the DHCP
snooping binding database and drops ARP packets whose sender MAC address and sender IP
address do not match an entry in the database. Additional ARP packet validation can be
configured.
If DHCP snooping is disabled on the ingress VLAN or the receive interface is trusted for DHCP
snooping, ARP packets are dropped.

Functional Description
DAI is enabled on VLANs, effectively enabling DAI on the interfaces (physical ports or LAGs) that
are members of that VLAN. Individual interfaces are configured as trusted or untrusted. The trust
configuration for DAI is independent of the trust configuration for DHCP snooping. A trusted
port is a port the network administrator does not consider to be a security threat. An untrusted
port is one which could potentially be used to launch a network attack.
DAI considers all physical ports and LAGs untrusted by default.

Static Mappings
Static mappings are useful when hosts configure static IP addresses, DHCP snooping cannot be
run, or other switches in the network do not run dynamic ARP inspection. A static mapping
associates an IP address to a MAC address on a VLAN. DAI consults its static mappings before it
consults DHCP snooping — thus, static mappings have precedence over DHCP snooping
bindings.
ARP ACLs are used to define static mappings for DAI. In this implementation, only the subset of
ARP ACL syntax required for DAI is supported. ARP ACLs are completely independent of ACLs
used for QoS. A maximum of 100 ARP ACLs can be configured. Within an ACL, a maximum of 20
rules can be configured.

Optional ARP Packet Validation
If optional ARP packet validation has been configured, DAI verifies that the sender MAC address
equals the source MAC address in the Ethernet header. Additionally, the option to verify that the
target MAC address equals the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header can be
configured. This check only applies to ARP responses, since the target MAC address is
unspecified in ARP requests.
You can also enable IP address checking. When this option is enabled, DAI drops ARP packets
with an invalid IP address. The following IP addresses are considered invalid:

17-16

•

0.0.0.0

•

255.255.255.255

•

All IP multicast addresses

•

All class E addresses (240.0.0.0/4)

•

Loopback addresses (in the range 127.0.0.0/8)

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview

Logging Invalid Packets
By default, DAI writes a log message to the normal buffered log for each invalid ARP packet it
drops. You can configure DAI to not log invalid packets for specific VLANs.

Packet Forwarding
DAI forwards valid ARP packets whose destination MAC address is not local. The ingress VLAN
could be a switching or routing VLAN. ARP requests are flooded in the VLAN. ARP responses are
unicast toward their destination. DAI queries the MAC address table to determine the outgoing
port. If the destination MAC address is local, DAI gives valid ARP packets to the ARP application.

Rate Limiting
To protect the switch from DHCP attacks when DAI is enabled, the DAI application enforces a rate
limit for ARP packets received on untrusted interfaces. DAI monitors the receive rate on each
interface separately. If the receive rate exceeds a configurable limit, DAI error disables the
interface, which effectively brings down the interface. You can use the set port enable command
to reenable the port.
You can configure both the rate and the burst interval. The default rate is 15 pps on each untrusted
interface with a range of 0 to 100 pps. The default burst interval is 1 second with a range to 1 to 15
seconds.. The rate limit cannot be set on trusted interfaces since ARP packets received on trusted
interfaces do not come to the CPU.

Eligible Interfaces
Dynamic ARP inspection is enabled per VLAN, effectively enabling DAI on the members of the
VLAN, either physical ports or LAGs. Trust is specified on the VLAN members.
DAI cannot be enabled on port‐based routing interfaces. It may be connected to:
•

A single host through a trusted link (for example, a server)

•

If multiple hosts need to connected, there must be a switch between the router and the hosts,
with DAI enabled on that switch

Interaction with Other Functions
•

DAI relies on the DHCP snooping application to verify that a {IP address, MAC address,
VLAN, interface} tuple is valid.

•

DAI registers with dot1q to receive notification of VLAN membership changes for the VLANs
where DAI is enabled.

•

DAI tells the driver about each untrusted interface (physical port or LAG) where DAI is
enabled so that the hardware will intercept ARP packets and send them to the CPU.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-17

Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview

Basic Configuration
The following basic configuration does not change the default rate limiting parameters.
Procedure 17-2

Basic Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration

Step

Task

Command(s)

1.

Configure DHCP snooping.

Refer to Procedure 17-1 on page 17-3.

2.

Enable ARP inspection on the VLANs where
clients are connected, and optionally, enable
logging of invalid ARP packets.

set arpinspection vlan vlan-range
[logging]

3.

Determine which ports are not security threats
and configure them as DAI trusted ports.

set arpinspection trust port
port-string enable

4.

If desired, configure optional validation
parameters.

set arpinspection validate
{[src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip]}

5.

If desired, configure static mappings for DAI by
creating ARP ACLs:

set arpinspection filter name permit
ip host sender-ipaddr mac host
sender-macaddr

• Create the ARP ACL
• Apply the ACL to a VLAN

17-18

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

set arpinspection filter name vlan
vlan-range [static]

Dynamic ARP Inspection Overview

Example Configuration
T

Note: This example applies only to platforms that support routing.

The following example configures DHCP snooping and dynamic ARP inspection in a routing
environment using RIP. The example configures two interfaces on the switch, configuring RIP on
both interfaces, assigning each to a different VLAN, and then enabling DHCP snooping and
dynamic ARP inspection on them:
•

Interface ge.1.1, which is connected to a remote DHCP server, on VLAN 192

•

Interface ge.1.2, which is connected to DHCP clients, on VLAN 10

In addition, the default VLAN, VLAN 1, is also enabled for DHCP snooping and dynamic ARP
inspection.
Since the DHCP server is remote, the switch has been configured as a DHCP relay agent (with the
ip helper‐address command), to forward client requests to the DHCP server. Therefore, MAC
address verification is disabled (with the set dhcpsnooping verify mac‐address disable
command) in order to allow DHCP RELEASE packets to be processed by the DHCP snooping
functionality and client bindings removed from the bindings database

Router Configuration
router
enable
configure
interface vlan 10
no shutdown
ip address 10.2.0.1 255.255.0.0
ip helper-address 192.168.0.200
ip rip send version 2
ip rip receive version 2
ip rip enable
exit

interface vlan 192
no shutdown
ip address 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0
ip rip send version 2
ip rip receive version 2
ip rip enable
exit
router rip
exit

VLAN Configuration
set vlan create 10
set vlan create 192
clear vlan egress 1 ge.1.1-2

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-19

Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands

set vlan egress 10 ge.1.2 untagged
set vlan egress 192 ge.1.1 untagged

DHCP Snooping Configuration
set dhcpsnooping enable
set dhcpsnooping vlan 1 enable
set dhcpsnooping vlan 10 enable
set dhcpsnooping vlan 192 enable
set dhcpsnooping verify mac-address disable
set dhcpsnooping trust port ge.1.1

enable

Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration
set arpinspection vlan 1
set arpinspection vlan 10
set arpinspection vlan 192
set arpinspection trust port ge.1.1 enable

Dynamic ARP Inspection Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

set arpinspection vlan

17-20

set arpinspection trust

17-21

set arpinspection validate

17-22

set arpinspection limit

17-23

set arpinspection filter

17-24

show arpinspection access-list

17-24

show arpinspection ports

17-25

show arpinspection vlan

17-26

show arpinspection statistics

17-26

clear arpinspection validate

17-27

clear arpinspection vlan

17-28

clear arpinspection filter

17-29

clear arpinspection limit

17-30

clear arpinspection statistics

17-31

set arpinspection vlan
Use this command to enable dynamic ARP inspection on one or more VLANs, and optionally,
enable logging of invalid ARP packets.

Syntax
set arpinspection vlan vlan-range [logging]

17-20

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

set arpinspection trust

Parameters
vlan‐range

Specifies the VLAN or range of VLANs on which to enable dynamic
ARP inspection.

logging

(Optional) Enables logging of invalid ARP packets for that VLAN.

Defaults
Logging is disabled by default.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command enables dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) on one or more VLANs. When DAI is
enabled on a VLAN, DAI is effectively enabled on the interfaces (physical ports or LAGs) that are
members of that VLAN.
DAI uses the DHCP snooping bindings database to verify that the sender MAC address and the
source IP address are a valid pair in the database. ARP packets whose sender MAC address and
sender IP address do not match an entry in the database are dropped.
If logging is enabled, invalid ARP packets are also logged.

Example
This example enables DAI on VLANs 2 through 5 and also enables logging of invalid ARP packets
on those VLANs.
C3(su)->set arpinspection vlan 2-5 logging

set arpinspection trust
Use this command to enable or disable a port as a dynamic ARP inspection trusted port.

Syntax
set arpinspection trust port port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or ports to be enabled or disabled as DAI trusted
ports. The ports can be physical ports or LAGs that are members of a
VLAN.

enable | disable

Enables or disables the specified ports as trusted for DAI.

Defaults
By default, all physical ports and LAGs are untrusted.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-21

set arpinspection validate

Usage
Individual interfaces are configured as trusted or untrusted. The trust configuration for DAI is
independent of the trust configuration for DHCP snooping. A trusted port is a port the network
administrator does not consider to be a security threat. An untrusted port is one which could
potentially be used to launch a network attack.
DAI considers all physical ports and LAGs untrusted by default. Packets arriving on trusted
interfaces bypass all DAI validation checks.

Example
This example enables port ge.1.1 as trusted for DAI.
C3(su)->set arpinspection trust port ge.1.1 enable

set arpinspection validate
Use this command to configure additional optional ARP validation parameters.

Syntax
set arpinspection validate {[src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip]}

Parameters
src‐mac

Specifies that DAI should verify that the sender MAC address equals
the source MAC address in the Ethernet header.

dst‐mac

Specifies that DAI should verify that the target MAC address equals the
destination MAC address in the Ethernet header.
This check only applies to ARP responses, since the target MAC address
is unspecified in ARP requests.

ip

Specifies that DAI should check the IP address and drop ARP packets
with an invalid address. An invalid address is one of the following:
• 0.0.0.0
• 255.255.255.255
• All IP multicast addresses
• All class E addresses (240.0.0.0/4)
• Loopback addresses (in the range 127.0.0.0/8)

Defaults
All parameters are optional, but at least one parameter must be specified.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command adds additional validation of ARP packets by DAI, beyond the basic validation
that the ARP packet’s sender MAC address and sender IP address match an entry in the DHCP
snooping bindings database.

17-22

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

set arpinspection limit

Example
This example adds the optional verification that sender MAC addresses are the same as the source
MAC addresses in the Ethernet headers of ARP packets.
C3(su)->set arpinspection validate src-mac

set arpinspection limit
Use this command to configure rate limiting parameters for incoming ARP packets on a port or
ports

Syntax
set arpinspection limit port port-string {none | rate pps {burst interval secs]}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or ports to which to apply these rate limiting
parameters.

none

Configures no limit on incoming ARP packets.

rate pps

Specifies a rate limit in packets per second. The value of pps can range
from 0 to 100 packets per second.

burst interval secs

Specifies a burst interval in seconds. The value of secs can range from 1
to 15 seconds.

Defaults
Rate = 15 packets per second
Burst Interval = 1 second

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
To protect the switch against DHCP attacks when DAI is enabled, the DAI application enforces a
rate limit for ARP packets received on untrusted interfaces. DAI monitors the receive rate on each
interface separately. If the receive rate exceeds the limit configured with this command, DAI
disables the interface, which effectively brings down the interface. You can use the set port enable
command to reenable the port.
You can configure both the rate and the burst interval. The default rate is 15 pps on each untrusted
interface with a range of 0 to 100 pps. The default burst interval is 1 second with a range to 1 to 15
seconds.. The rate limit cannot be set on trusted interfaces since ARP packets received on trusted
interfaces do not come to the CPU.

Example
This example sets the rate to 20 packets per second and the burst interval to 2 seconds on ports
ge.1.1 and ge.1.2.
C3(su)->set arpinspection limit port ge.1.1-2 rate 20 burst interval 2

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-23

set arpinspection filter

set arpinspection filter
Use this command to create an ARP ACL and then to assign an ACL to a VLAN, optionally as a
static mapping.

Syntax
set arpinspection filter name {permit ip host sender-ipaddr mac host
sender-macaddr | vlan vlan-range [static]}

Parameters
name

Specifies the name of the ARP ACL.

permit

Specifies that a permit rule is being created.

ip host sender‐ipaddr

Specifies the IP address in the rule being created.

mac host
sender‐macaddr

Specifies the MAC address in the rule being created.

vlan vlan‐range

Specifies the VLAN or VLANs to which this ARP ACL is assigned.

static

(Optional) Specifies that this ARP ACL configures static mappings for
the VLAN or VLANs.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
ARP ACLs are used to define static mappings for DAI. ARP ACLs are completely independent of
ACLs used for QoS. A maximum of 100 ARP ACLs can be configured. Within an ACL, a
maximum of 20 rules can be configured.
A static mapping associates an IP address to a MAC address on a VLAN. DAI consults its static
mappings before it consults the DHCP snooping bindings database — thus, static mappings have
precedence over DHCP snooping bindings.

Example
This example creates an ACL named staticARP and creates a permit rule for IP address
192.168.1.10. Then, the ACL is assigned to a VLAN as a static mapping.
C3(su)->set arpinspection filter staticARP permit ip host 192.168.1.10 mac host
00:01:22:33:44:55
C3(su)->set arpinspection filter staticARP vlan 10 static

show arpinspection access-list
Use this command to display ARP access list configuration information.

Syntax
show arpinspection access-list [acl-name]

17-24

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

show arpinspection ports

Parameters
acl‐name

(Optional) Specifies the ARP ACL to display.

Defaults
If a specific ACL is not specified, information about all configured ARP ACLs is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example displays information about the ARP ACL named staticARP.
C3(su)->show arpinspection access-list staticARP
ARP access list

staticARP

permit ip host 192.168.1.10 mac host 00:01:22:33:44:55
permit ip host 192.168.1.20 mac host 00:0A:11:22:33:66

show arpinspection ports
Use this command to display the ARP configuration of one or more ports.

Syntax
show arpinspection ports [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port or ports for which to display ARP
configuration information.

Defaults
If a port‐string is not specified, information about all DAI‐enabled untrusted ports is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example displays the ARP configuration of lag.0.1.
C3(su)->show arpinspection ports lag.0.1
Interface

Trust State

---------lag.0.1

------------No

Rate Limit
(pps)
------------15

Burst Interval
(seconds)
--------------1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-25

show arpinspection vlan

show arpinspection vlan
Use this command to display the ARP configuration of one or more VLANs.

Syntax
show arpinspection vlan vlan-range

Parameters
vlan‐range

Specifies the VLANs for which to display configuration information.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example displays ARP configuration information for VLAN 5.
C3(su)->show arpinspection vlan 5
Source MAC Validation
Destination MAC Validation
IP Address Validation
Vlan
---5

Disabled
Disabled
Disabled

Configuration Log Invalid
ACL Name
------------- ----------- -------------------------------Disabled
Enabled
staticARP

Static flag
----------Enabled

show arpinspection statistics
Use this command to display ARP statistics for all DAI‐enabled VLANs or for specific VLANs.

Syntax
show arpinspection statistics [vlan vlan-range]

Parameters
vlan vlan‐range

(Optional) Specifies the VLANs for which to display statistics.

Defaults
If no VLANs are specified, limited statistics for all DAI‐enabled VLANs is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
When no specific VLANs are entered, this command displays the number of Forwarded and
Dropped ARP packets per DAI‐enabled VLAN. When one or more VLANs are specified, this
command displays more detailed statistics.

17-26

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

clear arpinspection validate

Examples
This example shows what is displayed when no VLANs are specified.
C3(su)->show arpinspection statistics
VLAN
---5

Forwarded
-----------0

Dropped
--------0

This example shows what information is displayed when one or more VLANs are specified.
C3(su)->show arpinspection statistics vlan 5
VLAN

DHCP
ACL
DHCP
ACL
Bad Src
Bad Dest
Invalid
Drops
Drops
Permits
Permits
MAC
MAC
IP
---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- --------5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

clear arpinspection validate
Use this command to remove additional optional ARP validation parameters that were previously
configured.

Syntax
clear arpinspection validate {[src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip]}

Parameters
src‐mac

Clear, or remove, the verification that the sender MAC address equals
the source MAC address in the Ethernet header.

dst‐mac

Clear, or remove, the verification that the target MAC address equals
the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header.

ip

Clear, or remove, checking the IP address and dropping ARP packets
with an invalid address.

Defaults
All parameters are optional, but at least one parameter must be specified.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command removes previously configured additional validation of ARP packets by DAI,
beyond the basic validation that the ARP packet’s sender MAC address and sender IP address
match an entry in the DHCP snooping bindings database.
Use the show arpinspection vlan command to display the current status of the additional
validation rules.

Example
This example removes all 3 additional validation conditions.
C3(su)->clear arpinspection validate src-mac dst-mac ip

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-27

clear arpinspection vlan

clear arpinspection vlan
Use this command to disable dynamic ARP inspection on one or more VLANs or to disable
logging of invalid ARP packets on one or more VLANs.

Syntax
clear arpinspection vlan vlan-range [logging]

Parameters
vlan‐range

Specifies the VLAN or range of VLANs on which to disable dynamic
ARP inspection.

logging

(Optional) Disable logging of invalid ARP packets for the specified
VLANs.

Defaults
If logging is enabled for the specified VLAN but logging is not entered with this command,
logging will remain enabled.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
You can use this command to disable dynamic ARP inspection on one or more VLANs, or you can
disable logging of invalid ARP packets on specified VLANs. To disable both logging and DAI, you
must enter this command twice.

Example
This example first displays the DAI configuration for VLAN 5, then disables DAI on VLAN 5, then
disables logging of invalid ARP packets on VLAN 5.
C3(su)->show arpinspection vlan 5
Source MAC Validation
Destination MAC Validation
IP Address Validation
Vlan
---5

Disabled
Disabled
Disabled

Configuration Log Invalid
ACL Name
------------- ----------- -------------------------------Enabled
Enabled
staticARP

Static flag
----------Enabled

C3(su)->clear arpinspection vlan 5

C3(su)->show arpinspection vlan 5
Source MAC Validation
Destination MAC Validation
IP Address Validation
Vlan
---5

17-28

Disabled
Disabled
Disabled

Configuration Log Invalid
ACL Name
------------- ----------- -------------------------------Disabled
Enabled
staticARP

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

Static flag
----------Enabled

clear arpinspection filter

C3(su)->clear arpinspection vlan 5 logging
C3(su)->show arpinspection vlan 5
Source MAC Validation
Destination MAC Validation
IP Address Validation
Vlan
---5

Disabled
Disabled
Disabled

Configuration Log Invalid
ACL Name
------------- ----------- -------------------------------Disabled
Disabled
staticARP

Static flag
----------Enabled

clear arpinspection filter
Use this command to remove an ARP ACL from a VLAN or from the switch, or to remove a
permit rule from an existing ACL, or to change the status of static mapping to disabled.

Syntax
clear arpinspection filter name [permit ip host sender-ipaddr mac host
sender-macaddr] | [vlan vlan-range [static]

Parameters
name

Specifies the name of the ARP ACL.

permit

(Optional) Specifies that a permit rule is being deleted.

ip host sender‐ipaddr

Specifies the IP address in the rule being deleted.

mac host
sender‐macaddr

Specifies the MAC address in the rule being deleted.

vlan vlan‐range

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN or VLANs to which this command
should apply. Remove the ACL from the VLAN, if static is not specified
also.

static

(Optional) Specifies that static mapping should be disabled for this ARP
ACL for the specified VLAN or VLANs.

Defaults
If only the name is specified, the ACL is deleted from the switch.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
You can use this command to:
•

Remove a configured ARP ACL from the switch, or

•

Remove a permit rule from a configured ARP ACL, or

•

Remove the association of an ARP ACL with a VLAN or VLANs, or

•

Disable static mapping of an ARP ACL associated with a VLAN or VLANs.

Use the set arpinspection filter command to create and assign an ARP ACL.
Use the show arpinspection access‐list command to display currently configured ARP ACLs.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-29

clear arpinspection limit

Examples
This example removes a permit rule from the ARP ACL named staticARP.
C3(su)->clear arpinspection filter staticARP permit ip host 192.168.1.10 mac host
00:01:22:33:44:55

This example disables static mapping of the ARP ACL named staticARP that is associated with
VLAN 5.
C3(su)->clear arpinspection filter staticARP vlan 5 static

This example removes the ARP ACL named staticARP from VLAN 5.
C3(su)->clear arpinspection filter staticARP vlan 5

This example removes the ARP ACL named staticARP from the switch completely.
C3(su)->clear arpinspection filter staticARP

clear arpinspection limit
Use this command to return the DAI rate limiting values to their default values for a port or range
of ports.

Syntax
clear arpinspection limit port port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the ports on which to return the rate limiting values to
defaults.

Defaults
Rate = 15 packets per second
Burst Interval = 1 second

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
Use the set arpinspection limit command to change the values of the rate limit and burst interval.
Use the show arpinspection ports command to display the currently configured rate limits.

Example
This example returns the DAI rate limiting values to their defaults for port ge.1.1.
C3(su)->clear arpinspection limit port ge.1.1

17-30

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

clear arpinspection statistics

clear arpinspection statistics
Use this command to clear all dynamic ARP inspection statistics.

Syntax
clear arpinspection statistics

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example clears all DAI statistics from the switch.
C3(su)->clear arpinspection statistics

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

17-31

clear arpinspection statistics

17-32

DHCP Snooping and Dynamic ARP Inspection

18
Preparing for Router Mode
This chapter describes how to prepare the switch for routing.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Pre-Routing Configuration Tasks

18-1

Enabling Router Configuration Modes

18-2

Pre-Routing Configuration Tasks
Startup and general configuration of the SecureStack C3 switch must occur from the switch CLI.
For details on how to start the switch and configure general platform settings, refer to Chapter 1,
Introduction, Chapter 2, Configuring Switches in a Stack, and Chapter 3, Basic Configuration.
Once startup and general switch settings are complete, IP configuration and other router‐specific
commands can be executed when the switch is in router mode. For details on how to enable router
mode from the switch CLI, refer to Table 18‐2 in Enabling Router Configuration Modes.
The following pre‐routing tasks must be performed from the switch CLI:
•

Starting up the CLI. (“Using the Command Line Interface” on page 1‐6)

•

Setting the system password. (“set password” on page 3‐5)

•

Configuring basic platform settings, such as host name, system clock, and terminal display
settings. (“Setting Basic Switch Properties” on page 3‐9)

•

Setting the system IP address. (“set ip address” on page 3‐11)

•

Creating and enabling VLANs. (Chapter 10)

•

File management tasks, including uploading or downloading flash or text configuration files,
and displaying directory and file contents. (“Managing Switch Configuration and Files” on
page 3‐39)

•

Configuring the switch to run in router mode. (“Enabling Router Configuration Modes” on
page 18‐2)

•

Enabling advanced router features. (“Activating Advanced Routing Features” on page 20‐1)
Note: The command prompts used as examples in Table 18-1 and throughout this guide show
switch operation for a user in admin (su) access mode, and a system where the VLAN 1 interface
has been configured for routing. The prompt changes depending on your current configuration
mode, your specific switch, and the interface types and numbers configured for routing on your
system.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

18-1

Enabling Router Configuration Modes

Table 18-1

Enabling the Switch for Routing

Step

To do this task...

Type this command...

At this prompt...

For details, see...

1

From admin (su) mode,
enable router mode.

router

Switch:
C3(su)->

2

Enable router Privileged
EXEC mode.

enable

Router:
C3(su)->router>

3

Enable global router
configuration mode.

configure

Router:
C3(su)->router#

4

Enable interface
configuration mode using the
routing VLAN or loopback id.

interface {vlan vlan-id | loopback
loop-id}

Router:
C3(su)>router(Config)#

“interface” on page
19-3

5

Assign an IP address to the
routing interface.

ip address {ip-address ip-mask}

Router:
C3(su)->router (Config-if
(Vlan 1))#

“interface” on page
19-3

6

Enable the interface for IP
routing.

no shutdown

Router:
C3(su)->router(Config-if
(Vlan 1))#

“no shutdown” on
page 19-6

Example
The following example shows how to configure VLAN 1 on IP address 182.127.63.1 255.255.255.0
as a routing interface.
C3(su)->router
C3(su)->router>enable
C3(su)->router#configure
Enter configuration commands:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip address 182.127.63.1 255.255.255.0
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#no shutdown

Enabling Router Configuration Modes
The SecureStack C3 CLI provides different modes of router operation for issuing a subset of
commands from each mode. Table 18‐2 describes these modes of operation.
Table 18-2

Router CLI Configuration Modes

Use this mode...

To...

Access method...

Resulting Prompt...

Privileged EXEC
Mode

Set system operating
parameters

From the switch CLI:
Type router, then

C3(su)->router>

Show configuration
parameters

Type enable.

C3(su)->router#

Save/copy
configurations

18-2

Global Configuration
Mode

Set system-wide
parameters.

Type configure from
Privileged EXEC mode.

C3(su)->router (Config)#

Interface
Configuration Mode

Configure router
interfaces.

Type interface vlan or
loopback and the
interface’s id from Global
Configuration mode.

C3(su)->router(Config-if
(Vlan 1))#

Preparing for Router Mode

C3(su)->router(Config-if
(Lpbk 1))#

Enabling Router Configuration Modes

Table 18-2

Router CLI Configuration Modes (Continued)

Use this mode...

To...

Access method...

Resulting Prompt...

Router Configuration
Mode

Set IP protocol
parameters.

Type router and the
protocol name (and, for
OSPF, the instance ID)
from Global or Interface
Configuration mode.

C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

Note: To jump to a lower configuration mode, type exit at the command prompt. To revert back to
switch CLI, type exit from Privileged EXEC router mode.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

18-3

Enabling Router Configuration Modes

18-4

Preparing for Router Mode

19
IP Configuration
This chapter describes the Internet Protocol (IP) configuration set of commands and how to use
them.
Router: Unless otherwise noted, the commands covered in this chapter can be executed only
when the device is in router mode. For details on how to enable router configuration modes, refer
to “Enabling Router Configuration Modes” on page 18-2.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Configuring Routing Interface Settings

19-1

Configuring Tunnel Interfaces

19-8

Reviewing and Configuring the ARP Table

19-12

Configuring Broadcast Settings

19-16

Reviewing IP Traffic and Configuring Routes

19-19

Configuring ICMP Redirects

19-23

Configuring Routing Interface Settings
Purpose
To enable routing interface configuration mode on the device, to create routing interfaces, to
review the usability status of interfaces configured for IP, to set IP addresses for interfaces, to
enable interfaces for IP routing at device startup, and to review the running configuration.
Note: For information about configuring tunnel interfaces, see “Configuring Tunnel Interfaces” on
page 19-8.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show interface

19-2

interface

19-3

show ip interface

19-4

ip address

19-5

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-1

show interface

For information about...

Refer to page...

show running-config

19-6

no shutdown

19-6

no ip routing

19-7

show interface
Use this command to display information about one or more interfaces (VLANs or loopbacks)
configured on the router.

Syntax
show interface [vlan vlan-id] [loopback loop-id]

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Displays interface information for a specific VLAN interface.
This interface must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐
Routing Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

loopback loop‐id

(Optional) Displays interface information for a specific loopback interface.

Defaults
If interface type is not specified, information for all routing interfaces will be displayed.

Mode
Any router mode.

Examples
This example shows how to display information for all interfaces configured on the router. For a
detailed description of this output, refer to Table 19‐1:
C3(su)->router#show interface
Vlan 1 is Administratively DOWN
Vlan 1 is Operationally DOWN
Mac Address is: 0001.f4da.2cba
The name of this device is Vlan 1
The MTU is 1500 bytes
The bandwidth is 10000 Mb/s
Encapsulation ARPA, Loopback not set
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout: 14400 seconds

This example shows how to display information for loopback interface 1.
C3(su)->router#show interface loopback 1
Loopback 1 is Administratively UP
Loopback 1 is Operationally UP
Internet Address is 10.1.192.100, Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0
The name of this device is Loopback 1
The MTU is 1500 bytes

19-2

IP Configuration

interface

interface
Use this command to configure interfaces for IP routing.

Syntax
interface vlan vlan-id | loopback loop-id

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the number of the VLAN interface to be configured for routing.
This interface must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐
Routing Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

loopback loop‐id

Specifies the number of the loopback interface to be configured for routing.
The value of loop‐id can range from 0 to 7.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router global configuration mode: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
This command enables interface configuration mode from global configuration mode, and, if the
interface has not previously been created, this command creates a new routing interface. For
details on configuration modes supported by the SecureStack C3 device and their uses, refer to
Table 18‐2 in “Enabling Router Configuration Modes” on page 18‐2.
VLANs must be created from the switch CLI before they can be configured for IP routing. For
details on creating VLANs and configuring them for IP, refer to “Enabling Router Configuration
Modes” on page 18‐2.
Each VLAN interface must be configured for routing separately using the interface command. To
end configuration on one interface before configuring another, type exit at the command prompt.
Enabling interface configuration mode is required for completing interface‐specific configuration
tasks. For an example of how these commands are used, refer to “Pre‐Routing Configuration
Tasks” on page 18‐1.
A loopback interface is always expected to be up. This interface can provide the source address for
sent packets and can receive both local and remote packets. The loopback interface is typically
used by routing protocols, but it can also be used for management or network services such as
RADIUS, SNMP, Syslog, SNTP, or sFlow. By default, if RADIUS is configured with no host IP
address on the device, it will use the loopback interface 0 IP address (if it has been configured) as
its source for the NAS‐IP attribute. (Administrators can assign where to source management or
network service IP packets via the set interface commands.)
Each SecureStack C3 system (stack) can support up to 24 routing interfaces. Each interface can be
configured for the RIP and/or OSPF routing protocols.
Note: For information about configuring tunnel interfaces, see “Configuring Tunnel Interfaces” on
page 19-8.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-3

show ip interface

Examples
This example shows how to enter configuration mode for VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router#configure
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#

This example shows how to enter configuration mode for loopback 1:
C3(su)->router#configure
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface loopback 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Lpbk 1))#

show ip interface
Use this command to display information, including administrative status, IP address, MTU
(Maximum Transmission Unit) size and bandwidth, and ACL configurations, for interfaces
configured for IP.

Syntax
show ip interface [vlan vlan-id] [loopback loop-id]

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Displays information for a specific VLAN interface. This
interface must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐Routing
Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

loopback loop‐id

(Optional) Displays interface information for a specific loopback interface.

Defaults
If interface type is not specified, status information for all routing interfaces will be displayed.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display configuration information for VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router#show ip interface vlan 1
Vlan 1 is Admin DOWN
Vlan 1 is Oper DOWN
Primary IP Address is 192.168.10.1
Frame Type Ethernet
MAC-Address 0001.F45C.C993
Incoming Accesslist is not set
Outgoing AccessList is not set
MTU is 6145 bytes
ARP Timeout is 1 seconds
Direct Broadcast Disabled
Proxy ARP is Disabled

Mask 255.255.255.0

Table 19‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.

19-4

IP Configuration

ip address

Table 19-1

show ip interface Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Vlan N

Whether the interface is administratively and operationally up or down.

Primary IP Address

Inteface’s primary IP address and mask. Set using the ip address command as
described in “ip address” on page 19-5.

Frame Type

Encapsulation type used by this interface. Set using the arp command as described
in “arp” on page 19-13.

MAC-Address

MAC address mapped to this interface.

Incoming Access
List

Whether or not an access control list (ACL) has been configured for ingress on this
interface using the commands described in “Configuring Access Lists” on
page 26-79.

Outgoing Access
List

Not supported.

MTU

Interface’s Maximum Transmission Unit size.

ARP Timeout

Duration for entries to stay in the ARP table before expiring. Set using the arp
timeout command as described in “arp timeout” on page 19-15.

Direct Broadcast

Whether or not IP directed broadcast is enabled. Set using the ip directed-broadcast
command described in “ip directed-broadcast” on page 19-16.

Proxy Arp

Whether or not proxy ARP is enabled or disabled for this interface. Set using the ip
proxy arp command as described in “ip proxy-arp” on page 19-14.

ip address
Use this command to set, remove, or disable a primary or secondary IP address for an interface.
The no form of this command removes the specified IP address and disables the interface for IP
processing.

Syntax
ip address ip-address ip-mask [secondary]
no ip address ip-address ip-mask

Parameters
ip‐address

Specifies the IP address of the interface to be added or removed.

ip‐mask

Specifies the mask for the associated IP subnet.

secondary

(Optional) Specifies that the configured IP address is a secondary address.

Defaults
If secondary is not specified, the configured address will be the primary address for the interface.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Each SecureStack C3 system supports up to 24 routing interfaces, with up to 8 secondary
addresses allowed for each primary IP address.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-5

show running-config

Example
This example sets the IP address to 192.168.1.1 and the network mask to 255.255.255.0 for VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0

show running-config
Use this command to display the non‐default, user‐supplied commands entered while configuring
the device.

Syntax
show running-config

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display the current router operating configuration:
C3(su)->router#show running-config
!
interface vlan 10
ip address 99.99.2.10 255.255.255.0
no shutdown
!
router ospf 1
network 99.99.2.0
0.0.0.255 area 0.0.0.0
network 192.168.100.1 0.0.0.0
area 0.0.0.0

no shutdown
Use this command to enable an interface for IP routing and to allow the interface to automatically
be enabled at device startup.

Syntax
no shutdown
shutdown

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

19-6

IP Configuration

no ip routing

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
The shutdown form of this command disables an interface for IP routing.

Example
This example shows how to enable VLAN 1 for IP routing:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#no shutdown

no ip routing
Use this command to disable IP routing on the device. By default, IP routing is enabled when
interfaces are configured for it as described in “Configuring Routing Interface Settings” on
page 19‐1.

Syntax
no ip routing

Parameters
None.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Defaults
None.

Example
This example shows how to disable IP routing on the device:
C3(su)->router(Config)#no ip routing

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-7

Configuring Tunnel Interfaces

Configuring Tunnel Interfaces
Purpose
The commands in this section describe how to create, delete, and manage tunnel interfaces.
Several different types of tunnels provide functionality to facilitate the transition of IPv4 networks
to IPv6 networks. These tunnels are divided into two classes: configured and automatic. The
distinction is that configured tunnels are explicitly configured with a destination or endpoint of
the tunnel. Automatic tunnels, in contrast, infer the endpoint of the tunnel from the destination
address of packets routed into the tunnel.
For information about configuring IPv6 parameters on tunnel interfaces, such as an IPv6 address,
see Chapter 22, IPv6 Configuration.
Note: IPv6 routing must be enabled with an IPv6 routing license key in order for these commands
to be visible in the CLI.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

interface tunnel

19-8

tunnel source

19-9

tunnel destination

19-10

tunnel mode

19-10

show interface tunnel

19-11

interface tunnel
Use this command to configure a tunnel interface.

Syntax
interface tunnel tunnel-id
no interface tunnel tunnel-id

Parameters
tunnel‐id

Specifies the number of the tunnel interface to be configured for
routing. The value of tunnel‐id can range from 0 to 7.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router global configuration mode: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

19-8

IP Configuration

tunnel source

Usage
This command enables tunnel interface configuration mode from global configuration mode, and,
if the interface has not previously been created, this command creates a new tunnel routing
interface.
The no form of this command removes the tunnel interface and associated configuration
parameters.

Example
This example creates a configured tunnel interface 1.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface tunnel 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Tnnl 1))#

tunnel source
This command specifies the IPv4 source transport address of the tunnel.

Syntax
tunnel source {ipv4-addr | interface vlan vlan-id}
no tunnel source

Parameters
ipv4‐addr

The IPv4 source address of the tunnel.

interface vlan vlan‐id

Specify an interface to use a link‐local address. The VLAN must be
configured in switch mode.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Tnnl 1))#

Usage
The no form of this command removes the source IPv4 address for the tunnel interface being
configured.

Example
The following example configures the source IPv4 address for tunnel 1.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface tunnel 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Tnnl 1))#
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Tnnl 1))# tunnel source 192.168.10.10

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-9

tunnel destination

tunnel destination
This command specifies the IPv4 destination transport address of the tunnel.

Syntax
tunnel destination ipv4-addr
no tunnel destination

Parameters
ipv4‐addr

The IPv4 destination address of the tunnel.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Tnnl 1))#

Usage
The no form of this command removes the destination IPv4 address for the tunnel interface being
configured.

Example
The following example configures the destination IPv4 address for tunnel 1.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface tunnel 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Tnnl 1))#
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Tnnl 1))# tunnel destination 192.168.10.20

tunnel mode
This command specifies the mode of the tunnel interface.

Syntax
tunnel mode ipv6ip
no tunnel mode ipv6ip

Parameters
ipv6ip

Specifies that the tunnel mode is IPv6 over IPv4

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Tnnl 1))#

Usage
The no form of this command removes the mode of the tunnel.

19-10

IP Configuration

show interface tunnel

Example
This example sets the tunnel mode to IPv6 over IPv4.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface tunnel 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Tnnl 1))#
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Tnnl 1))# tunnel mode ipv6ip

show interface tunnel
This command displays information about a configured tunnel interface.

Syntax
show interface tunnel tunnel-id

Parameters
tunnel‐id

Specifies the tunnel for which to display information.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#
Router privileged exec: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
Use this command to display general interface information. Refer to in Chapter 22, IPv6
Configuration for a description of the show ipv6 interface tunnel command.

Example
This example shows the output of this command.
C3(su)->router(Config)#show interface tunnel 1
Tunnel 1 is Operationally DOWN
The name of this device is Tunnel 1
The MTU is 1480 bytes

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-11

Reviewing and Configuring the ARP Table

Reviewing and Configuring the ARP Table
Purpose
To review and configure the routing ARP table, to enable proxy ARP on an interface, and to set a
MAC address on an interface.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show ip arp

19-12

arp

19-13

ip proxy-arp

19-14

arp timeout

19-15

clear arp-cache

19-15

show ip arp
Use this command to display entries in the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) table. ARP
converts an IP address into a physical address.

Syntax
show ip arp [ip-address]|[vlan vlan-id]|[output-modifier]

Parameters
ip‐address

(Optional) Displays ARP entries related to a specific IP address.

vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Displays only ARP entries learned through a specific VLAN
interface. This VLAN must be configured for IP routing as described in
“Pre‐Routing Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

output‐modifier

(Optional) Displays ARP entries within a specific range. Options are:
–

| begin ip‐address — Displays only ARP entries that begin with the
specified IP address.

–

| exclude ip‐address — Excludes ARP entries matching the specified
IP address.

–

| include ip‐address — Includes ARP entries matching the specified
IP address.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all entries in the ARP cache will be displayed.

Mode
Any router mode.

19-12

IP Configuration

arp

Example
This example shows how to use the show ip arp command:
C3(su)->router#show ip arp
Protocol

Address

Age (min) Hardware Addr

Type

Interface

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Internet

134.141.235.251

0

0003.4712.7a99

ARPA

Vlan1

Internet

134.141.235.165

-

0002.1664.a5b3

ARPA

Vlan1

Internet

134.141.235.167

4

00d0.cf00.4b74

ARPA

Vlan2

C3(su)->router#show ip arp 134.141.235.165
Protocol

Address

Age (min)

Hardware Addr Type

Interface

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Internet

134.141.235.165

-

0002.1664.a5b3

ARPA

Vlan2

C3(su)->router#show ip arp vlan 2
Protocol

Address

Age (min) Hardware Addr Type

Interface

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Internet

134.141.235.251

0

0003.4712.7a99 ARPA

Vlan2

Table 19‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 19-2

show ip arp Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Protocol

ARP entry’s type of network address.

Address

Network address mapped to the entry’s MAC address.

Age (min)

Interval (in minutes) since the entry was entered in the table.

Hardware Addr

MAC address mapped to the entry’s network address.

Type

Encapsulation type used for the entry’s network address.

Interface

Interface (VLAN or loopback) through which the entry was learned.

arp
Use this command to add or remove permanent (static) ARP table entries. Up to 1,000 static ARP
entries are supported per SecureStack C3 system. A multicast MAC address can be used in a static
ARP entry. The no form of this command removes the specified permanent ARP entry:

Syntax
arp ip-address mac-address
no arp ip-address

Parameters
ip‐address

Specifies the IP address of a device on the network. Valid values are IP
addresses in dotted decimal notation.

mac‐address

Specifies the 48‐bit hardware address corresponding to the ip‐address
expressed in hexadecimal notation.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-13

ip proxy-arp

Defaults
None.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
The IP address specified for the static ARP entry must fall within one of the subnets or networks
defined on the routed interfaces of the system ( or stack, if applicable). The system can then match
the IP address of the static ARP entry with the appropriate routed interface and associate it with
the correct VLAN.

Example
This example shows how to add a permanent ARP entry for the IP address 130.2.3.1 and MAC
address 0003.4712.7a99:
C3(su)->router(Config)#arp 130.2.3.1 0003.4712.7a99

ip proxy-arp
Use this command to enable proxy ARP on an interface. The no form of this command disables
proxy ARP.

Syntax
ip proxy-arp
no ip proxy-arp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
Disabled.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
This variation of the ARP protocol allows the router to send an ARP response on behalf of an end
node to the requesting host. Proxy ARP can be used to resolve routing issues on end stations that
are unable to route in the subnetted environment. The SecureStack C3 will answer to ARP
requests on behalf of targeted end stations on neighboring networks. It is disabled by default.

Example
This example shows how to enable proxy ARP on VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip proxy-arp

19-14

IP Configuration

arp timeout

arp timeout
Use this command to set the duration (in seconds) for dynamically learned entries to remain in the
ARP table before expiring. The no form of this command restores the default value of 14,400
seconds.
arp timeout seconds
no arp timeout

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the time in seconds that an entry remains in the ARP cache. Valid
values are 0 ‐ 65535. A value of 0 specifies that ARP entries will never be
aged out.

Defaults
14,400 seconds.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Example
This example shows how to set the ARP timeout to 7200 seconds:
C3(su)->router(Config)#arp timeout 7200

clear arp-cache
Use this command to delete all nonstatic (dynamic) entries from the ARP table.
clear arp-cache

Parameters
None.

Mode
Privileged EXEC: C3(su)‐>router#

Defaults
None.

Example
This example shows how to delete all dynamic entries from the ARP table:
C3(su)->router#clear arp-cache

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-15

Configuring Broadcast Settings

Configuring Broadcast Settings
Purpose
To configure IP broadcast settings. By default, interfaces on the SecureStack C3 do not forward
broadcast packets.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

ip directed-broadcast

19-16

ip forward-protocol

19-17

ip helper-address

19-18

ip directed-broadcast
Use this command to enable or disable IP directed broadcasts on an interface. By default,
interfaces on the SecureStack C3 do not forward directed broadcasts. The no form of this
command disables IP directed broadcast on the interface.

Syntax
ip directed-broadcast
no ip directed-broadcast

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>Router1(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Directed broadcast is an efficient mechanism for communicating with multiple hosts on a network
while only transmitting a single datagram. A directed broadcast is a packet sent to all hosts on a
specific network or subnet. The directed broadcast address includes the network or subnet fields,
with the binary bits of the host portion of the address set to one. For example, for a network with
the address 192.168.0.0/16, the directed broadcast address would be 192.168.255.255. For a subnet
with the address 192.168.12.0/24, the directed broadcast address would be 192.168.12.255.
In order to minimize broadcast DoS attacks, forwarding of directed broadcasts is disabled by
default on the SecureStack C3, as recommended by RFC 2644.
If the ability to send directed broadcasts to a network is required, you should enable directed
broadcasts only on the one interface that will be transmitting the datagrams. For example, if a
SecureStack C3 has five routed interfaces for the 10, 20, 30, 40, and 50 networks, enabling directed

19-16

IP Configuration

ip forward-protocol

broadcast only on the 30 network interface will allow anyone from any other networks (10, 20, 40,
50) to send directed broadcast to the 30 network.

Example
This example shows how to enable IP directed broadcasts on VLAN 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip directed-broadcast

ip forward-protocol
Use this command to enable UDP broadcast forwarding and specify which protocols will be
forwarded.

Syntax
ip forward-protocol udp [port]
no ip forward-protocol udp [port]

Parameters
udp

Specifies UDP as the IP forwarding protocol.

port

(Optional) Specifies a destination port that controls which UDP services
are forwarded.

Defaults
If port is not specified, the following defaults are used:
•

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) (port 69)

•

Domain Naming System (port 53)

•

Time service (port 37)

•

NetBIOS Name Server (port 137)

•

NetBIOS Datagram Server (port 138)

•

TACACS service (port 49)

•

EN‐116 Name Service (port 42)

Mode
Router command, Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1)#

Usage
In order to actually forward protocols, you must configure an IP helper address on the individual
router interfaces with the command “ip helper‐address” (page 19‐18).
If a certain service exists inside the node, and there is no need to forward the request to remote
networks, the “no” form of this command should be used to disable the forwarding for the specific
port. Such requests will not be automatically blocked from being forwarded just because a service
for them exists in the node.
The no form of this command removes a UDP port or protocol, disabling forwarding.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-17

ip helper-address

Examples
The following example globally disables IP forwarding for UDP port 69.
C3(su)->router(Config)#no ip forward-protocol udp 69

The following example disables IP forwarding for UDP port 69 on a specific interface.
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 10
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 10))#no ip forward-protocol udp 69

ip helper-address
Use this command to enable the DHCP/BOOTP relay agent on a SecureStack C3 routed interface
and/or to forward broadcast traffic identified with the ip forward‐protocol command to a unicast
address. Enabling the relay agent allows forwarding of client DHCP/BOOTP requests to a DHCP/
BOOTP server that does not reside on the same broadcast domain as the client. Up to 6 IP helper
addresses may be configured per interface.
The no form of this command disables the forwarding of UDP datagrams to the specified address.

Syntax
ip helper-address address
no ip helper-address address

Parameters
address

Address of the host where UDP broadcast packets should be forwarded.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>Router1(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Typically for DHCP/BootP, when a host requests an IP address, it sends out a DHCP broadcast
packet. Normally, the router drops all broadcast packets. However, by executing this command,
you enable the routed interface to pass DHCP broadcast frames through, sending them directly to
the remote DHCP server’s IP address.
The DHCP/BOOTP relay agent will detect DHCP/BOOTP requests based on UDP source and
destination ports. It will then make the necessary changes to the packet and send the packet to the
DHCP server. The changes include:
•

Replacing the destination IP address with the address of the DHCP server,

•

Replacing the source IP address with its own address (that is, the IP address of the local
routed interface), and

•

Within the BOOTP part of the packet, changing the Relay Agent IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the
address of the local routed interface.

The last change to the BootP packet “tells” the DHCP server that it needs to assign an IP address
that is in the same subnet as the Relay Agent IP. When the response comes from the server, the
DHCP/BOOTP relay agent sends it to the host.

19-18

IP Configuration

Reviewing IP Traffic and Configuring Routes

For other protocols specified through the ip forward‐protocol command, the system forwards
broadcast UDP traffic as a unicast packet to the specified IP addresses.

Example
This example show how to have all client DHCP requests for users in VLAN 1 to be forwarded to
the remote DHCP server with IP address 192.168.1.28.
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip helper-address 192.168.1.28

Reviewing IP Traffic and Configuring Routes
Purpose
To review IP traffic and configure routes, to send router ICMP (ping) messages, and to execute
traceroute.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show ip route

19-19

ip route

19-21

ping

19-21

traceroute

19-22

show ip route
Use this command to display information about IP routes.

Syntax
show ip route [destination-prefix [destination-prefix-match] | connected | ospf |
rip | static | summary]

Parameters
destination‐prefix
destination‐prefix‐
match

(Optional) Converts the specified address and mask into a prefix and
displays any routes that match the prefix.

connected

(Optional) Displays connected routes.

ospf

(Optional) Displays routes configured for the OSPF routing protocol. For
details on configuring OSPF, refer to “Configuring OSPF” on page 20‐11.

rip

(Optional) Displays routes configured for the RIP routing protocol. For
details on configuring RIP, refer to “Configuring RIP” on page 20‐2.

static

(Optional) Displays static routes.

summary

(Optional) Displays a summary of the IP routing table.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-19

show ip route

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all IP route information will be displayed.

Mode
Any router mode.

Usage
The routing table contains all active static routes, all the RIP routes, and up to three best OSPF
routes learned for each network.

Example
This example shows how to use the show ip route command to display all IP route information. A
portion of the output is shown:
C3(su)->router#show ip route
Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF interarea
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2
E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2
E - EGP, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, LS - IS-IS level-2
* - candidate default, U - per user static route
IA
O
O
C
O
O
O
E2
IA
IA
E2
O
C
O
O
E2
E2
IA
E2
E2
E2
O
E2
O
E2
E2
O
O
IA
IA
IA
O
IA
E2
E2
C

19-20

IP Configuration

1.255.255.248/29 [10/30] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
2.0.0.0/10 [8/30] via 168.1.0.254, Vlan 1200
2.224.0.0/11 [8/30] via 168.1.0.254, Vlan 1200
7.15.0.0/24 [0/0] directly connected, Vlan 715
11.11.12.12/32 [8/30] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
11.11.13.13/32 [8/10] via 168.1.0.249, Vlan 1300
11.11.16.16/32 [8/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
11.11.17.17/32 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
11.11.21.21/32 [10/30] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
11.11.22.22/32 [10/30] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
11.11.24.24/32 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
11.11.25.25/32 [8/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
11.11.26.26/32 [0/0] directly connected, Loopback 0
11.11.27.27/32 [8/10] via 168.1.0.254, Vlan 1200
11.11.28.28/32 [8/20] via 168.1.0.254, Vlan 1200
12.0.0.0/17 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
19.0.0.0/30 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
20.0.0.0/24 [10/40] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.0.0/16 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.10.0/24 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.12.0/24 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.13.0/24 [8/30] via 168.1.0.254, Vlan 1200
22.22.14.0/24 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.15.0/24 [8/20] via 168.1.0.249, Vlan 1300 via 168.1.0.254, Vlan 1200
22.22.16.0/24 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.17.0/24 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.18.0/24 [8/30] via 168.1.0.254, Vlan 1200
22.22.19.0/24 [8/20] via 168.1.0.249, Vlan 1300 via 168.1.0.254, Vlan 1200
22.22.20.0/24 [10/40] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.21.0/24 [10/50] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.22.0/24 [10/30] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.23.0/24 [8/30] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.24.0/24 [10/40] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.25.0/24 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.26.0/24 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
22.22.27.0/24 [0/0] directly connected, Vlan 4027

ip route

O
E2
C
O
E2

22.22.28.0/24 [8/20] via 168.1.0.249, Vlan 1300 via 168.1.0.254, Vlan 1200
22.22.29.0/24 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205
26.0.0.0/8 [0/0] directly connected, Vlan 26
33.9.8.0/28 [8/20] via 168.1.0.254, Vlan 1200
33.33.0.0/16 [150/20] via 168.0.0.249, Vlan 3205

ip route
Use this command to add or remove a static IP route. The no form of this command removes the
static IP route.
ip route prefix mask dest-addr [distance]
no ip route prefix mask forward-addr

Parameters
prefix

Specifies a destination IP address prefix.

mask

Specifies a destination prefix mask.

dest‐addr

Specifies a forwarding (gateway) IP address.

distance

(Optional) Specifies an administrative distance metric for this route. Valid
values are 1 (default) to 255. Routes with lower values receive higher
preference in route selection.

Defaults
If distance is not specified, the default value of 1 will be applied.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Example
This example shows how to set IP address 10.1.2.3 as the next hop gateway to destination address
10.0.0.0:
C3(su)->router(Config)#ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 10.1.2.3

ping
Use this command to test routing network connectivity by sending IP ping requests.

Syntax
ping ip-address

Parameters
ip‐address

Specifies the IP address of the system to ping.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-21

traceroute

Mode
Privileged EXEC: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
This command is also available in switch mode.

Examples
This example shows output from a successful ping to IP address 182.127.63.23:
C3(su)->router#ping 182.127.63.23
182.127.63.23 is alive

This example shows output from an unsuccessful ping to IP address 182.127.63.24:
C3(su)->router#ping 182.127.63.24
no answer from 182.127.63.24

traceroute
Use this command to display a hop‐by‐hop path through an IP network from the device to a
specific destination host. Three ICMP probes will be transmitted for each hop between the source
and the traceroute destination.

Syntax
traceroute host

Parameters
host

Specifies a host to which the route of an IP packet will be traced.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Privileged EXEC: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
There is also a traceroute command available in switch mode.

Example
This example shows how to use traceroute to display a round trip path to host 192.141.90.183.
C3(su)->router#traceroute 192.141.90.183
Traceroute to 192.141.90.183, 30 hops max, 40 byte packets
1 10.1.56.1
0.000 ms
0.000 ms
2 10.1.48.254
10.000 ms
0.000 ms
3 10.1.0.2
0.000 ms
0.000 ms
4 192.141.89.17
0.000 ms
0.000 ms
5 192.141.100.13
0.000 ms
10.000 ms
6 192.141.100.6
0.000 ms
0.000 ms
7 192.141.90.183
0.000 ms
0.000 ms

19-22

IP Configuration

0.000
0.000
0.000
10.000
0.000
10.000
0.000

ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms

Configuring ICMP Redirects

Configuring ICMP Redirects
Purpose
Disable or enable sending ICMP redirect packets to the switch CPU for processing, at a global
level and at an interface level. By default, sending ICMP redirects is enabled globally and on all
interfaces. Disabling sending ICMP redirects can reduce CPU usage in certain deployments.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

ip icmp redirect enable

19-23

show ip icmp redirect

19-24

ip icmp redirect enable
Use this command to enable or disable sending ICMP redirects to the CPU for processing on a
global level or on a specific interface. The no form of this command disables sending ICMP
redirects to the CPU.

Syntax
ip icmp redirect enable
no ip icmp redirect enable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
By default, sending ICMP redirects to the CPU is enabled globally and on all interfaces.

Mode
Router global configuration mode: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#
Interface configuration mode: C3(su)‐>Router1(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
You can use this command in router global configuration mode to enable or disable sending ICMP
redirects globally on the switch.
You can use this command in router interface configuration mode to enable or disable sending
ICMP redirects only on specific interfaces.

Examples
This example disables sending ICMP redirects on the interface VLAN 5.
C3(su)->router#configure
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 5
C3(su)->Router1(Config-if(Vlan 5))# no ip icmp redirect enable

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

19-23

show ip icmp redirect

This example disables sending ICMP redirects globally.
C3(su)->router#configure
C3(su)->router(Config)#no ip icmp redirect enable

show ip icmp redirect
Use this command to display the status of sending ICMP redirects at a global or interface level.

Syntax
show ip icmp redirect {status | interface [vlan vlan-id]}

Parameters
status

Display the global ICMP redirect status.

interface

Display ICMP redirect status for interfaces.

vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Display ICMP redirect status for the specified VLAN.

Defaults
If no VLAN is specified with the interface parameter, information for all VLAN interfaces is
displayed.

Mode
Privileged EXEC mode:C3(su)‐>router#
Router global configuration mode: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Examples
This example displays the global ICMP redirect status.
C3(su)->router#show ip icmp redirect status
Global ICMP Redirect status - Enabled

This example displays the ICMP redirect status for VLAN 5.
C3(su)->router#show ip icmp redirect interface vlan 5
Vlan Id
Admin Status
-----------------5
Enabled

19-24

IP Configuration

20
IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration
This chapter describes the IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration set of commands and how to use
them.
Router: The commands covered in this chapter can be executed only when the device is in router
mode. For details on how to enable router configuration modes, refer to “Enabling Router
Configuration Modes” on page 18-2.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Activating Advanced Routing Features

20-1

Configuring RIP

20-2

Configuring OSPF

20-11

Configuring DVMRP

20-33

Configuring IRDP

20-37

Configuring VRRP

20-42

Configuring PIM-SM

20-49

Activating Advanced Routing Features
In order to enable advanced routing protocols, such as OSPF, DVMRP, VRRP, and PIM‐SM, on a
SecureStack C3 device, you must purchase and activate a license key. If you have purchased an
advanced routing license, and have enabled routing on the device, you can activate your license as
described in the chapter entitled “Activating Licensed Features.”
If you are stacking your devices and require advanced routing features, all devices in the stack
must have a valid license.
If you wish to purchase an advanced routing license, contact Enterasys Networks Sales.
Note: The command prompts used in examples throughout this guide show a system where the
VLAN 1 interface has been configured for routing. The prompt changes depending on your current
configuration mode, your specific device, and the interface types and numbers configured for
routing on your system.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-1

Configuring RIP

Configuring RIP
Purpose
To enable and configure the Routing Information Protocol (RIP).

RIP Configuration Task List and Commands
Table 20‐1 lists the tasks and commands associated with RIP configuration. Commands are
described in the associated section as shown.
Table 20-1

RIP Configuration Task List and Commands

To do this...

Use these commands...

Enable RIP configuration mode.

“router rip” on page 20-2

Enable RIP on an interface.

“ip rip enable” on page 20-3

Configure an administrative distance.

“distance” on page 20-3

Allow reception of a RIP version.

“ip rip send version” on page 20-4

Allow transmission of a RIP version.

“ip rip receive version” on page 20-5

Configure RIP simple authentication.

“ip rip authentication-key” on page 20-5

Configure RIP encrypted authentication.

“ip rip message-digest-key” on page 20-6

Disable automatic route summarization
(necessary for enabling CIDR)

“no auto-summary” on page 20-7

Activate split horizon or poison-reverse.

“split-horizon poison” on page 20-7

Suppress sending routing updates.

“passive-interface” on page 20-8

Control reception of routing updates

“receive-interface” on page 20-9

Control advertising non-RIP routes.

“redistribute” on page 20-9

router rip
Use this command to enable or disable RIP configuration mode. The no form of this command
disables RIP.

Syntax
router rip
no router rip

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

20-2

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

ip rip enable

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
You must execute the router rip command to enable the protocol before completing many RIP‐
specific configuration tasks. For details on enabling configuration modes, refer to Table 18‐2 in
“Enabling Router Configuration Modes” on page 18‐2.

Example
This example shows how to enable RIP:
C3(su)->router#configure
C3(su)->router(Config)#router rip
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

ip rip enable
Use this command to enable RIP on an interface. The no form of this command disables RIP on an
interface: By default, RIP is disabled on all interfaces.

Syntax
ip rip enable
no ip rip enable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to enable RIP on the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip rip enable

distance
Use this command to configure the administrative distance for RIP routes. The no form of this
command resets RIP administrative distance to the default value of 120.

Syntax
distance weight
no distance [weight]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-3

ip rip send version

Parameters
weight

Specifies an administrative distance for RIP routes. Valid values are 1 ‐ 255.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
If several routes (coming from different protocols) are presented to the SecureStack C3, the
protocol with the lowest administrative distance will be chosen for route installation. By default,
RIP administrative distance is set to 120. The distance command can be used to change this value,
resetting RIP’s route preference in relation to other routes as shown in the table below.
Route Source

Default Distance

Connected

0

Static

1

OSPF

110

RIP

120

Example
This example shows how to change the default administrative distance for RIP to 1001:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router rip
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#distance 100

ip rip send version
Use this command to set the RIP version for RIP update packets transmitted out an interface. The
no version of this command sets the version of the RIP update packets to RIPv1.

Syntax
ip rip send version {1 | 2 | r1compatible}
no ip rip send version

Parameters
1

Specifies RIP version 1. This is the default setting.

2

Specifies RIP version 2.

r1compatible

Specifies that packets be sent as version 2 packets, but transmits these as
broadcast packets rather than multicast packets so that systems which only
understand RIP version 1 can receive them.

Defaults
None.

20-4

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

ip rip receive version

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the RIP send version to 2 for packets transmitted on the VLAN 1
interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip rip send version 2

ip rip receive version
Use this command to set the RIP version(s) for RIP update packets accepted on an interface. The
no version of this command sets the acceptable receive version of the RIP update packets to RIPv1.

Syntax
ip rip receive version {1 | 2 | 1 2 | none}
no ip rip receive version

Parameters
1

Specifies RIP version 1. This is the default setting.

2

Specifies RIP version 2.

12

Specifies RIP versions 1 and 2.

none

Specifies that no RIP routes will be processed on this interface.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Defaults
None.

Example
This example shows how to set the RIP receive version to 2 for update packets received on the
VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip rip receive version 2

ip rip authentication-key
Use this command to enable or disable a RIP authentication key (password) for use on an
interface. The no form of this command prevents RIP from using authentication.

Syntax
ip rip authentication-key name
no ip rip authentication-key

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-5

ip rip message-digest-key

Parameters
name

Specifies the password to enable or disable for RIP authentication.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the RIP authentication key chain to “password” on the VLAN 1
interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip rip authentication-key password

ip rip message-digest-key
Use this command to enable or disable a RIP MD5 authentication key (password) for use on an
interface. The no form of this command prevents RIP from using authentication.

Syntax
ip rip message-digest-key keyid md5 key
no ip rip message-digest-key keyid

Parameters
keyid

Specifies the key ID to enable or disable for RIP authentication. Valid values
are 1 to 255.

md5

Specifies use of the MD5 algorithm.

key

Specifies the RIP authentication password.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Defaults
None.

Examples
This example shows how to set the MD5 authentication ID to 5 for the RIP authentication key set
on the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip rip message-digest-key 5 md5 password

20-6

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

no auto-summary

no auto-summary
Use this command to disable automatic route summarization.

Syntax
no auto-summary
auto-summary

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
By default, RIP version 2 supports automatic route summarization, which summarizes
subprefixes to the classful network boundary when crossing network boundaries. Disabling
automatic route summarization enables CIDR, allowing RIP to advertise all subnets and host
routing information on the SecureStack C3 device. To verify which routes are summarized for an
interface, use the show ip route command as described in “show ip route” on page 19‐19. The
reverse of the command re‐enables automatic route summarization. By default, RIP auto‐
summarization affects both RIPv1 and RIPv2 routes.

Note: This command is necessary for enabling CIDR for RIP on the SecureStack C3 device.

Example
This example shows how to disable RIP automatic route summarization:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router rip
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#no auto-summary

split-horizon poison
Use this command to enable or disable split horizon poison‐reverse mode for RIP packets. The no
form of this command disables split horizon poison reverse.

Syntax
split-horizon poison
no split-horizon poison

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-7

passive-interface

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Split horizon prevents a network from being advertised out the same interface it was received on.
This function is disabled by default.

Example
This example shows how to disable split horizon poison reverse for RIP packets transmitted on
the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router rip
C3(su)->Router1(Config-router)#no split-horizon poison

passive-interface
Use this command to prevent RIP from transmitting update packets on an interface. The no form
of this command disables passive interface.

Syntax
passive-interface vlan vlan-id
no passive-interface vlan vlan-id

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the number of the VLAN to make a passive interface. This VLAN
must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐Routing
Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
This command does not prevent RIP from monitoring updates on the interface.

Example
This example shows how to set VLAN 2 as a passive interface. No RIP updates will be transmitted
on VLAN 2:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router rip
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#passive-interface vlan 2

20-8

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

receive-interface

receive-interface
Use this command to allow RIP to receive update packets on an interface. The no form of this
command denies the reception of RIP updates. By default, receiving is enabled on all routing
interfaces.

Syntax
receive-interface vlan vlan-id
no receive-interface vlan vlan-id

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the number of the VLAN to make a receive interface. This VLAN
must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐Routing
Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
This command does not affect the sending of RIP updates on the specified interface.

Example
This example shows how to deny the reception of RIP updates on VLAN 2:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router rip
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#no receive-interface vlan 2

redistribute
Use this command to allow routing information discovered through non‐RIP protocols to be
distributed in RIP update messages. The no form of this command clears redistribution
parameters.

Syntax
redistribute {connected | ospf process-id | static} [metric metric value]
[subnets]
no redistribute {connected | ospf process-id | static}

Parameters
connected

Specifies that non‐RIP routing information discovered via directly
connected interfaces will be redistributed.

ospf

Specifies that OSPF routing information will be redistributed in RIP.

process‐id

Specifies the process ID, an internally used identification number for each
instance of the OSPF routing process run on a router. Valid values are 1 to
65535.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-9

redistribute

static

Specifies that non‐RIP routing information discovered via static routes will
be redistributed. Static routes are those created using the ip route
command detailed in “ip route” on page 19‐21.

metric metric value

(Optional) Specifies a metric for the connected, OSPF or static
redistribution route. This value should be consistent with the designation
protocol.

subnets

(Optional) Specifies that connected, OSPF or static routes that are
subnetted will be redistributed.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Defaults
If metric value is not specified, 1 will be applied.
If subnets is not specified, only non‐subnetted routes will be redistributed.

Example
This example shows how to redistribute routing information discovered through static routes will
be redistributed into RIP update messages:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router rip
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#redistribute static

20-10

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

Configuring OSPF

Configuring OSPF
* Advanced License Required *
OSPF is an advanced routing feature that must be enabled with a license key. If you have purchased an
advanced license key, and have enabled routing on the device, you must activate your license as described in
the chapter entitiled “Activating Licensed Features” in order to enable the OSPF command set. If you wish to
purchase an advanced routing license, contact Enterasys Networks Sales.

Purpose
To enable and configure the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol.

OSPF Configuration Task List and Commands
Table 20‐2 lists the tasks and commands associated with OSPF configuration. Commands are
described in the associated section as shown.
Table 20-2

OSPF Configuration Task List and Commands

To do this...

Use these commands...

If necessary, activate your advanced routing
license.

See the “Activating Licensed Features” chapter.

Enable OSPF configuration mode.

“router id” on page 20-12
“router ospf” on page 20-13

Enable or disable RFC 1583 compatibility.

“1583compatibility” on page 20-13

Configure OSPF Interface Parameters.
Enable OSPF on the interface.

“ip ospf enable” on page 20-14

Configure an OSPF area.

“ip ospf areaid” on page 20-14

• Set the cost of sending a packet on an
OSPF interface.

“ip ospf cost” on page 20-15

• Set a priority to help determine the OSPF
designated router for the network.

“ip ospf priority” on page 20-15

• Adjust timers and message intervals.

“timers spf” on page 20-16
“ip ospf retransmit-interval” on page 20-17
“ip ospf transmit-delay” on page 20-17
“ip ospf hello-interval” on page 20-18
“ip ospf dead-interval” on page 20-18

• Configure OSPF authentication.

“ip ospf authentication-key” on page 20-19
“ip ospf message digest key md5” on page 20-20

Configure OSPF Areas.
• Configure an administrative distance.

“distance ospf” on page 20-20

• Define the range of addresses to be used
by Area Boundary Routers (ABRs).

“area range” on page 20-21

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-11

router id

Table 20-2

OSPF Configuration Task List and Commands (Continued)

To do this...

Use these commands...

• Define an area as a stub area.

“area stub” on page 20-22

• Set the cost value for the default route that
is sent into a stub area.

“area default cost” on page 20-23

• Define an area as an NSSA.

“area nssa” on page 20-23

Create virtual links.

“area virtual-link” on page 20-24

Enable redistribution from non-OSPF
routes.

“redistribute” on page 20-25

Monitor and maintain OSPF.

“show ip ospf” on page 20-26
“show ip ospf neighbor” on page 20-30
“show ip ospf interface” on page 20-28
“show ip ospf neighbor” on page 20-30
“show ip ospf virtual-links” on page 20-31
“clear ip ospf process” on page 20-31

router id
Use this command to set the OSPF router ID for the device. This IP address must be set manually
in order to run OSPF. The no form of this command removes the router ID for the device.

Syntax
router id ip-address
no router id

Parameters
ip‐address

Specifies the IP address that OSPF will use as the router ID.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
This command sets the OSPF router ID. The OSPF area ID of a routed VLAN is configured on each
interface with the interface command “ip ospf areaid” on page 20‐14. If you do not configure an
area ID on a routed interface running OSPF, the default area ID of 0.0.0.0 will be used.

Example
This example shows how to set the OSPF router ID to IP address 182.127.62.1:
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#router id 182.127.62.1

20-12

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

router ospf

router ospf
Use this command to enable or disable Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) configuration mode. The
no form of this command disables OSPF configuration mode.

Syntax
router ospf process-id
no router ospf process-id

Parameters
process‐id

Specifies the process ID, an internally used identification number for an
OSPF routing process run on a router. Only one OSPF process is allowed per
stack or standalone. Valid values are 1 to 65535.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
You must execute the router ospf command to enable the protocol before completing many OSPF‐
specific configuration tasks. For details on enabling configuration modes, refer to Table 18‐2 on
page 18‐2.
Only one OSPF process (process‐id) is allowed per SecureStack C3 router.

Example
This example shows how to enable routing for OSPF process 1:
C3(su)->router#conf terminal
C3(su)->router(Config)#router ospf 1
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

1583compatibility
Use this command to enable RFC 1583 compatibility on OSPF interfaces. The no form of this
command disables RFC 1583 compatibility on OSPF interfaces.

Syntax
1583compatability
no 1583compatability

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-13

ip ospf enable

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Example
This example shows how to enable RFC 1583 compatibility:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router ospf 1
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#1583compatability

ip ospf enable
Use this command to enable OSPF on an interface. The no form of this command disables OSPF on
an interface.

Syntax
ip ospf enable
no ip ospf enable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to enable OSPF on the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip ospf enable

ip ospf areaid
Use this command to configure area IDs for OSPF interfaces. If OSPF is enabled on an interface as
described in “ip ospf enable” on page 20‐14, the OSPF area will default to 0.0.0.0. The no form of
this command removes OSPF routing for the interfaces.

Syntax
ip ospf areaid area-id
no ip ospf areaid

Parameters
area‐id

Defaults
None.
20-14

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

Specifies the area‐id to be associated with the OSPF interface. Valid values
are decimal values or IP addresses.

ip ospf cost

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to configure the VLAN 1 interface as area 0.0.0.31:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip ospf areaid 0.0.0.31

ip ospf cost
Use this command to set the cost of sending an OSPF packet on an interface. The no form of this
command resets the OSPF cost to the default of 10.

Syntax
ip ospf cost cost
no ip ospf cost

Parameters
cost

Specifies the cost of sending a packet. Valid values range from 1 to 65535.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Each router interface that participates in OSPF routing is assigned a default cost. This command
overwrites the default of 10.

Example
This example shows how to set the OSPF cost to 20 for the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip ospf cost 20

ip ospf priority
Use this command to set the OSPF priority value for router interfaces. The no form of this
command resets the value to the default of 1.

Syntax
ip ospf priority number
no ip ospf priority

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-15

timers spf

Parameters
number

Specifies the router’s OSPF priority in a range from 0 to 255. Default value is
1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
The priority value is communicated between routers by means of hello messages and influences
the election of a designated router.

Example
This example shows how to set the OSPF priority to 20 for the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip ospf priority 20

timers spf
Use this command to change OSPF timer values to fine‐tune the OSPF network. The no form of
this command restores the default timer values (5 seconds for delay and 10 seconds for holdtime).

Syntax
timers spf spf-delay spf-hold
no timers spf

Parameters
spf‐delay

Specifies the delay, in seconds, between the receipt of an update and the SPF
execution. Valid values are 0 to 4294967295.

spf‐hold

Specifies the minimum amount of time, in seconds, between two
consecutive OSPF calculations. Valid values are 0 to 4294967295. A value of
0 means that two consecutive OSPF calculations are performed one
immediately after the other.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Example
This example shows how to set SPF delay time to 7 seconds and hold time to 3:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router ospf 1
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#timers spf 7 3

20-16

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

ip ospf retransmit-interval

ip ospf retransmit-interval
Use this command to set the amount of time between retransmissions of link state advertisements
(LSAs) for adjacencies that belong to an interface. The no form of this command resets the
retransmit interval value to the default, 5 seconds.

Syntax
ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds
no ip ospf retransmit-interval

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the retransmit time in seconds. Valid values are 1 to 65535.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the OSPF retransmit interval for the VLAN 1 interface to 20:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip ospf retransmit-interval 20

ip ospf transmit-delay
Use this command to set the amount of time required to transmit a link state update packet on an
interface. The no form of this command resets the retransmit interval value to the default, 1
second.

Syntax
ip ospf transmit-delay seconds
no ip ospf transmit-delay

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the transmit delay in seconds. Valid values are from 1 to 65535.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-17

ip ospf hello-interval

Example
This example shows how to set the time required to transmit a link state update packet on the
VLAN 1 interface at 20 seconds:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip ospf transmit-delay 20

ip ospf hello-interval
Use this command to set the number of seconds a router must wait before sending a hello packet
to neighbor routers on an interface. The no form of this command sets the hello interval value to
the default value of 10 seconds.

Syntax
ip ospf hello-interval seconds
no ip ospf hello-interval

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the hello interval in seconds. Hello interval must be the same on
neighboring routers (on a specific subnet), but can vary between subnets.
This parameter is an unsigned integer with valid values between 1 and
65535.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the hello interval to 5 for the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip ospf hello-interval 5

ip ospf dead-interval
Use this command to set the number of seconds a router must wait to receive a hello packet from
its neighbor before determining that the neighbor is out of service. The no form of this command
sets the dead interval value to the default value of 40 seconds.

Syntax
ip ospf dead-interval seconds
no ip ospf dead-interval

20-18

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

ip ospf authentication-key

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the number of seconds that a router must wait to receive a hello
packet before declaring the neighbor as “dead” and removing it from the
OSPF neighbor list. Dead interval must be the same on neighboring routers
(on a specific subnet), but can vary between subnets. This parameter is an
unsigned integer ranging from 1 to 65535. Default value is 40 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the dead interval to 20 for the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip ospf dead-interval 20

ip ospf authentication-key
Use this command to assign a password to be used by neighboring routers using OSPF’s simple
password authentication.The no form of this command removes an OSPF authentication
password on an interface.

Syntax
ip ospf authentication-key password
no ip ospf authentication-key

Parameters
password

Specifies an OSPF authentication password. Valid values are alphanumeric
strings up to 8 characters in length.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
This password is used as a “key” that is inserted directly into the OSPF header in routing protocol
packets. A separate password can be assigned to each OSPF network on a per‐interface basis.
All neighboring routers on the same network must have the same password configured to be able
to exchange OSPF information.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-19

ip ospf message digest key md5

Example
This example shows how to enables an OSPF authentication key on the VLAN 1 interface with the
password “yourpass”:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip ospf authentication-key yourpass

ip ospf message digest key md5
Use this command to enable or disable OSPF MD5 authentication on an interface. This validates
OSPF MD5 routing updates between neighboring routers. The no form of this command disables
MD5 authentication on an interface.

Syntax
ip ospf message-digest-key keyid md5 key
no ip ospf message-digest-key keyid

Parameters
keyid

Specifies the key identifier on the interface where MD5 authentication is
enabled. Valid values are integers from 1 to 255.

key

Specifies a password for MD5 authentication to be used with the keyid. Valid
values are alphanumeric strings of up to 16 characters.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to enable OSPF MD5 authentication on the VLAN 1 interface, set the key
identifier to 20, and set the password to “passone”:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip ospf message-digest-key 20 md5 passone

distance ospf
Use this command to configure the administrative distance for OSPF routes. The no form of this
command resets OSPF administrative distance to the default values.

Syntax
distance ospf {external | inter-area | intra-area} weight
no distance ospf {external | inter-area | intra-area}

20-20

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

area range

Parameters
external | inter‐
area | intra‐area

Applies the distance value to external (type 5 and type 7), to inter‐area, or to
intra‐area routes.
Note: The value for intra-area distance must be less than the value for
inter-area distance, which must be less than the value for external distance.

weight

Specifies an administrative distance for OSPF routes. Valid values are 1 ‐
255.

Defaults
If route type is not specified, the distance value will be applied to all OSPF routes.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
If several routes (coming from different protocols) are presented to the SecureStack C3, the
protocol with the lowest administrative distance will be chosen for route installation. By default,
OSPF administrative distance is set to 110. The distance ospf command can be used to change this
value, resetting OSPF’s route preference in relation to other routes as shown in the table below.
Route Source

Default Distance

Connected

0

Static

1

OSPF

Intra-area - 8; Inter-area - 10; External type 1 - 13; External type 2 - 150

RIP

15

Example
This example shows how to change the default administrative distance for external OSPF routes to
100:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router ospf 1
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#distance ospf external 100

area range
Use this command to define the range of addresses to be used by Area Border Routers (ABRs)
when they communicate routes to other areas. Each SecureStack C3 stack can support up to 4
OSPF areas. The no form of this command stops the routes from being summarized.

Syntax
area area-id range ip-address ip-mask [advertise | no-advertise]
no area area-id range ip-address ip-mask

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-21

area stub

Parameters
area‐id

Specifies the area from which routes are to be summarized. This is a
decimal value from 0 to 429496295.

ip‐address

Specifies the IP address associated with the area ID.

ip‐mask

Specifies the mask for the IP address.

advertise | no‐
advertise

(Optional) Enters address range in advertise mode, or do not advertise
mode.

Defaults
If not specified, advertise mode will be set.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Example
This example shows how to define the address range as 172.16.0.0/16 for summarized routes from
area 0.0.0.8:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router ospf 1
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#area 0.0.0.8 range 172.16.0.0 255.255.0.0

area stub
Use this command to define an OSPF area as a stub area. This is an area into which Autonomous
System external ASAs will not be flooded. The no form of this command changes the stub back to
a plain area.

Syntax
area area-id stub [no-summary]
no area area-id stub [no-summary]

Parameters
area‐id

Specifies the stub area. Valid values are decimal values or ip addresses.

no‐summary

(Optional) Prevents an Area Border Router (ABR) from sending Link State
Advertisements (LSAs) into the stub area. When this parameter is used, it
means that all destinations outside of the stub area are represented by
means of a default route.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Defaults
If no‐summary is not specified, the stub area will be able to receive LSAs.

20-22

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

area default cost

Example
The following example shows how to define OSPF area 10 as a stub area:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router ospf 1
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#area 10 stub

area default cost
Use this command to set the cost value for the default route that is sent into a stub area and NSSA
by an Area Border Router (ABR). The no form of this command removes the cost value from the
summary route that is sent into the stub area.

Syntax
area area-id default-cost cost
no area area-id default-cost

Parameters
area‐id

Specifies the stub area. Valid values are decimal values or IP addresses.

cost

Specifies a cost value for the summary route that is sent into a stub area by
default. Valid values are 24‐bit numbers, from 0 to 16777215.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
The use of this command is restricted to ABRs attached to stub and NSSA areas.

Example
This example shows how to set the cost value for stub area 10 to 99:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router ospf 1
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#area 10 default-cost 99

area nssa
Use this command to configure an area as a Not So Stubby Area (NSSA). The no form of this
command changes the NSSA back to a plain area.

Syntax
area area-id nssa [default-information-originate]
no area area-id nssa [default-information-originate]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-23

area virtual-link

Parameters
area‐id

Specifies the NSSA area. Valid values are decimal values or IP addresses.

default‐
information‐
originate

(Optional) Generates a default of Type 7 into the NSSA. This is used when
the router is an NSSA ABR.

Defaults
If default‐information‐originate is not specified, no default type will be generated.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
An NSSA allows some external routes represented by external Link State Advertisements (LSAs)
to be imported into it. This is in contrast to a stub area that does not allow any external routes.
External routes that are not imported into an NSSA can be represented by means of a default
route. This configuration is used when an OSPF internetwork is connected to multiple non‐OSPF
routing domains.

Example
This example shows how to configure area 10 as an NSSA area:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router ospf 1
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#area 10 nssa default-information-originate

area virtual-link
Use this command to define an OSPF virtual link, which represents a logical connection between
the backbone and a non‐backbone OSPF area. The no form of this command removes the virtual
link and/or its associated settings.

Syntax
area area-id virtual-link router-id
no area area-id virtual-link router-id

In addition to the syntax above, the options for using this command are:
area area-id virtual-link router-id authentication-key key
no area area-id virtual-link router-id authentication-key key
area area-id virtual-link router-id dead-interval seconds
no area area-id virtual-link router-id dead-interval seconds
area area-id virtual-link router-id hello-interval seconds
no area area-id virtual-link router-id hello-interval seconds
area area-id virtual-link router-id retransmit-interval seconds
no area area-id virtual-link router-id retransmit-interval seconds
area area-id virtual-link router-id transmit-delay seconds
no area area-id virtual-link router-id transmit-delay seconds

20-24

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

redistribute

Parameters
area‐id

Specifies the transit area for the virtual link. Valid values are decimal values
or IP addresses. A transit area is an area through which a virtual link is
established.

router‐id

Specifies the router ID of the virtual link neighbor.

authentication‐
key key

Specifies a password to be used by the virtual link. Valid values are
alphanumeric strings of up to 8 characters. Neighbor virtual link routers on
a network must have the same password.

dead‐interval
seconds

Specifies the number of seconds that a router must wait to receive a hello
packet before declaring the neighbor as “dead” and removing it from the
OSPF neighbor list. This value must be the same for all virtual links attached
to a certain subnet, and it is a value ranging from 1 to 8192.

hello‐interval
seconds

Specifies the number of seconds between hello packets on the virtual link.
This value must be the same for all virtual links attached to a network and it
is a value ranging from 1 to 8192.

retransmit‐
interval seconds

Specifies the number of seconds between successive retransmissions of the
same LSAs. Valid values are greater than the expected amount of time
required for the update packet to reach and return from the interface, and
range from 1 to 8192. Default is 5 seconds.

transmit‐delay
seconds

Specifies the estimated number of seconds before a link state update packet
on the interface to be transmitted. Valid values range from 1 to 8192. Default
is 1 second.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Example
This example shows how to configure a virtual link over transition area 0.0.0.2 to router ID
192.168.7.2:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router ospf 1
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#area 0.0.0.2 virtual-link 192.168.7.2

redistribute
Use this command to allow routing information discovered through non‐OSPF protocols to be
distributed in OSPF update messages. The no form of this command clears redistribution
parameters.

Syntax
redistribute {connected | rip | static} [metric metric value] [metric-type typevalue] [subnets]
no redistribute {connected | rip | static}

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-25

show ip ospf

Parameters
connected

Specifies that non‐OSPF information discovered via directly connected
interfaces will be redistributed.

rip

Specifies that RIP routing information will be redistributed in OSPF.

static

Specifies that non‐OSPF information discovered via static routes will be
redistributed. Static routes are those created using the ip route command
detailed in “ip route” on page 19‐21.

metric metric value

(Optional) Specifies a metric for the connected, RIP or static redistribution
route. This value should be consistent with the designation protocol.

metric‐type type
value

(Optional) Specifies the external link type associated with the default
connected, RIP or static route advertised into the OSPF routing domain.
Valid values are 1 for type 1 external route, and 2 for type 2 external route.

subnets

(Optional) Specifies that connected, RIP, or static routes that are subnetted
routes will be redistributed.

Defaults
If metric value is not specified, 0 will be applied.
If type value is not specified, type 2 (external route) will be applied.
If subnets is not specified, only the shortest prefix matching routes will be redistributed.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Example
This example shows how to redistribute RIP routing information to non‐subnetted routes in OSPF
routes:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router ospf
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#redistribute rip

show ip ospf
Use this command to display OSPF information.

Syntax
show ip ospf

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

20-26

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

show ip ospf database

Example
This example shows how to display OSPF information:
C3(su)->router#show ip ospf
Routing process "ospf 1" with ID 155.155.155.155
Supports only Normal TOS route.
It is not an area border router and is an autonomous system boundary router.
Redistributing External Routes from static
Number of areas in this router is 2
Area 0.0.0.0
SPF algorithm executed 0 times
Area ranges are
Link State Age Interval is 10
Area 0.0.0.8
SPF algorithm executed 302 times
Area ranges are
Link State Age Interval is 10

show ip ospf database
Use this command to display the OSPF link state database.

Syntax
show ip ospf database

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display all OSPF link state database information. This is a portion of
the command output:
C3(su)->router#show ip ospf database
OSPF Router with ID(155.155.155.155)
Displaying Ipnet Sum Link States(Area 0.0.0.0)
LinkID
ADV Router
Age
Seq#
192.168.16.0
155.155.155.155 1751
0x80000036

LinkID
191.2.2.0
191.3.3.3
191.3.3.4
191.3.3.5
191.3.3.6
191.3.3.7
191.3.3.8
191.3.3.9

Displaying As External Link States(Area 0.0.0.0)
ADV Router
Age
Seq#
155.155.155.155 1306
0x8000003c
155.155.155.155 1306
0x8000003c
155.155.155.155 1306
0x8000003c
155.155.155.155 1306
0x8000003c
155.155.155.155 1307
0x8000003c
155.155.155.155 1307
0x8000003c
155.155.155.155 1307
0x8000003c
155.155.155.155 1307
0x8000003c

Checksum
0x18a

Checksum
0x9096
0x5bc6
0x51cf
0x47d8
0x3de1
0x33ea
0x29f3
0x1ffc

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-27

show ip ospf interface

191.4.0.0

155.155.155.155

1307

0x8000003c

Displaying Router Link States(Area 0.0.0.8)
LinkID
ADV Router
Age
Seq#
3.3.3.3
3.3.3.3
986
0x8000008e
155.155.155.155
155.155.155.155 977
0x8000009c
Displaying Net Link States(Area 0.0.0.8)
LinkID
ADV Router
Age
Seq#
192.168.30.2
155.155.155.155 310
0x8000003b
192.168.31.2
155.155.155.155 997
0x80000002
192.168.32.2
155.155.155.155 997
0x80000002
192.168.33.2
155.155.155.155 998
0x80000002
Displaying Ipnet Sum Link States(Area 0.0.0.8)
LinkID
ADV Router
Age
Seq#
0.0.0.0
3.3.3.3
361
0x80000005
8.1.1.0
3.3.3.3
1512
0x80000003
8.1.2.0
3.3.3.3
1512
0x80000003
8.1.3.0
3.3.3.3
1502
0x80000003
8.1.4.0
3.3.3.3
1512
0x80000003

0x8e98

Checksum
0xb6f9
0x6e96

Checksum
0x59ab
0xc07c
0xb586
0xaa90
Checksum
0x311d
0x3de1
0x32eb
0x27f5
0x1c00

Table 20‐3 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 20-3

show ip ospf database Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Link ID

Link ID, which varies as a function of the link state record type, as follows:
• Net Link States - Shows the interface IP address of the designated router to the
broadcast network.
• Router Link States - Shows the ID of the router originating the record.
• Summary Link States - Shows the summary network prefix.

ADV Router

Router ID of the router originating the link state record.

Age

Age (in seconds) of the link state record.

Seq#

OSPF sequence number assigned to each link state record.

Checksum

Field in the link state record used to verify the contents upon receipt by another
router.

LinkCount

Link count of router link state records. This number is equal to, or greater than, the
number of active OSPF interfaces on the originating router.

show ip ospf interface
Use this command to display OSPF interface related information, including network type, priority,
cost, hello interval, and dead interval.

Syntax
show ip ospf interface [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

20-28

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

(Optional) Displays OSPF information for a specific VLAN. This VLAN
must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐Routing
Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

show ip ospf interface

Defaults
If vlan‐id is not specified, OSPF statistics will be displayed for all VLANs.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display all OSPF related information for the VLAN 6 interface:
C3(su)->router#show ip ospf interface vlan 6
Vlan 6
Internet Address 192.168.6.2 Mask 255.255.255.0, Area 0.0.0.0
Router ID 3.3.3.3 , Cost: 10 (computed)
Transmit Delay is 1 sec , State designated-router , Priority 1
Designated Router id 3.3.3.3 , Interface Addr 192.168.6.2
Backup Designated Router id 2.2.2.2 ,
Timer intervals configured ,
Hello 10 , Dead 40 , Retransmit 5

Table 20‐4 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 20-4

show ip ospf interface Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Vlan

VLAN ID

Internet Address

IP address and mask assigned to this interface.

Area

Area ID

Router ID

Router ID configured on this router.

Cost

OSPF interface cost, which is either default, or assigned with the ip ospf cost
command. For details, refer to “ip ospf cost” on page 20-15.

Transmit Delay

The number (in seconds) added to the LSA (Link State Advertisement) age field.

State

The interface state (versus the state between neighbors). Valid values include
Backup Designated Router, Designated Router, and Err for error.

Priority

The interface priority value, which is either default, or assigned with the ip ospf
priority command. For details, refer to “ip ospf priority” on page 20-15.

Designated Router
id

The router ID of the designated router on this subnet, if one exists, in which case Err
will be displayed.

Interface Addr

IP address of the designated router on this interface.

Backup Designated
Router id

IP address of the backup designated router on this interface, if one exists, in which
case Err will be displayed.

Timer intervals
configured

OSPF timer intervals. These are either default, or configured with the ip ospf
retransmit-interval (“ip ospf retransmit-interval” on page 20-17), the ip ospf hellointerval (“ip ospf hello-interval” on page 20-18), the ip ospf retransmit-delay (“ip
ospf transmit-delay” on page 20-17) and the ip ospf dead interval (“ip ospf deadinterval” on page 20-18) commands.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-29

show ip ospf neighbor

show ip ospf neighbor
Use this command to display the state of communication between an OSPF router and its
neighbor routers.

Syntax
show ip ospf neighbor [detail] [ip-address] [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
detail

(Optional) Displays detailed information about the neighbors, including the
area in which they are neighbors, who the designated router/backup
designated router is on the subnet, if applicable, and the decimal equivalent
of the E‐bit value from the hello packet options field.

ip‐address

(Optional) Displays OSPF neighbors for a specific IP address.

vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Displays OSPF neighbors for a specific VLAN. This VLAN must
be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐Routing Configuration
Tasks” on page 18‐1.

Defaults
If detail is not specified, summary information will be displayed.
If ip‐address is not specified, OSPF neighbors will be displayed for all IP addresses configured for
routing.
If vlan‐id is not specified, OSPF neighbors will be displayed for all VLANs configured for routing.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to use the show ospf neighbor command:
C3(su)->router#show ip ospf neighbor
ID
Pri
State
Dead-Int
182.127.62.1
1
FULL
40

Address
182.127.63.1

Interface
vlan1

Table 20‐5 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 20-5

20-30

show ip ospf neighbor Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

ID

Neighbor’s router ID of the OSPF neighbor.

Pri

Neighbor’s priority over this interface.

State

Neighbor’s OSPF communication state.

Dead-Int

Interval (in seconds) this router will wait without receiving a Hello packet from a
neighbor before declaring the neighbor is down.

Address

Neighbor’s IP address.

Interface

Neighbor’s interface (VLAN).

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

show ip ospf virtual-links

show ip ospf virtual-links
Use this command to display information about the virtual links configured on a router. A virtual
link represents a logical connection between the backbone and a non‐backbone OSPF area.

Syntax
show ip ospf virtual-links

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display OSPF virtual links information:
C3(su)->router#show ip ospf virtual-links
Neighbor ID 155.155.155.155
Transit area 0.0.0.8
Transmit delay is 1 sec State point-to-point
Timer intervals configured:
Hello 10, Dead 40, Retransmit 5
Adjacency State Full

Table 20‐6 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 20-6

show ip ospf virtual links Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Neighbor ID

ID of the virtual link neighbor, and the virtual link status, which is up or down.

Transit area

ID of the transit area through which the virtual link is configured.

Transmit delay

Amount of time required to transmit a link state update packet on an interface.

State

Whether the state of this interface is down or point-to-point.

Timer intervals
configured

Timer intervals configured for the virtual link, including Hello, Wait, and Retransmit
intervals.

Adjacency State

State of adjacency between this router and the virtual link neighbor of this router.

clear ip ospf process
Use this command to reset the OSPF process. This will require adjacencies to be reestablished and
routes to be reconverged.

Syntax
clear ip ospf process process-id

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-31

clear ip ospf process

Parameters
process‐id

Specifies the process ID, an internally used identification number for each
instance of the OSPF routing process run on a router. Valid values are 1 to
65535.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Privileged EXEC: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example shows how to reset OSPF process 1:
C3(su)->router#clear ip ospf process 1

20-32

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

Configuring DVMRP

Configuring DVMRP
* Advanced License Required *
DVMRP is an advanced routing feature that must be enabled with a license key. If you have purchased an
advanced license key, and have enabled routing on the device, you must activate your license as described in
the chapter entitled “Activating Licensed Features” in order to enable the DVMRP command set. If you wish
to purchase an advanced routing license, contact Enterasys Networks Sales.
Note: An Enterasys Networks Feature Guide document containing an in-depth discussion of
multicast configuration is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

Purpose
To enable and configure the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) on an interface.
DVMRP routes multicast traffic using a technique known as Reverse Path Forwarding. When a
router receives a packet, it floods the packet out of all paths except the one that leads back to the
packet’s source. Doing so allows a data stream to reach all VLANs (possibly multiple times). If a
router is attached to a set of VLANs that do not want to receive from a particular multicast group,
the router can send a “prune” message back up the distribution tree to stop subsequent packets
from traveling where there are no members. DVMRP will periodically reflood in order to reach
any new hosts that want to receive from a particular group.
Note: IGMP must be enabled on all VLANs running DVMRP, and must also be globally enabled
on the SecureStack C3. For details on enabling IGMP, refer to Chapter 13.

Commands

For information about...

Refer to page...

ip dvmrp

20-34

ip dvmrp enable

20-34

ip dvmrp metric

20-35

show ip dvmrp

20-35

See also show ip mroute on page 20‐59, which can be used to display the IP multicast routing
table.

Enabling DVMRP on an Interface
DVMRP is disabled by default, both globally and on each interface. Enabling DVMRP on a routed
interface requires completing the steps listed in Table 20‐1.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-33

ip dvmrp

Table 20-1

Commands to Enable DVMRP on an Interface

To do this...

Use these commands...

Globally enable IGMP.

“ip igmp” on page 13-10

Globally enable DVMRP.

“ip dvmrp” on page 20-34.

Enable IGMP on each interface.

“ip igmp enable” on page 13-11

Enable DVMRP on each interface .

“ip dvmrp enable” on page 20-34

ip dvmrp
Use this command to enable the DVMRP process. The no form of this command disables the
DVMRP process:

Syntax
ip dvmrp
no ip dvmrp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Example
This example shows how to enable the DVMRP process:
C3(su)->router(Config)#ip dvmrp

ip dvmrp enable
Use this command to enable DVMRP on an interface. The no form of this command disables
DVMRP on an interface:

Syntax
ip dvmrp enable
no ip dvmrp enable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

20-34

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

ip dvmrp metric

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to enable DVMRP on the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip dvmrp enable

ip dvmrp metric
Use this command to configure the metric associated with a set of destinations for DVMRP
reports.

Syntax
ip dvmrp metric metric

Parameters
metric

Specifies a metric associated with a set of destinations for DVMRP
reports. Valid values are from 1 to 31.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
To reset the DVMRP metric back to the default value of 1, enter ip dvmrp metric 1.

Example
This example shows how to set a DVMRP of 16 on the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip dvmrp metric 16

show ip dvmrp
Use this command to display DVMRP routing information.

Syntax
show ip dvmrp [route | neighbor | status]

Parameters
route | neighbor |
status

(Optional) Displays, DVMRP routing information, neighbor information,
or DVMRP enable status.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-35

show ip dvmrp

Defaults
If no optional parameters are specified, status information will be displayed.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display DVMRP status information:
C3(su)->router#show ip dvmrp
Vlan Id
Metric
Admin Status
-----------------------10
Enabled
18
Enabled
20
Enabled
25
Enabled
32
Enabled
500
Enabled

20-36

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

Oper. Status
-----------Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled

Configuring IRDP

Configuring IRDP
Purpose
To enable and configure the ICMP Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP) on an interface. This protocol
enables a host to determine the address of a router it can use as a default gateway. It is disabled by
default.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

ip irdp enable

20-37

ip irdp maxadvertinterval

20-38

ip irdp minadvertinterval

20-38

ip irdp holdtime

20-39

ip irdp preference

20-39

ip irdp broadcast

20-40

show ip irdp

20-40

ip irdp enable
Use this command to enable IRDP on an interface. The no form of this command disables IRDP on
an interface.

Syntax
ip irdp enable
no ip irdp enable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to enable IRDP on the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip irdp enable

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-37

ip irdp maxadvertinterval

ip irdp maxadvertinterval
Use this command to set the maximum interval in seconds between IRDP advertisements. The no
form of this command resets the maximum advertisement interval to the default value of 600
seconds.

Syntax
ip irdp maxadvertinterval interval
no irdp maxadvertinterval

Parameters
interval

Specifies a maximum advertisement interval in seconds. Valid values are
4 to 1800.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the maximum IRDP advertisement interval to 1000 seconds on the
VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip irdp maxadvertinterval 1000

ip irdp minadvertinterval
Use this command to set the minimum interval in seconds between IRDP advertisements. The no
form of this command deletes the custom holdtime setting, and resets the minimum
advertisement interval to the default value of three‐fourths of the maxadvertinterval value, which
is equal to 450 seconds.

Syntax
ip irdp minadvertinterval interval
no irdp minadvertinterval

Parameters
interval

Specifies a minimum advertisement interval in seconds. Valid values are 3
to 1800.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

20-38

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

ip irdp holdtime

Example
This example shows how to set the minimum IRDP advertisement interval to 500 seconds on the
VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip irdp minadvertinterval 500

ip irdp holdtime
Use this command to set the length of time in seconds IRDP advertisements are held valid. The no
form of this command resets the hold time to the default value of three times the
maxadvertinterval value, which is equal to 1800 seconds.

Syntax
ip irdp holdtime holdtime
no irdp holdtime

Parameters
holdtime

Specifies the hold time in seconds. Valid values are 0 to
9000.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the IRDP hold time to 4000 seconds on the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip irdp holdtime 4000

ip irdp preference
Use this command to set the IRDP preference value for an interface. This value is used by IRDP to
determine the interface’s selection as a default gateway address. The no form of this command
resets the interface’s IRDP preference value to the default of 0.

Syntax
ip irdp preference preference
no irdp preference

Parameters
preference

Specifies the value to indicate the interface’s use as a default router
address. Valid values are ‐2147483648 to 2147483647.
The minimum value indicates that the address, even though it may be
advertised, is not to be used by neighboring hosts as a default router
address.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-39

ip irdp broadcast

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set IRDP preference on the VLAN 1 interface so that the interface’s
address may still be advertised, but cannot be used by neighboring hosts as a default router
address:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip irdp preference -2147483648

ip irdp broadcast
Use this command to configure IRDP to use the limited broadcast address of 255.255.255.255. The
default is multicast with address 224.0.0.1. The no form of this command resets IRDP to use
multicast on IP address 224.0.0.1.

Syntax
ip irdp broadcast
no ip irdp broadcast

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to enable broadcast for IRDP on the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip irdp broadcast

show ip irdp
Use this command to display IRDP information.

Syntax
show ip irdp [vlan vlan-id]

20-40

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

show ip irdp

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Displays IRDP information for a specific VLAN. This VLAN
must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐Routing
Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

Defaults
If vlan vlan‐id is not specified, IRDP information for all interfaces will be displayed.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to display IRDP information for the VLAN 1 interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(vlan 1))#show ip irdp vlan 1
Interface vlan 1 has router discovery enabled
Advertisements will occur between 450 and 600 seconds
Advertisements are sent with broadcasts
Advertisements are valid for 1800 seconds
Default preference will be 0

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-41

Configuring VRRP

Configuring VRRP
* Advanced License Required *
VRRP is an advanced routing feature that must be enabled with a license key. If you have purchased an
advanced license key, and have enabled routing on the device, you must activate your license as described in
the chapter entitled “Activating Licensed Features” in order to enable the VRRP command set. If you wish to
purchase an advanced routing license, contact Enterasys Networks Sales.

Purpose
To enable and configure the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP). This protocol eliminates
the single point of failure inherent in the static default routed environment by transferring the
responsibility from one router to another if the original router goes down. VRRP‐enabled routers
decide who will become master and who will become backup in the event the master fails.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

router vrrp

20-42

create

20-43

address

20-44

priority

20-45

advertise-interval

20-45

preempt

20-46

enable

20-47

ip vrrp authentication-key

20-48

show ip vrrp

20-48

router vrrp
Use this command to enable or disable VRRP configuration mode. The no form of this command
removes all VRRP configurations from the running configuration.

Syntax
router vrrp
no router vrrp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#
20-42

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

create

Usage
You must execute the router vrrp command to enable the protocol before completing other
VRRP‐specific configuration tasks. For details on enabling configuration modes, refer to Table 18‐2
on page 18‐2.

Example
This example shows how enable VRRP configuration mode:
C3(su)->router#configure
C3(su)->router(Config)#router vrrp
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

create
Use this command to create a VRRP session. Each SecureStack C3 system supports up to 20 VRRP
sessions. The no form of this command disables the VRRP session.

Syntax
create vlan vlan-id vrid
no create vlan vlan-id vrid

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the number of the VLAN on which to create a VRRP session. This
VLAN must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐Routing
Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

vrid

Specifies a unique Virtual Router ID (VRID) to associate with the routing
interface.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

Usage
This command must be executed to create an instance of VRRP on a routing interface (VLAN)
before any other VRRP settings can be configured.

Example
This example shows how to create a VRRP session on the VLAN 1 interface with a VRID of 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router vrrp
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#create vlan 1 1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-43

address

address
Use this command to configure a virtual router IP address. The no form of this command clears
the VRRP address configuration.

Syntax
address vlan vlan-id vrid ip-address owner
no address vlan vlan-id vrid ip-address owner

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the number of the VLAN on which to configure a virtual router
address. This VLAN must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐
Routing Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

vrid

Specifies a unique Virtual Router ID (VRID) associated with the routing
interface.

ip‐address

Specifies the virtual router IP address to associate with the router.

owner

Specifies a value to indicate if the router owns the IP address as one of its
interfaces. Valid values are:
•

1 to indicate the router owns the address.

•

0 to indicate the router does not own the address.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
If the virtual router IP address is the same as the interface (VLAN) address owned by a VRRP
router, then the router owning the address becomes the master. The master sends an
advertisement to all other VRRP routers declaring its status and assumes responsibility for
forwarding packets associated with its virtual router ID (VRID).
If the virtual router IP address is not owned by any of the VRRP routers, then the routers compare
their priorities and the higher priority owner becomes the master. If priority values are the same,
then the VRRP router with the higher IP address is selected master. For details on using the
priority command, refer to “priority” on page 20‐45.

Example
This example shows how to configure a virtual router address of 182.127.62.1 on the VLAN 1
interface, VRID 1, and to set the router connected to the VLAN via this interface as the master:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router vrrp
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#address vlan 1 1 182.127.62.1 1

20-44

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

priority

priority
Use this command to set a priority value for a VRRP router. The no form of this command clears
the VRRP priority configuration.

Syntax
priority vlan vlan-id vrid priority-value
no priority vlan vlan-id vrid priority-value

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the number of the VLAN on which to configure VRRP priority.
This VLAN must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐Routing
Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

vrid

Specifies a unique Virtual Router ID (VRID) associated with the routing
interface. Valid values are from 1 to 255.

priority‐value

Specifies the VRRP priority value to associate with the vrid. Valid values are
from 1 to 254, with the highest value setting the highest priority. Priority
value of 255 is reserved for the VRRP router that owns the IP address
associated with the virtual router. Priority 0 is reserved for signaling that the
master has stopped working and the backup router must transition to
master state.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Example
This example shows how set a VRRP priority of 200 on the VLAN 1 interface, VRID 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router vrrp
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#priority vlan 1 1 200

advertise-interval
Use this command to set the interval in seconds between VRRP advertisements. The no form of
this command clears the VRRP advertise interval value.

Syntax
advertise-interval vlan vlan-id vrid interval
no advertise-interval vlan vlan-id vrid interval

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-45

preempt

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the number of the VLAN on which to configure the VRRP
advertisement interval. This VLAN must be configured for IP routing as
described in “Pre‐Routing Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

vrid

Specifies a unique Virtual Router ID (VRID) associated with the routing
interface. Valid values are from 1 to 255.

interval

Specifies a VRRP advertisement interval to associate with the vrid. Valid
values are from 1 to 255 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
VRRP advertisements are sent by the master router to other routers participating in the VRRP
master selection process, informing them of its configured values. Once the master is selected,
then advertisements are sent every advertising interval to let other VRRP routers in this VLAN/
VRID know the router is still acting as master of the VLAN/VRID.
All routers with the same VRID should be configured with the same advertisement interval.

Example
This example shows how set an advertise interval of 3 seconds on the VLAN 1 interface, VRID 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router vrrp
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#advertise-interval vlan 1 1 3

preempt
Use this command to enable or disable preempt mode on a VRRP router. The no form of this
command disables preempt mode.

Syntax
preempt vlan-id vrid
no preempt vlan-id vrid

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the number of the VLAN on which to set preempt mode. This
VLAN must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐Routing
Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

vrid

Specifies a unique Virtual Router ID (VRID) associated with the routing
interface. Valid values are from 1 to 255.

Defaults
None.

20-46

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

enable

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Preempt is enabled on VRRP routers by default, which allows a higher priority backup router to
preempt a lower priority master.
The router that owns the virtual router IP address always preempts other routers, regardless of
this setting.

Example
This example shows how to disable preempt mode on the VLAN 1 interface, VRID 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router vrrp
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#no preempt vlan 1 1

enable
Use this command to enable VRRP on an interface. The no form of this command disables VRRP
on an interface.

Syntax
enable vlan vlan-id vrid
no enable vlan vlan-id vrid

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the number of the VLAN on which to enable VRRP. This VLAN
must be configured for IP routing as described in “Pre‐Routing
Configuration Tasks” on page 18‐1.

vrid

Specifies the Virtual Router ID (VRID) associated with the vlan‐id. Valid
values are from 1 to 255.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Example
This example shows how to enable VRRP on the VLAN 1 interface, VRID 1:
C3(su)->router(Config)#router vrrp
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#enable vlan 1 1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-47

ip vrrp authentication-key

ip vrrp authentication-key
Use this command to enable or disable a VRRP authentication key (password) for use on an
interface. The no form of this command prevents VRRP from using authentication.

Syntax
ip vrrp authentication-key name
no ip vrrp authentication-key

Parameters
name

Specifies the password to enable or disable for VRRP authentication.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the VRRP authentication key chain to “password” on the VLAN 1
interface:
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip vrrp authentication-key password

show ip vrrp
Use this command to display VRRP routing information.

Syntax
show ip vrrp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display VRRP information
C3(su)->router(Config)#show ip vrrp
-----------VRRP CONFIGURATION----------Vlan
Vrid
State
Owner AssocIpAddr
2
1
Initialize
0 25.25.2.1

20-48

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

Priority
100

Configuring PIM-SM

Configuring PIM-SM
* Advanced License Required *
PIM-SM is an advanced routing feature that must be enabled with a license key. If you have purchased an
advanced license key, and have enabled routing on the device, you must activate your license as described in
the chapter entitled “Activating Licensed Features” in order to enable the PIM-SM command set. If you wish
to purchase an advanced routing license, contact Enterasys Networks Sales.
Note: An Enterasys Networks Feature Guide document containing an in-depth discussion of
multicast configuration is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

Design Considerations
Enterasys Networks recommends that administrators consider the following recommendations
before configuring the SecureStack C3 for a PIM‐SM environment.
•

A SecureStack C3 cannot be configured as a Candidate‐RP or a Candidate‐BSR.

•

A SecureStack C3 should not be the first hop router for a multicast stream. In other words, the
multicast stream should not originate on a SecureStack C3.

•

A SecureStack C3 should not be positioned in the core of a PIM‐SM topology, and should
only be positioned at the edge in a PIM‐SM topology. In other words, the SecureStack C3
should only be used to deliver multicast streams to end clients.

Purpose
To enable and configure Protocol Independent Multicast in Sparse Mode (PIM‐SM). This protocol
provides the means of dynamically learning how to forward multicast traffic in an environment
where group members are sparsely located throughout the network and bandwidth is limited. In
situations where members are densely located and bandwidth is plentiful, DVMRP would suffice
(see “Configuring DVMRP” on page 20‐33.)
PIM‐SM determines the network topology using the underlying unicast routing protocol to build
a Multicast Routing Information Base (MRIB).
Note: IGMP must be enabled on all VLANs running PIM-SM, and must also be globally enabled
on the SecureStack C3. For details on enabling IGMP, refer to Chapter 13.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

Global configuration commands
ip pimsm

20-50

ip pimsm staticrp

20-50

Interface configuration commands
ip pimsm enable

20-51

ip pimsm query-interval

20-52

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-49

ip pimsm

For information about...

Refer to page...

Display commands
show ip pimsm

20-52

show ip pimsm componenttable

20-53

show ip pimsm interface

20-54

show ip pimsm neighbor

20-55

show ip pimsm rp

20-56

show ip pimsm rphash

20-57

show ip pimsm staticrp

20-58

show ip mroute

20-59

ip pimsm
This command sets administrative mode of PIM‐SM multicast routing across the router to
enabled. IGMP must be enabled before PIM‐SM can be enabled. By default, both IGMP and PIM
are globally disabled. The no form of this command disables PIM‐SM (across the entire stack, if
applicable).

Syntax
ip pimsm
no ip pimsm

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Global router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Example
This example shows how to globally enable and disable PIM:
C3(su)->router(Config)# ip pimsm
C3(su)->router(Config)# no ip pimsm

ip pimsm staticrp
This command is used to create a manual Rendezvous Point IP address for the PIM‐SM router.
The no form of this command removes a previously configured RP.

Syntax
ip pimsm staticrp ipaddress groupadress groupmask
no ip pimsm staticrp ipaddress groupadress groupmask

20-50

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

ip pimsm enable

Parameters
ipaddress

The IP address of the Rendezvous Point

groupadress

The group address supported by the Rendezvous Point

groupmask

The group mask for the group address

Defaults
None.

Mode
Global Router configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Example
This example shows how to set an RP for a specific multicast group.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ip pimsm staticrp 192.15.18.3 224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0

ip pimsm enable
This command sets the administrative mode of PIM‐SM multicast routing on a routing interface to
enabled. By default, PIM is disabled on all IP interfaces. The no form of this command disables
PIM on the specific interface.

Syntax
ip pimsm enable
no ip pimsm enable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to enable PIM on IP interface for VLAN 1.
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip pimsm enable

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-51

ip pimsm query-interval

ip pimsm query-interval
This command configures the transmission frequency of hello messages in seconds between
PIM‐enabled neighbors. The no form of this command resets the hello interval to the default, 30
seconds.

Syntax
ip pimsm query-interval seconds
no ip pimsm query-interval

Parameters
seconds

This field has a range of 10 to 3600 seconds. Default is 30.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Example
This example shows how to set the hello interval rate to 100 seconds.
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip pimsm query-interval 100

show ip pimsm
Use this command to display system‐wide PIM‐SM routing information.

Syntax
show ip pimsm

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display PIM information.
C3(su)->router# show ip pimsm
Admin Mode Enable
Join/Prune Interval (secs) 60

20-52

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

show ip pimsm componenttable

PIM-SM INTERFACE STATUS
VlanId
Interface Mode
--------- -------------8
Disable
16
Enable
17
Enable
20
Enable
30
Enable
31
Disable
32
Disable
33
Disable

Protocol State
---------------Non-Operational
Operational
Operational
Operational
Operational
Non-Operational
Non-Operational
Non-Operational

Table 20‐7 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 20-7

show ip pimsm Output Details

Output Field

What it displays

Admin Mode

This field indicates whether PIM-SM is enabled or disabled. This is a configured
value.

Join/Prune Interval
(secs)

This field shows the interval at which periodic PIM-SM Join/Prune messages are to
be sent.

VlanId

VLAN id associated with the PIM IP Interface.

Interface Mode

This field indicates whether PIM-SM is enabled or disabled on the interface. This is a
configured value.

Protocol State

This field indicates the current state of the PIM-SM protocol on the interface.
Possible values are Operational or Non-Operational.

show ip pimsm componenttable
This command displays the table containing objects specific to a PIM domain. One row exists for
each domain to which the router is connected.

Syntax
show ip pimsm componenttable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display PIM router information:
C3(su)->router> show ip pimsm componenttable

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-53

show ip pimsm interface

COMPONENT TABLE
Component
Index

Component
BSR Address

Component
BSR Expiry Time
(hh:mm:ss)
--------------- --------------192.168.30.2
00:02:10

---------1

Component
CRP Hold Time
(hh:mm:ss)
------------00:00:00

Table 20‐8 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 20-8

show ip pimsm componenettable Output Details

Output Field

What it displays

Component Index

This field displays a number which uniquely identifies the component.

Component BSR
Address

This field displays the IP address of the bootstrap router (BSR) for the local PIM
region.

Component BSR
Expiry Time

This field displays the minimum time remaining before the BSR in the local domain
will be declared down.

Component CRP
Hold Time

This field displays the hold time of the component when it is a candidate rendezvous
point.

show ip pimsm interface
This command displays PIM‐SM status of the router interfaces. With the stats parameter, this
command displays statistical information for PIM‐SM on the specified interface.

Syntax
show ip pimsm interface {vlan vlan-id | stats {vlan-id | all}}

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Display PIM‐SM information for the specified IP interface enabled for
PIM.

stats

Display PIM‐SM interface statistics.

vlan‐id | all

Display statistics for a specific VLAN or all VLANs.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Examples
This example shows how to display PIM interface information.
.

C3(su)->router> show ip pimsm interface vlan 30
VLAN ID
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Mode

20-54

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

30
192.168.30.1
255.255.255.0
enable

show ip pimsm neighbor

Hello Interval (secs)
CBSR Preference
CRP Preference
CBSR Hash Mask Length

30 secs
-1
-1
30

Table 20‐9 provides an explanation of the show ip pimsm interface vlan command output.
Table 20-9

show ip pimsm interface vlan Output Details

Output Field

What it displays

IP Address

The IP address of the specified interface.

Subnet Mask

The Subnet Mask for the IP address of the PIM interface.

Mode

Indicates whether PIM-SM is enabled or disabled on the specified interface. This is a
configured value. By default it is disabled.

Hello Interval

Indicates the frequency at which PIM hello messages are transmitted on this
interface. This is a configured value. By default, the value is 30 seconds

CBSR Preference

The preference value for the local interface as a candidate bootstrap router.

CRP Preference

The preference value as a candidate rendezvous point on this interface.

CBSR Hash Mask
Length

The hash mask length to be advertised in bootstrap messages if this interface is
elected as the bootstrap router. The value is used in the hash algorithm for selecting
the RP for a particular group.

This example shows how to display PIM interface statistics.
.

C3(su)->router> show ip pimsm interface stats all
Vlan ID
--------6
7
8
30

IP Address
--------------192.168.6.2
192.168.7.1
192.168.8.1
192.168.30.1

Subnet Mask
--------------255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0

Neighbor
Designated Router count
----------------- ---------0.0.0.0
0
192.168.7.1
0
0.0.0.0
0
192.168.30.2
1

Table 20‐10 provides an explanation of the show ip pimsm interface stats command output.
Table 20-10

show ip pimsm interface stats Output Details

Output Field

What it displays

IP Address

The IP Address that represents the PIM-SM interface.

Subnet Mask

The Subnet Mask of this PIM-SM interface.

Designated Router

IP Address of the Designated Router for this interface.

Neighbor Count

The number of neighbors on the PIM-SM interface.

show ip pimsm neighbor
Display the router’s PIM neighbors.

Syntax
show ip pimsm neighbor [vlan-id]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-55

show ip pimsm rp

Parameters
vlan‐id

(Optional) Display all neighbors discovered on a specific Interface.

Mode
Any router mode.

Defaults
If the VLAN id is omitted, all neighbors off all interfaces will be displayed.

Example
This example shows how to display PIM information:
C3(su)->router> show ip pimsm neighbor

Vlan ID
--------30
6

NEIGHBOR TABLE
IP Address
Up Time
(hh:mm:ss)
---------------- ---------192.168.30.2
01:36:41
192.168.6.1
01:36:41

Expiry Time
(hh:mm:ss)
-----------00:01:25
00:01:25

Table 20‐11 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 20-11

show ip pimsm neighbor Output Details

Output Field

What it displays

Vlan ID

VLAN id of the interface.

IP Address

The IP Address of the neighbor on an interface

Up Time

The time since this neighbor has become active on this interface.

Expiry Time

The expiry time of the neighbor on this interface.

show ip pimsm rp
This command displays the PIM information for candidate Rendezvous Points (RPs) for all IP
multicast groups or for a specific group address. The information in the table is displayed for each
IP multicast group.

Syntax
show ip pimsm rp {group-address group-mask | all | candidate}

Parameters

20-56

group‐address

The multicast group IP address.

group‐mask

The multicast group address subnet mask.

all

For all known group addresses.

candidate

Display PIM‐SM candidate‐RP table information.

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

show ip pimsm rphash

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Examples
This example shows how to display the RP set for a specific group address.
C3(su)->router> show ip pimsm rp 224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0
RP SET TABLE
Group
Address

Group Mask

Address

Hold Time Expiry Time Component C-RP Priority
(hh:mm:ss) (hh:mm:ss)
--------- ---------- ----------- ---------- ----------- --------- ----------224.0.0.0 240.0.0.0
192.168.30.2 00:02:15
00:02:30
1
0

Table 20‐12 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 20-12

show ip pimsm rp Output Details

Output Field

What it displays

Group Address

The address of the group for which the RP set is displayed.

Group Mask

The mask of the group address.

Address

The IP address of the RP.

Hold Time

The hold time of the RP.

Expiry Time

The minimum time remaining before the RP will be declared down.

Component

A number which uniquely identifies the component. Each protocol instance
connected to a separate domain should have a different index value.

C-RP Priority

The candidate-RP priority of the RP.

This example shows how to display the candidate RPs for each group address.
C3(su)->router> show ip pimsm rp candidate
CANDIDATE RP TABLE
Group Address
Group Mask
Address
--------------- --------------- --------------224.0.0.0
240.0.0.0
192.168.30.2

show ip pimsm rphash
Displays the Rendezvous Point router that will be selected from the set of active RP routers. The
RP router, for the group, is selected by using the hash algorithm defined in RFC 2362.

Syntax
show ip pimsm rphash group-address

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-57

show ip pimsm staticrp

Parameters
group‐address

The Group Address for the RP.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display RP that will be selected for group address 224.0.0.0:
C3(su)->router> show ip pimsm rphash 224.0.0.0
192.168.129.223

show ip pimsm staticrp
Display the PIM‐SM static Rendezvous Point information.

Syntax
show ip pimsm staticrp

Parameters
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Defaults
None.

Example
This example shows how to display PIM information.
C3(su)->router# show ip pimsm staticrp
STATIC RP TABLE
Address
Group Address
Group Mask
--------------- --------------- --------------123.231.111.121 234.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
192.168.129.223 224.0.0.0
240.0.0.0

Table 20‐13 provides an explanation of the command output.

20-58

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

show ip mroute

Table 20-13

show ip pimsm staticrp Output Details

Output Field

What it displays

Address

The IP address of the RP.

Group Address

The group address supported by the RP.

Group Mask

The group mask for the group address.

show ip mroute
Use this command to display the IP multicast routing table.

Syntax
show ip mroute

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any router mode.

Usage
The multicast routing table shows how a multicast routing protocol, such as PIM and DVMRP,
will forward a multicast packet. Information in the table includes source network/mask and
upstream neighbors.
For information about DVMRP, see “Configuring DVMRP” on page 20‐33.

Example
This example shows the output of this command.
C3(su)->router#show ip mroute
Active IP Multicast Sources
Flags: D - Dense, S - Sparse, C - Connected, L - Local,P - Pruned, R - RP-bit set,
F - Register flag, T - SPT-bit set,Outgoing interface flags: H - Hardware switched
Timers: Uptime/Expires
Interface state: Interface, Next-Hop or VCD, State/Mode
Source Network
:
Source Mask
:
MultiCast Group :
Uptime
:
Upstream Neighbor:
Upstream Vlan
:
Downstream Vlans :

192.168.111.10
0.0.0.0
239.1.8.9
6336
0.0.0.0
111
8

Source Network
Source Mask
MultiCast Group
Uptime

192.168.111.10
0.0.0.0
239.1.7.105
6336

:
:
:
:

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

20-59

show ip mroute

Upstream Neighbor: 0.0.0.0
Upstream Vlan
: 111
Downstream Vlans : 8

20-60

Source Network
:
Source Mask
:
MultiCast Group :
Uptime
:
Upstream Neighbor:
Upstream Vlan
:
Downstream Vlans :

192.168.111.10
0.0.0.0
239.1.8.169
6582
0.0.0.0
111
8

Source Network
:
Source Mask
:
MultiCast Group :
Uptime
:
Upstream Neighbor:
Upstream Vlan
:
Downstream Vlans :

192.168.111.10
0.0.0.0
239.1.4.173
6582
0.0.0.0
111
8

IPv4 Routing Protocol Configuration

21
IPv6 Management
This chapter describes the switch mode set of commands used to manage IPv6.

Purpose
To enable or disable the IPv6 management function, to configure and display the IPv6 host
address and IPv6 gateway for the switch, and to display IPv6 status information.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show ipv6 status

21-1

set ipv6

21-2

set ipv6 address

21-3

show ipv6 address

21-4

clear ipv6 address

21-4

set ipv6 gateway

21-5

clear ipv6 gateway

21-6

show ipv6 neighbors

21-6

show ipv6 netstat

21-7

ping ipv6

21-8

traceroute ipv6

21-9

show ipv6 status
Use this command to display the status of the IPv6 management function.

Syntax
show ipv6 status

Parameters
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

21-1

set ipv6

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display IPv6 management function status.
C3(ro)->show ipv6 status
IPv6 Administrative Mode: Disabled

set ipv6
Use this command to globally enable or disable the IPv6 management function.

Syntax
set ipv6 {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enable or disable the IPv6 management function.

Defaults
By default, IPv6 management is disabled.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
When you enable IPv6 management on the switch, the system automatically generates a link‐local
host address for the switch from the host MAC address. You can set a different host IPv6 address
with the set ipv6 address command.

Example
This example shows how to enable IPv6 management.
C3(su)-> set ipv6 enable
C3(su)->show ipv6 status
IPv6 Administrative Mode: Enabled
C3(su)->show ipv6 address
Name
IPv6 Address
--------------------------------------------------host
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64

21-2

IPv6 Management

set ipv6 address

set ipv6 address
Use this command to configure IPv6 global addressing information.

Syntax
set ipv6 address ipv6-addr/prefix-length [eui64]

Parameters
ipv6‐addr

The IPv6 address or prefix to be configured. This parameter must be in the
form documented in RFC 4291, with the address specified in hexadecimal
using 16‐bit values between colons.

prefix‐length

The length of the IPv6 prefix for this address. The value of prefix‐length is a
decimal number indicating the number of high‐order contiguous bits of the
address that comprise the network portion of the address.

eui64

(Optional) Formulate the IPv6 address using an EUI‐64 ID in the lower
order 64 bits of the address.

Defaults
No global unicast IPv6 address is defined by default.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
Use this command to manually configure a global unicast IPv6 address for IPv6 management. You
can specify the address completely, or you can use the optional eui64 parameter to allow the
switch to generate the lower order 64 bits of the address.
When using the eui64 parameter, you specify only the network prefix and length.

Examples
This example shows how to completely specify an IPv6 address by entering all 128 bits and the
prefix:
C3(su)->set ipv6 address 2001:0db8:1234:5555::9876:2/64
C3(su)->show ipv6 address
Name
IPv6 Address
--------------------------------------------------host
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64
host
2001:DB8:1234:5555::9876:2/64

This example shows how to use the eui64 parameter to configure the lower order 64 bits:
C3(su)->set ipv6 address 2001:0db8:1234:5555::/64 eui64
C3(su)->show ipv6 address
Name
IPv6 Address
--------------------------------------------------host
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64
host
2001:DB8:1234:5555:201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

21-3

show ipv6 address

show ipv6 address
Use this command to display the system IPv6 address(es) and IPv6 gateway address (default
router), if configured.

Syntax
show ipv6 address

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
This command displays the IPv6 addresses configured automatically and with the set ipv6
address and set ipv6 gateway commands.

Example
This example displays three IPv6 management addresses configured for the switch.
C3(su)->show ipv6 address
Name
IPv6 Address
--------------------------------------------------host
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64
host
2001:DB8:1234:5555:201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64
gateway
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5D:1234

clear ipv6 address
Use this command to clear IPv6 global addresses.

Syntax
clear ipv6 [address {all|ipv6-addr/prefix-length}]

Parameters
ipv6‐addr

The IPv6 address to be cleared. This parameter must be in the form
documented in RFC 4291, with the address specified in hexadecimal using
16‐bit values between colons.

prefix‐length

The length of the IPv6 prefix for this address. The value of prefix‐length is a
decimal number indicating the number of high‐order contiguous bits of the
address that comprise the network portion of the address.

all

Deletes all IPv6 global addresses.

Defaults
If address is not entered, all manually configured global IPv6 addresses are cleared.
21-4

IPv6 Management

set ipv6 gateway

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
This command clears addresses manually configured with the set ipv6 address command. Use the
clear ipv6 gateway command to clear the IPv6 gateway address.

Example
This example illustrates that this command clears only those IPv6 addresses configured with the
set ipv6 address command. The link‐local address for the host interface and the gateway address
are not removed with this command.
C3(su)->show ipv6 address
Name
IPv6 Address
--------------------------------------------------host
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64
host
2001:DB8:1234:5555:201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64
host
2001:DB8:1234:5555::9876:2/64
gateway
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5D:1234
C3(su)->clear ipv6 address all
C3(su)->show ipv6 address
Name
IPv6 Address
--------------------------------------------------host
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64
gateway
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5D:1234

set ipv6 gateway
Use this command to configure the IPv6 gateway (default router) address.

Syntax
set ipv6 gateway ipv6-addr

Parameters
ipv6‐addr

The IPv6 address to be configured. The address can be a global unicast or
link‐local IPv6 address, in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the
address specified in hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
This command configures the IPv6 gateway address. Only one IPv6 gateway address can be
configured for the switch, so executing this command when a gateway address has already been
configured will overwrite the previously configured address.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

21-5

clear ipv6 gateway

Use the show ipv6 address command to display a configured IPv6 gateway address.

Example
This example shows how to configure an IPv6 gateway address using a link‐local address.
C3(su)->set ipv6 gateway fe80::201:f4ff:fe5d:1234
C3(su)->show ipv6 address
Name
IPv6 Address
--------------------------------------------------host
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64
gateway
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5D:1234

clear ipv6 gateway
Use this command to clear an IPv6 gateway address.

Syntax
clear ipv6 gateway

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to remove a configured IPv6 gateway address.
C3(su)->show ipv6 address
Name
IPv6 Address
--------------------------------------------------host
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64
gateway
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5D:1234
C3(su)->clear ipv6 gateway
C3(su)->show ipv6 address
Name
IPv6 Address
--------------------------------------------------host
FE80::201:F4FF:FE5C:2880/64

show ipv6 neighbors
Use this command to display the system IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol cache.

Syntax
show ipv6 neighbors

21-6

IPv6 Management

show ipv6 netstat

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows example output of this command.
C3(su)->show ipv6 neighbors
Last
IPv6 Address
MAC Address
isRtr State
Updated
--------------------------------------- ----------------- ----- ------- ------2001:db8:1234:6666::2310:3
00:04:76:73:42:31 True Reachable 00:01:16

show ipv6 netstat
Use this command to display IPv6 netstat information.

Syntax
show ipv6 netstat

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows the output of this command.
C3(su)->show ipv6 netstat
Prot Local
Address
Foreign Address
---- -------------------------------------------TCP 3333::211:88FF:FE59:4424.22
2020::D480:1384:F58C:B114.1049
TCP 3333::211:88FF:FE59:4424.443
2020::D480:1384:F58C:B114.1056
TCP ::.23
::.*
TCP 3333::211:88FF:FE59:4424.22
2020::D480:1384:F58C:B114.1050
TCP 3333::211:88FF:FE59:4424.22
3333::2117:F1C0:90B:910D.1045
TCP ::.80

State
----------ESTABLISHED
TIME_WAIT
LISTEN
ESTABLISHED
ESTABLISHED
LISTEN

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

21-7

ping ipv6

TCP

TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP

::.*
::.22
::.*

LISTEN

3333::211:88FF:FE59:4424.80
2020::D480:1384:F58C:B114.1053
3333::211:88FF:FE59:4424.80
2020::D480:1384:F58C:B114.1054
::.443
::.*
3333::211:88FF:FE59:4424.22
2020::D480:1384:F58C:B114.1048
3333::211:88FF:FE59:4424.443
2020::D480:1384:F58C:B114.1055

ESTABLISHED
ESTABLISHED
LISTEN
ESTABLISHED
TIME_WAIT

ping ipv6
Use this command to test routing network connectivity by sending IP ping requests.

Syntax
ping ipv6-addr [size num]

Parameters
ipv6‐addr

Specifies the IPv6 address of the system to ping. Enter the address in the
form documented in RFC 4291, with the address specified in hexadecimal
using 16‐bit values between colons.

size num

(Optional) Specifies the size of the datagram packet. The value of num can
range from 48 to 2048 bytes.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
This command is also available in router mode.

Examples
This example shows output from a successful ping to IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1234:5555::1234:1.
C3(su)->ping ipv6 2001:0db8:1234:5555::1234:1
2001:DB8:1234:5555::1234:1 is alive

This example shows output from an unsuccessful ping to IPv6 address
2001:0db8:1234:5555::1234:1.
C3(su)->ping ipv6 2001:0db8:1234:5555::1234:1
no answer from 2001:DB8:1234:5555::1234:1

21-8

IPv6 Management

traceroute ipv6

traceroute ipv6
Use this command to discover the routes that packets actually take when traveling to their
destination through the network on a hop‐by‐hop basis.

Syntax
traceroute ipv6 ipv6-addr

Parameters
ipv6‐addr

Specifies a host to which the route of an IPv6 packet will be traced. Enter the
address in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the address specified in
hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
This command is also available in router mode.

Example
This example shows how to use traceroute to display a round trip path to host
2001:0db8:1234:5555
C3(su)->router#traceroute ipv6 2001:0db8:1234:5555::1
Traceroute to 2001:0db8:1234:5555, 30 hops max, 40 byte packets
1 2001:0db8:1234:5555
1.000000e+00 ms
1.000000e+00 ms

1.000000e+00 ms

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

21-9

traceroute ipv6

21-10

IPv6 Management

22
IPv6 Configuration
* IPv6 Routing License Required *
IPv6 routing must be enabled with a license key. If you have purchased an IPv6 routing license key, and have
enabled routing on the device, you must activate your license as described in the chapter entitled “Activating
Licensed Features” in order to enable the IPv6 routing configuration command set. If you wish to purchase an
IPv6 routing license, contact Enterasys Networks Sales.

The commands in this chapter perform configuration of IPv6 parameters on the SecureStack C3.
For information about specific IPv6 routing protocols, such as OSFPv3, refer to the appropriate
chapters. For information about managing IPv6 functionality at the switch level, refer to
Chapter 21, IPv6 Management.
For information about...

Refer to page...

General Configuration Commands

22-3

Interface Configuration Commands

22-10

Neighbor Cache and Neighbor Discovery Commands

22-14

Query Commands

22-22

Overview
IPv6 and IPv4 coexist on the SecureStack C3. As with IPv4, IPv6 routing can be enabled on VLAN
interfaces. Each Layer 3 routing interface can be used for IPv4, IPv6, or both.
The SecureStack C3 supports all IPv6 address formats, including global unicast addresses, link‐
local unicast, global multicast, scoped multicast (including local scoped multicast), IPv4
compatible addresses, unspecified addresses, loopback addresses, and anycast addresses.
Refer to the following RFCs for more information about IPv6 address formats:
•

RFC 4291, “IP Version 6 Addressing Architecture”

•

RFC 3587, “IPv6 Global Unicast Address Format”

•

RFC 4007, “IPv6 Scoped Address Architecture”

The basic IPv6 protocol specifies PDU options of two classes, both of which are supported: hop‐
by‐hop options and destination options. While new options can be defined in the future, the
following are currently supported: routing (for source routing), fragment, router alert and pad.
Jumbograms are not supported. In IPv6, only source nodes fragment. Path MTU discovery is
therefore a requirement. Flow labels are ignored.
Neighbor Discovery is the IPv6 replacement for ARP. The SecureStack C3 supports neighbor
advertise and solicit, duplicate address detection, and unreachability detection. Router
Advertisement is part of the Neighbor Discovery process and is required for IPv6. Stateless
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-1

Overview

autoconfiguration is part of Router Advertisement and the SecureStack C3 can support both
stateless and stateful autoconfiguration of end nodes. The SecureStack C3 supports both EUI‐64
interface identifiers and manually configured interface IDs.
Refer to the following RFCs for more information about Neighbor Discovery and stateless address
autoconfiguration:
•

RFC 2461, “Neighbor Discovery for IP Version 6”

•

RFC 2462, “IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration”

For ICMPv6, error PDU generation is supported, as are path MTU, echo, and redirect.
Router Advertisement is an integral part of IPv6 and is supported. Numerous options are
available including stateless/stateful address configuration, router and address lifetimes, and
Neighbor Discovery timer control. Ping and traceroute applications for IPv6 are provided.
Management of IPv6 features is provided by means of CLI commands and SNMP. See Chapter 21,
IPv6 Management for descriptions of the CLI commands.

Default Conditions
The following table lists the default IPv6 conditions.
Condition

Default Value

IPv6 forwarding

Enabled

IPv6 route distance

1

IPv6 unicast-routing

Disabled

IPv6 enable

Disabled

IPv6 mtu

1500

IPv6 nd dad attempts

1

IPv6 nd managed-config-flag

False

IPv6 nd ns-interval

0

IPv6 nd other-config-flag

False

IPv6 nd ra-interval

600

IPv6 nd ra-lifetime

1800

IPv6 nd reachable-time

0

IPv6 nd suppress-ra

Disabled

IPv6 nd prefix

Valid-lifetime — 604800
Preferred-lifetime — 2592000
Autoconfig — enabled
On-link — enabled

22-2

IPv6 Configuration

General Configuration Commands

General Configuration Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

ipv6 forwarding

22-3

ipv6 hop-limit

22-3

ipv6 route

22-4

ipv6 route distance

22-5

ipv6 unicast-routing

22-6

ping ipv6

22-6

ping ipv6 interface

22-7

traceroute ipv6

22-8

ipv6 forwarding
This command enables or disables IPv6 forwarding on the router.

Syntax
ipv6 forwarding
no ipv6 forwarding

Parameters
None.

Defaults
IPv6 forwarding is enabled.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
The no form of this command disables IPv6 forwarding on the router.

Example
This example disables IPv6 forwarding.
C3(su)->router(Config)# no ipv6 forwarding

ipv6 hop-limit
This command sets the maximum number of IPv6 hops used in IPv6 packets and router
advertisements generated by this device.

Syntax
ipv6 hop-limit hops
no ipv6 hop-limit

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-3

ipv6 route

Parameters
hops

Specifies the maximum number of IPv6 hops used in IPv6 packets and
router advertisements generated by this device. Value can range from 1
to 255. The default value is 64.

Defaults
The default maximum number of IPv6 hops is 64.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
This command sets the value of the hop limit field in IPv6 packets originated by this device. This
value is also placed in the “Cur Hop Limit” field of router advertisements generated by this router.
Use the no form of this command to reset the limit to the default value.

Example
This example sets the hop limit to 50.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 hop-limit 50

ipv6 route
This command configures static IPv6 routes.

Syntax
ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix-length interface {tunnel tunnel-id | vlan vlan-id}
next-hop-addr [pref]
no ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix-length interface {tunnel tunnel-id | vlan vlanid} next-hop-addr [pref]

Parameters
ipv6‐prefix/prefix‐length

The IPv6 network prefix that is the destination of the static route, and
the prefix length.
The prefix must be in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the
address specified in hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.
The prefix length is a decimal number indicating the number of high‐
order contiguous bits of the address that comprise the network
portion of the address.

interface tunnel
tunnel-id | vlan
vlan-id

22-4

IPv6 Configuration

Specifies the interface type and ID of direct static routes from point‐to‐
point and broadcast interfaces.

ipv6 route distance

next‐hop‐addr

Link‐local address of the interface.

pref

(Optional) Specifies the preference value the router uses to compare
this route with routes from other route sources that have the same
destination.
The value of pref can range from1 to 255. The default value is 1, which
gives static routes precedence over any other type of route except
connected routes.
A route with a preference of 255 cannot be used to forward traffic.

Defaults
Default preference or administrative distance is 1.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
Use the no form of this command to remove a static route. If you do not specify a next hop address
with the no form, all static routes to the specified destination will be removed.

Example
This command creates a static IPv6 route to network 2001:0DB8:2222:4455::/64 by way of interface
VLAN 6 and gives it a preference of 5.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 route 2001:0DB8:2222:4455::/64 interface vlan 6
fe80::1234:5678:2dd:1 5

ipv6 route distance
This command configures the default distance, or preference, for static IPv6 routes.

Syntax
ipv6 route distance pref
no ipv6 route distance

Parameters
pref

A distance value used when no distance is specified when a static
route is configured.
The value can range from 1 to 255. Lower route distance values are
preferred when determining the best route.

Defaults
Default preference or administrative distance is 1.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-5

ipv6 unicast-routing

Usage
The default distance is used when no distance is specified in the ipv6 route command. Changing
the default distance does not update the distance of existing static routes, even if they were
assigned the original default distance. The new default distance will only be applied to static
routes created after invoking the ipv6 route distance command.
Use the no form of this command to return the default distance to 1.

Example
This command sets the default distance value to 3.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 route distance 3

ipv6 unicast-routing
This command enables/disables forwarding of IPv6 unicast datagrams.

Syntax
ipv6 unicast-routing
no ipv6 unicast-routing

Parameters
None.

Defaults
Disabled.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
Use this command to enable forwarding of IPv6 unicast datagrams on the SecureStack C3. Use the
no form of the command to disable forwarding of IPv6 unicast datagrams.

Example
This command enables forwarding of IPv6 unicast datagrams on the router.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 unicast-routing

ping ipv6
Use this command to test routing network connectivity by sending IP ping requests.

Syntax
ping ipv6 ipv6-addr [size num]

22-6

IPv6 Configuration

ping ipv6 interface

Parameters
ipv6‐addr

Specifies the global IPv6 address of the system to ping. Enter the address in
the form documented in RFC 4291, with the address specified in
hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.

size num

(Optional) Specifies the size of the datagram packet. The value of num can
range from 48 to 2048 bytes.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged exec: C3(su)‐>router#
Router user exec: C3(su)‐>router>

Usage
Use this command to determine whether another computer is on the network. To use this
command, configure the switch for network (in‐band) connection. The source and target devices
must have the ping utility enabled and running on top of TCP/IP.
The switch can be pinged from any IP workstation with which the switch is connected through the
default VLAN (VLAN 1), as long as there is a physical path between the switch and the
workstation. The terminal interface sends three pings to the target station.

Examples
This example shows output from a successful ping to IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1234:5555::1234:1.
C3(su)->router#ping ipv6 2001:0db8:1234:5555::1234:1
Send count=3, Receive count=3 from 2001:DB8:1234:5555::1234:1
Average round trip time = 1.00 ms

This example shows output from an unsuccessful ping to IPv6 address
2001:0db8:1234:5555::1234:1.
C3(su)->ping ipv6 2001:0db8:1234:5555::1234:1
no answer from 2001:DB8:1234:5555::1234:1

ping ipv6 interface
Use this command to test routing network connectivity by sending IP ping requests.

Syntax
ping ipv6 interface {vlan vlan-id | tunnel tunnel-id | loopback loop-id}
{link-local-address ipv6-lladdr | ipv6-addr} [size num]

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies a VLAN interface as the source.

tunnel tunnel‐id

Specifies a tunnel interface as the source.

loopback loop‐id

Specifies a loopback interface as the source.

link‐local‐address
ipv6‐lladdr

Specifies a link‐local IPv6 address to ping.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-7

traceroute ipv6

ipv6‐addr

Specifies the global IPv6 address of the system to ping. Enter the address
in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the address specified in
hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.

size num

(Optional) Specifies the size of the datagram packet. The value of num can
range from 48 to 2048 bytes.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged exec: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
Use this command to ping an interface by using the link‐local address or the global IPv6 address
of the interface. You can use a loopback, tunnel, or logical interface as the source. The source and
target devices must have the ping utility enabled and running on top of TCP/IP.
The switch can be pinged from any IP workstation with which the switch is connected through the
default VLAN (VLAN 1), as long as there is a physical path between the switch and the
workstation. The terminal interface sends three pings to the target station.

Example
This example shows output from a successful ping to link‐local address fe80::211:88ff:fe55:4a7f.
C3(su)->router#ping ipv6 interface vlan 6 link-local-address
fe80::211:88ff:fe55:4a7f
Send count=3, Receive count=3 from fe80::211:88ff:fe55:4a7f
Average round trip time = 1.00 ms

traceroute ipv6
Use this command to discover the routes that packets actually take when traveling to their
destination through the network on a hop‐by‐hop basis.

Syntax
traceroute ipv6 ipv6-addr

Parameters
ipv6‐addr

Specifies a host to which the route of an IPv6 packet will be traced. Enter the
address in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the address specified in
hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged exec: C3 (su)‐>router#

22-8

IPv6 Configuration

traceroute ipv6

Example
This example shows how to use traceroute to display a round trip path to host
2001:0db8:1234:5555::1.
C3(su)->router#traceroute ipv6 2001:0db8:1234:5555::1
Traceroute to 2001:0db8:1234:5555::1, 30 hops max, 40 byte packets
1 2001:0db8:1234:5555::1
1.000000e+00 ms 1.000000e+00 ms 1.000000e+00 ms

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-9

Interface Configuration Commands

Interface Configuration Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

ipv6 address

22-10

ipv6 enable

22-11

ipv6 mtu

22-12

ipv6 address
This command configures a global IPv6 address on an interface, including VLAN, tunnel, and
loopback interfaces, and enables IPv6 processing on the interface.

Syntax
ipv6 address {ipv6-addr/prefix-length | ipv6-prefix/prefix-length eui64}
no ipv6 address [ipv6-addr/prefix-length | ipv6-prefix/prefix-length eui64]

Parameters
ipv6‐addr

The IPv6 address to be configured on the interface.
This parameter must be in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the
address specified in hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.

prefix‐length

The length of the IPv6 prefix for this address. The value of prefix‐length
is a decimal number indicating the number of high‐order contiguous
bits of the address that comprise the network portion of the address.
If the eui64 parameter is used, this value must be 64 bits.

ipv6‐prefix

The IPv6 prefix to be configured on the interface.
This parameter must be in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the
address specified in hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.

eui64

Configures an IPv6 address for an interface using an EUI‐64 interface ID
in the low order 64 bits of the address and enables IPv6 processing on
the interface.

Defaults
No IPv6 addresses are defined for any interface.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Use this command to manually configure a global IPv6 address on an interface. You can enter the
complete 128‐bit address and prefix, or use the eui64 parameter to configure a global IPv6 address
using an EUI‐64 identifier in the low order 64 bits of the address. When using the eui64 parameter,
you specify only the network prefix and length, and the SecureStack C3 generates the low order 64
bits.
The hexadecimal letters in the IPv6 addresses are not case‐sensitive.

22-10

IPv6 Configuration

ipv6 enable

This command also enables IPv6 processing on the interface and automatically generates a link‐
local address.
You can assign multiple globally reachable addresses to an interface with this command.
Use the no ipv6 address command without any parameters to remove all manually configured
IPv6 addresses from the interface.

Example
This example configures an IPv6 address by using the eui64 parameter. Then, the show ipv6
interface is executed to display the configuration. Note that a link‐local address has also
automatically been generated.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 address 3FFE:501:FFFF:101/64 eui64
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 interface vlan 7
Vlan
Vlan
IPv6
IPv6

7 Administrative Mode
7 IPv6 Routing Operational Mode
is
Prefix is

Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
FE80::211:88FF:FE55:4A7F/128
3FFE:501:FFFF:101:211:88FF:FE55:4A7F/64
Routing Mode
Enabled
Interface Maximum Transmit Unit
1500
Router Duplicate Address Detection Transmits
1
Router Advertisement NS Interval
0
Router Lifetime Interval
1800
Router Advertisement Reachable Time
0
Router Advertisement Interval
600
Router Advertisement Managed Config Flag
Disabled
Router Advertisement Other Config Flag
Disabled
Router Advertisement Suppress Flag
Disabled

ipv6 enable
This command enables IPv6 routing on an interface that has not been configured with an explicit
IPv6 address.

Syntax
ipv6 enable
no ipv6 enable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
IPv6 is disabled.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
When this command is executed, an IPv6 link‐local unicast address is configured on the interface
and IPv6 processing is enabled. You do not need to use this command if you configured an IPv6
global address on an interface with the ipv6 address command.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-11

ipv6 mtu

The no ipv6 enable command disables IPv6 routing on an interface that has been enabled with the
ipv6 enable command, but it does not disable IPv6 processing on an interface that is configured
with an explicit IPv6 address.

Example
This example enables IPv6 processing on VLAN 7. Note that a link‐local address has been
automatically configured.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 enable
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 interface vlan 7
Vlan 7 Administrative Mode
Vlan 7 IPv6 Routing Operational Mode
IPv6 is
IPv6 Prefix is
Routing Mode
Interface Maximum Transmit Unit
Router Duplicate Address Detection Transmits
Router Advertisement NS Interval
Router Lifetime Interval
Router Advertisement Reachable Time
Router Advertisement Interval
Router Advertisement Managed Config Flag
Router Advertisement Other Config Flag
Router Advertisement Suppress Flag

Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
FE80::211:88FF:FE55:4A7F/128
Enabled
1500
1
0
1800
0
600
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled

ipv6 mtu
This command configures the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of IPv6 packets that can be
sent on an interface.

Syntax
ipv6 mtu bytes
no ipv6 mtu

Parameters
bytes

Specifies the MTU value in bytes. The value can range from 1280 to 1500
bytes. The MTU cannot be larger than the value supported by the
underlying interface.

Defaults
1480 bytes

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
The maximum transmission unit is the largest possible unit of data that can be sent on a given
physical medium. Use this command to set the MTU for an IPv6 interface. The no form of this
command resets the MTU to the default value of 1480 bytes.
Use the show ipv6 interface to display the current setting for this interface.

22-12

IPv6 Configuration

ipv6 mtu

Note: All interfaces attached to the same physical medium must be configured with the same MTU
to operate properly.

Example
This example sets the MTU value to 1500 bytes.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))# ipv6 mtu 1500

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-13

Neighbor Cache and Neighbor Discovery Commands

Neighbor Cache and Neighbor Discovery Commands
The IPv6 Neighbor Cache functions similarly to the IPv4 ARP table. Entries can be made to the
Neighbor Cache by the Neighbor Discovery protocol.
The Neighbor Discovery commands allow you to set protocol parameters on an interface basis.
For information about...

Refer to page...

clear ipv6 neighbors

22-14

ipv6 nd dad attempts

22-15

ipv6 nd ns-interval

22-15

ipv6 nd reachable-time

22-16

ipv6 nd other-config-flag

22-17

ipv6 nd ra-interval

22-18

ipv6 nd ra-lifetime

22-18

ipv6 nd suppress-ra

22-19

ipv6 nd prefix

22-19

clear ipv6 neighbors
This command clears all the dynamically learned entries in the Neighbor Cache, or an entry on a
specific interface.

Syntax
clear ipv6 neighbor [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Clear only the entries on the specified interface.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged exec: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
To clear all dynamically learned Neighbor Cache entries, use this command without any
parameters.

Example
This example clears all dynamically learned cache entries.
C3(su)->router#clear ipv6 neighbors

22-14

IPv6 Configuration

ipv6 nd dad attempts

ipv6 nd dad attempts
This command configures the number of duplicate address detection (DAD) attempts made on the
interface when configuring IPv6 unicast addresses.

Syntax
ipv6 nd dad attempts number
no ipv6 nd dad attempts

Parameters
number

Specifies the number of consecutive Neighbor Solicitation message
transmitted on the interface, when Duplicate Address Detection (DAD)
is performed on a unicast IPv6 address assigned to the interface.
The value can range from 0 to 600. A value of 0 disables Duplicate
Address Detection on the interface. A value of 1, which is the default,
specifies a single transmission with no follow‐up transmissions.

Defaults
Duplicate address detection enabled, for 1 attempt.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
IPv6 Duplicate Address Detection is described in RFC 2462. Duplicate Address Detection uses
Neighbor Solicitation and Neighbor Advertisement messages to verify the uniqueness of an
address. Duplicate Address Detection must be performed on unicast addresses prior to assigning
them to an interface. An address remains in a tentative state while Duplicate Address Detection is
being performed. If a tentative address is found to be a duplicate, an error message is returned
and the address is not assigned to the interface.
Use this command to change the number of Neighbor Solicitation messages that can be sent for
Duplicate Address Detection from the default value of 1. The no form of the command returns the
value to the default of 1. A value of 0 disables Duplicate Address Detection on the interface.
The show ipv6 interface command displays the current DAD attempt setting.

Example
This example changes the number of consecutive Neighbor Solicitation messages sent for DAD to
3 on this interface.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))# ipv6 nd dad attempts 3

ipv6 nd ns-interval
This command configures the interval between Neighbor Solicitations sent on an interface.

Syntax
ipv6 nd ns-interval {msec | 0}
no ipv6 nd ns-interval

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-15

ipv6 nd reachable-time

Parameters
msec

Sets the interval in milliseconds between retransmissions of Neighbor
Solicitation messages on the interface. The value can range from 1000
(one second) to 3,600,000 (one hour) milliseconds.

0

An advertised value of 0 means the interval is unspecified.

Defaults
By default, a value of 0 is advertised in RA messages.

Mode
Router interface configuration:C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
The NS interval is used to determine the time between retransmissions of neighbor solicitation
messages to a neighbor when resolving a unicast address (DAD) or when probing the reachability
of a neighbor. This value is also advertised in Router Advertisement (RA) messages sent on the
interface.
Use the no form of this command to set the interval to the default of 0.

Example
This example sets the NS interval to 2 seconds.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))# ipv6 nd ns-interval 2000

ipv6 nd reachable-time
This command configures the length of time within which some reachability confirmation must be
received from a neighbor for the neighbor to be considered reachable.

Syntax
ipv6 nd reachable-time msec
no ipv6 nd reachable-time

Parameters
msec

The amount of time in milliseconds that a remote IPv6 node is
considered reachable. The value can range from 0 to 4,294,967,295
milliseconds.
The default value is 0, which means that the time is unspecified.

Defaults
By default, a value of 0 is advertised in RA messages.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
This timer allows the C3 to detect unavailable neighbors. The shorter the time, the more quickly
unavailable neighbors are detected. Very short configured times are not recommended in normal
22-16

IPv6 Configuration

ipv6 nd other-config-flag

IPv6 operation, however, because shorter times consume more IPv6 network bandwidth and
processing resources.
This value is also included in all Router Advertisements messages sent out on the interface. By
default, a value of 0, indicating that the configured time is unspecified by this router, is sent out in
RA messages.
Use the no form of this command to reset this value to the default.
The show ipv6 interface command displays the current reachable time setting.

Example
This example sets the reachable time to 60 seconds.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))# ipv6 nd reachable-time 60000

ipv6 nd other-config-flag
This command sets the “other stateful configuration” flag in router advertisements sent on this
interface to true.

Syntax
ipv6 nd other-config-flag
no ipv6 nd other-config-flag

Parameters
None.

Defaults
Flag is set to false by default.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if (Vlan 1))#

Usage
When the value of the “other stateful configuration” flag is true, end nodes should use stateful
autoconfiguration (DHCPv6) to obtain additional information (excluding addresses). When the
value is false, end nodes do not. Refer to RFC 2462, “IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration,”
for more information.
Use the no form of this command to reset the flag to false.

Example
This example sets the other stateful configuration flag to true.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))# ipv6 nd other-config-flag

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-17

ipv6 nd ra-interval

ipv6 nd ra-interval
This command sets the transmission interval between router advertisements.

Syntax
ipv6 nd ra-interval sec
no ipv6 nd ra-interval

Parameters
sec

Specifies the value in seconds of the router advertisement transmission
interval. The value can range from 4 to 1800 seconds.

Defaults
600 seconds.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
The no form of this command resets the interval value to the default of 600 seconds.

Example
This example sets the router advertisement transmission interval to 120 seconds.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))# ipv6 nd ra-interval 120

ipv6 nd ra-lifetime
This command sets the value, in seconds, that is placed in the Router Lifetime field of router
advertisements sent from this interface.

Syntax
ipv6 nd ra-lifetime sec | 0
no ipv6 nd ra-lifetime

Parameters
sec

Specifies the value of the Router Lifetime in seconds. The value must be
0, or an integer between the value of the router advertisement interval
and 9000 seconds.
A value of 0 means that this router is not to be used as the default router.

Defaults
1800 seconds.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

22-18

IPv6 Configuration

ipv6 nd suppress-ra

Usage
The no form of this command resets the lifetime value to the default of 1800 seconds.

Example
This example sets the router advertisement lifetime value to 3600 seconds.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))# ipv6 nd ra-lifetime 3600

ipv6 nd suppress-ra
This command suppresses router advertisement transmission on this interface.

Syntax
ipv6 nd suppress-ra
no ipv6 nd suppress-ra

Parameters
None.

Defaults
Suppression disabled.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
By default, transmission of router advertisements is enabled. This command disables such
transmissions. Use the no form of this command to re‐enable transmission.

Example
This example disables router advertisement transmission.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))# ipv6 nd suppress-ra

ipv6 nd prefix
This command configures the IPv6 prefixes to be included in router advertisements sent by this
interface.

Syntax
ipv6 nd prefix {ipv6-prefix/prefix-length} [{valid-lifetime | infinite}
{preferred-lifetime | infinite}] [no-autoconfig] [off-link]
no ipv6 nd prefix {ipv6-prefix/prefix-length}

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-19

ipv6 nd prefix

Parameters
ipv6‐prefix/prefix‐length The IPv6 network prefix and the prefix length being configured.
The prefix must be in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the
address specified in hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.
The prefix length is a decimal number indicating the number of high‐
order contiguous bits of the address that comprise the network portion
of the address.
valid‐lifetime | infinite

(Optional) Specifies the length of time in seconds (relative to the time
the packet is sent) that the prefix is valid for the purpose of on‐link
determination.
The lifetime value can range from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
Specifying infinite means that the prefix is always valid.

preferred‐lifetime |
infinite

(Optional) Specifies the length of time in seconds (relative to the time
the packet is sent) that addresses generated from the prefix by means of
stateless address autoconfiguration remain preferred.
The lifetime value can range from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
Specifying infinite means that the prefix is always preferred.

no‐autoconfig

Unsets the autonomous address‐configuration flag. When not set,
means that this prefix cannot be used for autonomous address
configuration. By default, the autonomous address‐configuration flag is
set/enabled.

off‐link

Unsets the on‐link flag. When not set, means that this prefix cannot be
used for on‐link determination. By default, the on‐link flag is set/
enabled.

Defaults
•

Valid‐lifetime — 604800

•

Preferred‐lifetime — 2592000

•

Autoconfig — enabled

•

On‐link — enabled

Mode
Router interface configuration:C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if (Vlan 1))#

Usage
Refer to RFC 2461, “Neighbor Discovery for IP Version 6,” for more information about router
advertisements.
Router advertisements contain a list of prefixes used for on‐link determination and/or
autonomous address configuration. Flags associated with the prefixes specify the intended uses of
a particular prefix. Hosts use the advertised on‐link prefixes to build and maintain a list that is
used in deciding when a packet’s destination is on‐link or beyond a router. Hosts can use the
advertised autoconfiguration prefixes to perform autonomous (stateless) address configuration, if
stateless configuration is allowed (see ipv6 nd other‐config‐flag).
The no form of this command removes the prefix from the list of prefixes advertised in router
advertisements by this interface.

22-20

IPv6 Configuration

ipv6 nd prefix

Example
This example configures a prefix that can be used for both on‐link determination and
autoconfiguration, using the default values for valid lifetime and preferred lifetime.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))# ipv6 nd prefix 2001:0db8:4444:5555/64

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-21

Query Commands

Query Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show ipv6

22-22

show ipv6 interface

22-22

show ipv6 neighbors

22-24

show ipv6 route

22-25

show ipv6 route preferences

22-27

show ipv6 route summary

22-28

show ipv6 traffic

22-29

clear ipv6 statistics

22-34

show ipv6
This command displays the status of IPv6 forwarding mode and unicast routing mode.

Syntax
show ipv6

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
The output of this command displays whether IPv6 forwarding mode and unicast routing mode
are enabled or disabled.

Example
This example displays information about IPv6 modes.
C3(su)‐>router# show ipv6
IPv6 Forwarding Mode
IPv6 Unicast Routing Mode

Enabled
Enabled

show ipv6 interface
This command displays information about one or all configured IPv6 interfaces.

Syntax
show ipv6 interface [vlan vlan-id | tunnel tunnel-id | loopback loop-id]

22-22

IPv6 Configuration

show ipv6 interface

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Display information only about the specified interface.

tunnel tunnel‐id
loopback loop‐id

Defaults
If no interface is specified, information about all IPv6 interfaces is displayed.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
Use this command to display the usability status of IPv6 interfaces.
If an IPv6 prefix is configured on an interface, the following information also displays:
•

The IPv6 prefix and length

•

The configured preferred lifetime value

•

The configured valid lifetime value

•

The status of the on‐link flag, either enabled or disabled

•

The status of the autonomous address‐configuration flag (autoconfig), either enabled or
disabled.

Examples
This example displays information about IPv6 interface VLAN 7.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 interface vlan 7
Vlan
Vlan
IPv6
IPv6

7 Administrative Mode
7 IPv6 Routing Operational Mode
is
Prefix is

Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
FE80::211:88FF:FE55:4A7F/128
3FFE:501:FFFF:101:211:88FF:FE55:4A7F/64
3FFD::211:88FF:FE55:4A7F/64
Routing Mode
Enabled
Interface Maximum Transmit Unit
1500
Router Duplicate Address Detection Transmits
1
Router Advertisement NS Interval
0
Router Lifetime Interval
1800
Router Advertisement Reachable Time
0
Router Advertisement Interval
600
Router Advertisement Managed Config Flag
Enabled
Router Advertisement Other Config Flag
Enabled
Router Advertisement Suppress Flag
Disabled

This example displays information about IPv6 interface tunnel 1.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 interface tunnel 1
Tunnel 1 Administrative Mode
Tunnel 1 IPv6 Routing Operational Mode
Mode for IPv6 Tunnel

Enabled
Disabled
IPv6OVER4

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-23

show ipv6 neighbors

Source Address for IPv6 Tunnel
Destination Address for IPv6 Tunnel
Routing Mode
Interface Maximum Transmit Unit
Router Duplicate Address Detection Transmits
Router Advertisement NS Interval
Router Lifetime Interval
Router Advertisement Reachable Time
Router Advertisement Interval
Router Advertisement Managed Config Flag
Router Advertisement Other Config Flag
Router Advertisement Suppress Flag

192.168.1.2
192.168.8.1
Enabled
1480
1
0
1800
0
600
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled

show ipv6 neighbors
This command displays IPv6 Neighbor Cache information.

Syntax
show ipv6 neighbors

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
Use this command to display the contents of the Neighbor Cache.

Example
This example displays the neighbors in the cache.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 neighbors
IPv6 Address
Interface
-------------------------------------FE80::200:FF:FE00:A0A0
Vlan 6
FE80::2D0:B7FF:FE2C:7697
Vlan 6
FE80::2D0:B7FF:FE2C:7698
Vlan 6
FE80::2D0:B7FF:FE2C:7699
Vlan 6
FE80::2D0:B7FF:FE2C:769E
Vlan 6
FE80::2D0:B7FF:FE2C:76AA
Vlan 6
FE80::2D0:B7FF:FE2C:76AB
Vlan 6
FE80::2D0:B7FF:FE2C:76AC

22-24

IPv6 Configuration

MAC Address

Neighbor Last
isRtr State
Updated

----------------- ----- -------- ------00:00:00:00:a0:a0 False Stale
1155
00:d0:b7:2c:76:97 False Stale

1095

00:d0:b7:2c:76:98 False Stale

1096

00:d0:b7:2c:76:99 False Stale

1155

00:d0:b7:2c:76:9e False Stale

1461

00:d0:b7:2c:76:aa False Stale

1540

00:d0:b7:2c:76:ab False Stale

1553

00:d0:b7:2c:76:ac False Stale

1566

show ipv6 route

Vlan 6
FE80::2D0:B7FF:FE2C:76B4
Vlan 6

00:d0:b7:2c:76:b4 False Delay

1903

Table 22‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 22-1

show ipv6 neighbor Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

IPv6 Address

The IPv6 address of the neighbor on the interface.

Interface

The interface on which this neighbor was discovered.

MAC Address

The link layer address of the neighbor.

isRtr

Whether the neighbor is a router. If the value is True, the neighbor
is known to be a router. Otherwise, the value is False.

Neighbor State

State of the cache entry. Possible values are Incomplete,
Reachable, Stale, Delay, Probe, and Unknown.

Last Updated

The system uptime when the information for the neighbor was last
updated.

show ipv6 route
This command displays the IPv6 routing table.

Syntax
show ipv6 route [{ipv6-addr [route-type] | {{ipv6-prefix/prefix-length | interface
interface} [route-type] | route-type | all]

Parameters
ipv6‐addr

Specifies a specific IPv6 address for which the best‐matching route
should be displayed.

ipv6‐prefix/prefix‐length The IPv6 network prefix of the route to display, and the prefix length.
The prefix must be in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the
address specified in hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.
The prefix length is a decimal number indicating the number of high‐
order contiguous bits of the address that comprise the network portion
of the address.
interface interface

Specifies that the routes with next‐hops on this interface should be
displayed. Interface can be of the form:
vlan vlan‐id
tunnel tunnel‐id
loopback loop‐id

route‐type

Specifies the route type as one of the following:
connected
static
ospf

all

Specifies that all routes should be displayed.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-25

show ipv6 route

Defaults
If no parameters are entered, information about all active IPv6 routes is displayed.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#
Router user execution: C3(su)‐>router>

Usage
Use this command to display IPv6 routing table information for active routes.

Example
This example displays all active IPv6 routes.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 route
IPv6 Routing Table - 5 entries
Codes: C - connected, S - static
O - OSPF Intra, OI - OSPF Inter, OE1 - OSPF Ext 1, OE2 - OSPF Ext 2
ON1 - OSPF NSSA Ext Type 1, ON2 - OSPF NSSA Ext Type 2
S
C
C
C
S

::/0 [1/0]
via FE80::2D0:B7FF:FE2C:7694,
Vlan 6
3FFE:501:FFFF:100::/64 [0/0]
via ::,
Vlan 6
3FFE:501:FFFF:101::/64 [0/0]
via ::,
Vlan 7
3FFE:501:FFFF:108::/64 [0/0]
via ::,
Vlan 6
3FFE:501:FFFF:109::/64 [1/0]
via 3FFE:501:FFFF:100:200:FF:FE00:A1A1,
via FE80::200:FF:FE00:A1A1,
Vlan 6

Vlan 6

Table 22‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 22-2

22-26

show ipv6 route Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Codes:

Key for the routing protocol codes that might appear in the Codes
column of the routing table output.

Codes column

The code for the routing protocol that created this routing entry.

IPv6 prefix/prefix-length

The IPv6 prefix and prefix length of the destination IPv6 network
corresponding to this route.

[ Preference / Metric ]

The administrative distance (preference) and cost (metric)
associated with this route.

Tag

The decimal value of the tag associated with a redistributed route,
if it is not 0.

via Next-hop

The outgoing router IPv6 address to use when forwarding traffic to
the next router, if any, in the path toward the destination.

Interface

The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the
next destination.

IPv6 Configuration

show ipv6 route preferences

show ipv6 route preferences
This command shows the preference value associated with the type of route.

Syntax
show ipv6 route preference

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#
Router user execution: C3(su)‐>router>

Usage
Lower numbers have a greater preference. A route with a preference of 255 cannot be used to
forward traffic.
The default preference value for static routes can be set with the ipv6 route distance command.
The distance for a specific static route can be set with the ipv6 route command.

Note: The configuration of NSSA preferences is not supported in this release.

Example
The following example shows the output of this command.
C3(su)->router#show ipv6 route preferences
Local
Static
OSPF Intra
OSPF Inter
OSPF Ext T1
OSPF Ext T2
OSPF NSSA T1
OSPF NSSA T2

0
1
8
10
13
150
14
151

Table 22‐3 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 22-3

show ipv6 route preferences Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Local

Preference of directly-connected routes.

Static

Preference of static routes.

OSPF Intra

Preference of routes within the OSPF area.

OSPF Inter

Preference of routes to other OSPF routes that are outside of the
area.

OSPF Ext T1

Preference of OSPF Type-1 external routes.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-27

show ipv6 route summary

Table 22-3

show ipv6 route preferences Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

OSPF Est T2

Preference of OSPF Type-2 external routes.

OSPF NSSA T1

Preference of OSPF NSSA Type 1 routes.

OSPF NSS! T2

Preference of OSPF NSSA Type 2 routes.

show ipv6 route summary
This command displays the summary of the routing table.

Syntax
show ipv6 route summary [all]

Parameters
all

(Optional) Display the count summary for all routes, including best and
non‐best routes.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#
Router user execution: C3(su)‐>router>

Usage
Use the command without parameters to display the count summary for only the best routes. Use
all to display the count summary for all routes, including best and non‐best routes.

Example
This example illustrates the summary information displayed by this command.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 route summary all
IPv6 Routing Table Summary - 6 entries
Connected Routes
Static Routes
OSPF Routes
Intra Area Routes
Inter Area Routes
External Type-1 Routes
External Type-2 Routes
Total routes

3
3
0
0
0
0
0
6

Number of Prefixes:
/0: 1, /64: 5

Table 22‐4 provides an explanation of the command output.

22-28

IPv6 Configuration

show ipv6 traffic

Table 22-4

show ipv6 summary Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Connected Routes

Total number of connected routes in the routing table.

Static Routes

Total number of static routes in the routing table.

OSPF Routes

Total number of routes installed by OSPFv3 protocol.

Number of Prefixes

Summarizes the number of routes with prefixes of different lengths

Total Routes

Total number of routes in the routing table.

show ipv6 traffic
Use this command to show traffic and statistics for IPv6 and ICMPv6.

Syntax
show ipv6 traffic [interface]

Parameters
interface

(Optional) Specifies the interface for which traffic information should be
displayed. Interface can be of the form:
vlan vlan‐id
tunnel tunnel‐id
loopback loop‐id

Defaults
If no interface is specified, information about traffic on all interfaces is displayed.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
Specify a logical, loopback, or tunnel interface to view information about traffic on a specific
interface. If you do not specify an interface, the command displays information about traffic on all
interfaces.

Example
The following example displays the output of this command.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 traffic
IPv6 STATISTICS
Total Datagrams Received..................................
Received Datagrams Locally Delivered......................
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Header Errors.........
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To MTU...................
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To No Route..............
Received Datagrams With Unknown Protocol..................
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Invalid Address.......
Received Datagrams Discarded Due To Truncated Data........
Received Datagrams Discarded Other........................

116
116
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-29

show ipv6 traffic

Received Datagrams Reassembly Required....................
Datagrams Successfully Reassembled........................
Datagrams Failed To Reassemble............................
Datagrams Forwarded.......................................
Datagrams Locally Transmitted.............................
Datagrams Transmit Failed.................................
Datagrams Successfully Fragmented.........................
Datagrams Failed To Fragment..............................
Fragments Created.........................................
Multicast Datagrams Received..............................
Multicast Datagrams Transmitted...........................

0
0
0
0
876
0
0
0
0
17
547

ICMPv6 STATISTICS
Total ICMPv6 Messages Received............................
ICMPv6 Messages With Errors Received......................
ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable Messages Received..........
ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited Administratively Received......
ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages Received....................
ICMPv6 Parameter Problem Messages Received................
ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages Received...................
ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages Received.....................
ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages Received.......................
ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages Received...................
ICMPv6 Router Advertisement Messages Received.............
ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages Received.................
ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement Messages Received...........
ICMPv6 Redirect Messages Received.........................
ICMPv6 Group Membership Query Messages Received...........
ICMPv6 Group Membership Response Messages Received........
ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction Messages Received.......
Total ICMPv6 Messages Transmitted.........................
ICMPv6 Messages Not Transmitted Due To Error..............
ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable Messages Transmitted.......
ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited Administratively Transmitted...
ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages Transmitted.................
ICMPv6 Parameter Problem Messages Transmitted.............
ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages Transmitted................
ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages Transmitted..................
ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages Transmitted....................
ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages Transmitted................
ICMPv6 Router Advertisement Messages Transmitted..........
ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages Transmitted..............
ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement Messages Transmitted........
ICMPv6 Redirect Messages Transmitted......................
ICMPv6 Group Membership Query Messages Transmitted........
ICMPv6 Group Membership Response Messages Transmitted.....
ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction Messages Transmitted....
ICMPv6 Duplicate Address Detects..........................

116
4
0
0
0
0
0
52
0
0
5
31
28
0
0
0
0
876
0
0
0
0
0
0
157
52
0
7
625
27
0
0
8
0
0

Table 22‐5 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 22-5

22-30

show ipv6 traffic Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Total Datagrams Received

Total number of input datagrams received by the interface,
including those received in error.

Received Datagrams Locally Delivered

Total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 userprotocols (including ICMP). This counter increments at the
interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might
not necessarily be the input interface for some of the datagrams.

IPv6 Configuration

show ipv6 traffic

Table 22-5

show ipv6 traffic Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

Received Datagrams Discarded Due
To Header Errors

Number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IPv6
headers, including version number mismatch, other format errors,
hop count exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IPv6
options, etc.

Received Datagrams Discarded Due
To MTU

Number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because
their size exceeded the link MTU of outgoing interface.

Received Datagrams Discarded Due
To No Route

Number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be
found to transmit them to their destination.

Received Datagrams With Unknown
Protocol

Number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but
discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This
counter increments at the interface to which these datagrams
were addressed, which might not be necessarily the input
interface for some of the datagrams.

Received Datagrams Discarded Due
To Invalid Address

Number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address
in their IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to
be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses
(for example, ::0) and unsupported addresses (for example,
addresses with unallocated prefixes). For entities which are not
IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter
includes datagrams discarded because the destination address
was not a local address.

Received Datagrams Discarded Due
To Truncated Data

Number of input datagrams discarded because datagram frame
didn't carry enough data.

Received Datagrams Discarded Other

Number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were
encountered to prevent their continue processing, but which were
discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter
does not include datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.

Received Datagrams Reassembly
Required

Number of IPv6 fragments received which needed to be
reassembled at this interface. Note that this counter increments at
the interface to which these fragments were addressed, which
might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the
fragments.

Datagrams Successfully Reassembled

Number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. Note that
this counter increments at the interface to which these datagrams
were addressed, which might not be necessarily the input
interface for some of the fragments.

Datagrams Failed To Reassemble

Number of failures detected by the IPv6 reassembly algorithm (for
whatever reason: timed out, errors, etc.). Note that this is not
necessarily a count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some
algorithms (notably the algorithm in by combining them as they are
received. This counter increments at the interface to which these
fragments were addressed, which might not be necessarily the
input interface for some of the fragments.

Datagrams Forwarded

Number of output datagrams which this entity received and
forwarded to their final destinations. In entities which do not act as
IPv6 routers, this counter will include only those packets which
were Source-Routed via this entity, and the Source-Route
processing was successful. Note that for a successfully forwarded
datagram the counter of the outgoing interface increments.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-31

show ipv6 traffic

Table 22-5

22-32

show ipv6 traffic Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

Datagrams Locally Transmitted

Total number of IPv6 datagrams which local IPv6 user protocols
(including ICMP) supplied to IPv6 in requests for transmission.
Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in
ipv6IfStatsOutForwDatagrams.

Datagrams Transmit Failed

Number of output IPv6 datagrams for which no problem was
encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but
which were discarded (e.g., for lack of buffer space). Note that this
counter would include datagrams counted in
ipv6IfStatsOutForwDatagrams if any such packets met this
(discretionary) discard criterion.

Datagrams Successfully Fragmented

Number of IPv6 datagrams that have been successfully
fragmented at this output interface.

Datagrams Failed To Fragment

Number of IPv6 datagrams that have been discarded because
they needed to be fragmented at this output interface but could not
be.

Fragments Created

Number of output datagram fragments that have been generated
as a result of fragmentation at this output interface.

Multicast Datagrams Received

Number of multicast packets received by the interface.

Multicast Datagrams Transmitted

Number of multicast packets transmitted by the interface.

Total ICMPv6 Messages Received

Total number of ICMP messages received by the interface which
includes all those counted by ipv6IfIcmpInErrors. Note that this
interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were
addressed which may not be necessarily the input interface for the
messages.

ICMPv6 Messages with Errors
Received

Number of ICMP messages which the interface received but
determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP
checksums, bad length, etc.).

ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable
Messages Received

Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received by
the interface.

ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited
Administratively Received

Number of ICMP destination unreachable/communication
administratively prohibited messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages
Received

Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Parameter Problem
Messages Received

Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Packets Too Big Messages
Received

Number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages
Received

Number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages
Received

Number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages
Received

Number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Router Advertisement
Messages Received

Number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received by the
interface.

IPv6 Configuration

show ipv6 traffic

Table 22-5

show ipv6 traffic Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages
Received

Number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement
Messages Received

Number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received by
the interface.

ICMPv6 Redirect Messages Received

Number of Redirect messages received by the interface.

ICMPv6 Group Membership Query
Messages Received

Number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages
received.

ICMPv6 Group Membership Response
Messages Received

Number of ICMPv6 group Membership Response messages
received.

ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction
Messages Received

Number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages
received.

Total ICMPv6 Messages Transmitted

Total number of ICMP messages which this interface attempted to
send. Note that this counter includes all those counted by
icmpOutErrors.

ICMPv6 Messages Not Transmitted
Due To Error

Number of ICMP messages which this interface did not send due
to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This
value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer
such as the inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram. In
some implementations there may be no types of error which
contribute to this counter's value.

ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable
Messages Transmitted

Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited
Administratively Transmitted

Number of ICMP destination unreachable/communication
administratively prohibited messages sent.

ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages
Transmitted

Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Parameter Problem
Messages Transmitted

Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages
Transmitted

Number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages
Transmitted

Number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent by the
interface.ICMP echo messages sent

ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages
Transmitted

Number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent by the interface.

ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages
Transmitted

Number of ICMP Router Solicitation messages sent by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Router Advertisement
Messages Transmitted

Number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages
Transmitted

Number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement
Messages Transmitted

Number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages sent by the
interface.

ICMPv6 Redirect Messages
Transmitted

Number of Redirect messages sent. For a host, this object will
always be zero, since hosts do not send redirects.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

22-33

clear ipv6 statistics

Table 22-5

show ipv6 traffic Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

ICMPv6 Group Membership Query
Messages Transmitted

Number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages sent.

ICMPv6 Group Membership Response
Messages Transmitted

Number of ICMPv6 group Membership Response messages sent.

ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction
Messages Transmitted

Number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages
sent.

ICMPv6 Duplicate Address Detects

Number of duplicate addresses detected by the interface

clear ipv6 statistics
This command clears IPv6 statistics for all interfaces or a specific interface.

Syntax
clear ipv6 statistics [interface]

Parameters
interface

(Optional) Specifies the interface for statistics should be cleared.
Interface can be of the form:
vlan vlan‐id
tunnel tunnel‐id
loopback loop‐id

Defaults
If no interface is specified, statistics are cleared (reset to 0) for all interfaces.

Mode
Router privileged executionC3(su)‐>router#

Usage
IPv6 statistics are displayed with the show ipv6 traffic command. If no interface is specified, the
counters for all IPv6 traffic statistics are reset to zero when this command is executed.

Example
This example clears the statistics for VLAN 6.
C3(su)->router# clear ipv6 statistics vlan 6

22-34

IPv6 Configuration

23
IPv6 Proxy Routing
This chapter describes the commands used to enable IPv6 proxy routing and the suggested
procedure to configure a mixed C2 and C3 stack to use IPv6 proxy routing.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Overview

23-1

Preparing a Mixed Stack for IPv6 Proxy Routing

23-2

Commands

23-3

Overview
IPv6 proxy routing allows a mixed C2/C3 stack to support some IPv6 routing functionality. When
IPv6 proxy routing is enabled, all the switches in the stack can support IPv6 unicast routing and
IPv6 tunneling. You can configure port‐based and VLAN‐based IPv6 routing interfaces on any C2
or C3 stack unit. There is no change in existing IPv4 routing capabilities.
Since this is a function that exists only in a mixed stack, it is implemented only in the C2 firmware,
release 5.01 and later. For IPv6 proxy routing to exist in the stack, a C3 unit must run as the
manager of the stack. To facilitate this, the stack manager preference of C3 units should be set to a
higher value than C2 units. If a C3 unit is added to an all C2 stack, you must move the manager to
a C3 unit to use this feature.
Multiple C3 units can exist in the mixed stack. All the C3 units in the mixed stack will
independently perform hardware IPv6 routing/tunneling. The manager C3 unit will transparently
do the hardware IPv6 routing/tunneling for all the C2 units.
When IPv6 proxy routing is enabled, the C2 being configured for routing/tunneling (called the
proxy client) is configured to redirect the routed IPV6/Tunneling packets to one of the stacking
ports of the C3 stack manager (called the proxy server). The C2 is only configured if the proxy
feature is already enabled on the stack. It should be noted that only IPv6 packets with a
destination MAC of the router MAC of the system are redirected to the proxy server.
On the proxy server, all incoming packets to the stacking ports with a destination of one of the
stacking ports will be processed through L2 and L3 switching logic. If the destination port is not
one of the stacking ports (not an IPv6 packet), then the incoming packet is forwarded based on
header information.
This feature is disabled by default.
In order to use the OSPF, PIM‐SM, DVMRP, or VRRP protocols, you must have purchased and
installed the C2 advanced routing license.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

23-1

Preparing a Mixed Stack for IPv6 Proxy Routing

Limitations
•

Proxy routing will use up to two masks in the fast forwarding processor associated with each
port involved in routing of IPv6 packets. This will require restrictions on the use of policy
when proxy routing is enabled.

•

All IPv6 packets ingressing or egressing a C2 port must be sent over the stack to the C3 stack
master. Limited stack bandwidth and the amount of IPv6 traffic must be carefully considered
when configuring multiple C2 ports for IPv6 routing.

•

If the stack master moves from a C3 unit to a C2 unit in the stack, proxy routing will no longer
be available. To ensure that proxy routing continues to operate in the event of a failover, C3
units must be configured to be preferred when a new master is elected.

Preparing a Mixed Stack for IPv6 Proxy Routing
At least two C3 switches should be added to a C2 stack, for management redundancy.
As in any mixed C2/C3 mixed stack, the C2 firmware (release 5.01 or later) must be installed on the
C3 switches. Refer to “Issues Related to Mixed Type Stacks” on page 2‐5 for additional
information.
If you are adding the C3 switches to an existing C2 stack, make one of the C3 switches the stack
manager. For example, if the current stack manager is unit 1 and the C3 switch that you want to
become manager is unit 7:
C2(su)->set switch movemenagement 1 7
Moving stack management will unconfigure entire stack including all interfaces.
Are you sure you want to move stack management? (y/n) y

Set the management priority of the C3 switches to be higher than that of the C2 switches. For
example, if your C3 switches are units 7 and 8, and you want the unit 7 C3 switch to always
become the manager and the unit 8 C3 switch to be the backup manager:
C2(su)->set switch 7 priority 15
C2(su)->set switch 8 priority 13

Use the show switch unit command to display switch priority (Admin Management Preference).
C2(su)->show switch 7
Switch

7

Management Status

Management Switch

Hardware Management Preference

Unassigned

Admin Management Preference

15

Switch Type

C3G124-48

Preconfigured Model Identifier

C3G124-48

Plugged-in Model Identifier

C3G124-48

Switch Status

OK

Switch Family

XGS3

Switch Description

23-2

Detected Code Version

05.02.00.0031

Detected Code in Flash

05.02.00.0031

Detected Code in Back Image

05.01.06.0006

Up Time

0 days 0 hrs 13 mins 9 secs

IPv6 Proxy Routing

Commands

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

ipv6 proxy-routing

23-3

show ipv6 proxy-routing

23-3

ipv6 proxy-routing
Use this command to enable or disable IPv6 proxy routing on a mixed C2/C3 stack.

Syntax
ipv6 proxy-routing
no ipv6 proxy-routing

Parameters
None.

Defaults
IPv6 proxy routing is disabled by default.

Mode
Router global configuration: C2(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
IPv6 proxy routing is disabled by default. It must be enabled with this command before the C2
switches in the stack will start redirecting routed IPv6/tunneling packets to the C3 proxy server.
Uses the no form of this command to disable IPv6 proxy routing.

Example
This example enables IPv6 proxy routing.
c2(su)->router
c2(su)->router>enable
c2(su)->router#config
Enter configuration commands:
c2(su)->router(Config)#ipv6 proxy-routing

show ipv6 proxy-routing
Use this command to display the status of IPv6 proxy routing.

Syntax
show ipv6 proxy-routing

Parameters
None.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

23-3

show ipv6 proxy-routing

Defaults
None.

Mode
Any routing mode.

Example
This example shows the output of this command when IPv6 proxy routing is disabled.
c2(su)->router(Config)#show ipv6 proxy-routing
IPv6 Proxy Routing Mode................................... Disable

23-4

IPv6 Proxy Routing

24
DHCPv6 Configuration
* IPv6 Routing License Required *
IPv6 routing must be enabled with a license key in order to use this feature. If you have purchased an IPv6
routing license key, and have enabled routing on the device, you must activate your license as described in
the chapter entitled “Activating Licensed Features” in order to enable the DHCPv6 configuration command
set. If you wish to purchase an IPv6 routing license, contact Enterasys Networks Sales.

The commands described in this chapter perform configuration of the Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) on the SecureStack C3.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Global Configuration Commands

24-2

Address Pool Configuration Commands

24-6

Interface Configuration Commands

24-10

DHCPv6 Show Commands

24-13

Overview
DHCP is generally used between clients (for example, hosts) and servers (for example, routers) for
the purpose of assigning IP addresses, gateways, and other networking definitions such as DNS,
NTP, and/or SIP parameters. However, IPv6 natively provides for auto‐configuration of IP
addresses through the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) and the use of Router
Advertisement messages. Thus, the role of DHCPv6 within the network is different from DHCPv4
in that it is less relied upon for IP address assignment.
DHCPv6 server and client interactions are described by RFC 3315. There are many similarities
between DHCPv6 and DHCPv4 interactions and options, but the messages and option definitions
are sufficiently different. There is no migration or inter‐operability from DHCPv4 to DHCPv6.
DHCPv6 incorporates the notion of the stateless server, where DHCPv6 is not used for IP address
assignment to a client. Instead, it only provides other networking information such as DNS, NTP,
and/or SIP information. The stateless server behavior is described by RFC 3736, which simply
contains descriptions of the portions of RFC 3315 that are necessary for stateless server behavior.
In order for a router to drive a DHCPv6 client to utilize stateless DHCPv6, the “other stateful
configuration” option must be configured for neighbor discovery on the corresponding IPv6
router interface. This in turn causes DHCPv6 clients to send the DHCPv6 “Information Request”
message in response. A DHCPv6 server then responds by providing only networking definitions
such as DNS domain name and server definitions, NTP server definitions, and/or SIP definitions.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

24-1

Global Configuration Commands

RFC 3315 also describes DHCPv6 Relay Agent interactions, which are very much like DHCPv4
Relay Agent. RFC 3046 describes the DHCPv6 Relay Agent Information Option, which employs
very similar capabilities as those described by DHCPv4 Relay Agent Option in RFC 2132.
With the larger address space inherent to IPv6, addresses within a network can be allocated more
effectively in a hierarchical fashion. DHCPv6 introduces the notion of “prefix delegation” as
described in RFC 3633 as a way for routers to centralize and delegate IP address assignment.

Default Conditions
The following table lists the default DHCPv6 conditions.
Condition

Default Value

IPv6 DHCP

Disabled

IPv6 DHCP Relay Agent Information
Option

32

IPv6 DHCP Relay Agent Information
Remote ID Sub-option

1

IPv6 DHCP Preferred Lifetime

2592000 seconds

IPv6 DHCP Valid Lifetime

604800 seconds

Global Configuration Commands
Purpose
These router global configuration mode commands are used to enable DHCPv6 on the router,
configure relay agent global parameters, and enter DHCP pool configuration mode.

Commands
For information about...
ipv6 dhcp enable

24-2

ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-opt

24-3

ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-remote-id-subopt

24-4

ipv6 dhcp pool

24-4

ipv6 dhcp enable
This command enables DHCPv6 on the router.

Syntax
ipv6 dhcp enable
no ipv6 dhcp enable

24-2

Refer to page...

DHCPv6 Configuration

ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-opt

Parameters
None.

Defaults
By default, DHCPv6 is disabled.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
Use this command to enable DHCPv6 on the router. Use the no form of this command to disable
DHCPv6 after it has been enabled.

Example
This example enables DHCPv6.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 dhcp enable

ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-opt
This command configures a number to represent the DHCPv6 Relay Agent Information Option.

Syntax
ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-opt option

Parameters
option

The value of option may range from 32 to 65535. The default value is 32.

Defaults
The default value of the DHCPv6 Relay Agent Information Option is 32.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
The DHCPv6 Relay Agent Information Option allows for various sub‐options to be attached to
messages that are being relayed by the local router to a relay server. The relay server may in turn
use this information in determining an address to assign to a DHCPv6 client. Refer to RFC 3046 for
more information.

Example
This example sets the Relay Agent Information Option value to 82.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-opt 82

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

24-3

ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-remote-id-subopt

ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-remote-id-subopt
This command configures a number to represent the DHCPv6 Relay Agent Remote‐ID sub‐option.

Syntax
ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-remote-id-subopt option

Parameters
option

The value of option may range from 1 to 65535. The default value is 1.

Defaults
The default value of the DHCPv6 Relay Agent Remote‐ID sub‐option is 1.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
This sub‐option may be added by DHCP relay agents which terminate switched or permanent
circuits and have mechanisms to identify the remote host end of the circuit. Refer to RFC 3046 for
more information.

Example
This example sets the Relay Agent Remote‐ID sub‐option value to 2.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 dhcp relay-agent-info-remote-id-subopt 2

ipv6 dhcp pool
This command allows you to enter IPv6 DHCP pool configuration mode for the specified pool
name.

Syntax
ipv6 dhcp pool pool-name
no ipv6 dhcp pool pool-name

Parameters
pool‐name

Specifies the name of the pool to be configured. Pool names must be less
than 31 alpha‐numeric characters.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

24-4

DHCPv6 Configuration

ipv6 dhcp pool

Usage
DHCPv6 pools are used to specify information for the DHCPv6 server to distribute to DHCPv6
clients. These pools are shared between multiple interfaces over which DHCPv6 server
capabilities are configured.
After executing this command and entering pool configuration mode, you can return to global
configuration mode by executing the exit command. Pool configuration commands are described
in the section “Address Pool Configuration Commands” on page 24‐6.
Use the no form of this command to remove a specified pool.

Example
This example enters DHCP pool configuration mode to configure the pool named “PoolA.”
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 dhcp pool PoolA
C3(su)->router(Config-dhcp6s-pool)#

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

24-5

Address Pool Configuration Commands

Address Pool Configuration Commands
Purpose
These DHCP pool configuration mode commands are used to configure address pool parameters.
This information is provided to DHCP clients by the DHCP server.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

domain-name

24-6

dns-server

24-7

prefix-delegation

24-7

exit

24-8

domain-name
This command sets the DNS domain name which is provided to DHCPv6 clients by the DHCPv6
server.

Syntax
domain-name name
no domain-name name

Parameters
name

Specifies the DNS domain name for the pool being configured. The
name can consist of no more than 31 alpha‐numeric characters.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router DHCPv6 pool configuration mode: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐dhcp6s‐pool)#

Usage
A DNS domain name is configured for stateless server support. A DHCPv6 pool can have up to 8
domain names configured for it.
The no form of this command will remove the domain name from the DHCPv6 pool being
configured.

Example
This example specifies the domain name “enterasys.com” for the pool named PoolA.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 dhcp pool PoolA
C3(su)->router(Config-dhcp6s-pool)# domain-name enterasys.com

24-6

DHCPv6 Configuration

dns-server

dns-server
This command sets the IPv6 DNS server address which is provided to DHCPv6 clients by the
DHCPv6 server.

Syntax
dns-server server-address
no dns-server server-address

Parameters
server‐address

The IPv6 address of the DNS server.
This parameter must be in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the
address specified in hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router DHCPv6 pool configuration mode: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐dhcp6s‐pool)#

Usage
A DNS server address is configured for stateless server support. A DHCPv6 pool can have up to 8
DNS server addresses configured for it.
The no form of this command will remove the DHCPv6 server address from the DHCPv6 pool
being configured.

Example
This example configures a DNS server address for the pool named PoolA.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 dhcp pool PoolA
C3(su)->router(Config-dhcp6s-pool)# dns-server 2001:0db8:1234:5678::A

prefix-delegation
This command configures a numeric prefix to be delegated to a specified prefix delegation client.

Syntax
prefix-delegation prefix/prefix-length DUID [name hostname] [valid-lifetime {secs
| infinite}] [preferred-lifetime {secs | infinite}]
no prefix-delegation prefix/prefix-length DUID

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

24-7

exit

Parameters
prefix/prefix‐length

This prefix must be in the form documented in RFC 4291, with the
address specified in hexadecimal using 16‐bit values between colons.
The value of prefix‐length is a decimal number indicating the number of
high‐order contiguous bits of the address that comprise the prefix.

DUID

The DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) of the prefix delegation client, as
described in RFC 3315.

name hostname

(Optional) The name of the prefix delegation client, consisting of up to
31 alpha‐numeric characters. This name is used for logging and/or
tracing only.

valid‐lifetime secs |
infinite

(Optional) The valid lifetime of the prefix, specified as seconds or as
infinite. The value of secs can range from 0 to 4294967295.

preferred‐lifetime
secs | infinite

(Optional) The preferred lifetime of the prefix, specified as seconds or as
infinite. The value of secs can range from 0 to 4294967295.

Defaults
Default value of valid lifetime of prefix: 604,800
Default value of preferred lifetime of prefix: 2,592,000

Mode
Router DHCPv6 pool configuration mode: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐dhcp6s‐pool)#

Usage
Use this command to manually configure an IPv6 address prefix to be delegated to a specific
client, identified by their DHCP unique identifier. Refer to RFC 3633, “IPv6 Prefix Options for
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) version 6,” for more information about prefix
delegation.
Use the no form of this command to remove a configured prefix.

Example
This example configures a prefix to be delegated to the prefix delegation client identified by the
DUID 00:02:00:00:00:11:0A:C0:89:D3:03:00:09:AA. The default lifetime values are used.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 dhcp pool PoolA
C3(su)->router(Config-dhcp6s-pool)# prefix-delegation 2001:0db8:10::/48
00:02:00:00:00:11:0A:C0:89:D3:03:00:09:AA

exit
This command exits from DHCPv5 pool configuration mode and returns to global configuration
mode.

Syntax
exit

Parameters
None.

24-8

DHCPv6 Configuration

exit

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router DHCPv6 pool configuration mode: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐dhcp6s‐pool)#

Example
This example illustrates how to exit DHCPv6 pool configuration mode.
C3(su)->router(Config-dhcp6s-pool)# exit
C3(su)->router(Config)#

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

24-9

Interface Configuration Commands

Interface Configuration Commands
Purpose
These commands are used to configure an interface as either a DHCPv6 server or a DHCPv6 relay
agent.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

ipv6 dhcp server

24-10

ipv6 dhcp relay

24-11

ipv6 dhcp server
This command configures DHCPv6 server functionality on an interface.

Syntax
ipv6 dhcp server pool-name [rapid-commit} [preference pref]
no ipv6 dhcp server pool-name

Parameters
pool‐name

Specifies the pool containing stateless and/or prefix delegation
parameters that should be used by the DHCPv6 server. Refer to
“Address Pool Configuration Commands” on page 24‐6 for the
commands to configure an address pool.

rapid‐commit

(Optional) Specify that the server should use the Rapid Commit option
that allows for an abbreviated exchange between DHCPv6 client and
server. Refer to RFC 3315 for more information.

preference pref

(Optional) Specifies the value of the server’s Preference option. This
value, which can range from 0 to 4,294,967,295, is used by clients to
determine preference among multiple DHCPv6 servers.

Defaults
By default, DHCPv6 functionality is disabled.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Use this command to configure DHCPv6 server parameters when an interface will act as a
DHCPv6 server. Address pools are configured using the commands described in section “Address
Pool Configuration Commands” on page 24‐6.
An interface can be configured as either a DHCPv6 server or a DHCPv6 relay agent, but not both.
Use the no form of this command to remove DHCPv6 server functionality from an interface.

24-10

DHCPv6 Configuration

ipv6 dhcp relay

Example
This example configures routing interface VLAN 7 to be a DHCPv6 server, using the address pool
named PoolA.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 dhcp server PoolA

ipv6 dhcp relay
This command configures an interface for DHCPv6 relay agent functionality.

Syntax
ipv6 dhcp relay {destination dest-addr interface intf | interface intf} [remote-id
{duid-ifid | user-defined-string}]
no ipv6 dhcp relay {destination dest-addr interface intf | interface intf}

Parameters
destination dest‐addr

Specifies the IPv6 address of a DHCPv6 relay server. This IPv6 address
can be a global address, a multicast address, or a link‐local address.
If the address is a multicast or link‐local address, then you must specify
the interface to be used to contact the relay server with the interface
parameter.

interface intf

Specifies the interface to be used to contact the relay server. The
interface is identified by port type.unit number.port number. For
example, ge.3.1.
If destination dest‐addr is not specified, then an interface must be
specified and the DHCPV6‐ALL‐AGENTS multicast address (FF02::1:2)
is used to relay DHCPv6 messages to the relay server.

remote‐id {duid‐ifid | (Optional) Specifies that the Relay Agent Information Option
user‐defined‐string}
Remote‐ID sub‐option is to be added to relayed messages.
Specifying duid‐ifid causes the remote ID to be derived from the relay
agent’s DUID and the relay interface number. Alternatively, you can
specify the remote ID as a user‐defined‐string of alpha‐numeric
characters. Refer to RFC 3046 and RFC 4649 for more information about
the Remote‐ID option.

Defaults
If remote‐id is not specified, the Relay Agent Information Option Remote‐ID sub‐option is not
added to relayed messages.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Use this command to configure a routing interface as a DHCPv6 relay agent.
An interface can be configured as either a DHCPv6 server or a DHCPv6 relay agent, but not both.
Use the no form of this command to remove DHCPv6 relay agent functionality from an interface.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

24-11

ipv6 dhcp relay

Examples
This example configures interface VLAN 8 as a DHCPv6 relay agent that relays DHCPv6
messages to the DHCPv6 server at the global address 2001:0db8:1234:5555::122:10.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 8
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 8))# ipv6 dhcp relay destination
2001:0db8:1234:5555::122:10/64

This example configures interface VLAN 8 as a DHCPv6 relay agent by configuring the interface
through which the relay agent relays messages using the DHCPV6‐ALL‐AGENTS multicast
address.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 8
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 8))# ipv6 dhcp relay interface ge.3.1

24-12

DHCPv6 Configuration

DHCPv6 Show Commands

DHCPv6 Show Commands
Purpose
These commands are used to display DHCPv6 configuration information and statistics, to clear
statistics globally or for a specific interface, and to display address pool and binding information.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show ipv6 dhcp

24-13

show ipv6 dhcp interface

24-14

show ipv6 dhcp statistics

24-16

clear ipv6 dhcp statistics

24-17

show ipv6 dhcp pool

24-18

show ipv6 dhcp binding

24-18

show ipv6 dhcp
This command displays the state of DHCPv6 on the switch and, if DHCPv6 is enabled, the
switch’s DHCP unique identifier (DUID).

Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example illustrates the output of this command when DHCPv6 is enabled on the switch.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 dhcp
DHCPv6 is enabled
Server DUID: 00:01:00:06:90:83:57:c7:00:11:88:56:5d:58

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

24-13

show ipv6 dhcp interface

show ipv6 dhcp interface
This command displays DHCPv6 configuration information or DHCPv6 statistics for the specified
routing interface.

Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp vlan vlan-id [statistics]

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

Specifies the ID of the routing interface for which to display DHCPv6
information.

statistics

(Optional) Specifies that DHCPv6 statistics for the specified interface
should be displayed.

Defaults
If statistics is not specified, configuration information about the interface is displayed.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
When you display DHCPv6 configuration information, the information displayed is different
depending on whether the interface has been configured as a DHCPv6 server or relay agent.

Examples
This example displays DHCPv6 configuration information about VLAN 80, which was configured
as a DHCPv6 server.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 80
IPv6 Interface
Vlan 80
Mode
Server
Pool Name
newpool
Server Preference
5
Option Flags
Rapid Commit

This example displays DHCPv6 configuration information about VLAN 10, which was configured
as a relay agent. The output fields are described in Table 24‐1 on page 24‐15.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 10
IPv6 Interface
Vlan 10
Mode
Relay
Relay Address
5006:4567::100:1
Relay Interface Number
Relay Remote ID
Option Flags

Table 24‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.

24-14

DHCPv6 Configuration

show ipv6 dhcp interface

Table 24-1

Output of show ipv6 dhcp interface Command

Output...

What it displays...

IPv6 Interface

Shows the interface name.

Mode

Shows whether the interface is an IPv6 DHCP relay agent or
server.

Pool Name

Displays when interface is a server. Shows the pool name
specifying information for DHCPv6 server distribution to DHCPv6
clients.

Server Preference

Displays when interface is a server. Shows the preference of the
server.

Option Flags

Displays when interface is a server. Shows whether rapid commit
is enabled.

Relay Address

Displays when interface is a relay agent. Shows the IPv6 address
of the relay server.

Relay Interface Number

Displays when interface is a relay agent. Shows the relay server
interface in port type.unit number.port number format.

Relay Remote ID

Displays when interface is a relay agent. If configured, shows the
contents of the remote-id field for the Remote-ID option.

Option Flags

Displays when interface is a relay agent. Shows whether rapid
commit is configured.

This example displays the DHCPv6 statistics for VLAN 80.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 dhcp interface vlan 80 statistics
DHCPv6 Interface Vlan 80 Statistics
-----------------------------------DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received
DHCPv6 Request Packets Received
DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received
DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received
DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received
DHCPv6 Release Packets Received
DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received
DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets Received
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets Received
DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received
Received DHCPv6 Packets Discarded
Total DHCPv6 Packets Received
DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Transmitted
DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted
DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets Transmitted
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets Transmitted
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets Transmitted
Total DHCPv6 Packets Transmitted

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Table 24‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

24-15

show ipv6 dhcp statistics

show ipv6 dhcp statistics
This command displays IPv6 DHCP statistics for all interfaces.

Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp statistics

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example displays the output of this command.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 dhcp statistics
DHCPv6 Interface Global Statistics
-----------------------------------DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received
DHCPv6 Request Packets Received
DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received
DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received
DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received
DHCPv6 Release Packets Received
DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received
DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets Received
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets Received
DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received
Received DHCPv6 Packets Discarded
Total DHCPv6 Packets Received
DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets Transmitted
DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted
DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets Transmitted
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets Transmitted
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets Transmitted
Total DHCPv6 Packets Transmitted

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Table 24‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 24-2

24-16

Output of show ipv6 dhcp statistics Command

Output...

What it displays...

DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received

Number of solicit received statistics.

DHCPv6 Request Packets Received

Number of request received statistics.

DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received

Number of confirm received statistics.

DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received

Number of renew received statistics.

DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received

Number of rebind received statistics.

DHCPv6 Release Packets Received

Number of release received statistics.

DHCPv6 Configuration

clear ipv6 dhcp statistics

Table 24-2

Output of show ipv6 dhcp statistics Command (Continued)

Output...

What it displays...

DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received

Number of decline received statistics.

DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received

Number of inform received statistics.

DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets
Received

Number of relay forward received statistics.

DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets
Received

Number of relay-reply received statistics.

DHCPv6 Malformed Packets Received

Number of malformed packets statistics.

Received DHCPv6 Packets Discarded

Number of DHCP discarded statistics.

Total DHCPv6 Packets Received

Total number of DHCPv6 received statistics.

DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets
Transmitted

Number of advertise sent statistics.

DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted

Number of reply sent statistics.

DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets
Transmitted

Number of reconfigure sent statistics.

DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets
Transmitted

Number of relay-reply sent statistics.

DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets
Transmitted

Number of relay-forward sent statistics.

Total DHCPv6 Packets Transmitted

Total number of DHCPv6 sent statistics.

clear ipv6 dhcp statistics
This command clears IPv6 DHCP statistics, either all statistics or only for a specific interface.

Syntax
clear ipv6 dhcp statistics [vlan vlan-id]

Parameters
vlan vlan‐id

(Optional) Specifies the interface for which to clear DHCPv6 statistics.

Defaults
If no interface is specified, IPv6 DHCP statistics for all interfaces are cleared.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example clears DHCPv6 statistics for VLAN 80.
C3(su)->router# clear ipv6 dhcp statistics vlan 80

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

24-17

show ipv6 dhcp pool

show ipv6 dhcp pool
This command displays information about a specific configured pool.

Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp pool pool-name

Parameters
pool‐name

The name of the configured address pool for which to display
information.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
The information displayed by this command differs, depending on the configuration parameters
of the pool.

Examples
This example displays the output for PoolA that was not configured for prefix delegation.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 dhcp pool PoolA
DHCPv6 Pool: PoolA
DNS Server: 2001:db8:1234:5678::A
Domain Name: enterasys.com

This example displays the output for PoolB that was configured for prefix delegation.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 dhcp pool PoolB
DHCPv6 Pool: PoolB
Client DUID: 00:02:00:00:00:11:0A:C0:89:D3:03:00:09:AA
Host:
Prefix/Prefix Length: 2001:db8:10::/48
Preferred Lifetime: 2592000
Valid Lifetime: 604800
DNS Server:
Domain Name:

show ipv6 dhcp binding
This command displays information about DHCPv6 bindings.

Syntax
show ipv6 dhcp binding [ipv6-addr]

24-18

DHCPv6 Configuration

show ipv6 dhcp binding

Parameters
ipv6‐addr

(Optional) Specifies the IPv6 address of the DHCP prefix delegation
client for which to display binding information.

Defaults
If no IPv6 address is specified, all bindings are displayed.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example displays all bindings for the client with the IPv6 address FE80::111:FCF1:DEA5:10.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 dhcp binding FE80::111:FCF1:DEA5:10

DHCP Client Address: FE80::111:FCF1:DEA5:10
DUID: 000300010002FCA5DC1C
IA ID: 0x00040001, T1 0, T2 0
Prefix/Prefix Length: 3FFE:C00:C18:11::/68
Prefix Type: IPPD
Expiration: 12320 seconds
Valid Lifetime: 12345
Preferred Lifetime: 180

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

24-19

show ipv6 dhcp binding

24-20

DHCPv6 Configuration

25
OSPFv3 Configuration
* IPv6 Routing License Required *
IPv6 routing must be enabled with a license key in order to use this feature. If you have purchased an IPv6
routing license key, and have enabled routing on the device, you must activate your license as described in
the chapter entitled “Activating Licensed Features” in order to enable the OSPFv3 protocol configuration
command set. If you wish to purchase an IPv6 routing license, contact Enterasys Networks Sales.

The commands in this chapter perform configuration of the OSPFv3 routing protocol on the
SecureStack C3. For information about general IPv6 configuration, refer to Chapter 22, IPv6
Configuration. For information about managing IPv6 host functionality at the switch level, refer
to Chapter 21, IPv6 Management.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Global OSPFv3 Configuration Commands

25-3

Area Configuration Commands

25-10

Interface Configuration Commands

25-21

OSPFv3 Show Commands

25-29

Overview
OSPFv3 is the Open Shortest Path First routing protocol for IPv6. It is similar to OSPFv2 in its
concept of a link state database, intra/inter area and AS external routes and virtual links. OSPFv3
also differs from OSPFv2 in a number of respects:
•

Peering is done via link‐local addresses.

•

The protocol is link‐ rather than network‐centric.

•

Addressing semantics have been moved to leaf LSAs, which eventually will allow its use for
both IPv4 and IPv6.

•

Two new LSAs have been introduced: the link LSA and the intra‐area LSA.

Point‐to‐point links are supported in order to enable operation over tunnels. OSPFv3 views
IPv6‐over‐IPv4 tunnels as a point‐to‐point interface with a link‐local address and possibly, a global
unicast address. OSPFv3 uses the reported MTU for tunnel interfaces.
OSPFv3 supports ECMP routes. OSPFv3 includes NSSA and AS‐external LSA overflow limit
support. RFC 1583 compatibility does not apply to OSPFv3. No OSPFv3 authentication methods
are supported at this time.
LSA formats are changed, and the type 3 and 4 summary LSAs are renamed “inter‐area‐prefix”
and “inter‐area‐router” LSAs. Also note that OSPFv3 LSA identifiers contain no addressing

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-1

Overview

semantics. LSA scope is generalized to link, area, and AS scope. OSPFv3 specifies the processing
of unsupported LSAs. Unsupported LSAs are maintained in the database and flooded according
to scope. In OSPFv3, routers with 100 or more interfaces generate more than one router LSA. A
new link LSA has been created. Addresses in LSAs are specified as [prefix, prefix length].
Area ID and Router ID remain 32 bit identifiers. OSPFv3 identifies Neighbors by router ID instead
of the interface address used in OSPFv2.
Note that both OSPFv3 and OSPFv2 can be enabled and run on the SecureStack C3.

Default Conditions
The following table lists the default OSPFv3 conditions.

25-2

Condition

Default Value

IPv6 OSPF

Disabled

IPv6 OSPF cost

10

IPv6 OSPF dead-interval

40 seconds

IPv6 OSPF hello-interval

10 seconds

IPv6 OSPF mtu-ignore

Enabled

IPv6 OSPF network

Broadcast

IPv6 OSPF priority

1

IPv6 OSPF retransmit-interval

4

IPv6 OSPF transmit-delay

1

Area stub no-summary

Enabled

Area virtual-link dead-interval

40

Area virtual-link hello-interval

10

Area virtual-link retransmit-interval

5

Area virtual-link transmit-delay

1

Default-information originate

Metric — unspecified
Type — 2

Distance OSPF

Intra — 8
Inter — 10
Type-1 — 13
Type-2 — 50

Administrative mode of OSPF

Enabled

Exit-overflow-interval

0

External-lsdb-limit

-1

Maximum-paths

4

Redistribute

Metric — unspecified
Type — 2
Tag — 0

Trapflags

Enabled

OSPFv3 Configuration

Global OSPFv3 Configuration Commands

Global OSPFv3 Configuration Commands
Purpose
These commands are used to configure a router ID for the OSPFv3 router, to enter router OSPFv3
configuration mode, and to configure global OSPFv3 parameters.

Command
For information about...

Refer to page...

ipv6 router id

25-3

ipv6 router ospf

25-4

default-information originate

25-4

default-metric

25-5

distance ospf

25-5

exit-overflow-interval

25-6

external-lsdb-limit

25-7

maximum-paths

25-8

redistribute

25-8

ipv6 router id
This command configures a 32‐bit integer, entered in 32‐bit dotted‐quad notation, used to
uniquely identify this OSPFv3 router.

Syntax
ipv6 router id ip-address

Parameters
ip‐address

Specifies the ID of the OSPFv3 router, in 32‐bit dotted‐quad notation.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
Use this command to configure the OSPFv3 router ID.

Example
This example illustrates configuring the OSPFv3 router ID as 2.2.2.2.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 router id 2.2.2.2
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-3

ipv6 router ospf

ipv6 router ospf
This command enters Router OSPFv3 configuration mode.

Syntax
ipv6 router ospf

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
Use this command to enter OSPFv3 configuration mode so you can configure global OSPFv3
parameters.

Example
This example illustrates entering router OSPFv3 configuration mode.
C3(su)->router(Config)# ipv6 router ospf
C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

default-information originate
This command is used to control the advertisement of default routes.

Syntax
default-information originate [always] [metric value] [metric-type type]
no default-information originate [metric] [metric-type]

Parameters
always

(Optional) Always advertises the default route information.

metric value

(Optional) Specifies the metric of the default route. The metric value can
range from 0 to 16777214.

metric‐type type

(Optional) Specifies the metric type of the default route. The metric type
can be 1, which specifies type 1 external route, or 2, which specifies type
2 external route.

Defaults
A default external route is not generated.
The default metric is unspecified.
The default type is type 2.

25-4

OSPFv3 Configuration

default-metric

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Use this command to generate a default external route into an OSPFv3 routing domain. Use the no
form of this command to stop the generation of a default external route.

Example
This example specifies a metric of 100 for the default route redistributed into the OSPFv3 routing
domain, and an external metric type of 1.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# default-information originate metric 100
metric-type 1

default-metric
This command sets a default metric for routes redistributed from another protocol into OSPFv3.

Syntax
default-metric metric
no default-metric

Parameters
metric

The value of metric can range from 1 to 16777214.

Defaults
No default metric is configured.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

Usage
Use this command to cause the same metric value to be used for all redistributed routes.
Use the no form of this command to remove a configured default metric.

Example
This example configures a metric of 100 to be used for all redistributed routes.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# default-metric 100

distance ospf
This command sets the route preference value of OSPFv3.

Syntax
distance ospf {intra | inter | type1 | type2} preference
no distance ospf {intra | inter | type1 | type2}

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-5

exit-overflow-interval

Parameters
intra

Specifies the preference for intra‐area routes (all routes within an area)

inter

Specifies the preference for inter‐area routes (all routes between areas)

type1

Specifies the preference for Type 1 external routes (routes learned by
redistribution from other routing domains)

type2

Specifies the preference for Type 2external routes (routes learned by
redistribution from other routing domains)

preference

The preference range is from 1 to 255.

Defaults
The default preference values are:
Intra‐area = 8
Inter‐area = 10
Type 1 = 13
Type 2 = 50

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Lower route preference values are preferred when determining the best route. The OSPFv3
specification (RFC 2328) requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned via OSPFv3
in the following order: intra‐area < inter‐area < Type 1 < Type 2.
A route with a preference of 255 cannot be used to forward traffic.
Use the no form of this command to reset the preference values back to the defaults.

Example
The following example set the intra‐area preference to 5.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# distance ospf intra 5

exit-overflow-interval
This command configures the exit overflow interval for OSPFv3.

Syntax
exit-overflow-interval seconds
no exit-overflow-interval

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the range for seconds, which is from 0 to 2147483647.

Defaults
The default interval value is 0.

25-6

OSPFv3 Configuration

external-lsdb-limit

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
The exit overflow interval is the number of seconds after entering Overflow state that a router will
wait before attempting to leave the Overflow State. This allows the router to again originate
non‐default AS‐external‐LSAs. When set to 0, the router will not leave Overflow State until
restarted.
The no form of this command resets the interval to the default of 0.

Example
This example sets the exit overflow interval to 10 seconds.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# exit-overflow-interval 10

external-lsdb-limit
This command configures the external LSDB limit for OSPFv3.

Syntax
external-lsdb-limit limit
no external-lsdb-limit

Parameters
limit

Specifies the limit, which can range from ‐1 to 2147483647. A value of ‐1
means that there is no limit.

Defaults
The default value is ‐1.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
When the number of non‐default AS‐external‐LSAs in a routerʹs link‐state database reaches the
external LSDB limit, the router enters overflow state. The router never holds more than the
external LSDB limit non‐default AS‐external‐LSAs in it database. The external LSDB limit MUST
be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPFv3 backbone and/or any regular OSPFv3 area.
The no form of this command resets the limit to the default value of ‐1, meaning no limit.

Example
This example sets the external LSDB limit to 1000.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# external-lsdb-limit 1000

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-7

maximum-paths

maximum-paths
This command sets the number of paths that OSPFv3 can report for a given destination.

Syntax
maximum-paths maxpaths
no maximum-paths

Parameters
maxpaths

Specifies the value for maxpaths, which can range from 1 to 4.

Defaults
The default value is 4.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Use the no form of this command to reset the maximum number of paths to the default value of 4.

Example
This example sets the maximum number of paths for a given destination to 3.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# maximum-paths 3

redistribute
This command configures the OSPFv3 protocol to allow redistribution of routes from the specified
source protocol/routers.

Syntax
redistribute {connected | static} [metric value] [metric-type type] [tag tag]
no redistribute {connected | static} [metric] [metric-type] [tag]

Parameters
connected | static

Specifies the source protocol to redistribute.

metric value

(Optional) Specifies the route redistribution metric. The metric value can
range from 0 to 16777214.

metric‐type type

(Optional) Specifies the route redistribution metric type. The metric type
can be 1, which specifies type 1 external route, or 2, which specifies type
2 external route.

tag tag

(Optional) Specifies a route redistribution tag. The value of tag can
range from 0 to4294967295.

Defaults
The default values are:

25-8

OSPFv3 Configuration

redistribute

Metric = unspecified
Metric type = Type 2
Tag = 0

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
The no form of this command configures the OSPFv3 protocol to prohibit redistribution of routes
from the specified source protocol/routers.

Example
This example configures route redistribution of static routes and applies a metric of 10
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# redistribute static metric 10

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-9

Area Configuration Commands

Area Configuration Commands
Purpose
These commands are used to configure area parameters.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

area default-cost

25-10

area nssa

25-11

area nssa default-info-originate

25-12

area nssa no-redistribute

25-12

area nssa no-summary

25-13

area nssa translator role

25-14

area nssa translator-stab-intv

25-14

area range

25-15

area stub

25-16

area stub no-summary

25-17

area virtual-link

25-17

area virtual-link dead-interval

25-18

area virtual-link hello-interval

25-19

area virtual-link retransmit-interval

25-19

area virtual-link transmit-delay

25-20

area default-cost
This command configures the default cost for the summary default route generated by the area
border router into the stub or NSSA area.

Syntax
area areaid default-cost cost
no area areaid default-cost

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

cost

Specifies a cost, which can range between 1 and 16777215.

Defaults
None.

25-10

OSPFv3 Configuration

area nssa

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

Usage
Use this command to set the cost value for the default route that is sent into a stub area or NSSA
by an Area Border Router (ABR). The no form of this command removes the cost value from the
summary route that is sent into the stub area.

Example
This example sets the default route cost to 50 for area 20.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 default-cost 50

area nssa
This command configures the specified area to function as a not so stubby area (NSSA).

Syntax
area areaid nssa
no area areaid nssa

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
An NSSA allows some external routes represented by external Link State Advertisements (LSAs)
to be imported into it. This is in contrast to a stub area that does not allow any external routes.
External routes that are not imported into an NSSA can be represented by means of a default
route. This configuration is used when an OSPFv3 internetwork is connected to multiple non‐
OSPF routing domains.
The no form of this command changes the NSSA back to a plain area.

Example
This example shows how to configure area 20 as an NSSA.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 nssa

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-11

area nssa default-info-originate

area nssa default-info-originate
This command configures the metric value and type for the default route advertised into the
NSSA.

Syntax
area areaid nssa default-info-originate [metric] [comparable | non-comparable]
no area areaid nssa default-info-originate

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

metric

(Optional) Specifies the metric of the default route, in the range of 1 to
16777214.

comparable |
non‐comparable

(Optional) Specifies the metric type:
•

comparable — nssa‐external 1

•

non‐comparable — nssa‐external 2

Defaults
Default metric value is 10.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

Usage
Use this command to allow a default route to be advertised within the area. This option should be
configured only on area border routers (ABRs).
Use the no form of this command to prevent a default route to be advertised within the area.

Example
This example configures NSSA area 20 to advertise a default route.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 nssa default-info-originate

area nssa no-redistribute
This command configures the NSSA area border router to not redistribute learned external routes
to the NSSA.

Syntax
area areaid no-redistribute
no area areaid no-redistribute

Parameters
areaid

25-12

OSPFv3 Configuration

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

area nssa no-summary

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

Usage
Use this command to prevent redistribution of learned external routes to the NSSA by this area
border router (ABR). Use the no form of this command to enable redistribution of learned external
routes to the NSSA.

Example
This example configures the router to not redistribute learned external routes into NSSA 20.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 no-redistribute

area nssa no-summary
This command configures the NSSA area border router to not advertise summary routes into the
NSSA.

Syntax
area areaid nssa no-summary
no area areaid nssa no-summary

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Use this command to prevent the advertising of summary routes into the specified NSSA by this
router. Use the no form of this command to enable advertising of summary routes into the NSSA.

Example
This example the router to not advertise summary routes into NSSA 20.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 nssa no-summary

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-13

area nssa translator role

area nssa translator role
This command configures the translator role of the router.

Syntax
area areaid nssa translator-role {always | candidate}
no area areaid nssa translator-role

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

always

Specifies that the router will always assume the role of the translator the
instant is becomes a border router.

candidate

Specifies that the router will participate in the translator election
process when it becomes a border router.

Defaults
By default, the translator role is disabled.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
The NSSA Translator Role specifies whether or not an NSSA router will unconditionally translate
Type‐7 LSAs to Type‐5 LSAs when acting as an NSSA border router.
When the always parameter is specified with this command, the router will always translate Type‐
7 LSAs, regardless of the translator state of other NSSA border routers. When the candidate
parameter is specified, the NSSA router will participate in the translator election process
described in RFC 3101, “The OSPF Not‐So‐Stubby Area (NSSA) Option.”
Use the no form of this command to return the configured translator role to the default of
disabled.

Example
This example configures the router to always assume the translator role when it becomes an area
border router for NSSA 20.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 nssa translator-role always

area nssa translator-stab-intv
This command configures the translator stability interval of the NSSA.

Syntax
area areaid translator-stab-intv interval
no area areaid translator-stab-intv

25-14

OSPFv3 Configuration

area range

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

interval

Specifies the stability interval in seconds. The value of interval can range
from 0 to 3600 seconds.

Defaults
The default interval is 40 seconds.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)->router(Config-router)#

Usage
The stability interval is the period of time that an elected translator continues to perform its duties
after it determines that its translator status has been deposed by another router.

Example
This example sets the translator stability interval to 60 seconds for NSSA 20.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 nssa translator-stab-intv 60

area range
This command creates an address range for the specified NSSA.

Syntax
area areaid range ipv6-prefix/prefix-length {summarylink | nssaexternallink}
[advertise | not-advertise]
no area areaid range ipv6-prefix/prefix-length

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

ipv6‐prefix/prefix‐length Specifies IPv6 prefix and the length of the IPv6 prefix for the address
range. The prefix must be specified in hexadecimal using 16‐bit values
between colons.
The value of prefix‐length is a decimal number indicating the number of
high‐order contiguous bits that comprise the prefix.
summarylink

Specifies that route summarization should be based on summary LSAs.

nssaexternallink

Specifies that route summarization should be based on external LSAs
Type 7.

advertise |
not‐advertise

(Optional) Specifies whether or not the routes should be advertised. If
neither parameter is specifies, the default is advertise.

Defaults
Area address ranges are not configured by default.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-15

area stub

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Address ranges control the advertisement of routes across area boundaries. Routing information
is summarized, or aggregated, at area boundaries. External to the area, at most a single route is
advertised (via an inter‐area‐prefix‐LSA) for each address range. A route is advertised if and only
if the address range’s status is set to advertise. The default condition is to advertise.
For ABRs configured for NSSA, route summarization/aggregation can be implemented based on
LSA type — either summary LSAs (specified with the summarylink parameter), or NSSA external
LSAs Type 7 (specified with the nssaexternallink parameter).
You can configure multiple address ranges with this command.
Use the no form of this command to remove a configured address range.

Example
This example configures an address range to be consolidated and advertised based on summary
LSAs.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 range 3FFe:501::/32 summarylink

area stub
This command creates a stub area for the specified area ID.

Syntax
area areaid stub
no area areaid stub

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
A stub area is characterized by the fact that AS external LSAs are not propagated into the area.
Removing AS external LSAs and summary LSAs can significantly reduce the link state database of
routers within the stub area.
Use the no form of the command to delete a stub area.

25-16

OSPFv3 Configuration

area stub no-summary

Example
This example creates a stub area with the ID of 30.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 30 stub

area stub no-summary
This command disables the import of summary LSAs into the specified stub area.

Syntax
area areaid stub no-summary
no area areaid stub no-summary

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Use the no form of this command to set the summary LSA import mode to the default for the
specified stub area.

Example
The example disables the import of summary LSAs into stub area 30.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 30 stub no-summary

area virtual-link
This command creates the OSPFv3 virtual interface for the specified area and neighbor.

Syntax
area areaid virtual-link neighborid
no area areaid virtual-link neighborid

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

neighborid

Specifies the virtual link neighbor by means of its router ID. The router
ID must be entered in 32‐bit dotted‐quad notation.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-17

area virtual-link dead-interval

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
The virtual link neighbor is identified by its router ID. Use the no form of this command to delete
the configured OSPFv3 virtual interface identified by area and neighbor.

Example
This example creates a virtual interface for area 20 and the neighbor with router ID 2.2.2.2.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 virtual-link 2.2.2.2

area virtual-link dead-interval
This command configures the dead interval for the specified OSPFv3 virtual interface.

Syntax
area areaid virtual-link neighborid dead-interval seconds
no area areaid virtual-link neighborid dead-interval

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

neighborid

Specifies the virtual link neighbor by means of its router ID. The router
ID must be entered in 32‐bit dotted‐quad notation.

seconds

Specifies the value of the dead interval in seconds. The range is from 1
to 65535 seconds.

Defaults
The default dead interval is 40 seconds.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Use the no form of this command to return a configured value to the default of 40 seconds.

Example
This example configures a dead interval of 60 seconds for the specified virtual interface.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 virtual-link 2.2.2.2 dead-interval 60

25-18

OSPFv3 Configuration

area virtual-link hello-interval

area virtual-link hello-interval
This command configures the hello interval for the specified OSPFv3 virtual interface.

Syntax
area areaid virtual-link neighborid hello-interval seconds
no area areaid virtual-link neighborid hello-interval

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

neighborid

Specifies the virtual link neighbor by means of its router ID. The router
ID must be entered in 32‐bit dotted‐quad notation.

seconds

Specifies the value of the hello interval in seconds. The range is from 1
to 65535 seconds.

Defaults
The default hello interval is 10 seconds.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Use the no form of this command to return a configured value to the default value of 10 seconds.

Example
This example configures a hello interval of 30 seconds for the specified OSPFv3 virtual interface.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 virtual-link 2.2.2.2 hello-interval 30

area virtual-link retransmit-interval
This command configures the retransmit interval for the specified OSPFv3 virtual interface.

Syntax
area areaid virtual-link neighborid retransmit-interval seconds
no area areaid virtual-link neighborid retransmit-interval

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

neighborid

Specifies the virtual link neighbor by means of its router ID. The router
ID must be entered in 32‐bit dotted‐quad notation.

seconds

Specifies the value of the retransmit interval in seconds. The range is
from 1 to 3600 seconds.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-19

area virtual-link transmit-delay

Defaults
The default retransmit interval is 5 seconds.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Use the no form of this command to return a configured value to the default value of 5 seconds.

Example
This example sets the retransmit interval to 10 seconds for the specified OSPFv3 virtual interface.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 virtual-link 2.2.2.2 retransmit-interval
10

area virtual-link transmit-delay
This command configures the transmit delay for the specified OSPFv3 virtual interface.

Syntax
area areaid virtual-link neighborid transmit-delay seconds
no area areaid virtual-link neighborid transmit-delay

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

neighborid

Specifies the virtual link neighbor by means of its router ID. The router
ID must be entered in 32‐bit dotted‐quad notation.

seconds

Specifies the value of the transmit delay in seconds. The range is from 1
to 3600 seconds.

Defaults
The default transmit delay is 1 second.

Mode
Router OSPFv3 configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐router)#

Usage
Use the no form of this command to reset the transmit delay to the default of 1 second.

Example
This example sets the transmit delay to 2 seconds for the specified OSPFv3 virtual interface.
C3(su)->router(Config-router)# area 20 virtual-link 2.2.2.2 transmit-delay 2

25-20

OSPFv3 Configuration

Interface Configuration Commands

Interface Configuration Commands
Purpose
These commands can be used to configure OSPF v3 routing interface parameters.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

ipv6 ospf enable

25-21

ipv6 ospf areaid

25-22

ipv6 ospf cost

25-22

ipv6 ospf dead-interval

25-23

ipv6 ospf hello-interval

25-24

ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore

25-24

ipv6 ospf network

25-25

ipv6 ospf priority

25-26

ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval

25-26

ipv6 ospf transmit-delay

25-27

ipv6 ospf enable
This command enables OSPFv3 on a router interface or a loopback interface.

Syntax
ipv6 ospf enable
no ipv6 ospf enable

Parameters
None.

Defaults
OSPFv3 is disabled by default.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Use this command to enable OSPFv3 on a router VLAN interface or on a loopback interface. Use
the no form of this command to disable OSPFv3 on an interface.
Note: In order for OSPFv3 to run on an interface, IPv6 must be explicitly enabled on the interface
using the ipv6 enable command.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-21

ipv6 ospf areaid

Example
This example enters router interface configuration mode for VLAN 7 and then enables OSPFv3 on
the interface.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf enable

ipv6 ospf areaid
This command sets the OSPFv3 area to which the router interface belongs.

Syntax
ipv6 ospf areaid areaid
no ipv6 ospf areaid areaid

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in either 32‐bit dotted‐quad format or as a decimal
number between 0 and 4294967295.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
The area ID uniquely identifies the area to which the interface connects. Assigning an area ID
which does not exist on an interface causes the area to be created with default values.
Use the no form of this command to remove an area from the interface.

Examples
This example assigns VLAN 7 to area 20, expressed in dotted‐quad format.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf areaid 0.0.0.20

This example assigns VLAN 7 to area 20, expressed as a decimal number.
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf areaid 20

ipv6 ospf cost
This command configures the cost of sending a packet on an OSPFv3 interface.

Syntax
ipv6 ospf cost cost
no ipv6 ospf cost cost

25-22

OSPFv3 Configuration

ipv6 ospf dead-interval

Parameters
cost

Specifies the cost of sending a packet on this interface. The value can
range from 1 to 65535.

Defaults
The default cost is 10.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Use this command to explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on the interface being
configured for OSPFv3. Use the no form of this command to return the cost to the default value of
10.

Example
This example configures the cost for router interface VLAN 7 to 100.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf cost 100

ipv6 ospf dead-interval
This command sets the OSPFv3 dead interval for the router interface.

Syntax
ipv6 ospf dead-interval seconds
no ipv6 ospf dead-interval seconds

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the OSPFv3 dead interval in seconds. The value can range
from 1 to 2147483647 seconds.

Defaults
The default dead interval value is 40 seconds.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
The OSPFv3 dead interval is the length of time in seconds that a router’s Hello packets have not
been seen before its neighbor routers declare that the router is down. The value for the dead
interval must be the same for all routers attached to a common network, and should be some
multiple of the hello interval.
Use the no form of this command to return the dead interval to the default value of 40 seconds.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-23

ipv6 ospf hello-interval

Example
This example sets the dead interval for router interface VLAN 7 to 60 seconds.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf dead-interval 60

ipv6 ospf hello-interval
This command sets the OSPFv3 hello interval for the router interface.

Syntax
ipv6 ospf hello-interval seconds
no ipv6 ospf hello-interval seconds

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the OSPFv3 hello interval in seconds. The value can range
from 1 to 65535 seconds.

Defaults
The default hello interval is 10 seconds.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Use this command to specify the interval between hello packets that OSPFv3 sends on the
interface being configured. The shorter the hello interval, the faster topological changes will be
detected, but more routing traffic will ensue. The hello interval must be the same for all routers
attached to a common network.
Use the no form of this command to return the hello interval to the default value of 10 seconds.

Example
This example sets the hello interval for router interface VLAN 7 to 20 seconds.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf hello-interval 20

ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore
This command disables OSPFv3 maximum transmission unit (MTU) mismatch detection.

Syntax
ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore
no ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore

Parameters
None.

25-24

OSPFv3 Configuration

ipv6 ospf network

Defaults
By default, MTU mismatch detection is enabled.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
OSPF Database Description packets specify the size of the largest IP packet that can be sent
without fragmentation on the interface. When a router receives a Database Description packet, it
examines the MTU advertised by the neighbor. By default, if the MTU is larger than the router can
accept, the Database Description packet is rejected and the OSPF adjacency is not established.
Use this command to prevent the OSPFv3 router process from checking whether neighbors are
using the same maximum transmission unit (MTU) on a common interface when exchanging
Database Description packets.
Use the no form of this command to enable MTU mismatch detection.

Example
This example disables MTU mismatch detection on router interface VLAN 7.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore

ipv6 ospf network
This command changes the default OSPFv3 network type for the router interface.

Syntax
ipv6 ospf network {broadcast | point-to-point}
no ipv6 ospf network {broadcast | point-to-point}

Parameters
broadcast

Sets the network type to broadcast.

point‐to‐point

Sets the network type to point‐to‐point.

Defaults
Default network type is broadcast.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
Normally, the network type is determined from the physical IP network type. By default, all
Ethernet networks are OSPFv3 type broadcast. Similarly, tunnel interfaces default to point‐to‐
point. When an Ethernet port is used as a single large bandwidth IP network between two routers,
the network type can be point‐to‐point since there are only two routers. Using point‐to‐point as
the network type eliminates the overhead of the OSPFv3 designated router election. It is normally
not useful to set a tunnel to OSPFv3 network type broadcast.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-25

ipv6 ospf priority

Use the no form of this command to set the network type to the default.

Example
This example sets the network type to point‐to‐point for router interface VLAN 7.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf network point-to-point

ipv6 ospf priority
This command sets the OSPFv3 priority for the router interface. Router priority helps determine
the designated router for an OSPFv3 link.

Syntax
ipv6 ospf priority priority
no ipv6 ospf priority

Parameters
priority

Specifies the priority value, which can range from 0 to 255.

Defaults
Default priority value is 1.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
When two routers on the same network attempt to become the designated router, the one with the
higher router priority takes precedence. If there is a tie, the router with the higher router ID takes
precedence. A router with a router priority set to zero is ineligible to become the designated router
or backup designated router.
Use the no form of this command to return priority value to the default of 1.

Example
This example sets the priority for router interface VLAN 7 to 5.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf priority 5

ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval
This command configures the OSPFv3 retransmit interval for the router interface.

Syntax
ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval seconds
no ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval

25-26

OSPFv3 Configuration

ipv6 ospf transmit-delay

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the retransmit interval value, which can range from 0 to 3600
seconds.

Defaults
Default value is 4 seconds.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
The retransmit interval is the number of seconds between link‐state advertisement
retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This value is also used when
retransmitting database description and link‐state request packets.
Use the no form of this command to reset the retransmit interval to the default value of 4 seconds.

Example
This example sets the retransmit interval to 10 seconds for router interface VLAN 7.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval 10

ipv6 ospf transmit-delay
This command sets the OSPFv3 transmit delay for the router interface.

Syntax
ipv6 ospf transmit-delay seconds
no ipv6 ospf transmit-delay

Parameters
seconds

Specifies the transmit delay, which can range from 1 to 3600 seconds.

Defaults
Default value is 1 second.

Mode
Router interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan 1))#

Usage
The transmit delay, specified in seconds, sets the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit
a link state update packet over this interface.
Use the no form of this command to return the transmit delay to the default value of 1 seconds.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-27

ipv6 ospf transmit-delay

Example
This example sets the transmit delay value to 4 seconds for router interface VLAN 7.
C3(su)->router(Config)# interface vlan 7
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 7))# ipv6 ospf transmit-delay 4

25-28

OSPFv3 Configuration

OSPFv3 Show Commands

OSPFv3 Show Commands
Purpose
These commands are used to display OSPFv3 information and statistics.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show ipv6 ospf

25-29

show ipv6 ospf area

25-31

show ipv6 ospf abr

25-32

show ipv6 ospf asbr

25-33

show ipv6 ospf database

25-34

show ipv6 ospf interface

25-38

show ipv6 ospf interface stats

25-40

show ipv6 ospf neighbor

25-42

show ipv6 ospf range

25-44

show ipv6 ospf stub table

25-45

show ipv6 ospf virtual-link

25-46

show ipv6 ospf
This command displays OSPFv3 router information.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example shows how to display OSPFv3 router information.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 ospf
Router ID
OSPF Admin Mode
ASBR Mode

2.2.2.2
Enable
Enable

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-29

show ipv6 ospf

ABR Status
Exit Overflow Interval
External LSA Count
External LSA Checksum
New LSAs Originated
LSAs Received
External LSDB Limit
Default Metric
Maximum Paths
Default Route Advertise
Always
Metric
Metric Type

Enable
0
0
0
89
177
No Limit
Not Configured
4
Disabled
FALSE
External Type 2

Table 25‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.
Note: Some of the information in Table 25-1 displays only if you enable OSPFv3 and configure
certain features.

Table 25-1

25-30

show ipv6 ospf Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Router ID

A 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format identifying the router,
about which information is displayed. This is a configured value.

OSPF Admin Mode

Whether the administrative mode of OSPF in the router is enabled
or disabled. This is a configured value.

ASBR Mode

Whether the ASBR mode is enabled or disabled. Enable implies
that the router is an autonomous system border router. Router
automatically becomes an ASBR when it is configured to
redistribute routes learnt from other protocol. The possible values
for the ASBR status is enabled (if the router is configured to redistribute routes learnt by other protocols) or disabled (if the router
is not configured for the same).

ABR Status

Whether the router is an OSPF Area Border Router.

Exit Overflow Interval

The number of seconds that, after entering Overflow State, a
router will attempt to leave Overflow State.

External LSA Count

The number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements in
the link-state database.

External LSA Checksum

The sum of the LS checksums of external link-state
advertisements contained in the link-state database.

New LSAs Originated

The number of new link-state advertisements that have been
originated.

LSAs Received

The number of link-state advertisements received determined to
be new instantiations.

External LSDB Limit

The maximum number of non-default AS-external-LSAs entries
that can be stored in the link-state database.

Default Metric

Default value for redistributed routes.

Maximum Paths

The maximum number of paths that OSPF can report for a given
destination.

Default Route Advertise

Whether the default routes received from other source protocols
are advertised or not.

OSPFv3 Configuration

show ipv6 ospf area

Table 25-1

show ipv6 ospf Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Always

Whether default routes are always advertised.

Metric

The metric for the advertised default routes. If the metric is not
configured, this field is blank.

Metric Type

Whether the routes are External Type 1 or External Type 2.

show ipv6 ospf area
This command displays information about the specified OSPFv3 area.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf area areaid

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example shows how to display OSPFv3 information for area 20.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 ospf area 20
AreaID
External Routing
Spf Runs
Area Border Router Count
Area LSA Count
Area LSA Checksum
Stub Mode

0.0.0.20
Import NSSAs
7
0
5
188094
Disable

Table 25‐2 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 25-2

show ipv6 ospf area Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

AreaID

Area ID of the requested OSPFv3 area.

External Routing

The external routing capabilities for this area.

Spf Runs

Number of times that the intra-area route table has been
calculated using this area's link-state database.

Area Border Router Count

Total number of area border routers reachable within this area.

Area LSA Count

Total number of link-state advertisements in this area's link-state
database, excluding AS External LSAs.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-31

show ipv6 ospf abr

Table 25-2

show ipv6 ospf area Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

Area LSA Checksum

Number representing the Area LSA Checksum for the specified
Area ID excluding the external (LS type 5) link-state
advertisements.

Stub Mode

Whether the specified area is a stub area or not. The possible
values are enabled and disabled. This is a configured value.

Import Summary LSAs

Whether to import summary LSAs (enabled or disabled).

OSPF Stub Metric Value

Metric value of the stub area. This field displays only if the area is
a configured as a stub area.

show ipv6 ospf abr
This command displays OSPFv3 routes to reach area border routers.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf abr

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example shows how to display OSPFv3 area border router information.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 ospf abr
Type
Router Id
Cost
Area ID

Next Hop

Next Hop
Intf
----- -------------- ---- ------------ -------------------------------- -------INTRA 82.15.0.1
10
0.0.0.10
FE80::200:2DFF:FEE6:FB6B
Vlan 48

Table 25‐3 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 25-3

show ipv6 ospf abr Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Type

The type of the route to the destination, which is one of the
following values:
INTRA — Intra-area route
INTER — Inter-area route

25-32

Router ID

Router ID of the destination.

Cost

Cost of using this route.

Area ID

The area ID of the area from which this route is learned.

OSPFv3 Configuration

show ipv6 ospf asbr

Table 25-3

show ipv6 ospf abr Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

Next Hop Intf

Address of the next hop toward the destination.

Next Hop Intf

The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the
next hop.

show ipv6 ospf asbr
This command displays OSPFv3 routes to reach AS border routers.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf asbr

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example shows how to display OSPFv3 AS border router routes.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 ospf asbr
Type

Router Id

Cost

Area ID

Next Hop

Next Hop
Intf
----- -------------- ---- ------------ -------------------------------- -------INTER 1.11.1.1
5
0.0.0.20
FE80::100:1111:FEE6:FB7A
Vlan 35

Table 25‐4 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 25-4

show ipv6 ospf asbr Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Type

The type of the route to the destination, which is one of the
following values:
INTRA — Intra-area route
INTER — Inter-area route

Router ID

Router ID of the destination.

Cost

Cost of using this route.

Area ID

The area ID of the area from which this route is learned.

Next Hop

Address of the next hop toward the destination.

Next Hop Intf

The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the
next hop.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-33

show ipv6 ospf database

show ipv6 ospf database
This command displays information about the link state database when OSPFv3 is enabled.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf [areaid] database [{external | inter-area {prefix | router} | link |
network | nssa-external | prefix | router | unknown {area | as | link}}]
[lsid] [{adv-router [rtrid] | self-originate | database-summary}]

Parameters
areaid

(Optional) Display database information about a specific area. Enter the
area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal value.

external

(Optional) Display external LSAs.

inter‐area

(Optional) Display inter‐area LSAs.

prefix

(Optional) Display intra‐area Prefix LSAs.

router

(Optional) Display router LSAs.

link

(Optional) Display link LSAs.

network

(Optional) Display network LSAs.

nssa‐external

(Optional) Display NSSA external LSAs.

unknown
{area | as | link}

(Optional) Display unknown area, unknown AS, or unknown link
LSAs.

lsid

(Optional) Specifies the link state ID.

adv‐router [rtrid]

(Optional) Display the LSAs that are restricted by the advertising router.
Optionally, specify the router by its router ID (rtrid), entered as a 32‐bit
dotted‐quad value.

self‐originate

(Optional) Display LSAs that are self‐originated.

database‐summary

(Optional) Displays the number of each type of LSA in the database and
the total number of LSAs in the database.

Defaults
If no parameters are entered, LSA headers for all areas are displayed.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
If you execute this command without any parameters, LSA headers for all areas are displayed. Use
the areaid parameter to display database information for a specific area. The other optional
parameters can be used to specify a particular type of link state advertisement to display.

Examples
This example displays the output when an area ID is specified.
C3(su)->router#show ipv6 ospf 10 database
Inter Network States (Area 0.0.0.10)

25-34

OSPFv3 Configuration

show ipv6 ospf database

Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------2.2.2.2
1 153
80000026 A8F2
Intra Prefix

States (Area 0.0.0.10)

Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------2.2.2.2
0 506
80000027 DD00
AS External States
Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------2.2.2.2
1 342
8000002C 0C20

This example shows partial output of this command when no parameters are specified.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 ospf database
router links States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Adv Router
Link Id
--------------- --------------2.2.2.2
0
3.3.3.3
0

Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
----- -------- ---- ------- ------1288
80000273 32A9 V6E--R- ---EB
1098
80000251 7D11 V6E--RD -----

network links States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Adv Router
Link Id
Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
--------------- --------------- ----- -------- ---- ------- ------3.3.3.3
3 1098
800001DB 8A7F V6E--RD
Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Adv Router
Link Id
--------------- --------------3.3.3.3
3
2.2.2.2
426
--More-- or (q)uit

Age
Sequence Csum Options Rtr Opt
----- -------- ---- ------- ------1098
800001DA 0F95 V6E--RD
1288
80000213 DFC0 V6E--R-

This example illustrates the output of this command using the adv‐router parameter.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 ospf database external adv-router
AS External States
LS Age: 930
LS Type: AS-External-LSA
LS Id: 1
Advertising Router: 2.2.2.2
LS Seq Number: 0x80000006
Checksum: 0x3e4c
Length: 36
Options:(E-Bit)

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-35

show ipv6 ospf database

Metric Type: 2
Metric:20
IPv6 Prefix: 2301::/64 (None)

Table 25‐5 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 25-5

show ipv6 ospf database Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Link Id

Number that uniquely identifies an LSA that a router originates
from all other self originated LSAs of the same LS type.

Advertising Router

The Advertising Router. Is a 32 bit dotted decimal number
representing the LSDB interface.

LS Age

Number representing the age of the link state advertisement in
seconds.

LS Type

The format and function of the specified LSA.

LS Seq Number

Number that represents which LSA is more recent.

Checksum

Total number LSA checksum.

Lenght

Size of the LSA in bytes.

Options

Option bits in LSA header. Refer to section A.2 in RFC 2740 for
more information. Possible values are:
V6 — indicates status of V6 bit. If this bit is clear, the router/link
should be excluded from IPv6 routing calculations.
E — indicates status of E-bit. This bit describes the way ASexternal-LSAs are flooded.
M — indicates the status of MC-bit. This bit describes whether IP
multicast datagrams are forwarded.
N — indicates the status of N-bit. This bit describes the handling of
Type-7 LSAs.
R — indicates the status of R-bit. This bit (the `Router' bit)
indicates whether the originator is an active router.
D — indicates the status of DC-bit. This bit describes the router's
handling of demand circuits.

Metric Type

Whether the route specified is external type 1 or external type 2.

Metric

The cost of using the specified router link.

IPv6 Prefix

The IPv6 route with prefix mask being displayed.

This example shows how to display OSPF database summary information.
C3(su)->router#show ipv6 ospf database database-summary
OSPF Router with ID (2.2.2.2)

Area 0.0.0.0 Database Summary
Router
Network
Inter-area Prefix
Inter-area Router
Type-7 Ext
Link
25-36

OSPFv3 Configuration

2
1
1
0
0
2

show ipv6 ospf database

Intra-area Prefix
Link Unknown
Area Unknown
AS Unknown
AS Unknown
Self Originated Type-7
Subtotal

2
0
0
0
0
0
8

Area 0.0.0.10 Database Summary
Router
Network
Inter-area Prefix
Inter-area Router
Type-7 Ext
Link
Intra-area Prefix
Link Unknown
Area Unknown
AS Unknown
AS Unknown
Self Originated Type-7
Subtotal

2
1
51
0
0
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
58

Router database summary
Router
Network
Inter-area Prefix
Inter-area Router
Type-7 Ext
Link
Intra-area Prefix
Link Unknown
Area Unknown
AS Unknown
Type-5 Ext
Self-Originated Type-5 Ext
Total

4
2
52
0
0
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
66

Table 25‐6 provides an explanation of the database‐summary command output.
Table 25-6

show ipv6 ospf database database-summary Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Router

Total number of router LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state database.

Network

Total number of network LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state database.

Inter-area Prefix

Total number of inter-area prefix LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state
database.

Inter-area Router

Total number of inter-area router LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state
database.

Type-7 Ext

Total number of NSSA external LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state
database.

Link

Total number of link LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state database.

Intra-area Prefix

Total number of intra-area prefix LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state
database.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-37

show ipv6 ospf interface

Table 25-6

show ipv6 ospf database database-summary Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

Link Unknown

Total number of link-source unknown LSAs in the OSPFv3 link
state database.

Area Unknown

Total number of area unknown LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state
database.

AS Unknown

Total number of as unknown LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state
database.

Self Originated Type-7

Total number of self-originated NSSA External Link-State
Advertisements in the OSPFv3 link state database.

Type-5 Ext

Total number of AS external LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state
database.

Self-Originated Type-5

Total number of self originated AS external LSAs in the OSPFv3
link state database.

Total

Total number of router LSAs in the OSPFv3 link state database.

show ipv6 ospf interface
This command displays information about OSPFv3 interfaces.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf interface {vlan vlanid | tunnel tunnelid | loopback loopid}

Parameters
vlan vlanid

Specifies the VLAN interface to display information about.

tunnel tunnelid

Specifies the tunnel interface to display information about.

loopback loopid

Specifies the loopback interface to display information about.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Examples
This example displays information about OSPFv3 routing interface VLAN 80.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 ospf interface vlan 80
IPv6 Address
FE80::211:88FF:FE56:5D8F
ifIndex
430
OSPF Admin Mode
Enable
OSPF Area ID
0.0.0.20
Router Priority
1
Retransmit Interval
5
Hello Interval
10
Dead Interval
40
LSA Ack Interval
1
Iftransit Delay Interval
1

25-38

OSPFv3 Configuration

show ipv6 ospf interface

Authentication Type
Metric Cost
OSPF Mtu-ignore
OSPF Interface Type
State
Designated Router
Backup Designated Router
Number of Link Events

None
10 (computed)
Disable
broadcast
designated-router
2.2.2.2
0.0.0.0
2

This example displays information about tunnel interface 0. Table 25‐7 on page 25‐39 explains the
content of the output fields.
C3(su)->router#show ipv6 ospf interface tunnel 0
IPv6 Address
FE80::5000:2
ifIndex
456
OSPF Admin Mode
Enable
OSPF Area ID
0.0.0.0
Router Priority
1
Retransmit Interval
5
Hello Interval
10
Dead Interval
40
LSA Ack Interval
1
Iftransit Delay Interval
1
Authentication Type
None
Metric Cost
1 (computed)
OSPF Mtu-ignore
Disable
OSPF Interface Type
point-to-point
State
point-to-point
Designated Router
0.0.0.0
Backup Designated Router
0.0.0.0
Number of Link Events
1

Table 25‐7 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 25-7

show ipv6 ospf interface Command Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

IPv6 Address

The IPv6 address of the interface.

ifIndex

The interface index number associated with the interface.

OSPF Admin Mode

Whether the admin mode is enabled or disabled.

OSPF Area ID

The area ID associated with this interface.

Router Priority

The router priority. The router priority determines which router is
the designated router.

Retransmit Interval

The frequency, in seconds, at which the interface sends LSA.

Hello Interval

The frequency, in seconds, at which the interface sends Hello
packets.

Dead Interval

The amount of time, in seconds, the interface waits before
assuming a neighbor is down.

LSA Ack Interval

The amount of time, in seconds, the interface waits before sending
an LSA acknowledgement after receiving an LSA.

Iftransit Delay Interval

The number of seconds the interface adds to the age of LSA
packets before transmission.

Authentication Type

The type of authentication the interface performs on LSAs it
receives.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-39

show ipv6 ospf interface stats

Table 25-7

show ipv6 ospf interface Command Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

Metric Cost

The priority of the path. Low costs have a higher priority than high
costs.

OSPF MTU-ignore

Whether to ignore MTU mismatches in database descriptor
packets sent from neighboring routers. The following information
only displays if OSPF is initialized on the interface:

OSPF Interface Type

Broadcast LANs, such as Ethernet and IEEE 802.5, take the value
broadcast. Tunnel interfaces take the value point-to-point.

State

The OSPF Interface States are: down, loopback, waiting, point-topoint, designated router, and backup designated router.

Designated Router

The router ID representing the designated router.

Backup Designated Router

The router ID representing the backup designated router.

Number of Link Events

The number of link events.

show ipv6 ospf interface stats
This command displays statistics for a specific interface. Statistics are displayed only if OSPFv3 is
enabled.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf interface stats vlan vlanid

Parameters
vlan vlanid

Specifies the VLAN interface for which to display statistics.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example shows how to display statistics for VLAN 80.
C3(su)->router>show ipv6 ospf interface stats vlan 80
OSPFv3 Area ID
0.0.0.20
Spf Runs
7
Area Border Router Count
0
AS Border Router Count
0
Area LSA Count
5
IPv6 Address
FE80::211:88FF:FE56:5D8F/128
OSPF Interface Events
2
Virtual Events
0
Neighbor Events
0
External LSA Count
1
LSAs Received
1903
Originate New LSAs
4198
Sent Packets
1053

25-40

OSPFv3 Configuration

show ipv6 ospf interface stats

Received Packets
Discards
Bad Version
Virtual Link Not Found
Area Mismatch
Invalid Destination Address
No Neighbor at Source Address
Invalid OSPF Packet Type
Packet Type
-------------------Hello
Database Description
LS Request
LS Update
LS Acknowledgement

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Sent
---------1053
0
0
0
0

Received
---------0
0
0
0
0

Table 25‐8 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 25-8

show ipv6 ospf interface stats Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

OSPFv3 Area ID

The area ID of this OSPFv3 interface.

Spf Runs

Is the number of times that the intra-area route table has been
calculated using this area's link-state database.

Area Border Router Count

The total number of area border routers reachable within this area.

AS Border Router Count

The total number of AS border routers reachable within this area.

Area LSA Count

Total number of link-state advertisements in this area’s link-state
database, excluding AS External LSAs.

IPv6 Address

The IP address associated with this OSPFv3 interface.

OSPF Interface Events

The number of times the specified OSPFv3 interface has changed
its state, or an error has occurred.

Virtual Events

The number of state changes or errors that occurred on this virtual
link.

Neighbor Events

The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state,
or an error has occurred.

External LSA Count

Total number of AS External link-state advertisements in this
area’s link-state database.

LSAs Received

Number of link-state advertisements received.

Originate New LSAs

Number of LSAs originated.

Sent Packets

The number of OSPFv3 packets sent on the interface.

Received Packets

The number of OSPFv3 packets received on the interface.

Discards

Number of packets discarded.

Bad Version

Number of bad version packets received.

Virtual Link Not Found

Number of virtual link not found packets received.

Area Mismatch

Number of area mismatch packets received.

Invalid Destination Address

Number of invalid destination address packets received.

No Neighbor at Source Address

Number of no neighbor at source address packets received.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-41

show ipv6 ospf neighbor

Table 25-8

show ipv6 ospf interface stats Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Invalid OSPF Packet Type

Number of packets received with invalid packet type.

Packet Type / Sent / Received

Columns listing packet types and number of packets sent and
received per type.

show ipv6 ospf neighbor
This command displays information about OSPFv3 neighbors.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf neighbor [interface {vlan vlanid | tunnel tunnelid}] [neighborid]

Parameters
interface

(Optional) Restricts the output display to a specific interface.

vlan vlanid

Specify the VLAN interface to display information about.

tunnel tunnelid

Specify the tunnel interface to display

neighborid

(Optional) Specify the neighbor by its router ID, specified in 32‐bit
dotted quad format.

Defaults
When no parameters are specified, information about all neighbors is displayed.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Usage
If you do not specify a neighbor router ID, the output displays summary information in a table. If
you specify an interface or tunnel, only the information for that interface or tunnel displays.
When you specify a neighbor by router ID, detailed information about the neighbor displays.
The information is displayed only if OSPFv3 is enabled and the interface has a neighbor.

Examples
This example illustrates the summary information displayed when no neighbor is specified.
C3(su)->router#show ipv6 ospf neighbor
Router ID
---------------3.3.3.3
6.6.6.6

Priority
-------1
1

Intf
ID
----3
456

Interface

State

----------Vlan 36
Tunnel 0

---------------Full/DR
Full/PtP

Table 25‐9 provides an explanation of the command output.

25-42

OSPFv3 Configuration

Dead
Time
---32
31

show ipv6 ospf neighbor

Table 25-9

show ipv6 ospf neighbor Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Router ID

The 4-digit dotted-decimal number of the neighbor router.

Priority

OSPFv3 priority for the specified interface. The priority of an
interface is a priority integer from 0 to 255. A value of '0' indicates
that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on
this network.

Intf ID

Interface ID of the neighbor.

Interface

Interface of the local router.

State

State of the neighboring routers. Possible values are:
• Down- initial state of the neighbor conversation - no recent
information has been received from the neighbor.
• Attempt - no recent information has been received from the
neighbor but a more concerted effort should be made to
contact the neighbor.
• Init - a Hello packet has recently been seen from the neighbor,
but bidirectional communication has not yet been established.
• 2 way - communication between the two routers is bidirectional.
This is the final state between two routers, both of which are
non-designated routers or back-up designated routers.
• Exchange start - the first step in creating an adjacency between
the two neighboring routers, the goal is to decide which router
is the master and to decide upon the initial DD sequence
number.
• Exchange - the router is describing its entire link state database
by sending Database Description packets to the neighbor.
• Loading - Link State Request packets are sent to the neighbor
asking for the more recent LSAs that have been discovered
(but not yet received) in the Exchange state.
• Full - the neighboring routers are fully adjacent and they will
now appear in router-LSAs and network-LSAs.

Dead Time

Amount of time, in seconds, to wait before the router assumes the
neighbor is unreachable.

This example displays the output of this command when a neighbor is specified.
C3(su)->router#show ipv6 ospf neighbor 8.8.8.8
Interface
Area Id
Options
Router Priority
Dead timer due in (secs)
State
Events
Retransmission Queue Length

Vlan 45
0.0.0.30
0x2
128
33
Full/DR
6
0

Table 25‐10 provides an explanation of the command output.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-43

show ipv6 ospf range

Table 25-10

show ipv6 ospf neighbor routerid Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Interface

Interface of the local router.

Area ID

OSPFv3 area ID associated with the interface.

Options

An integer value that indicates the optional OSPFv3 capabilities
supported by the neighbor. These are listed in its Hello packets.
This enables received Hello Packets to be rejected (that is,
neighbor relationships will not even start to form) if there is a
mismatch in certain crucial OSPFv3 capabilities.

Router Priority

Router priority for the specified interface.

Dead Timer Due

Amount of time, in seconds, to wait before the router assumes the
neighbor is unreachable.

State

State of the neighboring routers.

Events

Number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state, or
an error has occurred.

Retransmission Queue Length

Integer representing the current length of the retransmission
queue of the specified neighbor router Id of the specified interface.

show ipv6 ospf range
This command displays information about the area ranges for the specified area.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf range areaid

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example displays range information for area 20.
C3(su)->router#show ipv6 ospf range 20
Area ID
IPv6 Prefix/Prefix Length
Lsdb Type
Advertisement
--------------- ------------------------- --------------- ------------0.0.0.20
3345:1234::/64
Summary Link
Enabled

Table 25‐11 provides an explanation of the command output.

25-44

OSPFv3 Configuration

show ipv6 ospf stub table

Table 25-11

show ipv6 ospf range Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Area ID

The area ID of the requested OSPFv3 area.

IPv6 Prefix/Prefix Length

An IPv6 prefix and length which represents a configured area
range.

Lsdb Type

The type of link advertisement associated with this area range.

Advertisement

The status of the advertisement: enabled or disabled.

show ipv6 ospf stub table
This command displays the OSPFv3 stub table, if OSPFv3 is initialized on the switch.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf stub table

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This example displays the OSPFv3 stub table information.
C3(su)->router# show ipv6 ospf stub table
AreaId
TypeofService Metric Val Import SummaryLSA
---------------- ------------- ---------- ----------------0.0.0.20
Normal
1
Enable

Table 25‐12 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 25-12

show ipv6 ospf stub table Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Area ID

A 32-bit identifier for the created stub area.

Type of Service

Type of service associated with the stub metric. For this release,
Normal TOS is the only supported type.

Metric Val

The metric value is applied based on the TOS. It defaults to the
least metric of the type of service among the interfaces to other
areas. The OSPFv3 cost for a route is a function of the metric
value.

Import Summary LSA

Controls the import of summary LSAs into stub areas.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-45

show ipv6 ospf virtual-link

show ipv6 ospf virtual-link
This command displays the OSPFv3 virtual interface information for a specific area and neighbor.

Syntax
show ipv6 ospf virtual-link areaid neighborid

Parameters
areaid

Specifies the area ID in IP address format (dotted‐quad) or as a decimal
value.

neighborid

Specifies the neighbor by its router ID, specified in 32‐bit dotted quad
format.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Router privileged execution: C3(su)‐>router#

Example
This information displays virtual link information for area ID 10 and the neighbor with router ID
of 3.3.3.3.
C3(su)->router(Config)#show ipv6 ospf virtual-link 10 3.3.3.3
Area ID
10
Neighbor IP Address
3.3.3.3
Hello Interval
10
Dead Interval
40
Iftransit Delay Interval
1
Retransmit Interval
5
State
DOWN
Metric
0
Neighbor State
DOWN

Table 25‐13 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 25-13

25-46

show ipv6 ospf virtual-link Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Area ID

The area id of the requested OSPFv3 area.

Neighbor Router ID

The input neighbor Router ID.

Hello Interval

The configured hello interval for the OSPFv3 virtual interface.

Dead Interval

The configured dead interval for the OSPFv3 virtual interface.

Iftransit Delay Interval

The configured transit delay for the OSPFv3 virtual interface.

Retransmit Interval

The configured retransmit interval for the OSPFv3 virtual
interface.

State

The OSPFv3 Interface States are: down, loopback, waiting, pointto-point, designated router, and backup designated router. This is
the state of the OSPFv3 interface.

OSPFv3 Configuration

show ipv6 ospf virtual-link

Table 25-13

show ipv6 ospf virtual-link Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

Metric

The metric of this virtual link.

Neighbor State

The state of the neighbor. States are: down, loopback, waiting,
point-to-point, designated router, and backup designated router.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

25-47

show ipv6 ospf virtual-link

25-48

OSPFv3 Configuration

26
Authentication and Authorization
Configuration
This chapter describes the following authentication and authorization commands and how to use
them. For information about using the TACACS+ authentication method for management, see
Chapter 27, TACACS+ Configuration.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Overview of Authentication and Authorization Methods

26-1

Setting the Authentication Login Method

26-4

Configuring RADIUS

26-6

Configuring 802.1X Authentication

26-15

Configuring MAC Authentication

26-25

Configuring Multiple Authentication Methods

26-37

Configuring User + IP Phone Authentication

26-48

Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580)

26-49

Configuring Policy Maptable Response

26-52

Configuring MAC Locking

26-57

Configuring Port Web Authentication (PWA)

26-68

Configuring Secure Shell (SSH)

26-80

Configuring Access Lists

26-82

Note: An Enterasys Networks Feature Guide document containing an in-depth discussion of
authentication and authorization configuration is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/

Overview of Authentication and Authorization Methods
The following methods are available for controlling which users are allowed to access, monitor,
and manage the switch.
•

Login user accounts and passwords – used to log in to the CLI via a Telnet connection or local
COM port connection. For details, refer to “Setting User Accounts and Passwords” on
page 3‐2.

•

Host Access Control Authentication (HACA) – authenticates user access of Telnet
management, console local management and WebView via a central RADIUS Client/Server or

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-1

Overview of Authentication and Authorization Methods

TACACS+ application. When RADIUS or TACACS+ is enabled, this essentially overrides login
user accounts. When HACA is active per a valid RADIUS or TACACS+ configuration, the user
names and passwords used to access the switch via Telnet, SSH, WebView, and COM ports
will be validated against the configured RADIUS server. Only in the case of a RADIUS
timeout will those credentials be compared against credentials locally configured on the
switch. For details, refer to “Configuring RADIUS” on page 26‐6.
•

SNMP user or community names – allows access to the SecureStack C3 switch via a network
SNMP management application. To access the switch, you must enter an SNMP user or
community name string. The level of management access is dependent on the associated
access policy. For details, refer to Chapter 8.

•

802.1X Port Based Network Access Control using EAPOL (Extensible Authentication Protocol)
– provides a mechanism via a RADIUS server for administrators to securely authenticate and
grant appropriate access to end user devices communicating with SecureStack C3 ports. For
details on using CLI commands to configure 802.1X, refer to “Configuring 802.1X
Authentication” on page 26‐15.
Note: To configure EAP pass-through, which allows client authentication packets to be forwarded
through the switch to an upstream device, 802.1X authentication must be globally disabled with the
set dot1x command.

•

MAC Authentication – provides a mechanism for administrators to securely authenticate
source MAC addresses and grant appropriate access to end user devices communicating with
SecureStack C3 ports. For details, refer to “Configuring MAC Authentication” on page 26‐25.

•

Multiple Authentication Methods – allows users to authenticate using multiple methods of
authentication on the same port. For details, refer to “Configuring Multiple Authentication
Methods” on page 26‐37.

•

Multi‐User Authentication —allows multiple users and devices on the same port to
authenticate using any supported authentication method. Each user or device can be mapped
to the same or different roles using Enterasys policy for access control, VLAN authorization,
traffic rate limiting, and quality of service. This is the most flexible and preferred method to
use for VoIP (PC daisy chained to a phone). For details, refer to “About Multi‐User
Authentication” on page 26‐37. Refer to Appendix A, Policy and Authentication Capacities,
for a listing of the number of users per port supported by the SecureStack C3.

•

User + IP Phone (Legacy feature) — The User + IP Phone authentication feature provides
legacy support for authentication and authorization of two devices, specifically a PC cascaded
with a VLAN‐tagging IP phone, on a single port on the switch. The IP phone must
authenticate using MAC or 802.1X authentication, but the user may authenticate by any
method. This feature allows both the user’s PC and IP phone to simultaneously authenticate
on a single port and each receive a unique level of network access. For details, refer to
“Configuring User + IP Phone Authentication” on page 26‐48.
Note: User + IP Phone authentication is a legacy feature that should only be used if you have
already implemented User + IP Phone in your network with switches that do not support true
multi-user authentication.

26-2

•

RFC 3580 tunnel attributes provide a mechanism to contain an 802.1X, MAC, or PWA
authenticated user to a VLAN regardless of the PVID. This feature dynamically assigns a
VLAN based on the RFC 3580 tunnel attributes returned in the RADIUS accept message. Refer
to “Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580)” on page 26‐49.

•

Configuring Policy Maptable Response — allows you to define how the system should handle
allowing an authenticated user onto a port based on the contents of the RADIUS server
Access‐Accept reply. There are three possible response settings: tunnel mode, policy mode, or

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

Overview of Authentication and Authorization Methods

both tunnel and policy, also known as hybrid authentication mode. Refer to “Configuring
Policy Maptable Response” on page 26‐52.
•

MAC Locking – locks a port to one or more MAC addresses, preventing the use of
unauthorized devices and MAC spoofing on the port For details, refer to “Configuring MAC
Locking” on page 26‐57.

•

Port Web Authentication (PWA) – passes all login information from the end station to a
RADIUS server for authentication before allowing a user to access the network . PWA is an
alternative to 802.1X and MAC authentication. For details, refer to “Configuring Port Web
Authentication (PWA)” on page 26‐68.

•

Secure Shell (SSH) – provides secure Telnet. For details, refer to “Configuring Secure Shell
(SSH)” on page 26‐80.

•

IP Access Lists (ACLs) – permits or denies access to routing interfaces based on protocol and
inbound and/or outbound IP address restrictions configured in access lists. For details, refer to
“Configuring Access Lists” on page 26‐82.

•

TACACS+ (Terminal Access Controller Access‐Control System Plus) – a security protocol
developed by Cisco Systems that can be used as an alternative to the standard RADIUS
security protocol (RFC 2865). TACACS+ runs over TCP and encrypts the body of each packet.
Refer to Chapter 27, TACACS+ Configuration, for information about the commands used to
configure TACACS+.

RADIUS Filter-ID Attribute and Dynamic Policy Profile Assignment
If you configure an authentication method that requires communication with a RADIUS server,
you can use the RADIUS Filter‐ID attribute to dynamically assign a policy profile and/or
management level to authenticating users and/or devices.
The RADIUS Filter‐ID attribute is simply a string that is formatted in the RADIUS Access‐Accept
packet sent back from the RADIUS server to the switch during the authentication process.
Each user can be configured in the RADIUS server database with a RADIUS Filter‐ID attribute
that specifies the name of the policy profile and/or management level the user should be assigned
upon successful authentication. During the authentication process, when the RADIUS server
returns a RADIUS Access‐Accept message that includes a Filter‐ID matching a policy profile name
configured on the switch, the switch then dynamically applies the policy profile to the physical
port the user/device is authenticating on.

Filter-ID Attribute Formats
Enterasys Networkssupports two Filter‐ID formats — “decorated” and “undecorated.” The
decorated format has three forms:
•

To specify the policy profile to assign to the authenticating user (network access
authentication):
Enterasys:version=1:policy=string
where string specifies the policy profile name. Policy profile names are case‐sensitive.

•

To specify a management level (management access authentication):
Enterasys:version=1:mgmt=level
where level indicates the management level, either ro, rw, or su.

•

To specify both management level and policy profile:
Enterasys:version=1:mgmt=level:policy=string

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-3

Setting the Authentication Login Method

The undecorated format is simply a string that specifies a policy profile name. The undecorated
format cannot be used for management access authentication.
Decorated Filter‐IDs are processed first by the switch. If no decorated Filter‐IDs are found, then
undecorated Filter‐IDs are processed. If multiple Filter‐IDs are found that contain conflicting
values, a Syslog message is generated.

Setting the Authentication Login Method
Purpose
To configure the authentication login method to be used for management.

Commands
The commands used to configure the authentication login method are listed below.
For information about...

Refer to page...

show authentication login

26-4

set authentication login

26-4

clear authentication login

26-5

show authentication login
Use this command to display the current authentication login method for management.

Syntax
show authentication login

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Only.

Example
This example shows how to display the current authentication login method.
C3(rw)->show authentication login
Current authentication login is any

set authentication login
Use this command to set the authentication login method.

26-4

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

clear authentication login

Syntax
set authentication login {any | local | radius | tacacs}

Parameters
any

Specifies that the authentication protocol will be selected using the
following precedence order:
•

TACACS+

•

RADIUS

•

Local

local

Specifies that the local network password settings will be used for
authentication login.

radius

Specifies that RADIUS will be used for authentication login.

tacacs

Specifies that TACACS+ will be used for authentication login.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Example
This example shows how to set the authentication login method to use the local password settings:
C3(rw)->set authentication login local

clear authentication login
Use this command to reset the authentication login method to the default setting of “any”.

Syntax
clear authentication login

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the authentication login method.
C3(rw)->clear authentication login

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-5

Configuring RADIUS

Configuring RADIUS
Purpose
To perform the following:
•

Review the RADIUS client/server configuration on the switch.

•

Enable or disable the RADIUS client.

•

Set local and remote login options.

•

Set primary and secondary server parameters, including IP address, timeout period,
authentication realm, and number of user login attempts allowed.

•

Reset RADIUS server settings to default values.

•

Configure a RADIUS accounting server.

•

Configure the interface used for the source IP address of the RADIUS application when
generating RADIUS packets.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show radius

26-6

set radius

26-7

clear radius

26-9

show radius accounting

26-10

set radius accounting

26-10

clear radius accounting

26-11

show radius interface

26-12

set radius interface

26-12

clear radius interface

26-13

show radius
Use this command to display the current RADIUS client/server configuration.

Syntax
show radius [status | retries | timeout | server [index | all]]

Parameters

26-6

status

(Optional) Displays the RADIUS server’s enable status.

retries

(Optional) Displays the number of retry attempts before the RADIUS server
times out.

timeout

(Optional) Displays the maximum amount of time (in seconds) to establish
contact with the RADIUS server before retry attempts begin.

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set radius

server

(Optional) Displays RADIUS server configuration information.

index | all

For use with the server parameter to show server configuration for all
servers or a specific RADIUS server as defined by an index.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all RADIUS configuration information will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display RADIUS configuration information:
C3(rw)->show radius
RADIUS status:
Enabled
RADIUS retries:
3
RADIUS timeout:
20 seconds
RADIUS Server
IP Address
----------------------10
172.16.20.10

Auth-Port
--------1812

Realm-Type
----------------management-access

Table 26‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 26-1

show radius Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

RADIUS status

Whether RADIUS is enabled or disabled.

RADIUS retries

Number of retry attempts before the RADIUS server times out. The default value of 3
can be reset using the set radius command as described in “set radius” on
page 26-7.

RADIUS timeout

Maximum amount of time (in seconds) to establish contact with the RADIUS server
before retry attempts begin. The default value of 20 can be reset using the set
radius command as described in “set radius” on page 26-7.

RADIUS Server

RADIUS server’s index number, IP address, and UDP authentication port.

Realm-Type

Realm defines who has to go through the RADIUS server for authentication.
• Management-access: This means that anyone trying to access the switch (Telnet,
SSH, Local Management) has to authenticate through the RADIUS server.
• Network-access: This means that all the users have to authenticate to a RADIUS
server before they are allowed access to the network.
• Any-access: Means that both Management-access and Network-access have
been enabled.

set radius
Use this command to enable, disable, or configure RADIUS authentication.

Syntax
set radius {enable | disable} | {retries number-of-retries} | {timeout timeout} |
{server index ip-address port [secret-value] [realm {management-access | any |
network-access}} | {realm {management-access | any | network-access} {index| all}}

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-7

set radius

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables the RADIUS client.

retries number‐of‐
retries

Specifies the number of retry attempts before the RADIUS server times out.
Valid values are from 0 to 10. Default is 3.

timeout timeout

Specifies the maximum amount of time (in seconds) to establish contact
with the RADIUS server before retry attempts begin. Valid values are from 1
to 30. Default is 20 seconds.

server index
ip_address port

Specifies the index number, IP address and the UDP authentication port for
the RADIUS server.

secret‐value

(Optional) Specifies an encryption key to be used for authentication
between the RADIUS client and server.

realm
management‐
access | any |
network‐access

Realm allows you to define who has to go through the RADIUS server for
authentication.
•

management‐access: This means that anyone trying to access the switch
(Telnet, SSH, Local Management) has to authenticate through the
RADIUS server.

•

network‐access: This means that all the users have to authenticate to a
RADIUS server before they are allowed access to the network.

•

any: Means that both management‐access and network‐access have
been enabled.

Note: If the management-access or any access realm has been configured, the
local “admin” account is disabled for access to the switch using the console, Telnet,
or Local Management. Only the network-access realm allows access to the local
“admin” account.

index | all

Applies the realm setting to a specific server or to all servers.

Defaults
If secret‐value is not specified, none will be applied.
If realm is not specified, the any access realm will be used.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The SecureStack C3 device allows up to 10 RADIUS servers to be configured, with up to two
servers active at any given time.
The RADIUS client can only be enabled on the switch once a RADIUS server is online, and its IP
address(es) has been configured with the same password the RADIUS client will use.

Examples
This example shows how to enable the RADIUS client for authenticating with RADIUS server 1 at
IP address 192.168.6.203, UDP authentication port 1812, and an authentication password of
“pwsecret.” As previously noted, the “server secret” password entered here must match that
already configured as the Read‐Write (rw) password on the RADIUS server:
C3(su)->set radius server 1 192.168.6.203 1812 pwsecret

26-8

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

clear radius

This example shows how to set the RADIUS timeout to 5 seconds:
C3(su)->set radius timeout 5

This example shows how to set RADIUS retries to 10:
C3(su)->set radius retries 10

This example shows how to force any management‐access to the switch (Telnet, web, SSH) to
authenticate through a RADIUS server. The all parameter at the end of the command means that
any of the defined RADIUS servers can be used for this Authentication.
C3(rw)->set radius realm management-access all

clear radius
Use this command to clear RADIUS server settings.

Syntax
clear radius [retries] | [timeout] | [server {index | all | realm {index | all}}]

Parameters
retries

Resets the maximum number of attempts a user can contact the RADIUS
server before timing out to 3.

timeout

Resets the maximum amount of time to establish contact with the RADIUS
server before timing out to 20 seconds.

server

Deletes server settings.

index | all

For use with the server parameter to clear the server configuration for all
servers or a specific RADIUS server as defined by an index.

realm

Resets the realm setting for all servers or a specific RADIUS server as
defined by an index.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Defaults
None.

Examples
This example shows how to clear all settings on all RADIUS servers:
C3(su)->clear radius server all

This example shows how to reset the RADIUS timeout to the default value of 20 seconds:
C3(su)->clear radius timeout

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-9

show radius accounting

show radius accounting
Use this command to display the RADIUS accounting configuration. This transmits accounting
information between a network access server and a shared accounting server.

Syntax
show radius accounting [server] | [counter ip-address] | [retries] | [timeout]

Parameters
server

(Optional) Displays one or all RADIUS accounting server configurations.

counter ip‐address

(Optional) Displays counters for a RADIUS accounting server.

retries

(Optional) Displays the maximum number of attempts to contact the
RADIUS accounting server before timing out.

timeout

(Optional) Displays the maximum amount of time before timing out.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all RADIUS accounting configuration information will be
displayed.

Example
This example shows how to display RADIUS accounting configuration information. In this case,
RADIUS accounting is not currently enabled and global default settings have not been changed.
One server has been configured.
For details on enabling and configuring RADIUS accounting, refer to “set radius accounting” on
page 26‐10:
C3(ro)->show radius accounting
RADIUS accounting status:
Disabled
RADIUS Acct Server IP Address Acct-Port Retries Timeout Status
------------------ ---------- --------- ------- ------- -----1
172.16.2.10 1856
3
20
Disabled

set radius accounting
Use this command to configure RADIUS accounting.

Syntax
set radius accounting {[enable | disable] [retries retries] [timeout timeout]
[server ip_address port [server-secret]

Parameters

26-10

enable | disable

Enables or disables the RADIUS accounting client.

retries retries

Sets the maximum number of attempts to contact a specified RADIUS
accounting server before timing out. Valid retry values are 0 ‐ 10.

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

clear radius accounting

timeout timeout

Sets the maximum amount of time (in seconds) to establish contact with a
specified RADIUS accounting server before timing out. Valid timeout
values are 1 ‐ 30.

server ip_address
port server‐secret

Specifies the accounting server’s:
•

IP address

•

UDP authentication port (0 ‐ 65535)

•

server‐secret (Read‐Write password to access this accounting server.
Device will prompt for this entry upon creating a server instance, as
shown in the example below.)

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Defaults
None.

Examples
This example shows how to enable the RADIUS accounting client for authenticating with the
accounting server at IP address 10.2.4.12, UDP authentication port 1800. As previously noted, the
“server secret” password entered here must match that already configured as the Read‐Write (rw)
password on the RADIUS accounting server:
C3(su)->set radius accounting server 10.2.4.12 1800
Enter secret:
Re-enter secret:

This example shows how to set the RADIUS accounting timeout to 30 seconds:
C3(su)->set radius accounting timeout 30

This example shows how to set RADIUS accounting retries to 10:
C3(su)->set radius accounting retries 10

clear radius accounting
Use this command to clear RADIUS accounting configuration settings.

Syntax
clear radius accounting {server ip-address | retries | timeout | counter}

Parameters
server ip‐address

Clears the configuration on one or more accounting servers.

retries

Resets the retries to the default value of 3.

timeout

Resets the timeout to 5 seconds.

counter

Clears counters.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-11

show radius interface

Defaults
None.

Example
This example shows how to reset the RADIUS accounting timeout to 5 seconds.
C3(su)->clear radius accounting timeout

show radius interface
Use this command to display the interface used for the source IP address of the RADIUS
application when generating RADIUS packets.

Syntax
show radius interface

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐only.

Example
This example displays the output of this command. In this case, the IP address assigned to
loopback interface 1 will be used as the source IP address of the RADIUS application.
C3(rw)->show radius interface
loopback 1

192.168.10.1

set radius interface
Use this command to specify the interface used for the source IP address of the RADIUS
application when generating RADIUS packets.

Syntax
set radius interface {loopback loop-ID | vlan vlan-ID}

Parameters
loopback loop‐ID

Specifies the loopback interface to be used. The value of loop‐ID can
range from 0 to 7.

vlan vlan‐ID

Specifies the VLAN interface to be used. The value of vlan‐ID can range
from 1 to 4093.

Defaults
None.
26-12

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

clear radius interface

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command allows you to configure the source IP address used for the source IP address of the
RADIUS application when generating RADIUS packets. Any of the management interfaces,
including VLAN routing interfaces, can be configured as the source IP address used in packets
generated by the RADIUS application.
An interface must have an IP address assigned to it before it can be set by this command.
If no interface is specified, then the IP address of the Host interface, if configured, will be used for
both the source IP address and NAS‐IP. If no interface is specified and no Host address is
configured, the source IP address will be the address of the routed interface on which the packet
egresses. If loopback 0 has been configured, the NAS‐IP will be set to the IP address of loopback 0.
Otherwise, the NAS‐IP will be zero.

Example
This example configures an IP address on VLAN interface 100 and then sets that interface as the
RADIUS application source IP address.
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#exit
C3(rw)->router(Config)#exit
C3(rw)->router#exit
C3(rw)->router>exit
C3(rw)->set radius interface vlan 100

C3(rw)->show radius interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

clear radius interface
Use this command to clear the interface used for the source IP address of the RADIUS application
back to the default of the Host interface, if configured. If no Host address is configured, the source
IP address will be the address of the routed interface on which the packet egresses.

Syntax
clear radius interface

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-13

clear radius interface

Example
This command returns the interface used for the source IP address of the RADIUS application
back to the default of the Host interface.
C3(rw)->show radius interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

C3(rw)->clear radius interface
C3(rw)->

26-14

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

Configuring 802.1X Authentication

Configuring 802.1X Authentication
Purpose
To review and configure 802.1X authentication for one or more ports using EAPOL (Extensible
Authentication Protocol). 802.1X controls network access by enforcing user authorization on
selected ports, which results in allowing or denying network access according to RADIUS server
configuration.
Note: To configure EAP pass-through, which allows client authentication packets to be forwarded
through the switch to an upstream device, 802.1X authentication must be globally disabled with the
set dot1x command (“set dot1x” on page 26-18).

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show dot1x

26-15

show dot1x auth-config

26-17

set dot1x

26-18

set dot1x auth-config

26-19

clear dot1x auth-config

26-20

show eapol

26-21

set eapol

26-23

clear eapol

26-23

show dot1x
Use this command to display 802.1X status, diagnostics, statistics, and reauthentication or
initialization control information for one or more ports.

Syntax
show dot1x [auth-diag] [auth-stats] [port [init | reauth]] [port-string]

Parameters
auth‐diag

(Optional) Displays authentication diagnostics information.

auth‐stats

(Optional) Displays authentication statistics.

port init | reauth

(Optional) Displays the status of port initialization and reauthentication
control for the port.

port‐string

(Optional) Displays information for specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, 802.1X status will be displayed.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-15

show dot1x

If port‐string is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Examples
This example shows how to display 802.1X status:
C3(su)->show dot1x
DOT1X is disabled.

This example shows how to display authentication diagnostics information for ge.1.1:
C3(su)->show dot1x auth-diag ge.1.1
Port : 1
Auth-Diag
Enter Connecting:
EAP Logoffs While Connecting:
Enter Authenticating:
Success While Authenticating
Timeouts While Authenticating:
Fails While Authenticating:
ReAuths While Authenticating:
EAP Starts While Authenticating:
EAP logoff While Authenticating:
Backend Responses:
Backend Access Challenges:
Backend Others Requests To Supp:
Backend NonNak Responses From:
Backend Auth Successes:
Backend Auth Fails:

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

This example shows how to display authentication statistics for ge.1.1:
C3(su)->show dot1x auth-stats
Port: 1
Auth-Stats
EAPOL Frames Rx:
EAPOL Frames Tx:
EAPOL Start Frames Rx:
EAPOL Logoff Frames Rx:
EAPOL RespId Frames Rx:
EAPOL Resp Frames Rx:
EAPOL Req Frames Tx:
EAP Length Error Frames Rx:
Last EAPOL Frame Version:
Last EAPOL Frame Source:

ge.1.1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00:00:00:00:00:00

This example shows how to display the status of port reauthentication control for ge.1.1 through
ge.1.6:
C3(su)->show dot1x port reauth ge.1.1-6
Port 1: Port reauthenticate:
FALSE
Port 2: Port reauthenticate:
FALSE
Port 3: Port reauthenticate:
FALSE
Port 4: Port reauthenticate:
FALSE
Port 5: Port reauthenticate:
FALSE
Port 6: Port reauthenticate:
FALSE

26-16

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

show dot1x auth-config

show dot1x auth-config
Use this command to display 802.1X authentication configuration settings for one or more ports.

Syntax
show dot1x auth-config [authcontrolled-portcontrol] [maxreq] [quietperiod]
[reauthenabled] [reauthperiod] [servertimeout] [supptimeout] [txperiod]
[port-string]

Parameters
authcontrolled‐
portcontrol

(Optional) Displays the current value of the controlled Port control
parameter for the port.

maxreq

(Optional) Displays the value set for maximum requests currently in use by
the backend authentication state machine.

quietperiod

(Optional) Displays the value set for quiet period currently in use by the
authenticator PAE state machine.

reauthenabled

(Optional) Displays the state of reauthentication control used by the
Reauthentication Timer state machine.

reauthperiod

(Optional) Displays the value, in seconds, set for the reauthentication
period used by the reauthentication timer state machine.

servertimeout

(Optional) Displays the server timeout value, in seconds, currently in use
by the backend authentication state machine.

supptimeout

(Optional) Displays the authentication supplicant timeout value, in
seconds, currently in use by the backend authentication state machine.

txperiod

(Optional) Displays the transmission period value, in seconds, currently in
use by the authenticator PAE state machine.

port‐string

(Optional) Limits the display of desired information information to specific
port(s). For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all 802.1X settings will be displayed.
If port‐string is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Examples
This example shows how to display the EAPOL port control mode for ge.1.1:
C3(su)->show dot1x auth-config authcontrolled-portcontrol ge.1.1
Port 1: Auth controlled port control:
Auto

This example shows how to display the 802.1X quiet period settings for ge.1.1:
C3(su)->show dot1x auth-config quietperiod ge.1.1
Port 1: Quiet period:
30

This example shows how to display all 802.1X authentication configuration settings for ge.1.1:
C3(ro)->show dot1x auth-config ge.1.1

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-17

set dot1x

Port : 1
Auth-Config
PAE state:
Backend auth state:
Admin controlled directions:
Oper controlled directions:
Auth controlled port status:
Auth controlled port control:
Quiet period:
Transmission period:
Supplicant timeout:
Server timeout:
Maximum requests:
Reauthentication period:
Reauthentication control:

Initialize
Initialize
Both
Both
Authorized
Auto
60
30
30
30
2
3600
Disabled

set dot1x
Use this command to enable or disable 802.1X authentication, to reauthenticate one or more access
entities, or to reinitialize one or more supplicants.

Syntax
set dot1x {enable | disable | port {init | reauth} {true | false} [port-string]}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables 802.1X.

port

Enable or disable 802.1X reauthentication or initialization control on one or
more ports.

init | reauth

Configure initialization or reauthentication control.

true | false

Enable (true) or disable (false) reinitialization/reauthentication.

port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the port(s) to reinitialize or reauthenticate.

Defaults
If no ports are specified, the reinitialization or reauthentication setting will be applied to all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Disabling 802.1X authentication globally, by not entering a specific port‐string value, will enable
the EAP pass‐through feature. EAP pass‐through allows client authentication packets to be
forwarded unmodified through the switch to an upstream device.

Examples
This example shows how to enable 802.1X:
C3(su)->set dot1x enable

This example shows how to reinitialize ge.1.2:
C3(rw)->set dot1x port init true ge.1.2

26-18

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set dot1x auth-config

set dot1x auth-config
Use this command to configure 802.1X authentication.

Syntax
set dot1x auth-config {[authcontrolled-portcontrol {auto | forced-auth |
forced-unauth}] [maxreq value] [quietperiod value] [reauthenabled {false | true}]
[reauthperiod value] [servertimeout timeout] [supptimeout timeout] [txperiod
value]} [port-string]

Parameters
authcontrolled‐
portcontrol
auto | forced‐auth |
forced‐unauth

Specifies the 802.1X port control mode.
•

auto – Set port control mode to auto controlled port control. This
is the default value.

•

forced‐auth – Set port control mode to ForcedAuthorized
controlled port control.

•

forced‐unauth – Set port control mode to ForcedUnauthorized
controlled port control.

maxreq value

Specifies the maximum number of authentication requests allowed
by the backend authentication state machine. Valid values are 1 – 10.
Default value is 2.

quietperiod value

Specifies the time (in seconds) following a failed authentication
before another attempt can be made by the authenticator PAE state
machine. Valid values are 0 – 65535. Default value is 60 seconds.

reauthenabled false |
true

Enables (true) or disables (false) reauthentication control of the
reauthentication timer state machine. Default value is false.

reauthperiod value

Specifies the time lapse (in seconds) between attempts by the
reauthentication timer state machine to reauthenticate a port. Valid
values are 0 – 65535. Default value is 3600 seconds.

servertimeout timeout

Specifies a timeout period (in seconds) for the authentication server,
used by the backend authentication state machine. Valid values are 1
– 300. Default value is 30 seconds.

supptimeout timeout

Specifies a timeout period (in seconds) for the authentication
supplicant used by the backend authentication state machine. Valid
values are 1 – 300. Default value is 30 seconds.

txperiod value

Specifies the period (in seconds) which passes between authenticator
PAE state machine EAP transmissions. Valid values are 0 – 65535.
Default value is 30 seconds.

port‐string

(Optional) Limits the configuration of desired settings to specified
port(s). For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer
to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, authentication parameters will be set on all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-19

clear dot1x auth-config

Examples
This example shows how to enable reauthentication control on ports ge.1.1‐3:
C3(su)->set dot1x auth-config reauthenabled true ge.1.1-3

This example shows how to set the 802.1X quiet period to 120 seconds on ports ge.1.1‐3:
C3(su)->set dot1x auth-config quietperiod 120 ge.1.1-3

clear dot1x auth-config
Use this command to reset 802.1X authentication parameters to default values on one or more
ports.

Syntax
clear dot1x auth-config [authcontrolled-portcontrol] [maxreq] [quietperiod]
[reauthenabled] [reauthperiod] [servertimeout] [supptimeout] [txperiod] [portstring]

Parameters
authcontrolled‐
portcontrol

(Optional) Resets the 802.1X port control mode to auto.

maxreq

(Optional) Resets the maximum requests value to 2.

quietperiod

(Optional) Resets the quiet period value to 60 seconds.

reauthenabled

(Optional) Resets the reauthentication control state to disabled (false).

reauthperiod

(Optional) Resets the reauthentication period value to 3600 seconds.

servertimeout

(Optional) Resets the server timeout value to 30 seconds.

supptimeout

(Optional) Resets the authentication supplicant timeout value to 30
seconds.

txperiod

(Optional) Resets the transmission period value to 30 seconds.

port‐string

(Optional) Resets settings on specific port(s). For a detailed description of
possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on
page 7‐1.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, all authentication parameters will be reset.
If port‐string is not specified, parameters will be set on all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to reset the 802.1X port control mode to auto on all ports:
C3(su)->clear dot1x auth-config authcontrolled-portcontrol

This example shows how to reset reauthentication control to disabled on ports ge.1.1‐3:
C3(su)->clear dot1x auth-config reauthenabled ge.1.1-3

26-20

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

show eapol

This example shows how to reset the 802.1X quiet period to 60 seconds on ports ge.1.1‐3:
C3(su)->clear dot1x auth-config quietperiod ge.1.1-3

show eapol
Use this command to display EAPOL status or settings for one or more ports.

Syntax
show eapol [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays EAPOL status for specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, only EAPOL enable status will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display EAPOL status for ports ge.1.1‐3:
C3(su)->show eapol ge.1.1-3
EAPOL is disabled.
Port
-------ge.1.1
ge.1.2
ge.1.3

Authentication State
-------------------Initialize
Initialize
Initialize

Authentication Mode
-------------------Auto
Auto
Auto

Table 26‐2 provides an explanation of the command output. For details on using the set eapol
command to enable the protocol and assign an authentication mode, refer to “set eapol” on
page 26‐23.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-21

show eapol

Table 26-2

show eapol Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Port

Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7-1.

Authentication State

Current EAPOL authentication state for each port. Possible internal states for the
authenticator (switch) are:
• initialize: A port is in the initialize state when:

–

authentication is disabled,

–

authentication is enabled and the port is not linked, or

–

authentication is enabled and the port is linked. (In this case very
little time is spent in this state, it immediately transitions to the
connecting state, via disconnected.

• disconnected: The port passes through this state on its way to connected
whenever the port is reinitialized, via link state change, reauthentication failure, or
management intervention.
• connecting: While in this state, the authenticator sends request/ID messages to
the end user.
• authenticating: The port enters this state from connecting after receiving a
response/ID from the end user. It remains in this state until the entire
authentication exchange between the end user and the authentication server
completes.
• authenticated: The port enters this state from authenticating state after the
exchange completes with a favorable result. It remains in this state until linkdown,
logoff, or until a reauthentication begins.
• aborting: The port enters this state from authenticating when any event occurs
that interrupts the login exchange.
• held: After any login failure the port remains in this state for the number of
seconds equal to quietPeriod (can be set using MIB).
• forceAuth: Management is allowing normal, unsecured switching on this port.
• forceUnauth: Management is preventing any frames from being forwarded to or
from this port.
Authentication Mode Mode enabling network access for each port. Modes include:
• Auto: Frames are forwarded according to the authentication state of each port.
• Forced Authorized Mode: Meant to disable authentication on a port. It is
intended for ports that support ISLs and devices that cannot authenticate, such
as printers and file servers. If a default policy is applied to the port via the policy
profile MIB, then frames are forwarded according to the configuration set by that
policy, otherwise frames are forwarded according to the current configuration for
that port. Authentication using 802.1X is not possible on a port in this mode.
• Forced Unauthorized Mode: All frames received on the port are discarded by a
filter. Authentication using 802.1X is not possible on a port in this mode.

26-22

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set eapol

set eapol
Use this command to enable or disable EAPOL port‐based user authentication with the RADIUS
server and to set the authentication mode for one or more ports.

Syntax
set eapol [enable | disable] [auth-mode {auto | forced-auth | forced-unauth}
port-string

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables EAPOL.

auth‐mode

Specifies the authentication mode as:

auto |
forced‐auth |
forced‐unauth

•

auto ‐ Auto authorization mode. This is the default mode and will
forward frames according to the authentication state of the port. For
details on this mode, refer to Table 26‐2.

•

forced‐auth ‐ Forced authorized mode, which disables authentication
on the port.

•

forced‐unauth ‐ Forced unauthorized mode, which filters and discards
all frames received on the port.

port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to set EAPOL parameters. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to enable EAPOL:
C3(su)->set eapol enable

This example shows how to enable EAPOL with forced authorized mode on port ge.1.1:
C3(su)->set eapol auth-mode forced-auth ge.1.1

clear eapol
Use this command to globally clear the EAPOL authentication mode, or to clear settings for one or
more ports.

Syntax
clear eapol [auth-mode] [port-string]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-23

clear eapol

Parameters
auth‐mode

(Optional) Globally clears the EAPOL authentication mode.

port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to clear EAPOL parameters. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If auth‐mode is not specified, all EAPOL settings will be cleared.
If port‐string is not specified, settings will be cleared for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the EAPOL authentication mode for port ge.1.3:
C3(su)->clear eapol auth-mode ge.1.3

26-24

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

Configuring MAC Authentication

Configuring MAC Authentication
Purpose
To review, disable, enable and configure MAC authentication. This authentication method allows
the device to authenticate source MAC addresses in an exchange with an authentication server.
The authenticator (switch) selects a source MAC seen on a MAC‐authentication enabled port and
submits it to a backend client for authentication. The backend client uses the MAC address stored
password, if required, as credentials for an authentication attempt. If accepted, a string
representing an access policy and/or VLAN authorization may be returned. If present, the switch
applies the associated policy rules and VLAN segmentation.
You can specify a mask to apply to MAC addresses when authenticating users through a RADIUS
server (see “set macauthentication significant‐bits” on page 26‐35). The most common use of
significant bit masks is for authentication of all MAC addresses for a specific vendor.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show macauthentication

26-25

show macauthentication session

26-27

set macauthentication

26-28

set macauthentication password

26-28

clear macauthentication password

26-29

set macauthentication port

26-29

set macauthentication portinitialize

26-30

set macauthentication portquietperiod

26-30

clear macauthentication portquietperiod

26-31

set macauthentication macinitialize

26-31

set macauthentication reauthentication

26-32

set macauthentication portreauthenticate

26-32

set macauthentication macreauthenticate

26-33

set macauthentication reauthperiod

26-33

clear macauthentication reauthperiod

26-34

set macauthentication significant-bits

26-35

clear macauthentication significant-bits

26-35

show macauthentication
Use this command to display MAC authentication information for one or more ports.

Syntax
show macauthentication [port-string]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-25

show macauthentication

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays MAC authentication information for specific port(s).
For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, MAC authentication information will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display MAC authentication information for ge.2.1 through 8:
C3(su)->show macauthentication ge.2.1-8
MAC authentication:
- enabled
MAC user password:
- NOPASSWORD
Port username significant bits - 48
Port
------ge.2.1
ge.2.2
ge.2.3
ge.2.4
ge.2.5
ge.2.6
ge.2.7
ge.2.8

Port
State
-------disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled

Reauth
Period
---------3600
3600
3600
3600
3600
3600
3600
3600

Auth
Allowed
-------1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Auth
Allocated
--------1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Reauthentications
----------------disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled

Table 26‐3 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 26-3

26-26

show macauthentication Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

MAC authentication

Whether MAC authentication is globally enabled or disabled. Set using the set
macauthentication command as described in “set macauthentication” on
page 26-28.

MAC user password

User password associated with MAC authentication on the device. Set using the set
macauthentication password command as described in “set macauthentication
password” on page 26-28.

Port username
significant bits

Number of significant bits in the MAC addresses to be used starting with the left-most
bit of the vendor portion of the MAC address. The significant portion of the MAC
address is sent as a user-name credential when the primary attempt to authenticate
the full MAC address fails. Any other failure to authenticate the full address, (i.e.,
authentication server timeout) causes the next attempt to start once again with a full
MAC authentication. Default value of 48 can be changed with the set
macauthentication significant-bits command.

Port

Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7-1.

Port State

Whether or not MAC authentication is enabled or disabled on this port.

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

show macauthentication session

Table 26-3

show macauthentication Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

Reauth Period

Reauthentication period for this port. Default value of 30 can be changed using the
set macauthentication reauthperiod command (page 26-33).

Auth Allowed

Number of concurrent authentications supported on this port.

Auth Allocated

Maximum number of MAC authentications permitted on this port.

Reauthentications

Whether or not reauthentication is enabled or disabled on this port. Set using the set
macauthentication reauthentication command (page 26-32).

show macauthentication session
Use this command to display the active MAC authenticated sessions.

Syntax
show macauthentication session

Parameters
None.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, MAC session information will be displayed for all MAC
authentication ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
Changing the Reauth Period with the set macauthentication reauthperiod command does not
affect current sessions. New sessions display the correct period.

Example
This example shows how to display MAC session information:
C3(su)->show macauthentication session
Port
MAC Address
Duration
Reauth Period
--------------------- ---------- ------------ge.1.2
00:60:97:b5:4c:07 0,00:52:31 3600

Reauthentications
----------------disabled

Table 26‐4 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 26-4

show macauthentication session Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Port

Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7-1.

MAC Address

MAC address associated with the session.

Duration

Time this session has been active.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-27

set macauthentication

Table 26-4

show macauthentication session Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

Reauth Period

Reauthentication period for this port, set using the set macauthentication
reauthperiod command described in “set macauthentication reauthperiod” on
page 26-33.

Reauthentications

Whether or not reauthentication is enabled or disabled on this port. Set using the set
macauthentication reauthentication command described in “set
macauthentication reauthentication” on page 26-32.

set macauthentication
Use this command to globally enable or disable MAC authentication.

Syntax
set macauthentication {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Globally enables or disables MAC authentication.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Defaults
None.

Example
This example shows how to globally enable MAC authentication:
C3(su)->set macauthentication enable

set macauthentication password
Use this command to set a MAC authentication password.

Syntax
set macauthentication password password

Parameters
password

Specifies a text string MAC authentication password.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

26-28

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

clear macauthentication password

Example
This example shows how to set the MAC authentication password to “macauth”:
C3(su)->set macauthentication password macauth

clear macauthentication password
Use this command to clear the MAC authentication password.

Syntax
clear macauthentication password

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the MAC authentication password:
C3(su)->clear macauthentication password

set macauthentication port
Use this command to enable or disable one or more ports for MAC authentication.

Syntax
set macauthentication port {enable | disable} port-string

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables MAC authentication.

port‐string

Specifies port(s) on which to enable or disable MAC authentication. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-29

set macauthentication portinitialize

Usage
Enabling port(s) for MAC authentication requires globally enabling MAC authentication on the
switch as described in “set macauthentication” on page 26‐28, and then enabling it on a port‐by‐
port basis. By default, MAC authentication is globally disabled and disabled on all ports.

Example
This example shows how to enable MAC authentication on ge.2.1 though 5:
C3(su)->set macauthentication port enable ge.2.1-5

set macauthentication portinitialize
Use this command to force one or more MAC authentication ports to re‐initialize and remove any
currently active sessions on those ports.

Syntax
set macauthentication portinitialize port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the MAC authentication port(s) to re‐initialize. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to force ge.2.1 through 5 to initialize:
C3(su)->set macauthentication portinitialize ge.2.1-5

set macauthentication portquietperiod
This sets the number of seconds following a failed authentication before another attempt may be
made on the port.

Syntax
set macauthentication portquietperiod time port-string

Parameters

26-30

time

Period in seconds to wait after a failed authentication. By default, this is 30
seconds.

port‐string

Specifies the ports for which the quit period is to be applied. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

clear macauthentication portquietperiod

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example sets port 1 to wait 5 seconds after a failed authentication attempt before a new
attempt can be made:
C3(su)->set macauthentication portquietperiod 5 ge.1.1

clear macauthentication portquietperiod
This sets the quiet period back to the default value of 30 seconds.

Syntax
clear macauthentication portquietperiod [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies the ports for which the quiet period is to be reset. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If a port‐string is not specified then all ports will be set to the default port quiet period.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example resets the default quiet period on port 1:
C3(su)->clear macauthentication portquietperiod ge.1.1

set macauthentication macinitialize
Use this command to force a current MAC authentication session to re‐initialize and remove the
session.

Syntax
set macauthentication macinitialize mac-addr

Parameters
mac‐addr

Specifies the MAC address of the session to re‐initialize.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-31

set macauthentication reauthentication

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Defaults
None.

Example
This example shows how to force the MAC authentication session for address 00‐60‐97‐b5‐4c‐07
to re‐initialize:
C3(su)->set macauthentication macinitialize 00-60-97-b5-4c-07

set macauthentication reauthentication
Use this command to enable or disable reauthentication of all currently authenticated MAC
addresses on one or more ports.

Syntax
set macauthentication reauthentication {enable | disable} port-string

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables MAC reauthentication.

port‐string

Specifies port(s) on which to enable or disable MAC reauthentication. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable MAC reauthentication on ge.4.1 though 5:
C3(su)->set macauthentication reauthentication enable ge.4.1-5

set macauthentication portreauthenticate
Use this command to force an immediate reauthentication of the currently active sessions on one
or more MAC authentication ports.

Syntax
set macauthentication portreauthenticate port-string

26-32

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set macauthentication macreauthenticate

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies MAC authentication port(s) to be reauthenticated. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to force ge.2.1 though 5 to reauthenticate:
C3(su)->set macauthentication portreauthentication ge.2.1-5

set macauthentication macreauthenticate
Use this command to force an immediate reauthentication of a MAC address.

Syntax
set macauthentication macreauthenticate mac-addr

Parameters
mac‐addr

Specifies the MAC address of the session to reauthenticate.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to force the MAC authentication session for address 00‐60‐97‐b5‐4c‐07
to reauthenticate:
C3(su)->set macauthentication macreauthenticate 00-60-97-b5-4c-07

set macauthentication reauthperiod
Use this command to set the MAC reauthentication period (in seconds). This is the time lapse
between attempts to reauthenticate any current MAC address authenticated to a port.

Syntax
set macauthentication reauthperiod time port-string

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-33

clear macauthentication reauthperiod

Parameters
time

Specifies the number of seconds between reauthentication attempts. Valid
values are 1 ‐ 4294967295.

port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to set the MAC reauthentication period. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Changing the Reauth Period with the set macauthentication reauthperiod command does not
affect current sessions. New sessions will use the correct period.

Example
This example shows how to set the MAC reauthentication period to 7200 seconds (2 hours) on
ge.2.1 through 5:
C3(su)->set macauthentication reauthperiod 7200 ge.2.1-5

clear macauthentication reauthperiod
Use this command to clear the MAC reauthentication period on one or more ports.

Syntax
clear macauthentication reauthperiod [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Clears the MAC reauthentication period on specific port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, the reauthentication period will be cleared on all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to globally clear the MAC reauthentication period:
C3(su)->clear macauthentication reauthperiod

26-34

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set macauthentication significant-bits

set macauthentication significant-bits
Use this command to set the number of significant bits of the MAC address to use for
authentication.

Syntax
set macauthentication significant-bits number

Parameters
number

Specifies the number of significant bits to be used for authentication.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command allows you to specify a mask to apply to MAC addresses when authenticating
users through a RADIUS server. The most common use of significant bit masks is for
authentication of all MAC addresses for a specific vendor.
On switches using MAC authentication, the MAC address of a user attempting to log in is sent to
the RADIUS server as the user name. If access is denied, and if a significant bit mask has been
configured (other than 48) with this command, the switch will apply the mask and resend the
masked address to the RADIUS server. For example, if a user with MAC address of 00‐16‐CF‐12‐
34‐56 is denied access, and a 32 bit mask has been configured, the switch will apply the mask and
resend a MAC address of 00‐16‐CF‐12‐00‐00 to the RADIUS server.
To use a significant bits mask for authentication of devices by a particular vendor, specify a 24‐bit
mask, to mask out everything except the vendor portion of the MAC address.

Example
This example sets the MAC authentication significant bits mask to 24.
C3(su)->set macauthentication significant-bits 24

clear macauthentication significant-bits
Use this command to reset the number of significant bits of the MAC address to use for
authentication to the default of 48.

Syntax
clear macauthentication significant-bits

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-35

clear macauthentication significant-bits

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example resets the MAC authentication significant bits to 48.
C3(su)->clear macauthentication significant-bits

26-36

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

Configuring Multiple Authentication Methods

Configuring Multiple Authentication Methods
About Multiple Authentication Types
When enabled, multiple authentication types allows a user to authenticate using more than one
method on the same port. In order for multiple authentication to function on the device, each
possible method of authentication (MAC authentication, 802.1X, PWA) must be enabled globally
and configured appropriately on the desired ports with its corresponding command set described
in this chapter. The precedence configured for the authentication methods determines which
authentication method is actually applied to the user, device, or port.
Multiple authentication mode must be globally enabled on the device using the set multiauth
mode command. Authentication precedence can be configured with the set multiauth precedence
command.

About Multi-User Authentication
Multi‐user authentication refers to the ability to authenticate more than one user or device on the
same port, with each user or device being provided the appropriate level of network resources
based on policy.
When a single supplicant connected to an access layer port authenticates, a policy profile can be
dynamically applied to all traffic on the port. When multi‐user authentication is not implemented,
and more than one supplicant is connected to a port, the firmware does not provision network
resources on a per‐user or per‐device basis, even though different users or devices may require a
different set of network resources.
In order to support provisioning network resources on a per‐user basis, by applying the policy
configured in the RADIUS filter‐ID or RFC 3580 tunnel attributes for a given user or device, the
switch must be the point of authentication for the attached devices. The RADIUS filter‐ID and
tunnel attributes are part of the RADIUS user account and are included in the RADIUS access‐
accept message response received by the switch from the authentication server.
The maximum number of multiple users supported per port depends on your platform. Refer to
Appendix A, Policy and Authentication Capacities for a description of the multi‐user capacities
for this device. By default, the number of allowed users per port is set to 1. To configure the
number of allowed users per port, use the set multiauth port numusers command. Use the show
multiauth port command to display the current values of “Max users” and “Allowed users” per
port.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show multiauth

26-38

set multiauth mode

26-39

clear multiauth mode

26-39

set multiauth precedence

26-40

clear multiauth precedence

26-40

show multiauth port

26-41

set multiauth port

26-41

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-37

show multiauth

For information about...

Refer to page...

clear multiauth port

26-42

show multiauth station

26-43

show multiauth session

26-43

show multiauth idle-timeout

26-44

set multiauth idle-timeout

26-45

clear multiauth idle-timeout

26-46

show multiauth session-timeout

26-46

set multiauth session-timeout

26-47

clear multiauth session-timeout

26-48

show multiauth
Use this command to display multiple authentication system configuration.

Syntax
show multiauth

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display multiple authentication system configuration:
C3(rw)->show multiauth
Multiple authentication system configuration
------------------------------------------------Supported types
: dot1x, pwa, mac
Maximum number of users
: 768
Current number of users
: 2
System mode
: multi
Default precedence
: dot1x, pwa, mac
Admin precedence
: dot1x, pwa, mac
Operational precedence
: dot1x, pwa, mac

26-38

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set multiauth mode

set multiauth mode
Use this command to set the system authentication mode to allow multiple authenticators
simultaneously (802.1x, PWA, and MAC Authentication) on a single port, or to strictly adhere to
802.1x authentication.

Syntax
set multiauth mode {multi | strict}

Parameters
multi

Allows the system to use multiple authenticators simultaneously (802.1x,
PWA, and MAC Authentication) on a port. This is the default mode.

strict

User must authenticate using 802.1x authentication before normal traffic
(anything other than authentication traffic) can be forwarded.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Multiauth multi mode requires that MAC, PWA, and 802.1X authentication be enabled globally,
and configured appropriately on the desired ports according to their corresponding command
sets described in this chapter. Refer to “Configuring 802.1X Authentication” on page 26‐15 and
“Configuring MAC Authentication” on page 26‐25 and “Configuring Port Web Authentication
(PWA)” on page 26‐68.

Example
This example shows how to enable simultaneous multiple authentications:
C3(rw)->set multiauth mode multi

clear multiauth mode
Use this command to clear the system authentication mode.

Syntax
clear multiauth mode

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-39

set multiauth precedence

Example
This example shows how to clear the system authentication mode:
C3(rw)->clear multiauth mode

set multiauth precedence
Use this command to set the system’s multiple authentication administrative precedence.

Syntax
set multiauth precedence {[dot1x] [mac] [pwa]}

Parameters
dot1x

Sets precedence for 802.1X authentication.

mac

Sets precedence for MAC authentication.

pwa

Sets precedence for port web authentication

Defaults
Default precedence order is dot1x, pwa, mac.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
When a user is successfully authenticated by more than one method at the same time, the
precedence of the authentication methods will determine which RADIUS‐returned filter ID will be
processed and result in an applied traffic policy profile.

Example
This example shows how to set precedence for MAC authentication:
C3(rw)->set multiauth precedence mac dot1x

clear multiauth precedence
Use this command to clear the system’s multiple authentication administrative precedence to the
default precedence order.

Syntax
clear multiauth precedence

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

26-40

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

show multiauth port

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the multiple authentication precedence:
C3(rw)->clear multiauth precedence

show multiauth port
Use this command to display multiple authentication properties for one or more ports.

Syntax
show multiauth port [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays multiple authentication information for specific port(s).

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, multiple authentication information will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display multiple authentication information for ports ge.3.1‐4. The
number of “Max users” shown by this command varies depending on the platform.
C3(rw)->show multiauth port ge.3.1-4
Port

Mode

Max
users
------------ ------------ ---------ge.3.1
auth-opt
n
ge.3.2
auth-opt
n
ge.3.3
auth-opt
n
ge.3.4
auth-opt
n

Allowed
users
---------1
1
1
1

Current
users
---------0
0
0
0

set multiauth port
Use this command to set multiple authentication properties for one or more ports.

Syntax
set multiauth port mode {auth-opt | auth-reqd | force-auth | force-unauth} |
numusers numusers port-string

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-41

clear multiauth port

Parameters
mode
auth‐opt |
auth‐reqd |
force‐auth |
force‐unauth

Specifies the port(s)’ multiple authentication mode as:
•

auth‐opt — Authentication optional (“non‐strict” behavior). If a user
does not attempt to authenticate using 802.1x, or if 802.1x
authentication fails, the port will allow traffic to be forwarded
according to the defined default VLAN.

•

auth‐reqd — Authentication is required.

•

force‐auth — Authentication considered.

•

force‐unauth — Authentication disabled.

numusers
numusers

Specifies the number of users allowed authentication on port(s). Valid
values depend on your specific platform. Refer to Appendix A, Policy and
Authentication Capacities for information about multi‐user capacities.

port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to set multiple authentication properties.

Defaults
Default value for the number of users allowed to authenticate on a port is 1.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to set the port multiple authentication mode to required on ge.3.14:
C3(rw)->set multiauth port mode auth-reqd ge.3.14

This example shows how to set the number of users allowed to authenticate on port ge.3.14 to 2:
C3(rw)->set multiauth port numusers 2 ge.3.14

clear multiauth port
Use this command to clear multiple authentication properties for one or more ports.

Syntax
clear multiauth port {mode | numusers} port-string

Parameters
mode

Clears the specified port’s multiple authentication mode.

numusers

Clears the value set for the number of users allowed authentication on the
specified port.

port‐string

Specifies the port or ports on which to clear multiple authentication
properties.

Defaults
None.

26-42

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

show multiauth station

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to clear the port multiple authentication mode on port ge.3.14:
C3(rw)->clear multiauth port mode ge.3.14

This example shows how to clear the number of users on port ge.3.14:
C3(rw)->clear multiauth port numusers ge.3.14

show multiauth station
Use this command to display multiple authentication station (end user) entries.

Syntax
show multiauth station [mac address] [port port-string]

Parameters
mac address

(Optional) Displays multiple authentication station entries for a specific
MAC address.

port port‐string

(Optional) Displays multiple authentication station entries for one or more
ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Defaults
If no options are specified, multiple authentication station entries will be displayed for all MAC
addresses and ports.

Example
This example shows how to display multiple authentication station entries. In this case, two end
user MAC addresses are shown:
C3(rw)->show
Port
-----------ge.1.20
ge.2.16

multiauth station
Address type Address
------------ -----------------------mac
00-10-a4-9e-24-87
mac
00-b0-d0-e5-0c-d0

show multiauth session
Use this command to display multiple authentication session entries.

Syntax
show multiauth session [all] [agent {dot1x | mac | pwa}] [mac address]
[port port-string]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-43

show multiauth idle-timeout

Parameters
all

(Optional) Displays information about all sessions, including those with
terminated status.

agent dot1x | mac |
pwa

(Optional) Displays 802.1X, or MAC, or port web authentication session
information.

mac address

(Optional) Displays multiple authentication session entries for specific
MAC address(es).

port port‐string

(Optional) Displays multiple authentication session entries for the
specified port or ports.

Defaults
If no options are specified, multiple authentication session entries will be displayed for all
sessions, authentication types, MAC addresses, and ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display multiple authentication session information for port ge.1.1.
C3(su)->show multiauth session port ge.1.1
__________________________________________
Port
| ge.1.1
Station address
Auth status
| success
Last attempt
Agent type
| dot1x
Session applied
Server type
| radius
VLAN-Tunnel-Attr
Policy index
| 0
Policy name
Session timeout | 0
Session duration
Idle timeout
| 5
Idle time
Termination time | Not Terminated

|
|
|
|
|
|
|

00-01-03-86-0A-87
FRI MAY 18 11:16:36 2007
true
none
Administrator
0,00:00:25
0,00:00:00

show multiauth idle-timeout
Use this command to display the timeout value, in seconds, for an idle session for all
authentication methods.

Syntax
show multiauth idle-timeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

26-44

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set multiauth idle-timeout

Example
This example shows how to display timeout values for an idle session for all authentication types.
C3(su)->show multiauth idle-timeout
Authentication type Timeout (sec)
------------------- ------------dot1x
0
pwa
0
mac
0

set multiauth idle-timeout
Use this command to set the maximum number of consecutive seconds an authenticated session
may be idle before termination of the session.

Syntax
set multiauth idle-timeout [dot1x | mac | pwa] timeout

Parameters
dot1x

(Optional) Specifies the IEEE 802.1X port‐based network access control
authentication method for which to set the timeout value.

mac

(Optional) Specifies the Enterasys MAC authentication method for
which to set the timeout value.

pwa

(Optional) Specifies the Enterasys Port Web Authentication method for
which to set the timeout value.

timeout

Specifies the timeout value in seconds. The value can range from 0 to
65535. A value of 0 means that no idle timeout will be applied unless an
idle timeout value is provided by the authenticating server.

Defaults
If no authentication method is specified, the idle timeout value is set for all authentication
methods.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
If you set an idle timeout value, a MAC user whose MAC address has aged out of the forwarding
database will be unauthenticated if no traffic has been seen from that address for the specified idle
timeout period.
A value of zero indicates that no idle timeout will be applied unless an idle timeout value is
provided by the authenticating server. For example, if a session is authenticated by a RADIUS
server, that server may encode a Idle‐Timeout Attribute in its authentication response.

Example
This example sets the idle timeout value for all authentication methods to 300 seconds.
C3(su)->set multiauth idle-timeout 300

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-45

clear multiauth idle-timeout

clear multiauth idle-timeout
Use this command to reset the maximum number of consecutive seconds an authenticated session
may be idle before termination of the session to its default value of 0.

Syntax
clear multiauth idle-timeout [dot1x | mac | pwa]

Parameters
dot1x

(Optional) Specifies the IEEE 802.1X port‐based network access control
authentication method for which to reset the timeout value to its
default.

mac

(Optional) Specifies the Enterasys MAC authentication method for
which to reset the timeout value to its default.

pwa

(Optional) Specifies the Enterasys Port Web Authentication method for
which to reset the timeout value to its default.

Defaults
If no authentication method is specified, the idle timeout value is reset to its default value of 0 for
all authentication methods.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example resets the idle timeout value for all authentication methods to 0 seconds.
C3(su)->clear multiauth idle-timeout

show multiauth session-timeout
Use this command to display the session timeout value, in seconds, for all authentication methods.

Syntax
show multiauth session-timeout

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐only.

26-46

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set multiauth session-timeout

Example
This example displays the session timeout values for all authentication methods.
C3(su)->show multiauth session-timeout
Authentication type Timeout (sec)
------------------- ------------dot1x
0
pwa
0
mac
0

set multiauth session-timeout
Use this command to set the maximum number of seconds an authenticated session may last
before termination of the session.

Syntax
set multiauth session-timeout [dot1x | mac | pwa] timeout

Parameters
dot1x

(Optional) Specifies the IEEE 802.1X port‐based network access control
authentication method for which to set the session timeout value.

mac

(Optional) Specifies the Enterasys MAC authentication method for
which to set the session timeout value.

pwa

(Optional) Specifies the Enterasys Port Web Authentication method for
which to set the session timeout value.

timeout

Specifies the timeout value in seconds. The value can range from 0 to
65535. A value of 0 means that no session timeout will be applied unless
a session timeout value is provided by the authenticating server.

Defaults
If no authentication method is specified, the session timeout value is set for all authentication
methods.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Usage
A value of zero may be superseded by a session timeout value provided by the authenticating
server. For example, if a session is authenticated by a RADIUS server, that server may encode a
Session‐Timeout Attribute in its authentication response.

Example
This example sets the session timeout value for the IEEE 802.1X authentication method to 300
seconds.
C3(su)->set multiauth session-timeout dot1x 300

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-47

clear multiauth session-timeout

clear multiauth session-timeout
Use this command to reset the maximum number of consecutive seconds an authenticated session
may last before termination of the session to its default value of 0.

Syntax
clear multiauth session-timeout [dot1x | mac | pwa]

Parameters
dot1x

(Optional) Specifies the IEEE 802.1X port‐based network access control
authentication method for which to reset the timeout value to its
default.

mac

(Optional) Specifies the Enterasys MAC authentication method for
which to reset the timeout value to its default.

pwa

(Optional) Specifies the Enterasys Port Web Authentication method for
which to reset the timeout value to its default.

Defaults
If no authentication method is specified, the session timeout value is reset to its default value of 0
for all authentication methods.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example resets the session timeout value for the IEEE 802.1X authentication method to 0
seconds.
C3(su)->clear multiauth session-timeout dot1x

Configuring User + IP Phone Authentication
User + IP phone authentication is a legacy feature that allows a user and their IP phone to both use
a single port on the switch but to have separate policy roles. The user’s PC and their IP phone are
daisy‐chained together with a single connection to the network.
This special application of multi‐user authentication was inherited from legacy platforms (such as
the B2 and C2) that could not natively support multiple users per port. The SecureStack C3 can
support multiple users per port so the User + IP phone application should only be used if you are
integrating SecureStack C3s into a legacy deployment.
With ʺUser + IP Phoneʺ authentication, the policy role for the IP phone is statically mapped using
a policy admin rule which assigns any packets received with a VLAN tag set to a specific VID (for
example, Voice VLAN) to an specified policy role (for example, IP Phone policy role). Therefore, it
is required that the IP phone be configured to send VLAN‐tagged packets tagged for the “Voice”
VLAN. Refer to the Usage section for the command “set policy rule” on page 11‐10 for additional
information about configuring a policy admin rule that maps a VLAN tag to a policy role.
Note that if the IP phone authenticates to the network, the RADIUS accept message must return
null values for RFC 3580 tunnel attributes and the Filter‐ID.

26-48

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580)

The second policy role, for the user, can either be statically configured with the default policy role
on the port or dynamically assigned through authentication to the network (using a RADIUS
Filter‐ID). When the default policy role is assigned on a port, the VLAN set as the portʹs PVID is
mapped to the default policy role. When a policy role is dynamically applied to a user as the result
of a successfully authenticated session, the “authenticated VLAN” is mapped to the policy role set
in the Filter‐ID returned from the RADIUS server. The “authenticated VLAN” may either be the
PVID of the port, if the PVID Override for the policy profile is disabled, or the VLAN specified in
the PVID Override if the PVID Override is enabled.

Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580)
Purpose
RFC 3580 Tunnel Attributes provide a mechanism to contain an 802.1X, MAC, or PWA
authenticated user to a VLAN regardless of the PVID. This is referred to as dynamic VLAN
assignment.
Please see section 3‐31 of RFC 3580 for details on configuring a RADIUS server to return the
desired tunnel attributes. As stated in RFC 3580, “... it may be desirable to allow a port to be placed
into a particular Virtual LAN (VLAN), defined in [IEEE8021Q], based on the result of the
authentication.”
The RADIUS server typically indicates the desired VLAN by including tunnel attributes within its
Access‐Accept parameters. However, the IEEE 802.1X or MAC authenticator can also be
configured to instruct the VLAN to be assigned to the supplicant by including tunnel attributes
within Access‐Request parameters.
The following tunnel attributes are used in VLAN authorization assignment:
•

Tunnel‐Type ‐ VLAN (13)

•

Tunnel‐Medium‐Type ‐ 802

•

Tunnel‐Private‐Group‐ID ‐ VLANID

In order to authenticate RFC 3580 users, policy maptable response must be set to tunnel as
described in “Configuring Policy Maptable Response” on page 26‐52.
Note: A policy license, if applicable, is not required to deploy RFC 3580 dynamic VLAN
assignment.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

set vlanauthorization

26-50

set vlanauthorization egress

26-50

clear vlanauthorization

26-51

show vlanauthorization

26-51

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-49

set vlanauthorization

set vlanauthorization
Enable or disable the use of the RADIUS VLAN tunnel attribute to put a port into a particular
VLAN based on the result of authentication.

Syntax
set vlanauthorization {enable | disable} [port-string]

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables vlan authorization/tunnel attributes.

port‐string

(Optional) Specifies which ports to enable or disable the use of VLAN
tunnel attributes/authorization. For a detailed description of possible port‐
string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
VLAN authentication is disabled by default.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Examples
This example shows how to enable VLAN authentication for all Gigabit Ethernet ports:
C3(rw)-> set vlanauthorization enable ge.*.*

This example shows how to disable VLAN authentication for all Gigabit Ethernet ports on switch
unit/module 3:
C3(rw)-> set vlanauthorization disable ge.3.*

set vlanauthorization egress
Controls the modification of the current VLAN egress list of 802.1x authenticated ports for the
VLANs returned in the RADIUS authorization filter id string.

Syntax
set vlanauthorization egress {none | tagged | untagged} port-string

Parameters

26-50

none

Specifies that no egress manipulation will be made.

tagged

Specifies that the authenticating port will be added to the current tagged
egress for the VLAN‐ID returned.

untagged

Specifies that the authenticating port will be added to the current
untagged egress for the VLAN‐ID returned (default).

port‐string

Specifies that the port or list of ports. to which this command will apply.
For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port
String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

clear vlanauthorization

Defaults
By default, administrative egress is set to untagged.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable the insertion of the RADIUS assigned VLAN to an 802.1q tag
for all outbound frames for ports 10 through 15 on unit/module number 3.
C3(rw)->set vlanauthorization egress tagged ge.3.10-15

clear vlanauthorization
Use this command to return port(s) to the default configuration of VLAN authorization disabled,
egress untagged.

Syntax
clear vlanauthorization [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Specifies which ports are to be restored to default
configuration. If no port string is entered, the action will be a global
setting. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If no port string is entered, all ports a will be reset to default configuration with VLAN
authorization disabled and egress frames untagged.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example show how to clear VLAN authorization for all ports on slots 3, 4, and 5:
C3(rw)->clear vlanauthorization ge.3-5.*

show vlanauthorization
Displays the VLAN authentication status and configuration information for the specified ports.

Syntax
show vlanauthorization [port-string]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-51

Configuring Policy Maptable Response

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays VLAN authentication status for the specified ports. If
no port string is entered, then the global status of the setting is displayed.
For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port
String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If no port string is entered, the status for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This command shows how to display VLAN authorization status for ge.1.1:
C3(su)->show vlanauthorization ge.1.1
Vlan Authorization: - enabled
port
status
administrative
operational
egress
egress
------- -------- -----------------------ge.1.1
enabled
untagged

authenticated
vlan id
mac address
----------------- -------

Table 26‐5 provides an explanation of command output. For details on enabling and assigning
protocol and egress attributes, refer to “set vlanauthorization” on page 26‐50 and “set
vlanauthorization egress” on page 26‐50.
Table 26-5

show vlanauthorization Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

port

Port identification

status

Port status as assigned by set vlanauthorization command

administrative
egress

Port status as assigned by the set vlanauthorization egress command

operational egress

Port operational status of vlanauthorization egress.

authenticated mac
address

If authentication has succeeded, displays the MAC address assigned for egress.

vlan id

If authentication has succeeded, displays the assigned VLAN id for ingress.

Configuring Policy Maptable Response
The policy maptable response feature allows you to define how the system should handle
allowing an authenticated user onto a port based on the contents of the RADIUS server Access‐
Accept reply. There are three possible response settings: tunnel mode, policy mode, or both tunnel
and policy, also known as hybrid authentication mode.
When the maptable response is set to tunnel mode, the system will use the tunnel attributes in the
RADIUS reply to apply a VLAN to the authenticating user and will ignore any Filter‐ID attributes
in the RADIUS reply. On this platform, when tunnel mode is configured, no VLAN‐to‐policy
mapping will occur. When using VLAN authorization, the policy maptable response should be set
to tunnel (see “Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580)” on page 26‐49).

26-52

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

Configuring Policy Maptable Response

When the maptable response is set to policy mode, the system will use the Filter‐ID attributes in
the RADIUS reply to apply a policy to the authenticating user and will ignore any tunnel
attributes in the RADIUS reply. On this platform, when policy mode is configured, no VLAN‐to‐
policy mapping will occur.
When the maptable response is set to both, or hybrid authentication mode, both Filter‐ID
attributes (dynamic policy assignment) and tunnel attributes (dynamic VLAN assignment) sent in
RADIUS server Access‐Accept replies are used to determine how the switch should handle
authenticating users. On this platform, when hybrid authentication mode is configured, VLAN‐to‐
policy mapping can occur, as described below in “When Policy Maptable Response is “Both”” on
page 26‐53.
Using hybrid authentication mode eliminates the dependency on having to assign VLANs
through policy roles — VLANs can be assigned by means of the tunnel attributes while policy
roles can be assigned by means of the Filter‐ID attributes. Alternatively, VLAN‐to‐policy mapping
can be used to map policies to users using the VLAN specified by the tunnel attributes, without
having to configure Filter‐ID attributes on the RADIUS server. This separation gives
administrators more flexibility in segmenting their networks beyond the platform’s hardware
policy role limits.
Refer to “RADIUS Filter‐ID Attribute and Dynamic Policy Profile Assignment” on page 26‐3 for
more information about Filter‐ID attributes and “Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580)”
on page 26‐49 for more information about tunnel attributes.

Operational Description
When Policy Maptable Response is “Both”
Hybrid authentication mode uses both Filter‐ID attributes and tunnel attributes. To enable hybrid
authentication mode, use the set policy maptable command and set the response parameter to
both. When configured to use both sets of attributes:
•

If both the Filter‐ID and tunnel attributes are present in the RADIUS reply, then the policy
profile specified by the Filter‐ID is applied to the authenticating user, and if VLAN
authorization is enabled globally and on the authenticating user’s port, the VLAN specified by
the tunnel attributes is applied to the authenticating user.
If VLAN authorization is not enabled, the VLAN specified by the policy profile is applied. See
“Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580)” on page 26‐49 for information about enabling
VLAN authorization globally and on specific ports.

•

If the Filter‐ID attributes are present but the tunnel attributes are not present, the policy
profile specified by the Filter‐ID is applied, along with the VLAN specified by the policy
profile.

•

If the tunnel attributes are present but the Filter‐ID attributes are not present or are invalid,
and if VLAN authorization is enabled globally and on the authenticating user’s port, then the
switch will check the VLAN‐to‐policy mapping table (configured with the set policy
maptable command):
–

If an entry mapping the received VLAN ID to a valid policy profile is found, then that
policy profile, along with the VLAN specified by the policy profile, will be applied to the
authenticating user.

–

If no matching mapping table entry is found, the VLAN specified by the tunnel attributes
will be applied to the authenticating user.

–

If the VLAN‐to‐policy mapping table is invalid, then the
etsysPolicyRFC3580MapInvalidMapping MIB is incremented and the VLAN specified by
the tunnel attributes will be applied to the authenticating user.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-53

show policy maptable

If VLAN authorization is not enabled, the tunnel attributes are ignored.

When Policy Maptable Response is “Policy”
When the switch is configured to use only Filter‐ID attributes, by setting the set policy maptable
command response parameter to policy:
•

If the Filter‐ID attributes are present, the specified policy profile will be applied to the
authenticating user. If no Filter‐ID attributes are present, or if the policy ID is unknown or
invalid, the default policy (if it exists) will be applied.

•

If the tunnel attributes are present, they are ignored. No VLAN‐to‐policy mapping will occur.

On switches that support policy, the default maptable response mode is policy. On switches that
do not support policy, the default maptable response mode is tunnel.

When Policy Maptable Response is “Tunnel”
When the switch is configured to use only tunnel attributes, by setting the set policy maptable
command response parameter to tunnel, and if VLAN authorization is enabled both globally and
on the authenticating user’s port:
•

If the tunnel attributes are present, the specified VLAN will be applied to the authenticating
user. No VLAN‐to‐policy mapping will occur.

•

If the tunnel attributes are not present, the default policy VLAN will be applied if it exists.
Otherwise, the port VLAN will be applied.

•

If the Filter‐ID attributes are present, they are ignored.

If VLAN authorization is not enabled, the user will be allowed onto the port with the default
policy, if it exists. If no default policy exists, the port VLAN will be applied.
On switches that support policy, the default maptable response mode is policy. On switches that
do not support policy, the default maptable response mode is tunnel.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show policy maptable

26-54

set policy maptable

26-55

clear policy maptable

26-56

show policy maptable
Use this command to display information about the current VLAN‐to‐policy mapping table and
the switch’s policy maptable response setting.

Syntax
show policy maptable [vlan-list]

Parameters
vlan‐list

26-54

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN or list of VLANs for which to display the
VLAN‐to‐policy settings.

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set policy maptable

Defaults
If no VLAN list is specified, all entries in the VLAN‐to‐policy mapping table are displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
This command displays both the policy maptable response setting, and the entries in the VLAN‐
to‐policy mapping table for one or multiple VLANs. Refer to “Operational Description” on
page 26‐53 for information about how the VLAN‐to‐policy mapping table is used.

Example
This example shows how to display the policy maptable response and all the entries in the VLAN‐
to‐policy mapping table. In this example, hybrid authentication mode is enabled (because the
policy maptable response is both).
C3(rw)->show policy maptable
Policy map response
: both
Policy map last change : 1 days 00:23:57
VLAN ID
144
160

Policy Profile
4
7

(Students)
(Faculty)

set policy maptable
Use this command to configure the VLAN‐to‐policy mapping table and also the switch’s maptable
response setting— that is, whether the switch is in tunnel mode, policy mode, or hybrid
authentication mode.

Syntax
set policy maptable {vlan-list policy-index | response {both | policy | tunnel}}

Parameters
vlan‐list policy‐index

Specifies an entry in the VLAN‐to‐policy mapping table, which relates a
policy profile with a VLAN ID or range of IDs. vlan‐list can range from 1
to 4093. policy‐index can range from 1 to 1023.

response

Indicates that this command is configuring the policy maptable
response.

both

Sets the maptable response to look at both the Filter‐ID and tunnel
attributes in a RADIUS Access‐Accept reply to determine how to
handle an authenticating user. This is equivalent to enabling hybrid
authentication mode.

policy

Sets the maptable response to policy mode. The system will look at only
the Filter‐ID attributes in a RADIUS Access‐Accept reply to determine
how to handle an authenticating user.

tunnel

Sets the maptable response to tunnel mode. The system will look at
only the tunnel attributes in a RADIUS Access‐Accept reply to
determine how to handle an authenticating user.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-55

clear policy maptable

Defaults
No mapping table entries are configured.
The default policy maptable response setting is policy mode.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command can be used to create entries in the VLAN‐to‐policy mapping table and also to set
the switch’s maptable response. Refer to “Operational Description” on page 26‐53 for more
information about the switch’s operations for all maptable response parameters.
When you are using VLAN authorization for dynamic VLAN assignment, you should set the
policy maptable response to tunnel. See “Configuring VLAN Authorization (RFC 3580)” on
page 26‐49.

Examples
This example shows how to set the policy maptable response to both, or hybrid authentication
mode:
C3(rw)->set policy maptable response both

This example shows how to configure a policy mapping entry that will map VLAN 144 to policy
profile 4.
C3(rw)->set policy maptable 144 4

clear policy maptable
Use this command to clear a VLAN‐to‐policy mapping table entry or to reset the maptable
response to the default value of policy mode.

Syntax
clear policy maptable {vlan-list | response}

Parameters
vlan‐list

Clears the policy profile mapping for the specified VLAN ID or range of
VLANs.

response

Resets the maptable response to policy.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command can be used to remove an entry in the VLAN‐to‐policy mapping table or to change
the maptable response back to the default value of policy mode.

26-56

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

Configuring MAC Locking

Example
This example removes the entry in the mapping table for VLAN 144.
C3(rw)->show policy maptable
Policy map response
: both
Policy map last change : 1 days 17:23:57
VLAN ID
144
160

Policy Profile
4
7

(Students)
(Faculty)

C3(rw)->clear policy maptable 144
C3(rw)->show policy maptable
Policy map response
: both
Policy map last change : 1 days 17:24:01
VLAN ID
160

Policy Profile
7

(Faculty)

Configuring MAC Locking
This feature locks a MAC address to one or more ports, preventing connection of unauthorized
devices through the port(s). When source MAC addresses are received on specified ports, the
switch discards all subsequent frames not containing the configured source addresses. The only
frames forwarded on a “locked” port are those with the “locked” MAC address(es) for that port.
There are two methods of locking a MAC to a port: first arrival and static. The first arrival method
is defined to be locking the first n number of MACs which arrive on a port configured with MAC
locking enabled. The value n is configured with the set maclock firstarrival command.
The static method is defined to be statically provisioning a MAC‐port lock using the set maclock
command. The maximum number of static MAC addresses allowed for MAC locking on a port
can be configured with the set maclock static command.
You can configure the switch to issue a violation trap if a packet arrives with a source MAC
address different from any of the currently locked MAC addresses for that port.
MACs are unlocked as a result of:
•

A link down event

•

When MAC locking is disabled on a port

•

When a MAC is aged out of the forwarding database when FirstArrival aging is enabled

When properly configured, MAC locking is an excellent security tool as it prevents MAC spoofing
on configured ports. Also if a MAC were to be secured by something like Dragon Dynamic
Intrusion Detection, MAC locking would make it more difficult for a hacker to send packets into
the network because the hacker would have to change their MAC address and move to another
port. In the meantime the system administrator would be receiving a maclock trap notification.

Purpose
To review, disable, enable, and configure MAC locking.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-57

show maclock

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show maclock

26-58

show maclock stations

26-59

set maclock enable

26-60

set maclock disable

26-61

set maclock

26-61

clear maclock

26-62

set maclock static

26-63

clear maclock static

26-63

set maclock firstarrival

26-64

clear maclock firstarrival

26-65

set maclock agefirstarrival

26-65

clear maclock agefirstarrival

26-66

set maclock move

26-66

set maclock trap

26-67

show maclock
Use this command to display the status of MAC locking on one or more ports.

Syntax
show maclock [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays MAC locking status for specified port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, MAC locking status will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display MAC locking information for ge.1.1.
C3(su)->show maclock ge.1.1
MAC locking is globally enabled
Port
Number

26-58

Port
Status

Trap
Status

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

Aging
Status

Max Static
Allocated

Max FirstArrival
Allocated

Last Violating
MAC Address

show maclock stations

------ge.1.1

------- -------- ------enabled disabled enabled

---------- --------------- --------------20
1
00:a0:c9:39:5c:b4

Table 26‐6 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 26-6

show maclock Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Port Number

Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7-1.

Port Status

Whether MAC locking is enabled or disabled on the port. MAC locking is globally
disabled by default. For details on enabling MAC locking on the switch and on one or
more ports, refer to “set maclock enable” on page 26-60 and “set maclock” on
page 26-61.

Trap Status

Whether MAC lock trap messaging is enabled or disabled on the port. For details
on setting this status, refer to “set maclock trap” on page 26-67.

Aging Status

Whether aging of FirstArrival MAC addresses is enabled or disabled on the port.
Refer to “set maclock agefirstarrival” on page 26-65.

Max Static Allocated

The maximum static MAC addresses allowed locked to the port. For details on
setting this value, refer to “set maclock static” on page 26-63.

Max FirstArrival
Allocated

The maximum end station MAC addresses allowed locked to the port. For details on
setting this value, refer to “set maclock firstarrival” on page 26-64.

Last Violating MAC
Address

Most recent MAC address(es) violating the maximum static and first arrival value(s)
set for the port.

show maclock stations
Use this command to display MAC locking information about end stations connected to the
switch.

Syntax
show maclock stations [firstarrival | static] [port-string]

Parameters
firstarrival

(Optional) Displays MAC locking information about end stations first
connected to MAC locked ports.

static

(Optional) Displays MAC locking information about static (management
defined) end stations connected to MAC locked ports.

port‐string

(Optional) Displays end station information for specified port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If no parameters are specified, MAC locking information will be displayed for all end stations.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-59

set maclock enable

Example
This example shows how to display MAC locking information for the end stations connected to all
Gigabit Ethernet ports in unit/module 2:
C3(su)->show maclock stations ge.2.*
Port Number MAC Address
Status
------------ -----------------------------ge.2.1
00:a0:c9:39:5c:b4
active
ge.2.7
00:a0:c9:39:1f:11
active

State
-------------first arrival
static

Aging
----true
false

Table 26‐7 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 26-7

show maclock stations Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

Port Number

Port designation. For a detailed description of possible port-string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7-1.

MAC address

MAC address of the end station(s) locked to the port.

Status

Whether the end stations are active or inactive.

State

Whether the end station locked to the port is a first arrival or static connection.

Aging

When true, FirstArrival MACs that have aged out of the forwarding database will be
removed for the associated port lock.

set maclock enable
Use this command to enable MAC locking globally or on one or more ports.

Note: MAC locking needs to be enabled globally and on appropriate ports for it to function.

Syntax
set maclock enable [port‐string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Enables MAC locking on specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, MAC locking will be enabled globally.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
When enabled and configured, MAC locking defines which MAC addresses, as well as how many
MAC addresses are permitted to use specific port(s).
26-60

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set maclock disable

MAC locking is disabled by default at device startup. Configuring one or more ports for MAC
locking requires globally enabling it on the device and then enabling it on the desired ports.

Example
This example shows how to enable MAC locking on ge.2.3:
C3(su)->set maclock enable ge.2.3

set maclock disable
Use this command to disable MAC locking globally or on one or more ports.

Syntax
set maclock disable [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Disables MAC locking on specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, MAC locking will be disabled globally on the switch.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to disable MAC locking on ge.2.3:
C3(su)->set maclock disable ge.2.3

set maclock
Use this command to create a static MAC address‐to‐port locking, and to enable or disable MAC
locking for the specified MAC address and port.

Syntax
set maclock mac-address port-string {create | enable | disable}

Parameters
mac‐address

Specifies the MAC address for which MAC locking will be created,
enabled or disabled.

port‐string

Specifies the port on which to create, enable or disable MAC locking for
the specified MAC. For a detailed description of possible port‐string
values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-61

clear maclock

create

Establishes a MAC locking association between the specified MAC
address and port. Create automatically enables MAC locking between the
specified MAC address and port.

enable | disable

Enables or disables MAC locking between the specified MAC address and
port.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
Configuring a port for MAC locking requires globally enabling it on the switch first using the set
maclock enable command as described in “set maclock enable” on page 26‐60.
Static MAC locking a user on multiple ports is not supported.
Statically MAC locked addresses will display in the show mac output (as described on page 14‐22)
as address type “other” and will not remove them on link down.

Example
This example shows how to create a MAC locking association between MAC address 0e‐03‐ef‐d8‐
44‐55 and port ge.3.2:
C3(rw)->set maclock 0e-03-ef-d8-44-55 ge.3.2 create

clear maclock
Use this command to remove a static MAC address to port locking entry.

Syntax
clear maclock mac-address port-string

Parameters
mac‐address

Specifies the MAC address that will be removed from the list of static
MACs allowed to communicate on the port.

port‐string

Specifies the port on which to clear the MAC address. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

26-62

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set maclock static

Usage
The MAC address that is cleared will no longer be able to communicate on the port unless the first
arrival limit has been set to a value greater than 0 and this limit has not yet been met.
For example, if user B’s MAC is removed from the static MAC address list and the first arrival
limit has been set to 0, then user B will not be able to communicate on the port. If user A’s MAC is
removed from the static MAC address list and the first arrival limit has been set to 10, but only has
7 entries, user A will become the 8th entry and allowed to communicate on the port.

Example
This example shows how to remove a MAC from the list of static MACs allowed to communicate
on port ge.3.2:
C3(rw)->clear maclock 0e-03-ef-d8-44-55 ge.3.2

set maclock static
Use this command to set the maximum number of static MAC addresses allowed per port. Static
MACs are administratively defined.

Syntax
set maclock static port-string value

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port on which to set the maximum number of static MACs
allowed. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

value

Specifies the maximum number of static MAC addresses allowed per
port. Valid values are 0 to 20.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the maximum number of allowable static MACs to 2 on ge.3.1:
C3(rw)->set maclock static ge.3.1 2

clear maclock static
Use this command to reset the number of static MAC addresses allowed per port to the default
value of 20.

Syntax
clear maclock static port-string

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-63

set maclock firstarrival

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port on which to reset number of static MAC addresses
allowed. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the number of allowable static MACs on ge.2.3:
C3(rw)->clear maclock static ge.2.3

set maclock firstarrival
Use this command to restrict MAC locking on a port to a maximum number of end station
addresses first connected to that port.

Syntax
set maclock firstarrival port-string value

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port on which to limit MAC locking. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

value

Specifies the number of first arrival end station MAC addresses to be
allowed connections to the port. Valid values are 0 to 600.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
The maclock first arrival count resets when the link goes down. This feature is beneficial if you
have roaming users—the first arrival count will be reset every time a user moves to another port,
but will still protect against connecting multiple devices on a single port and will protect against
MAC address spoofing.
Note: Setting a port’s first arrival limit to 0 does not deny the first MAC address learned on the port
from passing traffic.

26-64

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

clear maclock firstarrival

Example
This example shows how to restrict MAC locking to 6 MAC addresses on ge.2.3:
C3(su)->set maclock firstarrival ge.2.3 6

clear maclock firstarrival
Use this command to reset the number of first arrival MAC addresses allowed per port to the
default value of 600.

Syntax
clear maclock firstarrival port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port on which to reset the first arrival value. For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset MAC first arrivals on ge.2.3:
C3(su)->clear maclock firstarrival ge.2.3

set maclock agefirstarrival
Use this command to enable or disable the aging of first arrival MAC addresses. When enabled,
first arrival MAC addresses that are aged out of the forwarding database will be removed from the
associated port MAC lock.

Syntax
set maclock agefirstarrival port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to enable or disable first arrival aging. For
a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

enable | disable

Enable or disable first arrival aging. By default, first arrival aging is
disabled.

Defaults
None.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-65

clear maclock agefirstarrival

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example enables first arrival aging on port ge.1.1.
C3(su)-> set maclock agefirstarrival ge.1.1 enable

clear maclock agefirstarrival
Use this command to reset first arrival aging on one or more ports to its default state of disabled.

Syntax
clear maclock agefirstarrival port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port(s) on which to disable first arrival aging. For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐write.

Example
This example disables first arrival aging on port ge.1.1.
C3(su)-> clear maclock agefirstarrival ge.1.1 enable

set maclock move
Use this command to move all current first arrival MACs to static entries.

Syntax
set maclock move port-string

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port on which MAC will be moved from first arrival MACs
to static entries. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values,
refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
None.

26-66

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set maclock trap

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
If there are more first arrival MACs than the allowed maximum static MACs, then only the latest
first arrival MACs will be moved to static entries. For example, if you set the maximum number of
static MACs to 2 with the set maclock static command, and then executed the set maclock move
command, even though there were five MACs in the first arrival table, only the two most recent
MAC entries would be moved to static entries.

Example
This example shows how to move all current first arrival MACs to static entries on ports ge.3.1‐40:
C3(rw)->set maclock move ge.3.1-40

set maclock trap
Use this command to enable or disable MAC lock trap messaging.

Syntax
set maclock trap port-string {enable | disable}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port on which MAC lock trap messaging will be enabled or
disabled. For a detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to
“Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

enable | disable

Enables or disables MAC lock trap messaging.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
When enabled, this feature authorizes the switch to send an SNMP trap message if an end station
is connected that exceeds the maximum values configured using the set maclock firstarrival and
set maclock static commands. Violating MAC addresses are dropped from the device’s (or stack’s)
filtering database.

Example
This example shows how to enable MAC lock trap messaging on ge.2.3:
C3(su)->set maclock trap ge.2.3 enable

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-67

Configuring Port Web Authentication (PWA)

Configuring Port Web Authentication (PWA)
About PWA
PWA provides a way of authenticating users through a Web portal before allowing general access
to the network.
To log on using PWA, the user makes a request through a web browser for the PWA web page or is
automatically redirected to this login page after requesting a URL in a browser.
Depending upon the authenticated state of the user, a login page or a logout page will display.
When a user submits username and password, the switch then authenticates the user via a
preconfigured RADIUS server. If the login is successful, then the user will be granted full network
access according to the user’s policy configuration on the switch.

Purpose
To review, enable, disable, and configure Port Web Authentication (PWA).

Commands
For information about...

26-68

Refer to page...

show pwa

26-69

set pwa

26-70

show pwa banner

26-71

set pwa banner

26-71

clear pwa banner

26-72

set pwa displaylogo

26-72

set pwa ipaddress

26-73

set pwa protocol

26-73

set pwa guestname

26-74

clear pwa guestname

26-74

set pwa guestpassword

26-75

set pwa gueststatus

26-75

set pwa initialize

26-76

set pwa quietperiod

26-76

set pwa maxrequest

26-77

set pwa portcontrol

26-77

show pwa session

26-78

set pwa enhancedmode

26-79

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

show pwa

show pwa
Use this command to display port web authentication information for one or more ports.

Syntax
show pwa [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays PWA information for specific port(s).

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, PWA information will be displayed for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display PWA information for ge.2.1:
C3(su)->show pwa ge.2.1
PWA Status
PWA IP Address
PWA Protocol
PWA Enhanced Mode
PWA Logo
PWA Guest Networking Status
PWA Guest Name
PWA Redirect Time
Port
Mode
-------- ---------------ge.2.1
disabled

-

enabled
192.168.62.99
PAP
N/A
enabled
disabled
guest
N/A

AuthStatus
-------------disconnected

QuietPeriod
----------60

MaxReq
--------16

Table 26‐8 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 26-8

show pwa Output Details

Output Field

What It Displays...

PWA Status

Whether or not port web authentication is enabled or disabled. Default state of
disabled can be changed using the set pwa command as described in “set pwa” on
page 26-70.

PWA IP Address

IP address of the end station from which PWA will prevent network access until the
user is authenticated. Set using the set pwa ipaddress command as described in
“set pwa ipaddress” on page 26-73.

PWA Protocol

Whether PWA protocol is CHAP or PAP. Default setting of PAP can be changed
using the set pwa protocol command as described in “set pwa protocol” on
page 26-73.

PWA Enhanced
Mode

Whether PWA enhanced mode is enabled or disabled. Default state of disabled can
be changed using the set pwa enhancedmode command as described in “set pwa
enhancedmode” on page 26-79.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-69

set pwa

Table 26-8

show pwa Output Details (Continued)

Output Field

What It Displays...

PWA Logo

Whether the Enterasys logo will be displayed or hidden at user login. Default state of
enabled (displayed) can be changed using the set pwa displaylogo command as
described in “set pwa displaylogo” on page 26-72.

PWA Guest
Networking Status

Whether PWA guest user status is disabled or enabled with RADIUS or no
authentication. Default state of disabled can be changed using the set pwa
gueststatus command as described in “set pwa gueststatus” on page 26-75.

PWA Guest Name

Guest user name for PWA enhanced mode networking. Default value of “guest” can
be changed using the set pwa guestname command as described in “set pwa
guestname” on page 26-74.

PWA Guest
Password

Guest user’s password. Default value of an empty string can be changed using the
set pwa guestpassword command as described in “set pwa guestpassword” on
page 26-75.

PWA Redirect Time

Time in seconds after login success before the user is redirected to the PWA home
page.

Port

PWA port designation.

Mode

Whether PWA is enabled or disabled on his port.

Auth Status

Whether or not the port state is disconnected, authenticating, authenticated, or held
(authentication has failed).

Quiet Period

Amount of time a port will be in the held state after a user unsuccessfully attempts to
log on to the network. Default value of 60 can be changed using the set pwa
quietperiod command as described in “set pwa quietperiod” on page 26-76.

MaxReq

Maximum number of log on attempts allowed before transitioning the port to a held
state. Default value of 2 can be changed using the set pwa maxrequests command
as described in “set pwa maxrequest” on page 26-77.

set pwa
Use this command to enable or disable port web authentication.

Syntax
set pwa {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables port web authentication.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable port web authentication:
C3(su)->set pwa enable

26-70

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

show pwa banner

show pwa banner
Use this command to display the port web authentication login banner string.

Syntax
show pwa banner

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display the PWA login banner:
C3(su)->show pwa banner
Welcome to Enterasys Networks

set pwa banner
Use this command to configure a string to be displayed as the PWA login banner.

Syntax
set pwa banner string

Parameters
string

Specifies the PWA login banner.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the PWA login banner to “Welcome to Enterasys Networks ”:
C3(su)->set pwa banner “Welcome to Enterasys Networks”

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-71

clear pwa banner

clear pwa banner
Use this command to reset the PWA login banner to a blank string.

Syntax
clear pwa banner

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to reset the PWA login banner to a blank string
C3(su)->clear pwa banner

set pwa displaylogo
Use this command to set the display options for the Enterasys Networks logo.

Syntax
set pwa displaylogo {display | hide}

Parameters
display | hide

Displays or hides the Enterasys Networks logo when the PWA website
displays.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to hide the Enterasys Networks logo:
C3(su)->set pwa displaylogo hide

26-72

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set pwa ipaddress

set pwa ipaddress
Use this command to set the PWA IP address. This is the IP address of the end station from which
PWA will prevent network access until the user is authenticated.

Syntax
set pwa ipaddress ip-address

Parameters
ip‐address

Specifies a globally unique IP address. This same value must be
configured into every authenticating switch in the domain.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set a PWA IP address of 1.2.3.4:
C3(su)->set pwa ipaddress 1.2.3.4

set pwa protocol
Use this command to set the port web authentication protocol.

Syntax
set pwa protocol {chap | pap}

Parameters
chap | pap

Sets the PWA protocol to:
•

CHAP (PPP Challenge Handshake Protocol) ‐ encrypts the username
and password between the end‐station and the switch port.

•

PAP (Password Authentication Protocol‐ does not provide any
encryption between the end‐station the switch port.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set a the PWA protocol to CHAP:
C3(su)->set pwa protocol chap

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-73

set pwa guestname

set pwa guestname
Use this command to set a guest user name for PWA networking. PWA will use this name to grant
network access to guests without established login names and passwords.

Syntax
set pwa guestname name

Parameters
name

Specifies a guest user name.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the PWA guest user name to “guestuser”:
C3(su)->set pwa guestname guestuser

clear pwa guestname
Use this command to clear the PWA guest user name.

Syntax
clear pwa guestname

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to clear the PWA guest user name
C3(su)->clear pwa guestname

26-74

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set pwa guestpassword

set pwa guestpassword
Use this command to set the guest user password for PWA networking.

Syntax
set pwa guestpassword

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
PWA will use this password and the guest user name to grant network access to guests without
established login names and passwords.

Example
This example shows how to set the PWA guest user password name:
C3(su)->set pwa guestpassword
Guest Password: *********
Retype Guest Password: *********

set pwa gueststatus
Use this command to enable or disable guest networking for port web authentication.

Syntax
set pwa gueststatus {authnone | authradius | disable}

Parameters
authnone

Enables guest networking with no authentication method.

authradius

Enables guest networking with RADIUS authentication. Upon successful
authentication from RADIUS, PWA will apply the policy returned from
RADIUS to the PWA port.

disable

Disables guest networking.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-75

set pwa initialize

Usage
PWA will use a guest password and guest user name to grant network access with default policy
privileges to users without established login names and passwords.

Example
This example shows how to enable PWA guest networking with RADIUS authentication:
C3(su)->set pwa guestnetworking authradius

set pwa initialize
Use this command to initialize a PWA port to its default unauthenticated state.

Syntax
set pwa initialize [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Initializes specific port(s). For a detailed description of possible
port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used in the CLI” on
page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, all ports will be initialized.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to initialize ports ge.1.5‐7:
C3(su)->set pwa initialize ge.1.5-7

set pwa quietperiod
Use this command to set the amount of time a port will remain in the held state after a user
unsuccessfully attempts to log on to the network.

Syntax
set pwa quietperiod time [port-string]

Parameters

26-76

time

Specifies quiet time in seconds.

port‐string

(Optional) Sets the quiet period for specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set pwa maxrequest

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, quiet period will be set for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the PWA quiet period to 30 seconds for ports ge.1.5‐7:
C3(su)->set pwa quietperiod 30 ge.1.5-7

set pwa maxrequest
Use this command to set the maximum number of log on attempts allowed before transitioning
the PWA port to a held state.

Syntax
set pwa maxrequests requests [port-string]

Parameters
maxrequests

Specifies the maximum number of log on attempts.

port‐string

(Optional) Sets the maximum requests for specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, maximum requests will be set for all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to set the PWA maximum requests to 3 for all ports:
C3(su)->set pwa maxrequests 3

set pwa portcontrol
This command enables or disables PWA authentication on select ports.

Syntax
set pwa portcontrol {enable | disable} [port-string]

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-77

show pwa session

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables PWA on specified ports.

port‐string

(Optional) Sets the control mode on specific port(s). For a detailed
description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String Syntax Used
in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, PWA will enabled on all ports.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable PWA on ports 1‐22:
C3(su)->set pwa portcontrol enable ge.1.1-22

show pwa session
Use this command to display information about current PWA sessions.

Syntax
show pwa session [port-string]

Parameters
port‐string

(Optional) Displays PWA session information for specific port(s). For a
detailed description of possible port‐string values, refer to “Port String
Syntax Used in the CLI” on page 7‐1.

Defaults
If port‐string is not specified, session information for all ports will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display PWA session information:
C3(su)->show pwa session
Port
MAC
-------- ----------------ge.2.19 00-c0-4f-20-05-4b
ge.2.19 00-c0-4f-24-51-70
ge.2.19 00-00-f8-78-9c-a7

26-78

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

IP
--------------172.50.15.121
172.50.15.120
172.50.15.61

User
------------pwachap10
pwachap1
pwachap11

Duration
-----------0,14:46:55
0,15:43:30
0,14:47:58

Status
--------active
active
active

set pwa enhancedmode

set pwa enhancedmode
This command enables PWA URL redirection. The switch intercepts all HTTP packets on port 80
from the end user, and sends the end user a refresh page destined for the PWA IP Address
configured.

Syntax
set pwa enhancedmode {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables PWA enhancedmode.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to enable PWA enhancedmode:
C3(su)->set pwa enhancedmode enable

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-79

Configuring Secure Shell (SSH)

Configuring Secure Shell (SSH)
Purpose
To review, enable, disable, and configure the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol, which provides secure
Telnet.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show ssh status

26-80

set ssh

26-80

set ssh hostkey

26-81

show ssh status
Use this command to display the current status of SSH on the switch.

Syntax
show ssh status

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example shows how to display SSH status on the switch:
C3(su)->show ssh status
SSH Server status: Disabled

set ssh
Use this command to enable, disable or reinitialize SSH server on the switch. By default, the SSH
server is disabled.

Syntax
set ssh {enable | disable | reinitialize}

26-80

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

set ssh hostkey

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables SSH, or reinitializes the SSH server.

reinitialize

Reinitializes the SSH server.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to disable SSH:
C3(su)->set ssh disable

set ssh hostkey
Use this command to reinitialize new SSH authentication keys.

Syntax
set ssh hostkey reinitialize

Parameters
reinitialize

Reinitializes the server host authentication keys.

Defaults
None

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example shows how to regenerate SSH keys:
C3(su)->set ssh hostkey reinitialize

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-81

Configuring Access Lists

Configuring Access Lists
Router: These commands can be executed when the device is in router mode only. For details
on how to enable router configuration modes, refer to “Enabling Router Configuration Modes” on
page 18-2.
Note: Refer to the Release Notes for your product for any limitations that may apply to access
control lists.

Purpose
To review and configure security access control lists (ACLs), which permit or deny access to
routing interfaces based on protocol and IP address restrictions.

Commands
For information about...

Refer to page...

show access-lists

26-82

access-list (standard)

26-83

access-list (extended)

26-84

ip access-group

26-86

show access-lists
Use this command to display configured IP access lists when operating in router mode.

Syntax
show access‐lists [number]

Parameters
access‐list‐
number

(Optional) Displays access list information for a specific access list number.
Valid values are between 1 and 199.

Defaults
If number is not specified, the entire table of access lists will be displayed.

Mode
Any router mode.

Example
This example shows how to display IP access list number 145. This is an extended access list,
which permits or denies ICMP, UDP and IP frames based on restrictions configured with one of
the access‐list commands. For details on configuring standard access lists, refer to “access‐list
(standard)” on page 26‐83. For details on configuring extended access lists, refer to “access‐list
(extended)” on page 26‐84.

26-82

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

access-list (standard)

C3(su)->router#show access-lists 145
Extended IP access list 145
1: permit icmp host 88.255.255.254 any
2: permit icmp any host 11.11.16.16
3: deny icmp any any
4: permit tcp host 88.255.255.254 any eq 22
5: permit udp 88.255.128.0 0.0.127.255 eq 161 any
6: permit tcp any host 230.10.230.10 eq 1234
7: deny tcp any any eq 23
8: permit ip 88.255.128.0 0.0.127.255 any
9: deny ip any 224.0.0.0 31.0.0.0

access-list (standard)
Use this command to define a standard IP access list by number when operating in router mode.
The no form of this command removes the defined access list or entry.

Syntax
To create an ACL entry:
access-list access-list-number {deny | permit} source [source-wildcard]
no access-list access-list-number [entryno [entryno]]

To insert or replace an ACL entry:
access-list access-list-number insert | replace entryno {deny | permit} source
[source-wildcard]

To move entries within an ACL:
access-list access-list-number move destination source1 [source2]

Parameters
access‐list‐number
[entryno [entryno]]

Specifies a standard access list number. Valid values are from 1 to 99.
When using the no access‐list command, you can delete a whole access‐list,
or only specific entries in the list with the optional entryno parameter.
Specify a range of entries by entering the start and end entry numbers.

deny | permit

Denies or permits access if specified conditions are met.

source

Specifies the network or host from which the packet will be sent. Valid
options for expressing source are:

source‐wildcard

•

IP address or range of addresses (A.B.C.D)

•

any ‐ Any source host

•

host source ‐ IP address of a single source host

(Optional) Specifies the bits to ignore in the source address.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-83

access-list (extended)

insert | replace
entryno

(Optional) Inserts this new entry before a specified entry in an existing ACL,
or replaces a specified entry with this new entry.

move destination
source1 source2

(Optional) Moves a sequence of access list entries before another entry.
Destination is the number of the existing entry before which this new entry
will be moved. Source1 is a single entry number or the first entry number in
the range to be moved. Source2 (optional) is the last entry number in the
range to be moved. If source2 is not specified, only the source1 entry will be
moved.

Defaults
If insert, replace or move are not specified, the new entry will be appended to the access list.
If source2 is not specified with move, only one entry will be moved.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
Valid access list numbers for standard ACLs are 1 to 99. For extended ACLs, valid values are 100
to 199.
Access lists are applied to interfaces by using the ip access‐group command (page 26‐86).
All access lists have an implicit “deny any any” statment as their last entry.

Examples
This example shows how to create access list 1 with three entries that allow access to only those
hosts on the three specified networks. The wildcard bits apply to the host portions of the network
addresses. Any host with a source address that does not match the access list entries will be
rejected:
C3(su)->router(Config)#access-list 1 permit 192.5.34.0 0.0.0.255
C3(su)->router(Config)#access-list 1 permit 128.88.0.0 0.0.255.255
C3(su)->router(Config)#access-list 1 permit 36.0.0.0 0.255.255.255

This example moves entry 16 to the beginning of ACL 22:
C3(su)->router(Config)#access-list 22 move 1 16

access-list (extended)
Use this command to define an extended IP access list by number when operating in router mode.
The no form of this command removes the defined access list or entry:

Syntax
To create an extended ACL entry:
access-list access-list-number {deny | permit} protocol source [source-wildcard]
[eq port] destination [destination-wildcard] [eq port]
no access-list access-list-number [entryno [entryno]]

To insert or replace an ACL entry:
access-list access-list-number insert | replace entryno {deny | permit} protocol
source [source-wildcard] [eq port] destination [destination-wildcard] [eq port]

26-84

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

access-list (extended)

To move entries within an ACL:
access-list access-list-number move destination source1 [source2]

Parameters
access‐list‐number
[entryno [entryno]]

Specifies an extended access list number. Valid values are from 100 to 199.

deny | permit

Denies or permits access if specified conditions are met.

protocol

Specifies an IP protocol for which to deny or permit access. Valid values
and their corresponding protocols are:

source

When using the no access‐list command, you can delete a whole access‐list,
or only specific entries in the list with the optional entryno parameter.
Specify a range of entries by entering the start and end entry numbers.

•

ip ‐ Any Internet protocol

•

udp ‐ User Datagram Protocol

•

tcp ‐ Transmission Control Protocol

•

icmp ‐ Internet Control Message Protocol

Specifies the network or host from which the packet will be sent. Valid
options for expressing source are:
•

IP address or range of addresses (A.B.C.D)

•

any ‐ Any source host

•

host source ‐ IP address of a single source host

source‐wildcard

(Optional) Specifies the bits to ignore in the source address.

eq port

(Optional) Applies access rules to TCP or UDP source and/or destination
port numbers equal to the specified port number.
Port numbers can range from 0 to 65535.
Note: This parameter is not available when you specify the icmp protocol.

destination

Specifies the network or host to which the packet will be sent. Valid options
for expressing destination are:
•

IP address (A.B.C.D)

•

any ‐ Any destination host

•

host source ‐ IP address of a single destination host

destination‐wildcard (Optional) Specifies the bits to ignore in the destination address.
insert | replace
entryno

(Optional) Inserts this new entry before a specified entry in an existing
ACL, or replaces a specified entry with this new entry.

move destination
source1 source2

(Optional) Moves a sequence of access list entries before another entry.
Destination is the number of the existing entry before which this new entry
will be moved. Source1 is a single entry number or the first entry number in
the range to be moved. Source2 (optional) is the last entry number in the
range to be moved. If source2 is not specified, only the source1 entry will be
moved.

Defaults
If insert, replace, or move are not specified, the new entry will be appended to the access list.
If source2 is not specified with move, only one entry will be moved.
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-85

ip access-group

If eq port is not specified, TCP/UDP ports are not used for filtering. Only the protocol, source, and
destination are used for applying the rule.

Mode
Global configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config)#

Usage
Access lists are applied to interfaces by using the ip access‐group command as described in “ip
access‐group” on page 26‐86.
Valid access‐list‐numbers for extended ACLs are 100 to 199. For standard ACLs, valid values are 1
to 99.
All access lists have an implicit “deny any any” statment as their last entry.

Examples
This example shows how to define access list 145 to deny ICMP transmissions from any source
and for any destination:
C3(su)->router(Config)#access-list 145 deny ICMP any any

This example appends to access list 145 a permit statement that allows the host with IP address
88.255.255.254 to do an SSH remote login to any destination on TCP port 22.
C3(su)->router(Config)#access-list 145 permit tcp host 88.255.255.254 any eq 22

This example appends to access list 145 a permit statement that allows SNMP control traffic (from
UDP port 161) to be sent from IP addresses within the range defined by 88.255.128.0 0.0.127.255
to any destination.
C3(su)->router(Config)#access-list 145 permit udp 88.255.128.0 0.0.127.255 eq 161
any

ip access-group
Use this command to apply access restrictions to inbound frames on an interface when operating
in router mode. The no form of this command removes the specified access list.

Syntax
ip access-group access-list-number in
no ip access-group access-list-number in

Parameters
access‐list‐number

Specifies the number of the access list to be applied to the access list. This
is a decimal number from 1 to 199.

in

Filters inbound frames.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Interface configuration: C3(su)‐>router(Config‐if(Vlan ))#

26-86

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

ip access-group

Usage
ACLs must be applied per routing interface. An access list can be applied to inbound traffic only.
Access lists can now be applied to routed VLANs which incorporate LAGs.

Example
This example shows how to apply access list 1 for all inbound frames on the VLAN 1 interface.
Through the definition of access list 1, only frames with a source address on the 192.5.34.0/24
network will be routed. All the frames with other source addresses received on the VLAN 1
interface are dropped:
C3(su)->router(Config)#access-list 1 permit 192.5.34.0 0.0.0.255
C3(su)->router(Config)#interface vlan 1
C3(su)->router(Config-if(Vlan 1))#ip access-group 1 in

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

26-87

ip access-group

26-88

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

27
TACACS+ Configuration
This chapter provides information about the commands used to configure and monitor TACACS+
(Terminal Access Controller Access‐Control System Plus).
TACACS+ is a security protcol that provides services for secure authentication, CLI command
authorization, and CLI auditing for administrative access. It can be used as an alternative to the
standard RADIUS security protocol (RFC 2865). TACACS+ runs over TCP and encrypts the body
of each management packet.
Based on the now obsolete TACACS protocol (defined in RFC 1492), TACACS+ is defined in an
un‐published and expired Internet Draft draft‐grant‐tacacs‐02.txt, “The TACACS+ Protocol
Version 1.78,” January, 1997.
For detailed information about using TACACS+ in your network, refer to the Enterasys Feature
Guide “TACACS+ Configuration” located on the Enterasys web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/f.html#M
For information about...

Refer to page...

show tacacs

27-2

set tacacs

27-3

show tacacs server

27-3

set tacacs server

27-4

clear tacacs server

27-5

show tacacs session

27-6

set tacacs session

27-7

clear tacacs session

27-8

show tacacs command

27-9

set tacacs command

27-9

show tacacs singleconnect

27-10

set tacacs singleconnect

27-10

show tacacs interface

27-11

set tacacs interface

27-11

clear tacacs interface

27-12

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

27-1

TACACS+ Configuration

show tacacs

show tacacs
Use this command to display the current TACACS+ configuration information and status.

Syntax
show tacacs [state]

Parameters
state

(Optional) Displays only the TACACS+ client status.

Defaults
If state is not specified, all TACACS+ configuration information will be displayed.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Only.

Example
This example shows how to display all TACACS configuration information.
C3(ro)->show tacacs
TACACS+ status:Disabled
TACACS+ session accounting state:disable
TACACS+ command authorization state:disable
TACACS+ command auccounting state:disable
TACACS+ single connect state:Disabled
TACACS+ service: exec
TACACS+ session authorization A-V pairs:
access-level

attribute

value

read-only

priv-lvl

0

read-write

priv-lvl

1

super-user

priv-lvl

15

TACACS+ Server

IP address

Port

Timeout

--------------

----------

------

-------

1

192.168.10.1

49

10

Table 27‐1 provides an explanation of the command output.
Table 27-1

27-2

show tacacs Output Details

Output...

What it displays...

TACACS+ status

Whether the TACACS+ client is enabled or disabled.

TACACS+ session accounting
state

Whether TACACS+ session accounting is enabled or disabled.

TACACS+ command
authorization state

Whether TACACS+ command authorization is enabled or disabled.

TACACS+ command accounting
state

Whether TACACS+ command accounting is enabled or disabled.

set tacacs

TACACS+ Configuration

Table 27-1

show tacacs Output Details (Continued)

Output...

What it displays...

TACACS+ singleconnect state

Whether TACACS+ singleconnect is enabled or disabled.
When enabled, the TACACS+ client sends multiple requests over a
single TCP connection.

TACACS+ service

The name of the service that is requested by the TACACS+ client for
session authorization. “exec” is the default service name.

TACACS+ session authorization
A-V pairs

Displays the attribute – value pairs that are mapped to the read-only,
read-write, and super-user access privilege levels for the service
requested for session authorization.
The attribute names and values shown in the example above are the
default values.

TACACS+ Server

Displays the TACACS+ server information used by the TACACS+
client.

set tacacs
Use this command to enable or disable the TACACS+ client.

Syntax
set tacacs {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

Enables or disables the TACACS client.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Usage
The TACACS+ client can be enabled on the switch anytime, with or without a TACACS+ server
online. If the TACACS+ server is offline and TACACS+ is enabled, the login authentication is
switched to RADIUS or local, if enabled.

Examples
This example shows how to enable the TACACS+ client.
C3(rw)->set tacacs enable

show tacacs server
Use this command to display the current TACACS+ server configuration.

Syntax
show tacacs server {index | all}

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

27-3

TACACS+ Configuration

set tacacs server

Parameters
index

Display the configuration of the TACACS+ server identified by index.
The value of index can range from 1 to 2,147,483,647.

all

Display the configuration for all configured TACACS+ servers.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Only.

Example
This example displays configuration information for TACACS+ server 1.
C3(ro)->show tacacs server 1
TACACS+ Server

IP address

Port

Timeout

--------------

----------

------

-------

1

192.168.10.1

49

10

set tacacs server
Use this command to configure the TACACS+ server(s) to be used by the TACACS+ client. You can
configure the timeout value for all configured servers or a single server, or you can configure the
IP address, TCP port, and secret for a single server. For simplicity, two syntax statements are
shown.

Syntax
set tacacs server {all | index} timeout seconds
set tacacs server index address port secret

Parameters
all

Specify the timeout value for all configured TACACS+ servers.

index

Configure the TACACS+ server identified by index. The value of index
can range from 1 to 2,147,483,647.

timeout seconds

Set the timeout value for the specified server(s) in seconds. The value of
seconds can range from 1 to 180 seconds.
The default timeout value is 10 seconds.

address

Specify the IP address of the TACACS+ server.

port

Specify the TCP port for the TACACS+ server. The value of port can
range from 0 to 65535, but typically, port 49 is specified.

secret

Specify the secret (shared password) for the TACACS+ server.

Defaults
No TACACS+ servers are configured by default.
When you do configure a TACACS+ server, the default timeout value is 10 seconds.

27-4

clear tacacs server

TACACS+ Configuration

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Usage
Up to 5 TACACS+ servers can be configured, with the index value of 1 having the highest priority.
If you want to change the default timeout value for a specific server or all servers, you must enter
the command using the timeout parameter.
When at least one backup server has been configured and the switch loses contact with the
primary server, the switch will contact the next server in priority. If the switch was trying to
authenticate a user when the connection was lost, or if the default login access (read‐only
permissions) had been received, the switch will try to authenticate again.
If a user had already been authenticated and authorized, then the backup server is contacted
without requiring any authentication. The backup server will just authorize or account for the
packets coming in for that user. Since a task ID is associated with each accounting session, if there
is a failover to a backup server, the accounting information will still be associated with the correct
session using the task ID.
When a failover to a backup server occurs, syslog messages are generated containing the reason
for the failure.

Example
This example configures TACACS+ server 1. Then, the default timeout value of 10 seconds is
changed to 20 seconds.
C3(rw)->set tacacs server 1 192.168.10.10 49 mysecret
C3(rw)->set tacacs server 1 timeout 20

clear tacacs server
Use this command to remove one or all configured TACACS+ servers, or to return the timeout
value to its default value for one or all configured TACACS+ servers.

Syntax
clear tacacs server {all | index} [timeout]

Parameters
all

Specifies that all configured TACACS+ servers should be affected.

index

Specifies one TACACS+ server to be affected.

timeout

(Optional) Return the timeout value to its default value of 10 seconds.

Defaults
If timeout is not specified, the affected TACACS+ servers will be removed.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

27-5

TACACS+ Configuration

show tacacs session

Examples
This example removes TACACS+ server 1.
C3(rw)->clear tacacs server 1

This example resets the timeout value to its default value of 10 seconds for all configured
TACACS+ servers.
C3(rw)->clear tacacs server all timeout

show tacacs session
Use this command to display the current TACACS+ client session settings.

Syntax
show tacacs session {authorization | accounting}

Parameters
authorization

Display client session authorization settings.

accounting

Display client session accounting settings.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Only.

Examples
This example shows how to display client session authorization information:
C3(ro)->show tacacs session authorization
TACACS+ service: exec
TACACS+ session authorization A-V pairs:
access-level

attribute

value

read-only

priv-lvl

0

read-write

priv-lvl

1

super-user

priv-lvl

15

This example shows how to display client session accounting state.
C3(ro)->show tacacs session accounting
TACACS+ session accounting state:

27-6

enabled

set tacacs session

TACACS+ Configuration

set tacacs session
Use this command to enable or disable TACACS+ session accounting, or to configure TACACS+
session authorization parameters. For simplicity, separate syntax formats are shown for
configuring session accounting and session authorization.

Syntax
set tacacs session accounting {enable | disable}
set tacacs session authorization {service name | read-only attribute value |
read-write attribute value | super-user attribute value}

Parameters
accounting

Specifies that TACACS+ session accounting is being configured.

enable | disable

Enables or disables TACACS+ session accounting.

authorization

Specifies that TACACS+ session authorization is being configured.

service name

Specifies the name of the service that the TACACS+ client will request
from the TACACS+ server. The name specified here must match the
name of a service configured on the server. The default service name is
exec.

read‐only attribute
value

Specifies that the read‐only access privilege level should be matched to
a privilege level configured on the TACACS+ server by means of an
attribute‐value pair specified by attribute and value.
By default, attribute is “priv‐lvl” and value is 0.

read‐write attribute
value

Specifies that the read‐write access privilege level should be matched to
a privilege level configured on the TACACS+ server by means of an
attribute‐value pair specified by attribute and value.
By default, attribute is “priv‐lvl” and value is 1.

super‐user attribute
value

Specifies that the super‐user access privilege level should be matched to
a privilege level configured on the TACACS+ server by means of an
attribute‐value pair specified by attribute and value.
By default, attribute is “priv‐lvl” and value is 15.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Usage
When session accounting is enabled, the TACACS+ server will log accounting information, such as
start and stop times, IP address of the client, and so forth, for each authorized client session.
When the TACACS+ client is enabled on the switch (with the set tacacs enable command), the
session authorization parameters configured with this command are sent by the client to the
TACACS+ server when a session is initiated on the switch. The parameter values must match a
service and access level attribute‐value pairs configured on the server for the session to be
authorized. If the parameter values do not match, the session will not be allowed.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

27-7

TACACS+ Configuration

clear tacacs session

The service name and attribute‐value pairs can be any character string, and are determined by
your TACACS+ server configuration.
Since a task ID is associated with each accounting session, if there is a failover to a backup server,
the accounting information will still be associated with the correct session using the task ID.

Examples
This example configures the service requested by the TACACS+ client as the service name “basic.”
C3(rw)->set tacacs session authorization service basic

This example maps the read‐write access privilege level to an attribute named “priv‐lvl” with the
value of 5 configured on the TACACS+ server.
C3(rw)->set tacacs session authorization read-write priv-lvl 5

This example enables TACACS+ session accounting.
C3(rw)->set tacacs session accounting enable

clear tacacs session
Use this command to return the TACACS+ session authorization settings to their default values.

Syntax
clear tacacs session authorization {[service]|[read-only]|[read-write] |
[super-user]}

Parameters
authorization

Clears the TACACS+ session authorization parameters.

service

Clears the TACACS+ session authorization service name to the default
value of “exec.”

read‐only

Clears the TACACS+ session authorization read‐only attribute‐value
pair to their default values of “priv‐lvl” and 0.

read‐write

Clears the TACACS+ session authorization read‐write attribute‐value
pair to their default values of “priv‐lvl” and 1.

super‐user

Clears the TACACS+ session authorization super‐user attribute‐value
pair to their default values of “priv‐lvl” and 15.

Defaults
At least one of the session authorization parameters must be specified.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Examples
This example shows how to return the service name to the default of “exec.”
C3(rw)->clear tacacs session authorization service

This example shows how to return all the session authorization parameters to their default values.
C3(rw)->clear tacacs session authorization service read-only read-write superuser

27-8

show tacacs command

TACACS+ Configuration

show tacacs command
Use this command to display the status (enabled or disabled) of TACACS+ accounting or
authorization on a per‐command basis.

Syntax
show tacacs command {accounting | authorization}

Parameters
accounting

Display the status of TACACS+ accounting on a per‐command basis.

authorization

Display the status of TACACS+ authorization on a per‐command basis.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Example
This example shows how to display the state of the TACACS+ client’s command authorization.
C3(rw)->show tacacs command authorization
TACACS+ command authorization state:

enabled

set tacacs command
Use this command to enable or disable TACACS+ accounting or authorization on a per‐command
basis.

Syntax
set tacacs command {accounting | authorization} {enable | disable}

Parameters
accounting |
authorization

Specifies either TACACS+ accounting or authorization to be enabled or
disabled.

enable | disable

Enable or disable accounting or authorization on a per‐command basis.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Usage
In order for per‐command accounting or authorization by a TACACS+ server to take place, the
command must be executed within an authorized session.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

27-9

TACACS+ Configuration

show tacacs singleconnect

When per‐command accounting is enabled, the TACACS+ server will log accounting information,
such as start and stop times, IP address of the client, and so forth, for each command executed
during the session.
When per‐command authorization is enabled, the TACACS+ server will check whether each
command is permitted for that authorized session and return a success or fail. If the authorization
fails, the command is not executed.

Example
This example shows how to enable TACACS+ authorization on a command basis.
C3(rw)->set tacacs command authorization enable

show tacacs singleconnect
Use this command to display the current status of the TACACS+ client’s ability to send multiple
requests over a single TCP connection.

Syntax
show tacacs singleconnect

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Example
This example shows how to display the state of the TACACS+ client’s ability to send multiple
requests over a single connection.
C3(rw)->show tacacs singleconnect
TACACS+ single-connect state:

enabled

set tacacs singleconnect
Use this command to enable or disable the ability of the TACACS+ client to send multiple requests
over a single TCP connection. When enabled, the TACACS+ client will use a single TCP
connection for all requests to a given TACACS+ server.

Syntax
set tacacs singleconnect {enable | disable}

Parameters
enable | disable

27-10

Enable or disable the ability to send multiple requests over a single TCP
connection.

show tacacs interface

TACACS+ Configuration

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, Read‐Write.

Examples
This example shows how to disable sending multiple requests over a single connection.
C3(rw)->set tacacs singleconnect disable

show tacacs interface
Use this command to display the interface used for the source IP address of the TACACS+ packets
generated by the switch.

Syntax
show tacacs interface

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐only.

Example
This example displays the output of this command. In this case, the IP address assigned to
loopback interface 1 will be used as the source IP address of the TACACS+ packets generated by
the switch.
C3(rw)->show tacacs interface
loopback 1

192.168.10.1

set tacacs interface
Use this command to specify the interface used for the source IP address of the TACACS+ packets
generated by the switch.

Syntax
set tacacs interface {loopback loop-ID | vlan vlan-ID}

Parameters
loopback loop‐ID

Specifies the loopback interface to be used. The value of loop‐ID can
range from 0 to 7.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

27-11

TACACS+ Configuration

clear tacacs interface

vlan vlan‐ID

Specifies the VLAN interface to be used. The value of vlan‐ID can range
from 1 to 4093.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command allows you to configure the source IP address used by the TACACS+ application
on the switch when generating packets for management purposes. Any of the management
interfaces, including VLAN routing interfaces, can be configured as the source IP address used in
packets generated by the TACACS+ client.
An interface must have an IP address assigned to it before it can be set by this command.
If no interface is specified, then the IP address of the Host interface will be used.
If a non‐loopback interface is configured with this command, application packet egress is
restricted to that interface if the server can be reached from that interface. Otherwise, the packets
are transmitted over the first available route. Packets from the application server are received on
the configured interface.
If a loopback interface is configured, and there are multiple paths to the application server, the
outgoing interface (gateway) is determined based on the best route lookup. Packets from the
application server are then received on the sending interface. If route redundancy is required,
therefore, a loopback interface should be configured.

Example
This example configures an IP address on VLAN interface 100 and then sets that interface as the
TACACS+ client source IP address.
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#exit
C3(rw)->router(Config)#exit
C3(rw)->router#exit
C3(rw)->router>exit
C3(rw)->set tacacs interface vlan 100

C3(rw)->show tacacs interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

clear tacacs interface
Use this command to clear the interface used for the source IP address of the TACACS+ client back
to the default of the Host interface.

Syntax
clear tacacs interface

Parameters
27-12

clear tacacs interface

TACACS+ Configuration

None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This command returns the interface used for the source IP address of the TACACS+ client back to
the default of the Host interface.
C3(rw)->show tacacs interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

C3(rw)->clear tacacs interface
C3(rw)->

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

27-13

TACACS+ Configuration

27-14

clear tacacs interface

28
sFlow Configuration
This chapter provides information about the commands used to configure and monitor the sFlow
system.
For information about...

Refer to page...

Overview

28-1

Commands

28-4

Overview
sFlow is a method for monitoring high‐speed switched and routed networks. sFlow technology is
built into network equipment and gives visibility into network activity, enabling effective
management and control of network resources.
An sFlow solution consists of an sFlow Agent, embedded in the network device such as a switch
or router, and an sFlow Collector. The sFlow Agent uses sampling technology to capture traffic
statistics from the device it is monitoring and immediately forwards the sampled traffic statistics
to an sFlow Collector for analysis in sFlow datagrams.
The sFlow Agent uses two forms of sampling— statistical packet‐based sampling of switched or
routed Packet Flows, and time‐based sampling of counters.
Version 5 of sFlow is described in detail in the document entitled “sFlow Version 5” available from
sFlow.org (http://www.sflow.org).

Using sFlow in Your Network
The advantages of using sFlow include:
•

sFlow makes it possible to monitor ports of a switch, with no impact on the distributed
switching performance. (See “Usage Notes” on page 28‐3 for more information.)

•

sFlow requires very little memory or CPU usage. Samples are not aggregated into a flow‐
table on the switch — they are forwarded immediately over the network to the sFlow
Collector.

•

The system is tolerant to packet loss in the network. (The statistical model means loss is
equivalent to a slight change in the sampling rate.)

•

The sFlow Collector can receive data from multiple switches, providing a real‐time
synchronized view of the whole network.

•

The sFlow Collector can analyze traffic patterns for whatever protocols are found in the
packet headers (for example, TCP/IP, IPX, Ethernet, AppleTalk). There is no need for the layer
2 switch to decode and understand all protocols.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

28-1

sFlow Configuration

Overview

Definitions
The following table describes some of the main sFlow terms and concepts.
Table 28-1

sFlow Definitions

Term

Definition

Data Source

A Data Source refers to a location within a Network Device that
can make traffic measurements. Possible Data Sources include
interfaces, physical entities within the device such as the
backplane, and VLANs.

Packet Flow

A Packet Flow is defined as the path or trajectory that a packet
takes through a Network Device (That is, the path that a packet
takes as it is received on one interface, is subjected to a switching/
routing decision, and is then sent on another interface).

Packet Flow Sampling

Packet Flow Sampling refers to the random selection of a fraction
of the Packet Flows observed at a Data Source.

Sampling Rate

The Sampling Rate specifies the ratio of packets observed at the
Data Source to the samples generated.

Sampling Interval

The time period between successive Counter Samples.

sFlow Instance

An sFlow Instance refers to a measurement process associated
with a Data Source.

sFlow Agent

The sFlow Agent provides an interface for configuring the sFlow
Instances within a device.

sFlow Collector

An sFlow Collector receives sFlow Datagrams from one or more
sFlow Agents. The sFlow Collector may also configure sFlow
Instances using the configuration mechanisms provided by the
sFlow Agent.

sFlow Datagram

An sFlow Datagram is a UDP datagram that contains the
measurement data, and information about the measurement
source and process.

sFlow Agent Functionality
Packet flow sampling and counter sampling are performed by sFlow Instances associated with
individual Data Sources within the sFlow Agent. Packet flow sampling and counter sampling are
designed as part of an integrated system. Both types of samples are combined in sFlow datagrams.
Packet flow sampling will cause a steady, but random, stream of sFlow datagrams to be sent to the
sFlow Collector. Counter samples may be taken opportunistically in order to fill these datagrams.
In order to perform packet flow sampling, an sFlow Sampler Instance is configured with a
sampling rate. The packet flow sampling process results in the generation of packet flow records.
In order to perform counter sampling, an sFlow Poller Instance is configured with a polling
interval. The counter sampling process results in the generation of counter records. The sFlow
Agent collects counter records and packet flow records and sends them in the form of sFlow
datagrams to sFlow Collectors.

Sampling Mechanisms
Two forms of sampling are performed by the sFlow Agent: statistical packet‐based sampling of
switched or routed packet flows, and time‐based sampling of counters.

28-2

Overview

sFlow Configuration

Packet Flow Sampling
The packet flow sampling mechanism carried out by each sFlow Instance ensures that any packet
observed at a Data Source has an equal chance of being sampled, irrespective of the packet flow(s)
to which it belongs.
Packet flow sampling is accomplished as follows:
1.

When a packet arrives on an interface, the Network Device makes a filtering decision to
determine whether the packet should be dropped.

2.

If the packet is not filtered (dropped), a destination interface is assigned by the switching/
routing function.

3.

At this point, a decision is made on whether or not to sample the packet. The mechanism
involves a counter that is decremented with each packet. When the counter reaches zero a
sample is taken.

4.

When a sample is taken, the counter indicating how many packets to skip before taking the
next sample is reset. The value of the counter is set to a random integer where the sequence of
random integers used over time is the Sampling Rate.

Packet flow sampling results in the generation of Packet Flow Records. A Packet Flow Record
contains information about the attributes of a packet flow, including:
•

Information on the packet itself — a packet header, packet length, and packet encapsulation.

•

Information about the path the packet took through the device, including information relating
to the selection of the forwarding path.

Counter Sampling
The primary objective of the counter sampling is to, in an efficient way, periodically export
counters associated with Data Sources. A maximum sampling interval is assigned to each sFlow
Instance associated with a Data Source.
Counter sampling is accomplished as follows:
1.

The sFlow Agent keep a list of counter sources being sampled.

2.

When a Packet Flow Sample is generated, the sFlow Agent examines the list of counter
sources and adds counters to the sample datagram, least recently sampled first.
Counters are only added to the datagram if the sources are within a short period, 5 seconds
say, of failing to meet the required sampling interval.

3.

Periodically, say every second, the sFlow Agent examines the list of counter sources and sends
any counters that need to be sent to meet the sampling interval requirement.

The set of counters is a fixed set defined in Section 5 of the document entitled “sFlow Version 5”
available from sFlow.org (http://www.sflow.org).

Usage Notes
Although the switch hardware has the capability to sample packets on any port, to ensure that
CPU utilitization is not compromised, the number of sFlow samplers that can be configured per
switch or stack of switches is limited to a maximum of 32. There is no limitation on the number of
pollers that can be configured.
Under certain circumstances, the switch will drop packet samples that the sFlow implementation
is not able to count and therefore cannot correctly report sample_pool and drops fields of flow
samples sent to the sFlow Collector. Under heavy load, this sample loss could be significant and
could therefore affect the accuracy of the sampling analysis.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

28-3

sFlow Configuration

Commands

sFlow is disabled by default on SecureStack and G‐Series devices.

Example Configuration
The general procedure for configuring sFlow includes:
1.

Configure your sFlow Collector information to be used by the sFlow Agent on the switch. Up
to eight Collectors can be configured. The information is stored in the sFlowReceiverTable.

2.

Enable and configure sFlow packet flow sampling instances on each port.

3.

Enable and configure sFlow counter sampling poller instances on each port.

The following is an example of the commands used to configure sFlow:
# configure sFlow Collector 1
# accept defaults for datagram size and port
set sflow receiver 1 owner enterasys timeout 180000
set sflow receiver 1 ip 192.168.16.91
#
#configure packet sampling instances on ports 1 through 12
#assign to sFlow Collector 1
set sflow port ge.1.1-12 sampler 1
set sflow port ge.1.1-12 sampler maxheadersize 256
set sflow port ge.1.1-12 sampler rate 2048
#
#configure counter poller instances on ports 1 through 12
#assign to sFlow Collector 1
set sflow port ge.1.1-12 poller 1
set sflow port ge.1.1-12 poller interval 20

Commands
For information about...

28-4

Refer to page...

show sflow receivers

28-5

set sflow receiver owner

28-7

set sflow receiver ip

28-7

set sflow receiver maxdatagram

28-8

set sflow receiver port

28-9

clear sflow receiver

28-9

set sflow port poller

28-10

show sflow pollers

28-11

clear sflow port poller

28-12

set sflow port sampler

28-12

show sflow samplers

28-13

clear sflow port sampler

28-14

show sflow receivers

sFlow Configuration

For information about...

Refer to page...

set sflow interface

28-14

show sflow interface

28-15

clear sflow interface

28-16

show sflow agent

28-17

show sflow receivers
Use this command to display the contents of the sFlow Receivers Table, or to display information
about a specific sFlow Collector listed in the table.

Syntax
show sflow receivers [index]

Parameters
index

(Optional) Specifies a specific Collector to display information about.

Defaults
The contents of the sFlow Receivers Table is displayed.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Usage
Executing this command without specifying an index into the sFlow Receivers Table displays
information about all the Collectors configured on the switch.
If you specify an individual Collector by its index number, additional information is displayed for
that Collector.

Examples
This example displays the sFlow Receivers Table.
C3(su)->show sflow receivers
Receiver Owner
Index

Time out

String

Max Datagram Port

IP Address

Size

-------- -------- ---------- ------------ ----- ------------------1

ets1

17766

1400

6343

10.1.2.117

2

0

1400

6343

0.0.0.0

3

0

1400

6343

0.0.0.0

4

0

1400

6343

0.0.0.0

5

0

1400

6343

0.0.0.0

6

0

1400

6343

0.0.0.0

7

0

1400

6343

0.0.0.0

8

0

1400

6343

0.0.0.0

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

28-5

sFlow Configuration

show sflow receivers

This example displays information about the Collector with index 1.
C3(su)->show sflow receivers 1
Receiver Index

1

Owner String

ets1

Time out

17758

IP Address:

10.1.2.117

Address Type

IPv4

Port

6343

Datagram Version

5

Maximum Datagram Size

1400

The following table describes the output fields.
Table 28-2

28-6

show sflow receivers Output Descriptions

Output...

What it displays...

Receiver Index

Index number of a specific Collector entry in the sFlow Receivers
Table. Up to 8 Collectors may be configured.

Owner String

Identity string of the Collector. An empty string indicates that the
entry is unclaimed and cannot be assigned to a sampler or poller
instance. The owner string is configured with the set sflow receiver
owner command.

Time Out

The time remaining, in seconds, before the sampler or poller is
released and stops sending samples to this receiver/Collector.
The timeout value is configured with the set sflow receiver owner
command.

IP Address

The IP address of this receiver/Collector. The IP address is
configured with the set sflow receiver ip command.

Address Type

Whether the Collector IP address is IPv4 or IPv6.

Port

The UDP port number on this receiver/Collector to which sample
datagrams should be sent. The default value is 6343, which can
be changed with the set sflow receiver port command.

Datagram Version

Specifies the sFlow version used for formatting the sample
datagrams.

Max Datagram Size

The maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single
sample datagram to this receiver/Collector. The default value is
1400 bytes, which can be changed with the set sflow receiver
maxdatagram command.

set sflow receiver owner

sFlow Configuration

set sflow receiver owner
Use this command to configure the owner identity string and timeout value for an sFlow Collector
in the switch’s sFlow Receivers Table.

Syntax
set sflow receiver index owner owner-string timeout timeout

Parameters
index

Index number in the sFlow Receivers Table for the receiver/Collector
being configured. The index can range from 1 to 8.

owner owner‐string

The identity string of the receiver/Collector being configured.
The string can be up to 127 characters in length.

timeout timeout

The time, in seconds, remaining before the receiver/Collector being
configured and all associated samplers and pollers expire.
The value can range from 0 to 4294967295 seconds.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
In order for an sFlow Collector to be assigned to receive sample datagrams from the sFlow Agent
on the switch, an entry for that Collector must be configured in the switch’s sFlow Receivers Table.
An entry must contain an owner identity string, a non‐zero timeout value, and the IP address of
the Collector. Configure the IP address with the set sflow receiver ip command.
An entry without an owner identity string is considered unclaimed and cannot be assigned as a
receiver to sampler or poller instances.
Once the timer set by this command expires, the receiver/Collector and all the samplers and
pollers associated with this Collector expire and are removed from the switch’s configuration. In
order to start sending sample data to the Collector again, the Collector must be reconfigured with
a new timeout value and samplers and pollers must be configured again. Therefore, you should
consider setting the timeout value to the largest value that is reasonable for your environment.

Example
This example configures an entry for index 1 in the sFlow Receivers Table.
C3(su)->set sflow receiver 1 owner ets1 timeout 180000

set sflow receiver ip
Use this command to configure the IP address of an sFlow Collector in the switch’s sFlow
Receivers Table.

Syntax
set sflow receiver index ip ipaddr
SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

28-7

sFlow Configuration

set sflow receiver maxdatagram

Parameters
index

Index number in the sFlow Receivers Table for the receiver/Collector
being configured. The index can range from 1 to 8.

ip ipaddr

The IP address of the receiver/Collector being configured. An IP
address of 0.0.0.0 means that no sample datagrams will be sent to the
Collector.

Defaults
The default IP address is 0.0.0.0.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
In order for an sFlow Collector to be assigned to receive sample datagrams from the sFlow Agent
on the switch, an entry for that Collector must be configured in the switch’s sFlow Receivers Table.
An entry must contain an owner identity string, a non‐zero timeout value, and the IP address of
the Collector. Configure the owner identity string and timeout value with the set sflow receiver
owner command.
Sample datagrams will not be sent to a Collector whose entry in the sFlow Receivers Table has an
IP address of 0.0.0.0.

Example
This example configures an IP address of 10.10.10.10 to index entry 1.
C3(su)->set sflow receiver 1 ip 10.10.10.10

set sflow receiver maxdatagram
Use this command to set the maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample
datagram.

Syntax
set sflow receiver index maxdatagram bytes

Parameters
index

Index number in the sFlow Receivers Table for the receiver/Collector
being configured. The index can range from 1 to 8.

maxdatagram bytes

Specifies the maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single
sample datagram. This size should be set to avoid fragmentation of the
sFlow datagrams.
The value of bytes can range from 200 to 9116. The default is 1400.

Defaults
Default maximum datagram size is 1400 bytes.

28-8

set sflow receiver port

sFlow Configuration

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example sets the maximum datagram size to 2800 bytes for index entry 1.
C3(su)->set sflow receiver 1 maxdatagram 2800

set sflow receiver port
Use this command to configure the UDP port on the sFlow Controller to which the switch will
send sample datagrams.

Syntax
set sflow receiver index port port

Parameters
index

Index number in the sFlow Receivers Table for the receiver/Collector
being configured. The index can range from 1 to 8.

port port

Specifies the UDP port on the receiver/Collector to which the sample
datagrams should be sent. By default, the port is 6343.

Defaults
The default port value is 6343.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example changes the sFlow receiver port on the Collector to 1234.
C3(su)->set sflow receiver 1 port 1234

clear sflow receiver
Use this command to delete a receiver/Collector from the sFlow Receivers Table, or to return
certain parameters to their default values for the specified Collector.

Syntax
clear sflow receiver index [ip | maxdatagram | owner [timeout] | port]

Parameters
index

Index number in the sFlow Receivers Table for the receiver/Collector
being configured. The index can range from 1 to 8.

ip

(Optional) Clear the IP address to 0.0.0.0. Sample datagrams are not sent
to Collectors with an IP address of 0.0.0.0.

maxdatagram

(Optional) Return the maximum datagram size to 1400 bytes.

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

28-9

sFlow Configuration

set sflow port poller

owner

(Optional) Clear the owner identity string. Entries in the sFlow Receiver
Table without an identity string are considered unclaimed.

timeout

(Optional) Clear the timeout value of the specified entry.

port port

(Optional) Clear the UDP port on the receiver/Collector to which the
sample datagrams should be sent. The value is reset to the default of
6343.

Defaults
If no optional parameters are specified, the entire entry is cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
You can clear the IP address, maximum datagram size, or UDP port without deleting an entry
from the sFlow Receivers Table. If you clear the owner or timeout, the entire entry is cleared. If you
enter only an entry index and none of the optional parameters, the entire entry is cleared.
Once an entry is cleared, all pollers and samplers associated with that receiver are also removed
from the switch configuration.

Example
This example returns the maximum datagram size to the default of 1400 bytes for the Collector
with index 1.
C3(su)->clear sflow receiver 1 maxdatagram

set sflow port poller
Use this command to configure poller instances on ports, or data sources.

Syntax
set sflow port port-string poller {index | interval seconds}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or ports (data sources) on which the poller instance is
being configured.

index

Index number in the sFlow Receivers Table for the receiver/Collector
with which the poller instance is associated. The index can range from 1
to 8.

interval seconds

Specifies the polling interval, which can range from 0 to 86400 seconds.
A value of 0 disables counter sampling.

Defaults
The default interval value is 0 seconds, which disables counter sampling.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

28-10

show sflow pollers

sFlow Configuration

Usage
A poller instance performs counter sampling on the data source to which it is configured. Refer to
“Sampling Mechanisms” on page 28‐2 for more information.
You must first associate a receiver/Collector in the sFlow Receivers Table with the poller instance,
before configuring the polling interval.
When a receiver times out or is cleared from the sFlow Receivers Table, all poller and sampler
instances associated with that receiver are also cleared from the switch’s configuration.

Example
The following example configures poller instances on ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.8 and associates
them with receiver 1. Then, a polling interval of 240 seconds is configured.
C3(su)->set sflow port ge.1.1-8 poller 1
C3(su)->set sflow port ge.1.1-8 poller interval 240

show sflow pollers
Use this command to display information about configured poller instances.

Syntax
show sflow pollers

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example displays the output of this command.
C3(su)->show sflow pollers
Poller
Data Source
-----------

Receiver
Index
-------

Poller
Interval
-------

ge.1.1

1

240

ge.1.2

1

240

ge.1.3

1

240

ge.1.4

1

240

ge.1.5

1

240

ge.1.6

1

240

ge.1.7

1

240

ge.1.8

1

240

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

28-11

sFlow Configuration

clear sflow port poller

clear sflow port poller
Use this command to change the poller interval or to remove poller instances.

Syntax
clear sflow port port-string poller [interval]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or ports on which the poller instance is being cleared.

interval

(Optional) Specifies that the polling interval should be cleared to 0. A
value of 0 disables counter sampling.

Defaults
If interval is not specified, the poller instance is cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes the poller instance on port ge.1.1.
C3(su)->clear sflow port ge.1.1 poller

set sflow port sampler
Use this command to configure sampler instances on ports, or data sources.

Syntax
set sflow port port-string sampler {index | maxheadersize bytes | rate rate}

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or ports (data sources) on which the sampler instance
is being configured.

index

Index number in the sFlow Receivers Table for the receiver/Collector
with which the sampler instance is associated. The index can range from
1 to 8.

maxheadersize bytes

Specifies the maximum number of bytes that should be copied from the
sampler packet. The value can range from 20 to 256 bytes. The default is
128 bytes.

rate rate

Specifies the statistical sampling rate for sampling from this data
source. The value of rate specifies the number of incoming packets from
which one packet will be sampled. For example, if the rate is 1024, one
packet will be sampled from every 1024 ingressing packets on this data
source.
The rate can range from 1024 to 65536. A value of 0 disables sampling.
The default value is 0.

28-12

show sflow samplers

sFlow Configuration

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
A sampler instance performs packet flow sampling on the data source to which it is configured.
Refer to “Sampling Mechanisms” on page 28‐2 for more information.
You must first associate a receiver/Collector in the sFlow Receivers Table with the sampler
instance, before configuring the sampling rate or maximum number of bytes copied from sampled
packets.
When a receiver times out or is cleared from the sFlow Receivers Table, all poller and sampler
instances associated with that receiver are also cleared from the switch’s configuration.
A maximum of 32 sampler instances can be configured per switch or stack of switches.

Example
The following example configures sampler instances on ports ge.1.1 through ge.1.8 and associates
them with receiver 1. Then, a sampling rate of 1024 is configured. The default max header size of
128 bytes is used.
C3(su)->set sflow port ge.1.1-8 sampler 1
C3(su)->set sflow port ge.1.1-8 sampler rate 1024

show sflow samplers
Use this command to display information about configured sampler instances.

Syntax
show sflow samplers

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example displays the output of this command.
C3(su)->show sflow samplers
Sampler
Data Source
-----------

Receiver
Index
-------

Packet
Sampling Rate
-------------

Max Header
Size
----------

ge.1.1

1

1024

128

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

28-13

sFlow Configuration

clear sflow port sampler

ge.1.2

1

1024

128

ge.1.3

1

1024

128

ge.1.4

1

1024

128

ge.1.5

1

1024

128

ge.1.6

1

1024

128

ge.1.7

1

1024

128

ge.1.8

1

1024

128

clear sflow port sampler
Use this command to change the sampler rate or maximum header size, or to remove sampler
instances.

Syntax
clear sflow port port-string sampler [maxheadersize | rate]

Parameters
port‐string

Specifies the port or ports on which the sampler instance is being
cleared.

maxheadersize

(Optional) Specifies that the maximum header size should be cleared to
the default value of 128 bytes.

rate

(Optional) Specifies that the sampling rate should be cleared to the
default value of 0, which disables sampling by the instance.

Defaults
If neither optional parameter is specified, the sampler instance is cleared.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This example removes the sampler instance on port ge.1.1.
C3(su)->clear sflow port ge.1.1 sampler

set sflow interface
Use this command to specify the interface used for the source IP address of the sFlow Agent when
sending sampling datagrams to the sFlow Collector.

Syntax
set sflow interface {loopback loop-ID | vlan vlan-ID}

Parameters
loopback loop‐ID

28-14

Specifies the loopback interface to be used. The value of loop‐ID can
range from 0 to 7.

show sflow interface

sFlow Configuration

vlan vlan‐ID

Specifies the VLAN interface to be used. The value of vlan‐ID can range
from 1 to 4093.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Usage
This command allows you to configure the management interface used by the sFlow Agent when
sending sampling datagrams to the sFlow Collector. Any of the interfaces, including VLAN
routing interfaces, can be configured as the management interface.
An interface must have an IP address assigned to it before it can be set by this command.
If no interface is specified, then the Host VLAN will be used as the management interface.
If a non‐loopback interface is configured with this command, application packet egress is
restricted to that interface if the server can be reached from that interface. Otherwise, the packets
are transmitted over the first available route. Packets from the application server are received on
the configured interface.
If a loopback interface is configured, and there are multiple paths to the application server, the
outgoing interface (gateway) is determined based on the best route lookup. Packets from the
application server are then received on the sending interface. If route redundancy is required,
therefore, a loopback interface should be configured.

Example
This example configures an IP address on VLAN interface 100 and then sets that interface as the
management interface for the sFlow Agent.
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#ip address 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0
C3(rw)->router(Config-if(Vlan 100))#exit
C3(rw)->router(Config)#exit
C3(rw)->router#exit
C3(rw)->router>exit
C3(rw)->set sflow interface vlan 100

C3(rw)->show sflow interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

show sflow interface
Use this command to display the interface used by the sFlow Agent when sending sampling
datagrams to the sFlow Collector.

Syntax
show sflow interface

Parameters

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

28-15

sFlow Configuration

clear sflow interface

None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch mode, read‐only.

Example
This example displays the output of this command. In this case, the IP address assigned to
loopback interface 1 will be used as the source IP address of the sFlow Agent.
C3(rw)->show sflow interface
loopback 1

192.168.10.1

clear sflow interface
Use this command to clear the management interface used by the sFlow Agent back to the default
of the Host VLAN.

Syntax
clear sflow interface

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐write.

Example
This command returns the managment interface used by the sFlow Agent back to the default of
the Host VLAN.
C3(rw)->show sflow interface
vlan 100

192.168.10.1

C3(rw)->clear sflow interface
C3(rw)->

28-16

show sflow agent

sFlow Configuration

show sflow agent
Use this command to display information about the sFlow Agent.

Syntax
show sflow agent

Parameters
None.

Defaults
None.

Mode
Switch command, read‐only.

Example
This example displays the output of this command.
C3(rw)->show sflow agent
sFlow Version
IP Address

1.3;Broadcom Corp.;06.03.00.0001T
192.168.1.6

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

28-17

sFlow Configuration

28-18

show sflow agent

A
Policy and Authentication Capacities
This appendix lists the policy and authentication capacities of the SecureStack C3 as of the date
this document was published. Please refer to the Release Notes for your firmware version for the
latest capacity information.

Policy Capacities
Refer to the “Configuring Policy” Feature Guide for an in‐depth discussion of Policy
configuration. This Feature Guide is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/
Table A-1

Policy Capacities

Feature

Capacity

Maximum policy roles (profiles) per system

15

Maximum number of unique rules per system

768

Maximum number of ether type rules

128

Maximum number of MAC rules

128

Maximum number of Layer 3/4 rules

512

Maximum number of rules per single role

100

Maximum number of masks

No limit

CoS rate limiting (IRL) support

Yes

Priority-based rate limiting

No

Rule-based rate limiting

No

Role-based rate limiting

Yes

Fixed rule precedence

Yes

Supported rule types
ether type (numuser = 1)1

vlan/cos/drop/fwd (max 7 vlan rules per profile)

mac dest/mac source

cos/drop/fwd

ip protocol1

cos/drop/fwd

ip dest socket/ip source socket

cos/drop/fwd

ip tos1

cos/drop/fwd

tcp dest port/ tcp source port

cos/drop/fwd

SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide

A-1

Policy and Authentication Capacities

Table A-1

Authentication Capacities

Policy Capacities (Continued)

Feature

Capacity
udp dest port/udp source port
icmp

type1

cos/drop/fwd
No

1. These rules cannot be masked.

Authentication Capacities
Refer to the “Configuring User Authentication” Feature Guide for an in‐depth discussion of
authentication configuration. This Feature Guide is located on the Enterasys Networks web site:
http://www.enterasys.com/support/manuals/
Table A-2

Authentication Capacities

Authentication Feature

Capacity

IEEE 802.1x (dot1x) authentication

Supported

MAC-based authentication

Supported

Port Web Authentication (PWA)

Supported

RFC 3580 dynamic VLAN assignment based on
authentication response

Supported, for 802.1x, MAC-based, and PWA
authentication methods

Multi-user authentication maximum users per port
when policy maptable response is:
policy mode

3

both, hybrid mode

3

tunnel mode

6

User + IP phone
(Configured with a policy admin rule)
Multiauth numusers set to 2

A-2

Supported

Index
Numerics
802.1D 9-1
802.1p 11-17, 12-1
802.1Q 10-1
802.1s 9-2
802.1w 9-1
802.1x 26-7, 26-23

A
Access Groups 26-86
Access Lists 26-83 to 26-84
Addresses
MAC, adding entries to routing
table 19-5
setting the router ID address 20-12
Advertised Ability 7-16
AES encryption protocol 8-10
Alias
node 14-40
Area Border Routers (ABRs) 20-21
ARP
dynamic inspection 17-15
entries, adding in routing
mode 19-13
proxy, enabling 19-14
timeout 19-15
Authentication
EAPOL 26-23
MAC 26-25
MD5 20-20
OSPF
MD5 20-20
simple password 20-19
Port web 26-68
RADIUS server 26-7, 26-10
SSH 26-81
Auto-negotiation 7-16

starting 1-6
Command History Buffer 14-14, 14-15
Command Line Interface. See also CLI
Configuration
clearing switch parameters 3-51
modes for router operation 18-2
Configuration Files
copying 3-45
deleting 3-46
displaying 3-43
executing 3-44
show running config 3-46
show running-config 19-6
Contexts (SNMP) 8-3
Copying Configuration or Image
Files 3-45
CoS
flood control 11-19
rate limiting 11-17
Cost
area default 20-23
OSPF 20-15, 20-23
Spanning Tree port 9-40

D

banner motd 3-25
Baud Rate 3-31
Broadcast
settings for IP routing 19-16
suppression, enabling on ports 7-33

Defaults
CLI behavior, described 1-8
factory installed 1-2
DES encryption protocol 8-10
DHCP server, configuring 16-1
DHCP snooping
basic configuration 17-3
database 17-2
overview 17-1
DHCP/BOOTP Relay 16-1
DHCPv6
about 24-1
configuring 24-1
DVMRP 20-33
Dynamic ARP inspection
basic configuration 17-18
overview 17-15
Dynamic policy profile
assignment 26-3

C

E

CDP Discovery Protocol 6-1
CIDR 20-7
Cisco Discovery Protocol 6-7
Class of Service 11-7, 11-11,
11-17 to 11-23, 12-1
Class of Service (CoS) 11-17
Classification Policies 11-1
Clearing NVRAM 3-51
CLI
closing 3-49
scrolling screens 1-9

EAP pass-through 26-2, 26-18
EAPOL 26-23
encryption protocol
SNMP 8-9

B

F
Flood control, via CoS 11-19
Flow Control 7-22
Forbidden VLAN port 10-14

G
Getting help xxxvii
GVRP
enabling and disabling 10-23
purpose of 10-20
timer 10-24

H
Hardware
show system 3-14, 3-26
Hello Packets 20-18
Help
keyword lookups 1-8
Host VLAN 10-18
hostprotect, configuring 3-56
hybrid authentication, about 26-52

I
ICMP 14-16
IGMP 13-1
enabling and disabling 13-2, 13-10
Image File
copying 3-45
downloading 3-32
Ingress Filtering 10-8, 10-11
Interface Configuration Mode 19-3
Interface(s)
configuring OSPF parameters 20-11
configuring settings for IP 19-1
loopback, configuring 22-10
RIP passive 20-8
RIP receive 20-9
RIP send 20-4
tunnel, configuring 19-8, 22-10
IP
access lists 26-83 to 26-84
address, setting for a routing
interface 19-5
routes, adding in router mode 19-21
routes, managing in switch
mode 14-19
IPv6
about 22-1
addresses, configuring 22-10
addresses, setting 21-3
configuration defaults 22-2
default router, setting 21-5
DHCPv6, configuring 24-1
displaying information 22-22
gateway, setting 21-5
general configuration
commands 22-3
interface configuration
commands 22-10
management 21-1
Neighbor Discovery Protocol

Index -1

about 22-1
configuring 22-14
displaying cache 21-6
OSPFv3, configuring 25-1
IPv6 proxy routing 23-1
IRDP 20-37

J
Jumbo Frame Support 7-14

K
Keyword Lookups 1-8

L
License key
advanced routing 20-1
licenses
license key field descriptions 4-1
procedure for stack environment 4-1
Line Editing Commands 1-10
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
configuring 6-13
Link State Advertisements
displaying 20-27
retransmit interval 20-17
transmit delay 20-17
LLDP
configuring 6-13
LLDP-MED
configuring 6-14
Lockout
set system 3-7
Logging 14-1
Login
administratively configured 1-7
default 1-7
setting accounts 3-2
via Telnet 1-7
Loopback interfaces,
configuring 22-10

M
MAC Addresses
displaying 14-22
MAC Authentication 26-25
MAC Locking 26-57
maximum static entries 26-63
static 26-63
Management VLAN 10-2
maptable response 26-52
MD5 Authentication 20-20
motd 3-25
Multicast 20-49
Multicast Filtering 13-1, 13-2
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP) 9-2

N
Name
setting for a VLAN 10-6
setting for the system 3-27
Neighbor Discovery Protocol

Index - 2

configuring 22-14
Neighbors
OSPF 20-30
Network Management
addresses and routes 14-19
monitoring switch events and
status 14-14
Networks
OSPF 20-14
Node Alias 14-40
NSSA Areas 20-23
NVRAM
clearing 3-51

O
OSPF
Area Border Routers (ABRs) 20-21
areas, defining NSSAs 20-23
areas, defining range 20-21
areas, defining stub 20-22
configuration mode, enabling 20-13
configuration tasks 20-11
cost 20-15, 20-23
hello packet intervals 20-18
information,
displaying 20-26 to 20-31
link state advertisements 20-27
neighbors 20-30
networks 20-14
priority 20-15
redistribute 20-25
retransmit interval 20-17
timers 20-16
transmit delay 20-17
virtual links 20-24, 20-31
OSPFv3
about 25-1
area configuration commands 25-10
configuration defaults 25-2
configuring 25-1
displaying information 25-29
global configuration commands 25-3
interface configuration
commands 25-21

P
Password
aging 3-6
history 3-6, 3-7
set new 3-5
setting the login 3-5
PIM-SM 20-49
Ping 14-16, 19-21
Policy Management
assigning ports 11-15
classifying to a VLAN or Class of
Service 11-7, 11-11
dynamic assignment of profiles 26-3
profiles 11-2, 11-17
policy maptable response,
about 26-52

Port Mirroring 7-36
Port Priority
configuring 12-2
Port String
syntax used in the CLI 7-1
Port Trunking 7-42
Port web authentication
configuring 26-68
Port(s)
alias 7-9
assignment scheme 7-1
auto-negotiation and advertised
ability 7-16
broadcast suppression 7-33
counters, reviewing statistics 7-4
duplex mode, setting 7-11
flow control 7-22
link flap
about 7-24
configuration defaults 7-26
configuring 7-25
link traps, configuring 7-24
MAC lock 26-60
priority, configuring 12-2
speed, setting 7-11
status, reviewing 7-2
Power over Ethernet (PoE),
configuring 5-1
Priority
OSPF 20-15
VRRP 20-45
Priority to Transmit Queue
Mapping 12-4
Prompt
in router mode 18-2
set 3-24
Protocol Independant Multicast 20-49
PWA 26-68

R
RADIUS 26-6
realm 26-8
RADIUS Filter-ID 26-3
attribute formats 26-3
RADIUS server 26-7, 26-10
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP) 9-1
Rate limiting, via CoS 11-17
Redistribute 20-9, 20-25
Related Manuals xxxv
remote port mirroring
configuring 7-40
Reset 3-50
RFC 3580 26-49
RIP
CIDR 20-7
configuration mode, enabling 20-2
configuration tasks 20-2
passive interface 20-8
redistribute 20-9
Router Mode(s)

enabling 18-2
Routing Interfaces
configuring 19-3
Routing Protocol Configuration
DVMRP 20-33
IRDP 20-37
OSPF 20-11
OSPFv3 25-1
RIP 20-2
VRRP 20-42

S
Scrolling Screens 1-9
Secure Shell (SSH) 26-80
enabling 26-80
regenerating new keys 26-81
Security
methods, overview of 26-1
Serial Port
downloading upgrades via 3-32
sFlow configuration 28-1
show system utilization cpu 3-15
SNMP
access rights 8-15
accessing in router mode 8-3
enabling on the switch 8-18
encryption protocols 8-10
MIB views 8-19
notification parameters 8-29
notify filters 8-29
security models and levels 8-2
statistics 8-3
target addresses 8-26
target parameters 8-23
trap configuration example 8-37
users, groups and communities 8-8
SNTP 14-29
Spanning Tree 9-2
backup root 9-21, 9-22
bridge parameters 9-3
features 9-2
port parameters 9-34
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP) 9-1
Split Horizon 20-7
SSL WebView 3-54
stacks
installing units 2-2
operation 2-1
virtual switch configuration 2-3
Stub Areas 20-22
Syslog 14-1
System Information
displaying basic 3-13
setting basic 3-9

T
TACACS+ configuration 27-1
Technical Support xxxvii
Telnet
disconnecting 14-17

enabling in switch mode 3-37
Terminal Settings 3-29
TFTP
downloading firmware upgrades
via 3-32
Timeout
ARP 19-15
CLI, system 3-30
RADIUS 26-7
Timers
OSPF 20-16
Traceroute
in router mode 19-22
Trap
SNMP configuration example 8-37
Tunnel Attributes
RFC 3580 RADIUS attributes 26-49
Tunnel interfaces
about 19-8
configuring 22-10

U
User Accounts
default 1-7
setting 3-2

V
Version
RIP receive 20-5
RIP send 20-4
Version Information 3-26
Virtual Links 20-24, 20-31
virtual switch, configuring 2-3
VLANs
assigning ingress filtering 10-11
assigning port VLAN IDs 10-8
authentication 26-49, 26-51
classifying to 11-7, 11-11
creating static 10-5
dynamic egress 10-17
egress lists 10-13, 26-50
enabling GVRP 10-20
forbidden ports 10-14
host, setting 10-18
ingress filtering 10-8
naming 10-6
RADIUS 26-49
secure management, creating 10-2
VRRP
configuration mode, enabling 20-42
creating a session 20-43
enabling on an interface 20-47
priority 20-45
virtual router address 20-44

W
WebView 1-2, 3-52
WebView SSL 3-54

Index -3

Index - 4



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Enterasys Networks
Create Date                     : 2009:06:12 09:46:57Z
Modify Date                     : 2009:10:07 17:39:39-04:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 8.0
Metadata Date                   : 2009:10:07 17:39:39-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Enterasys SecureStack C3 Configuration Guide
Creator                         : Enterasys Networks
Document ID                     : uuid:cd8b0fdb-44f0-4789-a47c-0454634acc49
Instance ID                     : uuid:8e18b9e5-c53e-4d18-a8f9-9131a6ceaacd
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 872

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools